This is a digital copy of a book that was preserved for generations on library shelves before it was carefully scanned by Google as part of a project
to make the world's books discoverable online.
It has survived long enough for the copyright to expire and the book to enter the public domain. A public domain book is one that was never subject
to copyright or whose legal copyright term has expired. Whether a book is in the public domain may vary country to country. Public domain books
are our gateways to the past, representing a wealth of history, culture and knowledge that's often difficult to discover.
Marks, notations and other marginalia present in the original volume will appear in this file - a reminder of this book's long journey from the
publisher to a library and finally to you.
Usage guidelines
Google is proud to partner with libraries to digitize public domain materials and make them widely accessible. Public domain books belong to the
public and we are merely their custodians. Nevertheless, this work is expensive, so in order to keep providing this resource, we have taken steps to
prevent abuse by commercial parties, including placing technical restrictions on automated querying.
We also ask that you:
+ Make non-commercial use of the files We designed Google Book Search for use by individuals, and we request that you use these files for
personal, non-commercial purposes.
+ Refrain from automated querying Do not send automated queries of any sort to Google's system: If you are conducting research on machine
translation, optical character recognition or other areas where access to a large amount of text is helpful, please contact us. We encourage the
use of public domain materials for these purposes and may be able to help.
+ Maintain attribution The Google "watermark" you see on each file is essential for informing people about this project and helping them find
additional materials through Google Book Search. Please do not remove it.
+ Keep it legal Whatever your use, remember that you are responsible for ensuring that what you are doing is legal. Do not assume that just
because we believe a book is in the public domain for users in the United States, that the work is also in the public domain for users in other
countries. Whether a book is still in copyright varies from country to country, and we can't offer guidance on whether any specific use of
any specific book is allowed. Please do not assume that a book's appearance in Google Book Search means it can be used in any manner
anywhere in the world. Copyright infringement liability can be quite severe.
About Google Book Search
Google's mission is to organize the world's information and to make it universally accessible and useful. Google Book Search helps readers
discover the world's books while helping authors and publishers reach new audiences. You can search through the full text of this book on the web
at|http : //books . google . com/
\ \ AJ^./^C:A^ L
OL-U^a-H f • -^ ■ •■ • "^ ^ >^UL O-A
."^ .
PINNEY AND ARNOULT'8
FRENCH GRAMMAR,
A VBW MSTBOO^ COMBnnNO BOTH
THE OEAL AND THEORETIC;
PABTICITLAXLT CALOXTLATED TO BJOnXB TOB
SPEAKING OF FRENCH
EAST TO LEAKNEBS OF DIFFERENT AGES AND CAPACITIES.
PBONUNCIATION OF ALL THE WORDS,
A LEXICON.
NORMAN PINNEY and EMILE ARNOULT,
NEW YORK:
PUBLISHED BY MA80ir\B'RqTHE»&
1861.
THE WEVr YORK
PUBLIC LIBRARY I
TILDTN FOUM
ON;- (
EsTEBED, according to Act of Congress, in the year 1S60, by
MASON BEOTHEKS,
In the Clerk's Office of the District Court of the United States, for the
Soatbem District of Nevf York.
JOHN 7. TROW,
nUATES, WnMXOTTPER, AKD KtaECTBOTTPSII,
4Sk 48 * 60 OrMne Btrset,
New York.
PREFACE.
Ths snperiority of the oral method for teaching the modern languages is
now so generally understood, that little need be said in its favor. Years of
experience have proved beyond all question that he who studies faithfully by
this method, with a competent teacher, can, in no great length of time, not
only translate the language which he studies, but can also write and speak it
sufficiently for all necessary purposes, — a result which can seldom, if ever, be
attained by the old methods. On this point, therefore, we need not dwell.
But there are other characteristics of the present work on which more should
be said.
It is now about twenty years since Ollendorff first published his improTe-
ment on Manesca^s System. During this time various works have appeared
on this method, which possess their merits and their use. But it is no dispar-
agement to these to say that experience calls for important improvements in
them all. Some, prepared chiefly for oral purposes, havo had too much the
character of mere phrase-books, lacking system and grammatical complete-
ness. Others again have inclined to an opposite course, and have sacrificed
much of oral ease and simplicity without attaining all that was to be desired
in point of grammar.
It is to be borne in mind that the best grammar for the French learner is
not the best grammar for the English, and that rules may bo, and very often
are, given, which, though perfectly correct, are absolutely detrimental to the
learner. A rule, for instance, on a mere common phrase which is best learned
by example, is worse than useless, as are, also, rules on those parts of the
language where the French does not differ from the English, so that the un-
aided learner can not go wrong. Such rules, by presenting an appearance of
difficulty where none exists, tend to confuse and perplex the learner, and to
draw off his attention from things of real use. On the other hand, in those
parts of the grammar where the languages differ, the rules and examples
should be fulL Too much pains can not he taken to present and illustrate
4 PREFACE.
these with clearness. Now nn ordinary French Grammar, written for the
French, is deficient in both these respects. Three-fourths perhaps of such
a work are occupied with matters on which the English learner needs do
instruction, while the remainder, where he needs all help, is passed over
with a brevity, whicli, though suflScient for the French, is entirely Inadequate
to his wants, and much, too, which Ls of vast importance to him is entirely
omitted.
This is a subject which deserves to be well considered ; for, we are apt at
first to suppose that a French Grammar, which has reputation among the
French, and is useful in their schools, must be good also for ours. But a
little reflection shows us that this is by no means so. What the English
learner chiefly needs is an explanation of the differences between the French
language and his own. These must be clearly and carefully laid before him,
and the rest ho understands as a matter of course. Now these are precisely
the points of which a foreign grammarian has no idea. They do not, and
ought not to enter the mind of a Frenchman who is preparing a book for the
schools of his own country. His sole object is to meet the wants of the
French learner, and as these differ vastly from the wants of the English
learner, his grammar of course contains much which the latter does not need,
and omits no less that he does need.* Hence, too, it is not strange that oral
methods, though designed particularly for English learners, should have more
or less of this character ; that they should contain many mles which ought to
be entirely omitted, while they pass over in silence equally much which is very
necessary to the learner.
Here, then, is the first great advantage of the present work. Combiuing,
as it does, the united care of experienced native teachers in both languages,
it will be found, we think, to unite an accurate knowledge of the idioms and
pronunciation of the French with a more perfect adaptation to the wants of
thd English learner. The lessons are comparatively short, the oral exercises
easy, and very gradually progressive ; all superfluous matter, which tends only
to perplex the learner, has been carefully avoided, while the peculiar difficul-
ties which the language presents to the English student have been still more
carefully explained. As a grammatical treatise, the improvements made in
the present work can not hero be specified in detail ; but it will be found, we
believe, on trial, to contain not only much of the ordinary g^mmatical mat-
♦ On this subject we qnote from the prcf^e of Dr. AmouU's Pronouncing Reader,
In which ho says : ** AmericaD grammars are necessary to teach the theory of the hm-
gaage, and notwithstanding some Inoocnracies (which ought to be mended in eabfiequent
editions), wo certainly prefer them for teaching Americans to any French grammars, writ-
ten In Paris solely for native learners, and reprinted in New York for the nse of American
etndents. French grammarians do not know a word of English. Their books therefore
can not contain the most necessary part, the corresponding idiomatic features of both lan-
guages. They give but one side of the subject Hence it is that the worst American gram-
mar, written for Americans, and containing the whole, Is fiir more uaefhl for teachers and
•cholars in American schools, than the best one-sided book pabllshed in Parls^*^
PREFACE. 5
ter presented in an easier form, but many useful rules and much valuable in«
struction on the use of the language, given in no previous book.
Another important advantage of the present work consists in its method
of teaching the pronunciation. This, it will be seen by examining the pre*
liminary lessons and exercises, is united with the matter taught in a peculiar
way. After the simple vowel and the consonant sounds have been given, the
words and phrases which form the oral exercises are selected and introduced
in such a way that all the vowel-sounds, and such of the consonants as require
practice, are called into use one at a time, and made familiar by repetition,
until the whole are learned. Thus, without the sacrifice of any time, and with-
out retarding in the least the learner's progress in the acquisition of words,
phrases, and grammatical principles, he Is exercised in a systematic course of
pronunciation in all its parts. It is not to be supposed that any marked pro-
nunciation can at all supply the place of the oral teacher ; but after the simple
sounds have been given by the living voice, the annotation of each new word
at the bottom of the page throughout the course, with its division into syllables
and its silent letters, must be convenient to the teacher, and of much value to
the learner.
Another advantage of the present work is its capability of abridgment
without any sacrifice of grammatical system. The French language is studied
among us by learners dlifering widely in age, talents, and attainments. Some,
too, as children, who begin it young, have ample time for its acquirement
Others, as the students in our colleges and high-schools, can give but a brief
period to the study. Now, no one book can be suited to all these various
wants without the provision of longer and shorter courses. These accordingly
are here provided in this way. At the end of each lesson, excepting a few of
the first, are given a quantity of exercises termed optional^ intended only for
fuller practice on words and rules previously introduced. At the end, too,
after the grammatical course Is completed, is a series of lessons styled supple-
mentary; while at the beginning, those called preliminary are designed merely
to facilitate the pronunciation, and make the oral exercises more gradually
progressive. By the omission, therefore, of any or all of these, at the discre-
tion of the teacher, and according to the wants of the learner, the work may
be abridged to the extent of one-half, or even more, without destroying its
completeness as a grammar, or breaking the chain of its oral exercises.
The introduction of the optional exercises is attended, also, with this fur-
ther advantage. It gives opportunity for the use of connected dialogues of
some length, on the same subject, of which they will generally be foimd to
conast. This serves not only to give more reality and interest to the dia-
logue, but to call more into exercise that class of words whose chief use is to
show the relation of sentences to each other, and which can not be so well
employed in those disconnected questions and answers which are given
merely to make exercises on certain words, or to illustrate the application of
particular rules.
The last advantage of this work which we shall specify, is the dictionary of
6 PREFACE.
all the English words into FreDch, given at the end. By the aid of this, the
learner who has forgotten the French for any English word previously given,
can recall it without resorting to the key. Learners in classes who chance
from any cause to have lost a few lessons, may by the aid of this avoid falling
behind their companions. And, as the place of introduction of each word is
marked in it, it may serve as a complete verbal index when the book is to be
consulted on the use of any term or phrase.
NORMAN riNNEY : EMILE ARNOULT.
N. B. Teachers can omit at discretion all that precedes page 65 ; as that
which follows contains the entire grammar, and presupposes a knowledge of
nothing which precedes, except the table of pronunciation, page 8.
In the marked pronunciation at the bottom of the pages, some words will
be found marked dififercntly from the general rule. These are not misprints,
but anomalous cases, whore French usage differs from the general analogy of
the language.
FEENTCH GEAMMAR
ALPHABET.
A, «, . .
. ah.
N,
n, . .
. . en.
B. b. . .
. .bay.
0.
0, .
. . 0.
0, c .
. say.
P,
P, . .
. .pay.
D, d, . .
. . day.
Q,
q, .
. . ktt.
B, e, . .
. a.
R,
r, . .
. .air.
F, f, . .
. .ef.
s,
s, .
. . ess.
6, B. • •
. jay(zhay).
T,
t, . .
. .tay.
H, h, . .
. .ash.
u,
u, .
. . u.
I. i, . .
. e.
V,
V, . .
. .vay.
J. J, . .
. .jee(zhee).
X,
X, .
. . eeks.
K, k, . .
. kah.
Y,
Ti • •
. . e-grek.
I^ 1. . .
. .el.
z.
z, •
. . zed.
M, B, . .
. em.
ACCENTS, AND OTHER SIGNS.
Thertt are throe accents in French ; the aeuU (A), the ffrave (d), and the eireun\fie» (A).
Th« aeuU aeeent is never placed over any vowel but e; as, </A The « is then always
aoonded long at the end of words.
The ffrate accent is sometimes placed over a, e, ti ; as, 2c2, pria, oik Over a and v it
marks no change ; over e it marks a change of sound.
The drcumjleao acoerU is used over any vowel except y; as, ^ge, hiU^ ipUre^hUs,
Jl&U. The vowel thus accented is long, with very few exceptions.
Tm csDiLLA is) is placed under c before a, o, u, to give it the sound of «.
Tun APOSTROPns C) marks the ellsiou of a final vowel before another vowel or silent h ;
as, Vanimal^ for 2e animal ; rhomme^ for le homme.
Elision takes place in the following words : ce, de^ je, ki^ U, tne, fi«, qus^ det que.jtU'
qtUy paree qu4^ lou que ; also in loreque, pui^ue, and quotque, before </, iU, eUe^ ellea^ en,
cm, «n, fine ; In enire and preaque when compounded with other words, as entr" aider,
prt9qu^ tie; in quelque before un and avire, as quelqiC un ; in H before t7, iU. Ecfin bo
elided or not before tiaa, elU, Eot grande is always elided in grands mire, grand* tanU,
grands chatnbre^ grand* ckoae, grand" eroix, grand* mewt, and flroqnently In gran^ peine,
grand" peur, gran<C pUU, and grandP honte, when not immediately preceded by an article
or pronominal adjective.
Oe, <fe, 20, suffer no elbion before ouiy onze, huit, and derivatives; aSf U oui,dshuitd
oiue^ ce OTwUms chapUre.
DuEKssn (") is placed over e, i, u, to indicate that the foregoing vowel is to be Bounded
separately; as, ambigui, laiqtie, J^saii.
Tns nrrtaa (•) is used to connect words or syllables ; as, aprSs-midi,
PBONTKCUnON.
SIMPLE VOWEL SOIDfDa
'fiit, soonded as
a in oA, represented b v |
A
a in arm.
^'!r.*°^ "
tffi in encore,
tt in ttf.
■G>'a
t in «66,
e! i.
a in faie.
E
Pi*.
V6,
ai in oir,
« in ibAav,
rteo.
ttinttf.
r *'^* , r
eugh in eu^Ar,
,h!eu (before r).
t> in sir.
I
i in jfiqittj
ee in ««/,
\14. in, luuial, "
aft in anchcr.
'l^o,
o'mnoi.
m o (before r%
aw in aiw,
iV^o,
oin no,
0
Ifi'r "
ouinyou.
20^oi,§
oo in mooif,
tra in watAj
^2Lon,,iia«al, "
on in wrong.
U-
u in 9tie«n,
u in queen.
:d
.24 un,t nasal, "
uhng.
a,ea, a
OH, en, 4BH, tm, tun,
e, ve, etc. *
e, e, et, er, est, etc. •
e, ai. Mi, eg, er, etc. *
e, £*, ex, er, aie, etc *
e, ai, ne, '
en, oeu, oei, *
eik, oeu, eue, eu, *
eu, oeu, '
», ««» y. *
«, y» »^, *
in, im, ain, dn, ym, yen, *■
o, oi, '
o, au, eo, ao, *
6, au, eau, *
ou, aou, oil, '
ou, oue, *
oi, oy, voi, oie, ua, *
on, om, aon, '
u,eu, •
ti, ii«, uie, *'
Vn, «i», f MH, '
Bevakk. — F 18 generally sounded as t ; between two Towels it is soonded
as i i, forming two syllables. A cipher over e niarisa that it is entirely mlent.
* ThU 8<mnd is dlstiDgnished from eu by being pronouncod like « in (A« before a con-
■oiiant, M tUe man.
JSatthe end of a word, at the end of a syllable after a alngle consonant, and in combioa-
0 0 0
tiona, Is often sUent; as, eaU, gelera, nemsU.
t E followed by a consonant In the same syllable, and i at the beginning or in the mid-
dle of a word, hare commonly tbis sound.
t Ek and un hare no rery near representative eonnda in English, and leqaire the
cqwdal instmction of the teacher.
S (H has the nature of a compoond sound made up of the 15 and 1. In several in-
stances, also, the soands marked above with different figures may consist of the same do-
ments, differing only In quantity and oombinationa.
PRONDirCIATIOSr.
SIMPLE SOUNDS ILI.USTRATED.
1
a»
la.
ma.
bal.
sa.
rat.
place,
orgeat.
2
baa,
gras,
mat.
tas.
ftge.
ame.
b&te,
nageAt.
3
f"»
banc,
blanc,
en.
camp.
temps,
Jean,
tante.
4
je.
ce.
de,
le.
me.
que,
se.
ne.
5
est.
es, 6dit,
met.
net.
clocber,
papier.
chef,
bref.
6
bl6,
cl^.
d6,
g»i6.
j'ai.
Dey,
ranger,
chez.
^
mdre.
p^re,
cher,
ces,
des.
mer,
Agnez,
craie.
8
bleme,
meme,
b6te.
tete,
maitre.
chaine.
en quote,
d'etre.
9
bleu.
peut.
neof.
jeu.
boeuf,
oeuf.
ceil.
seul. Evrope
10
jeiine,
ceui,
creux,
VOBUX,
bcBufs,
oeufs.
eux.
queue.
11
pcnr,
ardeur,
rigeur,
nageur,
moeurs,
tucur,
terreur,
meurs.
12
d«,
lis.
lit,
prix.
oui.
gui.
y.
U.
13' dime,
gite,
lie.
prie,
Bcie,
vie,
cocyte,
amie.
U
Hn,
vin.
imba,
pain.
saint.
sein.
nymphe,
moyen.
15
col.
bol.
pot.
notre,
oignon,
poignet,
mode,
noce.
16
fort.
Tor,
mort,
tort,
maure.
aural,
George,
Sa^ne.
17
ddme,
mole.
ndtre,
faux.
reau,
duo,
vos.
gros.
18
bout,
fou.
coup,
aoAt,
oA,
tout,
TOUS,
cou.
19
Tofite,
boue,
foule.
loue.
roue.
coude.
ours.
Boute.
20
bois,
dots.
roi.
toit.
loyal,
quoi.
noicy
quadrupdde.
21
bon,
long,
rond,
oncle.
nom,
ombre,
taon.
ongle.
22
bu,
lu,
vu.
8ur,
tu.
sut.
eu,
j^eus.
23
bue,
lue.
Tue,
stir,
mOp,
mflre.
plue,
juge.
24
un.
brnn.
chacun,
humble,
parfum,
jeun,
d6funt.
Huns.
DIPHTHONGS.
ai as in maU.
lA
iC
diacre.
ie
It
moiti6.
id
it
lumidre.
lai
ct
biais.
of
<(
lot
eoi
IC
Tillageois.
ouai
II
ouais.
oin
11
soin.
ouin
II
baragouin
ooi
i(
Louis.
ue
<l
^cuelle.
io
1*
pioche.
ien as
ien **
ian "
ieu "
ion "
iou "
oe "
ouan"
ua "
one "
ui "
uin "
in rien.
patience,
yiande.
Dieu.
occasion,
chiourme.
moelle.
louango.
6quateur.
ouest.
lui.
join.
10 rRONUNCIATION.
CONSONANT SOUNDS.
Consonants, when not silent, arc pronoanced as in English, with the fol-
lowing exceptions :
C, before a, o, u, has the sound of A;, as cap^ col, cuve; before e, t, that
of 8, as ccci ; p is only used before a, o, «, and has the sound of «, as
fa, Icron^ ?*cft/.
D, F. At the end of a word, and preceding another word beginning with
a Towcl or silent A, d has the sound of ty and / of t> ; as, grand ami,
grand homme, neuf annees.
O, before e, »', y, has the sound of 8 in pleasure, as dge, gite, g^se; be-
fore a, 0, u, and the liquids /, n, r, it has the hard sound, as gant,
gond, aigu. When final, and followed by a word beginning with a
Yowel, it has the sound of k, as rang eleve. It generally forms a liquid
Round with n. (See liquid sounds, below.)
n is said to be aspirated in words which do not require or admit of any
elision of a vowel preceding them, and not aspirated (or silent) in words
which require such elision. Thus h is aspirated in le hommard, and not
aspirated (or silent) in IfJiomme, It is hardly ever sounded in French.
J has the sound of 5 m pleasure; Qa,jalouXjjeu,joue.
L is sometimes liquid (see liquid sounds), otherwise it is sounded as in
English.
Q is always followed by u. They are commonly sounded like k ; as, que,
question. Sometimes qu is sounded as in English ; as, quadrupede,
R is pronounced stronger than in English, and is always sounded as r in rose,
S. A single s between two vowels, and s final before a word beginning
with a vowel, has the sound ofz; as, rose, pas icu
T before ion., ial, iel, and before t in a few other cases, has the sound of s ;
as, action, martial, partiel. In the final syllable tie, t has the sound of
s, when preceded by a vowel, in all words except chdtie or a past parti-
ciple ; as, demoeratie, thhcratie,
X alone, or after e at the beginning of a word, when followed by a vowel,
has the sound of gz, as Xerces, examen ; in a few words it has the
sound of s, as soixanie, six, dix, dix-sept, Bruxelles, X final is silent
when preceded by a diphthong or compound vowel, in words pronounced
alone or preceding a consonant or aspirated h ; as, paix, maux, choix,
jaloux, aux livres, aux hiros, deux mille. Before c it is always sounded
like A:, as in excite, etc. At the end of a few words, when preceding an-
other word beginning with a vowel or h not aspirated, and in most
compound numerals, x has the sound of z ; as, dtux enfanta, six ans,
dix homines, dix-huit, dix-neuf, also in deuxieme, sixieme, dixieme, and
their derivatives. In other cases it is sounded as in English.
PRONUNCIATION. H
W does not properly belong to the French alphabet. It ia used only in
words adopted from foreign languages, and then takes, in some words,
the sound which it has in those languages ; as, loAt^, whiskeyf whist,
Wiuhington, Wellington, Walter Scott. The French generally sound it
LIQUID SOUNDS.
On is generally liquid in French, in which case it has the sound of m in
onum ; as, mignon. In a few words gn is pronounced as in magnate,
L,Uj in the middle or at the end of a word, when preceded by t, have
usually the sound of gli in teraglio, or Hi in brilliant. They are pro-
nounced by manf JFxenchmen also with the sound of y in yoke.
TEfiMINATIONS IN ZH AND ^R
In English we pronounce the terminations le, re, like td, tir, as if the con-
sonant were placed last. Care must be taken to aToid this pronunciation in
French as very harsh and erroneous. Such syllables must be pronounced as
follows :
fre as fru in frustrate.
ble as blu in blush.
bre
bru
brush.
cle
clu
clung.
ere
cm
crumb.
dre
dru
drum.
fie
flu
flung.
glo
glu
glum.
gre
gru
grum.
pie
plu
plum.
pre
pru.
tre
tru
trumi
As, InUe, candelabre, acre, camphre, tnonatre^ t/Udtre.
IiiPORTAKT Beuabk. — S IS ucTcr sUent in French, when two consonants are
to be found before it : at the end of words, the three letters form a plain, dis-
tinct half-aueUble sound, as in all the above final syllables ; and, in the middle
of words, the e is articulated mfuU sound yrith the last of the foregoing conso-
nants, as in distinetxment, par/iment, paWiront, gouyemsment, etc.
PRELIMINARY LESSONS.
PRONOUNCING.
E. FOURTH BODim.
4. E sounded as it in tu; Fourth Sound.
J^'
I.
4
le,
the.
me,
me.
ce,
this or that
te,
thee.
que,
what.
86,
one's self.
de, .
of.
C.
£ sounded
as a in fate; Sixth Sound.
Cllorclef
. key.
c
fte.
fairy.
bl6,
wheat.
thd,
tea.
d6,
thimble.
geai,
jay.
gu6,
ford.
j^ai,
I have.
ii6, n6e,
bora.
jesaiP,
I know.
5.
E sounded
use in ebb ; Fifth
Sound.
and
7.
^ sounded
as ai in air; Seventh Sound.
Bee,
beak.
T 0
baie,
bay.
bel,
handsome.
craie,
chalk.
chef,
chief.
vraic,
true.
net,
clean.
b^gue,
stutterer.
effet,
effect.
cdde.
yields.
jet,
throw.
cher,
dear.
dette,
debt.
fraisc.
strawberry.
quel,
what.
vaine,
vain.
godet,
small cup.
crdme.
cream.
poulet,
chicken.
g^le.
freezes.
parapet,
parapet.
zde,
zeaL
8.
£ sounded
as 0 in where ; Eighth Sound.
t 0
Bdche,
spade.
• 0
pfiche.
peach.
b^te,
flfiimi^l,
qu6te.
search.
bldme,
sallow.
tdte.
head.
f4te,
festival.
v6te.
clothes.
mdme.
same.
maitre,
master.
* When a flgnre or mark of eoand is placed orer a vowel f n the followins colamns, H la
meant to apply luso to Uie words placed immediately under it in the same eoiomn, as 4 here
appllea also to « in m«, te, and bo on.
PRELIMINARY LESSONS.
13
SENTENCES.
4 • S 4 7
Ce d6 est de fer.
4 • • 7
Ce h\6 est cner.
s r f 7
Ce lait est frais.
5 • 7 0 6 7 0
Cette crdme est fraiche.
so 7 0 C CO
Cette fndse est belle.
S t » * 0
Cette £&te est belle.
S 7 • 7 7
Cest Tni, c^est tr^yrai.
4 7 4 S 0 7 0
Je fais le m6me thSxne.
4 7 4 S
Que fait le chef?
47 4 7044 I
Qoe fait le fr^re de ce chef P
This thimble is of iron.
This wheat is dear.
This milk is cooL
This cream is cool.
This sirawberry is handsome.
This festiral is beautiful.
It is true, it is Terj true.
I do the same exercise.
What does the chief?
What does the brother of that chief?
A, FIKST SOUND.
1. A sounded Baa'mah; First Sound.
1
A,
has.
1 0
balle,
ball.
•»,
hast
calme,
calm.
b»l.
hflll
lady.
c«p.
cape.
face,
face.
chat.
cat.
cage,
cage.
plat,
dish.
femme,
ma,
my.
dalle,
flag-stone.
!«,
the.
salle,
hall.
fat,
fop.
malle,
trunk.
Anp,
cloth.
dard.
dart.
2. A sounded as a in arm; Second Sound.
•Ag^,
age.
t 0
pAte,
dough.
»me,.
souL
plAtre,
plaster.
Ute,
haste.
bas.
low.
Uche,
loose.
gnw.
fat
mile.
male.
tas.
pile.
pile.
. pale.
m&t.
mast
12. I sounded as t in
pique; Twelfth Sound.
Am?,
fiiend.
n
dit.
said.
a,
he.
file.
row, file.
are.
wax.
lime,
file.
bto.
brown.
mille.
thousand.
CO,
eye -lash.
pUe,
pUe.
ten.
qmtte,
free, discharged.
lit,
bed.
rime.
rhyme.
14
PRELIMINARy LESSONS.
IS II
pis, worse. souiis, mooae.
prix, price. si, if.
qui, who. bAti, built,
riz, rice. Biz, six.
13. t sounded ma ee in eel; Thirteenth Sound.
(Also ie, y.)
Lie,
dregs.
dime.
Uthe.
flcie,
saw.
gifcet
home.
vie,
life.
ile,
island.
15.
0 sounded as (» in
not; Fifteenth Sound ; and
16.
0 sounded as ato in awe; Sixteenth Sound.
u
Botte,
boot.
14 0
encore.
again.
code.
code.
dore,
gilds.
folle.
crazy.
Georges,
George.
mode.
mode.
maure,
Moor.
uoce.
wedding.
corps.
body.
sotte,
foolish.
bord.
edge.
d6vot.
devout.
fort.
strong.
col,
neck.
nord,
north.
bol,
bowl.
tort,
wrong.
vol,
theft.
mort.
dead.
17.
0 sounded as o in no; Seventeenth Sound.
IT
C6tc,
coast.
IT 0
d6me,
dome.
gros,
big.
m61e.
mole.
no8,
we.
r6Ie,
roU.
V08,
you.
rose.
rose.
peau,
skin.
t6le.
sheet-iron.
r6t.
roast.
cause.
cause.
flot,
wave.
psaume,
psalm.
tdt,
soon.
sauce,
sauce.
beau,
handsome.
sauge,
sage.
eau.
water.
gcole.
jaa.
SENTENCES.
4 11
1
Le chat est 1^.
The cat is there.
4 1*
Le drap est
4 IS
•
;sec.
The cloth is dry.
Le plat est 4 sa
place.
The dish is m its pUce.
Le tas de sacs est lA.
CO rot so
Cette daine est grasse.
4 0 10 4 V 0
Cette salle est belle.
The pile of bags is there.
That doe is fat.
That hall is beautiful.
PREUMINART LESSONS.
15
4 1 1 « I
Le cbat a le rat
4 S 1 1 10
Le chef a la malle.
110 14 <
La dame a le the.
» 0 1 oil 6
Cette femme a la clef.
« 1 6 17 i S
Ce chat est gros et gras.
i0t06 17 0 4
Cette b6te est grosse ct grasse.
Cl 704110
JTai la craie de la dame.
• IfOftlB 0
«rai la pelle et la bdchc.
0 110 4 4 0
J^ai la cage de ce geai.
oil 04001
J^ai la bague de cette femmc.
39 1 4 1 « 1
11 a le dard et Tare.
IS 1 4 U 4 4 ft
II a le lit de ce chef.
U 1 1 U 1 10 0
11 a la scie et la corde.
4 • 1 4 17 0 u
Le chef a le pot et le bol.
1 1 0 I 1 17 0
La dame a la rose.
UllUO 41 1 0
Qui a la cire de la dame ?
U 0 1 1 U 0
Georges a la cire.
IS 1 4 17 17
Qui a le beau seau ?
li 0 1 4 17 • 4 17 17
Georges a le seau et le gros pot.
The cat has the rat.
The chief has the trunk.
The lady has the tea.
That woman has the key.
That cat is big and fat.
That animal is big and fat.
I have the chalk of the lady.
I have the shovel and the spade. '
I have the cage of that jay.
I have the jeweled ring of that woman.
He has the dart and the bow.
lie has the bed of that chief.
He has the saw and the cord.
The chief has the pot and the bowl.
The lady has the rose.
Who has the wax of the lady ?
George has the wax.
Who has the handsome bucket f
George has the bucket and the big pot.
U. TWENTY-SECOND SOUND.
22. 27 sounded as u in ^ue^n; Twenty-second Sound.
a
Ba,
drunk.
SS 0
butte,
hiU.
but,
aim.
chut!
hush!
do.
of the.
plume,
feather.
la.
read.
tu,
thou.
no.
naked.
cu.
had.
80,
known.
sur,
on.
23.
U Eoanded as u
prolonged -, Tvrenty-third Soand.
Si
SS 0
E&t,
had.
biiche,
log.
m6r,
ripe.
flate,
flute.
sAr,
sure.
miire,
, mulberry.
bue,
drunk.
juge,
judge.
lue.
read.
tue,
kills.
sue.
known.
ruse,
craft.
16
PEELIHINABT LESSONS.
9.
. Eu sounded as v in im; Ninth
Sound, and
11
. Eu sounded as i in Hr ; Eleventh Sound.
Bleu,
blue.
9 0
jeune,
young.
feu,
fire.
peuple,
people.
jeu,
game.
beurre,
butter.
seul,
alooe.
peur,
fear.
boeuf,
beef.
meurs,
die.
oeuf,
egg.
mceurs,
1 11
mannerst
neuf,
nine.
labeur,
labor.
veuf.
widower.
ardeur,
ardor.
peux,
can.
nageur,
swimmer.
veux.
will.
10.
E^ sounded as evLgh in eughr ;
Tenth Sound.
10 0
10 M
Jeiine,
fast.
jeudi,
Thursday.
deux,
two.
bOBU/f,
oxen.
enx.
them.
oeu/».
eggs.
peu.
little.
creux,
hollow.
18. Ou sounded as in you; Eighteenth Sound, and
19. (XI sounded as (w in mood; Nineteenth Sound.
U
190
Bouc,
be-goat.
boule,
baU.
bout,
end.
coude,
elbow.
aodlt,
August.
moule,
mold.
coup,
blow.
poule,
hen.
cour,
yard.
toute,
aU.
dottx,
sweet.
Totlte,
vault.
nous,
we, us.
boue,
mud.
B0U8,
under.
roue.
wheel.
tout.
all.
foule,
multitude.
V0U8,
you.
roue,
rolls.
20.
Oi sounded
as tra in wash ; Twentieth Sound.
B^is,
wood.
W 0
boite.
box.
doit.
finger.
droite.
right
moi.
tome.
noir,
black.
roi,
king.
pois,
pea.
foi,
faith.
loi,
SENTENCES.
law.
_• a M 4 T
JTai bu tout le lait.
• tl M U 0 7
J'ai eu du beurre frais.
• , M 1 • • 4 so
•Tai vu la b(kche de chtoe.
I have drunk all the milk.
I have had some fresh butter.
I have seen the log of oak.
PRELIMINABT LESSONa
17
m 0 a a 4 a o
n a bu du nM de mures.
niaauc a uo
II a ea du riz et da beurre.
aia4 » «o u
II a Til le bsuf et le bouc.
• «iaU47 4 111
£lle a bu tout le lait de sa soeur.
ftoiai uoa 4 a
£Ue a Tu la poule sur le mur.
soiaiiso 10
Elle a eu sa robe bleue.
Moiai aof 0
Georges a eu la plume neuye.
1 tei oiaiiyo
La jeone femme a eu la rose.
1 lOlBl 8 0 »0
La dame a eu la p6che mCLre.
4 • f If a •
Ce th6 est trop 8ucr6.
1 HOC IB 0 IS
La poule est sous le lit.
1 10 • a c f t
La queue du geai est bleue.
luot ai 90
La corde est sur la meule.
4 1 9 S •
Ce drap bleu est neuf.
4 17 • i • I !•
Ce gros bceuf est jeune et fort.
4 10 ft 7 a
Ce noeud est tr^s-dur.
U « M 4 17 0
Qui est sous ce dome ?
4 17 0 4 17 17
Ce dome est haut et beau.
• aiuoa4i7
J*ai vu la cire sur le pot.
ttiai aoiB 4 17)
n a TU ma plume sous le seau. V
• iaU4 754 UO
Elle a eu tout le lait et le beurre.
He has drunk some mulberry juice.
He has had some rice and some butter.
He has seen the ox and the he-goat.
She has drunk all the milk of her sister.
She has seen the hen on the wall.
She has had her blue gown.
George has had the new pen.
The young woman has had the rose.
The lady has had the ripe peach.
This tea is too sweet.
The hen is under the bed.
The tail of the Jay is blue.
The rope is on the grindstone.
This blue cloth is new.
That big ox is young and strong.
This knot is very hard.
Who is under that dome ?
That dome is high and handsome.
I (have seen) saw the wax on the pot.
He (has seen) saw my pen under the
bucket.
She has had all the milk and the butter.
NASAL SOUNDS.
3. An sounded as en in eTicore ; Third Sound.
s
An,
year.
banc,
bench.
blanc,
white.
en.
in.
flanc.
flank.
Jean,
John.
14.
In sounde
14
Daim,
deer.
faim,
hunger
lin.
flax.
pain,
bread.
S 0
tante,
tente,
yente,
paon,
sang,
temps,
aunt.
tent.
sale.
pea-fowl.
blood.
time.
saint.
In sounded as an in anchor; Fourteenth Sound.
14 0
peintre, painter.
crainte, fear.
mainte, many.
nymphe, nymph,
sound. sein, bosom,
holy. yin, wine.
18
PRELIMINARY LESSONS.
21. On sounded as <?» in 9ong ; Twenty-first Sound,
n 21 0
BoDf good. monde, world,
long, long. ronde, round,
rond, round. honte, shame,
done, then. ombre, shadow,
font, make. taon, breeze-fly.
24. Tin sounded as un in uhng ; Twenty-fourth Sound.
84
Un,
brun,
Huns,
• 34
d6funt,
a, one.
brown.
Huns.
deceased.
(Also um^ eun,)
1 u
chacun,
parfum,
24 0
humble,
jeiin,
each one.
perfume.
humble.
fast
SENTENCES.
s 1 M n 3
Jean a un long banc.
4 14 « d ft a
Ce pain est blanc et bon.
6 22 24 17 S
JVi vu un beau paon.
12 1 32 94 17 9 24
U a vu un gros bopuf hrun.
4 1 4 14 ft 7 3
Ce champ de lin est tr^s-grand.
21 7 0 1 22 13 14
Mon p^re a du fil fin.
• 22 22 14 IS
J'ai bu du Tin doux.
4 0 ft 14 4 2
Ce boeuf est plein de sang.
21 21 ft 21 0 10
Son gond est long et fort.
n 1 21 ft 7 21
Mon plat rond est trds-bon.
4 244 8 17 Oft 17
Jje plan de ce grand dome est beau.
4 21 4 2 ft 22 21 2
Le nom de Jean est sur son banc.
John has a long bench.
This bread is white and good.
I have seen a beautiful peacock.
He has seen a big broton ox.
This field of flax is very large.
My father has some fine thread.
I have drunk some sieeet wine.
This ox is full of blood.
His hinge is long and strong.
My round dish is very good.
The plan of that large dome is fine.
The name of John is on his bench.
LIQUID BOUNDS.
On sounded as ni in onion; ZZ or Z as lli
in brilliant
12 0 12 0
Dignc, worthy. bille,
cygne, swan. fille,
ligne, line. grille,
signc, sign. quille,
vigne, vine. vrille,
marble.
girl.
grate.
ninepin.
gimlet.
peigne, comb. gril.
gridiron.
rbgne, reign. treille,
Avignon, Avignon. veille,
trellis,
watch.
PREUMINART LESSONS.
19
SENTENCES.
4 13 0 T e U 17
he cYgne r^inie sur Teau.
«oiso» 7 i«o
Cette b'gne est tres forte.
1S14 7 0 4*0190
Qui a le peignc de cette fiUc ?
luoa iiai la o
La fille du chef a un cjgne.
IISO* 124 710
La Tigne est sur le treillagc.
4 t S 0' 1 X 0
Le bosuf mange la paille.
110 5 S2 4 IS
La caille est sur le gril.
110» U170
La paille est sous la treiUe.
40 uo 7M13 0
Cette fille fait un signe.
ISl 11304 lUO
Qui a ma yrille ct ma ligne ?
MO* u 0 ss ll
Georges est digue du prix.
isiioai u 18 luo
II signe son nom sous la ligne.
The swan reigns on the water.
That line is vcrj strong.
Who has the comb of that girl ?
The daughter of the chief has a swan.
The Tine is on the trellis.
The ox cats the straw.
The quail is on the gridiron.
The straw is under the trellis.
That girl makes a sign.
Who has my gimlet and my line ?
George is worthy of the prize.
He signs his name under the line.
W0ED3 CONTAINING DIPITTnONGS.
Ul 4
Diacre,
deacon.
diable,
devil.
fiacre,
hack.
ficr,
to trust.
fiez,
trust.
biais,
slant
fiais,
trusted.
fi^r.
proud.
ciel,
sky.
Dieu,
10
pieu,
God.
stake.
Tieux,
10
lieue,
old.
league.
cieux,
uo
fiolc.
skies,
vial.
viol,
violation.
1*1 0
moellc,
1
poelc,
po6mc,
7
podte,
IBl
fouet,
291 0
nuage,
nu6e,
bluet,
fluct,
11
lueur,
sucur,
IS IS
buis,
nuit,
puis,
u
suic.
marrow.
stove.
poem.
poet.
whip.
cloud.
cloud.
blue-bottle,
thin.
light,
sweat.
box-wood.
night,
then.
soot.
4 tit 0 * 13 10
Ce diacre est pieux.
4 Itl 0 * UO
Le fiacre est vieux.
4 U» * 0
Le ciel est bleu.
uoio u a 17 7 uo
Dicu voit tout du haut €lea cieux.
4 10 14 S) 4 »
Je vois un toit de hois.
4 ft S U7 » a*
Ce chef est fier et cruel.
SENTENCES.
That deacon is pious.
The hackney-coach is old.
The sky is blue.
God sees all from the height of the skies.
I see a roof of wood.
That chief is proud and cruel.
20
PEEUMINART LESSONa
a KM ai • »
11 voit un nuage noir.
1 uuo • sa 4 » n ssn
La fiole est sur le toit du puits.
<a4U80 4 4 U7 0
<rai lu le po6me de ce po^te.
4uif 6 auio
Le fouet est prds du po61e.
4 au f iixk uii
Ce buis est bien joU.
4 sii s 6 4 an
Je suis tranpe de sueur.
He sees a black cloud.
The Tiol is on the roof of the welL
I have read the poem of that poet.
The whip is Dear {of) the stove.
That box-wood is very pretty.
I am tof < through with sweat.
PROMISCUOUS SENTENCES.
4U1S a 41 17
Le forcat est dans le cachot.
4 U a • 14 4 1 uc
Ce tiroir est plein de papier.
a ISM uu ir 1 ~iT
Void un bien beau tableau.
UU 4 1 17 i 7 « 17
Qui, ce tableau est vraiment beau.
• a 4 ait a « u s
J\ii vu Ic fruit du paysan.
4uiiia nil
Le voleur a pris mon tabac.
4 18 17 1 7 f a 14
Ce nouveau laquais est mutin.
ai4 11»5 4 1 17
YoilA le rabot et le marteau.
escM 4u a«
•Tai mange un melon tnuaque.
4 ai95 t 18 7 4 an
Ce murier est couvcrt de fruit.
aio iiin 70
Gustave va k la fontaine.
4 U IS 01 as OS 8 0
Co droguiste a une lancette.
4 U708 7 14ao
Le notaire est trds-injuste.
ii8ao4ia8 < no
La fortune de la duchesse est erande.
• u 1 a 0 °
J^ai pris Tardoise.
4 18 S 81M lU*
Le boulanger a un flageolet.
4 OlS S S C 1SI4 14 IS C
Ce petit enfant est bien indiscret.
4in 15 10 41U)8S
Le garcon paresseux sera iirnorant.
4 IS If S 41M 18 $°S 1
Ce colonel sera un jour c^n6ral.
8010S010S 7
Cette allemandc parle francais.
4 aiss 1 7 a 0 a 0
Ce voilier a fait une voile.
4 18 laU 17 18 4 17
Le balayeur balaie avec le balai.
47 sissiaaiso a7
Le ferblantier a du cuivre et du fer.
4 1 8 1914 1 1 188 n IS 0
Ce gaUrien a avou6 son crime.
n 4 1SIS8 8 1 8 4 aia
Mon cerisier est charge de fruit.
4 1 1S1S8 110 1 a 0 a
Ce jardinier travaille adroitement.
The convict is in the dungeon.
That drawer is full of paper.
Here is a very fine picture.
Yes, this picture is truly fine.
I have seen the fruit of the country-
The thief has taken my tobacco.
That new lackey is stubborn.
There are the plane and the hammer.
I have eaten a musiCrmelon.
That mulberry tree is covered with
fruit.
Gustavus goes to the fountain.
That druggist has a lancet.
The notary is very unjust.
The fortune of the duchess is large.
I have taken the slate.
The baker has a flageolet.
That little boy is very indiscreet.
That lazy boy will be ignorant.
This colonel will be one day general.
That German woman speaks French.
That sailmaker has made a sail.
The sweeper sweeps with the broom.
The tinman has some copper and some
iron.
That gallcy-slave has confessed his
crime.
My cherry-tree is loaded with fruit.
That gardener works skilfully.
PRELIMINABY LESSONS.
21
«M8 t 4iose
he pain est dans le garde-manger.
40]aint n iiio
Ce petit garcoQ est mon camarade.
isai 701S ossiaos
II d^cach^ie la lettre furtivement.
«U7 4 UU9UIS0S
Je connais ce monsieur intimement.
11SIS7 0 18 0 iiaos
La rividre coule rapidement.
The bread Is in the pantrj.
That little boy is my comrade.
He unseals the letter stealthily.
I know that gentleman intimately.
The river flows rapidly.
FINAL CONSONANTS SOUNDED ON A FOLLOWING VOWEL
When a word, ending with a eonsooBiit, precedes one begliniiog with a Towel or an A
not aspirated, tho two are often connected Id pronunciation, though no rule but euphony
can be given for making or avoiding the connection.
In the following sentences the mark w is used to denote such a connection, in which
ease d is sounded m /; / as « ; o, gr, and ^, as t; » and cb as c, and final oonsonanta which
are naturally silent, in such cases are sounded upon the following vowel.
• SS 115U0
Get enfant ra k F^cole.
S^^U 0 5 SMI UU5
Get faomme est dans un cabriolet.
♦'^^n « » 1 M*^» s u IS s
Le prix de cet habit est exorbitant.
IS 1 S 1 U~0 1 S ^1JU6
II apprend k lire avec facility.
4 0 U S^~^S $ 7 14 5 S S
Ge petit enfant est tr^s-int6ressant.
issT'siai s^^iio
Tons 6te8 6videmment malade.
4 t y S*^ B 11 IS S 5 4
Gela est un bonheur inetph'k
IB 1^ 11 it's 0 IS
NoQs allons h hi boulangcrie.
s If s*^ u u 0 s
Xentends un bourdonnement.
5 U^7S» s IISO
Get homme fait une extravagance.
1^^ Ills 4^ IS OS ISllS
La maladie de cet homme est imagi-
7 0 "- "^
naire.
4 1 t 11S17SS00S
Ge marchand agit frauduleiisement.
IS 1 SSUSi 0^4S1 issio s
n traduit une le^on litt^ralement.
5 S s''^ 1 1 0 IS 18 10 0 s
Get enfant travalUe vigoureusement.
4^^B 4 IS 0 s 1 lawu s
Je mets le livre dans la biblioth^que.
S 1 1 S ISISU S 7 1 S
Get acad^micien est tr^-savant.
i^U 0 1 IS M IS 1 4 s
Get homme agit honorablement.
IS ^ 4 1 S 13 iSu «
Utkde la sensibility
^IS 1 SI IS 17 »
Nous allons k cet hdtel
1«^ IS ^1 iT'lS 1 4 s
Yous ^crivez abominablement.
S^ •**i057U14S
Get homme parle d^nusonnablement.
That child goes to school.
That man is in a gig.
The price of that coat Is exorbitant.
He learns to read with facility.
That little child la very interesting.
You are evidently sick.
That is an unhopedfor happiness.
We are going to the baker^s shop.
I hear a buzzing.
That man commits an extravagance.
The sickness of that man is imaginary.
That merchant acts fraudulently.
He translates a lesson literally.
That child works vigorously.
I put the book in the library:
That academician is very learned.
That man acts honorably.
He has (some) sensibility.
We go to that hotel.
You write abominably.
That man speaks unreasonably.
22
PRELIMINARY LESSONS.
£kt is silent la the third person plural otTerbs; but then the preceding letter shoold
be Deealiarly eonnded : if a rowel, it is loriff: If a consonant, it must be very distinctly
•^ ' 18 6 a IS M
heard ; as, Ss rien^ (th^ laugh), Us ^tadi^fU (they stady) ; ils contend (they relate), ils
I
parent (they adorn), etc
£nt 1b sounded as in nasal in the third person Hngular of the yerbs tbhix and vxkik,
IS 14 1316 a 1314
and all their derivatlyes, as, II tien^ (ho holds), il yient (he comes), il convien^ (he agrees, or
it is suitable), etc
£kt, in all other cases, has the sound of en nasal, as patient (patient), agen< (agentX
1 s
parent (relation), etc.
IT IS iiao IS u
Nos agents Aglsaeni pour nous.
M l^ S O"^ 4 8S1S 0 1 S 4 1 S
lis axgenient le cuivre avec de Targent.
yis on 0 uis
Ces hommes compt^n/ leur argent.
y 1 s 10 11 t'^^s
Les parents parent leurs enfants.
7 8 13 9 0 12 0 18 1 IS '
Ces presidents president tour d tour.
7 1* 0 U158 MUO"*^ 18 S
Les hommes vioUnta violent souvent
les lois.
u n la 14 IS SI ISO ii i u
11 convient quUls convient leurs amis.
11 SS 7 111 134 60
II pressent les malheurs qui Ic pressent.
11 1 13 1 5 5 17 19 6 4
lis admir^nt la generosity de
^*^ » 15 0
cet homme.
UlSllSo 7 ISIISO
lis ^indient les matbSmatiques.
7^M« 111 a 55108
Les ttsurpateura sont g6n6ralement
"^566
detestds.
IS 5 93130 11 4 U 5 IS 1 S
lis 6tudie»t leurs lemons negUgemment. They study their lessons negligently.
A single « between two yowels has the sound of «, except in a few compound words,
but M, and a (single) between two consonants or between a vowel and a consonant, are
sounded as «s in hlisa.
Our agents act for us.
They plate the copper with {wme)
silver.
Those men count their money.
The parents adorn their children.
These presidents preside by turns.
Violent men often Tiokte the law.
It is suitable that they invite their
friends.
He foresees the misfortunes which
press him.
They admire the generosity of that
man.
They study the mathematics.
Usurpers are generally detested.
Baiter, to Idss,
3 0
baxc, baae,
3 0
ca.Ye, hut,
17 0
chose, thing,
18 14
coutin, cousin,
7 «
baisser, to lower.
baMC,
3 0
casse,
1 0
chaise,
la 14
coussin,
low.
breaks,
hunt,
cushion.
desert, desert,
90 SI
poison, poison,
17 0
rose,
S3 0
ruse,
rose,
artifice,
IS "
dessert, dessert.
90 31
poisson, fish.
U 0
rosse, jade.
33 0
russo, Russian,
iwa - - —
observation, abstraction.
The addition of s to an adjective or past participle ending with a consonant, causes that
consonant to be sounded. The addition of a (or any other vowel-wunft) causes also the
syllables an^ an^in^on^ im, to lose their nasal sound.
PBEUMmABY LESSONS.
28
17
ch&nd,
^troit,
s»
froid,
n
413
petit,
bmn.
diTin,
u
plein,
14
Tain,
S 0
basse,
IT 0
cbande,
* » 0
^troite,
so 0
froide,
17 0
grosse,
4U0
petite,
sa
brune,
13 IS 0
diTine,
T 0
pleine,
7 0
Taine,
low.
cold.
big.
small.
brown.
divine.
fuU.
Tain.
court,
droit,
u
dit.
gras.
baut,
18
lourd,
18 14
cousin,
14
fin,
14
sain,
90 14
Toisin,
courte,
» 0
droite,
U 0
dite,
t 0
grasse,
IT 0
haute,
u 0
lourde,
18 12 0
cousine,
la 0
fine,
7 0
saine,
90U
Toiaine,
short
strait.
said.
fat.
high.
heaTy.
cousin.
fine.
sound.
neighbor.
SncAax.— Bnt tbers are only four words in French which lose their nasality when n
final is carried over to the following word; they are the monosyllables mony ion^ son, and
botK
M IS 1 U
Un bon ami,
a good friend.
IS 1 13
mon ami.
my friend.
IS s r-
IS r
son enfimt,
his child.
ton arbrc.
thy tree.
In speaking, e is often silent in words where it has naturally the soond of «. Thia
occais chiefly when several monosyllables sncceed each other.
9 4 0 15 0
Je te le doune.
4 0 4 0 U 0 1
Je ne te le donne pas.
4 0 90
Je le Tois.
4 0 4 SS 1
Je ne le tois pas.
04 19 040490 1
Je te dis que je ne le Tois pas.
19 4 0 U 0
II me le donne.
19 4 0 S
II te le Tend.
IS 4 4 0 8 1
II ne te le Tend pas.
n 1914 4 0 19 0 0 1
On Tient de me dire cela.
0 1 S 10 0 IT 0
Cehi est peu de chose.
I give it to thee.
I give it not to thee.
I see it.
I see it not.
I tell thee that I see it not
He giTes it to me.
He sells it to thee.
He does not sell it to thee.
One has just told me that
That is a small matter.
DI^fiESIS.
The Towels «,!,«• when marked with the diseresis (").
lis
Bai, hated.
IBIS s 0
ba'ionnette, bayonet.
lis 0
caique, long-boat
119 0
]aIq[oe, layman.
hated.
lU
Haie,
lis s
caiman, alligator.
*. »«
Esaii, Esau.
119
maize.
U190
Moise, Moses.
11914
pa'ien, pagan.
MT 0
poete, poet.
Saol, Saul.
119
naif, artless.
UT 0
poeme, poem.
1 18
Raphael, Baphael.
24
PSELDOXAKT USBOSSL
CO^rVEESATIOXAI. PHEASE&
^-
7
a « u a*
Bonjoar, moasieor.
MftdAine, Je toqs sonhaite le bozjoor.
as • t » c •
Bonsoir, madenuMsene.
• •»••«■ isT««a
Mademoisene, je toob aonhaite le bott-
IS
8oir.
/ Comroeut rovt pcrtez-ro
f nu 4 i 4 C B
^ • -y Trts-bien, je toos lemercie.
" U • 4U«11»1
Comment se porte madame A.?
u « 4u«n«n« •
Ck>mment se porte toot le monde cbes
IS "^^
TOOS?
1 T • t ttU
Par&itement bien.
IS • B 0 4 u t mi
Tout le mondo)8e porte bien.
• ^ U t § 1S4SC
£t TOII9, comment est rotie sant^ ?
U 0MlSr04«UtlC
Comme d^ordinaire, je me porte aasex
1S14 r IS "^ "^
bien, mercL
M T 1S14 17 s
i^ II fait bien beau lfimD&
11 7 S« S S S
U fait un temps superbe.
ISM "Y M 7 MS
Qui, mais il fait trop seo.
iiifs i U M •
La chaleur est ^touflSmte.
IS 1 « ^^ 4^^814 4 MIS
hous avona besoin de pluie.
M I'^^t SS U14 IT
^x.' H Ta pleavoir bient6t.
4 so • 4 Bl 0
L Je Toifl quelques nuacres.
»l 7 SOMS 17 as
II a fait froid bier jm sotr.
?i *'. , " * **^
II fait chaud ce matin.
• IS
Pleut-il?
M '^U IS 11 7 IS S 0
Non, monsieur, mais il g^le.
M 7 • IS 7 «^S
II neigo. II fait du Tent
IS » 1 n so
II est tard. Bonsoir.
I MS IT 4 so
Adieu. Au reroir. '
Good daj (or good morning), or.
Xadim, I vish joa a good daj, cr a
good morning.
Gooderening, mias.
IGss, I wish TOO a good eTening.
Hov do jon dt>r
Veiy wen, I thank yon.
Ho V does madame A. do ?
Hov is ererr body at your house f
•I wm perfectly weH
Every body is weD.
And you, hov is your health?
As usual, I am pretty well, thank you.
It is very fine weather.
It is splendid weather.
Yes, but it is too dry.
The heat is suffocating.
We have need of rain.
It is going to rain soon.
I see some douds.
It was cold yesterday erening.
It is warm this morning.
Does it rain ?
No, sir, but it freezes.
It snows. It is windy.
It is late. Good evening.
Adieu. Until we see each other again.
PRELIMINARY EXERCISES.
1.— PREMItlRE LECON.
Sound of E and of 01.
EaonndsdaswinM;
01 loiuided M 1M in with.
• 4 4 4 4 4 90
Js, U, 6e, de, me, ns, poU, IcU, doiffi, fndd, paids, roi, ioU, wU.
I. lue.
/e.« JevoM.
The. 7%i9, that.
Le (before a noun). C«.
Eim^U. I see it or him.
Le (before a yeib). Je le rois.
The king. This kiog.
Le rot. Ge roi.
The wood. That wood.
Le boU. Ce hols.
The^M^. This finger.
Le doigt. Ce doigt.
The weigkL That weight.
Le poidt. Ge poids.
The pta. This roof.
Le/x>M.^ Qetmt.
CM. Of, from.
Froid. De.
Of wood. From that king.
Debois. Deceroi.
I see the roof.
Je Tois le toik.
I see it.
Je le Toia
I see the king.
Je Tois le roi.
Iseohim.
Je le Tois.
I see the wood of this king.
Je vois le bois de ce roL
The roof of wood.
Le toit de bois.
The cold pea. The cold finger.
Le pois froid. Le doigt froid.
Moflt a^i^^vM sn placed after their nooiiB in French.
Je vols le poids. Je le vois. Je vols ce pois. Je vois le pois
fond. Je le yois. Je vois le roi. Je vois ce roi Je le vois. Je
vois le bois. Je vois le doigt de ce roi Je vois ce poids. Je vois
f. r see ,uiis king. ^ Lsee mm. I see the wood.
<X8ee iT" Ll'ee'ltne fingir of mSucmg. <^ see it
• Worda introdneed fl»r the flnt time are printed In ItaUoi.
-y. . \^,
06 / PRELIMINARY EXERCISES^ / • /
I see that weight. \ see the pea. I see the cold pea. I see it.
I see the roof. I see this roo£ I see the roof of wood. I see it.
2.— SECONDE LEgON.
1 «
Sound of A and £.
A Bounded as a in aA, maw. £ soonded as a in/!i<«.
11 1 1 1 1 10 60e61611«
2ae, «ae, pat, drap^ plat, chat, pape.* dd, lie, pre, tM, cafi, canapi.
The lake. The sack or bag. Le lac. Le sac.
The cloth. The dish. Le <irap. Le plat.
The ca/. The ^j^e. Le chal, Le />a/)e.
i^o^ I do not see. Ne-pas, Je ue Yois pas.
ITot Is two words In French ; ne before the verb and pas after it
This thimUe. That corn. Caje.^ Ccble^
TloB meadow. Th&t tea. Ce pre. (% t^L
This coffee. That sofa, Ce <ra^ Cc canapS.
I do not see the lake. Je ne Tois pas le lac.
I do not see the bag. Je ne vols pas le sac.
I do not see the cloth. Je ne vols pas le drap.
I do not see the dish. Je ne toIs pas le plat.
I do not see the cat Je ne vols pas le chat
I do not see the pope. Je ne Tois pas le papc.
Je ne Tois pas le roi. * Je ne vois pas le bois. Je ne rois pas
le doigt. Je ne vois pas le poids. Je ne vois pas le pois froid.
Je ne vois pas le toit de bois. Je vois ce de. Je le vols. Je vois
ce bl6. Je le vois. Je vois le pre. Je vois le th^ froid. Je le
vois. Je vois le ca£6 de ce roi. Je vois le canap6 de ce pape. Je
. r vois le pape. Je le vois. Je ne vois pas le de. Je ne vois pas
/; U^V*peble.
\f^^ the lake. I see this bag. I see this clotlr. I see that
dijn^ I see this cat. I see the pope. I see him. I see the thim-
ble. I see the com. I see it. I see the meadow. I see the tea
of this king. I see the cold coffee. I see the sofa. I do not see
the meadow. I do not see the tea of this king. I do not see the
coffee. I do not see the sofa. I do not see the sac of cloth.
* A cipher orer e ebowi tbat it is silent ; tbis is often the case at the end of words.
PRBUMINARY EXERCISES. 27
3.--TR0ISl£ME LEgON.
Sound of £ and of E.
£ as 0 in ebb. ^ as ai in air.
• SSC TTTOTTTTT 7
href, cA^M **• ^rf^fery verre^ ver, vert, raU, daia^ laitt palaie.
The brief. The eluef. Le bref. Lq ehef.
The jet. And. Lejet. Et.
The ttag. This iron. Le eerf. Ce fer.
That gla»Sy tumbler. The toortn. Ce verve. Le ver.
Green. This «poil«. Ter^. Ce rata.
The eancgDy. The milk. Le dbtt. Le /ai<.
The palace. The green canopy. Le palais. Le dais vert
I do not see the brief. Je ne vois pas le bref.
I do not see it. Je ne le yob pas.
I do not see the chief. Je ne Tois pas le chef.
I do not see him. Je do le toIs pas.
I see the iron and the glass. Je vols le fcr et le Tcrre.
Jc vois le cerf. Je le vols. Je ne vols pas le jet froid. Je ne
le V018 pas. Je vois le ver. Je ne vois pas le rais. Je ne le vois
pas. Je vois le dais vert Je ne vois pas le lait de ce pape. Je
vois le palais de ce roL Je ne le vois pas. Je vois le lac. Je ne
vois pas le sac. Je vois le drap et le chat. Je ne vois pas le plat.
Je vois le palais de ce pape. Je vois le de de fer.
I do not see the green com. I do not see it. I see the green
meadow. I do not see the tea. I do not see it, I see the coffee
and the milk.* I do not see the sofa. I.do not see it. I see the
king and the pope. I see the cold jet. I do not see the chief. I
do not see the stag. I do not see him. I see the glass. I do not
see the iron. I see the spoke of wood and the green canopy. I do
not see the palace. I do not see it. I see the cold milk. I see it.
4.— quatriJ:me LEgON.
9
Sound of A.
A sounded as a Infather, arm.
sits rrirr
mat, has, tas, grae. Soonds before giyen, frain^ laid, balai, vera,
1 1 101 llflO
rat, dard, cadenaa, mittunre.
The mast. That heap, pile, Le mdt. Ce ^.
The ttoeking. Fat. Le^. Oraa.
Low. Baa.
Thero/. That dor/. Le raf. Ce dard.
28 PBELDUNABT EXERCISES.
This padloek. This Woom, €e cadenoi. Ge baloL
OoU, fresh. Ugly. IhiU. Laid.
This aeeowU^ memcrandum, memcrial. Ce mhnoire.
The low roofl The cool milk. Le toit has. Le lut frmls.
The ugly chief. The fat king. Lecheflud. Le roi gras.
I see the mast of wood. Je Tois le mit de bois.
I do not see the |^ of wood. Je ne vois paB le tas de boia.
I do not Bee it. Je ne le vois pas.
Je ne vois pas le bas. Je ne le vois pas. Je Tois le bois. Je vois
le canap^ baa et le balai de bois. Je ne vois pas le rat Je ne le
▼ois pas. Je vois le dard et le-eqtfiasr Je vois le dard de fer et
le bslai. Je vois le vers. Je le vois. Je ne vois pas le memoire.
Je ne le vois pas. Je vois le bref de ce pape. Je vois le palaia
de ce chef. Je ne vois pas le cerf. Je ne le vois pas. Je vois le
ver et le fer. Je ne vois pas le ver. Je vois ce cadenas.
I see the spoke of wood. I do not see the green canopy. I do
not see it I see the fresh mUk. I see the low mast I do not
see the pile of wood. I do not see it I do not see the stocking.
I see the cat and the rat I see the dart and the padlock. I see
the glass of this ugly and fat chief, and the memorial of this king.
I do not see the mast I see the pile of iron. I see the stocking
and the bag. I see the wood and the dart of iron. I do not see
the rat I do not see him. I see the glass and the memorial of
this chief. I see the fresh milk and the stag.
i
6.— CINQUIfiME LEgON.
U 16 17
SoundofO, 0, andO.
O M o In not O M oto In atM. 6 as o In ^, no.
U U li • U » Ml U M le M IT IT . IT 1 4 IT 1 IT
oolt globSt roehsr, croe^si^ §oidat: or./brt^ moH^porc: Mats groi^ biau^ mofaM; haUam^
The howL The globe. Le bol. Le globe.
ThAirock. That aoUter. Ceroeher. Ce eoldat.
ThisAool;. This aimW. Ce^oBtetiL Cepore.
The gM. T\u»gold. LV. Cet or.
Leaadde become T and cT, and o# baoomei cei^ before a Towel or a sflent JL
The bowl of gold. The globe of gold. Le bol d'or. Le globe d*or.
Strong. Dead. Fort. Mort.
The buek€t Big^eoaree. Leeeau. Oroe.
FRELIMIKARY EXEBCISES. 20
HankdMome^finie, The wUor, Beau, Le maielot.
This hoai. The Btrong soldier. Ge baUmL, Le soldat fort
The dead stag. The hig sailor. Le cerf mort. Le groa maielot.
Most a^l^^^**! ^ ^* ha^* '^^ (LesBon 1), are pkoed altar their naona. Boma ara
plaead befora tham. &rM and hsau an of this kind. Such a4)aetiTas will be markad in
these Lsasona with the abbravlatlon (be£ n.)
The big boat. The handsome globe. Le gros bateau. Le beau globe.
Je Tois le gros bol. Je le Tois. Je ne vols pas le globe. Je
ne le vois pas. Je vois le gros rocher. Je ne 7ois pas le soldat
laid* Je vols le crochet et le dard. Je ne yois pas le pore. Je
TOIS Tor de ce matelot. Je vois le matelot fort Je ne vois pas
le cerf mort. Je vois le seau de bois. Je ne vois pas le m&t de ce
batean. Je ne vois pas le beau seaa. Je vois le pore gxas et le
bol de ce soldat Je vois le rocher bas. Je vois le tas de bois gras.
Je ne vois pas le bean bas.
I see the cat and the rat I see the padlock of iron and the
broom of wood. I do not see the handsome glass. I do not see
it I see the fresh milk. I do not see the memorial of this soldier.
I do not see it I see the bowl of wood and the handsome globe.
I do not see the big rock. I do not see it I see the fat pork. I
do not see the gold of this ugly sailor. I see the big cat I do
not see the dead soldier. I do not see him. I see the backet of
strong wood. I do not see the handsome boat I do not see it
I see the gold. I see this gold.
6.— SIXIIaO) LEgON.
U IS
Somidoflandofl.
Itniinptqvs^ lasMlnM^
nn iisuuiuuiT isio 4Uiiit isomouoisssd lu
M; Um, tapU,ja,Jttei,il,Hrop,piraU, petit, rideau: dim^ eidre^gtU^U^wU^rdUau,
S It 1 u
gdttaUf eadeau.
The bed. The %. LelU. Le /it.
The carpet. The ikreaeL Le tapit, LejU.
The net. That eyrup. LeJUet. Le atrop.
The pirate. JETe, it. Le pirate. II.
This etertam. Bmall^ litOe, Ce oibiBt^ Petit, (bef. n^Phlyy ■
The eider. Le eidre.
Tbheake. That route. Ce gdteau. Cerdteau.
Thepreeents He aeei. Leeadeau.^ llvcit.
30 PRELmiNART EXERCISES.
He sees. He docs not eee. 1\ voit I\ ne Toit pas.
He sees it. He does not see him. H le voit II ne le Toit pas.
The soldier sees the pirate. Le soldat voit le pirate.
He sees him. II le voit.
The pirate does not lec tlic boat. Le pirate ne voit pas le bateau.
He docs not see it. II ne le voit pas.
Le matelot voit le gros rocher. H le voit. II ne voit pas le
crochet d'or. U ne le voit pas. Le soldat voit le lit et le tapis.
II ne voit pas le beau lis. Le matelot voit le petit filet, il ne voit
pas le fil. Le soldat voit le cidre et le sirop, il ne voit pas le petit
rideau. H voit le filet de ce chef. II ne voit pas le gdteaa de ce
matelot, il voit le petit rdteau de fer. Le pirate voit le cadeau de
ce soldat. Je vois le gros lit et le beau tapis. Le pirate voit le
pore, et le soldat mort. II ne voit pas le matelot fort
The sailor sees the small bucket. He sees the hook of iron
and the hook of gold. He does not see the handsome lily. He
does not see it. I see the thread and the net. I do not see the
handsome curtain. The soldier sees the cider and the cake of that
pirate. I see the syrup and the little cake. The soldier sees the
(]ii|)lMent of this king. He sees the handsome carpet, he does not
see the bed. He does not see it. He sees the thread and the small
net, he does not see the syrup. He sees the rake of wood and the
rake of iron. I see the handsome curtain.
7.-SEPTl£ME LEgON.
The same Sounds continued.
< ir 0 r 17 1 ir 1 ir is s s is 5 is it u la i« o is s
Jir&me. taUteau, tnarieau, anneau. Coquet, perroquel, roseaUyjoli, Georges^ Joseph,
15 oiiaaooaooiiio
fiomme^ fiabit, mohUj voile, catnarade.
Jerome. The «/a/). Jirouie. Itf VfffHfifltff
This fiammer. This latch, Ce jjiartcau. Qi€tCgMft.
The rinff. That ritiff. Vanneau. Get anneau.
That parrot. That reed. Ce paroquet. Ce roseau.
The veal. Pretty. Le voile. Mi, (bcf. n.)
George. Joseph. Georges. Joseph.
That man. The man. Cct homme. Vhomme.
This coat. The coat. Cct habit. V habit.
The cotnrade. The mank. Le camaraile. Lc moine.
Does he sec? Docs he not sec ? Voit-iU Ne voit-il pas?
PBeUMINARY EXERCISES. 31
The Bnbject pronoun after tlie Torb b always Joined to it by a hyphen.
Does he see the ship ? Voit-il le yaisseau ?
Does he not see the hammer ? Nc voit-il pas le marteau ?
Jerome voit le loqnet de fer. Voit-il le perroquet de Joseph ?
n le Toit Ne roit-il pas le joli roseau ? II ne le voit pas. Voit-
il le joli Yoile t II ne le voit pas, il voit le tapis et le beaa rideaa.
Voit-il le camarade de ce moine 1 Hie voit. Georges voit le vais-
seaa de J^idme, voit-il le gros marteau t II voit le marteau de fer
et le loquet de bois. Voit-il I'anneau d'or ? II voit Tanneau d'or
et le joli voile. Voit-il le perroquet de cet homme ? II voit le
perroquet de Gfeorge et le joli roseau. Joseph voit le camarade de
ce moine, ne voit-U pas I'habit de cet homme ? II le voit
Jerome sees the pretty reed, does he see the handsome lilj ?
He sees the lilj, he does not see the reed. Does he not see the
bed of this monk ? He does not see it He sees the thread of
George and the handsome net. Does he not see the comrade of
Joseph ? He does not see him, he sees the monk and that ugly
man. Does he see the cider 1 He sees the cider and the syrup.
George sees the present of Joseph, does he not see the handsome
cake ? .He sees the handsome cake and the fresh milk. I see the
small Q^Stam, the rake of iron, and the prettv present of Jerome.
I see the latch of iron, the pretty vail, and the^ftaTof that man.
8.— HUITI6ME LEgON.
u 1»
SoundofOUandofOty.
OU as in you, OXJ as oo In mood.
MS IS 18 13 u
oEcnCf Uvu, eotcrf, bottcher^ bouUi, hibou^ Idiou^ couteau^ ou, cAo« / oura, voiiU,
panorama, poteau^fromage, plat, noir.
The nail. The hoU, Le clou. Le trou.
Short. This knife. Courts Ce couteau.
The butcher. The cannon hail. Le boucher. Le bouUL
The owl. This jewel. Le hibott, Ce bijou.
Or. That cabbage. Ou, Ce eliou.
The bear. The panorama. Vours. Lc panorama.
This cheege. Thai post. Ce/romaje. Ceooteau.
Black. Noir. ^-^
The knife or the dish. Le couteau ou le plat
That bkck bear. That black dish. Cet ours noir. Ce plat noir.
32 PBEUUNART EXSRCISBS.
Je vols le cloa de &r. Le boncher voit le petit hiboa. Ne
Toit-il pas le chou? H ne le Toit pas. Le rat voit le fromage,
Toit-il ce trout II le voit Le boacher volt le boulet, ne voit-il
pas le poteaa court t H voit le poteau oourty et le mat court Yoit-
il' le clou ou le boulet? II voit le clou. Le hibon voit le chat^ ne
voit-il pas le trou f Ne voit-il pas le couteau de ce boucber t U ne
le voit pas. Voit-il le chou ou le fomiaget H voit le chou, il ne
Yoit pas le fromage. Greorges voit le drap noir, ne Toit-il pas le
panorama f H voit le panorama et le palais de ce cbef.
Jerome sees the hammer^ does he see the latch t He does not
see ity he sees the ring of gold, and the post of iron. The parrot
does not see the owl. The butcher sees the naily does he see the
cannon-ballt Does he see the black vail or the black coat? The
comrade of Jerome sees the panorama, does he not see the black
bear! He does not see him. Does he not see the knife of this
man ? He sees it The owl sees the rat, does he not see this small
hole t I see the dish, I do not see the post of iron. Joseph sees
the big post, does he not see the pretty dish? He sees it Does
he see the nail or the latch ? He sees the nail, he does not see the
latcL
9.— NETTVIfiME LEgON.
Sound of AN and of IN.
AN •Mtnin mieort. IN u an in oneKmr.
8 ^ ,a . I .1 SI S 14 14 14 14 14 f U
prmOMt iHimc, Uam^ tXamp^ Jtan, grand, gaiU ; Un, pin, tin, pain, Unge, da4M^
1S14 17 19 4
bUn, autH, gtt6,
WhiU, The bench, Blane. he hone.
TheJUld. John. Le champ. Jean.
Large. The ghve. Grand (het n.) heganl,
The Jiax. The linen. Le lin. Le linge.
This pine. This wine. Ce pin, Cevin.
Thtii deer. Very. Ce daim. BUn.
What {what thing?) Alio. Que. Aueau
I take. Betakes. Jeprends. Uprend,
Does be take? What does he take t Prend-il? Que preml-il ?
1 take the large pine. Je prenda le grand pin.
.He takes the white gloTe. H prend le gant blano.
I take the flax and the linen also. Je prends le lin et le Unge aiusL
Very large. Very white. Bien grand. Bienblanc.
PBELIMINABY EXERCISES. 33
Jean voit le prd, voit-il le grand champ T H le voit Ne voit-
il pas le Gouteaa de ce boucher t U ne le roit pas. Qne prend-il ?
n prend le boolet de fer et le gros choa. Prend-il le gant noir on
le blanct Je prends le banc. Qae prend Jean? H prend le lin
de cet faomme. Prend-il le linge aussi T Je vois le gros daim blanc.
Qae prend le soldat ? II prend le pain et le yin. Prend-il le fro
mage aussi f II prend le fromage et le lait aussi. Je prends le
pain et le vin. Qae prend le matelot T H prend le gdteaa de Jean.
Je prends le banc court Qae yoit ce bibon t H voit le petit troa
et le grand champ.
The soldier sees the vrhite deer, does he see the large bench
also t He sees it Does he not see the large field? He does not
see it John takes the glove, does he take the flax also? He
takes the flax and the linen also. I take the white bread, what
does George take ? He takes the cake and the wiae. Does he not
see the white deer ? He does not see him. Does he see the large
pine? He sees it, and he sees the small wood also. I take the
black glove of John, what does he take? He takes the white
bread and the fresh milk. I take the wine of John, does he take
the bread or the cake ? He takes the bread and the cake alsa
10.— DIXIfiME LEgON.
Sound of U and of tJ,
17 M In quetn. XS^ th« same sound prolonged
sfltt ao 9s»Bi« MIS niiu n » .>*.'* H *
ta, dUt dur, Jvlu, mulet^ rubU^fruU^ JuU&n : miir, jug* : honlanff^r^ imIii<p«»
MM A
numeKaiTf quel.
7%cu. 0/the. Tu. Du,
The handkerehief. What (tidy). Lemouehoir. Quel.
Juliuu Hard, JuU», Dur.
Th« muU, The ni6y. Le mulct, Le rubU,
Julian. The fruU. Julien, 1^ fruit,
Thie judge. Ripe. Lejuge, MUr.
The baker. The painter. Le houlanger. Le peinire.
Thoaseest. Thou takest. Tu vom. Tu prend*.
Thoa dost not see. Tu ne vois pas.
Thou doet not take. Tu ne prends pas.
Doet thou see? Dost thoa take f Yois-tu? Prends-tu?
IHiai ruby dost thoa see ? Quel rubis Tois-ta ?
I see the rabj of the painter. Je tois le rubis du peintre.
Of the judge. Of the baker. Bujuge. Du boulanger.
2*
34 PRELIMINARY EXERCISES.
Qae voLs-tu ? Je vols le mouchoir da boulanger. Qae prends-
tu? Je prends le fruit Quel fruit prends-tut Je prends le
fruit dur. Prends-tu le fruit mur*? Je ne le prends pas, Jules le
prend. Que vois-tu ? Je vois le mulet Quel mulet vois-tu ? Je
vois le mulet du peintre. Que prend le boulanger ! 11 prend le
mouchoir. Quel mouchoir prend-il ? II prend le mouchoir de Ju-
lien. Vois-tu le mulet de Jules 1 Je le vois. Prends-tu le fruit
durl Je ne le prends pas, je prends le fruit bien miir. Vois-ta le
camarade de Julien 1 Je ne le vois pas. Que prends-tu ? Je prends
le rubis du juge et le fruit dur.
Julius sees the mule of the baker, what dost thou see t I see
the ruby of Julian. Dost thou see the coat of the judge? I do
not see it What fruit dost thou takel I tabg^lh^^pe fruit.
Dost thou take the glove or the stocking f I take the glove and
the stocking also. What ruby dost thou take t I take the ruby of
the painter. Thou takest the hard fruit, dost thou take the cheese
also 1 I do not take it. Julius takes the bowl of Julian. What
bread dost thou take? I take the bread of the baker. What
dost thou take ? I take the ring of the painter, and the wine of
the judge. I see the ripe fruit Dost thou see the field or the
meadow t I see the field and the meadow also.
11.— 0NZI£ME LEgON.
Sound of EU, of EU (before r), of ECt.
£U 08 v in UA EUIl as ir in sir. K C as eugh in eughr.
9 • »• • 9 12 5 9 U 0 11 11 1 11 10 10 1«
/eu, ^eu, lieii^ hc&vf, meunier, ncRiul : beurre^ ccRur, leur^ nugeur^ deuOf peu,/eii :
4 U 5 so 29 S3 17 18 10
chemiiiy elroit: sur, mur, heaucoup^ large.
The Jire. The play^ pame. Le/e?<. hejeu.
That plitee. That miller. Ce lieu. Ce meunier.
The knot. The ox, or beef. Le nawL Le bceuf.
The heart. 27ieir butter. Le cceur. Leur beurrt.
The swimmer. Little (not much). Le nageur. Pei^^
Wide. The wall. Large. Le nmr.
On. Much, many. Sur. Beauconp «fe.
The pat/i. Harrow. Le ehemin. ii troll.
~Peu and heawsoup take de befaro tho following nouns.
Hach beef. Little butter. Bcaucoup de boeuf. Pcu de beurre.
The wide path. Tho narrow path. Le ehemin large. Le ehemin ^troit.
PRELIMINART EXERCISES. 85
Je voia ce jea, le Tois-tu? Je ne le yens pas. Le mennier voit
le mnr ; ne voit-il pas le chemin t II ne le voit pas. Ne yoit-il
pas le feu t II le Toit. Le nageor ne voit pas ce beau lieu ; voit-il
le chemin etroitt II le voit et il yoit le feu aossL Prends-ta oe
petit noead t Je ne le prends pas. Ne prends-ta pas le coeor da
hosaL Je piends le coeor da boeuf et le pain da nagenr. Ne prends-
ta pas beaaconp de beorre? Je prends beancoup de beorre et pen
de boeof? Que voit ce chat? II voit le perroquet ear le mar. Que
voit le mennier 1 H voit le beau jeu. Quel mar voit-il ? H voit le
gros mar. Ne prend-il pas le ooeur da boeof? II ne le prend pas.
What dost tboa see ? I see the parrot What parrot dost tbo^
see? I see th^ pretty parrot on the walL Dost thoo see the wide^'t^
road or the ^VfSh I see the wide and the narrow alsa Dost
thoo see this beautiful j^ag^i r see it. What does the miller
take ? He takes the coat of the swimmer. Does he not take the
little knot? He does not take it Does he not take much hotter?
He takes little hotter and little beef. Dost thoa not see the cat on
that wall ? I see him, and I see the parrot on the big rock. Dost
thoo take the big knot or the little? I take the little (one).
Dost thoo not take the handkerchief of the swimmer ? I do not ,
take it Dost thoo see the large fire ? I do not see it The mill- PM^Jd7^
er sees this beautiful place, does he not see the game ? He does
not see it
12.— DOUZIJSME LEgON.
Sound of UN.
XJlSf aoanded uhng (ff aUent), or yery nearlj u «n in tunJb,
M M 1 M 1 M M MO 0 9 »M M T J?» » ^ M i* -
«n« &r«f», c^aeun, parfum,j€uny humblt : veux, ««tf<, euir, mauvaU^ dicmani^ 4iUphaiUt
1 us 8 IT » 4 1 1 14
papier, manUaity lUtt, rtnard, lapitk
A^ one. Brown. Un. Brun.
The per/tone. Each one, Le patfian. Chaeun.
Bad, The leather, Mauvait (before n.). Le euir,
A diamond. An elephant. Un diamant, Un iUphant,
A eloak. This paper, Un manteau, Ce papier,
A /ox. A rabbit, Un renard. Un lapin.
Blue, A blue cloak. Bleu, Un manteau bleu.
/ with for, tfiou vntheat for^ he mahea Je va4x^ tu veuxy il veut.
for, 0^^^ ".(J
J>ost thou with for i does he wish for ? Veux-tu ? veut-il ?
Mtco/
\,^^v:^^^^^^
36 PRSXUflKART EXEBClSEa
I do not wish for, thou dost not wish Jo ne renx ptf, ta ne toox pas, il ne
for, he does not wish for. Teat pas.
Dost tbou not wish for? does he not Ne yeox-ta pas? ne veat-il pas?
wish for?
I wish for it, thou wishest for it, he Je le reox, ta le Tenx, il le renU
wishes for it.
I do not wish for it, thou dost not wish Je ne le veux pas, tu ne le reox pas,
for it, he does not wish for it. fl ne le veut pas.
What dost thoa wish for ? Que yeux-tu ?
1 wish for the brown paper. Je Teux le papier bran.
George does not wish for the rabbit Georges ne veut pas le lapin.
He does not wish for it ; I wish for it. II ne le veat pas ; je le veux.
Je veux le parfum. Que veax-tu ? Je veux le cuir. Chacun
vent on ooateau. Georges vent le diamant^ vent-il aussi ce maavais
cnirT H ne la vent pas. Ne yenx-tu pas le renardt Je ne le
veux pas, je reox I'^l^phant Tu veux le manteau brun, ne venx-
tu pas le bleu aussi? Je le veux. Charles veut le parfimi, ne veut-
il pas le diamant aussi t II le veut Chacun veut un plat et un
g&teau. Yeux-tu ce manvais papier t Je ne le veux pas. Que
veut le meunier? II veut I'^l^phant Yeut-il le renardt II ne
le veut pas. Ne veut-il pas le lapin t II le veut.
Dost thou wish for the brown cloak or the blue t I wish for
the brown and the blue also. Dost thou not wish for this perfume t
I wish for it. Each one wishes for a rabbit Each one wishes for
a stag and a fox. Charles wishes for the bad leather. He wishes
for it I do not wish for it Does he not wish for the diamond ?
He does not wish for it I wish for it I do not wish for the ele-
phant, dost thou not wish for him ? Thou dost not wish for him.
I wish &r him. Charles wishes for the paper, does he wish for the
leather also ? He wishes for the paper, and the bad perfume. What
does the soldier wish for T He wi^es for the elephant Dost thou
wish for this cloak ? I wish for it
13.— TREIZItMB LEgON.
Sound of ON.
ON sooBdfld «8 on in wrong.
man, ton, 9on, fton, gond, canot^ Uo»t fiM^oM, garcon^ voyont^ prmums, vokanm, long,
ftoiM, no<r#.
My. Thy. Mofu Ton,
Hu, her, iti. Our. Soti. ^ Kotre. *
PBEUMINABT KXKBCI8E& 87
My Ats^. Thy etmtum, Voajfoivi^ Ton emuMu
Hw lum. Oar mamm. Son liton. Notre HMfon.
A 6oy. We, Un garpm. Nimi*
OoofL Long, Ben. Ztrng,
We Mv. We take. Koub voyoiM. Now^wmoiM.
We wUh/or the good bread. Nou» vtrnhm le boo pain*
Do we take? Do we wish for? PreDons-nous? Voulone-noai?
Do we see the long cannon f YoyoDS-nous le long canon?
Do we take the hinge ? Prenons-noos le gond?
We take it. We do not take it. Nona le prenona. Nona ne le prenona
paa.
We see it. We do not see it. Nous le voyons. Nous ne le Toyons paa.
We wish for it. We do not wish Noos le Toulona. Nous ne le Toulona
for it. pas.
Do we not see the good mason f Ne Toyons-nous pas le bon ma^ on ?
Do we not take the hinge of iron? Ne prenons-nons pas le gond de fer?
Do we not wish for our tiiek / Ne Toulons-nous pas notre bdiam f
Que Yoyonfl-noiist Nona yoyons mon cbamp et ton pr^. Ne
Yoyons-noos pas le fer da magon t Nous le voyons. Voyons-nons
son bois ? Nous ne le voyons pas. Que prenons-nons t Noos pre-
nons noire gond de fer. Prenons-nons le canon da chef t Noos ne
le pienons pas. Ne prenons noos pas son lion t Noos le prenons.
Qoel Mton yonlons-nons ? Nous voulons mon Uton. Youlons-
nons le long canon f Noos ne le voulons pas. Ne voulons-nous
pas le bon fromagef Nous le voulons. Nous voulons le marteaa
da ma^n, nous ne voulons pas son lion. Nous voulons le long ta-
pisetlebonUt.^. ,,,^^
What do we see t We see mv ox and thM mule. Do we see
our good mason T We see him. Do ¥^^^t' sdanis long cannon t
We do not see it Do we take the good hinge t We take it Do
we not take the good cloak T We do not take it Do we wish for
the diamond t We wish for it. Do we not wish for the fox t We
do not wish for him. What do we wish for ? We wish for our
stick. Dost thou see the palace of the king f I see it. What
does the monk see ? He sees the palace of the pope. Dost thou
take the padlock or the hinge T I take the padlock. What does
the soldier take ? He takes the fruit of the baker. We take our
fruit What paper do we wish for? I wish for the white paper,
and thoa wishest for the blue. Each one wishes for a knife and a
caka
'\
38 PRELIMIKART EXERCISES.
14.— QUATORZlfiME LECON.
Sound of RE final.
BE flmU sonnded as rv In brtuh (half aadible).
1 4 1 414 741494 S4 ftS4U4Ur4 1S SI
arbre^ marbre, mbre^ cedre, eadre^ 9uerA, pldtre^ fhtatre^ Uvr^ Uitf^ qui, plomb^
n 11 4 u n ti 17
eoncomhrt^ pigeon^ gruan.
The tree. This tree, Varhrt. Get arbre.
The marble. The suford^ taher, Le marhre. Le sabre.
The cedar. The sugar. Le chdre, Le xucre,
T\i\s plaster, II frame, Ce pldtre. Tin cadre,
^ A theater. A dool*. Un thedtre. Un /i we.
The hare, A cucumber. Le /tevre. Un eoneombr^
f t^ ^ The /eodL A pigeon, Le plomb, Un pigeon.
>- ^ The ^rrue/. lF%o. .Le jTruau. Qui.
Who wishes for this book ? Qui veut ce livre ?
The mason wishes for it. Le ma9on le veut
Dost thou wish for it ? Le Teux-tu ?
Dost thoa not wish for it ? Ne le veux-tu pas ?
Dost thou see it ? Le vois-tu ?
Dost thou not see it? Ke le vois-tu pas?
Dost thou take it? Le prends-tu?
Dost thou not take it ? Kc le prends-tu pas ?
Qui veut le sucre blanc t Je le veux. Que vois-tu ? Je vois
le grand arbre. Que voit le maqon t U volt le beau marbre. Que
voyons-nous? Nous vojons le pl&tre blanc Vois-tu le sabre T Je
le vois. Le veux-tu t Jti le veux. Ne le prends-tu pas ! Je ne
le prends pas. Nous voulons le c^dre du ma^on, ne le veux-tn pas t
Je veux le cddre et le marbre. Nous ne prenons pas le beau cadre,
le prends-tu ? Je prends le beau cadre et le long sabre. Noua
voyons le grand theMre ; ne le vois-tu pas t Je vois le grand the-
atre et le grand arbre. Qui prend le sucre ? Je prends le sucre
et le gruau. Qui voit mon livre, le vois-tu t Veux-tu le licvrel
Je veux le lievre et le pigeon.
What dost thou see 1 I see the cucumber and the lead. We
see the pigeon ; dost thou see him ? I see the pigeon and the hare.
Who takes the gruel ; dost thou take it t I take the gniel and the
sugar. We see the white plaster ; dost thou not see it ? I see the
plaster and the lead. I take the cucumber ; dost thou wish for it ? I
wish for the cucumber and the gruel. We do not take the book ; dost
thou not take it ? I take the book and the frame. What dost thoa
PREUMINARY EXERCISEa 39
see t I^see the white marble, the long sword, and the cedar of the
mason. We wish for the lead ; dost thou not wish for it t I wish
for the lead, the marble, and the plaster. Dost thou see the hand-
some theater t I see the handsome theater and the large tree. We
wish for the hare and the pigeon.
15.— QUINZIfiME LEgON.
Sound of £Z final.
«
£Z final sounded as tf, or a in/aiA,
« 1 e 8t>IS« 46 IBS «1«1C116 IS 15oTO 70 S 4
IMS, OMCB, voff0», preneSf wnOea^ reM^ awt^ aavwy HeM : ooim, voire, pire, frtr^ eAanvre,
n 16 17 18 21 n s
rond, taureau, bouton^ ruban.
The nose. Sufficiently^ enchtgh, Le nez. Auez,
Tou. You see. Vents. Yous voyez.
You take. Yon toish far. Yousprenez. Youavo^iles.
Your. Hound. Voire. Rond.
Your father. Your brother. Y otre pere. Yotre frere.
The hemp. The btdl. Le chanvre. Le taureau.
My button. Your ribbon, Hon bouton. Yotre ruban.
Sufficiently long. Sufficiently short. Assez long. Assez court.
Do yon see ? Do you take ? Voyez-vous ? Prenez-vous ?
Do you wish for? Do you not sec ? Youlez-vous ? Ne voyez-voua pas?
Do you not take ? Do you not wish No prcnez-YOus paa ? Xe voulez-vous
for? pas?
Does he see it ? Docs he not sec it ? Le Toit-il ? Ne le Toit-il pas ?
Does he take it ? Does he not take it ? Le prend-il ? Ne le prend-il pas ?
Does he wish for it ? Does he not wish Le veut-il ? Ne le veut-il pas ?
for it?
Voulez-vous le bouton rond 1 Je le veux. Ne voulez-vous pas
le chanvre t Je ne le veux pas. Voyez-vous le taureau de mon
pere ? Je vois le taureau de votre pere et le bceuf de votre fr^re.
Que prenez-vous t Je prends le ruban. Quel ruban prenez-vous f
Je prends le long ruban. Je veux le ruban long. Que voyez-vous T
Nous voyons le chanvre de votre frfere ; le veut-il ? II ne le veut
pas. Ne le prend-il pas? II ne le prend pas. Le voit-il? II le
voit. Prenez-vous le bouton rond t Je le prends. Vous voyez le
sabre de votre frire. Vous prenez le sucre blanc. Vous voulez le
cbdie du ma^on ; le veut-il aussi ? II ne le veut pas. Votre frfere
veut son livre ; ne le prend-il pas? II ne le prend pas.
Do you wish for this little cucumber! We do not wish for it
40 PRSLDCUrART EXEBCISE&
Do yoQ seethe handflome frame? I see it What do 70a take 1
I take the round button and the long ribbon. I take it sofficientl j
long. Who wishes for the hemp T My father wishes for it Does
he take itt He takes the hemp and the flax. Who wishes for the
roond cake t Mj brother wishes for it Does he not see it t He
does not see it. What does yonr fother wish for! He wishes for
his bulL Does he see him t He sees him. Does he not take him t
He takes his bull and his ox. Do 70a see the field of your father?
I see it What do 70a take ? I take the book of m7 brother. Do
70a wish for the long ribbon t Yes, I wish for it Do 70a wish for
the sugar or the milk? We wish for the sugar and the milk alsa
16.— SEIZIfiME LEgON.
s
Sound of £.
£ Bounded u « In vhsre,
■ •lorry tosots t'n 14 I4 4«inra4
I 14 1 nt n« mni9 0 • 1 nf raao 0
The oak. The toM. Le ehent. Le mime.
A peach-tree, AJUhermafu VnpSeher. Vn pSeheur.
The master. The beeeh. Le tnaitre, Le hStre,
The melon. The copper, Le melon, - Le ctUvre,
A garden. The friend. Vnjardin. Vami.
That inketand, The uniform, Cet enerier. Vuniforme,
Thisc^^. The eteel, Cet auf Vacier.
The ivory. This ivory, Vivoire. Cet ivoire.
Do you Bee it ? Do you not see it ? Le voyez-voua ? Ne le Toyea-roua pas f
Do you take it? Do you not take Le prenes-vous? Ne le prenez-vous
it? pas?
Do you wish for it ? Do you not wish Le Toulez-Toua? Ne le Toulez-Toua
for it? pas?
A noon placed as an a^jecUve before another noon, in Engllah, Is tianeUted Into Frcneh
by plaeing it after the noon to which it belongSt ^i^h de between them ; as,
The oak wood. The copper nail. Le bois de chene. Le clou de cuiTpe.
The iTory inkstand. The steel knife. L^encrier d*iToire. Le couteau d'acier.
The oak bench. The steel sword. Le banc de ch^ne. Le sabre d*acier.
Quel arbre vo7ez-vous t Je vois le prober. Vo7ez-vous le mdme
arbre t Je vois le p^her et le ch^ne. Que prend le p^cheur ? II
prend son bateau. Qui veut l*encrier de cnivre T Le maitre le veut.
Voulez-vous le meme enerier? Je ne reux pas le m^me. Je vois le
PBELIHINABT EXEBCISSa 41
petit h^tre^ ne le YoyeE-voas pas ? Je Ycim le hdtre et le chdne.
Yotre ami Tent ce melon, le yonlei-TOiis aussi? Je ne yenz pas le
mtoe melon. Voos yoyez le petit oea^ ne le prenez-yons pas t Je
ne le prends pas ; le soldat prend le petit ceuf et son muforme. Que
yoyez-yons t Je yois le bean jardin de yotre ami Qui yoit le b»>
teaa da p^heur? Notre ami le yoit Je yois le jardin de notre
maitre ; que yoyez-yons t Je yois I'miiforme da soldat et I'encrier
d*iyoiie de yotre ami
I take the big melon ; do yon wish for itt I do not wish for
the melon, I wish for the egg. Do you see the peach-tree? I see
it ; do yoa not see it T I see the peach-tree, and the large garden
of oar master. Do you see the boat of the fisherman! I see the
boat of the fisherman, and the ship of the king. I take the copper
hammer ; do you wish for it ? I wish for the copper hammer and
the steel knife. We see the broom ; do you not see it t I see the
broom and the oak. You wish for the iyory inkstand ; do yon not
take it t We take the iyory inkstand and the steel knife. The
soldier wishes for his uniform ; do yon see it ? I take the small
^gg ; ^o you not wish for it t I wish for the egg and the melon.
The soldier wishes for this uniform ; do you wish for the same T I
do not wish for it. Do you see this handsome garden ? I see the
handsome garden, and the green meadow. Who wishes for the
iyory knife ? Our master wishes &r it.
17.— DIX-SEPTIfiME LEgON.
Sound of LE final and CH.
LE final tmht In Iduni (half aadible). CH as «& In $ha(U,
«4 1,««4 S1,4 1S14-U4 1«I4 41 ISl 1 •
edbU, §dbUt M0Uf apeetaeU^ affriabU^ double: cMen, chewtl^ eharbim^ fnarchand^
f < 1 IT . 1 17 « II r n
miehant^ eAamMis ehapeau, ekanUur, chardon.
Aeahle. The $and. TJn edble. Le Moble.
A hufalo, A tpeciaele. Un buffle, Un tpeetacle.
Agreeable. Double, AgriabU, DoMe.
A dog. A horse, Un chien, Un chevai.
The coaL A trader. Le ehttrbon. Un marehand.
Wicked, The eamel. Mkhant. Le ehameau,
A hat, A einger, Un chapeau. Un ehanteur,
A thitUe, Enough sand. Un ehardoti, Aeeez de sable.
^iMi, like beaueoup and p«u, takes <fe before the fbllowtng i
42 PRELIMINARY EXERCISES.
This agreeable perfome. Ce parfam agrdable.
The double knot. Le noeud double.
The wicked man. Le m6chant homme.
Prenez-vous le gros c4ble t Nous ne le prenons pas. Voyez-
vous le c&ble de ce bateau 1 Nous ne le voyons pas. Que yojoiis-
nous ? Vous voyez le buffle et le chameau. Je vois un spectacle
bien agreable, le voyez-vous *? Nous le voyons. Que voit le petit
cbien 1 II voit le mecbant cbeval et le gros chameau. Prenez-
vous le cbardon ? Nous ne le prenons pas. Nous voyons le cha-
peau du marcband ; le veut-il ? II ne le veut pas. Le cbanteur
veut son livre; ne le prend-il pas f II prend son livre et son cba-
peau. Voyez-vous le cbeval noir? Je vois le cbeval noir et lo
cbien noir aussi. Ne voyez-vous pas le grand buflSe 1 Je ne le voia
pas, je vois le gros taureau. Je prends assez de cbarbon et assez
de sable.
Do you see this beautiful spectacle 1 I see it, and I see the large
garden of the trader. What do you take ? I take the thistle and
the double knot. I take this agreeable perfume ; do you wish for
iti I wish for this agreepble perfume and the book of the singer.
What does the singer wish for? He wishes for his hat and his
dog. Who wishes for the long cable ? The sailor wishes for the
long cable and the boat of the trader. Do you see the big buffalo ?
I see the big buffalo and the wicked horse. Do you wish for much
sand ? I wish for little sand, and much charcoal. Do you take
sufficient charcoal ? I take sufficient charcoal, and the singer takes
sufficient wood. What spectacle do you see ? I see the great spec-
tacle. What knot do you take ? I take the double knot I see
the mule of the trader and the big thistle. We see the wicked dog ;
do you see him ? I see the good camel, the white hat, and the big
thistle.
18.— DIX-HUITI£ME LEgON.
Sound of ENT, and of ENT final.
ENT final, in the third porson plural of verbs, silent. EXT final otherwise as en.
so 0 » 0 4 0 IS 15 8 IS S 19 1 8 )8 19 19 21
toient prenneni. veulent : argent fromenL comment : iU. chartnanL (?ui,sf, non^
IS 0 12 90 J I 0 10 3060
moiudeur^ mad/ume^ mademoUelU.
The »i/wer, money. The wheat, Vargent. Lq frornetit.
CTiarming. They. CharmanL Ha.
PR£UHINART EXEBCISE& 43
Tet, tir. No^ madam^ Out, numneur. Kcn^ madame*
Tes, mut. No, miu. Si,* madan<nselU, Non, mademoUelU,
They tee. They take, Ila voieni. lis prenneni.
They wish for. They do not see. Us veulent. Us ne voient |)as.
They do not take. They do not wish lis ne prennent pas. lis ne veulent
for. pas.
They see it. They take it Us Ic voicnt Us le prennent
They wish for it They do not see it lis le veulent lis ne le voient pas.
They do not take it. They do not Us ne le prennent pas. lis ne le Teu-
wish for it. lent pas.
Do they see ? Do they take ? Voient-ils f Prennent-ils?
Do they wish for f Do they not see ? Veulent-ils ? Ne voient-ils pas ?
Do they not take? Do they not wish Ne prennent-ils pas? Ne veulent-ils
for ? pas ?
Do they see it ? Do they take it? Le voient-ils ? Le prennent-ils ?
Do they wish for it? Do they not Le veulent-ils? Ne le voient-ils pas?
see It?
Do they not take it? Do they not Ne le prennent-ils pas? Ne le veu-
wish for it ? lent-ils pas ?
Mon p^re et mon fr^re yealent le bon cheyal ; veulent-ils lecha-
meaa anssi ! Us ne le veulent pas. Veulent-ils le froment ? Non,
monsieur, ils ne le veulent pas. Ne veulent-ils pas I'argent 1 S$^
monsieur, ils veulent Targent et Tor. Voient-ils ce charmant
petit jardin ? Non, madame, ils ne le voient pas. Voient-ils le
gios elephant ? Qui, madame, ils le voient Prennent-ils Targent
du marchand ? Non, mademoiselle, ils ne le prennent pas. Pren-
nent-ils son froment t Oui, mademoiselle, ils prennent son froment
et son beurre. Qui voit ce lieu charmant t Le chanteur et le sol-
dat le voient Voyez-vous ce charmant spectacle ? Oui, monsieur,
je le vois. Le soldat et le matelot veulent le bon melon ; ne le
prennent-ils pas ! Non, monsieur, ils prennent le beurre et le fro-
mage.
Do you wish for much silver ? Yes, madam, I wish for much
silver and much gold. Who wishes for the wheat of the trader ?
My father and my brother wish for it. Do they wish for this charm-
ing garden ? Yes, madam, they wish for it Do they take the
white sugar t Yes, miss, they take it. What do the judge and
the master see t They see the palace of the pope. Do they see
the green meadow? Yes, miss, and they see the ship of the trader.
* French people most generally \ae »i Instead of out, In answoring interrogatiyo sen-
tenecs conAtractea wiib a negation.
44 PRELIMINARY EXERCISE&
Dost thon see the glass inkstandt Yes, sir, I see the glass ink-
stand and the white paper. What does the master take ? He takes
his hat and his handkerchief. Do you wish for the ivory knife T
No^ sir, I do not wish for it What do the mason and his boy wish
for? They wish for much copper and much iron. Do you take
sufficient milkT Tes, madam, I take sufficient milk and sufficient
sugar.
19.-DIX-NEUyit:ME LEgON.
Sound of Y between vowels.
ttn
T hekcMfi two 9WDtU, and wmtitixD/b^hiiwetnatowiland a eontonani^ m ML
iisfi 9onM 619 14 sni 0 y r r v r ir ir .n u
crayon^ doytn^ payan^ paytoffs: Ua, met, fai^ Mt, cm, «kM, w, Uur, ImtrB.
My pencil. This dean, Mon crayon. Ce doyen.
The countryman. The landaeape, Le paytan, he paytage.
The plonl of French noanfl and a^jecttTes is generally formed by adding e to the alngnlar.
The great man. The great men. Le grand homme. Les grands hommes.
The small pencil. The small pencils. Le petit crayon. Les petits crayona
The article and a^JeetiTee in French agree with their Boons in noinber. The IbUowtng
an the plural of the artide and pronominal a^Jectlyes thus ftr glyen.
My, 7%y. HU^her.iU, Me*. Tei. iSe« (plural).
Our. Your, Theu^ thon. Nob, Fo#. Ccb,
2%e, l%eir, Les, Zeur (sing.). Zeurs (plaral).
Cfthe, Of the deans. Of the men. J>M(plttr.). Des doyens. Des hommes.
The dean. The deans. Le doyen. Les doyens.
This countryman. These countrymen. Ce paysan. Ces paysans.
That landscape. Those landscapes. Ge paysage. Ces paysages.
My dog. My dogs. Mon chien. Mes chiens.
Thy melon. Thy melons. Ton melon. Tes melons,
ffis inkstand. His inkstands. Son encrier. Ses encriers.
Our book. Our books. Kotre li^re. Nos liyres.
Tour long pencil Tour long pencils. Yotre long crayon. Yos longs crayons.
Their round button. Their round but* Leur bouton rond. Leurs boutons
tons. ronds.
Voyez-Tons ce cbarmant paysage f Oai, monsieur, je le vois.
Que prennent les doyens t lis prennent lears bons crayons. Yea-
lent-ils nos livres t Non, madame, ils veolent les livres de yos frdres.
Qae vealent les paysanst lis veolent les petits sacs de ces gar-
^ons. Queroient ces matelots? lis voient les soldats. Yoient-
ils les pr6s verts? Ooi, mademoiselle, ils les voient Qae voales-
vous ? Je venx mes encriers de verre. Ne veox-tn pas tes des d'ar-
gentt Non, monsieur, je venx mes bons canapes. Que prend le
PRELIMIKART EXERCISES. 45
doyent H piend sea papiera et ses cnjons. Voyes-voiu mea
gantsf Old, madame, je voia yos gants et yob monchoirB blancs.
Qae Yeat ce garqon? H Yent noa balaia et noa banca. Que pren-
nent cea payaang t II prennent leur beorre et leura mel<Hia. Yoyez-
Yous ce beau payaage t Oui, mademoiaelley et je Yoia le beaa jar-
din aoasL
Do joa wiah for yonr bookat I wiah for my booka and my pa-
pers. What do thoae men wiah for t They wiah for their mulea
and their oxen. Do they take their cheeae t Yea, air, they take it
What dost thon aeet Iseeapalace. What palace dost thoa aee t
I see the large palace of the king. Charlea takea the big cake ; doea
he wiah for it? He wiahea for it. What doea the aaikr aeet He
sees the large maata of hia ahip. Do you aee my brothera f I aee
your brothera and yonr father. Do you wiah for thia melon ? No,
sir, I do not wiah for it We aee the horse of thoae comitrymen ;
do they wiah for him f They wiah for their horae and their oxen.
Do yoa wiah.for the white handkerchiefa or the black ? We wish
for the white handkerchiefa and the black. Do you take the fruit
of the countryman t We do not take it. What do thoae soldiers
wish for? They wish for mnch ailYer and much gold. Do you wiah
for their cheeae ? I wiah for their cheese and their batter. We
take oar booka, oar pencils, and oar paper.
20.— VINGTIfiME LEgON.
SoondofSandofSS.
8 between two yowels eoonded as c 88 sounded as M in nUa,
« « »H »a »14 » « N »4 ,» 1 IS •?,»,« T »
^ossois, o0««Eis Hmm^voUta: poitaon^ eousHnt Ifitsae^avm, o^ ti, platt, rmuroU,
The poi«m. The^A. Jjopoiaon, Lepaiuan,
The eoMftn. The cuskUm, Le eoimfi. Le eouinn.
Tear 6t«m. Yotre buan.
The neighbor. If, Le voiatn. Bi,
PUatet. Thank. Plait. Itemereie,
If yam pUa$e (if U pieaaei you). ffU wju$ plait.
I thank you (/ you thank). Je tfoua remereie.
Ihawt. You have. Have If Have XaL Vaut avest. .Ai-Jef Avesh
foaf voutf
I hftre not Ton have not Je n'ai pas. Voas n*ayez pas.
I have 11. Too have it Je Pai. YousraTez.
I have U not Too have it not JeneVaipaa. Voiia ne raves pas.
4e PRELIHINABY EXERCISES.
Have I not ? Have joa not ? ITal-Je pas ? N^avez-TOus pas .
Have I it? Have you it? L'ai-je? L'aTez-vous?
Have I it not ? Have you it not ? Ne Tai-je pas ? Ne I'avez-voua pas? ]
Je, ne, ^, H^ que^ become/, n\ T, »\ qu\ before a vowel or a silent A*
Have you the fish ? I have it. Avez-vous le poisson ? Je I'ai.
Have you not the poison ? I have A ITavez-vous pas le poison ? Je ne Tai
not. pas.
Have I your cushion ? You have it. Ai-je votre cousan ? Vous I'avez.
Have I not your bison ? You have it ITai-je pas votre bison ? Yous ne IV
not. vez pas.
What have you ? I have the fish. Qu^avez-vous ? J^ai le poisson.
Avez-vons le bison f Non, monsieur, je ne I'ai pas. N'avez-vons
pas mon coussin? Je Tai. N'ai-je pas votre poisson? Si, mon-
sieur, vous Tavez. N'ai-je pas le poison I Vous ne I'avez pas. Que
prend votre cousin 1 H prend mon encrier d'ivoire. Que voit notre
voisin ? n voit le bison noir de mon cousin. Youlez-vous le the ?
Oui, monsieur, s'il vous plait. Quel tli6 voulez-vous ? Je veux le
bon. Voulez-vous ce fruit t Non, monsieur, je vous remercie. Quo
veulent ces hommes ? lis veiilent beaucoup de fruits. Que voient
nos voisins ? Us voient les bisoiis de ces paysans. Prennent-ils le
poison ? lis ne le prennent pas. Voulez-vous mes livres ? Ooi,
monsieur, s'il vous plait Voulez-vous vos gants ? Non, madame,
je vous remercie. Qui prend le gros poisson 1 Nos cousins le
prennent. Us veulent leurs poissons et leurs fruits.
Have you my fish ? No, sir, I have your fruit. Have you the
cushions of my cousin? Yes, madam, I have his cushions and bis
benches. Have you not the books of our neighbors ? I have their
books and their sacks. Do you not take the fish ? I do not take
the fish, I take the sugar and the milk. What bisons do you see ?
I see the bisons of your cousin, and the oxen of the neighbor. Do
you wish for this round cake ? No, madam, I thank you. Do you
wish for the milk and the sugar ? Yes, miss, if you please. Have
you not my papers ? I have not thy papers. Have you the gloves
of my brother t I have his gloves and his handkerchief. Have I
not your pencils I You have our pencils and our inkstand. Have
you the fish of those men ? I have their fish and their fruit. I
have the beautiful lily ; do you wish for it ? Yes, sir, if you please.
Who takes the white hat ? Your cousin takes it.
PRELDflNART BXERCISES. 47
• 21.— VINGT ET UNffiME LEgON.
Sound of GN.
GN, oommonlj as ffni In bagnio; nrelj as gn in ttagncte.
n 0 n IS 0 B 1 SI ? o n is s i nn o i i u i is
cif/nt, tignoble, eompagnon^ P^Ut**^ ignorant : magnifique^ as, avona, eanif.
A twan, A vineyard. Un eigne, Un vignobU.
Tour compftDion. A eomb, Yotre camarade or ami Un peigne.
Ignorant, Magnificent, Ignorant, Magnifique,
'nhoviJuut, Hast thou? Tm as, As-tu?
Thou hast not. Hafit thou not? Tn n^aa paa. ITaa-tu pas?
We hare. Have we? Nonsavoiw. ATons-uous?
We have not. Hare we not ? Nous n^avons pas. N'avons-nous pas ?
Hast thou it? I have it. L*as-tu ? Je Tai.
HaTQ jou it not? We have it not. Ke l^arez-vous pas ? Nous ne Tayons
pas.
Il penknife. Them, Un cant/. Z€« (before the verb).
Hast thou them ? We have them. Les as-tu? Nous les ayons.
We hare them not ; thou hast them. Nous ne les avons pas, tu les as.
Whof Whom, thai, which. Qui? Que,
Whom interrogative Is qui, not interrogatlvd is que.
Whom do you see ? Qui voyez-vous ?
I see the man whom you see. Je rois l^homme que toub voyez.
As-tu ton canif ? Je ne Tai pas, ne Tas-tu pas? J'ai ton canif
et ton peigne. Arons-nous le peigne de notre camarade (or ami) ?
Nous I'avons. Arons-nous les cignes du voisin? Nous les avons.
Ayez-Tous nos poissons t Nous les avons. N'avons-nons pas yos
cignes ? Yoos ne le» avez pas. N'as-tu pas mon canif? Je ne
I'ai pas. N'avons-noos pas les coussins de notre ami ? Nous ne
les avons pas. As-tu le fruit de ce petit ignorant! Je ne I'ai
pas. Vois-tu le eigne magnifique de notre voisin? Je le vois.
N'avons-nons pas le peigne de cet homme ignorant ? Nous ne
Tavons pas. Voyez-vous ces vignobles magnifiques? Nous les
voyons. Que voyez-vous? Nous voyons les vignobles du voisin.
Qui voulez-vous? Je veux le gar9on que vous voyez. Que voit ce
gargon ignorant ? II voit notre camarade. Nous voyons le soldat
que vona voyez.
Have you those magnificent swans? We have them not. Hast
thou the hat of that ignorant man ? I have it not. What combs
hast thou? I have the combs of the trader. Have you his pen-
knives? We have them not. Do you see them? We do not see
48 PREUHINABT EXSRCISES.
them. What do yoa seet We see the white gwaiu and the mag-
nificent vineyard of our neighbor. What does your oompanioi^ see t
He 8ee8 the large vineyard. Hast thou not oar papers? I have
them not Have yon the silver inkstands t We have them not
Have yoa not the ivory buttons I We have them. Do yoa insh
for this fraitt Yes, sir, if you please. Dost thoa wish for these
glovest No, madam, I thank yoa. I see the man whom I wish
for, whom do yoa see ? I see the ignorant little boy of year friend.
Hast thoa the good tea and the white sagar? I have them not
Dost thoa wish for themt Yes, miss, if yoa please. Whom dost
thoa seet I see the men whom I wish for. Thoa hast thy pencils^
and we have oar books and oar papers.
22.— VINGT-DEUXIfiME LEgON.
Sound of L and LL.
L or LL llqiiid,aa m in (rOttofit^
The coral. The sun, Le ecrail. Le 9oUil,
Brilliant, II mallet, Brillant, VnnuUllet,
CurdUd. The /fn< (stone). CaHU. Le eaill<m.
The /an. That drunkard. VevantaU, Cet ivroffne.
The pewter. Old. VStain. VUuz (Jbef, Jx,).
The ton. The un^ Lejih. Vonde.
ffathef He hat. Haahenott He A-t-ilf Ha. N'a-t-U pas? H n*a
has Dot. pas.
L When U follows a rerb ending with a rowel, -t- is InArted for better souid.
Has he it? He has it. L Vt-il f II Ta.
Has he them? He has them not Lesa-t-il? Ilnelesapas.
The curdled milk. The old midlet Le lait caill6. Le vieux maillet.
i. Noons and atQeottTes ending in a, a% or ■, are the same in the planiL
The stocking, the stockings. The nose, Le has, les has. Le nez, les nez.
the noses.
The big spoke, the big spoke& Le gros rais, les gros rais.
The old carpet, the old carpets. Le vieux tapis, les Vieaz tapis.
This bad verse. These bad verses. Ce mauvais vers, ces mauvaia vers.
Qa'a le fils da vieux matelot t H a le petit cailloa et T^vantail
d'ivoire. N'a-t-il pas mon encrier d'6tain ! II ne Ta pas. Qu'a
cet ivrogne t H a le vieux chien de mon oncle. Qui a le beau co-
* L and U hare genenUy this sound, in the middle or at the end of a word, when pre-
oededbyl
PRELIMINARY EXERCISES. 49
rail f Le fils da maQon I'a. Voyez-vous ce paysage magnifique ?
Je vols le beau paysage et le soleil brillant. Qiii a le maillet de
noire oncle ? Le fils du voisin I'a. A-t-il le lait caill6 1 H ne I'a
pas. Qu'a ce petit gar^on? H a le joli caillou et le plat d'etain.
A-t-il les 6irantails d'ivoire ? II ne lea a pas. Voulez-vous ce co-
rail? Oui, monsienr, s'il vous plait Qui a le chapeau de I'i-
vrognel Le gar^on de mon oncle I'a. Je vois le beau jardin et le
soleil brillant Nous avons les gros bas et les vieux tapis, et vous
avez les maavais dais.
What has the son of our old baker I He has the handsome
coral and the big mallet. Has he not the curdled milk ? He has
it not Has he the ivory fan ? He has it. Who has the pewter
inkstands! Your uncle has them. Who has the hat of that
drunkard ? That little boy has it. Has he not the little flint ?
He has it not W^hat do you seel I see the fine sun, and the
beautiful landscape. What has the old mason ? He has his mal-
lets and his inkstand of shining pewter. Dost thou wish for this
flint ? No, sir, I thank you. Do you take the big fans ? We do
not take them. What has that drunkard I He has the old gloves
of my uncle. Whom do you see ? I see the sailors whom you see.
Have you the big stockings or the little ones ? I have the big and
the little ones alsa Who has the large fans? Your brother has
them. Has he the white handkerchiefs '? He has them not, the son
of our neighbor has them.
23.— VINGT-TROISlfeME LEgON.
Sound of ER final.
EB In most noans (polysjllablea) ending in i«r, yer. cher^ Qtr^ and iUer^ sonnd as e
(or e in thh\ when r u silent
1 iSS Miss t 1S5 »ni 1 a 195 4«II3]2S 1 13J9S 1 « I?« 91
eahUr^ noulUr^ tahlUry/oyery charpentier^ menuisier^JardinUr, dhapelUr^ ont,
7 4 9
mais^ neveu.
A copy-hook. A shoe. Uii cahier. Un Soulier.
lij apron. The hearth, TAon tablier. Le foyer {or Vdtre),
The carpenter. The joiner, he c/iarpentier, Le menuisier.
The ffardener. Tlie hatter, Le jardinier. Le chapelier.
BtU. nifl nephew. The stranger, Mais. Son neveiL Vetranger.
Bavetlieyf They have. Ont-Usf lis ont.
Hare they not? They have not. N'ont-ila pas ? Us n'ont pas.
Have they it ? They have it. L'ont-ils ? lis Pont.
Have they it not? Thcv have it not. Ne Pont iU pas? lis ne Tont pas.
3
50 PRELIMINARY EXERCISES.
Noons and adjectivos ending In al cbango this termination into aux for the plan], and
those ending in au, ew, add an te; as,
The horse, the horses. Le cheval, Ics cherawx.
77ie generaly the generals. Lc general^ lei genermix.
The handsome boat, the haudsomo Le beau bateau, les beaux bateaux.
boats.
The liat, the hats. Le chapeaUy les chapeaux.
But not, Mais pas, mats uon, mais non pas,
I have the oxen, but not the horses., tTai les boeufs, mais non pas les che-
vaux.
Les nevenx du chapelier ont nos cahiers. Qaels soaliers ont-
ilst lis ont leurs souliers. N'ont-ils pas les tabliers de cuir?
Non, monsieur, ils ont les souliers, mais non pas les tabliers de cuir.
Qu*ont les jardiniers? lis ont les rdteaux de fer. Ontils nos
fruits 1 Non, monsieur, ils ne les ont pas. Qu'ont ces cLarpen-
tiers ? Ils ont les beaux canapes, et les longs bancs. N*ont-ils pas
le bois de ces menuisiers? Non, monsieur, ils ne Pont pas.
Voyez-vous le charbon ? Je le vois but le foyer. Le fils du jardi-
nier a les tabliers, mais le neveu da menuisier a les souliers. Qui
a nos cahiers t Les neveux du charpentier ont nos cabiers et les
fils du charpentier ont nos crayons. Voyez-vous les gen6rauxl
Nous voyons les gdneraux et leurs soldats. Les charpentiers voient
le charbon sur le foyer.
Who has my copy-book ? The son of the carpenter has it. Do
you see the coal on the hearth ? I see it. Who has Uie leather
shoes 1 The nephews of the joiner have them. Have they the
cloth shoes also 1 No, madam, they have the shoes of leather, but
not the shoes of clotL What has the hatter ? He has many {beau^
coup) black hats and many white hats. Who has the rakes of the
gardener ? His sons have them. Have they the hammers of the
carpenter? No, madam, they have his nails, but they have not his
hammers. Have they the wood of the joiner ? No, sir. Who has
the hats of the hatter ? The sons of the general have them. What
do the nephews of the gardener wish for? They wish for the
melons of their uncle. Do you see the wood on the hearth ? No,
miss, I see the coal, but I do not see the wood. Hast thou thy
copy-book ? I have it. What has the general ? He has his fine
horses. Have you the leather gloves ? No, sir, our cousins have
them, and they have also the leather shoes.
PRELIMINARY EXERCISES. 51
24.— VINGT-QUATRIfiME LEgON.
5
Sound of ER final, continued.
n 99198 99 ni SI9 19B 90 1 19« IS 178 SO 191 2019S 15 19S 99 19 t t
jC^niar, prunier, cirUier, coiffnassier, ro4der,poiri€r, noyer, pommUr^fiuU^ «i\fani^
grand-pirt, petiUflU, eonseiUer^ eloe/ur.
XJfff-tree. A plum-tree, Vnjiguier. JJn prunier.
A eheny4ree. A guinee-tree. Un cerisier, Un eoigruuner,
A raae-tree. A pear-tree. Adviser. Un rosier. Un poirier. CotueiUer.
A wtlnut'tree. An apple-tree. Steeple. Un noyer. Un pommier. Clocher.
The grandfather. The grandson. Le gj'and-pere. Lc petit-Jils,
In qaestiona, wben a Donn is the subject, the noun Is placed first, then the verb, and the
pivDfMui of the tiiird person is used after the yerb ; thus,
Does the man see? Do the men see ? L*homme Toit-il ? Les hommes Toient-
ils?
Does the soldier take? Do the sol- Le soldat prend-il ? Les soldats pren-
diers take ? nent-ils ?
Does the e?iild want? Do the chil- Venf ant veni-W^ Les enfants Teulent-
dren want ? ils ?
Has the grandfather? Have the grand- Le grand-pcre a-t-il? Les petits-fils
sons ? ont-ils ?
Has the gardener a fig-tree ? Le jardinier a-t-il un figoier ?
Do your brothers see the plum-tree ? Voa frferes voient-ila le prunier?
Does not yoar father take the good Yotre pdre no prend-il pas le bon
fruit? fruit?
Do those men wish for the cherry- Ces hommes veulent-ils les c6risiers ?
trees?
Have the soldiers their gunsf Les soldats ont-ils leurs/tMi/< /
Does your grandfather take these Yotre grand-p<^re prend-il ces coignas-
quince-trees ? siers ?
The child. Theffim. Venfant. Le fusil.
Notie jardinier a-t-il les rosiers 1 H a les rosiers et les poiriers.
Voire ami ne voit-il pas les noyers ? H les voit Les petits-fils da
Toisin prennent-ils nos fruits ? lis ne les prennent pas. Les voi-
sina veulent-ils les petits pommiers 1 Non, monsieur, ils veulent le
fruit du jardinier. Vois-tu le figuier ou le prunier 1 Je vols le
figuier. Votre oncle prend-il les beaux chevaux? II les prend.
Les jardiniers veulent-ils ces cerisiersi lis veulent ces cerisiers
et ces coignassiers. Qui a les noyers 1 Les paysans ont les noyers,
les pommiers et les poiriers. Get enfant n'a-t-il pas votre fusil?
H a mon fusil et mon chapeau. Quel homme le petit-fils de notre
▼oisin voit-il? II voit Thomme que nous voyons. Quels arbres
▼oyez-voust Je vois les pruniers, les coignassiers, les noyers et
52 PRELIMINARY EXERCISES.
les pommiers. Votre grand-pere a-t-il beaucoup de chevaux *? D
a beaucoup de chevaux et beaucoup de boeufs. Get enfant n'a-t-il
pas votre canif ? II Ta.
Does the oountryman wish for the gardener's trees? He wishes
for his fig-trees and his plum-trees. Have those gardeners many
trees? They have many cherry-trees, many quince-trees, and
many apple-trees. Has your grandfather a large garden ? He has
a large garden and a large vineyard. Has not the grandson of the
soldier his gun? He has his gun and his saber. Do you see those
large rose-trees ? Yes, sir, I see the rose-trees, the pear-trees, and
the walnut-trees. Do those children take your books? They do
not take them. What do you wish for ? I wish for a little bread
and a little milk. Have those children sufficient butter? They
have sufficient butter and sufficient bread. Do you wish for this
fruit ? No, miss, I thank you. Do you wish for the milk ? Yes,
madam, if you please. Do the sailors see those handsome boats ?
They see those handsome boats and those large ships. Whom do
you wish for ? We wish for the men whom we see.
25.— VINGT-CINQUlfiME LEgON.
ER, in the middle of words,
Is prononnced liko the English word air^ when r is distinctly artleolated, as in rose.
T «
CuERCHER, to seel.
Do you seel' F We seek. Cherchez-vous f Kous cherehon*.
Do you not seek ? We do not seek. Ne cherchez-vous pas ? Nous ne cher-
chons pas.
Do you seek it ? We seek it. Le cherchez-vous ? Nous Ic cbercbons.
Do you not seek him ? Ne Ic cherchez-vous pas ?
We do not seek him. Nous ne le cherchons pas.
Dost thou seek f I seel; Cherches-tuf Je citerche.
Dost thou not seek ? I do not seek. Ne cherches-tu pas ? Je ne chercbo
pas.
Dost thou seek them? I seek them. Les cherches-tu ? Je les chcrcho.
Dost thou not seek them ? Ne les cherches-tu pas ?
I do not seek them. Je ne les cherche pas.
Do vie seek F You seek, Cherchons-nous f Vous chercfuz.
Do we not seek ? You do not seek. Ne cherchons-nous pas ? Vous nc
cherchez pas.
Do we seek him ? You seek him. Le cherchons-nous? Vous le cherchez.
Do we not seek it? You do not seek Ne le cherchons-nous pas ? Vous nc
it. Ic cherchez pas.
PRELIMINARY EXERCISES. 53
Me, Thee, Vs. Me, Te, Nous (all placed immediately
before the verb).
The one^ that Tfue oneSy those. Celui. Ceux,
Dost thou seek me ? I seek thee. Me cherches-tu ? Je te cherche.
You seek us. We seek you. Yous nous cherchez. Nous tous cher-
chons.
I seek the one of my father. Je cherche celui de mon p^re.
You seek those of the gardener. Yous cherchez ccux du jardinier.
Me cherchez- voust Je vous cherche. Nous cherchez-vous ?
Nods vous cherchons. Je te cherche ; me cherches-tu 1 Je ne te
cherche pas. Ne me cherchez-vous pas ? Je ne vous cherche pas.
Nous cherches-tu ? Je ne vous cherche pas. Qui cherchez-vous ?
Nous te cherchons. Ne nous cherchez-vous pas ? Non, monsieur,
nous cherchons nos fr^res. Qui cherches-tu? Nous cherchons
notre oncle. Nous vous cherchons ; nous cherchez-vous ? Nous ne
vous cherchons pas. Que cherches-tu? Je cherche un cheval.
Quel cheval cherches-tu? Je cherche celui de mon p^re. Ne
cherches-tu pas celui de ton oncle? Si, monsieur, je cherche
celui de mon oncle et celui de mon pere. Que cherchez-vous?
Nous cherchons les gants. Quels gants cherchez-vous? Nous
cherchons ceux du maitic. Ne cherchez-vous pas ceux de votre
cousin? Nous cherchons cSux du maitre et ceux de notre cousin.
Votre grand-ptjre a-t-il son chapeau ? Oui, monsieur, il Ta.
Whom dost thou seek ? I seek thee, dost thou seek me ? I do
not seek thee. Do you seek us? We do not seek you. Whom
do you seek ? We seek our friends. Dost thou seek us ? I do
not seek you. Do you not seek me ? We do not seek thee, we
seek thy cousin. What dost thou seek ? I seek a book. What
book dost thou seek? I seek the one of the master. Dost thou
not seek the one of thy brother? No, sir, I seek that of the
master, I do not seek that of my brother. What papers do you
seek ? We seek those of these little boys. Do you not seek those
of your cousins ? Yes, sir, we seek those of our cousins and those
of the master also. Does that cat see the rats ? Yes, sir, he sees
them. Do the rats see the cat ? They see him also. Do the
soldiers take your fruit ? They do not take it. Does your grand-
father wish for our gun? He does not wish for it. Have those
children their books ? Yes, sir, they have them. Do you not seek
for me? No, sir, I seek my little cousin.
54
FRELIMINART EXERCISES.
26.— VINGT-SIXIfiME LEgON.
T «
Chercheb, to seek.
Doei he uek f He Beek$.
Does he not seek ? He does not seek.
Does he seek them ? He seeks them.
Does he not seek them? He does
not seek them.
Do they seek f They uek.
Do they not seek ? Thej do not seek.
Do they Seek him ? They seek him.
Do they not seek it ? They do not
seek it.
The one vsho. The onee (those) who.
The one whom. The onee (those) whom.
Which man do you seek ?
I seek the one who seeks me.
I seek thoee who seek me.
I seek the one whom you seek.
I seek thoee whom you seek.
Does your uncle seek you ?
He seeks me.
I seek them, and they seek me.
A dictionary. An atlae.
Young. Red.
Cherclie-t-ilf H chercJte.
Xe cherche-t-il pas? II ne cherche
pas.
Les chcrche-t-il ? II les cherche.
Ne les cherche-t-il pas? II ne les
cherche pas.
Cliercheni-ih / lU cherclunt.
Ne cherchent-ils pas? lis ne cher-
chent pas.
Le cherchenMls? Hs le cherchent.
Ne le cherchent-ils pas? lis ne le
chercheot pas.
Celui qui. Ceux qui.
Celui que. Ceux que.
Quel homme cherchez-vous ?
Je cherche eelui qui me cherche.
Je cherche ceux qui me cherchent.
Je cherche celui que tous cherchez.
Je cherche ceux que tous cherchez.
Votrc oncle tous chcrchc-t-il ?
II me cherche.
Je les cherche, et ils me cherchent.
Un dictionnaire. Un atlaa.
Jeune. Rouge.
Get homme cherche-t-il son cheval ? II le cherche. Ne cher-
che-t-il pas ses boeufs ? H ne les cherche pas. Qui le jardinier
cherche-t-il ? II nous cherche. Me cherche-t-il ? II vous cherche.
Ces petits gardens cherchent-ils leurs livres t Us les cherchent
Quels livres cherchent-ils ? lis cherchent leurs dictionnaires. Xe
cherchent-ils pas leurs atlas? Us les cherchent. Ce jeune gar^on
cherche-t-il son frdre t Non, monsieur, il cherche un enfant Quel
enfant cherche-t-il ? H cherche celui qui a le chapeau de ce gar^on.
Ne cherche-t-il pas ceux qui ont ses papiers ? II ne les cherche
pas. Quels soldats ces hommes cherchent-Us ? Us cherchent ceux
que nous cherchons. Cherchez-vous celui que je cherche t Je
cherche celui qui a mon mouchoir rouge. Vous cherchez ceux que
je cherche, et ceux qui nous cherchent
Do you seek your dictionary ? I seek my dictionary and my
atlas. Docs that young boy seek his handkerchief? lie seeks it.
PRELIMINARY EXERCISES. 55
Does he seek his red handkerchief? He seeks his red handkerchief
and his red coat. Do those yoang boys seek a mason ? No, sir,
they seek a gardener. What gardener do they seek f They seek
the one who has much fruit. Do they seek the one who seeks
them ? No, sir, they seek the one whom we seek. Do they see
the one whom they seek ? What soldiers do you seek ? We seek
those who seek us, and you seek those whom we seek. Have you
my atlas ? No, sir, that young boy has it Whom does that man
seek t He seeks thee. Does he not seek you ? He does not seek
me. Who seeks us ? The grandchildren of our neighbor seek us.
What men do you see ? I see those whom you see. What book
have you ? I have the one of my cousin, and you have the one of
the master.
27.— VINGT-SEPTI£ME LEfON.
15 «
DoMNEB, to give.
Dost thou ffive f I give. Donnes-tuf Je donne.
Dost thoQ not give ? I do not give. Ne donnes-tu pas ? Je ne donne pas.
Do6t thou not give it ? I do not give Ne le donnes-tu pas ? Je ne le donne
it. pas.
Do you give? We give. Donnez-vous / Now donnons.
Do you give them ? Wc give them. Les donnez-vous? Nous les donnons.
Tome. 7b thee. To us. Me. Te. Nous.
To you. To him. To Iftem, Vous. Lui. Lew.
To. To that num. To that child. A. A cct hommc. A. cct enfant.
To whom do you give your money ? X qui donnez-vous voire argent ?
I give it to my father. Je le donne a mon p^re.
To the. Au (singular). Aux (plural).
Dost thou give me the fruit? Me donnes-tu le fruit ?
I give it to the little boy. Je le donne au petit garden.
We give thee the books. Nous te donnons Ics livres.
I give you the papers. Je vous donne les papiers.
Do you give us your pencils? Nous donnez-vous vos crayons ?
I give him my pencils. Je lui donne mes crayons.
We give them our papers. Nous leur donnons nos papiers.
We give them to the men. Nous les donnons aux hommcs.
Que me donnez-vous? Je te donne cet anneau d'or. Que nous
donnes-tu? Je te donne ces jolis livres. Que donnons-nous au
petit garden? Nous lui donnons ce g&teau. Donnez-vous les
melons aux soldats ? Non, monsieur, je leur donne ces fruits. A
qui donnez-vous cc joli canif 1 Je le donne au petit-fils du jardi-
56 PRELIMINARY EXERCISES.
nier. A qui donnez-vous vos beaux crayons 1 Je les donne a mes
amis. Me donnes-tu le bon vin? Non, mon ami, je te donne le
cafe. Nous donnez-vous le lait f Nous vous donnons le lait et le
th6. Que donnons-nous a mon fr6re ? Nous lui donnons nos livres.
Donnons-nous ces encriers aux petits gargons? Non, madame,
nous leur donnons ces petits livres. A qui donnez-vous cet atlas !
Je le donne t Charles.
Do you give me these books ? I give you these books and these
papers. We give thee these pencils, what dost thou give us ? I
give you these rings. Do you give your ivory inkstand to the
master? I give him the inkstand, and I give the knives to the
little boys. Do you give them these gloves? No, sir, we give
them to the children. To whom do we give the melons ? We
give them to the soldier. What book have you ? I have that (the
one) of my brother. Have you not his papers ? No, sir, I have
those of the master. What man do you see ? I see the one who
has my book. What soldiers do you see ? I see those who have
the red coats. Whom do you see ? I see the gardener. Do you
see the one whom you wish for ? Yes, sir, and I see those whom
you seek. What dost thou give me ? I give thee my ivory knife.
We give you our books, and you give us your pencils. Whom do
you seek ? I seek the man whom you seek. Do you give him his
money? I give him his money, but not his books.
28.— VINGT-HUITIEME LEgON.
DoNNER, to give.
Does he give f He gives. Bonne-til F H donne.
Does he not give 1 He does not give. Ne donnc-t-il pas ? II ne donne paa.
Docs he not give it ? Ho docs not Ke le donne-t-il pas ? II ne le donne
give it. pas.
DoUieygivei TJiey give. Domient-ils F lis donnent.
Do they give it ? They give it. Le donnent-ils? Ds le donncnt
li to me, Tlum to me. Me le. Me les.
It to you. Them to you. Vous le. Voiis les.
Docs he give it to mc ? Me le donnc-t-il ?
lie gives it to yon. II vous le donne.
Do they not giro them to you ? Ne vous les donnent-ils pas ?
They do not give them to me. lis ne mc les donnent pa^;.
PRELIMINARY EXERCISES. 57
Of fh^y and to 1h^ in the singalar, ore (f « T and d V before a rowel or a sUcnt A ; in the
plural, they are always dt» and avx^
Of the man. Of the men. De rhommc. Dcs bommes.
Of the child. Of the children. De Tcnfant. Dcs cnfants.
To the man. To the men. A fhomme. Aux bommes.
To the child. To the children. A Tcnfant. Aux cnfants.
Of the mason. Of the masons. Du ma^on. Dcs masons.
To the mason. To the masons. Au ma^on. Aux masons.
Of the grocer. To the grocer, De Vipider. A VSpieier.
Ue gives the money to the grocer. 11 donnc I'argent k T^picier.
Me donnez-vous les livre des petits gargons ? Je vous les donne.
A qui le maitre donne-t-il ce cadeau ? H me le doDne. Ne me le
donne-t-il pas ? H ne vous le donne pas. A qui les maitres don-
nent-ils les cabiers des enfants? lis vous les donuent. Ne vous les
donnent-ils pas ? lis ne me les donnent pas. Le jardinier donne-
t-il son fruit a Tepicier? II lui donne le fruit de ces arbres.
L'epicier donne-t-il son rateau au jardinier 1 II lui donne son ra-
teau et ses balais. Qu'avez-vous 1 J'ai le beurre de l'epicier et les
fruits des paysans. Me donnez-vous cet encrier de verre ? Je vous
le donne. Je donne ce livre d I'ami de Jean. Le voisin vous
donne-t-il ces melons? II me les donne. Qui a le cabier de
I'enfantf Je I'ai. Vous le donne-t-il 1 II me le donne. Lui
don nez vous le gateau 1 Je lui donne le g&teau et le bon fruit
You have the ivory inkstand ; do you give it to me ? I do not
give it to you. Do you give it to tbe cbild of our neighbor ? I
give him the inkstand and tbe copybook. Have you tbe wine of
the grocer 1 We have bis wine and bis butter. To whom does tbe
master give tbe ivory ? Ho gives it to me. Does he not give it
to me 1 He does not give it to you. What books does tbe master
seek t He seeks those of my brother. Does be seek tbe children
whom we seek? No, sir, he seeks those who have bis books.
What inkstand do you seek I I seek tbe one of tbe grocer, and
my brother seeks those of the little boys. My brother gives you
the pretty ribbons. Do you not give them to me f I give them to
you. What man do you see'? I see the one whom you seek.
What books has your brother ? He has bis dictionary and bis
atlas. Do you wish for tbe coffee ? No, sir, I thank you. What
does your friend take t He takes the bread, the butter, tbe cheese,
and the milk.
58 PRELIMINARY EXERCISE&
29.— VINGT-NEUVIfiME LEfON.
8 4
£tre, to he.
Are you f Weave, iHcH-vousf Nova tommes.
Are you not? We are not, N'etes-vous pas? Nous nc som-
mes pas.
Art thou f lam Ea-tu? Je suis.
Art tbou not ? I am not. N^cs-tu pas ? Je ne suis pas.
Here, Tliere, IcL Ld.
In. Under. Dans. Sous.
The store. The turf. Le magasin. Le gason.
Thefoor. A relation (kin). 'Leplancher. \Jn parent.
Sick. The sick man, patient. Malade. Le malade.
Where. Where are you ? Oil. Oit fetes-vous ?
It to thee. Them to tlue. Te le. Te les.
It to us. Them to us. Nous le. Nous les.
Dost thou give it to me ? Me le donnes tu ?
I do not give it to thee. Je ne te le donne pas.
Do they not give them to us? Ne nous les donnent-ils pas?
They give them to us. lis nous les donnent.
He gives them to thee. II te les donne.
Tlicy do not give it to us. Ds no nous le donnent pas.
Are you there ? We are here. fites-vous \k ? Nous sommes ici.
Art thou under the tree ? I am on Es-tu fious Tarbre ? Je suis sur le
the turfl gazon.
Oil es-tu t Je suis ici. Es-ta U dans le jardint Je suis ici
dans le magasin. £]tes-vous sous Tarbre ? Oui, nous sommes sous
Tarbre sur le gazon. £]tes-vous malades? Non, monsieur, nous
ne sommes pas malades. N*es-tu pas parent de Charles! Si,
mademoiselle, je suis son frere. Je ne suis pas le fr^re de Jules,
je suis son cousin. N'etes-vous pas dans le magasin % Je suis ici
sur le plancher. Je suis ton parent. Qu'a votre parent? 11 a un
bouton d'or. Ne me le donne-t-il pas ? 11 ne te le donne pas.
Vous le donne-t-il ? II ne nous le donne pas. Me donne-t-il ses
livrest II ne te les donne pas. Ne vous les donne-t-il pas? 11
nous les donne. Que donnez-vous k cet Lomme ? Je lui donne un
bon marteau. Que donnez-vous a ses enfants ? Je leur donne ce
pain et ce fruit. Me donnes-tu ce melon ? Je te le donne.
Where are you ? I am here. Are you in the store or in the
garden t I am in the store. Are you on the bench or on the
floor ? We are on the bench. Art thou not sick ? I am not sick.
PRELIMINARY EXERCISES. 59
Art tbou there under the tree t I am here on the turf. Art thou
not on the floor ? I am here on the bench. Are jon not omr rela-
tions ? We are your cousins. What has onr master ? He has
the pretty ivory inkstand. Does he give it to us ? He does not
give it to us. To whom does he give the gold pencils? He gives
them to thee. Does he give me the pretty book ? He gives it to
thee. Does he give me the papers ? He does not give them to
thee, he gives them to us. To whom do the gardeners give their
fruits 1 They give them to us. What books do those little boys
seek ? They seek those of the master. Do they not seek those of
your brother ? No, sir, they do not seek them. What dictionaiy
do you seek ? I seek the one of my brother.
30.— TRENTTfiME LEgON.
8 4
£tbe, to he,
Uhef SeU Eit-Uf nest
Is he not ? He is not. N^est-il pas ? II nVst pas.
Are they f They are, Sont-iUf Ih sont.
Are they not ? They are not. Ne sont-ils pas ? Us ne sont pas.
At the house of. At my house, Chez (preposition). CJuz tnoi.
At my father's, or the house of my Chez mon p6rc.
father.
At my nncle^s, or the house of my Chez mon oncle.
uncle.
He is at my grandfather's. II est chez mon grand-pdre.
They arc at my brother's. Hs sont chez mon fr^re.
ft to him. Them to him« Le luL Les IvL
Do yon gire it to him ? Le lui donnez-vous ?
I do not give it to him. Je ne le lui donne pas.
We give them to him. Nous les lui donnons.
Which (relative pronoun). Q^i (subject). Q^e (object).
Yon seek the book which is here. Yous cherchez le livre qui est icL
You seek the book which I have. Yous cherchez le livre que j'aL
We here see that qui Is the subject and que the object of the fbllowiog verb.
I take the pencils which are of gold. Je prends les boutons qui sont d'or.
I take the pencils which' you give me. Je prends les boutons que vous me
donnez.
We see the horses which are in the Nous voyons lesohevaux qui sont ^MOB
field. le champ.
We see those which you have. Nous voyons ceux que vous avez
60 PRELIMINARY EXERCISKS.
Ou est votre frere ? II est cliez men pere. Votre coasin est-il
chez votre ODclet Nod, monsieur, il est chez moi. Ou sont vos
livresl Us sont U sur le banc. Vos freres sont-ils chez votre
p6re ? Non, madame, ils sont chez moi. Quel livre avez-voas f
J'ai celui de mon frere. Ne le lui donnez-vous pas t Je le lui
donne. Lui donnez-vous vos papiers ? Je ne les lui donne pas.
Ne donnes-tu pas tes themes aux maitre ? Je Ics lui donne. Je
veux Fencrier qui est sur le banc, et mon fr^re veut le livre que
vous avez. Ou est le neveu de votre voisin? II est chez moi, et
les petits gardens sont chez mon oncle. Donnez-vous le marteau
au ma^on. Je le lui donne. Donnez-vous les gateaux au petit
garden ? Je les lui donne. Je prends les livres qui sont ici, et
vous prenez le canif du maitre. Me donnes-tu ce joli anneaut Je
ne te le donne pas, je le donne a ton fr6re.
Where is your friend 1 lie is at my house. Is your brother
at the neighbor's ! No, sir, he is at my father's. Where are your
cousins ? They are at my uncle's, and the children of the neighbor
are at my grandfather's. Have you not the knife of tlie master
I have it. Do you give it to him ? I give it to him. Do you
give the rakes to the gardener ? I give them to him. Does he
give his fruits to your father 1 He gives them to him. Where are
the children of the neighbors ? They are at my house. I take the
book which is there on the bench, and you take the ivory inkstand
of the master. Do you seek the papers which are here t No, sir,
I seek the papers which you have. Whom do you see ? I see the
little boy who has my book. What knife do you take I I take
the one of ivory. Does the countryman wish for our horses t No,
sir, he wishes for those of the neighbors. Do those men seek their
pencils which are here *? No, sir, they seek the books which we
have. Do they give them to the master? They give them to
him and he gives them to us.
31.— TRENTE ET UNIfiME LEgON.
1 6
Aller, to go.
Do you go, are you going f AlUz-vow f
We gO) we are going. Nous allons.
DoBt thou go, art thou going! Vas-tu f
PRELIMINARY EXERCISES. Gl
I go, I am going. Je vais.
To our haute. To your haute, Chez nout, Chez voub.
To kit hottte. To their houte. Chez luL Chez eux.
To ihyhouten I am going to thy house. Chez tot. Je vais chez toi.
Art thou not going to our house ? Ne vas-tn pas chez nous ?
I am not going to your house. Je ne Tais pas chez tous.
Are you not going to his house? N^allez-Tous pas chez lui?
We are going to their house. Nous aliens chez eux.
r^ , . , ^ , . , S Celui qui. Ceuz qui (subjects).
Here again qtU is the subject and que the object of the following verb.
What book have you ? Quel livre avcz-vous ?
I hare that which is here. JW celui qui est ici.
I have that which you seek. J^ai celui que yous cherchez.
What papers do they seek ? Quels papiers cherchent-ils ?
They seek thote which are on the bench. lis cherchent ceux qui sont sur Ic banc.
They seek thote which you wish for. Us cherchent cetix que tous voulez.
Ou vas-tut Je vais chez moi. Ne vas-tu pas chez noust Je
ne vais pas chez vous, je vais chez mon fr5re. N'allez-vous pas
chez lui? Non, monsiear, noas alloDS chez nous. Allez-vous chez
le voisin? Non, mademoiselle, nous n'allons pas chez lui. 0(\
allez-vous t Nous allons chez vous. N'allons-nous pas chez
nous? Nous allons chez ces hommes. Vas-tu chez eux? Je
ne vais pas chez eux ; je vais chez toL Quel livre donnez-vous d
cet en&nt? Je lui donne celui qui est chez moi. Me donnez-vous
celui que je veux ? Je vous donne ceux qui sont chez vous. Quels
cahiers avez-vous ? J'ai ceux que le maitre me donne. Que cherche
cet homme ? H cherche ses gants. Cherche-t-il ceux qui sont ici ?
Non, monsieur, il cherche ceux de cet enfant. Quel encrier voulez-
vons ? Je veux celui du maitre. Ne voulez-vous pas celui que nous
avons ? Je ne le veux pas. Vas-tu au magasin ? Non, madame,
je vais chez moi.
Where art thou going? I am going to the store. Art thou
not going to my house ? I am not going to thy house. Where are
you going ? We are going to our house. Are you not going to
oar house ? We are not going to your house. Is my brother at
your house ? No, sir, he is at his house. Where are your cousins ?
They are at their house. Do you wish for the book which I have ?
I wish for the one which is at your house. What knife do you seek?
I seek that of your little brother. Do you wish for those books which
62
PRELIMINARY EXERCISES.
I have 1 No, sir, I wish for those which are here on the bench. Do
you seek the children who are in the garden? No, sir, I seek those
whom you seek. To whom do you give that fruit 1 I give it to
the little boys. Do you not give it to me I I do not give it to
thee. Does the general give us his horse f He does not give it to
us. Does he give it to the soldier t He does not give it to him.
32.— TRENTE-DEUXIfiME LBgON.
Alleb, to go.
Doe$ he go, is he going f
He goes, he is going.
Do they go, are they going f
They go, they are going..
Something. Nothing, not any thing.
Bomevohere. Nowhere, not any tcfiere.
To-day. Now, at present.
This morning. This evening.
Where is your father going to^lay?
He is not going any where.
Are your brothers going any where ?
They are going nowhere.
Where is your cousin going this morn-
ing?
He is going to the store.
Are you going any where this evening ?
I am going now to my grandfather's.
.Does the master give you any thing ?
Va-t-Uf
nva.
Vont-ils.
Us vont
Quelque chose. Rien {ne bef. the verb).
Quelque part. Nulle part (ne bef. v.).
AujovnThuL A present.
Ce matin. Ce soir.
Oh va votre p6re aujourd'hui?
n ne va nulle part.
Yos fr^res vont-ils quelque part?
Us ne vont nulle part.
Oil va votre cousin ce matin ?
n va au maga^n.
Allez-vous quelque part ce soir?
Je vais k pr6sent chez mon grand-p^re.
Le maitre vous donne-t-il quelque
chose ?
n mo donne quelque chose,
n ne vous donne rien.
n ne va nulle part Scs fils ne
lis vont au palais du roi. Votre
n va chez lui. Yos
Us vont k pr6sent
He gives me something.
He gives you nothing.
Ou va le g^n^ral ce matin ?
vont-ils nulle part aujourd'hui ?
frere Charles va-t-il quelque part ce soir?
cousins vont-ils quelque part aujourd'hui?
chez mon oncle. Oi\ vont ses petits garc^ons ce matin ? lis vont
au jardin du marchand. Vont-ils quelque part ce soir? Non,
monsieur, ils ne vont nulle part. Que me donnez-vous? Je ne
vous donne rien. Donnez-vous quelque chose k mon frere ? Je ne
lui donne rien. Le maitre donne-t-il quelque chose aux petits
PRELIMINARY EXERCISES. 63
gar^ons 1 U lenr donne ses jolis livres. Lenr donne-t-il son joli
eilbrier ? II le lenr doune. Les enfants donnent-ils leiirs fruits au
maitret Us les lai donnent Me donnez>vous ce joli annean?
Je ne vous le donne pas. Le donnez-yous ik mon fr^ret Je le lui
donne.
Where does the general go to-day 1 He is going to the palace
of the king. Are his sons going any where now ? They are not
going any where. Is your bpother going to the general's this morn-
ing? No, sir, he is going to our grandfather's. Where are the
children going this evening? They are going to the garden. Do
yon give any thing to the mason ? I give him nothing. Whom do
yon see ? I see the man who seeks yoo. Does the master take the
book which is on the bench ? He takes the one which yon wish for.
Does he give it to your brother? He does not give it to him.
Does he give it to you ? He gives it to me. What papers do you
seek ? I seek those which are here, and my brother seeks those
which you have. Where are your brothers? They are at the
neighbor's. Where are you going now ? I am going home (to my
house). Is your uncle going any where to-day ? He is going no-
where. Are you going to our house this morning? No, sir, we
are going to the neighbor's. Where are the soldiers going this
evening? They are going nowhere. Do you give them any thing ?
I give them nothing.
CONVERSATIONAL PHKASES.
Ah ! how do you do ? It is an age Ah ! comment tous portcz-voua ? II y
since I have seen joa. a un si^cle que je ne tous ai vu.
I am very well, thank you ; and I am Je me porte trte-hien, merei ; et je
delighted to see you in good suis charm6 de vous voir en bonne
health. sant^.
Where have you been during all the Oil avez-vons M pendant tout le
time since I have seen you ? temps que je ne vous ai pas vu?
I have been to New Tork, where I J^ai ^t6 k New York, oii je suis rest6
stayed two months. deux mois.
I am very glad to see you ; how long Je suis bien aise de vous voir ; depuls
have you been back? quand ^tes-Tous de retour ?
Only since yesterday. And how are Depuis hier seulement. Kt comment
they all at your house ? va tout ic monde chcz vous?
Erery body is well. Tout le monde se porte bien.
G4
CONVERSATIONAL PHRASES.
How do your mother and Bister do ?
My sister is perfectly well, but my
mother is indisposed.
Ah, what is the matter with her ?
She has a very bad headache.
Is she subject to headaches ?
No, she often has the teethachc, and
a sore throat, but not the head-
ache ; perhaps she has taken cold.
L am yery sorry, and I hope that it
will be nothing.
Is your father at home ?
No, sir, he has gone to the country
for a week.
And is your brother still absent ?
He is absent at present, but he will bo
back to-morrow.
Will it not rain to-morrow ?
I belieye not ; it is very fine weather
at present.
It has been very agreeable weather,
but it begins to be too dry.
Do you not like warm weather ?
I like warm weather in winter, but in
summer I prefer cool weather.
Come and dine with me to-day.
I cannot to-day, but to-morrow I am
at your command.
Well, good-by; we shall see you to-
morrow about five, it is agreed.
I shall not fail
Comment se portent madamc votre
m5re et mademoiselle votre soeur?
Ma soeur se porte parfaitement bien,
mais ma mere est indispos6c.
Ah, qu'est-ce qu'elle a done ?
Elle a tr^mal a la t6te.
Est-elle sujette aux mauz de t^te ?
Non, elle a souvent mal aux dents, et
mal k la gorge, mais non pas k la
t^te ; elle s'est pcut-^*tre enrhu-
m6e.
Ten suis bien fftch6, et jVsp^re quece
ne sera rien.
Monsieur votre p^re cst-il k la maison ?
Non, monsieur, il est al]6 k la campagne
pour t^ne semaino.
Et monsieur votre fr5re est-il encoro
absent ?
II est absent a present, mais demain il
sera de retour.
Ne pleuvra-t-il pas demain ?
Jc crois que uon ; il fait bien beau
temps k present.
II a fait un temps tr6s-agr6ablc, mais
il commence k fairc trop sec.
N'aimez-vous pas la chaleur ?
En hiver, j'aimc la chaleur, mais en
d*t^, je pr^f^re un temps frais.
Yenez diner avcc nous aujonrd^bui.
Aujourd^hui jc ne le puis pas, mais
demain je suis k vos ordrcs.
Eh bien, adieu ; on vous verra demain
vers cinq heurcs, c'cst convcnu.
Je n^y manquerai pas.
FEEI^OH GEAMMAE.
1.— PREMIfeRE LEgON.
AVOIE, TO HAVE. FLBST AND SECOND PEBSON.
Have. You, Avez.* Votta.
Z Have. Je, At,
Have you? I have. Avez-voua? J'ai.
1. When the pronoun follows tbo verb, it ia joined to It by ft hyphen.
2. Je becomes/ before a vowel or a silent A.
77ie (singular). Ze (masculine). Za (feminine).
ITie (plural). Ze8 (maa.). Lea (fern.).
a. The plaral of nonns is generally formed in French as in English, by adding to the
lingular an «, silent in pronunciation.
4^ AH nouns in French are either masculine or feminine. They have no neuter gender.
\£a6ealine nouns will be placed In the leflrhand column, and feminine in the right, as seen
below.
The book.
The books.
The desk.
The desks.
Thep<q>er.
The papers.
The fruU,
The fruits.
The pen.
The pens.
The table.
The tables
The Utter.
The letters.
The apple.
The apples.
KASOTTLZyS.
Le livre.
Les livrea.
Le pupitre.
Les pupitres.
Le papier,
Les papiers.
Le fruit,
Les fruits.
1a plume.
Les plumes.
La table.
Les tables.
La lettre.
Les lettres.
La pomme.
Les pommes.
5. As here seen, le Is used with the moaculine singular of nouns, la with the feminine
ftin^Jar, and Ua with the plural of both numbers ; L e. The article agrees with Its noun in
gender and number.
Sir, mister. Madam, Monsieur. Madame.
ft. Mofuiew Is contracted to M. and madame to Mme. ; but only before a proper name.
Monaitur is proaoonced with both the n and the r silent
Have you the book ? Avez-vous le llvre ? ^
Ko, sir, I have the pen. Non, monsieur, j'ai la plume.
* Words introduced for the Arst time are printed in Italics, and their pronunciation Is
marked at the bottom of the pages where they occur. The figures mark the simple vowol-
soands accordin;; to the table, pa^e 8. The silent letters are In Italics. In a few coses the
sounds are denoted by a change In the letter. Monosyllables, in which each letter has its
natural sound, ad given on pages 8, 10, 1 1, it is deemed unnecessary to mark.
1 • IS 6 r 13 cs 32 IS 1 1 las ssia u u is •
a-reo, voa«, al, Ie«, livr«, plume, pu-pitr«, tabid, po-pier, fruity pomme, moi^-sieur,
II 11 4 13 5
mo-dame, non, pre-mler.
66 THE SECOND LESSON.
1. Avez-vous les livrest 2. Non, madame, j*ai les plames.
3. Avez-vous le pupitre 1 4. Non, monsieur, j'ai la table. 5. Avez-
vous les papiers ? 6. Non, madame, j'ai les lettres. 7. Avez-vous
les fruits? • 8. Non, monsieur, j'ai les pommes. 9. J'ai le livre ;
avez-vous le papier ? 10. Non, madame, j'ai la lettre.
1. Have you the pen? 2. I have the pen. 3. Have you the
book? 4. No, sir, I have the paper. 5. Have you the desks?
6. No, madam, I have the tables. 7. Have you the letter? 8. I
have the letter. 9. Have you the papers? 10. No, sir, I have the
fruit 11. Have you the apples? 12. I have the apples. 13. I
have the books ; have you the tables ? 14. No, madam, I have the
desk.
2.— DEUXIfiME LECON.
GENDEE OF NOUNS.
i. Names of males are mascnlinc, as le roi^ the king ; U liant the lion.
2. Names of females are feminine, as la reifie^ the queen ; la lionne^ the lioness.
8. Names of things, and also of animals, when the male and female are not ea^ly dis-
tinguished, are generally feminine if they end in e mute, and masenline if not ending in •
mute, as la plume^ the pen; la tortue, the turtle; U ftr^ the iron; It rotaigfuA^ the
nightingale. To this rule, however, there are many exceptionSi For more on this subject,
see Orammaiical RuUa and PrindpUa^ psgo 428-9.
Yes. And, Oui, Si, EL
4 Fes, in answer to a negative question, is most commonly 9L
xABcinjinB.
nxximrs.
The coffee.
The /or*.
Le cafi.
LsifourehetU.
The sugar.
The/owr.
hQsttcre.
L&farine,
The bread.
The meat.
Le pain.
loLviande.
The tea.
The beer.
Le thL
La biere.
The dish.
The candU,
Leplat.
La chandelU,
6. Le and la become P before a vowel or a silent h.
The inkstand. The ink. Venerier, Ventre.
The milk. The wUer. Le lait. Veau.
The bread and the meat. Le pain et U viandc.
Tea, sir. Tea, madam. Qui, monsieur. Oni, madame.
Mirny it. Her^ it. Le. La.
Them (mas.). Them (fern.). Les. Les.
8. These pronouns are placed immediately beibro the verb, and 2e, 2a, are elided like the
article above.
♦ Fruit Is more ly^quently plural in French than in English.
s IB 5 a \ 1% 14 ns « IS7 1 s s s las s
et, four-chett#, bucr«, ik-rine, pain, vi-ande, tA6, bl-cr«, plat, chan-dclle, en-cricr, oncrf,
7 IT 7 9 M7
laU, eau, le«, dcu-zium^.
THE THIRD LESSON. 07
HaTe yon the coffee ? Ayez-vous le caf6 f
Yes, sir, I have it Qui, monsieur, je l*ai.
Hare yoa the fork? Avez-yous la fonrchettc?
I haye it Je Tai.
Haye you the inkstands ? Ayez-youB les encriers f
Tes, madam, I haye them. Qui, madame, je les ai.
7. Zs standfl for a noan in the maaenllne singnlar, kt for one in tho feminine singaUr,
and les for the plaral of both genders; L e. Pronouns agree with their anteoodenta In gen-
der and number.
1. tPai le sacre ; avez-vons la farine ? 2. Oui, monsieur, je Tai.
3. Avez-voDB le th6? 4. Oui, madame, j'ai le th6 et le beurre.
5. Avez-vous le platt G. Non, monsieur, j'ai la chandeUe. 7. Avez-
vous I'encret 8. Oui, madame, j'ai I'encre et la plume. 9. Avez-
vous le lait? 10. Oui, madame, je Pai. 11. Avez-vous I'eau et
le caf6 ? 12. Oui, monsieur, je les ai. 13. J'ai les pupitres et les
tables; avez-vous le papier? 14. Oui, madame, je I'ai. 15. J'ai
la fouTcliette et le sucre ; avez-vous la viande? 16. J'ai la viande,
la farine et le pain.
1. Have you the beert 2. Yes, sir, I have it 3. Have you
the dish and the candle? 4. Yes, madam, I have them. 5. Have
yoa the inkstand ? 6. I have it, and I have the milk and the
water. 7. I have the coffee ; have you the sugar and the milk ?
8. No, sir, I have the bread, the flour, and the meat. 9. Have you
the fork? 10. Yes, sir, I have it 11. Have you the dish? 12.
Yes, madam, I have the dish, the fork, and the candle. 13. Have
yoa the tea and the butter? 14. I have them, and I have the
coffee, the milk, and the water.
3.— TROISIfeME LEgON.
AOBEEMENT OF ADJECTIVES.
1. French e^J^cti^^s <^^® varied in gender and number. The plural of ndjectives, like
that of nofuna, is generally formed by adding « to the singular.
2. The feminine of French adjectives always ends in e mute. When, therefore, the
masculine enda in a silent e, it is unchanged in the feminine ; but when it does not end in a
silent e, it takes one for tho feminine.
MASOiTLnnt. nacnriKa.
Young (singnlar). Jeune. Jeune.
Young (plural). Jeunes. Jnmes,
^ . i Le deuxieme.* La deuxieme.
^"^ ««^ ( Le second. La seconde.
* DetKeime is the second of a scries.
0 4 21 « SI
Jeune, se-gon<f, se-gonde.
68
TH£ THIRD LESSON.
The tfiird.
Le troisihne.
La troinone.
Large (singular),
Grand (gros).
Orande {grouey
Large (plural).
Grands.
Grandes.
Bad,
Mauvais,
Mauvaiae.
My (singular).
Mbn.
Ma,
Jfy (plural).
Mes.
MeB.
Tour (singular).
Voire.
Votre.
Your (plural).
V09.
VOB.
My wine.
My bottU.
Mon vin.
Ma houteilU.
Your gUm,
Your
plate.
Voire verre.
Votre attiette.
My butter.
My cream.
Mon beurre.
Ma creme.
Your volume.
Your
leaf.
Votre volume.
YoiTQfeuiUe.
8. Adjectires as^eo with tholr nouns In gond«r and nambor.
The second volume. The second leaf.
The bad butter. The bad cream.
The large glasses. The large plates.
Bfy inkstands. My bottles.
Your volumes. Your leaves.
Or. Also.
The first or the second.
The glass and the bottle also.
Lo second volume. La seconde feuille.
Le mauvais beurre. La mauvaise cr^mc.
Les grands verres. Les grandes aa-
sicttes.
Mes encriers. Mes bouteillcs.
Vos volumes. Vos feuilles.
Ou. AusH.
Le premier ou le second.
Le verre et la bouteille aussi.
1. J'ai mon vin et votre bouteille. 2. Avez-vous le deuxieme
on le troisi^me volume ? 3. J'ai le deuxieme et le troisi^me aussi.
4. Avez-vous les grands encriers ou les grandes chandelles ? 5. J'ai
les grands encriers et la mauvaise encre. 6. Avez-vous votre vin ?
7. J'ai mon vin et mes verres. 8. Avez-vous vos grandes assiettes ?
9. Je les ai. 10. Avez-vous le beurre ou la cremet 11. J'ai le
beurre et la cr6me aussi. 12. Avez-vous le mauvais sucret 13.
Non, monsieur, j'ai le mauvais ih6 et la mauvaise biere.
1. Have you the first volume or the second? 2. I have the
second and the third. 3. Have you the bad flour ? 4. Yes, sir, I
have it. 5. Have you the bad bread 1 6. Yes, madam, I have it
7. Have you the large bottle ? 8. I have the large bottle and the
large glass. 9. Have you your plates? 10. Yes, sir, I have my
plates and my wine. 11. I have the bad butter; have you the
cream ? 12. Yes, madam, I have it. 13. Have you the first leaf
or the second? 14. I have the first leaf and the second also.
15. I have the large leaves and the large volumes.
* 8ee lesson 4, 2.
» 127 S 8 17 17 10 r 10 7 SI 7 U 17 U
troi-zium«L graiuf, grander gro«, sroaM, niaa*TaIi>, inau-vaiz<>, mon, mo<, Totr«f voc, vin,
18 « 7 1 134 11 * MM » IT W
boa>tcin«, verr0, a«-slctt«, bearr«, crdm«, vo-lum«, fouill^, au«-si.
THE FOURTH LESSON. 69
4.— QUATRlfiME LEgON.
F£MININ£ OF ADJECTIVES.
1. We hare seen (Leeson 8, 2) that the femiolne of adjeetives Is genenllj fonned by
adding a silent e, as le mauvaii tli^, la mauvaite bidre ; and that when the mascaline ends
In « mate, the fbminino is the same, as le roi eoupable^ the guilty king ; la reine eaupabU^
the guilt J qneen.
3. Adjectiyes ending in el^ eil^ Un, ot^ as^ ot^ et^ ot^ doable the final consonant and add
s mate ; as,
MASCUUKS. RMZKnnB.
Whaty which (adjective). Quel. QtteUe.
Good. Bon, Bonne,
Bigy toarse (also large). Gros, Grosse,
%opareU^ pareilU, equal ; aneUn^ aneUnns^ ancient ; ffrcUy grants fat; tnuety mtuUe^
mote; ao<^ 9oUe^ foolish.
& Ac^'ectlves ending in/change it to «e, and those In m to m, for the feminine, as vi/^
H9€, llrely ; heureutu, htureiue^ happy.
4. Adjectives, as also noans, ending in e»r, change these letters, for the feminine, some«
tinoes into euM, as mtnteur, nunimuey lying; Wee, as aeteur, actric^^ one who acts;
tfreaae, as peeheur^ pMure»8€^ slnAil. Sometimes by the general mle, as mallleur^ mei'
iZevrs, better. For more on this subject, see Grammatical EtUea and PrinclpUs, p. 485-6.
Small, little; the small one, tlu little Petit, U petit. Petite, la petite.
one.
& One after an a^jcctlTe is not to be translated into French. The good (one), le hon,
la homne; the big (one), le groe, la groete.
What heef (or ox). What cow. Quel heeuf. Quelle vache.
The good hat. The good slate, Le bon chapeau. La bonne ardoise.
The coarse ehoe. The coarse boot, Le gros Soulier. La grosse botte.
The large glove. The large chair. Le grand gani. La grande chaise.
The little bag. The small trunk, Le petit sac. La petite malic.
Have If Ton have, Ai-jef Votu avez.
What. Que (qu^ before a vowel or a silent h).
0. What, belonging to a noon, is quel; meaning what tfUng^ it is que.
What hat have you ? Quel chapeau avez-vous ?
What have you ? Qu'avez-vous ?
Have I the good beef? Ai-je le bon boeuf ?
You have it. Vous Tavez.
Have I the coarse boots ? Ai-je les grosses bottes ?
Tou have them. Vous les avez.
1. Ai-je la petite vache ? 2. Vous I'avez. 3. Ai-je votre ardoise ?
4. Non, monsieur, vous avez mon petit sac. 5. Quels souliers avez-
Tons? 6. J'ai les bons souliers et les bonnes bottes. 7. Ai-je vos
gants? 8. Oui, monsieur, vous les avez. 9. Qu'avez-vous 1 10.
» n 15 9 JO » U » 0 1 11 1 12 6 11 »
kcL bon, bonn«, boeuf (pL bosnA), mcn-teur, men-teozo, ac-tenr, ac-tric^, pe-ciieur, pec ii«-
c I ll«l»lBia5 u s * ♦!« *w *._'... T
reML vache, cha-pcao, ar-dolw, son-Uer, bott«, gan<, chaixe. po-t«, pe-Ut^, ko, ka-tn-cm*',
mei-Uenr, mei-lleore.
70
THE FIFTH LESSON.
J'ai les grandes chaises et les petites malles. 1 1. Qaels boeufs avez-
Yoas? 12. J'ai mes boeufs et mes vaches. 13. Ai-je votre cha-
peau ? 14. Vous Tavez. 15. Ai-je votre ardoise *? 16. Non, ma-
dame ; Tous avez voire ardoise et votre livre. 17. Qu*avez-voiist
18. J'ai mon sac et mes gants. 19. Avez-voos la grosse chaise et
la petite malle 1 20. Je les ai.
1. What have you 1 2. I have the shoes and the boots.
3. What shoes have you ? 4. I have the good ones. 5. Have I
your gloves? 6. No, sir, I have them. 7. What hat have you?
8. I have the good hat and the good boots. 9. What slate have
yout 10. I have the big one. 11. Have you the small gloves?
12. Yes, madam, I have them. 13. What cow have you? 14. I
have the good cow. 15. What ox have you ? 16. 1 have the large
one. 17. Have you the large chair? 18. No, sir, I have the small
one. 19. What bag have you? 20. I have the little one. 21.
What have you ? 22. I have the bag, the chair, and the trunk.
23. What trunk have you ? 24. I have the big one. 25. Have I
your trunks ? 26. No, sir, I have them.
5.— CINQUIfiME LEgON.
AVOIB, TO JLAVE. FIRST AND SECOND PERSON NEGATIVE.
A^oi» Ne-piUf ne-point.
1. Jir« ifl placed before the verb, pas and point after it Paint la atronger than pat, iir«
becomes tC before a vowel or a ailent h.
Have jou not the fork ?
I have it not.
Havo I not your inkstandfl ?
You have them not
Tou have not. I have not.
N^ayez-vous pas hi fourcbette ?
Je ne Tai pas.
N*ai-je pas tos encriers?
Vous ne les areis pas.
Vous n'avez pas. Je n*ai pas.
HABOtnJNE.
A J <me.
Un.
Une.
II pencil.
A BoU-cellar,
Un crayon.
Une saliere.
A eoptf-book.
^page.
Un cahier.
Vnepoffe,
Uj father.
My mother.
Mon pere.
Ma mere.
A brother.
A aieter.
Un frere.
Une eamr.
Pretty^ the pretty one.
Mi, lejoli.
Jolie, In jolle.
The knife.
The spoon.
Le eouieau.
La euiller.
The cotton.
The wool.
Le eoton.
La laine.
1 1814 Si aa
AU21 113T 1
115 1 7 7
7 II IS U U IS
pas, polnf, un, un*, cra-yon, sa-lior«, ca-Aier, pag<», p(ir«, mcT«, fr6rd, aoeur, Jo-ll, )o-ll«»
» If u 4 A i< n 7 14 u 7
cou-teau, cu-iller, co-ton, laine, cin-ki-cme.
THE FIFTH LESSON. 71
Of ^ from, /)«, (f before a rowel or a sOent A.
I have a leaf of my book. J^ai une feuille de mon Ilrre.
What have I ? Qu'ai-je ?
Toa hare the pencil of my father, or Voua avez le crajon de mon pfire.
my father's pencil.
S. The English poeseasiye caoe is always translated, as in this last phrase, with ds be-
Ibre the possessor. The French have no possessive case.
My sister^s glove (the glove of my sis- Lo gant de ma soeor.
ter).
Edxard'i book. Henrjfs pen. Le livre ^Edouard. La plume ^Henru
Uy fathcr^B oxen. Lea bosufs de mon pdre.
My mother*a cows. Lea vaches de ma mdre.
Have you not my brothers* copy- K^avez-vous pas les cahiem de mes
books ? frdres ?
I have not your sisters^ spoons. Je n'ai pas les cnillers de vos sceurs.
Have I not your salt-cellar? N^ai-je pas votre salidre?
Yes, sir, you have it. Si, monsieur, vous Tavez.
1. N'arez-vous pas la premiere page de mon livre 1 2. J'ai la
premiere page et la seconde aussi. 3. Avez-vous mon joli couteaut
4. Je ne Tai pas. 5. Avez-voua le coton ou la laine t 6. J'ai le
colon, je n'ai pas la laine. 7. N'ai-je pas votre crayon f 8. Vous
ne Tavez pas. 9. N'avez-vous pas la saliere de ma mere? 10. Je
ne I'ai pas. 11. N'ai-je pas les cahiers de vos frdres? 12. Non,
monsieur, vous ne les avez pas. 13. N'avez-vous pas le couteau do
mon p6re? 14. Si, monsieur, je I'ai. 15. N'avez-vous pas le cou-
teau et la cuiller d'Edouard ? 16. Si, madame, je les ai. 17. N'ai-
je pas un bon crayon ? 18. Vous avez un bon crayon et undbonne
plume. 19. J'ai le coton d'Edouard et la laine d'Henri.
1. What have you? 2. I have a salt-cellar and a spoon.
3. What salt-cellar have you ? 4. I have the salt-cellar of Henry.
5. Have you not my copy-book ? 6. I have not your copy-book, I
have your pencil. 7. What leaf have you ? 8. I have the first leaf.
9. Have you not the third page ? 10. I have not the third, I have
the first and the second. 11. Have you not the cotton of my fa-
ther? 12. I have not the cotton, I have the wool. 13. Have I
not your brother's knife ? 14. Yes, sir, and you have the pretty
spoons. 15. Have I not your father's hat? 16. No, sir, you have
it not- 17. Have you not the gloves of your mother? 18. Yes,
sir, I have my mother's gloves, my brother's pencil, and my sister's
pen. 19. Have you not the wool? 20. No, sir, I have it not
21. I have my sister's pretty book.
72 THE SIXTH LESSON.
6.— SIXIfiME LEgON.
THE SAME CONTINUED.
Have litf Have I it not f Vai-je f Ne Vai-je pott f
Have yen it f Have you it not f Uavez-Toas f Ne Payez-TOiis ?
Have you them? Have you them not? Les avez-vous? Ne Ics avez-roos pas?
HABCVLDnc PEXlNDrS.
The man. The wnnany vnfe. Vhomine. lAfemme.
A ton. A yoiung lady. VnfiU. Une demoitelU,
The boy. The daughter ^ girl. Lc yarpon. h&JUle.
"L Boy^ meaning child, \s petit garcon In French ; &oy«, moaning yoangmen. Is Jeunet
gen». Oarcon means also •ervant^feUow^ bachelor, etc^ Girl, also meaning child, is p«-
UtefUe; meaning young IbAj^Sb jewM JtUe. FUU alone, not meaning daughter, is aar*
vant girl, unmarried lady, etc.
ThU, thai, Ce. Ceite.
Tkese^ those. Ccs. Ces.
That boy's hat. Le chapeau dc ce petit gar^on.
That girVs book. Le livre de cette petite fiUe.
The ttick. Mis8. Le bdton. Jfademoiselle.
The button. The lady. Le bouton. La dame.
A cousin. Un cousin. Une consine.
A friend. ^ Un ami. Une amic.
The carpet. The saw. Le tapis. La seie.
2. Ce becomes cet before a vowel or a silent K
This man. That friend. Cet homme. Cet ami, cetie amie.
These men. Those friends. Ces hommes. Ces amis, ces amies.
0/ the, from the (singnlar). Ihu De la.
Of they from the (plural). J)es. JDes.
& 2>u is compounded otde le, and des otde les. Both du and de la become de F bo*
fbre a vowel or a silent h.
The stick of the boy. Le b&ton du petit gar9on.
The woman's carpet. Le tapis dc la femme.
The buttons of the young ladies. Les boutons des demoiselles.
The man's saw. La scie de rhomnic.
A cousin of your sister's friend. Un cousin de I'amio de votre sceur.
1. Quel b&ton avez-vous? 2. J'ai le baton du fils de cette
femme. 3. Je n'ai pas le livre de cette petite fiUe ; Tavez-voos ?
4. Non, mademoiselle, je ne Tai pas. 5. Je n'ai pas la scie de cet
homme ; ne Tavez-vous pas ? 6. Si, monsieur, je Tai. 7. Qu'avez-
vous ? 8. J'ai les gants de cette demoiselle et le chapeau du fils
de votre ami. 9. Je n*ai pas les joKs boutons; les avez-vonst
IS 1ST 16 1 IS 4 20 S I 21 13 S 7 S 91 I 0 «
Bl-zidm«, Aomm«, femni^, fl/a, de-moi-zell«, frnr-con, fllle, octt^ ce«, bA*ton, made-mol-
5 IS 21 I . IS U lA 12 1 II 1 IS 1 12 la 7
Eell#, bon-ton, dune, eou-zin, coa-zin«, a^ml, a-mt<<, ta*piM, sd«, des.
THE SEVEXTH LES80X. 73
10. Non, mademoiselle, je n*ai pas les jolis boutonSy j'ai le tajns de
cette dame. 11. N'avez-voos pas les plames de la petite fille?
12. Non, mademoiselle, je ne les ai pas. 13. Qu'avez-voust 14.
J*ai lea cahiers des demoiselles, le b&ton da petit gar^on et le cra-
yon de I'amie de votre consina 15. N'avez-vous pas le tapis de
cette damef 16. Si, mademoiselle, et j'ai ces jolis bontons aussi.
17. Yoas avez le livre da fils de cette femme, et j*ai les papiers des
amies de votre coosinc.
1. I Lave not the stick of this man ; have yoa it not ? 2. No,
sir, I have the book of the yoang lady. 8. Have yoa the pencils
of this woman's sont 4. No, miss, I have them not. 5. Have
yoa not the pencil of the (little) boyt 6. No, sir, I have the pretty
batton of this (little) girl. 7. Yoa have the oxen of these men;
have yoa not the letters of these ladies? 8. I have them not
9. What saw have yoa? 10. I have the saw of the friend of your
coasin. 11. Have you not the carpet of the daughter of my
cousin ? 12. Yes, sir, and I have the slates of the (little) boys.
13. What leaf have you? 14. I have the leaf of that large vol-
ume. 15. I have not my cousin's book ; have you it? 16. I have
it not. 17. Have you not the man's glove ? 18. No, miss, I have
my firait and my butter.
7.— SEPTIfiME LEgON.
AYOIB, TO HAVE, THIBD PEBSON STN6ULAB.
Who. Ha». QhL a.
He,U. 8he,U. IL ElU,
HoBhtf He has. A-t-ilf 11 a.
1. When tba verb emb with a vowel, and the Bubject-prononn Ibllowlng begins with a
Towel, -t- is ioaerted for better sound.
Has she not? She has not. ITa-t-elle pas ? Elle n*a pas.
Hasf&eit? She has it. LVt-clIe? Elle Ta.
Haa be it not f He has it not. Ke Ta-t-il pas ? II ne Ta pas.
vAscvLXKi. nuinmnB.
The leather. The porcelain^ china. Le euir. ja, porcelaine.
The coai. The dress^ gown. Vhahit, La rcbe.
This dolA. Thissi/Xr. Cedrap. Cette foie.
XhaXffoUL TbaXwUch. Get or. Cette monfre.
That ttlver^ or ) ^^ ^^^^ ^^^ argtnt. La montre d'or.
•ej^-ti^m^, W, el/«, calr, poree-lain^ AabW, rob«, drap, soK or, inontr^ argent.
74 THE SEVENTH LESSON.
A ring. K finger- A ring (with Un aniKov. Vn^hague.
ring. jewels).
Thettetl. A cravat. Vaeier. line eravate.
The iron. A pin. Lefer. Vne ipingU.
Who has ? The gentleman has. Qui a? Le numneur
8. When monsieur, madame^mademoUelU, denote % penon preaent and rapposed to
hear the speaker, tbej omit the article and demonstrative pronoons ce, eeUe, in French.
Who has the good cloth ? Qui a le bon drap ?
The gentleman has it. Monsieur Ta (if present) ; (if not pres-
ent), Le monsieur Ta.
The lady has it. The young lady has it. Madame Ta. Mademoiselle Pa.
& Wo bare seen that yes, In answer to a negatire Interrogation, is •<, and not ami.
Bach qoeatioas are often in the form of affirmation in French, with the interrogatiTe aoeent
You have not my watch ? Yous n'avez pas ma montre ?
Yes, sir, I have it. Si, monsieur, je Tai.
I have not your crayats t Je n^ai pas tos cravatcs ?
Yes, sir, you have them. 8i, monsieur, vous les aTez.
1. Qai a le bon cuirt 2. Monsieur Ta. 3. Qui a la jolie
porcelainet 4. Voire mere I'a. 5. A-t-elle la jolie robe? 6. Ella
neTapas. 7. QuiaThabit de drap? 8. Mon pere Ta. 9. Qui
a la robe de soie? 10. Cette dame Pa. 11. A-t-elle le crayon?
12. Non, mademoiselle, elle ne Ta pas. 13. N'a-t-elle pas Tanneau
d'or? 14. Elle a Tanneau d'or et une jolie bague. 15. Qui a le
couteau d'acier? 16. L'ami d'Edouard a le couteau d*acier et le
crayon d'argent 17. N'a-t-il pas les jolies cravates? 18. Si,
monsieur, et il a les 6pingles d'or aussi. 19. Qui a les souliers de
cuir? 20. Ce monsieur les a. 21. Qu'avez-vous ? 22. J'ai la
jolie porcelaine, le bon habit de drap et cette soie. 23. Qui a mon
argent? 24. Mon fr^e a votre argent, votre jolie bague et la
grosse 6pingle d'or.
1. Have you the small pins? 2. No, madam, the gentleman
has them. 3. Has he the shoes of leather ? 4. No, sir, he has
them not 5. Who has the plates of porcelain ? 6. Tlie lady has
them. 7. Has she the dress of sUk? 8. She has the dress of
silk, the watch of gold, and the pretty finger-ring. 9. Who has
the coat of cloth ? 10. The son of the gentleman has the coat and
the pantaloons. 11. Has he not the watch of silver ? 12. He has
it not 13. Has he the ring of gold? 14. He has it 15. Has
he the pretty cravats ? 16. Yes, sir, he has them. 17. Has he
aji-noan, bagiM, a^lar, cra-vat^ fer, 6-pingI«.
THE EIGHTH LESSON.
75
not the boots of leather t 18. No, madam, he has them not 19.
Who has the knife of steel? 20. My cousin has the knife of steel,
the plate of porcelain, and the coat of cloth. 21. I have the pretty
CTavats, the bnttons, and the good pins. 22. Who has the good
ulk ? 23. The lady has it ; the gentleman has it not
8.— HUITIfiME LEgON.
IKTEBSOOATIONB, WITH A NOUN FOB SUBJECT.
1. Ib qnestioiia, with a noun for rabjeet, in French, the subject Is mentioned flrsti and
fbea the qnestion is asked with the pronoan. Thos, instead of Biu A« manf Ha» 1h€
^oomam f etc, as in English, the French say, The man hoe Jut The woman ha* thef eto.
Hfts the man ? Lliomme a-t-il ?
Has the woman ? La femme a-t-elle ?
Has my brother jour money ? Hon fr^re a-t-il votre argent f
Has that lady the silk? Cette dame a-t-elle la soic ?
Has yonr friend the gold ? Votre ami a-t-il Tor ?
9l If, howeyer, an interrogatiye word, ss que, quel, oit, where, guand, when, eommsfO^
bow, eombten, how much, etc, be used, the question most begin with the InterrogatlTe in
French, as in English.
What has your friend ? Qu^sl votre ami ?
What has that great man ? Qu'a ce grand homme ?
What ling has your cousin ?
iQitel anneau a yotre cousin ? cr^
Quel anneau votre cousin a-t-ilf
8. But, when having ssked about several persons or things snceesslvely, we obange to
r, we may begin the question with the subject ; ss,
What has your brother ?
He has the book.
What has your sister ?
She has the paper.
And jfour eoiwtn, what has he f
The Aors«. The goat.
The mutton, sheep.
Qu'a votre frdre ?
II a le livre.
Qu^A votre soeur?
EUe a le papier.
£t votre eouein, quVt-il ?
A chicken.
The cabbage.
A eervant.
The captain.
Timdodk.
That wood
A hen.
A. peach.
A mule,
A pear.
This cherry.
That vest, jacket.
VABOVUm.
Le cheval,
Le mouton.
Un poidet.
Le chou,
Un domestique.
Le capitaine.
Ce manteau,
Ce bois.
noaxnn.
La chevre.
La brebis.
Unc pouU.
Une piche.
tine mule.
Une poire,
Cette cerise.
Cette vests.
4 IS it %
hul-titeu^ ehe-val, chdvre, mou-ton, bre-bi«, pou-let poule, pdeheg do-mea-tike, mule,
ca-pi-taln#, poire, num-teau, cerize, hole, vesta.
76 THE EIGHTH LESSOX.
ffamd^omey fine.
Old.
Vteux.
BtUe.
VieilU.
His, her, its (singular).
His, her, its (plural).
Son,
St8,
So.
Se*
4 /Sms 40, am, like all poascsBlTO a^JectlTes, agrco \rith the thing possesBed, and
with the poflsesaor.
not
Her son. His daughter. His or
her
Sonfils.
8a fille. Ses plumes.
pens.
1. Le capitaine a-t-il son cheval? 2. H Ta. 3. Le domes-
tique n'a-t-il pas la cb6yre 1 4. II a la ch^vre et la brebis. 5. Get
homme nVt-il pas son moatont 6. II a son mouton, ses poulets
et ses poules. 7. Le fils de cette femme n'a-t-il pas son ebon t 8.
Si, monsieur, il a son ebon et ses pScbes. 9. A-t-il la mule da
capitaine? 10. II a sa mule et son cbeval. 11. Le domestiqae
a-t-il vos fruits 1 12. Oui, mademoiselle, il a mes pt^cbes, mes
poires et mes cerises. 13. Quel manteau a le capitaine T 14. II
alemanteau de drap. 15. Qu'a le vieux domestique? 16. II a
le beau manteau et la belle veste. 17. Quel bois a-t-il 1 18. II a
mon bois. 19. Yotre domestique a-t-il la vieille mule f 20. H a
la vieille mule et la vieille brebis. 21. J'ai le poulet et la ponle.
1. Has not tbe captain bis horse ? 2. He bas bis borse, bis
mule, and bis goat. 3. Has tbe old servant bis sbeep t He bas
bis sbeep, bis goat, bis bens, and his cbickens. 5. Who bas tbe
big cabbage? 6. M7 brother has it. 7. What fruit bas be? 8.
He bas tbe peaches, the pears, and the cherries. 9. Has he the
fine cherries ? 10. Yes, madam, he has the fine cherries, the fine
peaches, and the fine pears. 11. Has the wife of the captain her
bens? 12. She has her hens and her cbickens. 13. What vest
has your cousin? 14. He has the handsome vest and the hand-
some cloak. 15. Has tbe son of that man bis wood ? 16. He bas
it 17. What have you? 18. I have tbe handsome vest, the old
cloak, and my good hat. 19. Has the brother of your friend Uie
handsome hat ? 20. He has the handsome hat and the old cloak.
* Beau applies rather to what 1a noble and imposing: /oU, to what Is delieatOi small,
and regular.
. IT . ».. It • II I r
bean, boUs, yieoo; Ti-eiUd, sea.
THE NINTH LESSON.
77
9.— NEUVIfiME LEgON.
ATOIE, TO UA VK FIRST PSBSON FLUBAL.
Have wef We have.
Have we not? We have not.
Hare we it ? We have it.
Have we it not ? We hare it not.
Avotu-nousf Noutavona.
N^avonB-nous pas ? Nous n^avona pas.
L'avons-nous? Noas Tavons.
Ne Tavons-nous paa ? Nous ne TaTons
pas.
MASCrUXS.
mimmi
The linefu
Le patUalotL
lAtoUe.
Xhe aprdu
The plwn.
Le tablier.
"La^ prune.
The coHdlestick.
The lamp.
Lc chandelier.
La lampe.
The waUteoat,
The/oioer.
hegileL
Ufleur.
The eap.
The roM.
Le bonnet.
La rote.
The doff.
Le chien.
La chienne.
The eoo/ (fossil).
The tulip.
Le eharbon (de terrc).
. La tidipe.
The charcoal.
The mutlifu
Le charbofi (de bois).
La mousteline.
AHMCviL
A potato.
Un biteuit.
Une pamme de
terre.
Our (singiilar).
Notre.
Notre.
Our (plaral).
Noe.
Nos.
Have we our capsf
Avons-nous nos bonnets 1
We have them
1.
Nous les avons.
Have we the coarse pantaloons f
Avons-nous le gros pantalon?
We have them.
Nous Tavons.
Have we not the apron ?
N^avons-nous pas le tablier ?
We have it not.
Nous ne Tavons
pas.
1. The name of the material of which any thing coDsists mtkj be naed as an a^lectivo lo
English, aod phwed before the name of tho thing; as, a gold tcaich^ a leather tkoe. This
esnnot be done in French, bat the name of the material Is placed after that of tho thing;
with de between them ; as, a utatch of gold^ a ihoe of leather^ etc. Thos,
A silver candlestick. Uh chandelier d*argent.
A gold ring. Un anneau d^or.
His leather shoes. Ses souliers de cuir.
Onr porcelain dishes. Nos plats de porcelaine.
What has that little girl ? Qu*a cettc petite fille ?
She has her silic apron. ' Elle a sou tablier de sole.
1. Quel frcdts avons-noas t 2. Notts avons les poires, les cerises
et les pnines. 3. Avons-nous le bois on le cbarbon? 4. Nous
avons le bois et le eharbon. 5. Quel gilet voire frere a-t-il t 6. 11
a le gilet de soie. 7. Quelles fleurs votre soeur a-t-elle? 8. EUo
f iST 1 ti 18 s 1 n SO ins n t 4 us s is s
nea-Tit^m^ a-TOtt«, nons, pan-ta-lon, toil«, ta-bli-er, pnin«, chan-de-licr, lampe, gi-let,
n IS s 17 is>4 ns i si r sa u is is is ssts is
fleoi; bon-iieA roz^ chien, chienn<», char^bon, terre, tn-lipe, monss-llne, bis-ouit, pomme,
notre, nos.
78 THE TENTH LESSON.
a les roses et les talipes. 0. Le gar9on a-t-il le bonnet de cair T
10. Non, monsieur, il a le bonnet de drap. 11, Qu'a le vieux
chien? 12. II a le biscuit du domestique. 18. Quelles lampes a
le capitainet 14. II a les lampes et les chandeliers d'argent.
15. Qu'a cette femme? 16. EUe a notre toile et notre mousseline.
17. La cbienne n'a-t-elle pas le biscuit ? 18. Si, elle a le biscuit
et la pomme de terre. 19. Quelle lampe le domestique a-t-il?
20. Ha la lampe d'argent 21. N'a-t-il pas son charbont 2iL
Non, il ne Ta pas.
1. What pantaloons have we t 2. We have the cloth pantar
loons. 8. Have we not our linen? 4. Yes, sir, we have our linen
and our silk. 5. What plums has the little boy? 6. He has our
plums. 7. Have we the silk waistcoats ? 8. We have the silk
waistcoats and the cloth pantaloons. 9. What flowers has that
girl ? 10. She has her roses and our tulips. 11. Has she not the
lady's flowers ? 12. No, miss, she has them not. 1%. Has that
young girl the handsome muslin? 14. She has the handsome
muslin and the handsome linen. 15. What has your father's dog ?
16. He has the little boy's biscuit and the big potato. 17. What
aprons have we ? 18. We have the silk apron and the cloth cap.
19. What potato has the little boy ? 20. He has the good potato
and the good biscuit. 21. Have you the lady's roses? 22. Tes,
miss, I have her roses and her tulips. 23. Have we not the silver
candlesticks ? 24. We have not the silver candlesticks, we have
the silver plates.
10.— DIXIilME LEgON.
AVOIR, TO HA VK THIED PERSON PLURAL.
They, lU (mas.). MUt (fcm.).
Eavt theyf They have. Ont-ils (or «//e«)? lis (or elles)
ont
Have they not? They have not N*ont-ils pas ? lis n'ont pas.
Hare they it ? They have it. L*ont-clles ? Elles Pont.
Have they it not ? They have it not. Ne Font-ila pas? lis ne Tont pas.
Have they them ? They have them Les ont-elles ? Elles ne les ont pas.
not.
llABCTLnrE. FKVnnNB.
The neighbor. Le voisin. La voUine.
The cook. Le cuiainier. La euisiniere,
dl-rl6in«, »«, ollc«, on^ rol-aln, vol-zlntf, cul-zl-nler, cal-ri-iilcr«w
THE TKNTH LESSON.
79
1. Nouns often fonn the feminine In the aame nuuiner as t4|eetlTea» and in both, when
the maaeoline ends in «r, the feminine tal^es e graTO accent on the e.
A sehoiar (school child). Uq ieolier* Une 6coliere.
A jnqnl or tekolar (of any age). Un Sieve. Une tfeiw.
A tiranger, foreigner, Un Hranger, Une Hrangere.
Th»X comKtryman, That emm/fy- Ce/xiysan. Cette /Ki^Mfifi«.
The thopkeeper^ merchant.
Le mareliand.
La marchande.
Lc fiegociani.
La demoiselle.
An egg, A key.
Vnceuf.
Une eUf,
The tobacco. The sovp.
Letabae.
lAtoHpe,
.e:ree2^efi/.
ExeeUent.
£xcelUnU.
Zast.
Dernier,
Demiere.
Their (sing.).
Leur.
Leur.
7%«r (plur.>
Leurs.
Leurs.
The bed. His bed.
lAlit.
Son lit
The handsome gold. The handsome
Le bel or. Le bel argent.
silver.
The old bird. The old feather.
Thej have their fruit and their flowers.
Ton have a handsome coat.
Le vieil oiseau. La Tieille plome.
lis ont leurs fruits et leurs fleurs.
Voos avez un bel habit.
1. Quel tabac les voisins ont-ils? 2. lis ont leur tabac. 3.
Quels oeofs les caisiniores ont-elles ? 4. Elles ont lears oeufs. 5.
Les ecoliers n'ont-ils pas lears plumes? G. Non, monsieur, ils
ont les plumes dcs marcbands. 7. Les dcolieres n'ont-elles pas
leurs crayons ? 8. Elles ne les ont pas. 9. Ces ctrangers ont-ils
leur argent? 10. Non, monsieur, ils ont Targent du n^gociant
11. (3et homme a-t-il le livre de son 6leve? 12. Non, monsieur,
il a les (Buis du paysan. 13. Qu'a cette paysanne? 14. EUe a le
beau drap de la marcbande. 15. Ces demoiselles ont-elles leurs
clefs ? 16. Elles les ont. 17. Quels livres ces demoiselles ont-elles ?
18. Elles ont leurs excellents livres. 19. Les cnisiniers ont-ils leur
• We often nee the tenn echdar, or ffood eehotary for a learned man. The translation
of that in French la navant. Savant^ applied to ladica, generally means blne-atooklng.
Student, as of law or medicine, is itudianL
t Al90i,/m. enaj, m&u, soft, and ncu^euiL new, before a vowel or a ailent A^ become
fal, mol, nouvu^ and from this form ending in t, these five adjectives form their feminine ;
aa, htl kalAU fine coat, heUe rc^t^^ fine dress; /rf e*rpoir^ foolish hopo,/o//« conduiie^ foolish
condart; mol idredon^ soft eider down, molU aisttnce^ soft case ; noutel arhre^ new tree,
nouteUe table^ new tabic.
s u fs s IS i-'T ST s 8 s s s r s n s s n i i s
^•eo-lier, e-co-llcre, C*-16vtf, 6>tran-ger, d-tran-gOre, pa-j-zan, pa-y-sanne, mar-ehand;
niar«h«ad«, n«-go-cianA osuf (pi. abaft\ el«/ t»-hac, sonpe, elc-ce^len^ ek-ceMente, der-
K§ t ni II II « i*» a 17
Bier, der-nldre, lenr, leari, lU; Ti-eU, oi-ieau.
80 THS ELEVENTH LESSON.
ezcellente soape ? 20. lis out lenr excellente soape et lenr excel-
lent caf(§. 21. L'eleve de votre frere a la demiere feuille de son
livre. 22. Quel lit avez-voas ? 23. J'u le petit lit
1. What have the coontr jwomen ? 2. They have their eggs
and their soup. 8. What have the merchants ? 4. They have the
keys of the shopkeepers. 5. Have they their excellent tobacco ?
6. No, sir, they have the keys of the neighbor and the cook's soup.
7. What have the pupils of the captain ? 8. They have the apples
of their neighbor and the cook's tea. 9. Has that scholar the sec-
ond volume or the last? 10. He has the last volume. 11. What
has that foreigner ? 12. He has a handsome horse and a pretty
little gold watch. 13. Who has the handsome bird? 14. My old
friend has the handsome bird and the handsome silver. 15. Have
those foreigners the countrymen's fruit ? 16. They have the coun-
trymen's fruit and the merchant's flowers. 17. What has that lit-
tle boy? 18. He has the old coat and the handsome egg. 19.
What flowers have those scholars ? 20. They have their handsome
roses and their handsome tulips. 21. What have we? 22. We
have the handsome flowers. 23. Have we not our candlesticks ?
24. We have our candlesticks and our handsome inkstand. 25.
Have you the big bed or the little one ? 26. I have the big bed.
11.— ONZltME LEgON.
PLUKAL OP NOUNS AND ADJECTIVES.
1. We have seen that the plaral of nonnB and adjectives la generall/ fonned bj adding
a to the singular. To this rule there are many exceptions.
2. Thoae ending In a, e, or a, are unchanged in the plurnL
The nuL The nuts. La fwix, Les noix.
The old carpet. The old carpets. Le vieux tapis. Les vieux tapis.
The coarse stocking. The coarse Le gros bas. Les gros has.
stockings.
a Those ending In al change this termination into au» for the pIuraL
The general. The generals. Le general, Les ghieraux.
The corporal. The corporals. Le caparal. Les caporaux.
The animal. The animals. V animal. Les animaux.
4, Those in aw, and nouns In cu, take x in the plural*
♦ For oxceptions to these rules, see Grammatical JSulet.
a us 90 S A 1 S f 17 1 IS I 1 IS ir 1 IS 1 1 11 17
on-zivm«, noia% ge*no-ral, gc-ne*raua:t, cap^o-ral, cap-o-raua\ a«ni-ma], a-ni>nuuuei.
THE ELEVENTH LESSON.
81
The cloak. The cloaks.
The haadsome hat. The handsome
hats.
The handsome bird. The handsome
birds.
Le manteau. Les manieaux,
Le beau chapeau. Ijcs beaux cAo-
petntx,
Le bel oiteau. Les beaux oUeaux.
MJkSCVUHK.
ramnn.
AMtore,
A Iwuse,
Un magaain.
Une maieon.
The whip.
The maid {servant).
Ufouet
1a tervante.
TbaA widower.
Th&t widow.
Ceveti/.
Cctte veuve.
Him€9t.
ffanneie.
Ifonneie,
Rich.
Ricke.
Riehe,
P<wr.
Pauvre.
Pauvre,
& Pauvre placed before the aonn means
A cake. A carriage.
What hare the corporals ?
They have the horses of the generals.
Who has the apples and the cakes t
Those bojs (young men) have them.
Who has the ngly animitls ?
That poor widower has them.
pitiable ; after it, It means poor in property.
Ft/at'n, laid, Yilaine, laidc.
Un gdtean, Une voUure.
Qu'ont les caporaux ?
Us ont les chevaux des g^n^raox.
Qui a les pommes et les g&teaux ?
Ces jeunes gens les ont.
Qui a les vilains animaux?
Co pauvre reuf les a.
1. Qa'a ceite riche veuye ? 2. EUe a la belle voiture. 3. Qa*a
ce petit gar^on ? 4. II a le fouet et les noix. 5. Qaels animaux
ces paysans ont-ils ? 6. lis ont les beaux chevaux. 7. Cette ser«
vante n'a-t-elle pas les gros gdteaux ? 8. Si, elle les a. 9. Get
bomme riche nVt-il pas une grande maison ? 10. H a une grande
maison et an grand magasin. 11. Qu'a cette servante ? 12. Elle
a le fouet da general. 13. Quels chevaux ces caporaux ont-ils?
14. lis ont leurs vilains chevaux. 15. Cette riche veuve a-t-elle
son argent ? 16. Oui, mademoiselle, et elle a I'argent de ses filles.
17. Qu'a cet honn^te homme? 18. II a son grand magasin.
19. Qui a la belle voiture ? 20. Ce veuf a la belle voiture et les
beaux chevaux. 21. Le cuisinier a ses g&teaux et ses fruits.
1. What has the maid-servant ? 2. She has the cook's cakes
and the countrywoman's chickens. 8. Has the cook your cakes ?
4. He has my cakes and my nuts. 5. Have the maid-servants the
soup? 6. They have the soup and the potatoes. 7. Have the
corporals the keys of their trunks ? 8. They have them. 9. What
animals have we ? 10. We have our horses and our sheep. 11.
S 9) 17 1 1 U 7 « IB 1 7 t 9 • 15 8 U 17
bd, oi-xean, ma-gB-zIn, mal-son, foa-e<, ser-Tvitd, veaf, T«ay«, Aoii-«Mt«, riche, pftarr«>
n »i i« 7 7 7 a 17 » a
Ti-lala, Ti-Un^ laid, laldi, gA-teau, Tol-tur«.
82
THE TWELFTH LESSON.
Have we not the handsome bird ? 12. We have it not 13. What
have we ? 14. We have the generars whip, and the money of that
young widow. 15. Has that honest man his papers ? 16. He has
them not. 17. What birds has the poor man ? 18. He has the
handsome birds. 19. Who has the rich man's horses ? 20. My
brothers have them. 21. Have they the handsome horses or the
ugly ones ? 22. They have the ugly ones. 23. Have those serv-
ants their fruit ? 24. They have it. 25. What candlestick have
we? 26. We have the old candlestick.
12.— DOUZIfiME LEgON.
SECOND PEBSON SINGULAB.
Heat thou t Thouhtut
Hast thou not? Thou hast not
Hast thou them? Thou hast them.
Hast thou it not ? Thou hast it not
Thy (singular).
Tky (plural).
A$-tuf ISicu.
N^as-tu pas ? ' Tu n'as pas.
Les as-tu ? Tu lea as.
Ne I'as-tu pas? Tu ne Tas pes.
ron(mas.). Ta (fem.).
Tea (mas.). Tea (fern.).
1. The second person singalar (tu^ ton, ete.) U considerably more used In French than
in English. It Is nsed, first to denote great intlmacf end endearment ; secondly, as In Eng-
lish, In the solemn and snbllme style ; thirdly, to the Supreme Doing, and to high dignita-
ries; and sometimes, in speaking to inferiors, and to show contempt
When respect or civility are to be expressed, the second person plnrsl, or the third per-
son, with moniieWf fnadam^ mademoUelUf etc., most be nsed. (See Lesson IS, 8.)
Thou hast thy pen ; hast thou thy pa- Tu as ta plame ; as-tu ton papier et
per and thy books ? I have them.
The tnuff. The napkin.
The 9oap. A pair,
A (Bchool) exercise. A, brush,
A relation, relative.
The ham. The ttreet.
A gun. A plank, board.
Wicked.
The beat.
My hrother-in-law. My iister-in-law.
Here. On.
The floor. On the floor.
My relation's carriage.
These guns. These plank.
tes livres ?
XABCULUnC
Le tabac d priter,
Lo sai'otu
Un theme,
Un parent,
hejambon,
Vnfuail.
MkehanU
Le meilleur.
Mon beau-frere.
let.
Le plancher.
Je les ai.
La serviette.
Unc paire.
Une bro8M.
Une parenU^
La rue.
Une planche,
Mechanie.
La meilleure.
Ma belle-icntr,
8wr.
Sur lo plancher.
La Toiture de mon parent.
Ces fusils. Ces planches.
IS lis 1 SI T n « 7 m 1 SI T 7 IS IS IS
don-sieme, a«, ton, tes, pri-zer, ser-yi-etttf, sa-von, pair^, tAiime, bross^, pa-renf, pa-rentA
t 3IU991!««a SI i II S 11I.I9I s
Jam-bon, me, fu-zi^ planche, me-chanC, m^hante, meill-enr, meill-eure, i-ci, plan-chor.
THE TWELFTH LESSON. 98
The gentleman has my knife. Mondeitr a mon coutean.
Who has your gun ? Qui a Totre fuail P
This gentleman has it here. Monsieur Ta icL
Those gentlemen have it not. Ces messieurs no Font pas.
Has the lady her hook ? Madame a-t-elle son U?re?
The young lady has it. Mademoiselle Ta.
We hare the gentleman's brush. Nous avons la broase de monaiear.
1. Votre beau-fr^re a-t-il le tabac & priser ? 2. II I'a. 3. Mon-
sien^ a-t-il une serviette ? 4. Monsieur a une serviette et une
assiette. 5. Qa'a mademoiselle? 6. Elle a le savon, la brosse
et line paire de souliers. 7. Ces messieurs ont-ils leurs themes P
8. lis ne les ont pas. 9. Qu'a votre parent ? 10. H a le jam-
bon et les pommes de terre. 11. Ces dames ont-elles leurs fleurs ?
12. EUes les ont ici sur la table. 13. Qu'a ce m^chant homme
ici? 14. n a une petite planche. 15. As-tu le meilleur fusil P
16. Je I'ai ici sur le plancher. 17. Qu*a votre belle-soeur ? 18. Elle
a son mouchoir et sa brosse. 19. Qui a le tabac a priser ? 20. Vo-
tre parent Ta. 21. Qu'a cette petite fiUe ? 22. Elle a la serviette,
le savon et une paire de gants. 23. Tu as ton crayon ; n'as-tu pas
tea cahiers aussi ? 24. Je les ai
1. Hast thou thy exercises ? 2.1 have them. 3. Who has the
best ham ? 4. The shopkeeper has it. 5. Has that wicked man the
plank ? C. He has it here on the floor. 7. Hast thou not the best
gun ? 8. No, sir, my brother-in-law has it. 9. Has your sister-
in-law the brush ? 10. She has it. 11. Who has the best soap?
12. My relation has the best soap and the best ham. 13. Has your
brother-in-law the best exercise ? 14. No, sir, my sister-in-law has
the best. 15. Has the gentleman his snuff? 16. He has it here
in this paper. 17. What has your relation ? 18. She has the nap-
kin, the brush, and the handsome gloves. 19. Hast thou the wick-
ed animal ? 20. No, madam, my relation has him. 21. What has
that boy (servant) ? 22. He has a pair of boots and a little plank.
23. Has he his shoes here ? 24. He has them here on the floor.
25. Have these gentlemen their gloves ? 26. These young ladies
have them. 27. Has the young lady her gloves ? 28. The lady
has them. Hast thou thy pencil ? I have it.
84 THE THIBTEENTH LESSON.
13.— TREIZIfiME LEgON.
£tr£, to be. fibst and second pebsonb.
Areycuf lam, JSies-vousf Je wis.
Are you not ? I am not. N^^tes-Toos pas? Je nc suib pas.
We are. We are not. Nous sommes. Nous ne sommes pas.
Wlieref There. In, Ouf Ld, Dans,
People^ persons^ men, Oens,
Gens has the adjectives before it generally feminine, those after it mascnlina.
Toang people, young men. Los jeunes gens.
Honest persons, honest men. Les honnStes gen&
1. People, meaning a people or nation, iapeupU.
2. When voue refers to bat one, the adUectlves, nonna, and pronouns belonging to It are
singalar ; when it refexs to more than one, they are plural.
Are you poor ? I am poor. £tes-YOus pauvre ? Je suis pauvxe.
Are you not our friends? N^etes-yous pas nos amis?
We are your friends. Nous sommes tos amis.
A handkerchief. The ffard, TJn mouehoir. La cow,
PLXJBAL OF COMPOUND NOUNS.
8. Nouns compounded of a sabstantlve and adjective, change both for the plaroL
Her brother-in-law. Her sister-in-law. Son beau-fr^re. Sa belle-soeur.
Her brothers-in-law. Her sisters-in-law. Ses beaux-fr^res. Ses belles-soBurs.
4. The three following are compounded of a posses^re af^ectlre and a noun.
Sir, gentleman. Sirs, gentlemen. Monsieur* (sing.). Messieurs (plu.).
Madam. Ladies. Madame, " Mesdames, **
Miss. Misses. Mademoiselle, *' Mesdcmoiselles, <*
6. SUur, dame, and detnoieelU, are not used without the prefix in addressing penona.
nor in titles.
$. Nouns compounded of two sabstantires without a preposition, take the form of the
plural with both ; as.
The cauliflower. The cauliflowers, Le chouflew, Les choux-fleurs,
7. Nouns componnded of two substantlTes Joined by a proposition, take the form of the
plaral in the first only ; as,
The potato. The potatoes. La pomme de terre. Les pommes de
terre.
8. Nonns compounded of a substantive and adverb, take the form of the plnnJ In the
substantive only; as,
The fore-runner. The fore-runners. Vavant-courettr, Les avant-coureurs.
* Monsieur is compounded otinon and sieur; madams otma and dame ; modem oi-
sells of ma and demoiselle.
T it« < mi u as a is «> u n i a u n
trei-zitoie, htes, snU, sommM, dans, jMupIs, gens, mon-choir, chou-flour, a- van^cott-reur.
THE THIRTEENTH LESSOK. 85
9. Nouns compounded of Tertai pTepoiltiona» or adTorlWi an luiduuifed in tho planL
His drink-money. Son pour-bolre. Ses pcwr-lmTe.
10. SometimM the meaning of* noon and a^Jectlye Ibrmlng a oomponnd i« anch as not
to admit a change for the pluaL
The tooth-piek. The taoih-pieks, Le eure-denU. Lea cttre-dentg.
Are you there in the house f ^tes-Tous Ik dans la maison f
I am here in the store. Je suis ici dans le magasin.
Ladies, have you your cloaks? Mcsdames, avez-vous tob manteaux ?
1. £tes-voii8 riche ? 2. Je ne saifi pas riche. 3. N'etes-Yoas
pas mon ami ? 4. Je suis yotre ami 5. Ou 6tes-yous ? 6. Nous
BQDunes icL 7. N'etes-voas pas dans la rue ? 8. Non, monsieur,
nous sommes ici dans la conr, nous ne sommes pas dans la rue.
9. £tes-voa8 Ik ? 10. Nous sommes ici dans la maison. 11. N'etes-
Toos pas dans le magasin ? 12. Non, monsieur, je suis ici sur le
plancher. 13. N'cltes-Tous pas mon parent? 14. Je suis voire
cousin. 15. £!tes-vous les amis de monsieur ? 16. Oui, mesdames,
nous sommes ses amis. 17. Mesdemoiselles, etes-vous les beUes-
soeurs du general ? 18. Oui, mesdames, nous sommes ses belles-
sceurs. 19. Qu'a ce m^chant chien ? 20. II a les g&teaux et le
jambon des petits gardens. 21. Mesdames^ avez-vous les mouchoirs
de colon ou de soie? 22. Nous avons les mouchoirs de soie.
23. Qui a la meilleure voiture ? 24. Cette riche veuve a la meil-
leure voiture et les meilleurs chevaux. 25. Quelle planche avez-
vons ? 2G. J*ai la petite planche et le bon bois.
1. Where are you ? 2. I am here. 3. Are you in the yard or
in the street ? 4. We are in the street 5. Are you not the friend
of the young widow ? 6. I am her friend and her relation. 7. Are
you the relations of that wicked man ? 8. We are not his relations.
9. What has that young man f 10. He has his whips and his
guns. 11. What animals has the countryman f 12. He has the
wicked animals. 13. Who has the best guns ? 14. Those young
men have the best guns and the best whips. 15. Are you the
brother-in-law of the rich widow ? 16. No, ladies, I am her brother.
17. Are you the relation of that young girl ? 18. Yes, I am her
cousin. 19. What has that maid-servant ? 20. She has the large
cakes, the excellent hams, and the good fruit. 21. Who has the
handsome houses? 22. The merchant has the handsome houses
and the handsome stores. 23. Has he the best butter ? 24. He
U » 1 ,t
poar-bolre, careHtente.
86
THE FOURTEENTH LESSON.
has the best butter and the best flour. 25. Who has your hand-
some bird ? 26. My sister-in-law has my handsome bird and my
handsome flowers. 27. Are you the sons of the capUin? 28. No,
miss, we are his brothers-in-law.
14.«QUAT0RZli:ME LEgON.
£tbe, to bk thied person bingulae and fibst plttbal.
Sommei-nouaf Vbus ites.
Ne Bommes-nous pas ? Vooa n^dtes pas.
Fgi-ilf Jlett, Est-ellet EUe est.
N'est-a pas ? II n'est pas.
N'est-elle pas? EUe n'est pas.
r Without a Terb, rUn ; with a rerb of which
\ it Is the object, ne before the rerb and
1 rim alter it; with a yerb of which it Is
( the subject, rUn im before the rerb.
Are we f You are.
Are we not? You are not.
lahef He is. Is she? She is.
Is be not? He is not.
Is she not ? She is not
Ifothing.
What have you ? Nothing.
Qa^avez-voos ? Rien.
I have nothing here.
Je n^ai rien id
Nothing is good here.
Bien n'est bon id
Under. But.
Sous. MaU.
UASCUUXM.
Something, any thing. A thing.
Quelque clioss.
Vne chose.
The bench.
Le banc.
AJUh. A codfish.
Vnpoisson.
TJnemonie.
An onion, A sardine.
Vnoignon.
Vne sardine.
The parasol. The clock (large).
Le parasol.
Vhorloge.
The pendulum. The dock.
Le pendule.
LsipenduU.
1. Horloge is a large clock upon some large
La ptndule is a clock for an ordinary room.
The clock of that church is large.
I have here a fine clock.
That pendulum is long.
A broom. A strawberrg.
That so/a. That cellar.
I have the chest, but I have not the
broom.
A newspaper. A den, cavern.
My chest. My room.
Have you any thing, is any thing the
matter with you?
bnildlng to sound the hours for the publla
L^orloge de cette iglise est grande.
tTai ici une beUe pendule.
Ge pendule est long.
Un balai. XJne /raise.
Ge eanapi. Gette cave.
tTai le coffre, mais je n*ai pas le baUL
Un Journal. Une caveme,
Mon eoffre. Ma chamhre.
Avez-Yous quelque chose ?
1 U llT « ni4 II T S 4 ir S SB tl 15 SB IS nSl I
ka-tor-zidm«, est, ri-en, sons, mais, kel-ke choze, bane, pols-son, mo-rus, of-gnlon, aar>
11 1 1 U IS II 8 a ITT I I r I IS 1 1 T IS
dins, pa-ra-iol, Aor-logs, pen-duls, ba-UI,fhds«i, ai-na>p6, oaT«,j<mMial, ca^Terae, eofta,
chambrs.
THE FOURTEENTH LESSON^. 87
I hare something, something is the tTai qoelqne chose.
matter with me.
What is the matter with you ? Qu^avez-Tous f
Nothing is the matter with me. Je n*ai rien.
2. Quelque eho$e ia not lued with a negative except In a qnostion.
Hare you not something? N^avez-Tous pas quelque chose?
Have yon not any thing (or nothing) ? N'avez-voas rien ?
8. Quslque ehoM^ rien, and qus InterrogntlTe, take de before a following a^jeetlTe.
Hare you any thing good ? Avez-Yous quelque chose de bon ?
I hare nothing good. Je n^ai rien de bon.
What have you pretty ? Qu'ayez-vons de joli ?
1. Sommes-noos les amis da znAichand? 2. Nous sommes ses
amis. 3. Ne sommes-nous pas ses cousins? 4. Non, monsiem',
nous ne sommes pas ses cousins. 5. Od est voire beaa-fr^re? 6. II
est dans sa chamb^^. 7. Mon parasol est-il sur le banc ? 8. Non,
mademoiselle, eUef est sur le plancher. 9. La mome est-elle dans
la cave ? 10. La morae est dans la cave, et les sardines sont ici
SOT le banc 11. L'oignon est-il sur le banc on sous le banc?
12. II est sous le banc. 13. Ou est le canap6 ? 14. H est dans
Toire cbambre. 15. Le journal est-il sur le canap6 ? 16. H est
dans votre coffre. 17. N'as-tu pas les fraises ? 18. J'ai les fraises
et les cerises. 19. As-tu les poissons ici ? 20. La morue est ici
et les sardines sont sur la table. 21. Cette horloge est grande, et
cette pendole est jolie. 22. J'ai le parasol et le balai. 23. Le
journal est sur la table, et Toignon est sur le plancher. 24. La
petite ch5vre est dans cette caveme. 25. Qu'avez-vous de gros ?
26. Je n'ai rien de gros.
1. What has that man? 2. He has his gun. 3. What is the
matter with you ? 4. Nothing is the matter with me. 5. Are we
not your relations? 6. You are our cousins. 7. Have you the
fish ? 8. No, madame, the fish is here on the bencL 9. Is the
codfish in the cellar? 10. The codfish is in the cellar, the sardines
are on the table, and the onions are under the table. 11. Where
is the newspaper? 12. It is on the sofa. 13. Has the servant
any thing ? 14. He has the broom and the parasol. 15. Have
you a chest in your room? 16. I have a chest in my room and a
trunk alsa 17. Have you the strawberries ? 18. No, sir, I have
the cherries, but I have not the strawberries. 19. I have the onion
and the sardine, and you have the parasol, the so£bs and the broom.
20. Are we in your store? 21. No, sir, we are in the store of my
88
THE FIFTEENTH LESSOK.
father. 22. Are we not your friends t 23. Ton are onr friends
and our relations. 24. Where is the clock t 25. It is in my room.
26. Have you a good clock ? 27. We have a good clock and a
good watch ; the watch is of gold, but the clock is of wood. 28.
Have yon any thing handsome t 29. I have nothing handsome.
30. TVhat have you good ? We have nothing good.
15.— QUINZIilME LEgON.
Art thou f Hum art.
Art thoa not ? Thou art not
Ar€ ihey i They are.
Are tbey not ? Tbey are not.
£TRE, to be, SECOIO) PEBSO^r BINOULAB AKD THIBD PLUSAL.
E94uf Ta 68.
N'es-ttt paa ? To n'es pas.
iSont'iUf IltMonL
\ Sant-i^lUe f Elles fiont.
iNe sont-ils pas? Us ne Bont pas.
No BODt-clIcs pas ? EIlcs ne sont pas.
IIABCVXJNS.
Un marteau,
Vivoire,
Cet arbre.
Mod oncle.
Son neveu,
Lequel,
LesqueU,
hejardin,
Le medecin.
Tbui,
Tons,
Beaucaup,
Beaucoup dlvoire.
teaux.
Little straw. Few cups. Pcu dc paille. Fen de tasscs.
1. Beaucaupt peUf and adverlM of qaantity generally, take de before the following noun.
A hamwtr.
The ivory.
This tree.
My uncle.
His nephew.
A cup,
A saucer.
This cordf rope.
My aunt.
Her nieee.
The ^raw.
The wuherwoman.
Which one, tnhai one, which.
Which onea^ fthai onet, which.
The garden.
The physician.
All (singular).
All (plural).
Much, many. Little, few.
Much ivory. Many hammers.
TtMamns.
Une taue.
Une soucoupe*
Cette corde.
Ma tante,
Sa niece.
Laquelle*
Leaguellee,
Ia paille.
La blanchitsnue,
Toute,
Toutes.
Peu (adverb).
Beaucoup de
Where is the washerwoman's cord ?
It is on the tree.
Which one has she?
Which ones are under the tree ?
I have the large cup ; which one have
you?
0^ est la corde de la blanchisseuae ?
Elle est sur Tarbre.
Laquelie a-t-cUe ?
Lesquelles sont sous Tarbre ?
tTai la grande tasse; laquelie avez-
vous?
1« lis S 1 17 1 19 SB U U 1 U SI 1 4 Ml
kin-zi6me, o^ raar-tcaOf tune, i-Toire, soa-coupA arbr«t cord«^ ondtf, tant«, neuron
nC4»lft7»Tft 114 1 »i«ai4t u
n1-do«, le-kel, la-ke12«, Ie«-kel«, les-ktllee^ Jar-dtn, pollltf, rnddt-dn, blan-ehit-aeose, toof,
toaU, tou«, toutM, beau-coup, pen.
THE FIFTEENTH LESSON. 89
Which one^ has the phyricum ? Laqnelle le m^decin a-t-il?
To, or at t/ts home of. At my unde^s Chez (preposition). Chez mon oncle.
house.
At the man's house. At my aunt*s. Chez Thomme. Chez ma tante.
& Wben Jumu b nnderstood after the poiiteasWe eaao In EngUah, eft<* most be used In
At your nephew's. At your brother's. Chez votre nereu. Chez votre frdre.
Your nieces are at the neighbor's. Yos nieces sont chez la voisine.
They are not at my father's. Elles ne sont pas chez mon p^rc.
a. Suiet^ subject, Is often applied to persons, especially to boys, in reference to their
mofttls; as,
The neighbor's son is a had boy. Le fils da voisin est un mauvaU nijet.
Edward's friend is a good boy. L'ami d'Edouard est un bon sujet.
4 £on ffarcon means nsnally goodfiUow.
Henry is a yood fellow^ but bis cousin Henri est nn bon garfon, mais son
is bad. cousin est un mauvaU tujet.
1. Les marteanx sont-ils dans votre chambre 1 2. Non, mon-
sienr, ils sont ici snr la table. 3. Oil sont les soaconpes 1 4. fiUes
8ont dans le magasin du marcband. 5. Ou sont les cordes et les
cordeaDX? 6. Elles sont sous Tarbre. 7. Vos sceurs sont-elles
cbez votre oncle t 8. Elles sont cbez ma tante. 9. Oil sont les
mcdecinst 10. Us sont cbez votre pere. 11. Le nevea da voisin
a tout Tivoire, et sa ni6ce a toute la sole, tontes les tasses et tons
les papiers. 12. Ou est la blancbisseuse ? 13. La blancbisseuse
est dans le jardin de mon oncle, et le m6decin est cbez ma tante.
14. Oil est la corde de la blancbisseuse? 15. Elle est sur le grand
arbre dans votre jardin. IG. Ce marcband abeaucoup de soaconpes
et pea de tasses. 17. Ge paysan a beaucoup de paille ; sa corde est
ici snr cette chaise. 18. Edouard est an bon gar^on, mais son petit
fr^re est an manvais sujet. 19. N'es-tu pas mon parent? 20. Je
snis ton cousin. 21. Tu es l'ami d'Henri.
1. Wbere are the shopkeeper's cords? 2. They are on the
plank under the tree. 3. Where are his iron hammers ? 4. His
iron hammers are on the floor, and his ivory knives are on the desk.
5. Has he many cups ? 6. No, sir, he has few cups and few sau-
cers. 7. Where are the lines of the washerwoman ? 8. They are
on the tree in the garden. 9. Where is the rope ? 10. It is under
the tree in the garden. 11. Has the countryman the straw?
12. He has all the straw and all the fruit. 13. Has the servant
the knives? 14. He has all the knives and all the forks. 15.
'What has tbe physician's niece ? 16. She has the parasol. 17. Which
90
THE SIXTEENTH LESSON.
one has she? 18. She has the little one. 19. Which ones has the
nephew? 20. He has the silk parasols. 21. Are thy brothers at
thy uncle's ? 22. No, sir, they are at my aunt's. 23. The nephew
of the shopkeeper has his cups ; which ones has he ? 24. He has
the cups of porcelain. 25. Which one has his niece ? 2Q. She has
the pretty ona 27. The washerwoman is at my aunt's ; she has
her line and her soap. 28. Thou art the nephew of the generaL
29. What have you bad? 30. We have nothing bad. 31. Hare
you something good ? 32. 1 have the good coffee and the good firuit.
16.— SEIZIi:ME LEgON.
ALLEB, TO GO. FIEST AND SECOND PEE80NS.
Doyouffof areycugwigf
We go, we are going.
Do you not go? are you not going?
We do not go, ve are not going.
Dost thou go f art thou going f
I go. I am going.
Dost thou not go ? art thou not going ?
I do not go, 1 am not going.
To, at. To or at my house.
To our house. At your house.
To his house. At her house.
To or at their house.
The child.
That tailor.
The pepper.
The roast beef.
The roast meat.
To tJie (singular).
To the (plural).
The country.
That river.
The city.
The kitchen.
The mountain.
Allez-wmsf
2^ous allons.
N^allcz-Yous pas ?
Nous n'allons pa&
Vas-tuf
Je vais.
Ne yas-tu pas ?
Je ne vais pas.
A.
Chez nous.
Chez lui.
Chez eux.
KASOULINB.
h'enfant.
Ce tailleur.
he poivre.
Le bceuf-Toti.
Le rotL
Au.
Aux
Chezmoi.
Chez VOU8,
Chez elie.
Chez elles.
La campagne.
Cette riviere.
La ville.
La cuisine.
La montagne*
Ala.
Aux.
1. AU and d les are not to be used in French ; bat the farmer is contracted into au
before a consonant, and the latter always into av^ A le and d la become d T before a
vowel or a silent h.
Are you going to the garden ?
AVe are going to the stores.
Art thou not going to the kitchen ?
I am going to the tree.
Allez-Tous au jardin ?
Nous allons aux magasins.
Ne vas-tu pas k la cuisine?
Je vais a Tarbrc.
7 ISS I 6 1 « 1 r e SS13 10 8 8 1 1 1 n 11 IS T
sei-zli^me, aU-ee, aZ-lon«, vm, Tai«, chej, lui, eoa% cn-fiin/; cam-pagnf, taill-eur, ri-vi-^«L
« la ir la « n n a i it 17
poiTr«, Till«, T6t!, cui-zinaf mon-tagna, an, aoA).
THE SIXTEENTH LESSON. Ql
%, Ala moUtm Is Torv often lued tor iota at ths Ko«$6 of Che penoo Tcftmd Uk
Is he at home ? Est-il k la maison, or chez lui ?
Art thou going home ? Vas-tu & la maison, or chcz toii
/ Madame est^Ile chez elle ?
, , , , , „ 1 Madame est-elle i la maison ?
b the kd/ at home ? ^ ,(,^^ ^^^^ ^ j^,
V Madame p est-elle f See les. 89.
& MeneUur, madame^ and fnademaUeUettn oftan joined to terms of reUtlonshlp and
to titlee, from poUteneaa.
Where is your father ? Oil est monsienr Totre p^re ?
Is your mother here ? Madame votre mdre est-elle ici?
Is your sister at home ? Mademoiselle yotre soeur est-elle chez
eUe?
Where is the general f 0^ est monsieur le g^ndral?
1. Allez-vons au jardin da tailleor ? 2. Non, madame, nous
allons k la riviere. 3. Ou vas-tu ? 4. Je vais d la maison. 5. Ne
vas-ta pas chez noas ? 6. Non, monsieur, je vais chez moi. 7. Al-
lez-vons chez les taUleurs ? 8. Oui, madame, nous allons chez eux.
9. Le medecin est-il chez Ini ? 10. Non, monsieur, il est chez moi.
11. Yas-tu chez toi ? 12. Non, monsienr, je vais k la campagne.
13. Oil Bont tes consins? 14. lis sont chez eox. 15. Es-tu Tami
des taillenrs ? 16. Je suis leur ami. 17. Yas-tn chez eux? 18.
Je vais chez moL 19. AUez-vous k la ville ? 20. Non, madame,
je vais k la riviere et k la montagne. 21. L'enfant dn voisin est-il
chez vons ? 22. II n*est pas chez moi, il est chez son p^re. 23. Cet
enfant a le hoenf-rdti et les pommcs de terre. 24. Qui a le rdti ?
25. L'enfant Ta. 26. Est-il k la cuisine ? 27. II est chez vous.
28. Tu n'es pas le parent de Charles ? 29. Si, je suis son fr&re.
1. Where are you going ? 2. We are going to the city. 3.
Are yon not going to the mountain ? 4. We are going to the
monntain and to the river. 5. Art thou going to the house of thy
uncle ? 6. I am not going to his house, I am going to thy house.
7. Is the little child at the house of his cousins ? 8. He is not at
their house, he is at the kitchen. 9. Art thou going to the coun-
try ? 10. I am not going to the country, I am going to the city.
11. Are you going to the tailor's ? 12. We are not going to his
house, we are going to thy house. 13. Where are the nieces of the
physician ? 14. They are at their house. 15. You are going to
the city, we are going to the country. 16. Art thou going to the
u u
lo-gl».
92
THE SEVENTEENTH LESSON.
river or to the mountain ? 17. I am going to my ancle's. 18. I
have the roast beef and the pepper ; thou hast the roast meat and
the bread. 19. I am going to the garden ; are you going to the
stores ? 20. We are going to the stores ; art thou not going to the
river? 21. No, sir, I am going to the tree in the garden. 22.
Hast thou the pepper or the roast beef? 23. I have the pepper
and the roast meat. 24. Have you anything small ? 25. I have
nothing small. 26. What have you large? I have the large
horse.
17.— DIX-SEPTIJIME LEgON.
ALLEE, TO GO. THIBD PERSON.
Doci he gof u he going i
He goes, he is going.
Does she not go ? is she not going ?
She does not go, she is not going.
Do they go f are they going f
They go, they are going.
Do they not go ? are they not going ?
They do not go, they are not going.
The prendetU. The door.
The doctor. The voindow.
The market. The stable.
The mUl. The half.
1. Mon, ton, rotre^ etc., are a^eetlres, ai
noons, and used without nouns. Le iMrtf le
always have a circumflex accent
Mine (singular).
Mine (plural).
Thine (singular).
Thine (plural).
Hitf hers, ite (singular).
His, hers, its (plural).
, Ours (singular).
Ours (plural).
Your$ (singular).
Yours (plural).
Tlieirs (singular).
Theirs (plural).
Va-t-ilf
11 va.
Ne va-t-elle
pas?
EUe ne va pas.
Vont'iUf
^
lis Tont.
\
Ne vont-eUcs pas f
EUcs ne vont pas.
MASOUUnL
Le president.
lokporte.
Le docteur.
JjAfenitre, crtMie.
Le tnarche.
Veame.
Le moidin.
La moitiS.
d belong to nouns.
The following ore pro-
»Mre, and their f^minines and plurals, most
Le mien.
la mienne.
Les miens.
les roiennes.
Le tien.
la tienne.
Les tiens,
les tiennes.
Le tien^
la sienne.
Les siens.
les siennesL
Le ndtre^
la ndtre.
Les notres.
les ndtres.
Le vdtre,
la y6tre.
Les vdtres,
les v6tre8.
Le leitrj
la leur.
Les leura.
les Icurs.
dls-sep-tidmf, von<, pr6-zi-deni, port**, doc-tour, fen^tre, croi-z6<% mar-ch^L 6-ca>riA.
IS M M i;» w u fe i » 14*^ u » IS 14 la t ^17 ly u ^
mon-lin, mol-ti«, mi-en, mi-ena«, tl-en, ti-enn«, si-en, si-enn«, notrd, Tdtrs, leur.
THE SEVENTEENTH LESSON. 93
2. The aboye prononoa cannot be iu«d wlthont the article. Like all prononna, they
agne with their noiina la gender and number.
What hats have jou ? Qnels chapeaax avez-TOos ?
We hare ours. I have mine, thou Nous avons les notres. J*ai le mieu,
hast thine, he has his, you have tn as le tien, il a le sien, toos ayez
yours, and they have theirs. les Tdtres, et ils ont les leurs.
1. Oi^ ya le doctenr? 2. II va chez le president. 3. L'enfant
ne vart^il pas ^ la porte t 4. n va ^ recarie. 5. Ou vont ces
hommes ? 6. lis vont aa moolin. 7. Ne vont-ils pas anx magasins ?
8. lis vont anx magasins et anx moulins aussi. 9. Cet enfant va-
t-il & la porte on ^ la fenStre (croifl6e) 1 10. H va 4 la crois^e
(fenetTe). 11. Le gar^on va-t-il au marcb^ ? 12. II va & recarie,
et le domestiqne va au marcbe. 13. Quel poivre as-ta ? 14. J'ai
le mien. 15. Qn'a cet enfiftnt ? 16. H a la moitid d'one pomme
et la moitie d'une poire. 17. Ai-jele fruit du doctenr t 18. Non,
Charles, tu as le tien et il a le sien. 19. Quelles pommes avons-
noost 20. J'ai la mienne, tu a la tienne, et le doctenr a la sienne,
vous avez les v6tres, et ces messieurs ont les leurs. 21. N'ai-je pas
tea livres? 22. Non, monsieur, j'ai les miens, tn as les tiens, et
mon fr^re a les siens. 23. Avons-nous nos papiers? 24 Vons
avez les vdtres, nous avons les ndtres, et le doctenr a les siens.
1. Are the physicians going to the president's? 2. They are
not going to the president's, they are going to the doctor's. 3.
Where is that child going ? 4. He is going to the door. 5. Is he
not going to the window t 6. No, sir, he is going to the door and
to the stable. 7. Art thou the son of the president? 8. No,
madam, I am his nephew. 9. Are you going to the market or
to the mill? 10. I am going to the market, and the servant is
going to the mill. 11. Is the lady at home? 12. Yes, sir, she is
at home. 13. Where is that little child going? 14. He is going
to the stable. 15. Where is his stick ? 16. It is on the window.
17. What has he? 18. He has the half of a pear and the half of
a potato. 19. Has the cook onr meat ? 20. He has not ours, be
has his. 21. What cloth have the little boys? 22. They have
theirs. 23. Have they their buttons ? 24. No, sir, they have not
theirs. 25. Is not the doctor going to our house? 26. No,
madam, he is not going to your house ; he is going home. 27.
That child has an inkstand ; which one has he ? 28. He has thine ;
he has not mine.
94 THE EIGHTEENTH LESSON.
18.— DIX-HUITIfiME LECON.
VOULOIE, TO WILL, FIB8T AND SECOND PEBSON&
TowlL TobetnUing, Vauloir. Vouhir hien.
1. The rerb vauMr has Tsrlovs signifloatloDB in Engliah, and Its rigbt nse forms on* of
the dUBcoltlM of the French Ungnage. In general it means to wiUf and, modified hj 6€e»,
to he fciUino. Followed hj a noon or prononn as object, it maj be rendered to vUkJbr;
and In this sense It will now be used. Its other meanings will be given in their places
hereafter.
Do you toishfor f will you havef Voulez-vous f or, DUirex-vous f
We tmh/oTj toe tot// have. ITous wmLoM^ or, Now denroms.
Do yon not wish for? will you not Ne Tonlez-voua pas? or, Ne d^rez-
have? Touspas?
We do not wish for, we will not have. Nous ne voulons pas, or^ Nona ne d6-
siroDS pas.
JDoet thou with for f wilt thou have f Veux-tu f or, Disiret^u t
I wish for f J will have. Je veuxj or, Je d&eire.
Dost thou not wish for ? wilt thou not Ne veux-tu pas? or^ Ne d^sirea-to
have ? pas ?
I do not wish for, I will not hare. Je ne Teux pas, or, Je ne desire pu.
Do you wish for the milk ? YouIcz-tous le lait ?
Yes, sir, if you pleaee. Oui, monsieur, e^il voue plait.^
No, sir, / thank you, Non, monsieur, Je voua remereie,
UABOuimm. VEMonxm,
The blacksmith, A history. Le forgeron. Une Autotrv.
The ^OTtfr. America. Jj epieier. VAmirique.
2. The names of coontries generally take the article in French.
A nail. England. Vn clou. VAngleterre,
The copper. France. Le cuivre. La l^Vance,
7%e one of that of. Celui de. Celle de.
The ones of those of Ceux de. Celles de.
The one of iron, that of iron, the iron Celui de fer. Celle de fer.
one.
The ones of iron, those of iron, the Ceux de fer. Celles de fer.
iron ones.
8. Celui and oeum are pronoons, and of conrse sgree with their anteoedenti In gender
and nnmber.
What nail dost thou wish for ? Quel clou veux-tu?
I wish for the one of copper. Je veux celui de cuivre.
Do you not wish for the silver ones? Ne voulez-vous pas ceux d^argent ?
* S*il wmsplaU means literally, if it you pleases ; L e. (^ « pleases you.
nnii ns ii » n i4 n • » ii • »• ti « " « » » "
dia-hoi-Udms, vou-lolr, bl-en, voa-lca» dd-d-rea, vou-lon*, d6-zi-ron«, veoa^ dc-zln^
T 4 T 1» !• 4 «l n to t n JSft 1 » li » 4 T »w ^ 1
plait re-mer-ds, for-ge-ron, Ai»-tolr«, 6-pi-oier, A-m6-rik«^ An-gle-terr^, cnlvra, Fraaeik
4 ait • loi
oe-lal, oells, oeuA
THE EIGHTEENTH LESSON. 95
We do not wish for them. Nona ne lea touIods paa
What cups do joa wish for? Quelles tasses Tonlez-vous f
I wish for the glass ones. Je veux celles de verre.
Ton wish for those of porcelain. Vous voulez celles de porcelaine.
4 The prononn belonging to the poasessiTe case Is often omitted in English. We can
•aj either, Tks man**^ or ttal </ Ikt man ; My /ather% or tho$6 qf my father. In each
eaaea, eeliti ds, edU d^ etc, most not be omitted in French.
The blacksmith's, or^ that of the black- Celoi du forgeron, or^ celle da forge-
smith, ron.
The grocer's, or, those of the grocer. Ceoz de T^picier, or, celles de F^pi-
cier.
1. Vonlez-vous le benrre de P6piciert 2. Oui, monsienr, s'il
vous plait. 8. Yenx-tu son caf6? 4. Non, monsieur, je vous
remercie. 5. Quelle histoire voulez- vous t 6. Nous voulons This-
toire de France. 7. Ne voulez-vous pas celle d' Angleterre 1 8*
Non, madame, nous voulons celles d'Am^rique et de France. 9.
Veux-tu le cafe ? 10. Oui, monsieur, s'il vous plait 11. Veux-tu
le th6 aossi ? 12. Non, monsieur, je vous remercie. 13. Desirez-
vous le marteau du forgeron ? 14. Je ne desire pas celui du forge-
ron, je desire le mien. 15. Quels clous voulez-vous ? IG. Nous
voulons les clous de cuivre. 17. J'ai Thistoire d'Angleterre et
celle d'Am^rique; laquelle voulez-vous? 18. Je veux celle
d'Amerique et celle d'Angleterre aussi. 19. Voulez-vous tons ces
livrest 20. Je ne les veux pas tous. 21. LAuels voulez-vous f
22. Je veux Thistoire d' Angleterre et celle d' Am6rique. 23. Voulez-
vous les dous de I'^picier ? 24. Non, monsieur, je vous remercie.
25. Veux-tu tous ces livres ? 26. Oui, monsieur, s'il vous plait.
1. What do you wish for I 2. I desire a good history. 3. We
wish for the history of America ; which one dost thou wish for? 4.
We wish for that of England and that of France. 5. Dost thou
wish for mine ? 6. I do not wish for thine, I wish for that of my
brother. 7. Do you wish for the nails? 8. Yes, sir, if you please.
9. Do you wish for the nails of copper, or those of iron ? 10. I
wish for those of copper. 11. Dost thou wish for the nails of the
blacksmith? 12. No, sir, I thank you. 13. Which ones dost thou
wish for? 14. I wish for the iron nails and those of copper. 15.
What sugar do you wish for? 16. We wish for that of the grocer.
17. Have yon all the hammers ? 18. No, sir, I have them not all.
19. Which have you ? 20. I have the iron hammers and those of
copper. 21. Where are you going ? 22. I am going to the city,
96
THE NINETEENTH LESSON.
and the cook is going to the market. 23. Where Ib yoor consin t
24. He is at the store. 25. Has the servant your candlestick t
26. He has not mine, he has the doctor's. 27. Have you my pent
28. I have not yoors, I have the grocer's. 29. Have you not my
papers? 30. No, sir, I have those of the master. 31. Have yon
not my candles ? 32. I have not yoors, I have my brother's (or
those of my brother).
19.— DIX-NEUVIfiME LEgON.
VOULOIB, TO WISH FOR (wlU have). THIBD PERSON SINGULAB Ain> PLUSAL.
Doe% he wish for f will lie havef
He wishes for, he will have.
Does she not wish ? will she not have ?
She does not wish, she will not have.
Do they with for f will they have f
They wish for, they will have.
Do they not wish for? will they not
have?
They do not wish for, they will not
have.
Veut-ilf or, Denre-t-iU
n vent, oTy II ddsire.
Ne veut-elle pas? or, Ne d^are-t-elle
pas?
Elle ne vent pas, or^ EDe ne d^re pas.
Vtulent-iUf or, Denrent-iU/
lis veulent, or. Us ddsirent.
Ne veulent-elles pas ? oTj Ne d^sirent-
elles pas ?
Elles nc veulent pas, or, Elles ne d6si-
rent pas.
XASCXTLZHB.
The baker.
Apiece.
Le boulanyer.
Vne piece.
The Jieherman.
A bark.
Lc picheur.
Une barque.
A dollar.
Un charpentier.
Une piastre.
A dollar.
Un dollar.
Une gourde.
The same.
he mane.
hs^m^ne.
The other.
L'autre.
Vautre.
Sick.
Malade.
Malade.
The tick man.
The sick woman.
he malade.
La malade.
The tolditr.
The 9tone.
hesoldat.
hsL pierre.
A sat/or.
X brick.
Un maUlot.
Une brique.
Which.
Qui (subject).
C«« (object).
The stone which
is here.
La pierre qui ett ici.
The stone which
we have.
La pierre que nous avons.
The bricks which
are there.
Les briques qui sont Xk,
The bricks which
you wish for.
Les briques que vous voulez.
1. We here see i
that qui b the sabjeet and que the ol^eet of the foUowing verh.
The baker wishes for the piece of cloth
Le boulanger veut la pi6ce de drap qui
which is on 1
^he table.
est sur la table.
» • nf • c 19 • • It 18 s I » • • a 1 1
dlz-nea-vldinef vent, de-zir«, veulmil, de-zir«ni; bon-lan-ger, ni-bee. i>6-ehenr, barke, char-
t ia« Ul IS 1 18 8 17 11 1« I iJ7 1 17 n It 4
pen-tier, pl-astr«^ dollar, gourde, nidm«, autr«, ma-Iade, sol-da/; pierre, mate-lot, br{k«, ki, ke.
THE NINETEENTH LESSON. 97
We wish for the cloth which you have. Nous voulons le drap que tous arez.
I desire the hammer which is of iron. Jc desire le marteau gut est de fer.
The hammer which the carpenter has. Le marteau que le charpcntier a.
He desires to be tall. II ddsire 6tre grand.
We desire to be your friends. Nous ddsirons etrc tob amis.
The fishermen wish for the bark which Les pecheurs veulcnt la barque qui est
is on the river. sur la rivldrc.
Ton desire to be their friend^ and they Vous ddsirez etre leur ami, et lis de-
desire to be yours. sirent 6tre les vdtres.
Do you wish for the half of this apple ? Voulez-vous la moiti6 de cette pomme ?
No, I thank you. Je vous remercie.
8. J6 rous remercie in sach replies alwsjrs tlgnlflea declintog.
1. Que vent ce matelot ? 2. 11 veut la petite barqae. 8. La-
qnelle vent-il ? 4. II veat celle du prehear. 5. Que veulent les
soldats ? G. Ds yenlent le bon pain. 7. Celai de qui veulent-ils ?
8. Us venlent celoi du boulanger. 9. Que desires-tu ? 10. Je d6-
gire one cbandelle et nn cbandelier. 11. Que veut le boulanger?
12. II veut ces pi^es de drap. 13. Lesquelles veut-il ? 14. H veut
celles que les cbarpentiers ont et celles qui sont ici sur la table.
15. Que venlent ces matelots ? 16. Ha veulent les barques des
pecheurs. 17. Ces enfants veulent-ils les dollars d'or ou ceux d'ar-
gent? 18. lis veulent les dollars d'or et ceux d'argent aussi. 19.
Ce petit en&nt veut ce livre ; son fr5re veut-il le meme ? 20. II
ne veut pas le m6me, il veut le sien. 21. Le soldat est-il ma-
lade? 22. Iln*estpasmalade. 23. Que veut le malade ? 24.11
veut le pain du boulanger, et les soldats veulent le memo. 25.
Le matelot et les cbarpentiers veulent-ils le meme pain ou Tautre ?
lis venlent I'autre. 26. La maison du pecheur est-elle de brique
ou de pierre ? 27. Elle est de bois.
1. Do you wish for the half of this fish? 2. Yes, sir, if you
X>lease. 3. Do you wish for the milk ? 4. No, sir, I thank you.
o. What has that child ? 6. He has the silver dollars. 7. Has he
all the dollars ? 8. He has them all. 9. What does the baker
wish for ? 10. He wishes for the wood and the flour. 11. What
has the servant ? 12. He has a piece of cloth and a piece of linen.
13. What does the sailor wish for ? 14. He wishes for the bark of
the fisherman. 15. Where is his bark? 16. It is on the river.
17. Is the carpenter's house of stone or of brick ? 18. It is of
brick. 19. I wish for this coffee; does the sick man wish for the
same or for the other? 20. He wishes for the other. 21. The
98 THE TWENTIETH LESSOX.
soldier desires the bread of the sick man ; we desire the wine which
is on the table. 22. What has the little child? 23. He has the
dollars. 24. Which (ones) has he ? 25. He has the gold dollars
and the silver ones. 26. What has the soldier ? 27. He has all
the meat and all the batter. 28. Do you desire to be rich ? 29.
My brother desires to be rich, and I desire to be good. 30. The
neighbors desire to be our friends, and we desire to be theirs.
20.— VINGTIfiME LEgON.
PBKSENT PAETICIPLE.
1. The PU8XKT PAKTiciPLE, In French, is formed by changing oks, of the first penoa
plnral, indlcatlye present, into akt; * as,
nmxrrxTK. pabticiplx. mpiniTiv*. Ibt psb& plv. paxticipls.
Togo. Ooing. Aller^ allonx, Allant.
To will. Willing, Vatdoir, roulonx, Voulant.
To desire. Desiring. jDesirer^ d6siron«, Desirant,
2. The present participles ot avoir and itre arc exceptions to the above rale.t
7b have. Having, Avoir. Ayant,
To he. Being, Mire, ktant.
The PB»SKT nrniCATms of the following fire yerbe has now been given.
To HATE, HAYING.
J^Oii^ tu as, il a,
I have, thou hast, ho has,
To BE, BEING.
Je «Hit, iuea^ ilest,
I am, thoa art, he is.
To GO, GOING.
Jevaia^ tuvae, Uva^
I go, thou goest, he goes,
To WILL, WILLING. VoULOIR, VOULAST.
JeveuoBt tuveur^ ilveut, nouevoulone, vmtevouleBt Uevmitmi^
I will, thou wiliest, he wills, we will, you will, theywlU.
To DESIRE, DESIRING. DeSIBER, DESULANT.
Jeditire, tudiHree, UdiHre, noue diHrone^ vouedMrea, iUdiHrent,
I desire, thou deslrest, he desires, we desire, you desire, they desire.
Avoir,
ATANT.
V0U8 ares, He owt,
we have,
you have, they havew
£tre,
ETANT.
notu eommes.
roue Km, ilt eont^
we are,
you are, they an.
Aller,
ALLANT.
vowi aUe»t iU vont^
we go,
yon go, theyga
• Most French grammarians form the first person pi ami from the participle, and thU is
well Ibr the French ; but as it is a matter of mere convenience, and as the English learner
becomes acquainted with the present indicative first, 1 have thought it best to give the
above rule.
t There are three other exceptions in all,— i&Aoir, to fall to, makes hAwttt^ falling to;
Bavoir^ to know, makes mchanl, knowing; and Seolr^ to sit, makes «eant, sitting.
14 i?a 1 • I s IB t s » 6 8 n s 1 » sias a • a
vinflT-tiomi', a^lor, a/-lanA vou-lan<, d^-zi-rer, de-zi-ran/, a-volr, a-yanC, ttr*", 6-tane.
THE TWENTIETH LESSOX.
99
& We hsre Men (Leaaon 19) that qui it the sabjoot and gu^ the object of the foUowlag
rerb. It is the same when qui and qu^ are joined to the domonstmtlye pronouns celuit
c«,etc.
7%« one vhich, that which (subject).
The one whicK, thai which (object).
The onee whieh^ those which (subject).
ne ones wJtieh, those which (object).
I have the one which I3 here.
I hare the one which you desire.
We have those which are there.
We hare thoee which you wish for.
Celui qui, Celle qui.
Celui que, Celle que,
Ceux qui. Celles qui,
Ceux que, Celles que,
J^ai celui qui est id
tTai celui que vous d6sirez.
Nous avons celles qui sont U.
Nous ayons celles que tous Toulez.
4. What, eqnlTolent to that wMch^ or the thing wMch^ !s ee qui or ce que,
I desire what (that which) lajust, Je desire ce qui est juste.
We desire what {that which) you have. Nous ddsirons ce que vous avez.
5L Some adjectives are generally placed before the nonn, and some are generally placed
after it; others again are sometimes placed before and sometimes after it The adjectives
thus fiur Introduced ore placed before the noun. The learner may understand generally, nntil
ftarther roles be given, that all other adiectives are placed after their nouns.
Fresh^ cod.
White,
Black.
Blue.
Green.
Yellow.
Bed,
Sweety gentle.
Sour.
The white glove. The black stocking.
The umbreUa. A needle.
$. Ma^ to, sa^ become mon, ton^ son, before a vowel or a silent h,
ICy pen, thy table, his spoon. Ma plume, ta table, sa cuiller.
Hy plate, thy needle, his ink. Mon assiette, ton aiguille, son cncre*
7. A verb following another verb, and expressing its object, is put in the infinitive.
He desires to have a horse. H d6sire avoir un cbevaL
They desire to be rich. lis d^sirent Hre riches.
I will go home. Je veux alter chez moi, or d la maison.
1. Desires-tu etre riche ? 2. Non, monsieur, je desire etre juste
et bon, mais je ne desire pas etre riche. 3. Ce monsieur desire
aroir beanconp d'argent, et ses fils dcsirent avoir beaucoup d*amis.
4. Desirez-vous aller chez vous ? 5. Non, monsieur, nous ddsirona
aller k la campagne. 6. Quel parapluie voulez-vous I 7. Je veux
» 77 S S 9r>S09»77 17 18
Jost^ f^i^ fkal-eh«, blanc, blan-chs, nolr, no1r«, bleu, bleue, verf, Tcrt«t jaun«, roog^
IS 7 11 «11 7 » 19
doac«, aigre, pa^ra^pluie, ai-gn-llle.
MABCULINB.
FEMIKUIS.
-Frats.
Fraiche.
Blanc.
Blanche.
Noir.
Noire.
Bleu.
Bleue,
Vert,
Verte.
Jaune,
Jaune.
Rouge.
Rouge.
jDoux.
Douce.
Aigre.
Aigre.
Le gant blanc.
Le has noir.
Le parapluie.
Une aiguille.
8251^19
100 THE TWENTY-FIRST LESSON.
celui qui est sur le banc. 8. Mon friire desire celui que vous avez,
9. Youlez-vous Ics parapluies qui sont dans le magasin ? 10. Je
desire les parapluies qui sont sur votre tabic, et mon p^re d6sire
ceux du marcband. 11. Quelles plumes voulez-vous ? 12. Je venx
les plumes qui sont sur le pupitre, et celle que le marcband a cbez
lui. 13. Quelles aiguilles veulent les tailleurs? 14. lis veulent
les aiguilles qui sont ici et celles que le marcband a dans son ma-
gasin. 15. Desires-tu ce que j'ai ? 16. Non, monsieur, je desire
ce que nous avons ici. 17. Le domestique a-t-il Tean fraicbe ?
18. II a I'eau fraicbe et le vin frais, 19. Avez-vous le cbapeau
blanc ou le noir 1 20. J'ai le blanc et le noir aussi. 21. J'ai le
papier bleu, le vert et le jaune, et cet enfant a I'encre rouge, le Tin
doux et le lait f rais.
1. My cousin desires to be ricb, but we desire to be just and
good. 2. Wbat book do you wisb for ? 3. I wisb fur tbat whicb
is on my desk, and tbe one wbicb tbat cbild desires, and my broth-
ers wisb for tbose wbicb are at tbe store, and tbose wbicb we have.
4. I wisb for tbe needle wbicb tbe tailor bas in bis cbest^ and for
those whicb are on this table. 5. Wbat apples do tbose children
desire t C. They wish for tbe ones which are here, and those which
tbe countryman bas on his table. 7. Do you wisb for wbat is in
tbat chair ? 8. Yes, sir, I wish for wbat is on that chair, and for
that whicb the soldiers have here. 9. Have you the black um-
brella or tbe blue? 10. I have the blue one. 11. Has your friend
the green paper or the yellow ? 12. He has tbe green and tbe
yellow also. 13. Do tbe scholars wish for tbe red ink or tbe black 1
14. They wish for tbe red. 15. Is that wine sweet or sour ? 16.
That wine is sweet, but the milk is sour. 17. This needle is small ;
do you wish for it? 18. Yes, madam, I wish for the small needle
and the blue umbrella. 19. The little cbild baa my pen and my
slate ; be has also thy paper and thy ink.
21.— VINGT ET UNlfeME LEgON
CHERCIIEE, TO SEEK OR LOOK FOR.
To seeky or look for. Seeking^ looking for, Ckercher, Chcrcnant.
Je chtrchs, tu eherchet, il chercJie^ noua chtrcltowt^ 90u» ehtrchez^ iU cherchenl,
I seek, thoa scckcst, ho seeks, wc seek, }*oa seek, Ihoy seek.
14 S 29X21 7 6 7 1 T 7
y\ngi et uni^izi«, cher-cher, clier-cliftnff cfacr-ch^, chcr*clic«.
THE TWEXTY-FIBST LESSON.
101
1. The learner has seen, that, a Terb agrees with Its subject in mxmborand person; 1. e.
the llrst person singular is always used with je^ the second with tu^ and the third with all
other subjects singular ; the first person plural is always used with lunu, the second with
coKS, and the third with all other subjects plural.
8. Let the learner bear in mind also that the English have three forms of the present,
as l9eeh, do aett, am aetking; thou seetttU^ dost seek, art setting; K6 ssel'S, do€9 tedb^
is ateking ; and that these three are rendered by one form in French, as aboye.
I Ktk what thou art sething. Jc cherche ce que tu elierehes.
He M seeking what we ieeh. II cherche ce que nous chercftons.
You seek what they are seeking. Vou3 clicrchez ce qu^ila cherchent.
8. The syllable ci is annexed by a hyphen to a noun with a demonstrative a4jectlTe, or
tn a demonstrattvo pronoun, to denote an object near, and id to denote one more remote ;
also when objects are contrasted.
This apron.
These aprons.
Thj dietumary.
That dictionary
This needle.
These needles.
Thy grammar.
That grammar.
Those dictionaries. Those grammars.
FEMnriKB.
Cette aiguille-ci.
Ces aiguilles-ci.
Ta grammaire.
Cette grammaire-
Ces grammaircs-ld.
MASCULINE.
Ce tablier-ci.
Ces tabliers-ci.
Ton diciionnaire.
Ce dictionnaire-
Ces dictlonnaires-
1^
Cclui-ci,
Ccux-ci.
Celui'ld,
Ceux-U,
Ne (bcf. Terb), ni (after it).
Je nVi ni la briquc ni la pierre.
II n'a ni le gant ni le has.
Celle-ci.
Celle9-ci,
CcUe-U.
Celles-a
77/M, this one, the latter.
ITiese, these here, the latter.
That, that ene^ the former.
Those, those Uiere, the former.
Neither. Nor. Ne (bcf. Terb), ni (after it). Ni.
I hare neither the brick nor the stone.
Uc has neither the gloTc nor the stock-
ing.
4. When ne is used with ni, rien, or any negative word, pas is omitted.
I am looking for nothing. Jc ne cherche ricn.
Ue is looking for neither this one nor II ne cherche ni celui-ci ni celul-IA.
that one.
& Ce, cette, ees, are adjectives, and always belong to nouns ; etiui, ceUe, cette, oelles, are
pronotlbs, and stand without nouns.
Does he wish for these needles or those ? Yeut-il ces aiguillcs-ci ou cclleS'l^ ?
He wishes for neither these nor those. II ne veut ni celles-ci ni celles-ld.
He has these umbrellas and those. II a ces parapluies-ci et ccux-U.
6u "When two or more nouns singular are the subject of the verb, unless they are con-
nected by a«, the Terb must bo plural, and the acycctivcs agreeing with thorn must be plural
al»o.
The soldier and the sailor arc here.
The apple and the peach are good.
The doctor or his brother is sick.
Le soldat et lo matelot sont ici.
La porame et la p4che sont bonnes.
Le doctcur ou son frere est malade.
7. Quelqtu chose, rien, and que interrogative, as wo have seen, require de before the
following adjective and adverb.
7 «t 7 e r la i2i» 7 1 7
chcr-chons, cher-ches, cher-chsn/, dic-tlon-naire, gram-maire.
102 THE TWENTY-FIRST LESSON.
What have you white ? Ow'arez-vous de blanc ?
I have nothing white. Je n*ai rien de blanc.
Wo have something sweet Nous avous quelqw chose de doox.
1. Qu'avez-vous de frais t 2. Je n'ai rien de frais. 3. Avez-
vous quelque chose denoir? 4. J'ai Vencre noire. 5. Que cher-
ches-tu de vert? 6. Je cherche le drap vert. 7. Les tailleors
cherchent-ils quelque chose de jaune ? 8. Us chercheut le drap
jaune et I'encre rouge. 9. Cherchez-vous quelque chose t 10. Nous
ne cherchons rien. 11. Quel dictionnaire cherchez-vous! 12. Je
cherche celui que vous avez. 13. Cherchez-vous celui-ci ou celui-
la ? 14. Nous ne cherchons ni celui-ci ni celui-1^ nous cherchons
celui qui est ici. 15. Youlez-vous cette grammaire-ci ou celle-la t
16. Je ne veux ni celle-ci ni celle-1^. 17. Votre p6re veut-fl ces
chevanxt 18. II ne veut pas ces chevaux-1^ il veut ceux-ci. 19.
Ces enfants veulent-ils ces pommes-ci ou celles-li? 20. Us ne veu-
lent ni celles-ci ni celles-1^ ils veulent celles du domestique. 21.
Desirez-vous ce que j'ai ? 22. Non, madame, je desire ce qui est
ici. 23. Je desire le bon pain et le vin frais.
1. What art thou looking for ? 2. I am looking for my gram-
mar and my dictionary. 3. Do you wish for this dictionary or for
that ? 4. I wish for neither this nor that, I wish for mine. 5. Are
you looking for your grammar! 6. I am looking for it. 7. Are
you looking for this one or for that one ! 8. I am looking for nei-
ther this one nor that one. 9. Have you any thing sweet ? 10. I
have something sweet. 11. What have you sweet ? 12. I have
the sweet wine. 13. Have you the red ink or the black ? 14. I
have neither the red nor the black. 15. Do you wish for your book
or that of your brother ? 16. I wish for neither mine nor that of my
brother. 17. What have you blue 1 18. I have the blue umbrella
and the blue handkerchief. 19. Have you any thing green ? 20.
I have nothing green. 21. Do you wish for these peaches or those!
22. I wish for neither these nor those, I wish for the ones of the
countrywoman. 23. Have you the cloth shoes or those of leather !
24. I have the cloth ones and the leather ones also. 25. What
inkstand are you looking for ? 26. I look for the ivory one.
OPTIONAL EXERCISES.
[N. B.— The csercises headed Optional, tbronghoul tho book, may bo omitted whonoTer
clrcamstancGS require It.]
1. Have you your book ? 2. No, sir, I have it not ; do you wish
THE TWENTY-SECOND LESSON. 108
for itt 3. I wish for yours or your brother's. 4. My brothei^a
book is on the table. 5. Where is yours ? 6. I have it not here ;
it is at home. 7. Do you wish for this one ? 8. K you please.
9. Is your mother at home ? 10. No, sir, she is at my cousin's.
11. Where is your father ? 12. He is in his room ; do you wish to
see him? 13. If you please. 14. I am going to look for him.
15. Father, Mr. A. asks for (demands) you. 16. Is he here ? 17.
YeSy sir, he is in the garden.
22.— VINGT-DEUXI£ME LEgON.
PEBSONAL PBONOUNS. DIBECT OBJECT.
To love^ loving, Aimer^ aimant.
J*aim^ iuaitnes, UaimSt now aimons^ touaainuM^ iUaimmU^
I lore, thonloTest,- ho loves, wo lore, 70a lore, they lore.
Me, Thee, Me, Te.
Us. You, Nous, V0U8.
L Thefio foar pronouns, like /«, to, Z«<, are placed Immediately before a transitive Torh.
Wo lore thee and thou lovcat us. Nous t^aimons ct tu nous aimes.
They love mc and I lore them. lis m*aimcnt et je les aime.
Tou lore him and he loves jou. Yous I'aimez ct il tous aime.
2. Jf«, ity become fn\ f , before a rowel or a silent K
Whomf Who^ Quif que. Qui.
8. Whom Interrogative la always qui. With this exception, qui is the snbject and 91M
the object of the following rerb ; tho same of penons as wo hare seen of things (Lessons 10
and 20).
Whom do you lore ? Qui aimcz-rous?
I lore the friend whom you lore. J^aimo l*am! que rous aimez.
He loves the brother who loves htm. H aime le fr^re qui Taime.
Wc love him (the one) who loves us. Nous aimons celui qui nous aime.
They love her (tho one) whom thou lis aiment celle que tu aimes.
lorest
I seek those (the ones:) who seek mo. Je cherche ceux qui me chercbent.
We seek those (the ones) whom you Kous cherchous cellcs que vous cher-
seek. chez.
A. Pronouns which are the object of the rerb in the manner of the abore .{me^ te^ centt,
et&X that is, without a preposition expressed or understood before thorn, aro called dzxiot
OBJECTS, or DIBXCr OBJXCTirB PBOK0U2(S.
UAScuLxsfx. rsviNiins.
A rat. A mouse. Un rat, Une souris.
A cat. A hat. Un chat. Une chauve-souris.
A clerk', A pound. Un commis. Une livre.
U 10 13 7 y • 7 » 7 7 7 21 7 • 7 * ^ " !? w'#
ringt-deu-xi^me, ai-mer, al-man<, aime, aimes, ai-mons, ai-mes, aimeiu, rai, sou-ris, chat,
17 M M IS n n
chaar«-80U-ria, com-mi«, livre
104
THE TWEXTY-SECOND LEjSSON.
Superbe, Superbe.
MaU p<Uf mats non.
Mais non pas.
Mais point.
. Mais non point.*
6. When d« comes before a possoasivo pronoun (U mien^ U iien^ etc), de U and ds Us
are of course contracted to du, des (according to Lesson 6, 8).
Buperb.
But
But not.
Mais.
BINOL-XAIL
Masculine. Fcnildno.
PLUEAL.
Masculine. Feminine.
Of mine, from mine Du mien,
Of thine, from thine. Du tien,
Of his, here, its, etc. Du sien.
Of ours, from ours. Du notrc.
Of yours, from yours. Du votre.
Of theirs, from theirs. Du leur,
Art thou the clerk of his father or of
mine?
I am the clerk of thine.
I have the pen, but not the paper.
Has he the money of your friends and
of ours ?
He has that of yours, but not of ours.
dc la micnnc, dcs miens, des miennes.
de la ticnoe, des ticns, dcs tiennes.
do la Bicnnc, des siens, dcs siennes.
de la nutre, des ndtres, des notres.
de la votre, des Totrcs, des vdtresL
de la leur, des leurs, des Icurs.
Es-tu le commis dc son p^re oa da
mien?
Je suis le commis du tien.
J'ai la plume, mais pas le papier.
A-t-il Targent dc vosamis ct dcs ndtres?
n a cclul dcs vdtres, mais non pas des
nutrcs.
1. Tes amis t'aiment-ils ? 2. lis m'aiment, ct je les aime.
3. Le g6n6ral vous aime-t-il? 4. II nous aime. 5. Qui aimez-
▼ous ? 6. Nous aimons tous nos amis. 7. Qui aime le commis ?
8. n aime celui qui Taime. 9. Cherchez-vous la dame que nous
cherchons ? 10. Nous ne cberchons pas celle que vous cherchez,
nous cberchons cclle qui est chez ma tante. 1 1. Cherchez-vous les
hommes que je cherche t 12. Non, monsieur, je cherche ceux qui
me cherchent. 13. Qui ces dames aiment-elles ? 14. EUes aiment
les petites filles qui les aiment. 15. Le n^gociant cherche-t-il les
commis que nous cherchons? 16. Non, monsieur, il cherche ceux
qui nous cherchent. 17. Que cherche le chat ? 18. H cherche les
rats et les sour is. 19. Ne cherche-t-il pas les chauves-souris aussi?
20. Non, madame, il cherche les souris mais non pas les chauves-
souris. 21. Le chat a-t-il le rat 1 22. Non, monsieur, il a la souris,
mais pas le rat. 23. La maison du g6n6ral est superbe, ct ses
chevaux sont superbes aussi 24. Le gargon veut une livre de
* These negatives stand In the order of their Btreni^th— poini being stronger than pas^
and non point the strongest ; maU non is the most elegant.
ou-i>erbf, msXs,
THE TWEXTY-THIRD LESSON. 105
Tiande et one livre de chandelles. 25. Yent-il le pain de mon
bonlanger ou du sien ? 26. II veut celui du sien et du vdtre.
1. Whom dost thou love 1 2. I love my good friends. 3. Does
the neighbor love me ? 4. He loves thee. 5. Do the children love
yont 6. They love us and we love them. 7. Whom does the
doctor love t 8. He loves thee and he loves us also. 9. Does he
not love you? 10. No, he loves you, hut he does not love me. 11.
Whom is the clerk looking for 1 12. He is looking for the mer-
chant whom we are looking for. 13. Is he not looking for the one
who is looking for him ? 14. No, sir, he is looking for the one who
is in that store. 15. What children do you seek ? 16. I seek
those whom you seek, and those who are in the garden. 17. Are
you looking for the little girls whom I am looking for 1 18. No,
sir, I am looking for those who are at the neighbor's. 19. What
has the cat ? 20. He has the rat and the bat. 21. Has he not
the mouse ? 22. No, sir, he has the bat, but not the mouse. 23.
What do you wish for ? 24. I wish for a pound of tea and a pound
of sugar. 25. Do those men wish for the coffee of their merchant
or of ours ? 26. They wish for that of theirs ; we wish for that of
yours. 27. I wish for the superb coat. 28. Do you wish for this
one or that one 1 29. I wish for neither this one nor that one, I
wish for the superb coat of the tailor.
OPnOXAL EXERCISES.
1. What are you looking for ? 2. I am looking for my pen and
my pencil. 3. Your pen is in my copy-book, and your pencil is
under that slate. 4. I am not looking for my steel pen. 5. Which
one do you wish for ? 6. I am looking for my gold pen. 7. Is it
not on the table I 8. No, sir. 9. Sister (ma aai/r), what do you
wish for f 10. I wish for your ink and your copy-book, if you
please. 11. My ink is there on the chair. 12. Where is your
copy-book ? 13. It is not here, my cousin has it in the house.
14. Have you a pin ? 15. Do you wish for a large pin or a small
one? 16. A large one, if you please. 17. Is this good? 18.
Yes, thank you {merci).
23.— VIXGT-TROISlfcME LEgON.
FIRST CONJUGATION. IN EH.
1. There are In French fonr conjugations, that i», four different woys of conjugating
▼crbs, diAtin^ished by the termination of the Infinitive.
106
THE TWENTY-THIRD LESSOX.
Th« Flnt Coqjngation hastho inflnitlTe ending in ER.
The Sooond " " in IR.
The Third ** " in OIE.
The Fourth ** " in EE.
2. A very largo majority of oil tho verbs in the langnago arc of the fibst coxauoATiox
(in £B) ; and all of them, except aller^ to go, have tho terminations of the indicative pr«s-
ent, like diHrer^ dureher^ and aimer. In E, ES, E, on, EZ, mr.
a The past participle of this conjugation is formed bj dropping r final of the inflalU Vf>,
and accenting tho final e. Thus,
Dvsirer, to desire, makes the past participle <UHrf, desired.
Chcrchcr, to seek,
Aller, to go, **
Aimer, to love, "
To listen to^ listening to, listened to.
J^eeoute, tu icoutee, il ecotUe,
I listen to, thon listenest to, he listens to,
Sow much, how mam/.
One. 7\eo. Three. Four,
Bow much gold. How many dollars.
Ecouter,
chercM^ eought
aUi, gone,
aimf, loved.
eeoutaniy
votuSeoutez^
The master.
The king.
A prince.
A bishop.
The sJioemaker.
The mcMon.
Whose beef.
The mistress.
The queen.
A princess.
A church.
The seamstress.
The poultry.
Whose poultry.
ieoute.
none fcoutons, vou4 ianttez^ He iecuieni^
we listen to, yon listen to, they listen to.
Combien (de before the noun).
L\ une. Deux, TVois. Quatre,
Combien de piastres.
FXMIJCUrB.
Whose, the one of whom (sing.).
Wliose, the ones of whom (plur.).
Combien d'or.
MABCTLtKB.
Le maitre.
he roi.
Un prince.
Un eveque.
Le cordonnier.
Le mafon,
Le boeuf de qui.
Celui de qui.
Ceux de quL
La maitreste.
La reine.
V uc princessr.
Une iglise.
La couturiere.
La volaille.
La volaille tie qui.
Cclle de qui.
Cclles de qui.
4. Wltose^ accompanied by a noun, is de qui in French, with tho nonn preceding; with-
oat a noun, it is de qui with celui^ celUy cew\ or ceUee, preceding.
Whose horse do you wish for ?
Whose has the master ?
Whose history art thou looking for ?
Whose has the mistress ?
Whose children do you listen to ?
Whose docs the prince listen to ?
Whose slates have you ?
Whose has the mason ?
Le cheval de qui voulez-vous ?
Celui de qui le maitre a-t-il ?
L^histoire de qui cherchcs-tu ?
Cclle de qui la maitrcssc a-t-ellc ?
Les enfants de qui ecoutez-vons ?
Ceux de qui le prince 6coute-t-il ?
Les ardoises de qui avez-vous ?
Cclles de qui le ma^on a-t-il ?
5. Tho article is prefixed to titles and epithets belonging to proper names.
General Jackson. President Adams.
King George.
Doctor Peter.
Queen Victoria.
Big William.
Le g6n6ral Jackson. Le president
Adams.
Le roi Georges. La reine Victoria.
Le docteur Pierre. Le gros GulUaumc.
S13« 7 SIAT «fi1il«SlS8 SI8 65 19 ft IS 6)t
de-si-re, cher-ch6, a/-le, ni-mc, c-cou-ter, 6-con-tinf, 6-cou-t6, d-oout*, 6 cout«t, £-coa«
n a 18 • ft 18 21 I'ji4 3! 10 a> I ft ft ft 7 '4
tons, 6-cou-te«, 6-cou-t^n/, oom-bien, une, deuor, tntiA, katr^, mai-tre, mai-trcsM, reine, prince,
14 ft ft 8 8 19 1« Ift 198 18 7J 1-^7 1 91 Ift I
prin-cesstf, c-v6k«, 6g-lize, cor-do»-nier, cou-tn-ri6re, ma-(on, vo-laillc.
THE TWENTT-THIRD LESSON. 107
ft. When d€ precedes sach epithets, it of oonne fomu du with the artiole (Leaaon 6).
Corporal John's gnn. Le fusil du caporal Jean.
Captain Smithes house. La maison du capitaine Smith.
The books of the good David. Los llires du bon David.
1. M'6coutes-tu ? 2. Je t'ecoute. 3. Qui le roi 6coute-t-ilt
4. U 6coate r^r(3que Jean. 5. Nous 6coutez-yoa8 ? 6. Nous vous
ecoutons. 7. Lea soldats ^coutent-ils la reine ? 8. II ne Tdcoutent
pas. 9. Goxnbien d*enfants le roi a-t-il ? 10. II a deux fils et trois
filles. 11. Combien de freres la reine a-t-ellet 12. Elle aquatre
fr^res et deux soeurs. 13. !6coutez-vous la princesse? 14.
J*ecout6 la princesse et le prince. 15. Combien d'enfants le maltre
a-t-il t 16. n a quatre fils et trois filles. 17. AUez-vous a P^glise
de l'evC*que Pierre? 18. Non, monsieur, je vais chez le cordonnier.
19. Le cordonnier ^coute-t-il la couturiere I 20. Non, monsieur,
la couturi^e dcoute le cordonnier et le magon. 21. Les aiguilles
de qui avez-vous ? 22. J'ai celles de la couturiere. 23. La yolaille
de qui Youlez-vous? 24. Je veux celle du paysan. 25. Allez-
vous a Teglise ? 26. Non, monsieur, je ne vais pas b. I'^glise, je
vais chez le voiBia.
1. To whom dost thou listen ? 2. I listen to thee. 3. Does
the scholar listen to me ? 4. No, sir, he listens to the master. 5.
To whom do the little girls listen ? 6. They listen to the mistress.
7. Do you listen to us t 8. We do not listen to you. 9. How
many horses has your father ? 10. He has two horses, three cows,
and four oxen. 11. How many children has the king? 12. He
has two sons and three daughters. 13. Does the mistress wish for
this book or that? 14. She wishes for neither this one nor that,
she wishes for the one of the master. 15. Is the king going to
this church or to that ? 16. He is going neither to this nor to that,
he is going to that of the bishop. 17. How many sons has the
queen? 18. She has four sons and one daughter. 19. Does the
queen listen to toe prince or to the princess ? 20. She listens
neither to the prince nor to the princess, she listens to the bishop.
21. Do yon desire the shoes of my shoemaker or of yours? 22. I
desire those of mine. 23. Have you the needles of your seamstress
or of ours ? 24. I have those of yours. 25. Whose hammers has
the mason? 26. He has his. 27. Whose poultry have you ? 28.
I have mine. 29. Whose has the mason t 30. He has the poul-
try of the countrywoman.
108
THE TWENTY-FOURTH LESSON.
OPTIONAL EXERCISES.
1. Where is the little boy who has the mason's hammer t 2.
He is in the yard of my uncle's house. 3. He is not there. 4. Is
he not in the garden I 5. He is neither in the yard nor in the
garden. 6. He is in the yard or in the house. 7. Have you not
the mistress's book 1 she wishes for it. 8. No, sir, I have it not.
9. Who has it ? 10. Your cousin has it. 11. Where is she t 12.
She is at your house, in the garden. 13. Does that scholar wish
for his dictionary and his grammar? 14. He wishes for his dic-
tionary, but not his grammar. 15. What knife have you? 16.
The big one. 17. Where is it? 18. It is in the yard on the
bench. 19. Thank you.
24.— VIXGT-QUATRl£ME LEgON.
AVOIlC TO HAVE. IDIOMATIC.
1. In the phrases, to be trarm, to be cold^ to be hungry^ to be thirtty^ to beUeepy, 1o be
qfraidy to be ashamed^ to be rights to be vfrong, instead of the Terb to be with en adjective,
«s in English, the French use tho verb to have and a uoan, literally meaning to have heat^
to have edd^ to hate hunger^ etc
To he \carm. To be cold.
To be hungry. To he thirsty.
To he sleepy. To be afraid
To be right. To be wrong,
2h be ashamed, Well^ very.
Are you cold ? I am not cold.
He is very cold.
Art thou not warm ?
I am very warm.
Are you not hungry ?
We are very hungry.
Is the mistress thirsty ?
She is very thirsty.
Are the children sleepy ?
They are very sleepy.
What is the matter with you /
I am very hungry.
Who is afraid?
That seamstress is afraid.
Is big William right ?
No, air, he is wrong.
Is not king George wrong ?
No, sir, he is right.
Are you ashamed ? I am ashamed.
Avoir chattd. Avoir froid.
Avoir f aim. Avoir soif.
A voir sommeiL A voir peur.
Avoir raison. Avoir tort.
Avoir honte, Bien,
Avez-vous froid ? Je n*ai pas froid.
II a bien froid.
N*as-tu pas chaud ?
J^ai bien chaud.
N^avez-vous pas faim ?
Nous avons bien faim.
I^ maitresse a-t-elle soif ?
Elle a bien soif.
Les enfants ont-ils sommeil?
Us ont bien sommeil.
Qu^avez-vous f
J'ai bien faim.
Qui a peur ?
Cctte couturidre a peur.
Lc gros Guillaumc a-t-il raison ?
Non, monsieur, il a tort.
Le roi George n'a t-il pas tort ?
Kon, monsieur, 11 a raison.
Avez-vous honte ? J'ai honte.
t7 »> 14 90 U r II 7 n 1« 91 1914
cfaaa</, frok/, faim, soif, som-roell, pear, niI*zon, tiirf, hont«, bien.
The cold.
Hunger.
Sleep.
Thirst.
The brook.
Fear.
A vetaeL
Reason.
A ship.
Shame.
THE TWENTY-FOURTH LESSON. 109
luaciruHs. naasmM.
Le froid. La faim.
Le sommeil. La soif.
Le misseau. La peur.
Un vaiaseau. La raison.
Un navire. La honte.
3. Inaddrefisiog relations and intimate Meoda, MontUwr^ Madame MademoUeO^ are
not to be naed ; and pirt^ mert^frert^ Mur, eta, are not to be need without mon or ma ; aa,
Son, art thou cold? Ko, sir, I am Hon fils, as-tu froid ? Non, mon pdre,*
warm. j'ai chaud.
Daughter, art thou warm ? Ma fille, as-tu chaud ?
Yes, ma^am, I am very warm. Oui, ma ni&re, j*al bien chaud.
Brother, where are you going ? Mon frdre, o^ vas-tu ?
Sister, are you thirsty ? Ma soeur, as-tu soif?
1. Avez-von9 chaud t 2. Je n'ai pas chaud, j'ai froid. 3. Avez-
Tous bien froid? 4. Nod, monsieur. 5. Qui a faim? 6. Le petit
gar^on a^bien faim. 7. Les petites fiUes ont-elles soif? 8. EUes
n'ont pas soif. 9. Qu'avez-vous ? 10. J'ai sommeil. 11. Arez-
vous bien sommeil? 12. Non,madame. 13. Qui a peur? 14. Ges
jeunes filles ont peur. 15. Qui a raison et qui a tort ? 16. Le
maitre a raison, et ce jeune gar^on a tort. 17. Avez-vous honte ?
IS. Je n'ai pas honte. 19. Mon fils vas-tu au ruisseau? 20. Non,
mon pere, je vais chez le voisin. 21. Le matelot va-t-il k ce Tais*
seau-ci ou h celui-la ? 22. U ne va ni k celui-ci ni k celui-la, il va
a ce navire. 23. Mon frere, ou vas-tu? 24. Je vais au ruisseau.
25. Le g^n^ral veut-il ce vaisseau-ci ou ce vaisseau-U ? 26. II ne
vent ni celui-ci ni celui-1^ il veut ce gros navire. 27. Le navire de
qui vent^il? 28. II veut celui du n^gociant 29. Celui de qui
voulez-vous? 30. Je veux le v6tre. 31. Avez-vous le cheval de
mon fr^re ou du votre? 32. J*ai celui du mien.
1. Are you warm or cold? 2. I am neither warm nor cold.
3. Art thou hungry or thirsty ? 4. I am hungry and thirsty also.
5. Are you not sleepy ? 6. Yes, sir, we are very sleepy. 7. Who
is afraid ? 8. This little boy is afraid. 9. Are the masons right
or wrong? 10. They are right, they are not wrong. 11. Are you
afraid or ashamed ? 12. We are neither afraid nor ashamed. 13.
What is the matter with you ? 14. We are very sleepy. 15. Son,
• Out, m&HsUur, addrewed to a fkthrr or brother, would be not very unlike yM, mit-
Icr, In English.
m-i >'7 r IT 1 M
ruUr-eeau, r«l«-Beaa, na-vir«.
110 THE TWBNTY-FIFTH L£8S0y.
IB thy sister here? 16. No, sir, she is at her aunt's. 17. Daugh-
ter, hast thou my pen? 18. No, ma'am, it is on the table. 19. My
son, hast thou my knife ? 20. No, sir, Charles has it. 21. Daugh-
ter, hast thou thy book ? 22. Yes, ma'am, I have it here. 23. Are
you going to the vessel or to the brook ? 24. I am going to the
brook. 25. Does the prince wish for this ship or that one? 26. He
wishes for neither this one nor that one. 27. Does he not wish for
the ship and the vessel ? 28. He wishes for the vessel, but not the
ship. 29. Whose apples has the little boy ? 30. He has his. 31.
Whose has his sister? 32. She has the gardener's. 33. Has she
those of our gardener or of theirs ? 34. She has those of theirs.
35. Are you looking for the men whom I am looking for? 36. I
am looking for those who are looking for me.
OPTIONAL EXERaSES.
1. I am very thirsty ; I wish for a glass of cool water. 2. The
glass is on the table. 3. Do you wish for a glass of beer or a glass
of wine ? 4. I thank you, a glass of cool water ; I do not like (la)
beer. 5. You are right ; Hike (le) wine, but not (la) beer. 6. Who
has my dictionary ? I wish for it. 7. Have you my dictionary, my
friend ? 8. Yes ; do you wish for it ? 9. I am looking for it. 10.
It is there on my table. 11. This is not mine. 12. Is your dic-
tionary big or little ? 13. It is big. 14. It is in my room ; I am
going to look for it 15. If you please. 16. Is this one yours ?
17. Yes, my friend, I thank you (mille remerciments).
25.— VINGT-CINQUli:ME LEgON.
VOULOIE, TO WILL,
1. We have seen that the yerb wmloir^ fbllowod bj a noun or pionoaDf may be tnuoa-
lated wUK for, will have. Before a verb also, when nsed interrogatively or negatively, it
may be translated to with, or to be wUUng,
Do you wiflh to (will you) go home ? Voulez-vou3 aller chez vous?
He is not williog to (will not) be my II nc veut pas ^tre mon ami.
friend.
Are you willing to (will you) be good ? Voulez-vous 6tre bon ?
We do not wish to (will not) be lazy. Nous ne voulons-pas 6tre paresseux.
2. The ordinary meanlngof rotfZofr, however, especially when affirmative, is equivalent
to vciU, in English, a little emphasised.
I will have my money t<hday. Je reux avoir mon argent aujour^kuL
She will have all that she desires. EUe veut avoir tout ce qu*elle ddsire.
We will (are determined to) have it. Nous voulons Tavoir.
They will (are determined to) be rich. lis veulcnt ^tre riches.
1 i • 17 u mt
pa-re«-6eu«i, an-Jonr-d'hui.
THE TWENTY-FIFTH LESSON.
Ill
& V(nd4dr &i«», med interrogatiTely, la a polite mode of Mklng or nqnestlJig; naed
•fflnnatiTely, It denotes consent.
Wni you please to go to oar house ? Youlez-yous bien oiler chez nous ?
I am quite willing. Je le veux bien.
Will you please to look for my pencil? Youlez-yous bien chercher mon cra-
yon?
I am quite willing to look for it. Je veux bien le chercher.
Toapeaky Mpeaking^ spoken, Parler^ parlanty parli.
JtparlSt tuparUn^ ilparU^ noue parlonSt vottiparU», iUparUnt^
I speak, thoa speakest, he speaks, we speak, yon speak, tbey speak.
4. Let the learner bear in mind that all rerbs of the first coxOogatlon (In £B) are Ttried
aa ehcreker, atmer, ioouUr, and par^r, already given.
To me. To us.
To thee. To you.
To him, to her, to it. To them.
To whom dost thou speak ?
I speak to thee.
Do you not speak to me ?
We do not speak to you.
The shoemakers speak to us.
Vy brother speaks to them, and they
speak to him.
I speak to her, and she speaks to mc.
Me. Nous,
Te. Vous.
Lui, Lew,
A qui parles-tu ?
Jo te parle.
Ne mc parlez-Tous pas ?
Nous ne tous parlous pas.
Les cordonniers nous parlent.
Mon fr&re leur parle, et Us lui parlent.
Je lui parle, ct elle me parle.
fi. Pronouns which are the object of the verb In the manner of the above six,— that fs,
with the preposition to employed before them in Knglish,— are called iKDiaBor objects or
miMMCt o&iscnrs pbohounb. They are placed Immediately before a transitive verb.
To taste, tasting, tasted,
7%e one and the other, both (sing.).
The ones and the others, both (plur.).
Neither the one nor the other, neither
(sing.).
Neither the ones nor the others, nei-
ther (plur.).
Gouter,
XASCUUNB.
L^un et Vautre,
Lcs uns et Ics au-
tre?.
NiVunni F autre.
ffoutant, gouts,
FBXIVIKB.
L^une et Vautre.
Les unes et lcs au-
tres.
Ni rune ni Vautre.
Ki les uns ni lcs
autrcs.
NI lcs unes ni les
autres.
0. The above negatives reqolre ne before the verb.
Dost thou taste the sweet fruit or the
sour fruit ?
I taste neither.
Do you taste this meat or that ?
We taste neither.
Does he taste the biscuits or the cakes ?
He tastes neither.
Latg.
To-dag. To-morrow.
Goiites-tu le fruit doux ou le fruit ai-
gre?
Je nc go{ite ni Tun ni Tautre.
Godtez-Tous cette viande-ci ou celle-U?
Nous ne goAtons ni Tune ni Fautre.
Goilte-t-il les biscuits ou les gftteaux ?
n ne goftte ni les uns ni les autres.
Paresseux, Paresseuse,
Aujourd'huL Demain.
If IS 1 • 1 1 SI 16 1 . i« • "■.!!.?*
par-Ier, par-lan<, par-W, par-l«, par-Ions, par-les, par-letU, god-tor, gott-tant. goA-t*, pa-
112 THE TWENTY-FIFTH LESSON.
1. D^sirez-yons votre argent t 2. Oai, monsieur, je le desire,
et je veux Tavoir aujourd'hui. 3. Get homme aime Targent, et il
veut etre riche. 4, Voulez-vous bien ' ecouter cet homme t 5. Je
veux bien Tecouter. 6. Voulez-vous bien chercher mon livre ? 7. Je
veux bien le chercher. 8. Que gotten t les soldats ? 9. Us goutent
notre bon vin. 10. Goiltent-ils ces pommes-ci ou celles-l4 ? 11. lis
ne gotHtent ni les unes ni les autres. 12. Me parles-tu ? 13. Je tc
parle. 14. Nous parlez-vous? 15. Nous vous parlons. 16. Le
maitre parle-t-il a cet ecolier ? 17. II lui parle. 18. Les ecolieres
parlent-elles d la maitresse ? 19. EUes lui parlent. 20. Lo gene-
ral parle-t-il aux soldats f 21. II leur parle. 22. Oofttes-tu le the
ou le cafe 1 23. Je goiite Tun et Tautre. 24. Goutez-vous la pcche
et la poire t 25. Nous ne goiitons ni Tune ni I'autre. 26. Cet
enfant n'a ni faim ni soif ? 27. Je ne goute ni Peau ni la biere,
mon fr^re goAte Tune et I'autre.
1. Will you go to the store ? 2. No, sir, I will go home. 3. That
man will have all that he desires. 4. Will you please to look for
my pen ? 5. I am quite willing to look for it. 6. Do you taste the
sweet apples or the sour ? 7. We taste both. 8. Does the general
taste these biscuits or those 1 9. He tastes both. 10. Dost thou
taste the wine or the milk I 11. I taSte neither. 12. What gloves
have you t 13. I have mine. 14. Have you the white gloves or
the black ones ? 15. I have neither. 16. Have you the gloves or
the stockings! 17. We have both. 18. Has the merchant botht
19. No, sir, he has neither. 20. Has the doctor the white cravats
or the blue? 21. He has neither. 22. Hast thou botht 23. I
have neither. 24. Where are you going? 25. We are going to the
brook. 26. Queen Victoria has many soldiers and many vessels.
1. I speak to thee ; dost thou speak to me t 2.1 speak to thee.
3. Do you speak to us t 4. We do not speak to you. o. We speak
to you ; do you not speak to us 1 6. We speak to you. 7. Those
men speak to me, and I speak to them. 8. Does the master speak
to the scholars ! 9. He speaks to them, and they speak to him.
10. Do you taste the bread or the butter? 11. We taste neither,
but the children taste both. 12. Do you wish for the pen or the ink?
13. I wish for neither, but my friend is looking for both. 14. Is the
boy looking for his books or his papers? 15. He is looking for
neither.
THE TWENTY-SIXTH LESSON- 113
OPTIONAL EXERCISES.
1- Charles, where are you going ? 2. I am going to the store
of my father. 3. Are you going for {allez-vous chercher) any thing ?
4. I am going for (chercher) a coat. 5. Are you not cold t 6. No,
sir. 7. Are you warm ? 8. I am not warm, but I am not very cold.
9. Who is at the store 1 10. The clerks are there. 11. Where are
your father and your uncle % 12. They are at the house ; do you
wish to see them ? 13. I wish to see your father. 14. He is at
home. 16. Is that pretty little girl your sister t 16. No, sir, she
b my cousin. 17. Good morning {bonjour)^ my little friend. 18.
Grood morning, sir.
26.— VINGT-SIXIJfcME LEgON.
OBJECTIVE PEONOUNS.
To give^ ffivhig, given, Donner^ uonnant, donne^ e.
To carry, carrying, carried. Porter, portant, porte, e.
1. The feminine of participles, like that of abject! res, Is formed by adding «. The pla-
ral also is formed as in adjectives.
Where do you carry the fish ? Oii portez-vous les poissons ?
I carry them to the cook's. Je les portc chez le cuisinicr.
Do you giye them to your friends or to Les doimez-vous k tos amis ou aux
ours ? n6tres ?
I gire them to mine. Je les donnc aux miens.
Do the soldiers wear the blue coats, Les soldats portent-ils les habits bleus,
or the bloc pantaloons ? on les pantalons bleus ?
They wear both. lis portent les uns et les autres.
To lend, lending, lent, Pi*eter, pretant, prete, e.
To tend, tending, aent, Envoyer, envoyant, envoye, e.
8. Verbs in yer change y Into i when it comes before « mate.
tTentoie, iu envoien, U envois^ nou9 envoyona, toits envoj^es. Us envoieni,
I send, thou scndest, he sends, vro 5cud, you send, they send.
Do you lend this book or that? Prctez-vous ce livrc-ci ou celui-12k ?
We lend both. Nous protons Tun et Tautrc.
8. The personal pronouns, direct objects of the verb, hare been spoken of in Lesson 22
and the indirect in Lesson 2& The following have been given.
PXBSCT OBJECTS. IKDIIIECT OBJECTS. |
Me, us. Me, nous. To mc, to us. Me, nous.
Thee, you. Tc, vous. To thee, to you. Te, tous.
Him, it, them. Le, les. To him, to it, to them. Lui, leur.
Her, it, there. La, les. To her, to it, to them. Lui, leur.
4. When two pronouns, a direct and an indirect object, belong to the same verb, they
are placed according to tbc following rules : first, when the prononns are of different per-
UeU8 US16SI8816CI6 *'.i?' *****
d4»n-ner, don-nanf, don-ne, por-ter, por-tan^ pur-to, prO-tor, pre-tant, prc-t6, en-vo-yer,
S «>1S3 8 90U« S y> 8 W12S1 8 20
en-vo-yan/, cn-vo-y6, en-vole, cn-vo-yon«, en-vol«i/.
114 THE TWENTY-SIXTH LESSON.
Bona, the first and the second persons precede the third ; second, when they sre both of tlM
third person, the direct object is always placed first Thus,
It or him to me, it or her to me, them Me le, me la, me les.
to me.
It or him to thee, it or her to thee, them Te le, te la, tc les.
to thee.
It or him to us, it or her to us, them to Nous le, nous la; nous les.
us.
It or him to you, it or her to you, them Vous Ic, tous la, tous les.
to you.
It or him to him, it or her to him, them Le lui, la lui, les lui.
to him.
It or him to her, it or her to her, them Le lui, la lui, les lui.
to her.
It or him to them, it or her to them, Le Icur, la leur, les leur.
them to them.
Does the gentleman give you the par- Monsieur tous donne-t-il le parasol ?
asol?
He does not give it to me. II ne me le donue pas.
I give it to him. Je le lui donnc.
Do you not gi^e it to us ? Ne nous le donnez-vous pas?
We do not give it to you. Nous ne vous le donnons pas.
Dost thou lend me thy pen ? Me pr6tes-tu ta plume ?
I do not lend it to thee. Je ne te la pr^te pas.
Do you not lend it to us ? Ne nous la pretcz-vous pas ?
We do not lend it to you. Nous ne tous la pr6tons pas.
6. When two nouns, a direct and Indirect object, belong to the same verb, the direct
object is generally placed first*
I give the man this money. Je donne cet argent 2k Phomme.
He sends his brother the letters. II envoie les lettres k son fr6re.
6. Bat if the direct object be limited by something following, it is to be placed after the
indirect object
He sends to his brother the letters of II euToie a son fr^re les lettres de son
his son and daughter. fils et de sa fille.
1. Pr^tes-tu ton crayon ou ton couteau? 2. Je ne prete ni Tan
ni I'autre. 3. Portes-tu les joumaux a mon pere ? 4. Je ne les
lui porte pas. 5. Les portez-vous aux voisias ? 6. Nous les leur
portons. 7. Envoyez-vous cette lettre au capitaine ? 8. Je la lui
envoie. 9. Me donnes-tu le fruit? 10. Je te le donne. 11, Le
petit gar^on vous donne-t-il sa fleurt 12. II ne me la donne pas.
13. Les n^gociants vous donne-t-ihleurs pommes ? 14. lis ne me
les donnent pas. 15. lis te les donnent, ne nous les donnes-tu pas?
16. Je ne vous les donne pas. 17. L'ccolier donne-t-il cette rose
* The direct and indirect objects in noons are distingia^hed in the same way as in pro-
nouns.
THE TWEXTY^IXTH LESSON. 115
aa maitre? 18. II ne la lui donne pas. 19. Ne la donne-t-fl pas
a la maitressef 20. II la lui donne. 21. Les soldats pr^tent-ils
leura fusils a ces hommes 1 22. Us les leur pretent. 23. Prfitez-
vous votre livre d cette dame 1 24. Je le lui prete. 25. Le pretez-
vous aux ecoliers? 26. Je le leur prete. 27. Envoyez-vous les
joumaux a vos freresl 28. Nous les leur envojons. 29. Envoies-
tu ce livre k ta soeur? 30. Je le lui envoie.
1. To whom dost thou give the handsome sofa? 2. I give it to
thee. 3. To whom does the master give the pretty book 1 4. He
gives it to me. 5. Dost thou not give it to us ? 6. I do not give
it to you. 7. To whom do the gardeners give their flowers ? 8.
They give them to me. 9. Do they not give them to us t 10. They
do not give them to you. 11. Do they give them to thee f 12. Ye%
sir, they give them to me. 13. To whom do the fishermen carry
their fish ? 14. They carry them to you. 15. Do they not carry
them to the shoemaker? 16. They do not carry them to him.
17- Do you carry your letters to your friends! 18. We carry them
to them. 19. To whom does the clerk send the gloves 1 20. He
sends them to the stranger. 21. Does he send them to theef
22. He does not send them to me. 23. Does he send them to us ?
24. He does not send them to you.
25. Does the clerk carry the cloth to the doctor! 26. He does
not carry it to him. 27. Does he carry (to) him the silk t 28. He
carries it to him. 29. Dost thou carry that book to thy mother ?
30. I carry it to her. 31. Dost thou carry her the newspaper also!
32. I do not carry it to her. 33. Do you give the flowers to that
young lady ! 34. We give them to her. 35. Do you lend your
money to the merchants? 36. We lend it to them. 37. Do you
send the meat to the soldiers ? 38. We send it to them. 39. Do
you wear the white cravat or the black one ? 40. I wear neither.
41. Do yon lend me these books or those ? 42. I lend you both.
OPnONAL EXERCISES.
1. Good morning, sir ; do you wish to buy (acketer) something?
2. Yes, sir, I wish to buy a book. 3. What book do you wish to
buy ? 4. Have you the history of France ? 5. Yes, sir, we have
it ; do you wish for it in French {en franqaia) or in English {en
anglais) ? 6. In French, if you please. 7. This one is a good
history. 8. Thanks {merci). 9. To whom do you speak ? 10. I
speak to the president. 11. Do-those gentlemen speak to doctor
116 THE TWENTY-SEVENTH LESSON.
Peter? 12. They speak to him. 13. Does captain John speak to
the soldiers? 14. He speaks to them. 15. Do they speak to the
sailors t 16. They do not speak to them. 17. Do they speak to
thee? 18. They do not speak to me. 19. Are you warm or cold?
20. I am neither warm nor cold. 21. Is that sick man thirsty?
22. He is very thirsty. 23. Is he not sleepy ? 24. No, sir, he is
thirsty, hut not sleepy.
27.— VINGT-SEPTIfiME LEQON.
USE OF EST-CE QUE
1. With moBt French verbs a qaestion is asked ia the flrat person singular, as in the
other jMrsons, by pbicing the subject after the verb ; as,
Do I go to the bank ? YaU-je 4 la banquc ?
Am I at ipur house or your father's ? Suis-jc cbez vous ou chez TOtre p6re ?
Hare I a good pen f Ai-jc une bonne plume ?
Do I speak properly f Parl^je eonvenabUment f
Do I listen well ? £cout6-je bien?
2. When ^0 follows the verb, • ilnal of the first person singular indicatlro present takes
an acute accent, as in the last two phrasos.
8w £M-M que, however, is used to inbt>duoe the indicative present first penMO, to avoid
a harsh sound.
Do I sleep f £st-ce que je dors (not dors-je)^
Do I run ? £st-ce que je cours (not amrs-je) ?
Do I seek ? £st-cc que je chcrcbe ?
4. The French also use e«f-c« que with all persors and tenses, to express some emotion
blended with the interrogation.
Do I go to school, father ? Est-ce que je vnis & Tecole, mon p<ire ?
Are you wounded, my friend ? £st-cc que vous 6tes bletsi, mon ami?
Are we the friends of that wicked £st-ce que nous sommcs Ics amis de ce
person? mdchant?
Do I ever speak evil of you ? Est-ce que je parle jamais mal do voua ?
Have we your money? Est-ce que nous avons votre argent?
To study, studying, studied. ^tudier, ctudiant, ItudU,
To buy, buying, bought. Acheter, aclietant, achcil
R. In verbs of the first ooqjngation having e mnto in the last syllable but one, that e
takes the grave accent when the next consonant is followed by e mute.
J'acMU, tuacMte», Uachete, nous oehetAns, wusaeheteB, Us achiteni,
I buy, thoabuyest, he buys, we buy, you buy, they buy.
That scholar studies well. Cet dcolier ^tudie bien.
1 T tl 14 S S a 1^6 « a l**! S S3 l-« 1 « 1 II 6
par-1oJ«, conve-nable-nieni!, e-tu-dlor, 6-tn-dian<, 6-tu-di^, a-ch«-ter, a-che-tani^ a-cb«-tu,
a-chtt«, a-€he-ton«, a-che-tec, a-chet«n^
THE TWEJJTY-SEVENTH LESSON.
117
XA8CVLIXS.
FExnmcB.
L'air.
Vncjievre.
Cepatfs,
Une tomate.
Ce climat
La moutarde.
Le temps.
Ma bibliotheqve.
Le fratifais.
1a franfoise.
Vetpagnol,
VeMpagnole.
VaUemand.
Vallemande.
Vanglaitt.
Vanglcdu.
Vita2ien.
VikUienne.
The air. A fever.
This eauniry. A tomato.
This climate. The mustard.
The <im«, toeather. My library.
The J^reRcAiRcin. The i^encA-fooman.
-..«.. ( The iSpanwA-
The Barnard, j ^^„
_. _ j The G^^nnan-
The German. 1 ,_-_^„
The ^«^/«Aman.j ^,„^,,
The Italian. The i/o/tan-fooman.
6L National deslgnatiooa like the abore, when need as nouns and applle<l to nations,
begin with a capital letter; when used as a^jeetircs or applied to indlvldnals, thoy begin
with a small ]ett4^T.
The French are polite. Les Fran^ais eont polls.
He is a Frenchman (French). 11 est fran^ais.
I have an English watch. «rai une montre anglaiso.
7. The masculine of the aboTe Aire also denotes the language.
I study French and Englisli, you study JT^tudie lefran^ais ct Vanglais^ tous
German and Spanish, she studies ^tudiez Vallemand et Yespagnolj
Italian. cUe 6tudie Vitalien.
1. Quels livres avez-voas ? 2. J'ai un dictionnaire anglais et
ime grammaire italienne. 8. ^Itudiez-vous le frangais ? 4. J'6ta-
die le fran^ais et mes consins etudient Tespagnol. 5. Le fran^ais
ach^te-t-il les cravates blanches on les crayates noires? 6. II
n*ach^te ni les nnes ni les antres. 7. Que dcsirez-vous dtudier?
8. Je desire 6tadier Tespagnol, mais ma soeur veut etudier I'alle-
mand. 9. Est-ce qne voire soear est malade? 10. Ellc est un
peu malade. 11. L'air de cette chambre est-il frais ? 12. II est
bien frais. 13. Aimez-vous ce pays-ci ? 14. J*aime ce pays-ci et ce
cliinat-ci ? 15. Voire mere va-t-elle chez la petite frangaise? 16.
Non, madame, elle n'a pas le temps. 17. Voire ami est-il malade ?
18. Oui, monsieur, il a la fievre. 19. Qu'a ce domestique? 20.
II a lea tomates et la moutarde. 21. La bibliothdque du docteur
est grande.
1. I desire to study French, but my brother will study Spanish.
2. What is the matter with that sick man t 3. He has the fever.
7 19 7 119 U 1 13 I IS 1 S ia I9IS S t t t '
air, H-^TTf. pay#, to-mat/« cli-ma^ moa-tard^ tom^M, bi-bll-o-t*Hk«, fyaD-cal«« fran-
(aiiA vs-pa-gnol, es-pa-gnol^ alU-nand, aU«-mande, an glaic, an*glaiz«, 1-to-lien, i.ta-iicnn«.
118 THE TWENTT-SBVENTH LESSON.
4. What art thou buying? 5. I am buying a library. 6. What
.do the cooks wish to buy ? 7. They wish to buy the tomatoes and
the mustard. 8. Is the Spanish woman going to the house of the
German woman ? 9. No, sir, she is going to the Italian woman*s.
10. Are you going to the English woman's? 11. No, sir, I hare
not the time. 12. Do you wish to study Italian ? 13. I wish to
study Italian, but my sister will study French. 14. Do you study
Spanish or German? 15. We study neither. 16. Do the mer-
chants buy the shoes or the gloves? 17. They buy neither. 18.
Do you buy the forks or the spoons ? 19. We buy neither.
20. What do those children study? 21. They study English.
22. Do the countrymen send you their fruit ? 23. They send it
to me. 24. Do they send you their peaches ? 25. They do not
send them to me. 26. To whom do you give jour books? 27.
We give them to thee. 28. Do you send this meat to the neigh-
bor ? 29. We do not send it to him, we send it to thee. 30. To
whom do you lend your books ? 31. We lend them to you. 32.
To whom does the master lend his ? 33. He lends them to thee.
34. To whom dost thou lend thy money ? 35. I lend it to you.
86. Does the merchant send you your money ? 37. He sends it
to us.
OPTIONAL EXERCISES.
1. What are you carrying in that bag? 2. We are carrying
these nails to the carpenter who is at our house. 3. Yon have
many nails ; does the carpenter wish for them all ? 4. Tes, he
wishes for them all. 5. Where do you go for (chercher) these
nails? 6. My father sends me for them (lea ckercher) to the store.
7. Do you go to the store of Mr. A. or to Mr. B.'s? 8. I go to
neither the one nor the other ; I go to my cousin's. 9. Is your
cousin at his store? 10. No, sir, he is sick. 11. He is sick!
what is the matter with him ? 12. He has the fever. 13. Wfio
is his physician? 14. His physician is doctor H. 15. Is your
cousin very sick ? 16. Not {non pas) very sick. 17. I wish to go
to his house. 18. You are right ; he loves you much.
THE TWBNTY.EIGHTH LESSON.
119
28^VINGT-HUITa:ME LECON.
SECOND CONJUGATION. IN IB.
t. Verbs of tho Second Conjugation (in£ in IB), have the terminations of the present
indlcftUye, as follows :
13, IS, IT, I8S0KS, ISSEZ, ISSSMT.
2. The pastptftleiple of this coi^JagaUon is fonned by dropping IE of the inflnltire;
except tiiat those in enir change the < to v.*
To Choose, Chosen, Choisir (inf.). Choisi (post part.).
j€c7u>i9U, tuehoUU, UchoUit^ nous cAoMssons, «oiM cAoisisses, U» dioUUtent^
I choose, thou ohoosest, he chooses, we choose, you choose, they choose.
To comty coming, come. Fentr, venant^ venu.
To hold, holding, held. Tenir, tenant^ ienii,
8. Venir^ Uniry and their oomponnds, are irregular, and terminate thns :
JiBvUnSy tuTisnty UvUnt, noutvenotUf eott«««n««, UtvUnnerU,
I come, thoacomest, becomes, we come, you come, they come.
The chocolate.
A billet, noU.
A bank-biU,
lAve^ living.
Dead.
Whence,
From his house.
jLpune,
A violet.
A jonquil.
From your house.
From her house.
Do joa choose the chocokte or the
tea?
I choose neither the chocolate nor the
tea.
Do you choose the leather purse ?
I choose the silk purse.
Whence do you come ?
We come from home.
Dost thou come from the store ?
No, I come from the brook.
What are those little boys holding f
They are holding their books, and I
am holding mine.
Le chocolat.
Un billet.
Un billet de banque.
Vivant,
Mart.
I/oiH.
De chez lui.
tJne bourse.
Une violette.
Une Jonquille.
Vivante.
Morte.
De chcz vous.
De chez elle.
Choisissez-Toua le chocolat ou le th6?
Je ne choisis ni le chocolat ni le th&
Choisissez-vous la bourse de cuir?
Je choisis la bourse de soie.
D'oiiTcnez-Yous?
Nous Tenons de chez nous.
Yiens-tu du magasin ?
Non, je yiens du ruisseau.
Que tiennent ces petits gar^ons?
Ds tiennent leurs livres, et je tiens les
miens.
4. The articles and adjective prononns are to be repeated before each noon in the same
constraction, and before each adjective belonging to a separate noon.
He has the book, pencil, and paper. H a le livre, le crayon et le papier.
We wish for the bread and cheese. Nous youlons le pain et le fromage.
He has his sugar and milk. II a son sucre et son lait
• Other exceptions to this role will be given as the rerbs are introduced.
9 19 9> U » 19 90 19 90 )9 91 SO n 6 90 19 4 19
choi-dr, choi-zi, chol-zi«. ehoi-zi^ ehoi-zie-soa«, choi-ds-see, choi-tisseiUL ve-nir,
«S 404 19 49 in 1914 1914 4 91 4 « 191 1* l8 1 II
re-nanl^ re-no, te-nir, te-nan<, te-nn, Tiens, vien^, ve-nons, Te-ne«, Tienn«Rl^ eho-eo-lai; bourse,
19 i UiS S 9 ai 11 19 9 19 9 IC 14
bi-llet, ri-o-lette, banks, Jon^kUls, Ti-yan^, vl-vants, morl, morte.
120 THE TWEOTY-EIGHTH LESSON.
& CoufUry^ moaning a particular region, is pays; country, dlstingalahcd fh>ro tho
city, is campagfu,
I like my country, you like yours. J^aime men pays^ tous aimez le Tdtre.
We like the country, be likes the city. Nous aimons la campagne, il aime la
ville.
1. D'ou vienuent vos frferes? 2. lis viennent de chez eux.
3. Les cbevaux de qui tenez-vous? 4. Nous tenons les n6tres.
5. Que tient ce petit gar^ont 6. II tient les fleurs de cette dame.
7. Je tiens mes livres, et les enfants tiennent les roses, les violettes
et les jonquilles. 8. Portez-vous ce billet k votre pere ? 9. Je le
lui porte. 10. Donnez-vous les billets de banque aux marcbandst
11. Nous les leur donnons. 12. Quel poisson ce cuisinier cboisit-il!
13. II cboisit celui-ci. 14. Ces poissons-ci sont vivants et ceux-lk
sont morts. 15. Ces arbres du jardinier sont morts. 16. La m^re de
ce petit gar9on est-elle morte 1 17. EUe est vivante. 18. Ces dames
cboisissent-elles les violettes oa les jonquilles t 19. EUes cboisis-
sent les unes et les autres. 20. D'ou cet bomme vient-il? 21. II
vient de France. 22. Que tiens-tu ? 23. Je tiens mon livre.
1. Do tbe cooks cboose tbe live fisb of tbis. boy, or tbe dead
ones of tbe fisbermanf 2.^Tbey cboose tbe live ones. 3. Dost
tbou cboose tbe glass candlestick or tbe copper one? 4. I cboose
neitber. 5. Do you come Trom tbe (du) brook ? 6. No, sir, I come
from tbe store. 7. Does tbe mason come from your bouse t 8. No,
sir, be comes from tbe sbip. 9. Are tbe countrymen coming bere ?
10. No, sir, tbey are going to tbe country. 11. Wbence do you
come? 12. We come from tbe city. 13. Dost tbou come from tbe
country t 14. No, sir, I come from bome (de chez moi). 15. Wbat
books are you bolding t 16. We are holding ours- 17. Are the
scholars holding tbeirs ? 18. Tbey are bolding them. 19. Whose
horse is tbe countryman bolding? 20. He is holding bis. 21.
Whose books dost thou bold ? 22. I bold my friends'. 23. Do
they not hold theirs ? 24. No, sir, I hold them.
1. Does tbe master lend you his pen ? 2. He lends it to us.
3. Do the merchants lend you their money ? 4. Tbey do not lend
it to us, they lend it to you. 5. Dost thou send the flower to that
lady ? 6. I send it to her. 7. Does tbe neighbor send you your
notes ? 8. He sends them to us. 9. Do you send his newspapers
to him? 10. I send them to him. 11. Do you carry tbe fruit to
ris 1 1
pays, cam-pagn0
THE TWENTY-NINTH LESSON. 121
yoar mother T 12. I carry it to her. 13. Do you carry her the
violets and the jonquils? 14. I carry them to her. 15. Dost thou
send that sonp to the sick men? 16. I send it to them. 17. Dost
thoa send them the coffee also ? 18. I send it to thenL 19. Where
is the bank bill? 20. It is here in my purse. 21. My motheri
sister, and cousin are here.
OPnONAL EXERCISES.
I. Do you study French ? 2. No, madam, but I am going to
study it. 3. Do you like the French ? 4. 1 like much the French
and the Spanish, but I do not like the German. 5. Do you not
wish for a dictionary ? 6. I have a French and English dictionary
at home. 7. If you wish, I am going to send you a history. 8.
You are very good, sir. 9. Adieu (adieu)^ sir. 10. Till we see
each other again {au revotr).
II. What have you in that bag? 12. 1 have the books which
I study. 13. Do you study all those books? 14. Yes, sir, I stady
them all. 15. Is the air of this chapiber fresh ? 16. It is very
fresh. 17. What do you buy of (d) that countryman? 18. I buy
his tomatoes and his mustard. 19. Have you a history of France
in your library ? 20. Yes, sir, this book is the history of France,
and that one the history of Spain. 21. Do you buy the German
grammar ? 22. No, sir, we buy the Italian grammar.
29.— VlNGT-NEUVltME LEfON.
SECOND CONJUGATION CONTINUED.
1. Some Teibt of the Second Co^jogstion, the stems * of vhlch end in two distinct eon-
ats, tennlnitte In
B, 8, T, ONS, EZ, KKT.
and drop the last consonant of the stem before a silent tennlnatlng consonant
To go outf going out^ gone out. Sortir, wrtant^ §orH.
Jamra, iu9or», Utort, nouttorknu, vouttorteB^ UawrUni,
I go oat, thon goest oat, he goes oat, we go oat, yoagooot, they go out
1 Without a yerb. Jamais; with a verb, n^
before the verb and jamais after it, ur
jamais ns before the yerb.
£ver. Often, Jamais. Souvent.
5*0/ (adrerb). Again. FneorSy or toujours. Encore.
Sometimes. Already. QudqMfoJB. D^d.
• The stem is that part of the rerb which is anchanged, to which the terminations src
added in conjagatlng it. '
M n MS IS IS M IS IS tl 16 C 16 l 7 II S S 'f
sor-tlr, 8or-tan<; sor-U, sort, sorl, sor-tons, sor-tce, sort«n«, Ja-mais, soa-yent, en-core,
IS It « 4 '.« 8 1
iea-Jonre, k«l-ka-fot«. d^^-
G
12*2
THE TWEXTY-XINTH LESSOX.
( Without a TerY), pas tnoors; with % rerh,
Not yet. \ *M beforo the rerb and pa» encore af-
( terit
MASOiTLxm. mmmra.
The mcrninff. The night. Le ma<tn. La wtit.
The Jire. The we. Le/eu. lAfflaee.
The evening. The atAoo/. Le roir. L'^eo^.
ZTardL Dtir. i>ur«.
Soft. Mou. Molle.
2. Jfott bccbmes md belbre a rowel or a silent h.
Warm, hot, Chaud. ChawU.
Cold. Froid. Froide.
Do jou often go out ? Sortez-vous souvent ?
We go out sometimes, but not often. Nous sortons quelquefois, mais pas
souyent.
8. Adverbs are generally placed immediately after their yerbs. Those of time and place,
howeyer, can stand at the beginning of the phrase.
Do you neyer go to the market ? ITallez-yous Jamus au march6 ? Ja-
Keyer. mais.
He neycr goes to church. H ne ya jamais k T^glise.
I often go to the store, but I neyer go Je yais souyent au magasin, mais ja-
to the market. mais je ne yais au marchd.
4. The clrcomstanee of time Is often expressed in French without a preposition.
In the morning. In the eyening.
In the night, at night.
Dost thou eyer go out at night ?
No, sir. I sometimes go out in the
morning and in the eyening, but
I neyer go out at night.
Is that child already hungry ?
He is not yet hungry.
He is still sleepy.
Le matin. Le soir.
La nuit.
Sors-tu jamais la nuit ?
Noo, monsieur. Je sors quelquefois le
matin ct le soir, mais je ne eors
jamais la nuit
Cet enfant a-t-il d6j4 faim ?
II n*a pas encore faim.
n a encore sommeiL
6. The article is used as In English with nouns in a definite sense ; also with nouns in a
general sense (which omit it in English); as,
Iron is hard. Coal is black. Le fer e^ur. Le charbon est notr.
Fire is hot. Ice is cold. Le feu est chaud. La glace est froide.
I like tea, I do not like coffee. J'aime le th6, je n'aime pas le cafS.
1. Ce petit gar^on a-t-fl d^]k soif ? 2. Pas encore. 8. J'ai
encore froid ; n'avez-vous pas froid ? 4. Non, monsieur, j'ai chaad.
5. Votre fr^re sort-il la nuit? 6. Jamais. 7. Qu'a ce malade?
8. n a la fi^vre jaune. 9. Ces enfants sortent-ils quelquefois ?
10. lis sortent souvent. 11. Sortent-ils la nuit? 12. Non, mon-
sieur, ils sortent le matin, et le soir, mais ils ne sortent jamais
1 14 9in 1 s IS a 11 17 IB
ma-Un, nai^ glnee, 6-eols, dnre, mol^ ohande, ttoids.
THE TWENTY-NINTH LESSON. 123
la unit 13. L'acier n'est il pas blea? 14. Si, I'acier est blen,
Targent est blanc, et le charbon est noir. 15. Choisissez-vous le
biscnit mou ou le dur? 16. Nous voulons Tun et I'autre. 17.
Aimez-vons un climat cbaad ou un climat &oid ? 18. Je n*aime ni
Vnn ni Taatre. 19. N'aimez-vous pas ce pays-ci ? 20. Je raime
beaaconp. 21. D^sirez-Yous 6tadier Tallemand? 22. Je desire
I'etudier, mais mon p^re Qe le veut pas. 23. Voulez-votis bien venir
ici ce soil ? 24. Oiii, je le yens bien. 25. Ou allez-vous ? 26.
Je Tais k I'ecole.
1. Dost thou buy the countryman's chickens ? 2. I buy his
chickens, his tomatoes, and his mustard. 3. Where is your Spanish
grammar ? 4. It is in my library. 5. Is your brother still sick ?
6. Yes, madam, he has the fever still. 7. Do you choose the choc-
olate or the tea ? 8. We choose the chocolate. 9. What has the
Italian woman ? 10. She has the silk purse and the bank bill. 11.
Does the neighbor send you his fruit ? 12. He sends it to me.
13. Do you send him his notes ? 14. I send them to him. 15. Does
that child go out often ? 16. He goes out sometimes, but not often.
17. Is he already hungry ? 18. He is not yet hungry. 19. Is the
mason still thirsty ? 20. He is still thirsty.
21. Is that child already sleepy ? 22. He is not yet sleepy.
23. Dost thou ever go out in the morning ? 24. No, I often go
out in the evening, but I never go out in the morning. 25. Does
your sister choose the roses or the tulips ? 26. She chooses nei-
ther, she chooses the violets and the jonquils. 27. Does she give
them to you ? 28. She gives them to me. 29. Does the master
give you his pen ? 30. He gives it to me. 31. To whom dost
then give that note ? 32. I give it to thee. 33. Dost thuu give
me the letter ? 34. I give it to thee. 35. Dost thou give me the
newspapers ? 36. I give them to thee. 37. Do you give me that
purse ? 38. We give it to you. 39. Are you going to school ?
40. I am not going to school, I am going to churcL
OPnONAL EXERCISES.
1. Do you ever speak Spanish ? 2. Sometimes, but not often.
3. Do you study it still ? 4. No, sir, I have not the time, I study
French. 5. Do you speak it ? 6. Not yet. 7. Your brother speaks
it, however (cependant). 8. Yes, sir, my brother and sister speak
it. 9. Where is your brother ? 10. He is clerk in the store of my
uncle. 11. Does he still study French ? 12. Yes, sir, he studies it
124
THE THIRTIETH LESSON.
Still ; he wishes to speak it well {le hien parler). 13. He is right.
14. Where does your sister go to school ? 15. She goes to the
school of Madam G. 16. It is a very good school. 17. Madam G.
speaks French, and her daughters also. 18. She has many schol-
ars, and they all study {ellea etudient touies) French. 19. Do your
cousins go to Madam G.'s school ? 20. No, sir, they do not go to
school at present (d present).
30.— TRENTlilME LEgON.
THE RELATIVES WITH EST-CE QUI Ain> EST-CE QUE
1. We have seen that (except quit whom? int«rrogatlTe) qui la the anl^eet and ffne
the object of the following verb. Tho same is the case also when these relatlTea IbUow qui
•sf-ee or qu^ttlt-eey interrogative.
Who f Qui est-ce qui ?
Whcmf Qui cst-ce que?
What f (subject). Qu'cst-ce qui ?
What f (object). Qu*est-ce que ?
Who goes to the bank ?
Whom is that man looking for !
What have jon ?
fQui est-ce qui va 4 la banqne f
Qui^
ya 4 la banque ?
( Qui est-ce q%te cet homme cherche ?
( Qui cet homme cherche-t-il ?
iQu'c8t-ce que vous arez ?
Qti'avez-Tous ?
8. The choice between the two forms of translating who^ whom^ and trAof, here glTen,
is determined by euphony ; but uhat f as subject, can only be gu'esf^ce quit
( Qu*e8t-ce qui est sur la table ?
( (And not Que est sur, etc.)
JtemaueTf ramoBaant, ramaste.
What is on the table ?
To pickups picking upt picked up.
Tojindy finding^ found.
The gardener.
A cupboard. A clothu-preM,
A closet.-
A stable.
A cask.
A barrel.
FuU.
Empty. Always.
Do you pick up what you find ?
We pick up what we find.
I pick up what I find.
The cow is in the stable.
TVouver, trouvant,
MASCirusrs.
Le jardinier.
Un buffet.
Un tonneau.
Un baril.
Plein.
Vide.
trouvS.
Ia jardiniere.
Une garde-robe.
XJne armoire.
Une Stable.
Pleine.
Toujours.
Ramassea-Tous ce que vous trourez f
Nous ramassons cc que nous troavons.
Je ramasse ce que je troure.
La vache est dans r6table.
8. Jteurle is a stable for horses and moles ; UahUi for oxen, cows, and sheep.
i 138 1 1 « 1 1 t 1 1 « II « II t 18 « 1 It 19S
tren-tidms, ra-mas ser, ra-ma«-Ban(, ra-ma«-ee, troa-Tor, trou-vani, tron-ve, Jar^di-nier,
1 » ur a < 1 u If 17 1 so 1 IS s 1 i4 7 11 is
Jar-di-nidra, bq/-felv garde-robe, to»-nean, ar-moiie, ba-riA Stable, plein, pleine, vide, ton-
Jonrt.
THE THIBTIBTH LESSON. 125
C Xfie, A^ it, they, are translated b j m Instead of H^ eUs^ iU, tOett beflm the rerb Un,
when the predicate is a noan, a pronoan, or any phrase characterizing the snbject, except an
a^ective, a past participle, or a noon used as an adjective.
Who 13 that man ? Qui est cet homme f
He is our neighbor. C'est tiotre Toisin.
That woman is beautiful. Cettc femme est belle.
She is the wife of our neighbor. (Test la femme de notre voisin.
^Vho are those little boys ? Qui sent ces petits gargons ?
Thej are mj cousins. * Cc sont mes cousins.
Do yon sec those youn<; Indies ? Vo jcz-vous ces jeunes demoiselles ?
Ther are the scholars of Madam G. Ce sont les 4colidres do madame G.
They are Tcry good. EUes sont bien bonnes.
JSZIm Is nsed in this last phrase, because the predicate Is the verb and adjectlre merely ;
cs Is used In the preceding, because the predicate contains a noun.
&. Usage aathorizes the employment of il, eUe^ etc., in snch cases, proTlded the subject
has been distinctly specified.
Who is the gentleman ? Qui est ce monsieur ?
He is my brother. C^cst mon fr5re, or^ II est mon fr^re.
Who is in the house ? Qui est dans la maison ?
It is my brother. CTest mon fr^re {and not II est, etc.).
What have you there ? Qu'avez-vous \k ?
They are my books. Ce sont mes livres.
Yon lore John. He is my friend. Yous aimez Jean. CTest (or il est) mon
ami.
1. Qni est chez vons ? 2. Ce sont mes amis. 3. Qui est cet
homme? 4. C'est notre mcdecin. 5. II est anglais.* 6. Qui est-
ce que vous cherchez ? 7. Je cherche celui que vous clierchez. 8.
Qui est-ce qui veut ces papiers? 9. Le maitre les veut. 10. Qu'est-
ce que vous ramassez? 11. Je ramasse ces pommes. 12. Qu'est-ce
qui est sur la table? 13. Ce sont les papiers du maitre. 14. Trou-
Tcz-vous ce que vous cherchez? 15. Je le trouve. 16. Cet homme
est-il votre cuisinier? 17. Non, monsieur, c'est notre jardinier.
18. Ou est la clef du buflfet ? 19. La clef du buffet est dans cette
armoire, et celle de la garde-robe est sur la table. 20. Qu'est-ce
qui est sous cet arbre? 21. Ce sont les tonneaux et les barils du
marchand. 22. Sont-ils pleins ou vides ? 23. Les tonneaux sont
vides, et les barils sont pleins de biere. 24. Qu'est-ce qui est dans
I'etable? 25. Ce sont nos vaches. 26. Qui est {or qui est-ce
qui est) dans le jardin ? 27. C'est le jardinier.
1. Does the gardener send us the flowers ? 2. He sends them
to us. 3. Who picks up those apples? 4. The gardener picks
• /f Is used here, and not c«, because anglaU is u*cd as an a^jectire
126 THE THIRTIETH LESSON.
ihem np. 5. Do you find the man whom you seek ? 6. I find him.
7. Do you pick up what you find ? 8. I pick it up. 9. What is in
the cuphoard ? 10. It is our glass hottles and our porcelain plates.
11. Are the bottles full or empty? 12. They are empty. 13.
Where is the key of the wardrobe ? 14. It is in that closet 15.
Where is your cloak ? 16. It is in my wardrobe. 17. Your cup-
board is small, but your closet is large., 18. Are those casks empty f
19. No, sir, those casks are full of wine, and these barrels are full
of wine also. 20. What is in the stable? 21. It is the oxen of
my father. 22. Who is that man? 23. It is Captain John. 24.
He is very tall. 25. That lady is beautiful ; she is the friend of
my sister. 26. Who are those little boys ? 27. They are the chil-
dren of our neighbor. 28. What is on the table ? 29. They are
my books and my papers. 30. Where is the cow? 31. She is in
the stable.
32. Does that young girl lend you her pen ? 33. She lends it
to me. 34. Do you give those apples to your sister ? 35. I give
them to her. 36. I find the air of this room very fresh. 37. What
is the matter with your sick friend? 38. He has the fever. 39.
Do you send the bank-bill to your mother ? 40. I do not send it to
her. 41. Do you send it to your brothers ? 42. I send it to them.
43. What is in the stable? 44. It is the horse of our neighbor.
45. To whom does the gardener give those apples ? 46. He gives
them to us. 47. Do you not give them to me ? 48. We give them
to you.
OPTIONAL EXERCISES.
1. Do you fmd the candlesticks which you seek ? 2. I do not
find them. 3. Do you look for the hat which is on the floor ? 4. I
do not look for it. 5. Does the countryman find what he looks for?
6. He does not find it. 7. Does the merchant wish for the casks
which are empty ? 8. No, sir, he wishes for those which are full of
wine. 9. Does the gardener wish for the barrels of the merchant ?
10. No, sir, he wishes for those which are in the yard. 11. What
is in the cupboard? 12. It is the porcelain cups. 13. What cow
do you buy? 14. I buy the one which is in the stable. 15. Do
you ever go out in the morning ? 16. I often go out in the morn-
ing and in the evening. 17. Who is that man? 18. He is the
friend of my father. 19. What is on the table? 20. They are the
letters of my friend.
THE THIRTT-FIRST LESSON. 127
31.— TRENTE ET UNIfiME LEgON.
PABTmVE NOUXS.
L When tlM word 9ome or any is expressed or understood with a nonn, it is said to bo
used In a partitiTe sense. Noons so nsed take dt and the article in French, which, according
to the gender and number, take the following fonns.
MASCULZXX. rZMIKINE.
Svme^ any (singular).
i
DVL
j De la (before a con-
( sonant).
DeV,
De 1* (before a vowel
or silent A).
i>e«.
DeB.
Da pain.
De la viande.
De Tor.
De reau.
Pes tonneaux.
Des ardoiacs.
Some, any (plural).
Some bread. Some meat.
Some gold. Some water.
Some casks. Some slates.
He wishes for some bread and some U.veut du pain et de la viande.
meat.
We wish for some pens and some ink. Nous voulons des plumes et de Tencre.
9l The learner can easily determine, on reflection, whether the noun is nsed in a parti-
tive or In a general sense. In the first three of the following sentences the noan is general,
and tberei<)re takes the article, bat not d6 ; in the lost three it is partitive, and takes dtf with
thearUde.
He loves money. Ho loves coffee. H aime Targent. H aime lo caf6.
He loves chocolate. He has money. H aime le cbocolat. II a de rnrgeut.
He has coffee. He has chocolate. H a du caf6. II a du chocoLit.
%. To the abore mle of partltlye nouns taking (fe and the article, there are two excep-
tions; first exception, a partitive noon being the object of a verb with a negative, takes tf«
withont the article.
He has no money. H n^a pas d'argent.
Have you no biscuit ? N'avez-vous pas de biscuit ?
I have some biscuit. tTai du biscuit.
4. Sometimes, especially in qnestlons, the form of the phrase is negative, thoogh the
meaning is not, or does not express total negation ; in such cases the article most be used.
Have you not moucy ? (meaning a^ N^avez-vous pas do Targent ?
firmative.)
I have no money to spend foolishly. Je n^ai pas de Vargcnt * pour le de-
peneer follemenL
h, Second exeeption, partitives immediately preceded by an a4Jective take de without
theartide.
I have some pretty buttons. iTai de jolis bouton5.
He has excellent wioe. II a d^excellent viu.
The above rule (1) and its two exceptions are illustrated in the four following phrases.
Has he any ivory ? A-t-il de Ti voire ?
He has no ivory. II nV pas d*ivotre.
♦ The meaning is, I have money, but not to spend foolishly.
trents et unldme, do-pen-ser.
128
THE THIRTT-nBST LESS6N.
He has some good sheep. II a de bons moutons.
He has some white sheep. II a des moutons blancs.
6. The article and preposition are to be repeated before each portitiTe Bonn in the
eonstmctlon.
I wish for some paper, pens, and ink. Je veux du papier, det plomea et de
Tencre.
To break. To ihow.
Oasser.
Montrer.
Fooluhly, Blind
ofons
eye.
Follement.
Borgne.
Blind, That blind man.
AveuffU.
Get aveugle.
MASCULZXS.
A portfolio^ pocket-book.
The lettuce.
Un porte-feuiUe.
Jjklaitue.
A mattren. The bean.
Un tnatelaa.
La /eve, le haricot.
Bow,
Cm.
Crue.
Cooked.
Cuit.
Cuite.
Well-cookedy weU-done.
Bare.
Bien cvit.
Pen cuit.
Bien cuite.
Pea cuite.
1. Qu*est-ce que les espagnols cassentt 2. lis cassent lears
verres. 3. Nous montrez-yous les billets de banque? 4. Noos
vous les montrons. 5. Ghoisissez-vous le portefeuille rouge ou le
bleu ? 6. Je choisis le rouge. 7. Le fran9ais choisit-il le matelas
dur ou le mon t 8. II choisit le doux. 9. Ghoisissez-vous le boeof
cm ou le cuit? 10. Je choisis le cuit. 11. Nous aimons la viande
peu cuite et Tanglais Taime bien cuite. 12. Que desire I'aveuglet
13. II veut de Targent 14. Get homme est-il aveugle t 15. Non,
monsieur, il est borgne, mais non pas aveugle. 16. Que vous
xnontre la paysanne? 17. Elle me montre de la laitue et des hari-
cots. 18. Ge borgne casse son verre et son assiette. 19. Que
cassez-voust 20. Je ne casse rien. 21. Avez-vous du fer? 22.
Je n'ai pas de fer ; j'ai de Targent et de bel ivoire.
1. Do you like chocolate ? 2. I like chocolate and tea. 3.
Do you like meat rare or well done? 4. I like meat rare and
eggs well done. 5. Does the Italian like ham raw or cooked ? 6.
He likes it raw. 7. What does the servant break ? 8. He breaks
(cracks) the nuts. 9. What do you break? 10. We often break
our glasses and our plates. 11. What do you show to the master?
12. We show him our copy-books and our slates. 13. Dost thou
show him thy papers? 14. I show them to him. 15. Do you
show your brothers that letter? 16. I show it to them. 17. Do
i« nei5 s 10 i» It* rrs isr
cM-ser, mon-trer, fol/e-men^ borgnd^ a*Tea-gI«, porte-fettIV«, Ul-tna^ mate^lM, II^t«v
erne, cult, enite.
THE THIRTY-SECOND LESSON. 129
yoa wish for some warm biscuit t 18. No, sir, I wish for some warm
meat and some cold bread.
19. Do you wish for some cool water ? 20. I wish for some
cool water and some good wine. 21. What has the countryman?
22. He has some fresh meat and some good apples. 23. What
have you in your portfolio ? 24. I have some letters and some
papers in my portfolio. 25. Has the shopkeeper some mattresses!
26. He has mattresses and beds {Uta). 27. What does the servant
buy? 28. He buys lettuce, beans, and potatoes. 29. Has the
gardener lettuce and beans ? SO. He has good lettuce, but he has
no beans ; he has fruit and beautiful flowers. 81. That man is
blind of one eye ; he is our neighbor. 82. Father, where is your
portfolio? 83. The gentleman has it. 84. What is on the floor?
35. It is some beautifal flowers.
OPnONAL EXERCISES.
1. Have you a garden? 2. I have a garden, but I have no
gardener. 8. What have you in your garden ? 4. I have violets
and jonquils in my garden, and some roses in my yard. 5. At my
house I have neither roses nor violets, but I have fruits. 6. What
fruits have you ? 7. I have apples and pears, and my uncle has
0ome superb peaches and some beautifal plums in his garden. 8.
Do you not like apples? 9. I like all fruits {les ^fruits), 10. A
fine peach is an excellent fruit. 11. Have you many apples at
your house ? 12. We have not many apples, but we have many
pears. 13. What horse do you wish to buy? 14. I wish to buy
the one which is in the stable. 15. What nuts do you pick up?
16. We pick up those which we find under the tree, and the chil-
dren pick up those which are on the floor.
32.— TRENTE-DEUXIfiME lECON.
THE THIRD CONJUGATION.
1. Terb« whoM InfinltlTe eods in OIR are of nn tbibd cowirOAnoir. They
form tlie past parttdpla bj adding U to tha stem ; as,
To RECEIVE, BECEITED. ReC-EVOIB, BE9-TT.
Betpalar Terba ofthia oonjugatlon * have tbe following termlnatloiia in tba Indleatlva
preaent : oxa, oia, orr, btokb, btzz, oxvsht.
• There are only aeren regnlar rerbs of thlsooi^agaUon: S^apsreevoir^ eonMooir,
JMesveir^ Devoir^ Pgrewoir, Reeeroir^ Btdevoir.
« 4 so 4 ai
re-oe«Tolr, ro'po.
130
THE THIRTY-SECOND LESSON.
I receive, thoa recelvest, be receiveat we receive, you receive, thej r«eelve.
Do you receive our notes ? Rccevez-vous nos billets ?
We receive them all. Nous les recerons tous.
I receive many letters. Je re^ois beaacoup de lettres.
Why, Because. Pourqtiai. Paree que.
Badly. Sad. Mai TrUie.
As a4)ectives ending In e are common gender, they will be placed hereafter In either
oolamn of genders, as may be convenient
A liltle. Very. Un pen. TVe*, forty bien.
2. 7W« is always Joined by a hjrphen to the following word. 2W« and Jbrt have aboat
the same force, bien is more used in exclamations.
Very bard. Trfes-dur, fort dur, bien dur.
8. As an exclamation. Hen denotes approbation ; eh lien Is merely introdactory to
something further to bo said.
How do yuu like this book?
Well ; it is a very good tpork.
This little boy does not study at all.
Well, I am going to speak to his
father.
Seme. Some difficulty.
A fewy tome. A few apples.
Comment trouvcz-vous ce livre?
Bien ; c^est un bon mivraye.
Cc petit gar^on n^^tudle pas du tout.
Eh bien, je vais parler & son pbre.
Qnelqtie. Quelque diffindtL
Quelquea. Quelques pommes.
MASCITLINS. FEMIXIXB.
The vinegar. A radish. Le vinaigre. Une rave.
Of vhich one. Vuqiiel. De laqueUe.
Of which ones. Deaqtteh. Dexquellea.
4. Objective pronouns with a preposition expressed, always follow the verb. Their
form, then, (as seen Lesson 16), is as follows:
Of me, to me, of us, to us.
Of thee, to thee, of you, to you.
Of him, to him, of them, to them.
Of her, to her, of them, to them.
Ofwhatf to what.
jVo oncy nobody.
Whom do you seek ? No one.
I seek nobody.
No one is looking for me.
Tofll with. To load with.
De moi, i^ nioi, de nous, h nous.
De toi, k toi, de vous, k vous.
De lui, & lui, d^eux, 4 eux.
D'ellc, h ellc, d'elles, k cllcs.
De ^uoi, k quoi.
/^ Without a verb, persoune; with a verb ot
S which it is the object, ne bfforo £he verb
i and pertonne after it ; with a verb of
' which It is the subjuct, p^rtionne ne.
Qui cherchez-vous ? Fersonne,
Je ne chcrche personne.
Fersonne ne me cherche.
Remplir de. Charger de.
6. Terbs which require with after them in English, require de in French.
He fills the cask with wine. II rcmplit le tonncau de vin.
49D49i>44St 44«4r> 19 V* 1 4 1" TM
re-coi«, re-coW, re-ce-von«, ro-cc-vo«, rc-coivan/, pour-qunl, parc«-ke, trlst^ trt**, fart^
IS » M I » 4 :S 13 8J « 14 7 1 X « 7ft 7 U S
oom-menf, ou-vrage, kel-ke, d^-fl-cul-to, vin*aigr«, rave, du-kel, dos-kels, per-soone, rem-
plir, char-ger.
THE THIRTT-SECOKD LESSOX. 131
I fill the chest with wood. Je remplis de bois * le coffre.
Thej load the ship with cotton. Us chargent le navire de coton.
1. Be^ois-tu les letties que je t'envoie t 2. Je les re^ois. 8.
Voire pere re^oit-il ce qae vous lui envoyezf 4. Hon pere le
reqoity mais mes fr^res ne regoivent pas ce qae je leur envoie. 5.
Ponrquoi I'homme riche est-il triste ? 6. II est triste parce qa*il
est malade. 7. Get homme parle-t-il bien frangais? 8. Nod,
monsieur, il le parle tr^-maL 9. Ce petit gar^on ^tudie on pen,
et son cousin 6tadie fort bien. 10. Comment troavez-yoos ce dis-
conrs? 11. Bien; il est excellent 12. Votre frdre n'etndie pas
du tout. 13. Eh bien ; je vais parler au maitre. 14. De quo!
remplissez-vous ce baril 1 15. Jeje^remplis de vinaigre. 16. Qu'a
le domestiquet 17. II a quelquo faitue et quelques raves. 18.
Qui cherchez-Tous f 19. Je ne cberche personne. 20. Qui est
dans cette chambre? 21. Personne. 22, Parlez-vous de moit
23. Nous parlous de vous. 24. Ces pay sans parlent-ils de toil
25. Us parlent de moi. 26. De quoi parlez-vous ? 27. Je parle
de mes lemons. 28. Desquelles parlez-vous ? 29. Je parle domes
lemons de fran^ais.
1. Do you speak of us ? 2. We do not speak of you. 3. Does
the little boy speak of the master ? 4. He speaks of him. 5.
Does he speak of the scholars ? 6. He speaks of them. 7. Do
you speak of those young girls 1 8. We speak of them. 9. Do
you speak of your sister ? 10. I do not speak of her. 11. No one
is coming here to-day. 12. With what do you load that boat?
13. I load it with butter and flour. 14. Does the cook wish for
the radishes ? 15. He wishes for the radishes and the vinegar.
16. Has he not some radishes T 17. He has a few radishes and a
little lettuce. 18. Does the Oerman speak English well? 19. He
speaks it badly. 20. Why are you afraid? 21. I am afraid
because I have no gun.
22. Do you receive the books which I send you? 23. I receive
thcra. 24. How do you like them ? 25. Well, they are excellent
works. 26. Why is the gardener sad? 27. He is sad because
he has no fruit 28. Why do you look for the captain? 29.
Because I desire to speak to him. 30. What notes dost thou re-
ceive? 81. I receive those which my friend sends me. 82. Does
* This eonstinctlon is lued to aroid ambigultj, m cojfire ds boia mwoB tlao eheti qf
132 THE THIRTY-THIRD LESSON.
the Frenchman speak English welll 83. No, sir, he speaks it
very badly. 34. What is in the stable ? 35. It is the horses of
my friend. 36. Of whom do you speak ? 37. I speak of the
mason. 38. Of which one do you speak ? 39. I speak of the old
mason. 40. Of what does the little girl speak? 41. She speaks
of her pen. 42. Of which one does she speak? 43. She speaks
of the gold pen. 44. The cook has no radishes. 45. Well, I am
going to bay some radishes and some lettuce. 46. With what do
you fill that bottle? 47. I fill it with wine. 48. This bottle is
full of vinegar.
OPTIONAL EXERCISES.
1. With what does the merchant fill his cask ? 2. He fills it
with vinegar. 8. Has that man many books? 4. He has few
books ; he has a few friends, and a little money. 5. What have you
good {de hon) ? 6. I have a little good wine. 7. Do you receive
the letters which we send you? 8. I receive them all. 9. Do
your brothers receive their letters? 10. They receive them. 11.
Of whom does the master speak ? 12. He speaks of thee and of
me. 13. Does he speak of the beautiful ladies ? 14. He speaks
of them. 15. Of which ones does he speak? 16. He speaks of
those who are going to church. 17. Do you speak of the same, or
of the others? 18. I speak of neither. 19. Is not that man one-
eyed (bargne) ? 20. No, madam, he is blind. 21. Have yon bank-
bills in your pocket-book? 22. No, sir. 23. Whom are you look-
ing for? 24. I am looking for no one.
33.— TRENTE-TROISIfiME LEgON.
THE PRONOUN Zy.
Todoubtf to doubt of. Douter, donter de.
To thanks to thank for, Remereier, rttnereier de.
To have need of^ to need, tp loant. Avoir beeoin de.
To know, knoicinff^ known. Savoir, eaehant, eu.
Je §ai8f iu taie, ilaait, ttoue Mvone^ wnte eaven^ iU aawni^
I know, thou knowest, he knows, we know, yoa know, they know.
MABCULnrs. moviNK.
Pleasedy eonienUd (with). Content (de). ContenU (do).
The /oo<. The hand. Le pied. La main.
A eerviee. The movth. Un seruice. La bouche.
A penknife. Clean. Un eanif. Propre.
It • 4 7 ia< 4 1814 19018 fCIU 181 £1
doa-tisr, re-mer-der, be-zoln^ ea-rolr, u-ebanl^ ni«^ aaAL n-voni; aa-rea, savMiiH con-
teni, oon-tenU, piecf, main, 8er-vle«, bonehtf, ca-oif; proprA
THE THIBTT-THIRD LESSON. 133
KiBorhtrcowraffe, Dirty, Bon courage. Sale,
The linen. The head. Le linge. La teU.
Ktw (newly miide, bought new). Keuf, Neuve,
Kewy novel (new in kind). N<mveau. Kouvelle.
I fill the chest with linen. Je remplis le coffre de lingo.
1. TaUt U Unen doth ; Unge is linen made into articles of nse.
& In speaking of the parts of the bodj, the articles /«» to, etc., are to be preforrod to
mktnL, torn, son., ete^ when the pom^isor is otherwise snffldentlj denoted. Observe also the
French nse of awir in phrases like the following. In snch phrases the a^jeetlTe always fol-
lows the noon.
That man's foot ts large. Cet homme a le pied grand.
HtM hand ts large also. TLala main grande aussi.
That lady's month is small Cette dame a la bouche petite.
Her head t« too large. EUe a la t^te trop grosse.
To take care (of), to have care (of). Avoir eoin (de).
He takes care of my garden. II a soin de mon jardin.
Of U, of thenk, from it, from them,) „ , . . , , ,,
o/L, ofiir, ^ejom there. \ ^^ <?"«*"» «'*'""* *« '«*)•
S. f n is a prononn, haring, as indicated by the abore definitions, the force of de with
Ivi, eUe^ eux, tUea, or eOa ; also often an adverb for id, or Id, As a pronoun. It nsaally
refexB to things or animals. When therefore a noan of the third person, and object of de is
replaced by a pronoan, that prononn is to be en^ VNuess pxbsoks au bxfsbxxd to.
Hare you need of our serrice ? Avez-Yous besoin de notre service f
I have need of it. J^en ai besoin.
Does the boy take care of the horses? Le gar^on a-t-il soin des chevauz ?
He takes care of thein. II en a soin.
My little dog is sick, and my sister has Mon petit chien est malade, et ma soeur
care of him. en a soin.
My little brother is sick, and my sister Mon petit frSre est malade, et ma sosur
has care of him. a soin de lui.
Do yon come from the brook? Yenez-vous da misseau ?
I come from there, JVn yiens.
Do yon fill the chests 'with linen ? Remplissez-voas les coiTres de linge ?
I fin them with it, Je les en remplls.
Does he thank you for your sendee ? Tons remercie-t-il de votre serrice ?
He thanks me far it. H mVn remercie.
Are yon pleased with your boy ? £tes-Tous content de votre garyon ?
I am pleased with him. J^en suis content.
Wo see in these sentences that en supplies the place of de and its object So partitive
Qonsa, being preceded by de, are replaced by sfK
Hare yon some linen? Avez-Tous da linge ?
I have tome, •Ten ai.
Has the Italian courage ? L'italien a-t-il du courage ?
He has none. II n^en a point
It 1 « '4 I f » « IT ?e » so •
coa-rag0, eals, linge, tAte, neuf, nenve^ nou-vean, nou-veiie, tons, en.
134 THE THIRTY-THIRD LESSON.
JB'fi is to be used in Frenoh when qfU or qfihsm may be andemtood In En^Uah.
I have wiue, have you some ? tPai du tId, en avez-vous ?
I have some good. S^en ai de bon.
Haye you butter ? I have. Avez-voua du beurre ? J'cn ai.
1. Doutez-vous de mon courage t 2. Je n'en doute pas. 3.
Doutez-vous du courage de ce soldatt 4. Nous en doutons. 5.
Remerciez-vous cet homme de son service ? 6. Je Ten remercie. 7.
Ayez-rous besoin de ces papiers f 8. J'en ai besoin. 9. Qui a
Boin de votre chambre? 10. Le domestique en a soin. 11. £tes-
vous contents de vos livres ? 12. Nous en sommes contents. 13.
Ce mouchoir neuf est-il sale? 14. Non, monsieur, il est tr^s-
propre. 15. Avez-vous de bons canifs ? 16. Je n'en ai pas. 17.
Cet enfant a-t-il peur des fusils? 18. II en a peur. 19. Parlez-
vous de ces billets de banquet 20. Nous en parlous. 21. Savez-
rous ou est votre fr^re ? 22. II est d la maison. 23. Savez-vous
la grammaire ? 24. Je la sais bien. 25. Cet ecolier sait-il bien la
grammaire ? 26. II sait bien la grammaire et I'histoire.
1. Has the gardener lettuce and beans? 2. He has some.
3. Do you receive some newspapers this morning ? 4. I receive
some. 5. Does not the Frenchman speak English badly? 6.
Yes, very badly. 7. Why is that boy sad? 8. He is sad be-
cause his father is sick. 9. I have a little wine ; do you wish for
some {en voulez-^ou8)1 10. No, thank you. 11. Do you thank
your friends for their service? 12. We thank them for it. 13.
Do they thank you for your flowers ? 14. They thank me for
them. 15. Are those ladies pleased with their flowers? 10. They
are pleased with them. 17. That servant's feet are large, and his
hands are large also. 18. Has the shopkeeper some good pen-
knives? 19. He has some {de) good. 20. What have you white?
21. I have some white paper. 22. Have you any thing black 1
23. I have nothing black.
1. Do those scholars know history well ? 2. They do not know
it well. 3. Dost thou know grammar? 4. I know it well. 5.
Are those new handkerchiefs clean or dirty ? 6. These handker-
chiefs are clean and those are dirty. 7. What have you new ? 8.
I have some new boots and some new shoes. 9. That lady's hand
is small and her foot is small also. 10. Her head is large and her
mouth is large also. 11. Has the shopkeeper penknives? 12. He
has some. 13. Do you fill the chest with linen ? 14. 1 fill it with
THE THIRTY-FOURTH LESSON. 135
it 15. Does the captain doubt of onr courage t 16. He does not
doubt of it 17. That man's head is small and his mouth large.
18. Have you need of money ? 19. I have need of some. 20. Is
that lady afraid of the dog? 21. She is afraid of him. 22. Do
you know your lessons well ? 23. We know them well.
OPnONAL EXERCISES.
1. What have you in these barrels ? 2. This one is a barrel of
wine, and that one is full of vinegar. 3. Is your vinegar good!
4. It is vinegar of white wine, and it is excellent ; will you taste it t
5. No, thank you {merci) ; I will buy a little. 6. How much do^
you wish 1 7. Not much ; have you some demijohns {dames-jeannesy
fern.) t 8. Tes, sir, I have some large and some small ones. 9.
Well, a large demijohn full is all that I wish.^ 10. I am going to
fin you one. 11. Do you not wish for a box Cune caisse) of red wine?
12. Have you some good? 13. Will you please taste of this? 14.
How do you like (irouvez) it ? 15. It is not bad ; how many boxes
of it have you ? 16. I have half a dozen {une demi-douzaine), 17.
Well, I wish for them all. 18. Do you not wish, also, for a few »
bottles of white wine! I have some very good. 19. Thank you, I
have some (du) white still in (d) the house. 20. If you wish, I am
going to send the wine and the vinegar to your house. 21. Tes,
sir, if you please.
34.— TRENTE-QUATRlfeME LECON.
JSar CONTINUED. FOUETH CONJUGATION.
jFIw, flfjjp, Seven, Eight. Cinq, Six, Sept, ffuit.
1. Eity though commooly iipoken of things or animals, when nsed in a partitive sense
maj refer to persons as well as things.
Hatc you brothers ? Avez-vous des frSres ?
I have some. tTen at
now many have you ? Combien en avez-vous ?
I have six ; my friend has seven. J^en ai six ; mon ami en a sept.
2. In other cases, though en may refer to persons, the objective prononn with de Is pre-
ferred.
My friend is sick, and I take care of Hon ami est malade, etfai soin de lui
him. (rather th&n fen ai 9oin).
Your horse is here, and the boy takes Yotre cheval est ici, et le gar9on en a
care of him. soin.
8. An a^ective belonging to a partitive noun undemtood, takes or omits the article the
same as if the noon were expressed.
14 14 13 IS « riM
cink, dn^t* sis, slasi,* sept, Auit,
t eoMommi of einqnA tir are net lonnded before a »2"°,^*??°i?5»T."Il*-f ?"!".ItS*«f 7nh4i^'
I
136
THE THIRTY-FOURTH LESSON.
Have joa ink f Arez-Tous dc Fencre ?
I have some good. I have some black. JTen ai de bonne. J'en tddela noire.*
4. £it used with any other objective proDonn most be placed after It
Some to me. Soma to lu.
Some to thee. Some to you,
Sotne to himy or Jier. Some to them.
You have fruit ; do you give me some ?
I give thee some. I ^ve them some.
I give him some. I give you some.
They give us some.
M'en, Nou9 en,
T^en, Vous en,
Lui en, Leur en.
y ous avez du fruit ; nCen donnez-TOUs f
Je fen donnc. Je leur en donne.
Jc lui en donnc. Jc vom en donne.
lis nouM en donnent.
FOUBTH CONJUGATION.
6. Verbs whose Inflnitire ends in HE are of the FOUBTH CONJUGATION. Those
which arc regular form the past participle by adding u to the steuL They have the termi-
nations of the indicative present as follows:
8, S, T, ONS, EZ, ENT.
To RETURN (give back), returning^ returned, Res-dre, ren-dant^ ren-du,
Je rends, turende, ilrend, nouerendoM, wma render, iUrendmU,
The proper termination of the third person singular is hero blended with d of the stem.
6u Tliose in UIRE form the past participle by adding t to the stem. In the indicative
present they take « after the stem before a vowel, and terminate thns :
To CONDUCT, conducting^ conducted Condui-re, condui-sani^ conduit
Je eonduUe^ tu conduit U oondui-t, nous eonduintone, voue eondui-wa^ He eondui^tent^
Icondnct, thoa oondnctest, he conducts, we conduct, you conduct, they conduct
The care. A case^ box.
The uritf spirit, mind A demijohn.
His or her judgment, A bridle.
The village. A saddle.
That workman. That working-woman,
Oreen.
The turf. The verdure.
Gray,
Not at all.
At the eame time.
Where dost thou conduct the blind
man?
I conduct him to the village.
What do you give back to the work-
man?
I give back to him his green cloth.
XAscxruinK.
Le soin.
Vesprit.
Bon jugement,
Le village.
Get ouvrier.
Vert.
Le gazon.
Gris.
Pa$ du tout
En mime temps, au mhns temps,
Od conduis-tu Tavcugle ?
Je le conduis au vilkige.
Que rendez-vous k Touvrier ?
Jc lui rends son drap vert
rSXXKIXB.
Une caisse.
Une dame-je^nne.
Une bride.
Une selle.
Cette ottvrierv.
Verte.
La verdure,
Grise,
* Bon comes before the noun and omits the article, n^r comes after the noun and takes
it With the noun expressed, it would be, Jai on bonne enore, J'ai db Venere noire.
S SS SISS S 821 S6S ?ir>S«l SSIS
rendr«, roA-danC, ren-du, rencfs, rentf, ron-dons, ren-des, rendenf, con-duir«, eon-dnl-
s SI tan SI ni9 « uia a kmh n aius st iin is « 7 s n
sanl^ oon-dnllt oon-dui«, con-dull con-dul-sons, cfm-dui-sesi con-dnisenf, soln, caise^, e»-pi14
1 1 SI s is IS I s M us r r i n r a is is
dame^jsanns, Jnge>men<, bridd, village, seU«, oa-Trier, verC, rerte, ga-zon, ▼er-dttre,grl<,gttt«>
THB THEBTT-FOUBTH LESSON. 187
1. Qne Yoos rend cet hommet 2. H me rend mon cani£ 3.
Ok les ouvriers condnisent-ils cet aveugle ? 4. Us le conduisent
chez loL 5. Qu*ont les onvri^res ? 6. Elles n'ont rien. 7. Sont-
elles chez elles aujoord'hoi t 8. Elles sent tonjonrs chez elles. 9.
Me donnes-tn des fleorsf 10. Je t'en donne. 11. En donnes-ta 4
roQTriert 12. Je lai en donne. 13. Nous en donne-t-il? 14. II
Tons en donne. 15. Donnez-yous des billets de banque k ces hommest
16. Nous lear en donnons. 17. J'ai cinq pommes ; combien en
avez-vons? 18. J'en ai halt. 19. Boutez-voos de mon jogementt
20. Je n'en donte pas. 21. De qnoi doatez-vons ? 22. Je doute da
jngement et de Tesprit de cet onvrier. 23. Qu'a le marchand ? 24.
n a da diap vert et da gris. 25. 0 a conduisez-vous I'etrangerf
26. Noas le condaisons an village. 27. Noos rendons la caisse et
la dame-jeanne de vin aa marchand. 28. J'ai une selle et une
bride, mais je n*ai pas de foaet 29. Votre fougt est sar le gazon
dans le jardin. 30. Ce petit gar^on n'etadie pas da toot.
1. Do yoa give back to the neighbor his saddle and bridle ? 2.
I give them back to him. 3. Does the blind man give back to yoa
voor money ? 4. He gives it back to me. 5. Do the scholars give
back to as oar books ? 6. They give them back to as. 7. Does
the workman conduct the blind man to the store t 8. No, sir, he
conducts him to the village. 9. Do you conduct the stranger to
the village t 10. No, sir, we conduct him to the river. 11. Who
is at your house ? 12. It is a friend of my father. 13. Who is in
that room ? 14. No one. 15. To whom do you give that box of
vine ! 16. I give it to no one. 17. What dost thou give back to
the merchant? 18. I give back to him the green ribbons and the
gray cloth. 19. What do you give to that blind man? 20. I give
him a demijohn of wine.
21. Are you going to the village to-day? 22. No, sir, I am
going to the country to-day. 23. Do you doubt of the stranger's wit?
24. I doubt of it. 25. Do you doubt of his judgment? 26. I do
not doubt of it. 27. Does your uncle doubt of his wit or of his
judgment ? 28. He doubts of both. 29. Do you give back to the
merchant the green cloth or the gray ? 30. We give back to him
neither. 31. How many pears have you? 32. I have eight; I
have also six peaches and seven apples. 33. How many sisters
have you? 34. I have five. 85. Do yoa give my brother some
138 THE THIRTY-FIFTH LESSON.
fruit f 86. 1 give him some, and I give thee some also. 87. Where
are your flowers t 38. They are on the turf in the garden. 39. Do
yon give some to my brothers ? 40. I give some to them, at the
same time that (que) I give some to you.
OPTIONAL EXERCISES.
1. Do you sometimes receive letters from your friend Peter? 2.
I receive some often ; if you wish I am going to show you his last.
3. You are very good ; I never receive letters from him (de ses let-
tres), 4. He speaks to me of you in all those which I receive from
him. 5. Does he like the climate of the country where he is t 6.
He does not like it much. 7. I wish to go to Mr. A.'s, and I want
your horse this morning. 8. Well, if you come to my house, I will
let you have him (je vais vous le donner). 9. I thank you much.
10. Do you wish for the saddle and bridle? 11. If you please ; I
have a saddle which is not very good, but I have no bridle. 12.
Well, I am going to lend you mine, if you come to my house. 13,
Thank you, lam going for them (je vais les chercher) ; you are very
good. 14. That {cela) is a very little thing (bien peu de chose),
15. Which horse do you wish for? 16. Either; are you pleased
with your big horse ? 17. Yes, I am well pleased with him ; but
the little one is not bad. 18. Have you need of two horses ? 19.
Sometimes.
35.— TRENTE-CINQUlfiME LEgON.
FOUETH CONJUGATION CONTINUED.
1. Verbs In Ann>SB« szndbs, and onmss, form the past pnrticlple by adding t to thestem
and dropping; the preceding <2. They drop the d generally before a silent consonant, and
change nd into ffn before a TOweL
To PITT, pitying^ pitied, Plaikdre, plaignant^ plaini,
Je plains^ tu plains, ilplaint^ now plaiaixons, wmsplaiaveu. Us plaiaventy
1 pity, thou pitleet, he piiles, we pity, yon pity, they pity.
8. Those in aItbe and ofTBS have a t after the stem only before r. They take ss before
a vowel, and form the past participle by adding u to the stem, and dropping the preceding
diphthong.
To BE ACQUAINTED WITH, TO KNOW. CoNNAItRK.
Knowing^ known. Connai-ssant, conn-u,
Js wnnais^ tu connai*^ U eonnaUt ^mus wnnait^ona^ votts eonnatsaea^ Us eonnaisaaU,
I know, thonknowest, he knows, we know, yon know, they know.
& Connaiirs is to know objects of the senses; sovoir, to know what is learned and ns
membered.
I know him, and I know where he lires. Je le eonfiaiSf et jc sais oii il demenre.
U T a 14 14 U 7 SI 7 « 7 IS 8
plalndrs, plai-gnan^ plaint, plains, plaint, phd-Rnon'^ p1a(-gne^ plaigneni, con^naitre^
con-nals-sant, con-nu, con-nai<, con-nalt, con-naI«'Son«, co»-nni«-s('S, con-nais«<>n^
THE THIBTY-FIPTH LESSON. I39
MAsciTLara. nicnnin.
PUaaure, k fountain, Le plaisir, Vne fontaine.
The name. A pitcher, jug. Le rwtju Unc crueJu.
The lily. The pansy. Le lis. La peruke.
To dwell, to live, to remain. To forget, Ikmturer, rester. Oublier.
Nine, Ten, Eleven, Twelve, Neuf Dix,* Onu, Dome.
Am far as, to. With pleasure. Jttsqu^d. Avee plaisir.
Some one, somebody, any one. Quelgu^un. Quelqu'une.
Some ones, some, a few. Quelques-Mns. Quelgtiea-unes. ■
Hu any one mj bine cap? Qnelqu^un a-t-il mon bonnet bleu ?
No one has it. Personne ue Ta.
8. Quelqve is an aiQectlTe, and belongB to a noon ; ^[uet^*un ia a pronoun, and lued
without a noon.
Hare joa not some pain ? N^ayez-vous paa quclque peine f
I hare a few friends. J^ai quelques amis.
I hare a few. tPen ai quelques-uns.
4. <i%eiqu*tiin, in a general aenae, is alwaya maacaline aingnlar.
Do 70a know any one here ? Connaissez-vous qiielqu*an ici ?
I know some of these hidies. Je connais quelques-unes de ces dames.
Some of those flowers are very beau- Quelques-unes de ces fleurs sont tr^s-
tifu). belles.
We live in Boston. Nous demeurons k Boston.
I sometimes forget your name. JPoublie quelquefois votre nom.
I go as far as the fountain. Je vais jusqu^d hi fontaine.
Do yon not pity those poor people f Ke plaignez-vous pas ces pauvres gens?
We pity them. Nous les plaignons.
We know that man, and we know from Nous connaissons cet hommc, et nous
whence he comes. savons d*oii il vlent.
6. Partitlre nonna, with ni,,ni, take neither de nor the article.
I hare neither bread nor wine. Je n*ai fit pain ni Tin.
He buys neither sugar nor tea. II n^achdte ni sucre ni th^.
6. Ife before the yerb and q^e atUr it mean but or only.
Hare you only twelve apples ? N^avez-yous que douze pommes ?
I have only nine or ten. Je n*en ai que neuf ou dix.
Yoa haye but eleven. Yous n^en avez que onze.f
1. Cet bomme connait-il quelqu'un ici 1 2. II ne connait per-
sonne. 3. Connais-ta quelqa'an de'mes parents t 4. J'en connais
• Sept, kuU, neuf, dim, hare the ilnal eonaonant soonded at the end of a phrase, or
before a vowel, bat not before a consoDant
t ^ia never elided before onse and otvtiime.
r 11 « 7 ti n 19 t « 4 • • 0 a la t?A • n
plaiozir, fon-tsUntf, nozn, cruchtf, Ha, pen-a^a, de-meu-rer, res-tor, ou-bller, neuf,* dlz,*
n '^ IS 11 1 < » M • W 5 4 )I4 « 4 w
oox«, donzc, jusk\ a-vec, kel-k'un, kel-k'nntf, liel-kez-una, kel-kez-nnea:
• Befotv • iMOB becfoniBR witti a Towel, tbe flMl letter of mu/ls proneanoed liVe «, before one hefrlnning
t it k kllent ; oiberwlw it ia Muoded m/. Before % vowel, the flnel coDtonRot of rfj* i* pro-
« • eooaonaat It U Rlleiit, at the end of a cUuae And in dur-M|><, dtr-AiHi, dU-muf, it 1im tlie
140 THE THIRTY-FIFTH LESSON.
qnelqnes-nns. 5. Ces etrangers connaissent-Os qnelqu'an dans ce
village? 6. lis connaissent qaelques-uns de nos amis. 7. Con-
naissez-Yons qnelqu'une de ces dames? 8. Noas en connaissons
quelques-ones. 9. Qui est-ce qne voos plaignez? 10. Je plains cet
aveugle. 11. Connaissez-voas le bon Jean ? 12. Je le connais et
je sals ou il demeure. 13. Pourquoi plaignez-voas ce monsieur?
14. Je le plains parce qu'il n'a pas d*amis. 15. L*allemand plaint-
il sou cheval ? 16. II ne le plaint pas. 17. Les enfants plaignent-
ils ce pauvre animal ? 18. lis le plaignent. 19. Plaignez-vous ces
pauvres animaux? 20. Je les plains. 21. Qu'a votre garden ? 22.
H a une cruche pleine d'eau. 23. Voulez-vous bien me donner des
lis et des pansees? 24. Avec plaisir. 25. Avez-vous beaucoup
d*aTgent ? 26. Je n*ai que dix dollars.
1. Have you some fresh water ? 2. Yes, sir, I have a pitcher
full. 3. What flowers has the gardener ? 4. He has lilies and
pansies. 5. Where does your friend dwell ? 6. He dwells in (d)
New York. 7. Do you dwell in this village ? 8. No, sir, I dwell
in Boston. 9. Do you sometimes forget the merchant's name ? 10.
We forget it often. 11, Does he ever forget your name ? 12. He
never forgets it 13. How many oxen has the countryman ? 14.
He has ten oxen, nine cows, and eleven sheep. 15. Has the fish-
erman many fish ? 16. He has only twelve. 17. Have you some
of my books ? 18. 1 have a few. 19. Do you know any one of those
gentlemen ? 20. I know some of them. 21. Are you going as far
as the fountain ? 22. I am going as far as the village.
23. Is that pitcher empty ? 24. No, sir, it is full of water. 25.
Have you much water ? 26. No, sir, I have only that pitcher fuU.
27. Do you know where the servant is going? 28. He is going as
far as the fountain. 29. What does the gardener give you? 30.
He gives me flowers. 31. Docs he give you lilies or pansies? 32.
He gives me neither lilies nor pansies. 33. Why do you pity that
child? 34. I pity him because he has neither bread nor meat.
35. What has the countrywoman ? 36. She has some apples, some
peaches, and a few flowers. 37. Do you know any of those ladies ?
38. I know some of them. 39. I have need of your dictionary ;
have you it here? 40. Yes; which do you wish for? 41. I wish
for that one. 42. Does the countryman give you some fruit ? 43.
He gives me some. 44. Does he give us some ? 45. He gives you
TH£ THIRTY-SIXTH LESSON. 141
some. 46. Does he carry some to the sick mant 47. He carries
some to him.
OPTIONAL EXERCISES.
1. George, are jon coming with me ? 2. Where are jou going?
3. I am going as far as the fountain. 4. Why are yoa going to the
fountain t 5.1 am going for (ckercher) a pitcher of fresh water for
{pour) my aunt. 6. Where is Charles f 7. He is studying his les-
son mider the large tree in the garden. 8. Have you many How-
er8 in your garden ? 9. Not many {pa8 beaucoup\ we have some
roses, some lilies, and some beautiful tulips. 10. At our house, we
have no lilies, but we have many violets and pansies. 11. I like
pansies very much, but I like violets still better {mieux). 12. I am
going to give you a few violets to (pour) carry to your aunt {ma'
dame voire tante) ; she likes them much.
36.— TRENTE-SIXifiME LEgON.
THE PAST-mDEFINITE TENSE.
J9adL Eu (past part, of avoir).
Been. Eli (past part, of iire),
1. Tub PA8T-nn>sninTs Txm la fonned by Joining the past participle to the present
tenae of the aozillary Terb avoir. Thus :
P<ui'indefinit€ of avoir, to have,
J^ai €», iuateu, ila «v, nous atons eu^ vou§ avf9 eu^ U* ont eu,
I bare haid, thou hast had, he has had, we have had, jon have had, they have had.
Pcui'ifidefiniie of Eras, to he,
J*aiHl, tuaeHi, ilaiU, noue avona Hi, wue ave» M^ lUontiU,
I bare been, thoa hast, etc, he has, etc., we have, eta, yoa have, etc., they have, etc.
Past-indejinite of fabler, to speak (Ist Conj.).
J'ai parU, iu ae parli, U a parte, nous avons parli, vous at» parli, its ont parU^
I have sp<^^en, tboa hast, etc., ho has, etc, we have, etc, yoa have, etc, they have, eta
Past-indefinite of finir, to finish (2d Conj.).
fPaiJtnl, tu asjtni, U ajtni, nous avons Jlni, vous avesjtni. Us ontjlni,
I have finished, thoa hast, eta, he haa, ota, we have, eta, yon have, eta, they have, ota
Past-indefinite of recetoir, to receive (3d Conj.).
J*ai recu, tu as recu, il a recu, nous avons recu, vous aves recu, its ont re^u*
I bare reeeived, thoa hast, eta, he has, ota, we have, eta, yoa have, eta, tlicy have, eta
Past-indefinite ofRESiDVLEy to give hack (4th Conj.).
J'ai rtmdm, tu qm rtndu, it a rtndu, nout amtiu rtndu, mm* avtx rtndu, IU ent rendu,
I kftire glwD l»ek, Uieo but, ate, lie haa, cto., we bare, etc., joa bave, etc., tbcj have, etc
1 This tense is caileA past-indfjlnite because it is used in speaking of indefinite pMt
nine, as, I have tpoten to your brother, J^ai parti A voire frire (time not defined). It is
S C It JS
«.t6, fl-nL
142 THE thikTY-BULTU LESSON.
used also of definite peat ttme, wbleh Inelades the pveeent day, aa, / 9pdk^ to jf<mr hrttfktr
thit morning, thU tnonthy etc, J^ai parli d vctrtfr^re es maUn, cs mot«, etoi
8. The nogativee and pronoans which axe placed before the verb In the simple teaaeaare
placed before the aoziliarj in the compound tenses, and the last negatire wotd ia plaeed
between the aozillary and the past participle.
Have you DOt had my book ? ITaTez-TOus pas eu mon Uyre ?
I have not had it Je ne Pai pas eu.
To believe^ believing^ believed, Croire^ croyant^ cru (fern, cnu),
JecroUf tuerois, UcroU^ nottt eroyonB, vouteroffta, 4lteroUnt^
IbelieTC, thou belieyest, he believes, webeliere, yon believe, theybeliereu
Tou believe that he is rich. Yons croyez qu^l est riche.
I believe that he is not rich. Je crois qu^il n*c8t pas riche.
MABOITLXm.
Mj grandfather. VLy ffrandmotker. Idon grand-pere. M& grand*mere.
Bib grandson. "Ela granddaughter. Son petit-JiU. Ba petite-JUie,
A father-in-law. A mother-in-lauf. ) -- , , ^ . „ ,
Xaep-fathtr. A step-mother. ^ ^n 6eau-;)er«. Vne b^^er*.
i Your daughter-in- j
Your itep-8on. < law, or step- I Votrc beau-fU, Votre beUe-fiUe.
( daughter. )
Youp tonAn-law. Votre gendre^ or votre beau-Jih,
Did you give the fruit to your grand- Avez-vous donn^ le fniit k votre
father ? grand-p^re ?
I did not give it to him. Je ne le lui ai pas donn6.
Hast thou not found thy pencil ? K'as-tu pas trouv6 ton crayon ?
I have not found it. Je ne Pai pas trouv6.
Somebody' 9^ that of wmebody (sing.). Celuidegiielgu^un^ celle de quelgu\n,
Somebody^s, those of somebody Ceuxdcquclqu^un, cellcsdequelqu^im.
(plur.).
Nobody^'e^ that of nobody (sing.). Celui de personne^ celle de pertonne,
Nobody^s, those of nobody (plur.). Ceux de personne, cellcs do personne.
1. Avez-vous ea mon livre t 2. Nous ne Tavons pas eu. 3.
Voire grand'm^re a-t-elle ^te chez vous ? 4. Non, monsieur, die
a ^te k Tdglise. 5. As-tu trouv^ ton canif ? G. Je Tai tronv^.
7. Ces ouvriers ont-ils fini leur ouvrage (work) ? 8. Rs I'ont fini.
9. Votre beau-pdre a-t-il re^n le billet de son petit-fils? 10. II ne
Ta pas re^u. 11. La petite-fiUe de votre voisin vous a-t-elle renda
votre livre? 12. EUe me I'a rendu. 13. Ces Pollers croient que
vous avez eu leurs plumes. 14. Avez-vous 6t6 au march6 1 15.
Non, madame, nous avons et6 cbez votre belle-m^re. 16. N*avez-
vous pas eule cheval de votre beau-frere? 17. Nous ne Tavons
pas eu. 18. Ou ces petites fiUes ont-elles ^tet 19. Elles ont 6te
so vtm ro » »iit ie>is€ » %
croir«, cro-yanf, crois, croW, cro-yon«, cro-yea, cnXent^ g(>ndr«.
THE THIRTT-SIXTH LESSON. 143
chez votre belle-soeur. 20. Notre voisin a-t-il tronv^ son gendret
21. n Ta trouv6. 22. Avez-vous trouv6 le moachoirde quelqu'im?
23. (Pai tronv6 celui de quelqu'un. 24. Avez-vous ea les plumes
de quelqu'un f 25. Nous n'avons eu celles de personne. 26.
Avez-YOUB les livres de quelqu'un t 27. Non, mademoiselle, je
n'ai ceux de personne. 28. Nous croyons que votre pere est riche;
noire voisin croit qu'il est pauvre.
1. Has the neighbor's grandson your horse t 2. He has him
not. 3. Has he not somebody's ? 4. He has nobody's. 5. Has
yonr grandfather your gold pen ? 6. He has it not. 7. Has he
not somebody's'? 8. He has nobody's. 9. Where has your grand-
mother been? 10. She has been to her son-in-law's. 11. Has
your brother-in-law had the money of your sister-in-law t 12. He
has not had it. . 13. Has your father had the letters of his grand-
daughter ? 14. No, sir, he has had her copy-book, but not her
letters. 15. Has he not had somebody's? 16. No, sir, he has
bad nobody's. 17. Whose horse have you bought ? 18. I have
bought nobody's. 19. Has your father-in-law bought somebody's ?
20. He has bought nobody's. 21. Have you finished your exercise ?
22. I have not finished it.
23. Where has your mother-in-law been? 24. She has been
to her grand-daughter's. 25. Are you the general's step-son?
26. No, sir, I am his brother-in-law. 27. Have you not found the
general's grandson ? 28. We have not found him. 29. Did not
the gardeners give the fruit to your mother-in-law ? 30. No, miss,
they gave it to my sister-in-law. 31. Did you not give the copy-
book to the master ? 32. I did not give it to him. 33. Has the
workman finished his work ? 34. Yes, sir, he finished it this morn-
ing. 35. Have you my pen ? 36. I have it not 37. Have you
had somebody's ? 38. I have had nobody's. 39. Where has the
neighbor's grandson been ? 40. He has been to my grandfather's.
41. Are you acquainted with the general's grand-daughter? 42. I
am acquainted with her, and I know where she lives. 43. I be-
lieve that she lives in this village. 44. You believe that she is
rich ; we believe that she is poor. 45. The scholars believe that it
will rain.
OPTIONAL EXEBCISES.
1. How many brothers have you ? 2. I have three, but I have
144 THB THIRTT-SEVENTH LESSON.
only one sister. 8. Tonr fatber has five children ? 4. Yes, and
my uncle has nine. 5. I know a gentleman who has thirteen
(treize), 6. He has many indeed (vraimeni). 7. Yes, it is a large
family (famille), 8. Who is that little child that yoor sister is
conducting to school ? 9. He is one of our neighbor's children.
10. Is he going to the school of Mr. B. f 11. Yes, sir. 12. He
is very young. 13. Who is that workman ? do you know him ?
14. I know him, and I know that he is a good workman ; he comes
often to our house. 15. Is he not blind of one eye ? 16. No, but
he has a brother who is blind. 17. I pity him ; who takes care of
him ? 18. His brother takes care of him, and his nephews conduct
him when {quan<l) he goes out. 19. Does any one give him money ?
20. No, no one gives him any. 21. Is he not very young ? 22.
No, he is not a child, he is a man. 23. I know a young man who
is blind, and you know him also; it is Peter B. 24. I know him
very well
37.— TRENTE-SEPTIfiME LEgON.
AOBEEMENT OF PAST PABTICIPLEB.
1. The past partletple forming part of an aetiTO verb agrees with the direct ol^eet of
that Terb when the object precedes it, bat when the object follows it remains unchanged.
Past participles, as we have seen (Lesson 26), form the feminine and plnral as a4JecttveiL
Have you found your pen? Atcz-tous trouvS votre plume ?
I have found it. Je Tai trouvee.
In the former of these phrases, trou9i does not agree, beeanse its ol^eet, piume^ com^s
after it ; in the latter it agrees, becaose its object, to, precedes it So in the following.
Didst thou buy the horses? As-tu ae/ute Ics chevaux? (object fol-
lows).
I bought them. Je les ai acheth (object precedes).
Have you had my pens? Avez-vous eu mes plumes? (object
follows).
I have not had them. Je nc /e< ai pas eue« (obj. precedes).
Did your brother receive your letter ? Votre fr^re a-t-il repw votre lottre ?
(object follows).
He received it. II Ta refue (object precedes).
To finish^ finuhing^ finUhed, Finir^ finivtant^ fini^ e (fem. ).
Have they finished their exercises ? Ont-ils ^ni Icurs themes? (object fol-
lows).
They have finished them. lis les oni Jinis (object precedes).
Have you returned our letters? Avez-vous rendu nos lettres? (object
follows).
We have returned them. Nous let avons rmdues * (object pre-
cedes).
^ From the above examples it may be seen that the past participle coming after Its ob-
ject has more the nature of an a4)ective than when it precedes the object When I say.
It 19 U II s
fl-nir, fl-ai-Bsanl
THE THIRTY-SEVENTH LESSON. I45
KASOxrum. rBmrars.
kjowmty* The newt. Un voyage. La nouvelle (euig.).
That work. The n^ios. Cet outrage. Les nouvelles (plur.).
The ^e. Wite, cUsereet. Le /oc. y^a^e.
2. Sage, applied to ehlldrcn, means good.
An M man. AequaitUanee. Un vieiUard. Connaittanee.
Proud. JFier. Fiht.
The Jlnger. Which toay. Le doigt. Par ou.
Thitway. That way. Par id. Par Id.
Which way are joa goiog ? Par oii allcz-Yotis ?
He comes this way. He goes that II vient par ici. H ya par Ik
way.
B. Cbangea In eondition and feeling expreaeed by make in English, are expivssed by
r»u2r» la French.
This bad weather makes me sad. Ce maavaia temps me rend triste.
Misfortune makes ns wise. Le malhear nous rend sages.
To follow, /oUotpingy followed, Suivre, suivant, suivi, e (fem.).
Jetitis, tuauis, ileuit, nous suivotis, voussuiven, UasuiverU,
I follow, thou followcst, be follows, we follow, yoa follow, tbej follow.
To livCy living, lived. Vivre, vivant, vecu^ e (fem.).
Je vis, tu vis, il vii, nous vivons, vous vivem. Us vivent,
I live, thou liTest, he lives, we lire, you live, they live.
To live on. Wlieretoilh to live. Vtvre de. De qttoi vivre.
He lires on dry bread. II vit de pain sec.
They hare lired on bread and water. Ilsont T6ca de pain et d'eau.
Do yoa foUow me ? He suirez-TOus ?
I follow yon. Je vous suis.
Have you followed your brothers f Avez-Tous suivi tos frdrcs ?
We hare followed them. Nous Ics arons suiris.
4 Dsmter, as a numeral, precedes its noun ; when not a numeral, it follows It
I haye the first, he has the last volume. J^ai le premier, il a le dernier volume.
I spoke to him last week. Je lui ai parl6 la semaine demiere.
1. Ou allez-YonsI 2. Je vais au marcli6. 3. Ces messieurs
viennent par ici, nous allons par lA. 4. Votre beau-p^re a-t-il cher-
cli6 ses petits-fils? 5. II les a cherches. 6. A-t-il trouv6 ses
petites-filles ? 7. II les a trouvees. 8. Avez-vous re9u la nourelle t
9. Je I'ai re^ue ce matin. 10. Mon frere a fini son long voyage.
11. Avez-vous fini votre ouvrage? 12. Je I'ai fini. 13. Ces pom-
J^aiJM mss fhimes, I havejtnishsd my eaoerdses^ have tokdjtnished are taken toftether aa
In Endisb, and express the idea of an action merely. But when I say, Je U» aijlnis, I
hate fhemjtniakea, it is evident that Jlnishsd has more the nature of an adjective. Hence
In the latter case it agrees like an adjective.
Will IS • 18 I 1 1 nr 13 7 ^ 1) 13 a c ti n v»
To-ya£«, noa-vel/e, on-vrage, lac, sage, fier, fl-^re, ^oxgt, vl-vre, vi-vani, v^-co, vie, vi«,
n n li < n ut 1 \i 7 a
vi'Von«, vi-res, vlvenl, vioiZ-lard, oon-naie-sance.
i
X46 THE THIETY-SEVENTH LESSON.
xnes aigres m'ont rendu malade« 14. Ge vieillard est sage et son
gendre est fier. 15. Avez-vous 6t6 sur le lac t 16. Non, mon-
sieur, j'ai 6t6 sur la riviere, mais non pas sur le lac. 17. Qui est ce
Tieillardf 18. C*est mon grand-p^re, il a beaucoup de connaissanc^s
dans cette ville. 19. Ce forgeron a le bras {arm) etles doigts gros.
20. Votre beau-p6re a^t-il re^u les nouvelles ? 21. H les a revues.
22. Ce vieillard n'a pas de quoi vivre. 23. Me suivez-vous ? 24.
Je ne vous suis pas. 25. Cet homme vous suit-il ! 26. II me suit.
27. Ces oiseaux vivent longtemps (long). 28. Avez-vous suivi ces
hommes 1 29. Nous les avons suivis.
1. Did you lend your money to that old mani 2. I lent it to
him. 3. Did the scholars give you their pens? 4. They gave
them to me. 5. Have you received the letters of your brother? 6.
I have received them. 7. Has the old man lent you his books t
8. He has lent them to me. 9. Did the children have my slate ?
10. No, sir, your mother-in-law had it. 11. Has your grandfather
received the news? 12. He has received it. 13. Has that work-
man finished his work t 14. He has finished it. 15. Has your
brother finished his journey? 16. He has not finished it. 17.
Have you been on the lake? 18. No, sir, I have been on the
river. 19. Are the neighbor's children good? 20. They are very
good. 21. Have you many acquaintances here ? 22. No, sir, I
know no one in this village. 23. Is not that lady proud ? 24. She
is very proud.
25. That lady's hands are white and her fingers small. 26.
The servant's fingers are big. 27. On what does that poor man
live ? 28. He lives on bread and cheese. 29. On what does the
mason live ? 30. He lives on bread and meat 31. Do those men
live on dry bread ? 32. They live on bread and butter. 33. This
water is bad ; it makes me sick. 34. Have you had the last vol-
ume of this work ? 35. I have had it ; and I returned it to your
father this morning. 36. Father, am I going to the store to-day ?
37. No, son, you are going to school. 38. Will you please to give
me these apples ? 39. With pleasure ; do you not wish for some
pears also? 40. Thank you; you are very good. 41. Does your
brother know any one here? 42. Yes, sir, he has many acquaint-
ances in this city. 43. He believes that they are all very good.
44. You believe that that man is rich ; I believe that he is poor.
THE THIRTT-EI6HTH LESSOX.
147
OPnOKAL EXERCISES.
1. Has not the grocer wine and beer ? 2. He has neither wine
nor beer. 3. Have you bought coffee or tea ? 4. I have bought
neither coffee nor tea. 5. I have a few acquaintances in this vil-
lage. 6. Where did jou conduct (conduit) the stranger last even-
ing (hier au soir) 1 7. I conducted him to the theatre. 8. Where
did you conduct your little sister this morning ? 9.1 conducted
her to the school of madam B. 10. Have you some ink I 11. I
have some black ink and some red. 12. How many uncles have
yon ? 13. I have only two ; my friend has five. 14. What has the
gardener t 15. He has much fruit. 16. Does he give you some?
17. He gives us some. 18. Does he give me some ? 19. He gives
thee some. 20. Has he given some to the neighbors^ 21. He
has given them some. 22. Has that proud man much wit ? 23.
He has neither courage nor wit. 24. With what do you fill that
cask ? 25. I fill it with water. 26. Does that scholar study much ?
27. No, sir, he desires to learn, but he will not study. 28. How
many chickens has the countryman ? 29. He has twelve.
38.— TRENTE-nUITIfiME LEgON.
NUMEEAL ADJECTIVES.
To nake, making^ made,
JefiiU, tu/bU, il/aii,
I make, thoa xnakest, he makes,
To wash^ wxahinff, washed.
Less. Once, Twice,
Ukree times. Four tUneSj etc.
Faire^ faiearUj fait, e (fcm.).
noue/aieons, wnu faiUe^ iUJbWt^
we make, you make, they make.
Laver, lavant, lave, e (fem.).
Moins. Uhe/ois, Deuxfois.
Trois fois. Quatre fois.
CASDnfAL
vovBsn
OBDDTAL
KOMBSSS
CASDIXAirX.
inrMBBBS.
OBDINAUX.
1,
Un^une^
Ifit.
Premier (m ), PremUre (t).
9,
Deux,
2d,
Second {m.\ Heoonde (t).
8,
TnAH,
8d,
t
^'^
4tb,
6th;
6th,
Quatrieme,
ttnguUme,
SixUme,
7.
st
7th,
SepUime,
8,
8th,
nuitiime.
»,
jir«uf
9th.
Keuvieme,
10,
JHx,
10th,
Dixiime,
11,
(Mas,
11th,
OnaietM,
12.
Dome,
12th,
Douzi^me,
!«,
Treize,
18th,
TreUUme,
Ik
la.
gr
14th,
15th,
16th,
QuaiorzUme^
QuinaUme,
Seisieme,
IT,
Diao-ttept^
17th,
Dur-eeptUtM,
18.
Dix^haii
18th;
Dix-huitUme,
7 T
t T 7 T
21 T 71 1 6 1
S 16 11 1 ti
taite, tai-tant, &«, fUa, fal-«on«, fait4^ tout, la-ver, la-vanf, la-v^, lav«, lav*'^, la-von«.
I • I UJ4 so n
la-vM. lurenl, moint, foU, nom-
•brM, cir-dl-naiWB, ir-dUniiua!, trcUe. ka-torz^ klnio, seli^
db-sept, diVhall
148
THE THIRTY-EIGHTH LESSON.
OAKDIKAX. K0MBB1EB OVOZXAL KOXVSBS
ICnilBSBS. OABOXNAUZ. KUMBKBS. OBDINAUX.
19, I>{x^MuK 19tb, IHxrneufiUme^
20, VinQt, 20th, VinQtUmt,
21, Vinfftetun^ 2lBt, Vingt et unUtne,
22, Vingt-deux^ 22<1, Vin^Udleuaelime^
28, F«n^'<roi«, 28d, VingUroUUiM^
80, 7V>en^ 80th, 7>«n/i^i»«,
81, 7>efU« «f tf !», 81st, TVen^ e< «fti^^,
82, TVMt^-cfaiMB^ 82d, 7>efU0-4i«tM^me,
40, QuararUe^ 40th, Quarantiim^
60, ^A^wanfa, 50th, < Vn^tMinlj^fiM^
60, SoiaanU^ 60th, SoixantUme^
70, Soixant&^ia, 70th, SoixanU^istUmt,
71, iS[>i(Banto ^ ofica, 71st, SoiasanU-wuieme^
80, ^ua^re-c<n^te, 80th, Quatre-vlngtUme.
Rl, dua/r«-r<n^-«», 81 st, &tMZ<r«-Wn^-«RifffM',
90^ Quatre-ffinifl'dir^ 90th, Ouatrt-^ingt-diaeiime,
91, Ottatre-vingt-cnBe, 9l8t, Qttaire-vinQUonaUme^
100, CVfiA 100th, CeiUUnu^
101, ^(T^ivn, 101st, CentunUmey
200, DeuxcenU^ 200th, i)«tMB e«nfi^i«,
210, DewB cent dim. 210th, J>fuao cent diarieme,
1.000, JA2^ 1,000th, MUlUme,
1.001, MilUun, 1,001st, MHUuni^mc,
2,500^ Deux miiU einq eenU, 2,500th, Deux milU cinq etiUUms,
1,000,000, UnmiUion, 1,000,000th, MiUionieme.
1. In rtn{7<, < is sounded before a Towel, and rarely at the end of a phrase ; It must be dis-
tinctly heard in 9in^< e< «»> vfn^<-<f«tiav etc,; bnt in quatrt^infft'un, quairt-Hngt-dswxit
etc, the < is never sonjidcd.
2. F^n^ and cent take • vhen mnltiplied by another number, as cinq eeaU^ except
when followed by a number, as quatre-vinfft-einq^ iroie cent dix ; and whcif used aa ordl-
sal numbera, as, Page quatre ceiUs ^an mil eept cent quaire-^ingt.
8. MiUe becomes mil only in the computation of years of the Christian era ; L^an mil
huit cent eaixante, The year one thousand eight hundred and sixty.
What are yoa doing ?
I am doing nothing.
We do what you do.
What is the washerwoman doing?
She is washing poeket-havidkerehiefi.
How many do four times five make ?
Four times five make twenty.
Twenty-five less nine make sixteen.
A pocket. A pocket-handkerchief.
1. Combien font deux fois quatro ?
Que faites-vous ?
Je no fais rien.
Nous faisons ce que rous faitcs.
Que fait la blanchisseusc ?
EUe lave des mofuchoirs de poehe.
Combien font quatre fois cinq ?
Quatre fois cinq font vingt
Yingt-cinq moins neuf font seize.
Une poche. Un mouchoir de poehe.
. Deux fois quatre font
3. Quatre fois cinq font
Cinq fois six font
huit. 3. Combien font quatre fois cinq?
vingt. 5. Combien font cinq fois six?
trente. 7. Combien font six fois sept ? 8. Six fois sept font qua-
rante-deux. 9. Combien font sept fois huit? 10. Sept fois buit
font cinquante-six. 11. Combien font huit fois neuf? 12. Huit
fois neuf font soixante-douze. 13. Combien font neuf fois dix?
14. Neuf fois dix font quatre-yingt-dix. 15. Dix fois onze font
IS • 14 14 S 74 14 • S IS 14 1 !0 S S i"*
dit-neuf; Tind't, vint^-et-an, vin^t-deuir, trenti*, ka-rante, cin-kante, soi-sant^, ccn^mil/f,
19 11 SI 1 S ISA 14 S 1-6 •.« a \<ih a is IS ti li 1314 lis
Di!-Ill-on, ka-ran«tidm«, cin-kan-tldm^ sol-san-tidmc, cen-ti6me, xni-Ili«Qi<>, mi>lU-o-ni4^«,
poche.
TOE THIRTY-EIGHTH LESSON. I49
cent dix. 16. Hnit et six font qnatorze. 17. Qmarante-cinq
moins quinze font trente. 18. Dix-sept moins neuf font huit. 19.
Que £Eds-tat 20. Je ne fais rien. 21. Qae lavez-vons ? 22. Je
lave mon ardoise. 23. Avez-yous lave vos encriere 1 24. Je lea
ai lav6s. 25. Avqz-voos fait un voyage 1 26. J*ai fait on long
voyage. 27. Avez-vous votre livret 28. Je I'ai dans ma poche.
1. What art thou doing f 2. I am washing my slate. 8. What
are you doing ? 4. We are washing our inkstands. 5. Have you
washed your pens! 6. We have not washed them. 7. What are
those washerwomen washing ? 8. They are washing my pocket*
handkerchiefs. 9. What saddle have you had 1 10. I have had
mine. 11. Have you somebody's bridle? 12. I have nobody's.
13. Has that child had some one's hammer ? 14. He has had some
one's. 15. Will you please give me some lilies and some pansies ?
16- Yes, sir, with pleasure. 17. What has the servant! 18. He
has a pitcher of water. 19. Have you forgotten our names? 20.
I have forgotten them. 21. Where have you been? 22. I have
been as far as the fountain.
23. What flowers have you ? 24. I have roses, lilies, and pan*
sies. 25. Have you had my pen ? 26. I have not had it. 27.
What have you in that pitcher ? 28. It is fresh water. 29. Have
yoa had my papers? 80. I have not had them. 31. Has not that
child somebody's book? 32. He has somebody's. 33. Whose
cravats has he ? 84. He has nobody's. 35. How many do five
times five make ? 36. Five times five make twenty-five, and six
times six make thirty-six. 37. How many do seven times seven
make ? 38. Seven times seven make forty-nine, eight times eight
make sixty-four, and nine times nine make eighty-one. 39. Ninety-
four less twenty-eight are sixty-six. 40. Has the tailor made your
coat and pantaloons? 41. He has made them. 42. What has
that man ? 43. He has his pockets full of money.
OPTIONAL EXERCISES.
1. Do you desire your money ? 2. I desire it and I will have
it to-day. 3. Will you please come to my house to-day ? 4. I am
quite willing. 5. Who takes care of your horse ? 6. The boy takes
care of him. 7. Have you received your letters ? 8. Yes, sir, I
have received them. 9. That boy has not done his work. 10.
Well, I am going to speak to his master. 11. Have you some
fruit ? 12. I have some good fruit. 13. Have you some apples ?
150 THE THIRTY-NINTH LESSON.
14. I haye no apples ; but I have a few pears and some excelleiit
peaches. 15. What is on your table ? 16. They are the books of
my sister. 17. What makes that noise (bruii) ? 18. It is the
children who are in the street.
19. Do you ever go out in the morning ? 20. I often go oat
in the morning and in the evening. 21. Has the workman idready
finished his work ? 22. He has not yet finished it 23. Has the
carpenter already finished his benches ? 24. He has finished them.
25. Has the shoemaker made your shoes ? 26. He has not yet
made them. 27. Has the washerwoman washed my cravats ? 28.
She has washed them.
39.— TRENTE-NEUVISME LEgON.
THE PEONOUN K
To putf put on^ putting, put. Ifetlre, mettatU, mut, e.
Jsmettt tumelH, ilmet^ now mettofUf rouametteM, fltmeiUnt^
I pat, thoa pnttesti be pats, we pot, yoa pat, they pat
Where do you put your book? Oii mettez-voua votre livrc?
I put it on the desk. Je le mcts sur le pupitre.
To dry, drying, dried. Becker, aiehant, %kchk, e.
1. Yorba baying an acate accent on i in the penalt of the inflnltlre^ aa ticker, change
the aeato to the graye accent when followed by a consonant baring e mute after it ; thoa,
J6ei6ke, tu ticket^ ilaeche, noueaeckone, wMMtieheB, ilseeekeni,
1 dry, thoa driest, he dries, we dry, yoo dry, they dry.
MASCVUMS. FEIIIKIKS.
The wind, A spade. he vent. Une becke.
The sun, A pepperbox, Le soleU. Une poivriere.
The east. A smell, odor. Vest {st sounded). Une odeur.
The v>est. The part, skare. Vouest (st sounded). La partie, parL
The north. A family. Le fiord Une familie.
The soutk. ljesud(d sounded).
Wet, MouillS. MouUlee.
Before. Devant, avant.
2. Devant refers to place, and avant to time.
Before the fire. Before morning. Devant le feu. Arant le matin.
The wet linen. In the wind. Le linge mouill4. Au rent.
In the BUD. In the fire. Au soleil. Au feu.
We dry the linen in the sun. Kous s^chons le linge au solciL
Do you dry yours in the wind ? S6chez-vou8 Ic v6tre au vent ?
I dry it before the fire. Je le sdchc derant le feu.
I SSIS6SSS1 ses SOfSSS
meMr«, mcManf, mU, mct«, met, meMon«, me^tea, matient, 86-ober, s^-chanl^ a^-eb^.
T S SI « e r 3 8 Ift ft »> 1S7 < 1 IS I 1« 1
Bt^hs, 86-chon«, ad-choe, sC-chen^ vent, b^che, soldi, poi-vrl-dre, est, par-tie, par<, noitf, &-
la2tl8«4918
mille, sod, mottil-16, du-vanf, a-ranf.
THE THIRTY-NINTH LESSON. 151
Which way (where) is the wind ? Oh eat (or, D'oii vient) le vent f
It IS in the east. II est d Test, or, U vient de Test.
To ii^at U, in it, to theniy at them, *»[«-/./. . . v
them, there, thither, lure, hither, \ J" (before the verb).
Are jou going to the village ? Allez-vous au village ?
I am going there. J*y vais.
What do yon put in that barrel? Que mettez-voos dans ce baril ?
We pnt vinegar in ir. Nous y mettons da vinaigro.
What does the workman put in his Qu^est-ce que Touvrier met dans son
chest ? cofire ?
He pnts linen in it. H y met du lingc.
& T^ere and here referring to a place not mentioned before are Id (or y\ and id.
Dost thou always put thy books there ? Mets-tu toujours tes livres U ?
I always pat them there. Je les y mets toujours.
Do yoa put your umbrellas here ? Mettez-vous vos parapluics ici ?
We pat them there. Nous les y mettons.
We put our hats there also. Nous y mettons nos chapeaux aussi.
He puts on his cloak. D met son manteau.
1. Oi\ le domestiqne lave-t-il son liDge ? 2. II le lave an rais-
seao. 3. Le seche-t-il an Boleil ? 4. II le seche devant le feu. 5.
Le vent n'est pas au nord ; ne vient-il pas de Touest ? 6. Non,
mansienr, il vient du sud. 7. Qu'est-ce que vous mettez dans votre
porte-feuille ? 8. J'y mets des billets de banque. 9. Qu'est-ce que
les marchands mettent dans ces tonneaux ? 10. lis y mettent du
vin. 11. Mon frere est-il chez vous ? 12. Oui, madame, il y vient
toajours avant le soir. 13. La beche est-eUe dans le jardin ? 14-
Ella y est 15. La poivri6re n'est-elle pas sur la table ? 16. Ello
n*y est pas. 17. J'aime beaucoup les violettes ; elles ont une odeur
tr^-douce. 18. Les blanchisseuses scchent^lles leur linge au so-
leil ? 19. Elles Ty sechent. 20. Avez-vous eu votre part de ce
fruit ? 21. Je ne Tai pas cue. 22. Get homme a huit fils et six filles ;
c'est une grande famille. 23. J'ai ici un bon gateau ; en voulez-
vous une partie? 24. Oui, monsieur, s'il vous plait.
1. Where does the maid-servant wash the linen ? 2. She washes
it at the brook. 3. Does she dry it in the wind ? 4, No, madam,
she dries it before the fire. 5. What art thou drying ? 6. I am
drying my wet handkerchief. 7. Is the wind in the east or in the
west ? 8. It is neither in the east nor in the west ; it is in the *^
south. 9. Is it not in the north ? 10. It is not in the north ; it is
in the south. 11. How many do five times seven make ? 12. Five
times seven make thirty-five, and eight times twelve make ninety-
152 THE FORTIETH LESSON.
six. 13. Are you going to the village ? 14. I am going there.
15. Of what has that workman need ? 16. He has need of a spade.
17. What is on the table ? 18. It is a pepper-box and a pocket-
handkerchief 19. What does the workman put on the bench?
20. He puts his spade there.
21. Are you going to the city before evening ? 22. 1 am going
there now. 23. Didst thou dry thy wet gloves in the sun ? 24. I
dried them before the fire. 25. Our neighbor has much fruit ; does
he give you a part ? 26. He gives me some. 27. Do you give
money to that poor man ? 28. I give him some. 29. Do you give
some to his children ? 30. I give some to them. 31. Whose books
have you ? 32. I have nobody's. 33. Has not that scholar some-
body's ? 34. She has nobody's. 35. Whose pens has she ? 36.
She has nobody's. 37. Hast thou washed thy slate ? 38. I have
washed it. 39. Have you washed your inkstands ? 40. We have
not washed them. 41. What has the gardener? 42. He has a
spade and some flowers. 43. Do you like the odor of those flow-
ers ? 44. I like it mucL 45. Is the family of your friend going
to the country? 46. They (eUe) are going there. 47. Do you
wish for the pepper-box ? 48. Yes, sir, if you please.
OPTIONAL EXERCISES.
1. Where is the pepper-box ? 2. Is it not on the table ? 3. No,
it is not there. 4. I want a little soup. 5. Will you have also a
piece of boiled meat (houilli) ? 6. No, sir, thank you. 7. Do you
not like boiled meat ? 8. "i es, sir, I like it, but I do not wish for
any to-day.
9. You have nothing on your plate ; do you wish for a piece of
roast meat ? it is very tender (tendre). 10. A little piece, if you
please. 11. Do you like it well done ? 12. I like it rare. 13. Do
you wish for some bread ? 14. Thank you, I have some still. 15.
You are not hungry. 16. Yes, I am very hungry ; this roast meat
is excellent. 17. Is not your cofliee cold? 18. No, sir, it is still
very warm. 19. Do you wish for a cup of tea ? 20. I thank you
much ; I like coffee and not tea. 21. Why do you put on your
cloak ? 22. I put it on because 1 am cold.
40.— QUARANTlfiME LEgON.
PBONOtJN y CONTINUED.
To think (of), thinking, thought. Penser (A), pentant, pemi, € (fem.).
7b labor (on), laboring, labored. 7Srava%Uer{K)^ travaillanty travaiUl,
• «tS S61I« lis 11«
p«n-ser, pen-flan/, pen-«c, travall-ler, tra-vaiMan<; tra-ralM^.
THE FORTIETH LESSON.
153
1. Fia genenllj a prononn, hsTing the force of d, or some other preposition of pUwe
except (f«, with lui, elle, euoR, «ZZet, or cela, alao often an adverb for lc< or ^ As a pronoun
it allies almost always to things
Do 70U pat your name to these papers ?
I nut it to tbem.
Does he labor on that work ?
He labors on it
Do yon ever think of your books f
I think of them often.
Are the musicians coming here ?
They are coming here.
Are they in the country ?
They are there.
Mettez-Tous rotrc nom k ces papiers ?
Je Vj mets.
TraTaille-t-il i cct ourrage ?
II y traraille.
Pensez-Yous jamais H tos Uvres ?
iTy pense sourent
Les musiciens Tienuent-ils id ?
lis y viennent.
Sont-ils k la campagne?
lis y sont.
2. The place of the other objective pronouns wo have seen (Lesson 26), and that en is
placed last of all (Leraon 84% FIs placed after the other objective pronouns and before &tk
Me there. Us there.
Thee there. You there,
Him^ it J or her there. Them there.
Same there. I put some there.
We conduct you there.
He conducts me there.
I conduct thee there.
They carry it there.
We take some there to you.
To lead, take, leading, led.
To mend, mending, mended,
Thie^ this thing. That, that thing.
M^i/. Nous y.
Ty. Voue y.
JOy. Les y.
Y en. J'y en mets.
Nous Tous y conduissons.
II m^y conduit.
Je t^y conduis.
Us Ty portent.
Nous TOUS y en portons.
Mener, menant, men6,e((em.),
Raecommoder, raecommodant^ raccommodi.
Ceci. Cela.
8. Ctei and cela are used in reference to propositions, or to things not named.
This is good, that is bad. Ceci est bon, cela est mauvais.
KABCULCrs. TEMnnXM,
The traveler. The color. Le voyageur. La couleur.
ThejUeue. The place, equare. Vendroit, lieu, 1^2^ place.
4. EndroU and lieu denote mere locality ; place belonging to a i)er8on or thing, isplaee.
The hatter. The border.
The arrangement. The disposal.
The mueieian.
The lieutenant. Somewhere, any where.
The world, people. Every where.
Every body. All the world.
Easily. Kowhere.
No onSf none.
Le ehapelier. La bordure,
Varrangement, La disposition.
Le musicien. La musieienne
Le lietUenant. Quelqw part,
Le monde. Partout.
Tout le monde. Le monde entier.
Faeilement. Ntdle part.
Without a verb, aucun ; with a verb, and
standing as subject, aucun ne before the
verb; standing as objoet, ne before the
verb and aucun after It The feminine
l&aucune.
mm mm vvi Bm im m l JSja* k la t/a v -m tm j m mt tm i.
me-ner, me-nani, me-n6, rae-oo-mo-der, rac-co-mo-danf, ra<j-eo-mo-d6, ce-cl, cc-la, vo-ya-
11 IS 11 8 -.0 u f 1 1 4 13 ft i« a 1 a ^ }? ** >^ '? '^ **
UBor, eoa*]enr, en-droU, Hen, plac«, cha-po'lier. bor-dure, ar-rangs-meni, dis-po-si-aion, mu-
lt nU » rt n» it» t u *^ J IS a !*• 11? • . M„
si'Cien, mu-si-cienne, lleute-nan^ mond«, par-tou<, en-tier, ih-cll<-men«, nul«.
7*
154 THE FORTIETH LE8S0N.
To wkich one. Attquel, A laquelU,
To which ones, Aitxquels. AuxqueUes.
•To what store dost thou take tbe cloth ? A quel magasin portes-tu le drap ?
To which one do you take tbe traveler? Auqael mencz-vous le vojrageur ?
I take him to none. Jc ne le m^ne a aucun. (Les. 27, 5.)
To which ones do your friends go ? Auxqaels ros amis vont-ils?
Does DO child go to school? Aucun enfant ne va-t-il 4 P^colc ?
None, No one goes there. Aucun. Aucun n'y va.
Do you doubt of that ? Doutez-vous de cela ?
I do not doubt of it. Je n^cn doute pas.
1. Le voyageur vous conduit-il a la riviere ? 2. H nous y con-
duit 3. Condui^ez-vous les enfants k Pecole I 4. Je les y con-
duis. 5. Nous y conduisez-vous ? 6. Je ne vous y conduis pas.
7. Pensez-vous jamais s!L yos amis ? 8. Je pense souvent d eux. 9.
Travaillez-vous k cet ouvrage? 10. J'y travaille beaucoup. 11.
Portez-vous du sucre au magasin ? 12. J'y en porte vingt livres.
13. Ceci n'est-il pas jaune t 14. Si, ecci est jaune et cela est vert.
16. Avez-vous mene les voyageurs au village ? 16. Je les y ai menes.
17. Kaccommodez-vous quelque chose t 18. Je ne raccommode rien.
19. Le tailleur a-t-il raccommode vos pantalons ? 20. II les a rac-
commodes. 21. Avez-vous connu le lieutenant et le musicien? 22.
Je les ai connus. 23. Je mets mes livres dans cet endroit-ci. 24.
Nous mettons toujours nos papiers a leur place. 25. AUez-vous
quelque part ? 26. Je ne vais nulle part. 27. Avez-vous chercho
votre livre ? 28. Je Tai cherch6. 29. Tout le monde connait le
lieutenant. 30. Savez-vous ou il demeuret 31. OuL Est-ce un
bel endroit 1 C'est le plus beau lieu du monde. 32. Cette fleur
est d'une belle couleur. 33. Pensez-vous a votre le9on 1 34. J'y
pense. 35. Ce monsieur parle bien facilement.
1. Where are you going t 2. I am going to school. 3. To
which one are you going t 4. I am going to Mr. A.'s. 5. To which
ones do your sisters go ? 6. They go to none. 7. Do you often
think of your friends I 8, We think of them very often. 9. Of (A)
what do those scholars think t 10. They think of what they study.
11. Does the servant take the horse to the stable*? 12. He takes
him there. 13. What are those tailors mending t 14. They are
mending coats and pantaloons. 15. Where have you put your
books? 16. I have put them in that place. 17. Do you always put
them in (d) their place ? 18. I often put them there. 19. Is this
iron? 20. This is iron and that is copper. 21. Have you labored
THE FORTYFIRST LBSSON. 165
on that work ? 22. I labored on it 23. Did yoa ^ish it easily t
24. I finished it very easily. 25. I like the arrangement of that
garden. 26. The color of that cloth is bine.
27. How many sisters have yout 28. I have none. 29. The
smell of these flowers is very sweet. 30. The wind is neither in the
north nor in the south, it is in the west. 31. Where does the wash-
erwoman dry the wet cravats 1 32. She dries them in the sun and
in the wind. 33. How many brothers has the lieutenant ? 34. The
lieutenant has none, the musician has four. 85. Are you going any
where to-day ? 36. I am going nowhere. 87. Where is the trav-
eler going? 38. He is going every where. 39. Is the musician
going any where ? 40. She is going nowhere. 41. Does the hat-
ter {chapelier) think of what he has done ? 42. He thinks of it.
43. Will you please conduct me to the hatter's? 44. With pleas-
ure ; I am going there now.
OPTIONAL EXERCISES.
1. Have you need of your spade ? 2. No ; do you wish for it?
3. Certaiuly (certainemeni). 4. It is in the garden, under the win-
dow of the kitchen. 5. Wny do you need a spade? 6. I wish to
make a hole (un trou) before the house, in order to (pour) put there
a yellow rose-tree (rosier). 7. Have you yellow roses ? 8. I have
some yellow, some white, and some red ; have you not some ? 9.
Not (pas) yellow ones, that color is rare (rare). 10. K you come
with (avec) me, I am going to give you a stock {unpied) of it. 11.
Ton are too good. 12. All that I have is at your disposal 13. Do
you see (vot/ez-vous) what large leaves this rose-tree has ? 14. Yes,
truly {vraiment), they are very large. 15. What rose is it (esi^e) ?
16. It is the cloth of gold (drop d*or) rose ; if you wish for it, it is
at your service. '17. Thank you, I am going to take good {bien)
care of it 18. Do you wish for a stock of the white ? 19. I thank
youy I have some of that color, and I have not much space {place)
in my border.
41.— QUARANTE ET UNl£ME LEgON.
A BEFOBE THE INFINITIVE.
I like to listen to the traveler. tTaime h Pouter le voyageur.
1. The verb aimer gonerallj requires d before a depondont Infinltiyef as seen in the
•boTe phrase. Many other verbs and phrases do the same. Avoir^ chercher^ dannsr^ mH-
fiY, montrer^ porter^ and trouver^ already given, take d before a dependent inflnttlve. Sooh
verbs wHI be marked, as they are given hereafter, with the abbrevlaUon {d bet ln£). Some
verba and phrase* also take <7« before the inilnitive. These will be noted hereafter.
156
THE FORTY-FIRST LESSON.
I have something to do. J^ai qaelqne chose k falre.
He seeks to do that. n cherche 4 faire cela.
We show you how to do that. Nous tous montrons & £ure cela.
2. Other verbs, aa wo hare seen, goTcm the infinitiyo witboat a preposition.
I am going to look for my book.
Je rais chercher mon lirre.
xAsciTLnn. raMimwa.
The thnad. The apothecaty't thcp.
Secret
Fine,
Alone, only (adj.).
An <fficer. Exactly so.
A secret TTiat is U.
Only (adT.). To stay, remain,
lb-morrow. To intrust, confide.
With, To count, reckon, also intend.
To admire. To leave, let.
To take away, to take off.
To depart, set out, departing, departed,
& Pariir is ooi\]Dgated like sortir (Lesson 29).
Have you only the fine thread ? Avez-Tous seulement le fil fin ? (or
stronger) N^avez-Tous que le fil fin ?
Of whom, from wJiofn, of which, from )
which, whose, )
4. De qui \a used only of persons and personified objects. It most always be naed when
qf whom or tohoee is interrogative. Dont applies to both persons and things, and is general-
ly preferred to de qui when followed by a pronoun.
Of whom do you speak ? De qui parlez-vous ?
I speak of the man of whom you speak. Je parle de Thomme dont rous pariez.
Le^.
Secret
Secrete,
Fin.
rme.
Seul.
Seule.
Vnofficier.
Touijuste.
Vn secret
CTestcela.
Setdement,
Rester{dheliDL),
Demain,
Confier,
Avec.
Compter,
Admirer,
Oter,
Fartir, partant, parti.
Dont.
Do you buy the thread of which I speak ?
Ihat {the one) of which or of whotn.
Those {the ones) of which or of whom.
That {the thing) of which.
I admire him of whom you speak.
He admires her of whom you speak.
He takes away that of which I am afraid.
We leave our books here.
My brothers remain at home.
I trust to you my money.
I intend to depart to-morrow.
Achetez-vous le fil dont je parle f
Celui dont (m.). Celle dont (f.).
Ceux dont (m.). Celles dont (f.).
Ce dont
J^admire celui dont vous parlez.
U admire celle dont vous parlez.
II 6te ce dont j^ai peur.
Nous laissons nos livres ici.
Mes frercs restent chcz cux.
Je vous confie mon argent
Je compte partir demain.
6i Mime, the same, an adjective, and mime, srI/ Joined to a pronoun, are variable ; but
mime, even, an adverb, is Invariable.
We have the same friends. Nous avons les mimes amis.
We are ourselves his friends. Nous sommes noua-memes scs amis.
He does not love even his children. II n^aime pas mi}ne ses enfants.
IS 1 1 IS 4 B 4 fi 14 13 • • 15 19 190 9S • S • <
fll, phar-ma-cie. se-cre/, 80-crdt«, iin, fine, seuU seoltf, of-fl-cier. Juste, soule-men<, rf s-(er,
4 14 «l na 1 » 21 6 1 us 7 0 17 6 1 If 1 « 1 M »1
de-main, con-fler, a-vec, oomp-ter, ad-ml-rer, laie-ser, d-ter, par-tir, par-tani, par-ti, doot
THE FORTY-FIRST LESSON. 167
1. Cet 6colier trouve beanconp a Windier. 2. II aime a parler
fraD^ais. 3. Avez-vons senlement ces poissons-cit 4. Je D*ai
que cehii-ci, et mon ami n'a que celui-1^ 5. Pourquoi 6tez-vous
Totre chapeaut 6. Je Tdte a cet homme. 7. Laissez-vous votre
argent dans ce coffre ? 8. Je Vj laisse. 9. Bestez-vous seuls ici I
10. Nous 7 restons seuls. 11. Gonfiez-vous votre argent k nos soins t
12. Nous Vj confions. 13. £st-ce que vous admirez I'officier dont
nous parlous 1 14. Nous ne Tadmirons pas. 15. Ne compte-t-il pas
les soldats? 16. II les compte. 17. Gompte-t-il partir demaint 18.
Non, monsieur, il part aujourd'hui. 19. Partez-Tous demaint 20.
Nous partons ce matin. 21. Ou va ce chapelier ? 22. II ra k la
pharmacie. 23. Je confie tout k mon ami, il est fort discret. 24.
Vous conlie-t-il son secret ? 25. H me le confie.
1. Where does the hatter take that officer t 2. He takes him
to the grain market-house {la halle aux bles). 3. Has the carpen-
ter mended your door ? 4. He has mended it. 5. To whom does
the hatter speak ? 6. He speaks to the musician. 7. To which
one does he speak ? 8. He speaks to this one. 9. Have you put
your tree in this place ? 10. I have put it in this place, and my roses
in that. 11. Is that officer going any where t 12. He is going
nowhere. 13. 1 am going to the apothecary's shop. 14. To which
are you going? 15. 1 am going to mine. 16. Are you acquainted
with that officer? 17. Yes, sir, every body is acquainted with him.
18. Does he intrust to you his secrets! 19. He intrusts them tome.
20. What have you fine 1 21. I have nothing fine.
22. Do you always leave your books in their place T 23. I al-
ways leave them there. 24. Does your brother remain here! 25.
He remains here to-day only, but he intends to depart to-morrow.
26. Do you confide your secret to me ? 27. I confide it to you.
28. Do you admire the officer of whom we speak ? 29. We admire
him. 30. Why do you take off your cloak t 31.1 take it off be-
cause I am warm. 32. What men are you looking for ? 33. I am
looking for those of whom you speak. 34. The physician dwells in
Water-street ; he is going to the apothecary's shop with his friend.
35. Of what do you speak t 36. 1 speak of that of which you speak.
37. My pencil is on my desk with my books. 38. I have bought
the horse of which you speak. 39. Our neighbor has a dog, of
which we are afraid.
158
THE FOBTY^ECOKD LESSOK.
OPnONAL EXEBCISES.
I. Where are you going f 2. I am going to conduct this little
boy home. 3. Where does he dwell I 4. He dwells near {pres du)
the market on Water-street. 5. Who is his father? 6. It is Mr.
Bernard ; do you not know him ? 7. I know him very well. 8. Is
Mr. Bernard at home to-day t 9. I do not doubt of it ; he does not
often go out. 10. Well, I am going to his house with you.
II. Who is that man? 12. Which one? 13. He who is going
to the apothecary's shop with Mr. George. 14. He is the physician
of my father ; he comes to our house often. 15. Is your father still
sick 1 16. He is not very well yet. 17. I will go and see (j'e vah
aUtr voir) your father. 18. You do not come often. 19. Do you
still (tou/oura) live at the same place ? 20. Yes, we live in Saint
Francis-street (la rue Saint Franqois). 21. You live in a large white
house, do you not {n^est-ce pas) 1 22. Exactly (exactement§) ; that
is it
42.— QUARANTE-DEUXIfeME LEgON.
NEGATIVE PABTITIVES, ETC.
1. We have seen (Lesson 81, Nos. 3, 4) that negatlre partltires take or omit the ftrtlde
as the aflSrmatlve or negative meaning preyaUs.
Has DOt thifl rich man money ?
Has not this great king poteerf
Has that poor man no bread ?
To feel, to smell, feeling, felt.
All, quite. All alone.
InetarUly, forthwith.
Too, too much.
Get homme riche n^a-t-il pas de I'argent?
Cc grand roi n'a-t-il pas du ponvoirf
Ce pauvre homme n'a-t-il pas de pain ?
Sentir, eentant, eenti,
(Conjugated as eoHir^ Lesson £9.)
Tout (adv.). Tout seul.
A rinetant, sur le champ, tout de mite,
Trop {de before a noun).
XABC17LXN1C.
The How,
The writing.
Le coup.
VierUure.
The thunder.
The reading.
La lecture.
Square,
Carre,
Carrie.
The hole.
The slU, chink.
Le trou.
lAfente.
Hound,
'
Rond,
Bonde,
The nest.
Lean,
Le nid.
Maigre.
SalUd, salt.
Sale,
SaUe,
Fat,
Gras.
Grasae.
Does it rain i
f It
rains.
Fleut-ilf Ilpleut.
When, The
clap
of thunder.
Quand. Le coup de tonnerre.
Do you feel the north wind f
Sentez-vous le vent du nord?
I feel it.
Je le sens.
Are you afraid of
claps of thunder ?
Avez-vous peur
des coups de tonnerre ?
2^ow, at
present. From here.
A present.
mci.
It W 8 14 • a S 12 14 a » 13 M C 19 99 U 7 1 C
poa-Yoir, sen-tir, sen-tan^ sen-ti, ins-tant; salt*, coop, 6-cri-ture, to>»-nerr«, car-ne, <
r6«, fent«^ rond, ronde, maigre, sa-ld, Ba-16e, gras, grasee, pleat, kan<i, pri-senl
THE FORTY-SECOND LESSON. 159
Do jon smell from here the flowers of Sentez-vous dUci lea fleurs de Totre
your garden ? jardin ?
Do the children feel the cold ? Les enfants sentent-ils le froid ?
Tbey feel it and I feel it also. Us le sentent et je le sens aossi.
Near. Near the church. Pres, au pres {de bef. n.). Prds de
r^glise.
S. Pr^ is accidentally near, aupr^ ponnanently near.
Do you see that lady near the fountain ? Yoyez-Tous cettc dame pria do la fon-
taine?
The large tree is near the fountain. Le grand arbre est auprds de la fon-
taine.
I gire the horse some water. Je donne de Feau au cheval.
I gire the horse some blows with your Je donne au chcval des coups de votro
whip. fouet (Lesson 26, 6).
1. Esi-ce que vons laissez cet enfant tout seul ? 2. L'oiseau est-
U dans son nid ? .3. II y est. 4. Les rats font des trous au plan-
cher. 5. Voulez-vous du boeuf sal^ ? 6. J'en veux. 7. Veux-tu du
boBuf gras on du maigre ? 8. J'en veux du maigre. 9. Pleut-il k
present? 10. H ne pleut pa& 11. Est-ce que j© confie trop d'ar-
gent k cet homme ? 12. Vous lui en confiez trop. 13. Quand pen-
Bez-vous partir ? 14. Je pense partir ce soir. 15. Avez-vous Ten-
crier carre et le rond? 16. Je n'ai que le carr6. 17. Cette Venture
est Men vieifle. 18. Aimez-vous la lecture ? 19. Je Taime beau-
coup. 20. Fourquoi cet homme riche est<il triste ; nVt-U pas des
amis et de Targent ? 21. Votre ami part a Tinstant 22. Je lui
ai parle. 23. H a regu votre lettre, et il va partir tout de suite,
or a Tinstant.
1. Do you feel the cold ? 2. We feel it mucL 3. Does the
grocer feel the cold ? 4. Yes, every body feels it 5. Do you con-
fide your secrets to your friend ? 6. 1 confide them to him. 7. Do
jou buy the fine thread ? 8. I buy the fine thread and the coarse.
9. When do you intend to depart ? 10. I intend to depart forth-
witL 11. Have you an apothecary's shop? 12. Ihave one on
Water-street. 13. Do you go out \yhen it rains ? 14. I never go
out when it rains. 15. Does it rain now ? 16. It does not rain.
17. Where does the bird make his nest ? 18. He makes it in that
hole. 19. Do you wish for some salt fish or some fresh ? 20. I
wish for some salt. 21. Is the garden square or round ? 22. It is
square. 23. Who has made a chink in the door ? 24. Some one
bas made a chink in the door, and a hole in the floor.
160 THE FORTT-THIRD LESSON.
25. Do you \7ish for some fat beef and some lean ? 26. I wish
only for some lean, and that officer wishes only for some fat 27.
Dost thou fear the clap of thunder ? 28. I fear it. 29. Dost thou
depart instantly ? 30. I depart instantly, and the Frenchman in-
tends to depart to-morrow. 31. Art thou going anywhere? 32. I
am going nowhere, but the traveler is going every where. 33. Do
you speak French easily? 34. No, sir, I speak French, but not
easily. 35. Is not that writing beautiful ? 36. It is very beauti-
ful. 37. Do you like reading ? 38. I like it much. 39. Has the
master given you blows ? 40. No, he has given blows to that bad
boy {sti/et). 41. Dost thou smell those flowers from here? 42. I
smell them. 43. Of what dogs are you afraid ? 44. I am afraid
of those of which you speak. 45. I take away that of which you
are afraid.
OPTIONAL EXERCISES.
1. George, have you nothing to do ? 2. Yes, sir, I have to do
my exercise. 3. Well, why have you not done it ? 4. Because I
have no pen. 5« But where is your new pen ? 6. I am looking for
it, but I do not find it. 7. You do not take care of your pens. 8.
I always put my pens in my portfolio, and some one takes {prend)
them. 9. I doubt of it, because you do not take care of your things
{affaires). 10. Have you some ink ? 11. I have still a little, but
not much. 12. I am going to give you another pen, and some ink,
if you have need of them. 13. Where is your copy-book ? I wish
to see (voir) your writing. 14. Your copy-book is dirty ; why do
you not take care of your books ? 15. Your brothers take care of
theirs. 16. What is Teier {Pierre) doing? 17. He is studying
his French lesson {legon de franqais), 18. Peter is a very good
child ; he loves reading, and he takes good care of his books. 19.
You do not hold your pen well ; that is why {c'est pourguoi) you
write {ecrivez) so badly. 20. Now you can {pouvez) go out. Good
morning {bonjour).
43,— QUARANTE-TROISlfiME LEgOX.
NOUNS, ADJECTIVES, ETC.
To ««, teeing^ seen. Voity voyant^ vu^ e (fern.).
Je90i$j tuvoU, Uvoit, nowtoyoM, touavoyes^ iUwient^
1 8e«, tboa soest, he seca, wo sec, you sec, the/ soo.
)-> r>}98 90 rO 101131 9013 6 S?
Toir, vo-yaD<, voiii, toK, ro-yoni, vo-ye*, volenlL
THE FORTY-THIRD LESSON.
161
The road.
The drawer.
A piece , bit.
The week. ^
The rain.
In a moment, pres-
ently.
The shin.
The eight.
Wide, broad.
Bald
Le ehemin.
Le tiroir.
Un morceau.
La aemaine.
JjApluie.
Tout a Vheure.
Ocodfcrttme.
Badfortune.
The storm.
Theforehead.
BUter.
Narrow, tight
BigK
Thick,
The eye. The eyes.
That paper is thick.
That plank is thick.
That man*8 forehead is high.
His skin is white.
His sight is had.
Tonr eyes are hiae.
This road is wide, and that one is
narrow.
What do you put in that drawer?
I put some pieces of cloth there.
Do you see the storm coming ?
I see it.
The dog sees the birds, and the birds
see the dog.
HaTe you some more fruit ?
I have some more.
Some more. No more.
Ixi bonheur. La /mom.
Le m€dhew. La vim.
JJorage. Large.
he front. Chauve.
Amer. Amere.
Etroit. hroite,
Ilaut, ffaute.
J^pais. Epaisse.
Jj ceil (sing.). Les yeux (plur.).
Ce papier est 6pais.
Cette pknche est 6pais6e.
Cet homme a le front haat.
n a la peau blanche. (Less. 83, 2.)
n a la Yue mauvaise.
Vous avez les yeuz bleus.
Ce chemin-ci est large, et celui-lA est
Etroit.
Que mettez-YOus dans ce tiroir ?
J*y mets des morceaux de drap.
Voyez-vous venir Forage ?
Je le vols.
Le chien yoit les oiseauz, etles oiseaux
Toient le chien.
Avez-Yous encore du fruit ?
•Ten ai encore.
Encore (de). Ne plus (de).
^loore sndplus tako de
1. JSkeore meaning tome more, b not used with a negative.
before the following noon.
He has some more money. H a encore de Targent.
He has no more money. H n*a plus d^argent.
We have some more. Nous en sYons encore.
We have no more. Nous n*cn sYons plus.
To have the goodness, or kindness. Avoir la bontS.
8. Atolr la honU and other verbal ezpreasions formed of avoir and a nonn, take de
befiire the following inflnltWe.
1. Get homme a beaucoup de bonheur et pea de malhenr. 2.
Le m6decin ne va-t^il pas fiaire une operation a ce malade ? 8. Si,
14 T M » 99U M 17 Ml 11 U 11 17 1 11 O
eii«-minf SAnalnef ti-roir, plal«, mor-cean, tna-ta-rAeare. bon-Aonr, peau, mal-Aeur, vu«,
Ul 1 ^« IT \ 7 1 7 6 » » » ^ 17 17 » T » U»
o-ra{E«, lanE«, fron/, chaav«, a-mer, a-m6i^ 6-troU, 6-troite, haaf, baat«, 6-pala, oeil, yeiu^
eS'Core, bon-t^.
162 THE FORTY-THIRD LESSON.
il compte la faire cette semaine. 4. Cet homme est chaave ; il a le
front haut et large ; il a aassi la vue maiivaisa 5. Qaels chiens
ce gargon a-t-il? 6. II a ceux dont vdus avez peur. 7. Quel
homme voyez-vous ? 8. Nous voyons celui dont vous parlez. D.
Ce vin n'est-il pas amer? 10. 11 est bien amer. 11. Avez-voas
mis les morceaux de papier dans votre tiroir 1 12. Je les y ai mis.
13. Quelles vaches avez-vons achet^es? 14. Nous avons acbet6
celles dont ce gargon a soin. 15. Voyez-vous ce dont le cheval a
peur t 16. Nous le voyons. 17. Votre frere a la bont^ de venir
Bouvent cbez moi. 18. H a toujours soin de bien 6tudier sa legon.
19. Vois-tu la fleur dont je parlef 20. Je la vois. 21. Avez-vous
vu ma belle-soeur ? 22. Je Pai vue.
1. Dost thou see the lady of whom we speak ? 2. I see the
one of whom yon speak, and those of whom your friend speaks
also. 3. What birds do you see ? 4. We see those of which you
have care. 5. Have you seen our beautiful flowers? 6. I have
not seen them. 7. Whom dost thou see 1 8. I see him of whose
courage you doubt. 9. Do you go out at night all alone 1 10. I
never go out alon^; I go out with my father and with my brother.
11. When do you go home? 12. I go there forth witL 13. Do
you give that ox some blows with a whip (de fouet) ? 14. I give
him some. 15. I admire the writing and the reading of that scholar.
16. This road is broad and that one is narrow. 17. I have not
been to my friend's this week, but I intend to go there forthwith.
18. Some one has put a piece of cake in my drawer.
19. Have you had much bad fortune ? 20. No, sir, I have had
much good fortune. 21. The ox has the skin thicker ( plus epaisse)
than the sheep. 22. Do those birds see the storm coming ? 23.
They see it. 24. Is not that apple bitter? 25. Yes, it is very bit-
ter. 26. Is not that coat too tight? 27. It is very tight, but
these pantaloons are wide. 28. That man's forehead is high ; are
not his eyes blue ? 29. His forehead is high and he is bald, but
his eyes are black. 30. Have you some more wine ? 81. I have
no more. 32. Our neighbor has the goodness to send us fruit and
flowers. 33. Do you intend to depart this week ? 34. I intend
to depart forthwith. 35. Do you wish for a piece of roast beef?
36. Yes, sir, if you please.
THE FORTY-FOURTH LESSON. 163
OPTIONAL EXERCISES.
1. Does your annt intend to depart to-morrow for New Orleans
(pour la Nouvelle Orleans)^ 2. No, madam, she only intends to
depart next (proehaine) week.^ 3. Does she always live at your
house t 4. Tes, madam, she lives there, but she is not at home
to-day ; she is in the country, at the house of her sister. 5. When
docs she intend to return (revenir) ? 6. To-morrow, madam. 7. I
wish to see her to-day. 8. Do you often go to see your aunt who
lives in the country! 9. I go there sometimes.
10. What is the matter with that little girl ? 11. She is blind.
12. Poor child, how {que) I pity her! 13. It is a thick film {taie)
which she has on the eyes ; our physician says (dit) that he can
(petit) take it away ; he intends to perform (faire) the operation
(operation) for her this weekf 14. If it is only a film, the physi-/
cian can restore her sight (to her the sight)!^ 15. Do you speak of
the general's good fortune? 16. I speak of his bad fortune. 17.
What do you take away ? 18. I take away that of which the child
is afraid.
44.— QUARANTE-QUATRIiaifE LEgON.
IMPEKATIVE MOOD.
To thut. To bring, Fermer, Apporter,
Do you shut the door ? Fenncz-vouB la porte ?
I shut it. Jo la ferme.
The servant brings some good frait. Le domestique apporte de bon fruit.
1. Tnx Imfkbatit* Mood of all Franofa rerbs, 'with very few exceptlonSf wMch will be
given hereafter, has the first and second persons pixtral the same as those of the Indicative
present, and the second person singular the same as the first person singular of the indlca*
tive present, all omitting the subject Thus :
Gome (thou). Viens. Shut (thou). Ferme. Bring (thou). Apporte,
Let us come. Venona. Let us shut. Fermona. Let us bring. Appartona.
Come (you). Venez. Shut (you). Fermez. Bring (you). Appartez,
Come (thou) here. Come (you) here. Vtena ici. Venez ici.
Go to the neighbor's. Allez chez le voisin.
Let us go to the neighbor's. Ailona chez le voisin.
Shut the door. Ferme k porte, or, Fermez la porte.
Bring the book. Apporte le livre, or, Apportez le liyre.
Shut the window. Shut it. Fermez la fen^re. Fermez-la.
% These persons of the ImperatiTe, when affirmative, tako after the verb, and Join to
It by a hyphen, all those pronouns whioh usually come before the verb ; the direct always
preceding the Indirect, y and en coming after the other pronouns.
Give him the bread. Donnez {or donne)-Iui le pain.
Give it to him. 'Bonne {or donnez)-lc lul.
Let us give her some bread. Donnons-lui du pain.
7 •llASlie ll«n 11««7 7 8
fer-mer, ap-por>ter, ap-ports^ ap-por-ton«, ap-por-tes, ferm«, fer-mca.
164
THE FORTT-FOURTH LESSOX.
Let us give her some. Donnons-lui-eD.
Give some to them. Donnez-leur-en.
Let us give them the napkins. Donnons-leur les serriettes:
Give them to us. Donnez-les-nous.
8b With neg&tlve imperatiTes, the pronouns are placed, as usual, before the verU
Do not carrj them to him. Ne les lui porte pas.
Let us not carry any to them. Ne leur en portons pas.
Do not carry them there. Ne les y portez pas.
Let us not carry any there. N'y en portons pas.
Send them to the village. Envoycz-lcs au village.
Send them there. Envoyez {or envoie)-le8-y.
Send some there. Envoyez (or envoies)-y-en.
4. The second person singular imperative, If ending with a vowel, takes an • when fol-
lowed by y or en, as in this last phraso.
Send some to thy father. Envoies-eu k ton perc.
6. With afflrmatlTC imperatives me and U become moi and toi, and are placed after y.
Bring me thy book.
Take me there.
Apportc-moi ton livro.
Menez-y-moi.
Make thyself a soldier.
Fais-toi soldat
Lend me your pen.
Lend it to me.
Pr^tez-moi votre plume.
Pr6tez-ki-moL
MASOUUITB.
The arm, A box.
Le bras.
Uneftotte.
The noise. K person.
The return, A rule.
Le bruit.
Le retour.
Une personne.
Une regie.
The honor. Arithmetic.
Long,
Happy ^ fortunate.
Vhonneur.
Long.
Heureux^ for-
tune
Varithmetique.
Longue.
Heureuse^ f&rtunie.
Unhappy^ unfortunate.
A hair. To kindU, to light.
MaXheureuXf in-
fortunl
Un cheveu.
Malheureuse^ infor^
tunee.
Allumer.
The hair. Yesterday^ the day before
yesterday.
Apres-demain.
1. AUumez la cbandelle. 2. AUiimons la lampe. 3. Qai al-
lume le feu? 4. Le domestiqae rallume. 5. Allumez-vous la
lampe? 6. Non, monsieur, j'allume la cbandelle. 7. Allons a
I'eglise. 8. Allez d Tecole. 9. Apportez-moi la boite d'iroire.
10. Get homme a le bras long et le pied grand ; il a aassi les cbe-
1 90 9313 r U 4 18 7 U II 1 U « 19 tl Sl •
bras, boite, brul/, per-sonfie, rc-tour, r6-gr1e, Aon-near, a-rlt/^me-tike, lon(7, longve, Aeo-
10 9 • 1« si 6 1« 92 « 1 !) » 19 9 U 18 lii 6 l1 M Si
reiuB, Aen-ronze, for-ta-ne, for-ta-ne^ mal-Aeu-rpaao, nial-Aea-reaM| in-for-ta-n6, in-for-tn*
• 4 10 4 10 1 99 S lir 1 S 117 1 S H
n6e, ohe-ven, cbe-veoe, aMu-mer, Aier, avant-Aier, a>prdsde-main.
THE FORTY-FOURTH LESSOK. 165
renz noirs. 11. Sentez-vons laplaie? 12. Je sens la plnie et
Tair frais. 13. Cette demoiselle n'est-elle pas heurease ? 14. Elle
est faearense parce qu'elle est tres-bonne, et son fr^re est malheurenx
parce qn'il est tr^s-mcchant. 15. Allez k votre chambre. 16.
Allez-y tout a Theure. 17. Demeorez-voas pres d'icit 18. Je
demenxe dans la me Charles. 19. Donnez-moi cette boite d^ivoire.
20. Qa'est-ce qui fait tant de bruit I 21. Le vent le &it. 22.
Get stranger est une personne d'esprit 23. Je compte aller cbez
Tons a mon retour de la ville. 24. Savez-yous les r6gles d'arith-
metique ? 25. Je les sais bien.
1. Shut the door. 2. Bring me thy copy-book. 3. Give me
the butter. 4. Bring me the bread. 5. Bring it to me. 6. Give
the master thy pen. 7. Give it to him. 8. Give the young lady
the flowers. 9. Give them to her. 10. Bring the scholars their
pens. 11. Bring them to them. 12. Carry the ladies the gloves.
13. Carry them to them. 14. Come here. 15. Let us look for
our books. 16. Let us go to school. 17. Do not speak to that
boy. 18. Do not speak to him. 19. Do not give those men the
fruit. 20. Do not give it to them. 21. Do not bring it to me.
22. Is that road narrow t 23. That road is narrow, and this one
is broad. 24. I saw your uncle yesterday, and I saw the general
day before yesterday.
25. Will you please to give me a piece of cake? 26. Have
yoa some more fruit? 27. 1 have no more. 28. That lady's arms
are very white, her hair is black, and her eyes blue. 29. Put your
papers in this box. 30. Do the children make that noise ? 31.
Yes^ sir, they make much noise. 32. I am acquainted with that
lady ; she is a person of wit. 33. I saw your brother yesterday on
(d) my return from the country, and I saw your father day before
yesterday. 34. What are you studying ? 35. I am studying the
rules of arithmetic. 36. Has not the general much good fortune ?
37. He has much good fortune and the captain has much bad for-
tune. 38. When did you see the general ? 39. I saw him yester-
day, and I saw the captain the day before yesterday. 40. I intend
to go to your house day after to-morrow.
OPTIONAL EXERCISES.
1. Do you not feel the rain? 2. Yes, sir, it rains already
much. 3. I am going to look for my books which are under the
166 THE FORTY-FIFTH LESSON.
tree. 4. I am going with yon. 5. Are yon not cold t 6. No, I
am neither warm nor cold ; the wind is a little fresh, but it is not
cold. 7. I like to hear the claps of thunder when I have nothing
to do, but I do not like them too near. ^ 8. Are you afraid of them t
9. I am not afraid of them. 10. My books are already a little wet ;
I am going to put them before the fire. 11. Who is in the house
with John ? 12. George is there. 13. I am going to see him.
14. Why ? 15. Because I have his knife, and I wish to return it to
him. 16. Yon need not go {cTaller) to the house for that ; they
are coming here in a moment. 17. Well, I remain here. 18. Have
{aj/ez) the goodness to put my books on the table. 19. I am going
to put them before the fire if yon wish it. 20. I thank yon ; but
they are not very wet. 21. Well, I am going to put them in the
5nn.
22. Lend me a pen. 23. 1 have none. ^24. Who has onet
25. No one here ; all the pens are in that room, and Mr. B. has
the key. 26. Have you not a pencil ? 27. I have none, but
George has one./ 28. I am going for it {le chercker).
45.— quaiiante.cinquiJ:me LEgON.
ITEST-CE PAS, PEBSOITNS, ETC.
To drinkf drinking, drunk, Boire, buvant, bu^ e.
JthoU, tuJxH*, Uhoil, notuhuvoM, wusbuveg, {l8hoi9€nt,
I drink, thoa diinkest, ho drinks, we drink, yon drink, they drink.
To translate, Traduire (yaried as Conduire, Lea. 84).
To vHiitfor, expect, expecting, expected, Attendre, attendant, aitendu, e.
To lose, losing, lost. Perdre, perdant, perdu, e.
To hear, hearing, heard. Entendre, entendant, entendu, e.
1. These last three verbs foUow the model of the fourth coz^agation, Lesson 84 When
the InflnitiTe only of a verb is giycn hereafter. It Is to be understood that It follows the reg^
vlar model of Its coi^agatlon.
VAscDxnrK.
FKXXKISS.
The salt, A line.
LQsel.
TJne ligne.
A ribbon. Easy,
TJn rtiian.
FaciU.
Next (approaching).
Prochain.
Proehaine.
A month. Geography,
Un mois.
La geographic.
Long (in time). Some time.
Longtemps.
Quelque temps.
Difficult. Is it not f does Unotf etc.
Difficile.
K'est'cepasf
8. IPest-ccpas^ at the end of an affirmation, like is it not, does U not, etc, la English,
makes it interrogatlTO.
This geography lesson is difBcuIt, is Cette le^on de g^ographie est difficile,
it not? n'est-ce pas ?
aoais aoconnneao i »» is i s s i
boir«, ba-vant, bols, boil ba-von«, ba-vesL holv&rtt, tra-doirtf, at-tendre, a/-ten-dan^ af-
s at rsrai s ss * s s stsu as lu
ten-du, perdr«, per-dani!, jper-dn. en-tendr«, en-ten-dan^ en-ten-da, sel, llgntf, m-ban, &-cll^
pro-chain, pro-chain«, moi», ge-o-gra-pbl*, \0ng-iemp9, n'est-ea paa.
THE FORTY-FIFTH LESSON. 167
Tliat man drinkamuch wine ; does he Get homme bolt beauconp de Tin,
not ? n*e8t-ce pas ?
You are waiting for the return of jour Vous attendez le retour de tos pa-
rclations ; are you not ? rents, n^est-ce pas ?
Those scholars do not translate French Ces ^coliers ne traduissent pas bien le
well; do they? ^ fran^ais, n*e8t-ce pas ?
I hear the noise of the thunder. .Tentends le bruit du tonnerre.
To rtturru To have retumedy to be back. Jievenir. Mire de retour.
Oar neighbor has returned home. Notre volsin est de retour chez lui.
Perfectly. Intimately. Parfaitement. IrUimement,
On ity there on. Under it, there under. Deseue. Dessotu,
To recite. He recites well. Reciter. H recite bien.
Next year. Van prochain. Vannee prochaine.
7%at. He says that it rains. (^ (conj.). H dit qu^il pleut.
S. We hare seen (Leeeoii 82) iXisXperwnne withont % Torb, or with ne before the verb,
means nobody. With a rerb and withont ne, it means any body^ any one. It is always
maaeoline sinpalar. Withont ne^ and with an article or demonstratiTO adjective, however,
it is a feminine nonn, and means per«on (Lesson 44).
Does any one desire to do that ? Personne ddsire-t-il faire c^a ?
Nobody desires to do it. Personne ne d^Bire le faire.
TTiis person desires to do it. Cette personne desire le faire.
4. No one^ in a general sense eqairalent to nobody. Is personne / meaning not one of a
number reibrred to, Is aueun.
1 know no one here. Je ne connais personne ici.
I know no one of those gentlemen. Je ne connais aucun de ces messieurs.
I bare none of your books. Je n*ai aueun de tos livres.
I haTe translated that whole page. J'ai traduit cette page entidre.
1. Voyez-vous les lignes sur ce papier? 2. Je les vois. 3. Per-
dez-Toas TOS paraplaies ? 4. Je les perds soaTent. 5. Buvez-Tons
de ce vin-ci ou de celui-lA I 6. Nous buTons de celui-ci et notre
ami boit de eelai-l4. 7. Nons ^tudions les regies de rarithmetique.
8. Je doute de rhonneur de cet homme. 9. Qui attendez-Tous t
10. J'attends la cuisiniere, et la cuisini^re attend la seirante. 11.
Tradoisez ce liTre frangais. 12. Traduisez-le. 13. £tudie ta g6-
ographie. 14. Cette dame a les yeux bleus et la peau tr6s-blaiiche.
15. Sait-il, lui, que je desire le Toirl 16. Combien demois font un an
(une ann^) ? 17. Douze mois font une annee (un an). 18. Le fran-
^ais connait intimement Totre fr^re. 19. Apportez-moi le sel. Don-
nez-moi le ruban. 20. Votre legon est-elle facile ? 21. EUe est bien
facila 22. Bestez-Tous ici longtemps ? 23. Non, monsieur, je pars
aprto-demain. 24* Combien de lignes recitez-Tous bienf 25. Je
4 1S4 18 17 Slilt S4lt4 18 5aS«Sl«
TCYe-nir, re-tonr, par-fUte-men/, in-tlme-menC, de«-su«, de«-sou«, re-cl-tor, an, an-ne«,
4 I? M
k«!, aa-cun.
168 THE FORTY-FIFTH LESSON.
recite parfaitement bien nne page entire. 26. Mettes-vons votre
chapeau snr la table on dessoos ? 27. Je ne le mets ni dessus ni
dessoos. 28. Yotre fr6re compte-t-il revenir toat de suite ? 29.
II est de retour k present.
1. Do yon drink tea or coffee 1 2. 1 drink coffee and my sisters
drink tea. 3. I know the doctor, and I know that he is a man of
wit. 4. Are you waiting for any one ? 5. I am waiting for the
return of my brother. 6. Your brother has returned. 7. Do you
sometimes lose your money ? 8. I never lose it. 9. Do you hear
what I say t 10. I hear it perfectly. 11. How many lines do those
scholars translate ? 12. They translate all the lines of that page.
13. I know that that man is intimately acquainted with your father.
14. Does your brother return home often ? 15. He returns very
often. 16. He has returned now. 17. Are the lessons easy or
difficult? 18. Our lessons are difficult, but the one of that lazy
little one is very easy.
19. Have you bought the blue ribbons ? 20. I have bought them.
21. Have you recited your lesson well? 22. I recited it perfectly
well. 23. Did you translate all the lines of that page? 24. 1 trans-
lated them all. 25. I intend to go out in a moment. 26. Give
me the salt. 27. Bring me the ribbons. Show them to me. 28.
Do not show them to him. 29. Do you depart next week or next
month? 30. I depart day after to-morrow. 31. Is your hat on
the bench or under it ? 32. It is neither on it nor under it ; it is
here on the table. 33. Give me thy book. 34. Lend me your
knife. 35. Let us drink the coffee. 36. Bring me that box. Bring
it to me. 37. Carry it to her. 38. Do not carry it to them. 39,
Give it to us. 40. Let us take the potatoes to the cellar. 41. Let
us take some there. 42. Let us go to the church. 43. Let us go
there. 44. Has any one my book ? 45. No one has it. 46. You
know my father ; do you not ? 47. I know no one of your relations.
OPTIONAL EXERCISES.
1. Do you know any one of those gentlemen ? 2. No, sir, my
brother knows many persons (monde) here, but I know nobody and
nobody knows me. 3. Who takes you to school ? 4. Nobody ; I
go there alone. 5. Are you acquainted with none of the pupils f
6. Yes, I know them all. 7. Charles, lend me thy slate. 8. Yes»
certainly ; where is thine ? 9. It is full of writing. 10. Well, wash
it. 11. No, my friend. 12. Why not ? 13. Because it is the
THE FORTY-SIXTH LESSON.
169
vriting of my brother, and he has need of it 14. Well, mine is
there on the bench. 15. Hast thou need of a slate-pencil {crayon
tTardoise) t 16. Thank yon, I have one. 17. Show me the lesson in
(fife) arithmetic. 18. What have we to do? 19. We have this mle
to study. 20. That is not very diflScult. 21. What art thou
studying t 22. I am studying my lesson in geography, and I am
going to study my lesson in reading.
23. Which of all thy lessons dost thou like the best (fe mieux)y
John ? 24. That of geography. 25. Because that lesson is less
difficult than the others ; is it not 1 26. Yes, Charles ; dost thou
know any pupil who likes difficult lessons? 27. No, my little
friend ; children are a little lazy ; but thou hast not to study only
that which is easy. 28. No, I know it, I wish to study all ; but I
do not like what is too difficult. 29. Is thy father still in the coun-
try t 30. No, he has returned.
46.— quarante-sixiJ:me LEgON.
NEGATIVE WITH
To read, reading, read.
Je lU, iu /m, U Hi,
I read, thoa readest, he reads,
To write^ writingy written.
ricrU, tulcrU, iUerU,
I vrfte, t]ioa wrltest, he writes,
To sat/y Miying^ said,
J^dia, tudia, Udit,
1 saj, thoa Gayest, he says,
THE INFINITIVE, ETC.
Lire, liearU^ lu, e (fern.).
natu liaone, €ous lisea, tie lieent^
W6 read, you read, they read.
Ecrire, Scrtvant, Icrit.
notte ierivone^ vou» icrivea^ tie icritent^
we write, you write, they write.
DirCj dieant, dit.
nous dieons, vowi dUee,
we say, you say.
tiedUent,
they say.
MABCtTLITTE.
The credit. The tongue, language.
The prcfj. To he worth.
To 9eU, He sells wine.
The tool. Then.
That man is worth a hundred thousand
dollara
La langue,
Mre riche de.
ha credit.
Lo profit.
Vendre. II vend du tui.
VoutU. Alore, done.
Get homme est riche de cent mille dol>
lars.
1. Then^ an adrerb of time, is alora ; then, a conjanction of inference. Is dono.
I was at your house this morning, and
then I saw your brother.
My father is sick.
Then he does not go out at present.
To have the appearance of, to look.
J*ai 6t6 chez vous ce matin, et alo.M
j'ai vu votre frSre.
Mon p^re est malade.
Done il ne sort pas k pr6sent.
Avoir Fair {de).
»« n » n IS IS n n s is s is s i? s sue is » w ai s "
lire, U-£an«, 11«, Ut, ll-zoM, lizc», liz«n/, 6-crir«, 6-cri-van«, 6-crl«, 6-crl«, 6-crl-yon«, d-cri-
6 » w IS US n la u SI w« la « J?. ,^ ** ii2 *?«k-
T«s, 6^rirent, dire, di-zani, dIA dls, dl-«on«, di-zez, dizent, cr6-dW, langi**, pro-IW, rich*,
« IS n 1 u 71 r
rmdr'*, oo-til, a-Iort, done, air.
8
170 THE FORTT^XTH LESSON.
You look in good health. Toua avcz Tair d^etre en oonnc 9anU*
She looks in good humor. EUe a Tair de bonne humefur.
He looks in bad humor. II a Fair de mauvabe humeur.
That lady looks proud. Cette dame a Fair ficr.
% When an adjective following ae^r Tair moreljr cxpreaBes pAytieaZ 4aaIifloaU<»i8, it
Is made to agree with the subject; but when applied to a morai hcalty or mOapkifHcal
dlatinotlon, it most generally agreea with the word air. See page 489, 2a
That apple looks good. Cette pomme a Tair honne.
That lady looks good. Cette dame a Fair b<m.
That lady looks badly formed. Cette dame a Tair roal/oi/e.
8. We haye seen (Lesson 20, 7) that one yerb following another, and ezpraasing its ob-
Jeot, is put in the inflnltiye. This is often the case when the verbs in English are Joined by
a coijanotlon.
Come and read. Go and write. Venez lire. Allez 6crire.
Come and tell me thy name. Viens me dire ton nom.
4 When a negatiye belongs partieularly to the inflnltiye present, both parts (fte Km, ««
poM^ etc) are placed before the yerb.
They like to do nothing. Hs aiment k ne rien faire.
I wish not to write. Je desire ne pas dcriro.
He takes good care not to go to school. D a bien soin de ne pas aller A T^oole.
& ^ Is to be repeated before eyery inflnltiye depending on the same word or phiase.
I have something to study and recite. J^ai qnelque chose & ^tudier et k r6citer.
We like to read, write, and study. Nous aimons ik lire, &dcrire et iitudier.
1. Get 6picier a-t-il du credit? 2. H a du credit et du profit.
3. Combien de langaes le maitre parle-t-il ? 4. H parle parfaite-
ment Tanglais, le frangais et Tespagnol. 5. Ces marchandes ont Fair
bien gai. 6. Elles ont mdme Tair distingue, mais leors marchandises
ont Pair bien mauvaises. 7. Que vends-tu ? 8. Je ne vends rien,
mais cet ouvrier vend ses outils. 9. Sav^z-vous ce que dit cette
femme t 10. EUe dit que son fils sait parfaitement le fran^ais.
11. Je connais intimement son fils, et je dis qn'il sait parfaitement
le frangais et I'espagnoL 12. II est riche de soixantc mille dollars.
13. Lis-tn ce livre frangais ? 14. Je ne le lis pas, mais mon frdre le
lit et mes soeurs le lisent aussL 15. £cris-tu beaucoup de lettres t
16. J'en 6cris beaucoup. 17. Dites-vous qu'il pleut ? 18. Je dis
qu'il pleut 19. Vous avez Pair d'etre malade ; etes-vous en bonne
sant^t 20. Je suis un pen malade. 21. Pourquoi cet eleve a-t-il
Tair de mauvaise humeur t 22. Parce qu'il trouve sa legon unpeu
difficile. 23. Quand avez-vous 6crit vos lettres? 24. Je les ai
6crites avant hier.
1. What languages do you speak ? 2. I speak English and
French. 3. Which language do you like the best {le mieux) t 4.
THE FORTY-SIXTn LESSON. 171
It is the English. 5. Has tliat merchant profit ? 6. He has nei-
ther profit nor credit. 7. Is he not rich 1 8. Yes, sir, he is worth
two hundred thousand dollars. 9. What is that workman selling?
10« He is selling his tools. 11. Do you read the letters which we
write? 12. We read them. 13. Do the scholars write letters to
their friends ? 14. They write some to them. 15. What do you
sayl 16. We say that it rains. 17. Do those children tell you
their names ? 18. They tell them to us. 19. Tell me where is
your father ? 20. He is at home. 21. May (mat) is the fifth month
of the year ; is it not ? 22. It is the fifth. 23. That man loses his
money.
24. Do you hear the noise of the wind ? 25. Tes, sir, and I
hear the noise of the rain also. 26. That musician translates Span-
ish easily. 27. Does the doctor dwell near here {pr^s cTici) ? 28.
Xoy sir, he dwells near the market 29. That scholar is a little
lazy. 30. Then she does not like to study. 31. Do you read all
that the master writes? 32. I read it all. 33. Has that old lady
read the letters of her daughter ? 34. Yes, sir, she received them
this morning, and then she read them. 35. Have those children
told yon their names ? 36. They have not told them to me. 37.
Does any one know the name of that stranger ? 3 8. No one knows it
39. Have you read any one of these books ? 40. I have read none.
41. Do you intend to remain long in this village ? 42. No, sir, I
depart forthwith ; but my brother intends to remain here some time.
43. That scholar likes to do nothing. 44. 6o and look for your
copy-book. 45. Come and show me your writing.
OPnOXAL EXERCISES.
I. Do you see that young lady who is going to Madame B.'s ?
2. Yes, I see her. 3. Who is she I are you acquainted with her ?
4. She is the sister of Charles ; I see her sometimes at church. 5.
She lives near our house, and she comes to see my mother frequent-
ly. 6. What is her name ? 7. Her name is Mary (Marie) ; do you
wish to make her acquaintance (sa connaissance) ? 8. With much
pleasure. 9. Well, one evening of this week I am going to take
you to see her. 10. I thank you much.
II. George {Georges), what hast thou in that bag? 12. They
are apples, sir ; will you have one ? 13. No, thank you ; but where
didst thou find so (de ai) beautiful apples? 14. At the house of our
gnx:er, where my father sends me to buy some sometimes. 15.
They are superb ; I am going to buy some also. 16. Where does
172 THE FORTY-SEVENTH LESSON.
your grocer live t 17. On Boyal-street, near the market ; if you
are not acquainted with the place, I am going to conduct you there.
18. Hast thou the time to {de) go there t 19. 0, yes, I have noth-
ing to do. 20. Thank thee, my friend, thou art very good.
21. The scholars recite their lessons perfectly to-day ; they are
not lazy. 22. Generally (gin^alement) you do not stay here long ;
do you intend to depart tne day after to-morrow ? 23. I intend to
depart next month. 24. Do you always put your mnhrella on the
table ? 25. I do not put it on it, I put it under it. 26. Why does
the Spaniard look in ill humor ? 27. Because he is not in good
health.
47.— QUARANTE-SEPTlfiME LEgON.
FUTUKE TENSE.
1. TnB FimrM of French rerbs Is formed from tho Infinitive bj the following general
rale : Change b final of tho Jlrst and second coi^ugations, oir of tho thirds and r« of the
/(KtrtK, Into tho terminations,
RAI, RA8, RA, RONS, RXZ, EOKT.
FIRST CONJUGATION. AIMEU, TO LOVE.
J^aimerait tuaimercu^ ilaimera^ nous aimeront, wms ainurea, Usaimerfmi,
I shall love, thou wilt love, ho will lovo, wo shall love, yon will love, they will love.
SECOND CONJUGATION. FIXIR, TO FINISH.
Jtfinirai^ tujinirat^ iljinira, novsjlniron*, vowtjlnirea^ ilsjlnir&nt^
1 shall finish, thoa wilt, etc., he will, etc., we shall, etc, yon will, etc, they will, etc.
TDIED CONJUGATION. BECEVOIR, TO RECEIVE.
J6 reoevrai, tu rec&tras^ il rtcevra, noua reeevrons, rout recevrn, iU r^t^ront^
I shall receive, thou wilt, etc., he will, etc, we shall, etc., you will, etc, they will, etc
FOURTH CONJUGATION. BENDRE, TO RESTORE.
J6 rendrai^ tu nmdraa^ il rendra, nous rendrons, rous rendrea^ ils rendront,
I shall give back, thou wilt, etc, ho will, etc, wo shall, etc, yon will, etc, they will, etc
2. Avoia, to have, and Atrb, to be, have tho future Irregular.
J^aurai, tu auras, il aura, nous aurons, rous aurta. Us atiront,
I shall have, thou wilt, etc, he will, etc, wo shall, etc, you will, etc, they will, etc
Je serai, tuseras, ilsera, nous serons, Tousserea, Usseront,
I shall be, thou wilt be, he will be, we shall be, you will be, they will be.
There are a few other verbs (fonrtoen) whoso futures vary slightly from tho above n.l. .
These will be noted hereafter.
Will the scholars love the master? Lcs dcoliers oimeront-ils le maitrc?
They will love him. lis roimcront.
When will you finish your exercises? Quand finirez-vous vos themes?
shall finish them this evening. Nous les fiuirons ce soir.
^'V. thou receive thy letters to-mor- Recevras-tu tcs lettres domain ?
rHw?
^"fe shi
7> 61 in «n TaM844 «s «ic« «
•injdvrai, ns, ra, ron«, rea, ron<, fi-ni-rai, ro-cev-ral, ren-dral, au-rai, se-raU
\
THE FORTY-SEVENTH LESSON. 173
I fiball receive them day after to-mor^ Je les recevrai aprte-demun.
row.
The gentleman will give back to you Monsieur yous rendra Totre argent
your money.
I shall be at your house to-morrow. Jc serai cbez youa dcmain.
We shall hare our money next week. Nous aurons notre argent la semaine
prochaine.
S. Alter adyerbs of Ume, whero the English employ other tenses for the ftiture, the
French employ the fatore; bat after «i condltioxuU, they use the present
When I kave my money I shall be rich. Quand/aurat mon argent jc serai riche.
When we have time we will write. Quand nous aurons le temps nous ^cri-
rons.
He win read when he has books. H lira quand il aura des livrcs.
If I see him I will speak to him. Si je le vols je lui parlerai.
In all the abore verbs the meaning Is fatnre, and in French the ftitare Is nsed in all
except the one following ^ it
4 Si^ meaning whether^ is followed in sach cases by the future.
I do not know whether he sets otU to- Jc no sals sMl partira demain.
morrow.
Do you know whether wc recite this SaTez-TOUs si nous r^iterons co soir ?
cTcning ?
& A fatore event, which is near, Is sometimes expressed, in French as in English, by
the preeenL
He arriTes this eyening. H arrive ce soir.
He departs to-morrow. II part dcmain.
1. Aimeras-ta tes lemons? 2. Je les aimerai toutes. 3.
Aimerez-vons vos amis t 4. Nous les aimerons. 5. Sortiras-tu ce
matin? 6. Non, mon ami, je sortirai ce soir. 7. Les enfants
sortiront-ils ce soir? 8. lis ne sortiront pas anjourd'hui. 0.
Quand recevrez-vous votre argent? 10. Nous le recevrons le mois
prochain. 11. Les negociants recevront-ils le leur demain? 12.
Oni, monsienr, et le capitaine recerra le sien apr^s-demain. 13. Ou
mettrez-vous vos mouchoirs? 14. Je les mettrai dans ce tiroir.
15. 0\i les ouvriers mettront-ils leurs outils ? 16. Us les mettront
sur le banc. 17. Nous mettrons nos livres sur le pupitre ; oik met-
tras-tu lea tiens? 18. Je les mettrai dans mon tiroir. 19. Aurez-
yons beanconp d'argent demain ? 20. Je n'en aurai pas beaucoup.
21. Qnand les 6coliers auront-ils leurs livres? 22. lis les auront
tout k rhenre. 23. Vos amis seront-ils ici demain ? 24. Us seront
ici anjonrd'hui. 25. Serez-vous chez vous ce soir ? 26. J'y serai
et mon firere j sera anssi 27. Quand je serai d New York, je vous
ecriraL 28. Si je reste k Boston, je vous le dirai.
174 THE FORTY-SEVENTH LESSON.
1. When will yon have your money ? 2. I slmll have it the
day after to-morrow. 3. When wilt thou be in New York ? 4. I
shall be there next month. 5. When shall we have some fruit t
6. We shall have some next week. 7. Where will the general be
next month ? 8. He will be in the city. 9. Where will his sons
be then ? 10. They will be there also. 11. My father will have
his money the day after to-morrow ; will you have yours then also ?
12. I shall not have mine this year. 13. That trader has no
money. 14. Then he will have neither profit nor credit 15. Will
your brother go out this evening? 16. No, sir, he will remain at
home. 17. When will your relations receive your letters? 18.
They will receive them next week. 19. Will you put on your
cloak? 20. I shall put it on if I am cold.
21. What does that lazy scholar like to do? 22. She likes to
do nothing. 23. Will not the cook be pleased when she has that
large fish? 24. She will be much pleased. 25. Where will you
be to-morrow? 26. I shall be at school. 27. Will you have your
money when we have ours ? 28. I do not know when you will
have yours ; but we shall have ours day after to-morrow. 29. Then
you will have yours very soon {bientot). 30. Where is George ?
31. Is he not in the yard? 82. No, no one of the boys is thera
33. John is there. 34. No, no one is there. 35. They are in the
house. 36. Well, I am going there. 37. Have you bought the
countryman's horses? 38. I have not bought them yet, but I shall
buy them to-morrow.
OmONAL EXERCISES.
1. Will you give back to John this knife, and bring me my
book which is on my table ? 2. I wish to write my exercises, I
forget them sometimes ; do you never forget yours ? 3. No, never.
4. Does your brother ever forget his? 6. Yes, sometimes, but not
often. 6. George, pick up your books and put them on the table.
7. K you know your lesson, come and recite it. 8. I know mine,
but my brother does not yet know his. 9. Well, cojne and recite
yours; how many lines do you know? 10. I know a page. 11.
Well, very well, you are not lazy to-day. 12. Give me the book.
13. I have it not 14. Where is it ? 15. Charles has it. 16. Go
and look for it 17. Charles, give me my book; I am going to re-
cite my lesson. 18. Lend it to me still a little. 19. I have need
of it; Mr. A. wishes for it. 20. Well, take (preriez) it.
21. Well, George, hast thou thy book? 22. Yes, sir. 23.
Give it to me and show me the lesson. 24. It is this one. 25.
THE FORTY-EIGHTH LESSON. 175
Very well, recite it. 26. Thou knowest it perfectly ; go {va) and
write thy exercise. 27. Let (laissez) me carry this book to Charles,
if you please. 28. Yes, carry it to him ; but has he not his ! 29.
No, sir, his is at home. 30. Tell him that he will soon (bientdt)
recite his lesson. 31. Permit (permetiez) me to go for ((Taller
chercker) some water. 32. Yes, if you wish for some. 83. Let
John go (venir) with me, if you please. 34. Yes, go, but do not
stay long. 35. We will be back soon.
48.— QUARANTE-HUITlfiME LEgON.
niEEOULAR FUTURES. DX BEFOBE THE mFINITIVE.
1. AlUr, to go, and envaper^ to send, have the fatore irregular.
J^irai, tu{ra9, ilira, fums irons, vousirtz^ Utiront,
lehallgo, thoawiltgo, bo trill go, ure shall go, you will go, thojwiUgo.
J^enverrai, tu envemUt il enterra, nous eniferrona, €<nu enverrez, iU enverront,
I shall send, thoa wilt, etc., he will, etc, we shall, etc., 70a will, etc., they will, etc.
Win joa go to the city to-morrow ? Irez-vous d la ville demain ?
I shall go there. J'irai.
2. Fis always omitted before the (titore and conditional of aller for euphony.
My brother will
go there also.
Mon frire ira aussi.
We shall not go
there.
Nous n'irons
pas.
Wilt thou send]
me ten dollars?
M^enverras-tu dix dollars ?
I will send them to thee.
Je te les envcrrai.
ifA80Trx.xys.
The pomr.
The health.
Le pouvoir.
La sant^.
The taste.
Good ht$nwr.
he gout.
La honne humeur.
The minister.
Ill hamor.
Le ministre.
La mauvaise humeur.
A kingdom.
The company.
Un royaume.
La compagnie.
Latin,
Latin,
Latine.
Greek.
Orec.
Orecque,
The cheese. To taste of.
Le frontage.
Avoir le gout de.
To bcatj heating^ beaten.
Battre,
battant, battu, e.
S. Batire is rarlod In the present like metire (Lesson 80).
To take, taking, taken. Prendre, prenant, pris, e.
Jzprendt, tuprendu, Uprend, nousprenons, vousprenez, Ueprennent^
I take, thou takest, he takes, we take, you take, they take.
Jb recognize. To learn. Reeonnaitre. Apprendre (d bef, inf.).
4. Meeonnatlre and apprendre, compounds of eonnattre and prendre, are xaried like
them. Compounds generally follow the form of their simples.
n « s 7 « M )« I • 19 ta n is i9 901217 n 1 u
i-rai, cn-ver-ral, pou-volr, san-te, god*, hu-mour, ml-nlstr«, ro-yaum«, com-pa-gni^
1 14 1 J« » ^ i» 1 r 1 « I sa » , 4 » la »
la-tio, la-tin«, grcc, grecka, tro-mage, battr«, hoi-t&ni, ba/-tu, prendre, pre-nan<, prl«,prena^
s 4 3 4 • i 4 u 7 1 « ^
prcn<f, pre-non^, pre-nea, prennsn/, re-co»-naltr«, a/>-prondra.
176 THE FORTY-EIGHTH LESSON.
To comprehend, Comprendre (compounded of prendre),
WUlitrainf It will rain. Pleuvra-UU ? II pleuvra.
Several, Several men. Plusieurs, Plusieurs hommes.
That soup tastes good. Cette soupe a bon goftt.
It tastes of pepper. Elle a uu goUi de poivre.
Who beats the little boy ? Qui bat le petit gar^on?
The workmen beat him because he Les ouyriers le battent parco qull
takes their tools. prend leurs outils.
What do you learn ? Qu'apprenez-Yous?
I learn to read the Latin language. J'apprends k lire la langue latine.
Do you recognize your old friend ? Rcconnaissez-vous votre vieil ami ?
I recognize him. , Je Ic reconnais.
6. We bare seen (Lesson 41) that some verbs and pbrmses require d before a following
InllnltiTe, and tbat others reqnire no preposition. There are some verbs and phrases also
which reqnire de. Dire and ovhlier^ already given, taice de before the following inilnitlvew
Bach words will be marked, as they are given hereafter, by the abbreviation {de be£ izi£>.
He tells me to do that. H me. dit de faire cela.
He forgets to read the letter. II oublie de lire la lettre.
1. Oil iras-tu ? 2. J'irai k la riviere, et mes fibres iront cbez
euz. 3. Cette homme a Tair de mauvaise humeur ; est-il malade ?
4. Nod, monsieur, il est en bonne 8ant6. 5. Que prenez-Tons t 6.
Je prends mes livres. 7. Apprenez-vous k lire la langue latine t
8. J'apprends k lire la langue latine et la grecque. 9. Le ministre
n*a ni credit ni profit 10. Ou irez-yous demaint 11. J'irai a la
campagne. 12. Apprenez-vous k lire la langue espagnole? 13.
J'apprends a la lire et k I'^crire. 14. Apprends-tu la langue
grecque f 15. Je I'apprends. 16. Le ministre a^t-il du pouvoirf
17. n n'a ni pouvoir ni argent 18. Est-ce que vous battez ce
cbien? 19. Je le bats. 20. Pleuvra-t-il aujourd'huit 21. Je
crois qu'il ne pleuvra pas. 22. Combien de rojaimies TEurope
comprend-elle ? 23. Elle en comprend plusieurs. 24. Le presi-
dent re^oit de la compagnie a la maison blanche ce soir. 25. Cet
Spicier a-t-il de bon fromagef 26. II n'a ni fromage ni beurre.
27. Reconnaissez-vous cet homme? 28. Oui, c'est le ministre de la
reine. 29. La France est un royaume riche et bien beau. 80. Le
general recevra de la compagnie demain.
1. Will your brother go to school to-morrow? 2. No, sir, he
will go to the city. 3. Will you not go there also ? 4. No, sir, I
shall go to my uncle's. 5. Will you send some money to that man ?
6. We shall send some to him. 7. Who will send these letters to
a • , • 1 ss nil
com-prendr^, pleav-ra, pla-zlear«.
THE FORTY-EIGHTH LESSON. 177
the general? 8. His friends will send them to him. 9. The
minister of the queen is not in good health. 10. This coffee tastes
good ; but that cake tastes of pepper. 11. What does jonr brother
l3am ? 12. He learns Latin and Greek. 13. Does that cheese
taste good 1 14. No, sir, it tastes of pepper. 15. Has the minis-
ter power T 16. He has much power ; he has also money; he is
worth sixty thousand dollars.
17. Dost thou beat the dog? 18. I beat him. 19. Does the
conntryman beat his horse? 20. He beats him. 21. What do
those children beat ? 22. They beat the ugly cat. 23. Do you
ever beat that child? 24. I never beat him. 25. Do you take
what I give you? 26. I take it. 27. What do those scholars
take ? 28. They take their slates and books. 29. Why do you
take your hats ? 30. We take them because we are going home.
31. Does that child comprehend what he reads? 32. He compre-
hends it perfectly. 33. Do you comprehend that history ? 34. I
comprehend it. 35. Why does that little boy look in ill humor ?
36. Because he does not comprehend what he studies. 37. Europe
comprehends several large kingdoms. 38. Dost thou recognize
thy friend ? 39. I recognize him. 40. We shall receive company
to-morrow. 41. Do you recognize your writing? 42. I recog-
nize it.
OPTIONAL EXERCISES.
1. John, come with me. 2. Where are you going ? 3. I am
going to the grocer's for (ckercker) some sugar. 4. 1 will go there
with you ; but let us not stay long. 5. No, I do not wish to stay
there- 6. Have you a bag? 7. I have two. 8. Give me one.
0. Take this one. 10. What will you ptlt in this bag? 11. I will
put some sugar in that one and some coffee in the other. 12. To
what grocer's are you going? 13. We will go to Mr. B.'s ; he has
a large store. 14. Do you sometimes go to his house? 15. Yes ;
I go there often ; my father sends me there when he has need of
something. 16. I never see you go there, 17. I often go there in
the morning.
18. Good morning {bovjour), Mr. B., my father sends me for
some sugar and some coffee. 19. Well, my friend, give me thy
bags. 20. How much sugar dost thou wish for? 21. Fill the bag.
22. What sugar does thy father wish for? 23. Some white sugar.
24. And how much coffee ? 25. Put ten pounds in this bag. 26.
Dost thou not wish for some cheese or some butter to-day ? 27.
No, sir, we have some still at our house. 28. I have some good
178 THE FORTY-NINTH LESSON.
cheese ; carry a piece of it to thj father, and tell him to taste it.
29. Have you some water? 30. Yes, I have some ; dost thoa ever
drink wine? 81. No, I never drink any, but I sometimes drink
beer.
40.— QUAUANTE-XEUVIfiME LEgON.
THE DfDEFlNITE PKONOUN OX.
One, they, tee, people. On,
1. On, thongb it may sometimes luiro a feminine or a plaral Agreeing wiUi it, Is general-
ly mascniino Bingulor. It ia used when no definite antecedent is referred to.
What do they say in yotir village ? Que dit-on dans votre village ?
They say that the president is here. On dit que le president e5t ici.
2. Where the English employ the passivo verb iritboat an agent, the French employ-
on with the active.
It is said that he is rich. On dit qu^il est riche.
It ii believed. They arc heard. On croit. On les entend.
3. L'on is often used for onphony in prcforcnco to on after the words el, ou, oft, que^ qui,
qual, «i, and some otlicrs, unless it bo immediately followed hy le,la, les, iui, or other
words beginnln;; with /. Von is never used in an interrogation, bat when on follows a verb
ending with a vowel, a euphonic t is placed before it
I know the country where they find Je connais le pays oil Ton trouve de
gold. Tor.
We cannot always do what we wish. On nc pent pas toujours faire ce quo
Von veut.
Is gold found in California? Trouve-/-on de Tor en California?
IIASCULIKE. FEMnnHB.
The bodt/. The steam, vapor. Le corps. La vapeur.
New, novel. Nouveau, nouvel. Nouvelle.
4. Nowaeau becomes noutel before a vowel or a silent K (See Note, Lessoa 10.)
^>i^ means newly made, or obtained ; nouveau, new in kind.
I have seen the new work. J'ai vu le nouvel ouvragc.
I have bought a new hat. J'ai achetd un chapeau neuf.
His (or her) duty. Swift.
Each one, every one.
Low.
Good, property. The expense.
JUvil, harm. Expenses, cofit.
The neck. Fain.
5. P^penSy expense, Is always m.iscnlino plurat
At the expense of others. Aux dopcns d^autrui.
& Auirui, others, other pcopl<*, is used only after prepositions.
31 IC 1 11 IS 6 4 -.0 V\ 1 34 1 n S 5 3 t > M4
on, coriM, va-p«nr, nou-vcl, de-voir, rit«, cha-cun, cha-cun«, sec, svchd, baa, basM, bien,
B s T« 18 n 7 17 '.-:ii
de-ponse, tor^, dou-Iour, pein^, au-trui.
Son devoir.
r%te.
Chacun.
Chacune.
Sec.
Seche.
Bos.
Basse.
Le bien.
La depense.
Le mat, tort.
Les depenses.
Le cvu.
La douleur, peine.
THE FORTY-NINTH LESSOK. 179
The/dce. Le visage. LAjiffure,
J*teeum$. Pricieux. FrScieute.
SwoUen, tweUed. Enfik, Enflee,
From street to street. T\\^ figure, De rue en rue. La taille.
To undertake. Entreprendre (comp. of prendre},
7. Whi^ referring to place, and following a preposition, is commonly rendered bjr ott.
The TiUage in which yoa dwell. Le villago oh tous demeurez.
The dtj/rom which you come. La ville doH tous veoez.
The place to which yoa go. Le lieu ok tous allez.
The street 6y which you will go. La rue par oU tous irez.
What do you undertake ? Qu*est-ce que tous entreprenez ?
I undertake a great work. J*entrcprends un grand ouTrage.
I desire to do good to others. Je desire falro du bien & autrui (or
aux autres).
1. On dit que voire frere est malade. 2. On trouve beaoconp
d'or icL 3. On fait beaucoup de bearre dans ce village. 4. Cet
homme vit anx depens d*autmi. 5. Nous voulons faire dn bien &
autrui (aux autres). 6. Cet enfant a le visage sale. 7. Cet ani-
mal a le- corps long, il a aiissi lo pied enfle. 8. La 8ant6 est nn
bien trfes-precieux. 9. Ce voyageur entreprend-il quelque chose t
10. n entreprend un long voyage. 11. Qu'est-ce que vous entre-
prenez 1 12. Nous entreprenons un grand ouvrage. 13. L'avez-
vous entrepris seulst 14. Nous ne I'avons pas entrepris seuls. 15.
Qu'entreprennent ces messieurs? 16. lis n'entreprennent rien.
17. Ce monsieur vous a-t-Q fait du bien? 18. Non, monsieur, il
m'a fait du tort. 19. Ce monsieur est trop gros ; sa taille n'est
pas belle. 20. Je vois la vapeur de ce bateau. 21. Cet homme
vit de pain sec. 22. Ce banc est bas et cette chaise est basse
aussL 23. Avez-vous fait votre devoir? 24. Je I'ai fait. 25.
£crivez-vous vite? 26. Je n'ecris pas tres-vite. 27. J'ai achet6
nn chapeau neuf, et mon pdre m'a achet6 des bottes neuves. 28.
J*ai vu le nouvel ouvrage du docteur Jean. 29. Ce malade a le
ecu enflo, il a beaucoup de douleur.
1. What do they make in your village ? 2. They make hats
there. 3. That man is said to be rich. 4. Do you believe all that
they tell you ? 5. I do not believe all. 6. Are those cravats dry t
7. They are dry. 8. The gardener has some new fruit. 9. What
have you new? 10, I have some new books. 11, Do you desire
to do your duty ? 12. Yes, sir, each one desires to do his duty.
Ti-zag«, fl-gure, pr^-ci-euo*, pr*-ci-ou«, t-n-fl.', en-flce, tauw, en-trc-prenard.
180 THE FORTY-NINTH LESSON.
13. I have some new horses; have you seen them! 14. I have
seen them. 15. I shall always desire to do my dnty. 16. What
do they do at your house ? 17. They read and study much there.
18. Have you seen the doctor's new works ? 19. I have not seen
them. 20. Are the streets dry! 21. They are very dry.
22. Is the river high or low ? 23. It is very low. 24. Do you
see the vapor on the river t 25. I see it. 26. This chair is low,
and that bench is low also. 27. Does each one sometimes forget
his duties ? 28. Each one forgets them sometimes. 29. Do yoa
live at the expense of others 1 30. I live at the expense of my
father. 31. Do you wish evil to any one! 32. Do you wish to do
harm to any one ? 33. I wish to do evil to no one ; I wish to do
good to every body. 34. What is the matter with you ? 35. My
face and my neck are inflamed. 36. Take good care of your
health, for (car) it is very precious. 37. Does not that young girl
read fast? 38. She reads too fast. 39. That lady's figure is very
beautiful. 40. Have you learned your lesson? 41. I have not
learned it yet, but I shall learn it this evening.
OPTIONAL EXERCISES.
1. Which way are you going? 2. I am going by (par) the
lake. 3. Come this way, sir. 4. Gro that way, my friend. 5.
Are you acquainted with Dr. B. ? 6. Yes, sir ; he is a good old
man whom misfortune has made wise. 7. What is the matter with
you ? you look sick. 8. I am not sick, but in bad humor. 9. But
why? 10. I need to (de) go out, and it is going to rain. 11. It
will not rain much. 12. It rains already, and I had the fever last
week. 13. It is unfortunate ; but why have you to go out? 14. I
have some money to give to Mr. Richard, and he has need of it to-
day. 15. You have no need to (de) go out for (pour) that. 16.
I ^all go to his house this morning, and if you wish it, I am going
to carry it to him. 17. Thank you ; you do (rendes) me a great
service. 18. It is no great thing {grand" chose). 19. It is a ser-
vice which you render me, and for which I thank you much.
20. Were you long sick ? 21. No, I had the fever only two
days ; but my physician tells me not to {de) go out when it rains.
22. He is right ; if you do not take care of your health, you will
be sick again. 23. I intend to stay in (d) the house during {pen-
dant) a few days. 24. Have you had news from your brother
lately {dcrni^ement)^ 25. I had some last week ; he is at New
York. 2G. When does he intend to return ? 27. Next week.
28. Charles, lend me a cord, if you please. 29. What will
you do with it ? 30. I will go and put it on the garden-door. 31.
THE FIFTIETH LESSON.
181
Take this which is on iMa plank, if it is good. 32. Thank yon ; I
am going to pnt it on the door. 33. Have yon seen John ? 34.
Yes, sir ; he is in the garden. 35. Tell him to come here, and
send me your hammer and a few hig nails.
50.— CINQUANTItME LEgON.
IMPERFECT TENSK
1. Tbe imperfect tonae Is formed from the present participle, bj changing Am into
the folloirii^ terminations:
AIS,
AIS, AIT,
IONS, lEZ,
AIEKT.
(
' Jeparlals,
Uparlait,
vousparHsM,
Parlani,
1 I was speaking,
he was speaking.
you were speaking.
speaking.
1 tuparlaU^
nous parlions.
Us parlaietU,
1
, thott wast speaking.
we were speaking
they were speaking.
/
' JerecetaU,
U reeevaU,
tons recwieSf
Reeetfont, ]
1 I was receiving.
he was receiving.
you were receiving.
receiving.
I iurecevaU^
funis recevians^
its reesvaUnt^
, thou wast receiving;
we were receiving.
they were receiving.
2. Avoir and satoir,, the only exceptions, have the imperfect thus:
J^aeais,: tuataiSy Ucnait^ nous avians, vous<H}ies, Usataieni,
I had, thou badst, he had, we had, you had, they had.
Jesatais, tu savais^ ilsavait, nous savionSy wmssavisa, iissavaienty
I knew, - tUou knewest, he knew, we knew, you knew, they knew.
8. This ten^o always denotes continuous past action. When, therefore, any thing Is
q»ken of as onco done and finished, without denoting continuance, this tense is not to be
aaed.
dceron itait un grand orateiar,
Washington etait un grand homme.
Nous avions beaucoup de fruit quand
nous demeurums k la campagne.
Je eherchais mon canif ct yai trouvs
mon crayon.
Bo
C^ero was a great orator
WashiogtOQ was a great man.
We had macb ihut when we lived in
the country.
I was looking for my penknife and I
found my pencil.
We here see that where continuous past action is implied, the imperfect is used.*
the following.
You were reading (continuous) while
I WAS writing (continuous).
They were (continuous) here when wo
saw (not continuous) them.
He had (continuous) the horses when
I bought (not continuous) them.
Yous lisiez pendant que yierivais.
Us iiaient ici quand nous les avons
vus.
II avait les chcvaux quand je les at
achetis.
• WasbinKton continued to bo a preat man, Cicero continued to be a preat orator, but
the finding of tbe pencil denotes no continuance ; it is therefore not in the imperfect, but in
the past indefinite.
1 T 7 fn »^6 T 4 4 y 1 T 1 T
por-lals, Ulf, lion*, lies, Ment, re-ce-vals, a-val«, Ka-val*.
182 THE FIFTIETH LESSON.
She was (continiioas) at your house Elle Uait chez tous quand je Tai en-
when I beard (not continaotis) tendue chanter.
her sing.
acASCULDnc FKxraKK.
The f Off. The season. Le brouUlard. Jjbl saison.
A barber. A task. Un barbier. Une tdche.
During. While. Pendant. Pendant que.
To play. A spot. Jouer. . Une taehe.
While I was playing. Pendant que jc jouais.
As ffood bread, as good flour. D''aussi bon pain, d*au9si bonne farine.
As ffood as. As rich as. Aussi bon que. Aussi riche que.
To weep. To mouni^ go up, ascend. Pleurer. Monter.
To laugh (at), laughing, laugJied. Eire (de), riant, ri (irregular).
Jerts, turit, Urii, nousrions^ wusriee^ ilsrient,
Ilaagh, thoa langbest, he langba, we laugh, yoaUagfa, theylaagh.
Do you laugh at that ? Riez-vous de cela ?
I laugh at it. J'en ris.
During this month. Pendant cc mois.
Hare you money still ? ATez-vous encore (toujours) de
Targent ?
I have no more. Je n'en ai plus.
1. £taifl-iu k Paris quand mon frere y etaitf 2. Je n'y etais
pas. 3. Tu travaillais pendant que je jouais. 4. lis jouaient pen-
dant que vous 6tudiiez. 5. Jouez-vous beaucoup ? 6. Je joue quel-
quefois, mais non pas beaucoup. 7. Pleurez-vous quelquefois T 8.
Je ne pleure pas souvent. 9. Ne riiez-vous pas pendant que nous
pleurions ? 10. Nous ne riions pas. 11. Que faisiez-vous ce matin
pendant que je ILsais t 12. J'ecrivais une lettre. 13. Cethomme
avait-il beaucoup d'amis quand il ^tait jeune ? 14. H en arait bean-
coup. 15. Ou alliez-yous ce matin quand je tous ai vn dans la rnet
16. J'allais chez mon oncle. 17. Votre frere voulait-il ses liTres
quand il 6tait k la campagnet 18. U les voulait. 19. £coutiez-
Yous Torateur hier pendant qu'il parlait ? 20. Nous Tecoutions, et
nos freres T^coutaient aussi. 21. Fourquoi avez-vous ri de cet
hommet 22. Paice qu'il n*a pas de chapeaa 23. Montez-vous
souvent dans votre chambre 1 24. J'y monte souvent. 25. Avez-
vous fini votre tdche? 26. Je Tai finie. 27. Le brouillard est 6pai8
ce matin. 28. Le barbier va k la ville, ou il restera tonte la saison.
29. Avez-vous dans votre magasin d'aussi belle farine que ceile-ci t
30. J*en ai de meilleure.
ui r3iii3ft9 IS laci ten* IS
broall-lard, stl-son, bar-bier, tftoha, pon-dant; Joc-er, tach«. plea-rer, mon-ter, riM.
ri-ant, ri«, rit^ ti-ons, ii«««» lient.
TH£ FIFTIETH LESSON. 183
1. Wast thou stadying when the master spoke to theet 2. I
was stadying my French lesson. 3. To whom were you speaking
this morning when the boy gave you your letters ? 4. We were
speaking to our cousins. 5. Have you looked for your pens ? 6.
We were looking for them when the master spoke to us. 7. Were
vour brothers coming here when we saw them this morning ? 8.
No, they were going to the river. 9. What wast thou doing when
thy father spoke to theet 10. I was holding the horses of my
brother. 11. Will not your father laugh if he sees that work ?
12. He will laugh. 13. Will you not weep if you lose your money?
14. I shall not weep. 15. Will you go up to your room when the
barber is here t 16. I shall go up to it. 17. Have you already
finished your task ? 18. 1 have not yet finished it.
19. Is your task easy 1 20. It is very easy. 21. What is that
scholar doing 1 22. He is making spots on his book. 23. Were
you playing when you received my letter ? 24. I was not playing,
I was reading the newspaper. 25. You will stay here during all
the week ; will you not 1 26. I shall stay here during all the sea-
son. 27. Have you as good butter as this ? 28. I have some bet-
ter. 29. What made those spots on your paper ? 30. That little
boy made them. 31. Is it foggy (fait-il du brouillard) ? 32. Yes,
sir, the fog is very thick. 33. Were you listening while the orator
was speaking? 34. I was listening. 35. Which season do you
like ? 36. I like all the seasons. 37. Will you go to the north
before the beautiful season ? 38. I shall not go there this year.
39. Had you much money when you bought that horse ? 40. I had
not much
OPTIONAL EXERCISES.
1. Have you seen Joseph this morning? 2. Yes, sir, he is com-
ing. 3. I am going into the garden, if you have no need of me.
4. No, go there, if that pleases you ; have you done any thing in
the garden this morning? 5. I have done nothing there yet ; I am
going to work there. 6. If you find some beautiful roses there, bring
me a few. 7. I saw some roses and some jonquils, and I am going
to bring you some. 8. Had you many friends when yon lived in
(d) Paris ? 9. We had many. 10. What wast thou doing this
morning while we were playing? 11. I was studying my lesson.
12. Were you not reading while we were studying? 13. No, we
were writing our exercises. 14. Have those scholars finished their
tasks ? 15. They have finished them. 16. What has made those
black spots on those white stockings ? 17. That little child made
184 THE FIFTT-FIBST LESSON.
them with ink. 18. Has not that workman labored much ! 19.
He has labored daring the whole night 20. Have you seen my
new house? 21. I have not seen it, but I have been told that it is
large and beautiful.
51.— CINQUANTE ET UNlfiME LEQON.
NOUNS COMPOUNDED WITH A AND DK
1. When an infinitive depending on ft verb has ft penonal prononn for lU olject, the
pronoan is geneiallj placed before the inflnltiTe ; but eometimes it b placed before the first
verb.
I wish to do it. Je ddsirc le faire.
He comes for me. II vlcnt me cherchcr (or old iiyU, II
me vient chcrcher).
He likes to do it. II aime a le faire (no/, U Taime a faire).
2. Past participles are not Taried to agree with tn, it being an indirect object.
I give you these flowers. Je yous donne ces fleurs.
I did not give any to my sister. Je n*en ai pas donnS k ma sceur.
I gave some lo my cousin. J^en ai donn6 & ma cousine.
8. When two nouns Joined by a preposition form a componnd, d is used to denote its
moving power and parpose, ds the material and sphere of use.
IffASCULUCK. FlXnOXS.
A boat. A coffee-cup. Vn bateau, Une tasse d cafe.
K steamboat. K tobacco-box. Vn bateau dvapeur. XJne boite d tabor.
A mustardpot. A schoolmiatress. Un pot a moutarde. Une tnaiiresse d'i-
cole.
A bookseller. A gold button. Tin marchand deli- Vne bouion d'or.*
vres.
The steam-mills. The coffee-cups. Les moulinsd vapcur. Les tasscs ii cafo.
To pain^ to ache, to hurt. Faire mal.
My finger pains me. Le doigt me fait mal.
His neck pains him. Le cou lui fait mal.
You hurt me. Yous me faites mal.
You hurt my foot. Yous me faites mal au pied.
He does me harm (an injury). II me fait du mal.
To have a pain in, to be sore. Avoir mal d.
I hare a pain in my finger, or a sore J^ai mal au doigt.
finger.
He has a headache. H a mal k la tetc.
He has a violent headache. II a un violent mal de t£te.
Without. Without a hat. Sans. Sans chapeau.
4 Sans is not followed by the indefinite article, unless it be emphatic.
Without a coat Without a friend. Sans habit. Sans ami.
* Snch compounds, we have seen (Lesson 18), form the plural by changing the first noun.
1 17 16 T B s
ba-tean, po<, mal-tresM, san«.
So much. So much tbat.
•So many. So many that.
At muck. Ab much as.
As many. Ab many as.
THE FIFTY-FIRST LESSON. 185
On£*t ulf^ itself. For, in order to, 8oi, Powr,
For one^s self. In order to do one*s Four sol Four fiure son devoir,
duty.
A. rTonoaas referring to masculine and feminine nonns coUectiTely, most be maacollne
planL
Are your brother and sister sick f Yotre fr^re et Totre sceur sont-ils ma-
lades?
They are sick. lis sont maladea.
To like better. To prefer. Aimer mieux, Preferer,
I like tea better than coffee. J^aime mieux le th6 que le cafe.
I prefer tea to coffee. Je pri^f^re le th6 au cafe.
6. MeUUur is an ac^ectlre, and qnallflea a noun ; mteux is an adrerb, and generally
modifiea a verb.
This man is better than that. Get homme-ci est meilleur que celui-U.
This man does better than that. Get homme-ci fait mieux que celui-l&.
Better. Better than. Mieux. Mieux que.
Zees. Less than. Moins {de bcf. n.). Hoins que.
[ Tant (de bef. n.). Tant que.
[ AutatU {de bef. n.). Autant que.
Sttfident, tvfficienUyy enough, Assez (de bef. n.), BvmaAnment {de
bef. n.).
1. Get homme a assez de courage. 2. II a saiBsaminent de bien
pour virre. 3. Ce marchand-ci n'a pas autant de profit que celai-U.
4. Ce marcband de liyres a tant de biens qu'il sera toujours ricbe.
5. Gette dame est moins jolie que sa soeur. 6. Mon p(^re a moins
de fortune que mon oncle. 7. Aimez-vous mieux le the que le cafe ?
8. Non, j'aime autant le cafe que le tb6, mais mon frere pr^fere le
cafe. 9. Le visage vous fait-il mal 1 10. H me fait mal. 11. Qu'a-
▼ez-Yous ? 12. J'ai mal au cou. 13. Qu'acet bomme? 14. II a mal
k la tele, et le pied lui fait mal. 15. Vous avez I'oeil enile, n'y avez-
vous pas mal ? 16. J'y ai maL 17. Votre ami aime-t-il mieux le
th^ que le cafe ? 18. Non, madame, il prefcre le cafe au tbe. 19.
Ces bateaux a vapeur vont-il sur le lac ? 20. Celui-ci va sur le lac
et celai-l& sur la riviere. 21. Qu'est-ce que la maitresse d'ecole a
acbete ? 22. Elle a acbet6 des tasses k cafe, des pots k beurre et
on pot k moutarde. 23. Votre p5re et votre m^re sont-ils ici ? 24.
Nod, ils sont a la maison.
1. Do you undertake tbat work witbout money 1 2. We do not
n* C f • Uli S 17 8 16 »^U 1 >
taieaae^ pr6-fo-rer, molnff tani, aa-tan<l, a«<fle«, BV-fl-zam-menl.
186 THE FIFTY-FIRST LESS05.
undertake it without money. 3. What is the matter with yon 1
4. My finger is sore, and my foot pains me. 5. Is not your neck
swollen 1 6. It is swollen, and I have a pain in it. 7. Have they
given you some fruit ? 8. They have given me some. 9. Does each
one live for himself? 10. No, no one lives for himself. 11. Have
you bought the beautiful coffee-cups ? 12. I have bought them.
13. Where will you go to-morrow ? 14. I shall go in a steamboat
on the river. 15. What does that countryman buy! 16. He buys
some coffee-cups, some butter-plates, and a tobacco-box. 17. Are
you acquainted with that mant 18. Yes, sir, he is a bookseller of
our city, and that lady is a schoolmistress.
19. Have you a sore finger f 20. No, sir, it is my hand that
(d la main que) is sore. 21. Your mouth looks swollen ; have yoa
a pain in it ? 22. 1 have a pain in it. 23. Do you like the French
better than the Spanish 1 24. No, sir, I like the Spanish as much
as the French. 25. Is that man as rich as the bookseller ? 26.
Yes, sir, he has so much money that he never counts it. 27- Was
your brother here when you saw him ? 28. No, sir, he has not been
here yet, but he will be here to-morrow. 29. Why was your little
sister weeping when we saw her the day before yesterday ? 30. She
wept because she had the headache. 31. Do you sometimes have
the headache 1 32. No, but I had the headache often last year.
33. Have you suflScient sugar? 34. I have sufficient. 35. Where
will you be to-morrow? 36. I shall be at home.
OPTIONAL EXERCISES.
1. John, go into the yard ; your father wants you. 2. Have you
the hammer ? 3. No, I have not seen it. 4. See if it is not in the
box. 5. Yes, I have it 6. Well, take a few big nails, and carry
them to your father. 7. How many nails does he wish for ? 8. He
does not wish for many. 9. I am going to carry him the box. 10*
No, leave the box ; he wishes only a few ; take them in your hand.
11. Shall you be in the yard ? 12. No, I shall not be there ; I hare
some work to do in the garden. 13. Well, I am going to carry the
nails, and I will go into the garden also. 14. Come, if your father
does not want you. 15. Will you be here ? 16. Yes, you will have
no trouble to {peine a) find me, I shall not be far off {loin). 1^*
Does my father wish for the hammer also? 18. Yes, carry him the
hammer and the nails. 19. I comprehend.
20. Let us go and see Peter (Pierre). 21. Well, is he at home!
22. Yes, he is there. 23. Go for (chercher) your hat. 24. Come
with me into the house. 25. No, I am going to stay here. 26.
THE FUTY-SECOKD LESSON. 187
Well, wait for me. 27. Do not stay long. 28. Have you your
hat? 20. Yes ; come, let us go (allona partons).
52.— CINQUANTE-DEUXIfiME LEgON.
USE OF C'EST, PLACE OP ADVEEBS, ETC.
1. We have seen (Lesson SO) that C6 is nsod Instead of it, tUe^ iU^ elUa^ before etre^ when
the predicate charaeterizes the subject, and fa not an adjective merely with the rerb. The
following illustrate more ftilly this rule when the predicate contains a noun, a pronoun, an
adyerb^ an article with an a4)ecti?e, or a verb.
It is my book. It is your pen. C'est mon livre, (Test TOtre j^ume.
They are the books. Cc sont Ics Hvres.
It is he. It is she. C^est lui. C^est ellc.
It is they. Ce sont ettXy ce sont elles.
It is to-day. It is the first. C^est aujourcTkuu C*est le premier.
It is to make a good use of one^s for- Cest iaire un bon usage de sa fortune
tune to employ it in good works. que de Temployer en bonnes oeuvres.
2. With an a^Jectiyo alone in the predicate, ce is not used.
He is good. She is good. H est bon. Elle est bonne.
He is a good brother. C^est un bon fr^rc.
She is a good mother. Cest unc bonne mdre.
3. Jiis^ referring to a preceding proposition, is e''eei ; referring to one foUowIng, is il ett
He has lost his book ; it is a pity, H a perdu son livre ; c^est dommage.
It is a pity that ho has lost his friend. Jl eat dommage pour lui d^aroir perdu
son ami.
It is disagreeable to be always alone. II est d6sagr6able d*etre toujours seul.
Yes, you are right, it is very disagree- Oui, vous avez raison, c*est trds-d6sa-
able. gr6able.
4. When the pronoun referring to a proposition Just stated is the object of a tranaitlTe
verb or a preposition, it may bo rendered by eela or le.
That man is rich ; do you know it ? Cet homme est riche ; savcz-vous eela
(or le savez-vous) ?
6. Sot, used of persona, must refer only to a vogue antecedent, as on, cAacurij etc, except
when perspicuity requires.
People love to speak of themselves. On aime k parler de eoi.
A benefaction carries with it its re- Un bienfait porte sa recompense avcc
ward. 8oi.
When that young man does a pleasure Quand ce jeune homme fait un plalsir
to his father he works for himself. k son pdrc, il travaille pour «ot.*
• In these last two sentences, the antecedents of «o» are definite ; bnt in the former, the
reforenoe is not to a person, and in the latter, the use of eoi instead of lui avoids an ambi-
guity.
15 1 1214 T » «» »
dom-moge, bien-faii^ rc-com-pens«.
188
THE FIFTY-SECOND LESSON.
KABOULUnL
rBosm.
Un bienfaiL
Get ivroffne.
Un accident.
Une ricompcnse.
Ivre, grit.
UtiU,
Lejtu.
Vrau
Vitftde.
VraU.
Oai.
Oaic.
Sujet.
Faux.
Sujette.
Fauste,
MSconUfit.
MeeorUefUe.
A. benefit, benefaction, A recompense.
That drunkard. Drunh^ tipsy.
An accident. Useful.
Thejuieej gravy. Study.
Thte.
Oay.
Subject.
FalsCy counterfeit.
Displeasedf discontented.
0. The Axtnies of venir and tenir are irregnbr.
Jeviendrai, tu viendras^ Uviendra, nousvUndrons, wmsviendrea^ ilsviendrontt
I shall come, thou wilt come, he will come, we shall come, you will cpmo, they will come.
Js tiendrai, iu tiendras, il tiendra^ nous tiendr&ns, vous tiendrem, tie Uendront,
1 BhaU hold, thoa wUt hold, he will hold, we shaU hold, yoa wlU hold, they wiU hold.
7. Again^ with a verb, la often expressed by the prefix re in French ; aa,
7b make again. To take again. Rs/atre. Hzprendre.
To come again. I shall return. UEvenir. Jo RETiendrai.
We will hold those horses. Kous tieudrons ces cheTaox.
He will come again (return) to-morrow. H reviendra demain.
a After as and than, /, thou, he^ ihsy, are rendered moi, toi^ lui, euaa, elles.
More than I. More than thou. Plus que moi. Plus que toL
More than he. More than she. Plus que lui. Plus qu'elle.
As much as we. As much as you. Autant que nous. Autant que toosl
As much as they. Autant qu^cux. Autant quVUca.
1. Yiendrez-voos ici demain ? 2. J^j viendrai ce 6oir, et mes
amis 7 viendront aussL 3. Tiendrez-vous les chevaux ? 4. Nod,
nous tiendrons les livres, et les domestiqaes tiendront les chevaux.
5. Get homme est-il plus riche que moi? 6. Non, il est moins riche
que toi. 7. Suis-je anssi grand que voire frcre ? 8. Vons ^tes plus
grand que lui ; mais il apprend plus vite que vons. 9. Mon cousin
lit plus que moi, mais j'etudie plus que lui. 10. Aimez-vous mieux
le vin que I'eau ? 11. Nous aimons mieux I'eau que le vin. 12. Ta
cousine lit-elle mieux que toi ? 13. Non, monsieur, je lis mieux
qu'elle. 14. Est-ce que je travaille moins que mon cousin ? 15.
Yotts travaillez plus que lui, et il travaille plus que moL 16. Ce
monsieur n'est-il pas le monsieur que vous cherchez ? 17. Cest lui.
18. Ces enfants ne sont-ils pas vos cousins! 19. Si, ce sont eux.
20. La vache est un aaimal plus utile que le chien. 21. Youlez*
nis n uins»is»fa r rceasisc
i-TTogne, iTM, gria, ac-ci-dentS, n-tile, Jna, 6-tnde, rral, Traie, goi, gala, an-JeH, aa-jetfe,
fkuflB^ fiiaa««, m6-oon-ten<; mo-con* tcnt«, Tlen-drai, tien-dral, re-fidre, re-prendre^ i«T«-nlr,
4 >314 «
re-Tien-dral.
TH£ nFTY-SEOOND LESSON. 189
TODS da jnfi snr votre boenf r6ti ? 22. Oni, monsieiir, s'il vons plait
23. Get homme est im ivrogne, il est ivre k present 24. Notre
Tie est Bujette k beauconp d'accidents.
1. Dost thou work as mach as I ! 2. I work more than thoiL
3. Does thy brother study less than thy sister ? 4. He studies less
than she, and she reads less than he. 5. Do you speak more than
your sisters t 6. I speak les than they. 7. Do your sisters speak
less than your brothers ? 8. They speak more than they. 9. That
young lady looks gay. 10. This bank-bill looks counterfeit 11.
That man's face is red ; has he not drunk too much t 12. Yes, sir,
he is a drunkafd ; he is drunk now. 13. Do you wish for some
more of the grary on your roast meat t 14. No, sir, I have enough.
15. That man is tipsy ; is he not? 16. Yes, sir, he is a drunkard
who is always drunk. 17. Are we not subject to many accidents ?
18. Yes, sir, we are always subject to accidents.
19. Do you know the great accident? 20. Yes, sir, it is very
deplorable (deplorable). 21. TVhy is that stranger discontented ?
22. He is discontented because ho has no money. 23. Will you
come here to-morrow ? 24. I will come here to-morrow morning
{demain matin). 25. WHt thou come to my house ? 26. Yes, and
my friend will come also. 27. Will you hold the horses? 28. I
will hold them. 29. They say that you intend to depart to-mor-
row ; is it true? 30. It is true. 81. It is said that Mr. A. is sick ;
is it true? 32. No, it is not true ; he is in good health. 33. Your
brother is here; do you know it? 34. I know it. 35. Has that
peach much juice ? 36. Yes, sir, it is full of juice. 37. Do you
like study? 38. I like it much. 39. Does one confer {ripandez^
vous) benefits without a recompense ? 40. No, sir ; a benefit always
carries its recompense with it. 41. Is not that young lady gay?
42. She is gay. 43. That little boy loves study, and he is very
useful to his relations ; do you know that ? 44. I know it
OPTIONAL EXERCISES.
1. I bought a penknife this morning. 2. Show it to me. 3.
Tell me what you think of it 4. It is very pretty ; where did you
buy it ? 5. At l^Ir. D.'s ; he has some very pretty knives. 6. I
wish to buy a penknife also ; mine is broken ; but I wish for one
bigger than yours. 7. Buy a knife and a penknife. 8. No, I do
not need a knife. 9. Let me choose a penknife for you. 10. Well,
choose me one ; but do not take one too big. 11. If I do not choose
190 THE FIFTT-THIBD LESSON.
you a good one, do not take it. 12. Well, let ns see if you know
(how) to choose penknives.
13. Are you going to the country to-morrow t 14. Xo, I am
not going there. 15. Who is going there! 16. No one is going
there to-morrow. 17. Well, lend me your horse to-morrow if you
do not need him. 18. Take him ; but where do you intend to go t
19. 1 am going to my aunt's. 20. If you go there, bring (apportez)
me some pretty roses. 21. Very well ; she has many at her house.
22. Do not forget me. 23. Do you prefer flowers to fruits t 24.
No, sir, I prefer fruits to flowers. 25. Does Miss P. know French?
26. Yes, miss, she speaks it very well 27. She has had good
masters, and she has taste for study. 28. I have heard Mr. R. say
{dire d monsieur E.) that he has never seen any oc(^ learn French
more easily. 29. Have you seen Miss P. this week ? 30. I have
seen her. 31. Has she not been sick 1 32. She has been a little
sick, but now she is in good health.
53.— CINQUANTE-TROISIJEME LEgON.
NUMERAL TITLES, i AFTER THE VERB.
1. In designating soyerelgns, where the English employ the ordinal nnmbers with the
article, the French employ the cardinal, with the exception of thejlrsi and someUmea th^
aecondy without the article.
John the Jirst, Je^n premier.
William the second. Guillaumc dettx^ or second.
James the third. George the fourth. Jacques trois. Georges quaire.
Philip the sixth. Henry the eighth. Philippe six. HeDri huit.
2. To go or come to a place is aUer d or ^enir rl; to go or come to a person Is generally
aUer trouver^ or venir trouver.
He is going to Charleston. II va & Charleston.
He is going to Charles. II va trouver Charles.
He comes to LouisTllle. II vient ^ Louisville.
He comes to Mr. Lewis. H vient trouver M. Louis.
8. In emphatic cases, as calling, or ordering help, and after p«Mer and songer, to think,
the pronoan is nsed after the verb, and preceded by d.
Come to mo. Go to him. Yenez d moi. AUez d lui.
Run to them. Think of me. Courez d eux. Pensez d moi.
I think of you. He thinks of her. Je pense k vous. II songe k elle.
4. This constmction is generally employed when more than one indirect objective pro-
noun (y and en excepted) belong to the verb ; as also when the pronoan is emphatic.
Do you speak to him or to me ? Parlez-vous d lui ou d moi f
I speak neither to him nor to thee ; I Je no parle mdlui mh toi ; je parle
speak to them. k eux.
s u IT a !• M n « M 1 IS n
Jean, Ofiill-aams, JackM, QeorgM, Phl-llpps, /ITen-ri, Cbarl<v, Loa>i«.
THE FIFTT-THIRD LESSON.
191
8l 2b hsar la enUndr$; to hear qf, or that, is entendre dire otparler; tohearfrom la
rteeeoir dee nou^ellee.
I heard the noise. He heard it.
I heard of jour friend.
I hare heard that your friend is here.
I hare heard from yonr friend to-day.
Hare you heard that he is at my
house?
I haTe not heard it
7b be abU^ ean, being able, been able.
Jepeuteorpuie,^ tupeuaoit Upeut,
I cbh, tboa eanst, he oao,
Can I be useful to you ?
Ood can do all things.
We cannot do that.
•Tai entendu le bruit. II Ta entendu.
tPai entendu poller de TOtro ami.
J'ai entendu dire que votre ami est ici.
JV rept dee nouvelUe de votre ami
aujourd^hui.
Ayez-vous entendu dire qu^ll est chez
moi?
Je n^ai pas entendu dire cela.
Pauvoir, puvanty pu.
nouepouvone^ wntepouveet Qepeiweeml^
we can, you can, they can.
Puis-Je Tous 4tre utile?
Dieu pent faire toutes choses.
Nous ne pouvons (pas) faire cela.
ft. Pae Is often omitted after poutoir negative.
I have not been able to study.
Je n'ai pu 6tudier.
UABCJTLan.
FKMIHlNg.
Tbeftodb.
The ehouider.
liOdos.
Vipavle.
Th^ heart.
Attention.
Le eoeur.
Attention.
The hnee^ knees.
The character,
reputation.
he genou, genoux.
La reputation.
God.
The moon.
Dieu.
La lune.
The {natural) dU-
A star.
Le earaetere.
line etoile.
position.
The bottom.
So.
lie fond.
Si.
Lame.
Boiteux.
BoUeuse.
A, lame man.
SoUme.
tin boiteux.
Si boiteux (m.).
Healthy.
Bent^ curved.
Sain.
CourbS, vo&tS (m.).
Right, straight.
Zefi.
Droit.
Oauchc.
To pay attention to.
Faire attention d.
Soon.
Much, many.
Bientdt.
Bien,
7. Adrerbs of qnantity, we hare seen, take de before the following noun ; Men, mean-
ing much, many, takes de and the article, making du, de 1\ de la, dee.
Much money. Few friends. Beaucoup d'argent. Peu d^amis.
Ifnch money. Many friends. Bien de Targent. Bien des amis.
Much courage. Much beauty. Bien du courage. Bien de la beaut6.
1. Avez-vous voire argent t 2. Je Paurai bientdt. 3. Get
homme a-t-il bien de Targent ? 4. II a bien de Targent et bien
* Puie is more used than petuo.
IS » us as 72li • U S 18 « • 179 17
poa-Tofi^ pon-ran^ pu, peua\ puis, peu^ pou-Tons, pou-yes, penT«n<, Dieu, do«,
^panltf, ca-no-t^a, ^toils, fonef, si, boi-tence, boi-tenzs, sain, cour-b^ vo&-t4^, droif, droits,
n 1 s nn i9i« ir lau
ganche, a^tea-tion, bien-tdtt bien.
192 THE FIFTY-THIRD LESSON.
des amis. S-Jfai entendn dire que votre p^re est malade; est>ce
yrai t 6. Ge n'est pas vrai, il est en bonne sante. 7. Donnez-vons
des flenrs k mes freres et a mes soenrst 8. J*en donne k eux et 4
elles. 9. Ges vieillards peavent-ils faire de ToaTrage! 10. Bs n*en
penvent pas faire beanconp. 11. PoaTez-yoos tradnire ce Htto
frangaist 12. Je peuz le traduire. 13. Qa*a ce vieillardf 14.
n a mal an dos et k Vepaule. 15. N'a-t-il pas le dos voute? IG.
Si, il I'a voiit6. 17. Pourquoi ce petit garQon est-il boitenx? 18-
II est boiteux paice qa'U a mal au genou. 19. N'avez-Yous pa3
mal k la main droite? 20. Non, j'ai mal a la main ganche. 21.
A-t-on troay6 le fond de ce lac f 22. On ne Ta pas troav6. 23.
N'est-ce pas nouvelle lane aujourd'hui? 24. Non, c'est pleine Inne.
25. La lune et les 6toiles sont belles. 26. Admirez-vous le carac-
t6re de Gharles XXL? 27. Non, monsieur, j'admire plus le
caract^re de Louis XIV. 28. Get homme est sain de corps, mus
il n'a pas le coeur content.
1. Canst tbou study wben thou art warmt 2. I can study
well when I am very warm. 3. Can the carpenters do their work
to-day? 4. They cannot do it to-day. 5. Do you admire the
character of George the Fourth? 6. I do not admire it 7. What
is the matter with that lame man ? 8. He has a pain in the left
knee. 9. The fisherman^s hammer is at the bottom of the lake.
10. Does not God know all hearts? 11. God reads the bottom of
all hearts, and can do all things. 12. Have you a pain in the
knee? 13. No, I have a pain in the back and in the shoulder.
14. Is that servant in good health? 15. He is healthy in (de)
body and mind, but he is a little lazy. 16. The cook is so lame
that she cannot do her work.
17. Do you pay attention to what the master says? 18. We
pay attention to it. 19. Is that line straight or curved? 20. It
is straight. 21. Have you a pain in the right hand or in the left?
22. I have no pain in the hand, I have a pain in the back and in
the shoulder. 23. Do you like to look at the stars ? 24. I like to
look at the stars and the moon. 25. I have heard that the general
is sick ; do you know if it is true ? 26. It is true. 27. Is that
history false? 28. It is false. 29. Have you been able to learn
that lesson? 30. I have not been able to learn it. 31. Pay atten-
tion to what I say. 32. That man is English ; he is a subject of
THE FIFTY-FOURTH LESSON. 198
the queen. 83. Could yon speak the Frencli when you were in
Paris *? 34. I could speak it a little. 85. Will you come to our
hoose soon ? 86. I am so lame that I cannot go there at present.
OPTIONAL EXERCISES.
1. Have you seen my brother to-day ? 2. I saw him in Mr. C.'s
store. 3. I am looking for him every where. 4. I have heard that
he is soon going to set out for France ; is it true 1 5. Yes, sir ; he
sets out next week by the steamer {le vapeur) America. 6. Does
he intend to stay long in France 1 7. He intends to stay there
eighteen months. 8. He will have time to learn the French well
in eighteen months. 9. He understands and reads it sufficiently
well already. 10. I know it ; he needs only practice (pratique) to
(pour) speak it perfectly. 11. I know many gentlemen who read
French, but do not know (how) to speak it. 12. The French is a
language which is very difficult.
13. Is that child useful to his relations ? 14. He is very useful
to his £ather and mother. 15. That bank-bill looks counterfeit ; is
it not counterfeit! 16. It is counterfeit. 17. Has the carpenter
been able to do his work f 18. He has not been able to do it.
19. When will you come here again? 20. I shall come here again
to-morrow. 21. I have heard that the general is coming here ; do
yoQ know if it is true t 22. It is true. 23. Why does your cousin
look so sad ? 24. Because he has a headache ; his head pains him
much. 25. Who makes so much noise ? 2G. It is some drunkards
in the street.
64.— CINQUANTE-QUATRlfiME LEgON.
IREEGULAR FUTUEES, ETC.
1. The fatnres otvoir^ to see, and /lire, to make, arc Irregular.
JsvemH, iuverraa, Uverra^ notuverrons^ TouaverrtB^ ilsverroTit,]
I shall see, thou wilt ace, he will ace, we ahaU aee, you will ace, they will see.
Je/erai, tu/ertu, ilfera^ naua/eroM^ wus/eree, Us/eront,
I afaall make, thou wilt make, he will moke, we shall make, you will make, they will make.
Will you see the general to-day ? Verrez-voua le g6n6ral aujourd'hui ?
I hare seen him already, and I shall Je Pal d^h, tu, et Je le reverrai c-
see him again this evening. soir.
You will do your duty, and we shall Vous ferez votre devoir, et nous ferons
do ours. le notre.
To cauMCf to talk. To Hng. Causer. Chanter,
uABouusK. vunmns.
A eent. A gong. Un eenty* {sou), Vne ehanton.
The hdxndle. The tooth. Le manche. La dent.
* Cent (ion) sounds as in English.
7« «i7« se »«> '..j*^
ver-rai, fe-ral, eau-aer, chan-ter, chan-son, maDch<», done.
id4
THE FIFTY-FOURTH LESSON.
Apieiure,
Labor.
Extraordinary.
The day.
That American.
Foreaah^ eashdoton.
An affair^ busineas.
Strange.
Against,
Past
Une affaire,
Eirange.
Conire.
Passi (m.)-
Cette amerieaine.
Compiant, au comptant, argent eomp-
tant.
On credit. A toothache. A credit. Uh mal de dent.
2. Gri la lued chiefly to form yerlyal or adverbial ezprossiona like the foUowing:
To be grateful /or.
Against one's liking^ unmllingly.
To my liking. To your liking.
To my taste. To your taste.
To that American's liking.
To every body's liking.
8. When several verba are eonneoted by nor in Engliah, a< is to bo repeated before each
verb in French.
He neither reads, nor writes, nor H ne lit, ni n'^crit, ni n'dtudie.
studies.
We neither buy nor sell. Nous n'achctons ni ne Tendons.
4. ParlerfranQais means to speak in French, or to speak Frenck, franeais being
used adverbially.* Parler lefrancaia is less used. Parler is the only verb with which a
rational designation can be used adverbially.
He speaks French (or In French). II parle fran^ais.
He speaks the French of good society. II parle le fran^ais de la bonne com-
pagnie.
C Aimer mieua^ follovred by two infinitives, takes no preposition b«fore the former,
bat requires de before the latter.
Un tableau.
Travail.
Extraordinaire,
Lejour.
Cet anUrietUn.
Savoir gri de,
CorUre son are.
A mon grL A voire grk.
A mon go&L A voire go&L
Au gr6 de cet am^ricain.
Au gr6 de tout le monde.
I like better to read than to think, and
I like better to think than to
write.
What causes that noise ?
She talks with her brother, and speaks
to the child.
The past month. The past night.
J'aime-mieux lire que de penser, et
j'aime mieux penser que d'^rire.
Qu'est-ce qui cause ce bruit?
Elle cause ayec son frdre, et parle &
Tenfant.
Le mois passi. La nuit pass^
6, The verbs venir and alter have in some eases a use in French diiferent tram eoms
and go in English. Venir denotes movement towards the indlvidoal who speaks, or to
what he regards as his home, or accompanying when he considers himself as taking the
lead.
Will you come here to-morrow ?
I will come here with pleasure.
Yiendrez-Tous ici deroain ?
J'y yiendrai aveo plaisir.
* Lot it be borne in mind that /ranfa<«, an adverb, cannot be the antecedent of a pro-
noun.
11T17 17SS S 116 18 7 n lS9t SiS
ta>bleaa, i\Afalr«, tra-vail, 6-trange, ex-tra-or-di-nair«, contre, pa«-s^, comp-tani; a-m6-
ri-cain, a-m6-ri-cain«, cr6-dit
THE FIFTY.-FOUKTH LESSOR 195
When will you come to my house f Quand TiendrezTous chez moi ?
I will come and see you to-morrow. Jlrai yous voir demain.
Win you go along with me to Boston ? Youlez-Tous venir k Boston arec moi f
I will go willingly, J^irai ffolontiers.
1. Que feras-tu ce soir 1 2. Je ne ferai rien. 8. Ferez-vons
qadqae chose demain ? 4. Nous ferons beaucoup de choses. 5.
Le paysan fera-t-il du beurre t 6. II fera du beurre et du fromage.
7. Verras-tu ton oncle demain ? 8. Non, je le verrai la semaine
prochaine. 9. Qoand verrez-vous vos amis ? 10. Nous les verrons
bientdt. 11. Combien de cents (sous) font une piastre ? 12. Gent
sous font une piastre. 13. Qui a cass6 le manche de ce marteau?
14. Le domestique I'a casse. 15. Qu'avez-vous ? 16. J'ai mal
aux dents. 17. Cest un bien mauvais mal. 18. Avez-vous quel-
que chose a faire ? 19. J'ai bien des affaires. 20. Quelles chan-
sons chantez-Yous f 21. Nous chantons des chansons anglaises. 22.
Avez-vous achet^ ce tableau k cr6dit ? 23. Je Tai achete comp-
tant. 24. Ce petit gar9on aime-t-il mieux I'^tude que le travail ?
25. n aime mieux le travail que T^tude. 26. Je connais madame
D. ; e'est une femme extraordinaire. 27. Get stranger est franqais ;
e'est tin homme bien extraordinaire. 28. Gette femme chante a mon
goflt. 29. Ge gargon ne fera pas bien son ouvrage, parce qu'il le
fera centre son gr6. 30. Sept jours font une semaine. 31. Voulez-
vous me vendre ce tableau ? 32. Bien volontiers, monsieur.
1. When will you come to our house? 2. I will go there day
after to-morrow. 3. Will you go (come) to New York with me f
4. I will go there with pleasure. 5. Will the soldiers see the gene-
ral to-day 1 6, They will see him. 7. We shall see the new pic-
ture to-day ; will not the master see it also ? 8. He will see it.
9. What caused so much noise this morning? 10. It is the wind
which caused it 11. What songs does the English woman sing!
12. The English woman sings French songs, and the German
woman sings (German songs. 13. What will you do to-morrow?
14. We shall do nothing. 15. How many cents will you give to
that poor blind man ? 16. I shall give him twenty-five cents. 17.
The handle of this knife is of ivory. 18. I often had the teethache
when I was in the country.
19. Will the American buy those pictures on credit or for cash?
Yo-lon-tior«.
196 THE FIFTY-FIFEH LESSON.
20. He win buy tnem for cash. 21. That man likes to work better
than to do nothing ; is not that extraordinary 1 22. It is not ex-
traordinary that he loves labor. 23. Have they shown you some-
thing strange? 24. They have shown me nothing strange. 25.
Do you buy on credit or for cash ? 26. I sometimes buy on credit
and sometimes for cash. 27. What is the matter with you ? 28.
I have a violent (violent) toothache and a distracting {/ou) head-
ache. 29. Has that merchant much business (affaires) 1 30. He
has much business, and he gives great attention to it. 31. Does
that scholar study against his will ? 32. Yes, sir ; and the servant
works against his will. 33. Are the nights longer than the days
this month? 34. Yes ; and the days will be longer than the nights
next month. 35. Does the American know French better than 1 7
36. No ; he neither reads, nor writes, nor speaks that language.
OPTIONAL EXERCISES.
1. Is not your face swollen t 2. Yes ; I have the toothache.
3. Do your teeth pain you much ? 4. Not much at present, bat
the toothache is a very bad pain (mat). 5. I know what it is, I
have had it often enough. 6. Do you know any remedy (remide) ?
7. I know only one good one (de bon), it is the cold iron (le/er),
8. I do not like that one much ; I desire not to lose my teeth. 9.
What do the merchants say ? are they doing good business ? 10.
Not very (irop) good ; they are not doing much business at present.
11. In (dam) two or three months, I intend to undertake some
business. 12. What can you do ? 13. I do not know yet ; if I
can find a good store for sale (d vendre), I intend to buy it
14. I know one on Water-street which is for sale. 15. What
store is it? 16. It is a wine-store which is on that street, and
which you are acquainted with undoubtedly (sans doute), 17. You
mean (voulez dire) that of Mr. C. ? 18. Yes, it is the very same
(celui-ld tneme), 19. But why does Mr. C. wish to sell it? 20.
His health is not good, and he wishes to make a journey in (en)
England. 21. Well, I will go and see his store to-morrow.
55.<-CINQUANTE.CINQUIi:ME LEgON.
£^mE AS AUXILIARY.
1. In fonning tho p&st definito and other oompoand tenses of the verhs aller^ vefUr,
and sevenl others which will bo given hereafter, the past participle Is joined to the tenses
of itre instead of aroir^ and then the participle always agrees with the subject of the
Terb.
THE FIFTT-nFTH LESSON.
197
JtaoM
;au;. or
"^\
-ISi.'
•l:
Patt indefinite of alleb, ^o go,
I aUi, or __^ *»«,-„, $ oUti^ or „„ . .,„ < alU; or Ut *oiU $ alU; oi
a est
ha wen^ v« went, jou vent,
Pcut indefinite of VENin, to come
Um7 w«Dt
-i:
tsn. •»«*'»• j
Yonr brother has come.
Mr sifiter has gone to school.
H J father has gone to the store.
We came here this morning.
Hy sisters came also.
If J brothers hare gone to the country.
Be has been near the fountain.
He has gone near the fountain.
%. AiU implies that tho person has returned ; eet atU that he has gone merely,
a. Verbs in/rir and «Wr have in the present (and some other tenses) the same terml*
nations as Terbs of the first conjugation.
Offrlr {de bcf. inf.), offrant, offert, c.
Ouvrir, ouvranty ouvert^ e.
nous ouvrone^ votte ouvrez^ ils outrent,
we open, yoa open, they open.
Votre fr^ro est venu.
Ma sceur est allk h r6cole.
Mon p^re est alle au magasin.
Nous sommes venus ici ce matin.
Mes soeurs sont venues aussi.
Mes frdres sont alles & la campagne.
II a ete pr^ de la fontaino.
n est alle pr^ de \& fontaine.
To offer^ offering^ offered.
To cpefif opening^ opened.
J^ouvre^ tu ouvres^ U ouere^
I open, thonopencst, he opens,
MASOITLXXS. rBimnKE.
Bttidieux. Studieuse,
Un mari. JJnof emme.
Un epoux. Une spouse.
Le pouee. La sScheresse.
Un legume. Fixe.
Un associe, Une lumiere.
Un defaut. Une erreur, miprise.
Par migarde.
Habile. TJnefaute.
4 Fauie Implies deviation firom daty or rale ; difaut^ defect of mind or body ; erreur,
misapprehension or miscalculation ; miprise, tho taking of one thing for another.
To valk. To borrow.
How. Frequently.
To extinguislu *
Studious.
A husband.
A spouse.
The thumbs inch.
A vegetable.
A partner.
A fault, defect.
BymtMtake.
BkUlful, abU.
A wife.
The drgnessy drought.
Fixed.
A light.
An error, mistake.
A fault, mistake.
To promise.
At %phat price, for how much.
How does your partner do that ?
For bow much does he sell this cloth ?
He promises his father to be studious.
Marcher. Empruntcr.
Comment, Frequemment.
tlteindre (varied as plaindre. Less. 35).
Protnettre (comp. ofmettre, de bef. inf.).
Combien,
Comment votre associ^ fuit-il cela ?
Combien vend-il ce drap ?.
II promct & son p6re d'etre studioux.
II 12 IS 8 IS r 18 13 18 S 18 7 IS 18 18 n 18 <
q^frir, <y-franf, o/^fert ou-vrir, ou-vraniL ou-verf, ou-vm, on-vr«*, ou-vron», ou-vrea,
13 SI 1210 Xi U 10 1 I'i 1 8 IB « IB 18 6 ft ft 2J
ourrent, stu-dienar, Btn-di-euz«, ma-rl, fcmm^, 6-pousr, c-pouz^, pouce, 8o-cn<»-rcs«r, I6-gumS|
n 1 U19« a KT 6 IT 7 ll ft 18 ft 1 17 ' ». * * "* •
flx«, s#-80-ci«% ln-ml6r«» dc-fau& cr-reur, mo-prize, mo-garde, faute, mar-cher, em-pmn-ter,
U ■ SI 8 ft 14 U ft 21 1314
« fr^kem-ment, e-teindre, pro-me(tre, com-bien.
198 THE FIFTY-FIFTH LESSON.
She offers to bnj that silk 'gown. Elle offre d'acheter cette robe de soie.
He has opened the door. 11 a onvert la porte.
I have offered to buy that house. J^ai offert dVcheter cette maiBon.
I am grateful to the master that he Je sais gr6 au maitre do ce qu'il m*a
has given me this good book. donn6 ce bon livre.
1. Voulez-vous bien me preter ce livre? 2. Tr^-volon tiers,
monsieur. 3. On ne pent pas rappeler le temps pass^. 4. Vos
fibres sont-ils alles ^ Tecole? 5. lis y sont alles. 6. £s-ta vena
ici ce matin ? 7. Non, je sais vena bier an soir. 8. Vos fr^res
Bont-ils venns bier aussi ? 9. Non, ils sont venus la semaine (pas-
B^e) derni^re, 10. Ouvrez la porte. 11. Ouvrons la fenetre. 12,
Cette clef ouvre cette boitc-1^ 13. jSteignez le feu. ifiteignons-le.
14. La lune emprunte sa lumi6re. 15. Le pouce me fait maL 16.
Ge domestique n'a-t-il pas des defauts ? 17. II en a quelque»-uns.
18. Avez-Tous fait des fautes dans votre tbdme? 19. J'en ai fait
quelques-unes. 20. Combien vendez-vous ce livre? 21. Je le vends
un dollar. 22. Pourquoi eteignez-vous le feu "? 23. Je I'eteins parce
que je sors. 24. La lune emprunte-t-elle sa lumi6re du soleil ? 25.
Elle la lui emprunte. 26. Me promettez-vous de bien etudier ? 27.
Je vous le promets. 28. Get enfant marche-t-il dej4 ? 29. H ne
marcbe pas encore. 30. Ma mere est allee cbez la voisine. 31. Ce
medecin est tres-babile. 32. A-t-il emprunt6 de Targent A votre
p^re ? 33. Non, il a emprunt6 deux mille dollars k mon cousin.
1. Do tbe children open tbe windows? 2. They open them.
3. Does the doctor extinguish the light when he goes out f 4. He
extinguishes it. 5. Do you extinguish your candle when you go
out at night ? 6. I extinguish it frequently, but not alwaya 7.
Do you walk more than I ? 8. We walk less than you. 9. Do you
offer some money to that poor man? 10. I offer liim some. 11.
Do you frequently recite your lessons tp your father? 12. I recite
them to him very frequently. 13. What do the scholars promise to
the master? 14. They promise to show him their copy-books.
15. Do they offer to sell you their books? 16. They offer to sell
them to us, and we offer to buy them of them (lea leur), 17. Does
your partner's niece promise to be studious ? 18. She promises to
be very studious.
19. Is not Doctor Jones an able man ? 20. He is very able,
and his brother is able also. 21. Hast thou more vegetables than I?
22. No, my friend, I have more fruit than thou, but I have not so
THE FIFTYSIXTH LESSON. 199
many vegetables. 23. Hast thou more vegetables than thy brother t
24. Yes, because the drought has injured {fait mat) his. 25. How
many inches make a foot ? 26. Twelve inches make a foot, and
twenty-four inches make two feet. 27. Has your brother gone any
-where? 28. No, sir, he went to the city this morning, but he has
returned (revenu*) from there. 29. When did you return from
the country? 30. 1 returned from there this morning. 31. Do the
fixed stars borrow their light ? 82. No, sir, the fixed stars are suns.
33. Is that man the husband of that lady f 34. No, sir, he is the
husband of my partner's niece. 35. The wife of your cousin writes
her exercise without a fault. 36. This drought will do harm to the
vegetables.
OPTIONAL EXERCISES.
1. Does that woman sing better than her husband? 2. She
sings better than he, but he reads better than she. 3. Has the
drought hurt the vegetables ? 4. It has done them much harm. 5.
Have you seen the peaches which I bought ? 6. No, I have not
seen them ; where are they ? 7. I have sent them to the cook ; but
I am going to tell John to bring me a few of them. 8. How do
yon find them? 9. They are superb ; I have not seen so fine ones
this year. 10. They are bringing much fruit to market now ; v. hence
do they bring it? 11. It comes from the country. 12. One does
not see many vegetables at the market {au marche). 13. No, we
have not had rain for (depuis) so long a time, that all the gardens are
dried up (desseches). 14. The gardeners say that they have never
seen such a {une telle) drought ; they are doing nothing at all {du
taut).
15. They say that the rivers are very low. 16. I wish to make
a short {petit) journey ; but if the rivers are so low, I will not go in
a {en) steamboat. 17. Where do you desire to go ? 18. I desire to
go as far as Cincinnati. 19. The small boats go as far as there ;
when do you think to set out ? 20. Next week ; I am waiting for
the return of my father, who is in the country.
56.— CINQUANTE-SIXISME LEgON.
PLUPERFECT TENSE.
1. The plapcrfect tense is formed In French as In English, by Joining the patt partiei-
pU to the imperfect o/ihe auxiliary. i Thus,
J^avai^ftni, tu avaisjini^ U avaUJlni^ nous avionsjtni, voua avietjlnl, ils avaierUJtnif
1 had finished, thou hadst,etc, ho had, etc., vre had, etc., yon had, etc., thej had, etc
* Componnda generally take the same auxiliary as their simples,
t The only verbs, thus lar given, which talLe iire for anxilianr, u® a^r and ««r
the others take avoir.
200
THE FIFTY-SIXTH LESSOX.
I had come, thou hadst como, he had oome, we had come, joa had come, they had comi^
Hadst thou Icarued thy lesson when
the master came ?
I had learned it
Had you written your exercises?
We had written them.
They had gone to school, and he had
gone there also.
AvaU'iM appris la leqon qaand le mat
tre est venu?
Je Vavais appriu.
Aviez'TOUB icrit vofl themes?
Nous les aviont icrits.
lis etaieni allis d F^cole, et il y itait
alU austu
allv.
What weather ii
The weather is
cool.
It is cold. It is
\ it ? how is the weather?
cold. The weather is
cool.
It is warm. It
is very warm.
Sorrov.
His appetite.
The moonlight.
A chain.
A match.
A v!ork.
2. In spoaking of the weather, the French commonly employ /z<r«, to make, Impenon-
Quel tempi fait-U f
Le temps est froid. Le temps est
frais.
n fait froid. II fait frais.
II fait chaud. H fait bien chaud.
UASC1TLXXX. naKcmrs.
Le chagrin. Une chaine.
Son appHit, Une allumetie.
Le clair de lune. Une a:uvre,
8. Travail implies the act of working; cworage^ the produce of the work ; omvre, th«
production of talent or merit
An exerei^. A long exercise. Un exerciee. Un long cxercice.
Slippery. Dark. Glissant. Sombre^ obaeur.
4. Sombre implies scarcity of light; ol>8Curt absence of light
[As the learner Is now snffidentlT acquainted with forming the femfnlne of a4)ectiT«t
and participles, they will be gtTen omy in the masculino, except in peculiar caaea.]
Wet Dampf moitt.
Agreeable. AmicibUf lovely.
To aleepf slept.
To refuse. To gain.
On horseback. On foot.
This summer. In summer.
This autumn. In autumn.
This winter. In winter.
This spring. In spring.
6. JZfo is used Indefinitely with the names of the scoaona, except printemps, which b
never preceded by en. They are all masculino.
Do you sleep less in winter than in Dormez-rous moins en hirer (or Thi-
spring ? Tcr) qu'au printcmps?
Yes, and I sleep more in summer than Qui, et jo dors plus en 6t6 (or Vite)
in autumn. qu^en automne.
^1 14 I 1 « n I 23 « T » 5 r 1-1 n 8 u m
cha-grin, chains, ap-pe-ti/, al-lu-met^, dalr, <ruTr«, og-zer-cic«, gli«-8anl sombre, obs-
n 2i li I » I 7 1 10 la 16 H 4 aa « » e • e i« n ii
cure, Att-mtde. a-grc-abU, ai'mable^ dor-mir, dor-mi, re«fU-aer, ga-gner, £t^, au-tomnet hi-
Tar, prin-tem/M.
Mouilld. Humide.
Agreable. Aimable.
Dormir^ dormi (as sortir, Les. 29). p
Jiefuser (de bef. mf.). Gagner (d bef.
inf.).
A cheval. A pied.
Get Hi. En hik or VM.
Get automne. En automne or rautomne.
Get hiver. En hiver or Thivcr.
Cc printemps. Au printcmps.
THE FUTT-SIXTH LESSON.
201
Is it dry ? No, it is wet.
Is it dark ? No, it is moonlight.
It is fine weather. It is stormy.
It is good walking. It is slippery.
It is foggy. It is muddy.
It is night. It is day.
It has been windy and dusty.
It will be sunny.
The mud. The diut.
By. By mistake.
Fait-il sec ? Non, il fait humide.
Fait-il obscur ? Non, il fait clair dc lunc.
II fait beau temps. II fait de Torage.
II fait bon marcher. II fait gllssant.
II fait du brouillard. II fait de la boue.
II fait nuit. II fait jour.
II a fait du rent et de lapomnere,
II fera da soleil.
La boue. hii poussicrc.
Far. Par m^prise.
1. Voulez-vous bien me preter ces ceuvres de F^nelon ? 2. Tr^s-
volontiersy moDsieor. 3. Gombien yendez-vous cette chaine ? 4. Je
la vends cinq dollars. 5. Avez-voas pris ma plame ? 6. Je Tai prise
par m^garde. 7. Avais-tu appris ta le^on quand tu as la le joar*
nal ? 8. Je Tavais apprise. 9. £tiez-vous revenus de la campagne
qoand vons avez va mon p^re ? 10. Nous en etions revenus. 11.
Voire frdre avait-il lu cet ouvrage quand il me Ta prete ? 12. 11
Tavait la. 13. Vos frcres 6taient-ils allcs d Tccole quand vous 6tes
vena chez noos ? 14. lis y 6taient alles. 15. £tais-ta alle ^ la
campagne quand nous sommes all6s cbez toi 1 16. J'y etais alle.
17. Vos fr^es avaient-ils appris le fran^ais quand ils ont ^tudi6
Tespagnolt 18. lis pouvaient parler un peu frangais. 19. Avez-
vons beaucoup d'app6tit en automne ? 20. J'ai beaucoup d'app6tit
en automne et en hiver (I'automne et I'hiver). 21. Irez-vous ^ la
ville & pied ou a cheval ? 22. Je n'irai ni & pied ni ^ cheral, j'irai
en bateau k vapeur. 23. Ce pauvre homme n'a-t-H pas beaucoup
de chagrin? 24. Si, madame, il est tres-malheureux. 25. Que
desirez-vous acheter 1 26. Je ddsire acbeter une chaine d'or et une
boite d'allumettes. 27. Ces 6coliers studieux refusent-ils de r6citer
leors lemons ? 28. lis ne refusent pas de les reciter. 29. Gagnez-
vons beaucoup d*argent ? 30. Je n'en gagne pas beaucoup.
1. Do you promise to come and see me soon ? 2. I promise to
come (go) and see you to-morrow. 3. Is that studious man amia-
ble ? 4. He is very amiable. 5. How is the weather t 6. It is
fine weather. 7. Is it not cold 1 8. No, it is neither warm nor
cold. 9. Is it not damp ? 10. No, sir, it was damp this morning,
but it is dry now. 11. Is it uot dark this evening? 12. No, sir,
it is moonlight 13. Is it not slippery? 14. No, it is good walk-
it IS IS7
boa«, poa«-fli£r^.
202 THE FIFTY-SIXTH LESSON.
ing. 15. Is it not muddy? 16. No, it is neither muddy nor dusty.
17. Is it very good walking ? 18. No, sir, it is a little slippery.
19. Has not that poor man much sorrow t 20. He has had much
sorrow, but he is happy now. 21. Will you buy a chain of gold or
of silver? 22. I. shall buy a gold chain. 23. Hare you some
matches ? 24. I have a box of good matches.
25. Have you much appetite in autumn ? 26. Yes, I have more
appetite in autumn than in summer. 27. Do you sleep more in
winter than in spring? 28. No, sir, I sleep as much in spring as
in winter. 29. Do we sleep more than you ? 30. No, you sleep
less than we. 31. Do those scholars sleep much ? 32. Yes, they
sleep too much, but the master does not sleep enough. 33. Do those
shop-keepers gain much money ? 34. They gain much. 35. Do
you gain more than they ? 36. No, I gain less than they. 37.
What weather is it ? 38. It is very agreeable weather (un temps).
39. It was dark last night ; will it not be dark to-night ? 40. No,
sir, it will be moonlight. 41. Do you take exercise frequently? 42.
I take exercise morning and evening.
OPTIONAL EXERCISES.
1. Has it been foggy this week? 2. Yes, sir, but it is dry now.
3. Is it good walking ? 4. It is good walking, but it has been slip-
pery. 5. Why do you extinguish the lights ? 6. I extinguish them
because it is day. 7. Did the American buy his pictures on credit
or for cash? 8. He bought them for cash. 9. What is the matter
with you? 10. I have a violent toothache, and my thumb pains
me. 11. They speak much of the new work of Dumas ; have yon
seen it ? 12. I never read his works. 13. Why ? do you not like
them? 14. They are not to my taste. 15. I have heard that
Dumas writes very well.
16. I am going to buy a lamp ; I have broken mine. 17. Do
you wish for a small one or a large one ? 18. I wish for a large
one. 19. How did you break yours? 20. I let it fall {iamber),
21. Is this one good ? 22. Yes, it is exactly Uxa4:iement) what I
wish. 23. For how much do you sell a lamp like (comme) this ?
24. I will let you have it (at) two dollars. 25. Well, I take it ;
have you some matches ? 26. Yes, I have some ; how many boxes
do you wish for ? 27. Six or eight boxes {ce) will be enough.
THE FIFTT-SEVEKTH LESSON.
57.— CINQUANTE-SEPTIfiMB LEgON.
THE IBBEeULAJt IMFEBSONAL VERB FALLOHL
Im it neeeuary f Faut-il f or, Est-^l nSeeuainf
It 18 oeceraarj. IlfatU^ il est ndceasaire.
Was it necessary? It was necessary. FaUait-ilf llfaUaiU
Has it been necessary ? It has been A-i-ilfaUut Ilafalla.
necessary.
Had it been necessary f It had been Avaii-UfaUuf II ayait fallu.
necessary.
Win it be necessary? It will be ne- Faudra-t-Ut II faudro.
cessary.
1. FaUoir and itre n^CMBaire may be used alike, except negatlrely, bat the fonn«r
Is a little stronger. When a person is naed with/tUloir^ if it be a pronoon. It is the indlreet
olject ; if a aonn, it is preceded by ik
I need (must have) a string. II me faut un cordon.
He must have a horse. H lui faut un cheyah
They will need money. H leur faudra de Fargent.
That man must have money. H faut de Targent k cet homme.
He must write a letter. H lui faut 6crire une lettre.*
To hixve a mind, detire^ fancy (for). Avoir envie (de) {dt bef. n. and inf.).
Haye yon a fancy for my pen ? Ayez-vous enyio de ma pltmie ?
I haye a deare to learn French. tTai enyie d'apprendre le fran^ais.
To ruHy runninffy run, Courir^ courantj eouru,
Jeeatu^ tu court, il courts nouteouroMf voutcourtB, titeourent^
Iron, thou mnnest, he runs, vemn, yon ran, they ran.
2. The ftitare of courir is irregular by dropping the i.
J'^eourrai, tueomroJi, Ucourra, nouM courron$, voue eourrea, UtcourrofU,
Ishallmn, thoa wilt ran, he will run, we shall ran, you will run, they will nuL
Topercdve, descry^ perceiving, perceived Apereevoir, apercevant, aperfv.
Do you perceive that light ? Apercevez-yous cette lumi^re ?
I perceiye it. Je raper9oi8.
To give pleasure. To please. Faire plaieir, Plaire.
&. These two verbs always goyem the dative ; i. e., they always take the noon preceded
by d, or the indirect objecttve pronoun.
He pleases his father, his father is II plait k son pere.
pleased with him.
He pleases him. H lui plait.
You win please me by your good con* Vous me ferez plaisir par votre bonne
duct. conduite.
* When /bZMr, with a person, is followed also by a verb, the conjunction que with the
sabjunctive is generally preferred.
17 ^fi T i.Tian iisosis iswisi isnu
^ tkioL n6-«e«-eairtff fa^lait, iU-la, Iku-drn, fti-loir, en-viei eon*rir. oou-ranl, eoa-m, eoora
-IS un usM u«rr4soiT4Si7iir
eoor^ ooa-ron«, cou-rei^ oourefti; ooor-rai, a-per-ce-volr, a-per-cc-vani; a-per-^ plaira.
204 THE FIFTY-SEVENTH LESSON.
I am pleased with him. H me platt, or, Je snis content de Im.
If they come, will you perceive them ? S'ils Tiennent, les apercevrez-vous?
I shall perceive them. Je les apercevral.
MASCULCVS.
rsirnmrc
The strinff.
Le cordon.
LanuKie.
A mile.
A hoe.
Un miUe,
Une Aoue.
The middle.
The Bpad£,
Le milieu.
La beche.
Interest.
The ikovtl.
L'int6r6t.
Ukpelle.
The least.
An ax.
Le moijidrey le moina.
Une kache.
4. Mbindre is an a^ectiye, and belongs to a noun ; moint is an adverb, and modlfles a
verb, atJ^ectiTe, or adverb.
He has not the least courage. II n'a pas le moindre courage.
He studies the least. II ^tudie le moins.
In the middle of the path. Au milieu du chcmin.
Cheap, A plow, A bonmarcIU, Une cAarrue.
Dear. A cart. Cher, Une charrette.
Strong, A wheelbarrow. Fort, Une broueite.
Interestedly^ from interest. Disinter^ Far interet. Sans interet
eitedly.
To go a mile, Faire un mille.
I shall go ten miles. Je ferai dix milles.
They sell cheap, but I sell cheaper Ilsvcndentiibonmarch^,maisje vends
than they. d meilleur march^ qu^eux.
1. Que faut-il (est-il necessaire de) faire ? 2. II faut apprendre
nos lemons. 3. A-t-il fallu (6t6 necessaire de) travailler ? 4, II a
fallu (ete necessaire de) travailler beaucoup. 5. Faudra-t-il (sera-
t-il necessaire de) aller a la rividre ? 6. II ne faudra pas y aller.
7. n faut une houe au jardinier. 8. H nous faut une charrette et
une brouette. 9. II a fait chaud la semaine passee, mais k present
il fait un temps agr^able. 10. Ge marchand ne rend-il pas chert
11. Non, il vend a bon marche. 12. Courez-yous plus vite que
moi T 13. Je ne cours pas aussi {or si) vite que vous. 14. Get
etranger fait-il plaisir k votre ami par interet ? 15. Qui, il ne rend
pas le moindre service sans interet 16. Apercevez-vous celui que
vous cherchez ? 17. Nous Papercevons et il nous aper^oit, 18.
Ces enfants courent parce qu'ils ont peur de la pluie. 19. Nousne
courons jamais, mais ces petits gardens courent beaucoup. 20.
Vous faut-il quelque chose 1 21. II me faut un cordon et une beche,
et il faut au paysan une pelle et une hache. 22. Le jardinier a-t-il
tout ce qirU lui faut t 23. Non, il lui faudra encore un charrue,
M « lft\ n » MM* 8 U fB 7" 1 9 SS IS
cor-don, moda Inilld, hoatf, mi-li«n, bteb«, in-to-re/; pell«i hachf. 'dur-raa, ohsi^retta^
fort, bToa-et<«.
THE FIFTT-SEVENTH LESSON. 205
ime charrette et nne grosse bronette. 24. Ce cheval est-il fort ?
25. II est fort et bien doax. 26. Courrez-vous si vous voyez le
gros chien f Je conrrai.
1. What does the blacksmith make ? 2. He makes hoes, spades,
eboTels, axes, and plows. 3. Why does that cat rnn ? 4. He rans
because he perceives the dogs. 6. Why do you run ? 6. We run
because we perceive the storm. 7. If you see your brother, will you
not ran to him? 8. I shall run to him. 9. Of what has the wash-
erwoman need ? 10. She has need of a cord or of a long string.
11. Will you go a mile this morning? 12. I shall go two. 13.
Where does the servant put the hoe and the ax ? 14. He puts the
boe in the middle of the garden, and he puts the ax in the middle
of the yard. 15. Is not butter dear? 16. Yes, every thing is dear
now. 17. Does not the merchant sell dear? 18. No, sir, he sells
very cheap ; he has not the least profit.
19. Have you seen the sister of my friend ? 20. I have seen
ber; she is pretty and very amiable. 21. Had you written your
exercise this morning when the master came ? 22. I had written
it. 23. Had your brothers gone to school when I saw you yester-
day? 24. They had gone there. 25. Of what have you need?
26. I must have some cxmdles or a lamp. 27. Do you perceive the
traveler? 28. I perceive him, and he perceives me. 29. Do you
take much exercise? 30. Yes, sir, I go two miles in the morning
and two miles in the evening. 31. Is any thing the matter with
yon? 32. I have a pain in my thumb. 33. Is the workman in
want of any thing? 34. He is in want of a wheelbarrow and a
cart 35. Labor is the least of evils, consequently {conseqttemmeni)
it is the one which I feel the least
OPTIONAL EXEBCISES.
1. Have you read the works of Lamartine ? 2. I have read a
few of them. 3. What will the weather be to-morrow ? 4. It will
be cold. 5. Will it be good walking ? 6. It will be slippery. 7.
Does that sailor like to go on foot ? 8. He likes better to go on
foot tban to go on horseback. 9. Whose is (A qui est) that dog
^bich is following you? 10. It is a dog that one has given me.
11. I have never seen him follow you. 12. He does not follow me
often, but he has broken his cord this morning. 13. Why do you
not buy him a chain ? 14. I have one which I bought, and which
he cannot break.
15. Let OS go and take the air in the country to-morrow. 16. I
206 THE FIFTT-EI6HTH LESSON.
am perfectly {bien) willing ; the air of the city is not good. 17. It
is not so good in summer as in winter. 18. What are yon doing t
19. I am patting my linen in (a) the air. 20. Fat it on this cord.
21. Let us open the door ; the air of this room is warm. 22. Yes ;
but is not the air of the street too cold t 23. It is not very cold
to-day. 24. Do not open the door ; open the window. 25. Where
are you going? 26. I am going into the yard to look for some-
thing. 27. Do not go in the air nor in the son without a hat. 28.
I am not going to stay long, and my hat is in the other room. 29.
Put on mine ; I do not want it. 30. Well, give it to me, if you
please. 31. It is a little too small ; put it on, however {toujours).
58.— ClNQUANTE-HUITIilME LEgON.
TEAN8LATI0N OP PAKTICIPIAL NOUNS.
1. The English participial noon is commonly- rendered into French hj the inflnitiTei
Is studying much agreeable to you ? Voua est-il agr 4able d^Hudier bcaucoup?
Heading at night hurts my eyes. Lire la unit me fait mal aux yesx.
Writing at night is still worse. ikrire la nuit est encore plus maarai«.
2. Prepositions followed by Terbal expressions in English take the inflnlttre in FreocL
JSh, as will be seen hereafter, is an exception.
Do you gain much by doing that ? Gagnez-vous beaucoup hfain cck?
I have a fancy /or learning French. J*ai envie d^apprendre le fran^is.
He recites his lesson mthoiU making a II recite sa le^on eanM faire de faute
mistake. (or une faute).
8. Pour before a nonn or pronoun means ybr; before an inflnitlye it moans (o, or <»
order to.
For me. For him. For them. Pour moi. Pour lui. Pour eux.
He will come to see you. H viendra pour yous voir.
I study in order to learn. «r6tudie pour apprendre.
4b Participles osed as a4)eetiTe8 always agree with their nouns.
Clothes made in the new fashion. Des habits /ai^ & la nouvelle mode.
A gown made in the old fashion. Une rohefaite k la vieille mode.
In the fashion. In the French fiishion. )l la mode. A la mode fran^aise.
Future o/BAYOin^ to know. Irregular.
Jeeaureti, tueauras, ileaura, noueeaurone, wnueaureB, 4te eauroni,
I shall know, thou wilt know, he will know, we shall know, you will know, they will know.
If it rains, will you know it ? S'll pleut, le saurer-vous ?
I shall know it. Je le saurai.
To appeoTy appearing, appeared Paraitre, paraissant, paru (as otmnai-
tre).
If sit ITS in
sau-rai, pa-raltre, pa-nd«-sani; pa-ru.
THE FIFTT-EIGHTH LESSOX. 207
This motion, impulte. Early. Co mouivemtni. De bonne heure,
A lawytr. Sooner. Un avocat. Plus tot,
A motive. Rather, Un motif y mobile, Plutot,
& PlutH, on« wordi means rather ; plus tot, two words, means sooner.
You will return sooner than I. Vous reyiendrez plus t6t que moi.
I will do good rather than evil. Je feral du bien plut6t que du mal.
An action^ faetj deed. Earlier. Vnfait^aete. De meUleure heure,
6L Tait means something aocompllshed; acts expresses action, or the result of action.
Btmday^ on Sunday. Le dimanehe^ dimanche.
Monday^ on Monday. Le lundi, lundi.
Taesdai/y on Tuesday. Le mardi^ mardl
Wednesday, on Wednesday. Le mererediy mercredi.
Thursday^ on Thursday. Lejeudi, jeudl.
Friday^ on Friday. Le vendredi, rendredi.
Saturday^ on Saturday. Le samedi^ samedi.
Almost. Perhaps, Presque. PeutStrc,
7. The article Is used with the days of the week to denote whst is habitual or periodi-
cal (when the plaral may be nsed in English) ; also when they are used definitely. Used as
adTerbs, they take neither article nor preposition.
They return home Sundays. Us reviennent chez eux le dimanche.
I shaU be here on Sunday. Je serai ici dimanche.
She comes here Saturdays. Elle Tient ici le samedi.
We will return on Saturday. Nous reviendrons samedi.
1. Est-ce que je parais malade t 2. Non, monsieur, vons parais-
8ez ^tre en bonne sante. 3. Fait-il nait f 4. H fait nuit, et la
lone et les etoiles paraissent. 5. Les faits de cette histoire sont
extraordinaires. 6. Ce cheval a les mouvements beaux. 7. Be-
viendrez-Tous lundi on mardi ? 8. Je reviendrai de bonne heure
lundL 9. Vous para!t-il agreable d'^tudier beaucoup 1 10. Cola
me parait agreable et utile. 11. Quand irez-vous chez Tavocat ?
12. ePirai mercredi. 13. Eevenez-vouB de chez lui k present? 14.
J'en reviens. 15. Allez-vous au marche de bonne heure ? 16. Oui,
mais Tons j allez de meilleure heure que moi. 17. H n'a pas fait
froid cette semaine ; n'est-ce pas ? 18. Si, presque toute la semaine,
mercredi, jeudi, vendredi et samedi. 19. Get homme yous rend-il
service par interett 20. Oni, I'interet est son seul motif (mobile).
21. Si mon fr^re vient ici, le saurez-vous? 22. Nous saurons la
le^n plus t6t que vous, et mon cousin la saura plus tdt que nous.
23. cTapprends le frangais mais non pas Tespagnol. 24. Le maitre
IS S U 1 U 1 U19 U 13 a 17 7 1 M S » U 1
-nonr^-nieni:, heme, s-yo-cai mo-till mo-hile, plu-td<t fiii^ «ct«, dl-manch^ lun-dl, mar-
dl, mcr-ezv-di, Jea^di, Ten-dre-di, same-dif prceke^ peu-tAtra.
208 * THE FIFTY-EIGHTH LESSON.
est alle chez lui ; peut-Stre qu'il reviendra bientot. 25. Silence,
restez tranquille : cet enfant est le mouvement perpetueL
1. Does the washerwoman wish for any thing t 2. She wishes
for a long string and some soap. 3. What does the gardener need?
4. He needs a shovel, an ax, a plow, a cart, and a wheelbaiTOw.
5. Is that servant useful to you? 6. No, he does not render me
the least service. 7. Does the shop-keeper sell cheap ? 8. No ; be
sells very dear. 9. How is the weather ? 10. It is cold this morn-
ing. 11. Is it not night? 12. It is night, and the stars appear.
13. Do those ladies appear to you amiable? 14. Yes, they appear
to me very amiable. 15. Does that man appear to you lame! 16.
Yes, sir, he is lame ; he has a pain in the left foot. 17. Are yon
returning from the lawyer's ? 18. I am returning from his honse.
19. Has your partner gone to the lawyer's? 20. No; he went
early this morning to the country ; perhaps he will return to-day.
21. Is the motion of this boat agreeable to you ? 22. No, it is
not agreeable. 23. That man obliges {rend service a) every body;
what is his motive ? 24. Interest is his only motive. 25. Do you
know any one without fault ? 26. I know no one without fault
27. This new history is extraordinary ; it is full of strange facts.
28. Do you go out early in the morning? 29. Yes, ))ut my
brother goes out earlier than I. 30. Will you go to school earlier
than your cousin? 31. I shall go earlier than he. 32. Had your
brother gone to school when we saw you this morning? 33. He
had gone there. 34. Had you recited your lesson when we recited
ours ? 35. I had recited it. 36. Has that child courage ? 37.
He has not the least courage. 38. Is it warm this evening ? 39.
No, it is almost always in the evening that it is the least warm.
OPTIONAL. EXERCISES.
I. See that pretty little dog which follows that lady ; he is
very small and all white, the pretty little animal ! 2. Do you like
dogs ? 3. I like them much ; I like dogs and horses ; they are good
animals. 4. The horse is a very useful animal. 5. You are right,
he is an animal very useful. 6. Is it healthy to {de) stay in the
air without a coat? 7. It is not healthy. 8. Well, let us go and
put on our coats. 9. Yes, I feel that the air is damp this morning.
10. Damp air is not healthy in the city [en ville) ; in the country
we do not think of it.
II. Who gave you that great box? 12. No one gave it tome ;
I bought it. 13. What will you do with it ? 14. I am going to
THE FIFTY-NIKTH LESSON. 209
give it to the gardener to (pour) pat his tools in (it) (y). 15. What
tools will he put in it f 16. He will pat in it his hoe, his spade,
his shovel, his ax, and some other tools. 17. Is that hox long
enoQ^h to pat a hoe or a spade in (it) 1 IS. Yes, it is long enough.
19. They say that you have a fine garden. 20. Yes; oar new
gardener has made (rendu) it very fine. 21. Have you a plow ?
22. No, we have none. 28. I have one, and it is at your service,
if yon wish for it 24. Thank yoa, hut we have no need of it ; we
do every thing {tout) with (a) the spade.
25. Will you return from the river earlier than your hrotherst
26. No ; they will return earlier than we. 27. When wilt thou go
to Boston t 28. I shall go there on Monday. 29. WUt thou re-
tnm on Tuesday t 30. No ; I shall return on Wednesday or Thurs-
day ; my brother will return on Friday, and my cousin will return
on Satorday or Sunday.
59.--CINQUANTE.NEUVIfiME LEgON.
D£6£E£S OF COMPASISON.
1. There are ihxee degrees of comparison, thtpoHUes^ eomparaiitt^ and tuptrlaUv*,
Sl Of compantiTes there are also those ot superiority^ equality, and ir^feriortty.
8. The comparatire Is formed by placing before the a(^ectlve the adverbs plu» for sn-
perioxi^, avsH for equality, and maint for inferiority, and que after it Thus :
Small, tmaUer^ a» tmaUy leu snuUl. Petit, plus petit, auui petit, moins
petit.
SUgant, fnore eUgantj <u elegant, leu Elegant, pltis iUgatit, aussi iligant,
elegant. moine ilegant.
i. Many adrerbs are compared in the same way as a^jectiyes.
EaaOy, more easily, as easily, less ea- Faeilement, plus faeilement, aussi fa-
nig* cilement, moins faeilement,
6, When qnaatitiea are compared, phis, a/uUimt, moins are used with de before the ob-
ject eompared, and que de before the one it is compared with ; as,
More butter than bread. Plus de bcurrc q\te de pain.
As much of this as of that. Autant de celui-ci que de celui-lL
Less money than clothes. Moins (f argent que cThabits.
& The snperlative is formed by prefixing the article U, or a possessiTe a^ectiTS, to the
eompanUTC of superiority or inferiority.
Small, smaller, smallest. Petit, plus petit, le plus petit. \
Cold, less cold, least cold, Froid, moins froid, le moins froid
7. There are a few Irregularities. MeOleur and le meilleur are sometimes used for the
comparatire and superlative of bon ; moindre and le moindre for those of petit; mieuat
and le mieua for those of bten ; pire and le pire for those of mauvais ; pis and le pie for
thoee of maiL
My foot is smaller than yours. Mon pied est plw petit que le v6tre.
His foot is the smallest, T\.Kle plus petit pied.
s s s
^IHianl
210 THE FIFTY-NINTH LESSON.
TluB scholar is less studious than that Get ^l^ve est tnoins studieux qae
celui-llL
That one is the least studious of all. Celiii-llt est le moins studieux de toua.
It is my best horse ; he is the best that G'est mon meUleur cheval ; c^est U
I have. meilleur que j^aL'
8. IHua petit more commonly applies to what is measured ; mdndre^ to what Is valaed.
My brother is smaller than I. Mon frdre est plus petit que moi.
He is the smallest of the family. C^est le plus petit de la famille.
His talents are less than yours. Sea talents sont moindres que les
votrcs.
He is the smallest of small minds. C'est le moindre des petita esprits.
Sweet, sweetened. To anstoer, SucrS. HSpondre {de before nouns).
The side. The liquor, cordial. Le c^S. La liqueur.
The chin. The sweet liquor. Le menton. La liqueur douce.
On this side. On that side. De ce cdt6-«i. De ce c6t4-U.
The spectacle, play. To the plaj. Le spectacle. Au spectacle.
His turn. , In his {or her) turn. Son tour. X son tour.
A pig, swine. A fat pig. Un eoehcm, Un cochon gras.
Something else. Nothing else. Quelque autre chose. Rien autre chose.
Consequently. I read the best. Consequemment. Je lis le mieox.
To keep. He keeps my letters. Oarder. II garde meslettres.
To fall. Tomber {itre for auxiliary).
He has fallen from a horse. U est tomb6 de cheval.
Do they come on this side or on that Yiennent-ils de ce c6t6-ci on de ce
side? c6UAh?
They come on this side. lis viennent de ce c6t4-ci.
Did you answer that man ? Atcz-vous r6pondu & cet homme ?
I answered him. Je lui ai r^pondu.
1. Avez-yous envie d'aller qnelque partt 2. Oiu, j'ai enTie
d'aller k la campagne. 3. Acbetez-vous des habits faits k la mode
frangaise ? 4. Non, j'ach^te des habits faits k la mode anglaise.
5. Avez-vous plus de fromage que de beurre 1 6. Non, moHsieur,
j'ai autant de beurre que de fromage. 7. Avez-vous moins de pcches
que de pommes ? 8. Non, j'ai moins de pommes que de peches.
9. Votre sceur n'est-elle pas plus grande que vous ? 10. Elle est
plus grande que moi, mais mon frere est le plus grand de la famille.
11. Votre cousin n'est-il pas moins studieux que vous? 12. Oui,
il est le moins studieux de I'ecole. 13. Vous lisez mieux que moi,
mais mon frcre lit le mieux. 14. Qu'avez-vous ? 15. J'ai mal au
menton. 16. Buvez-vous la liqueur sucr6e t 17. Je la bois. 18.
U14 11 It » < S 91 17 « U 11 S «l 5 1 It IS 11
xnolndre, pirtf, pl«, su-crd. r6-pondre, c6-U, U-kear, men-ton, spec-tacltf) tour, co-chon,
coa-6^-kA}f»-mon^ gar-dor, tom-ber.
THE FIFTY-NINTH LESSON. 211
Barez-yons qaelqne autre chose ? 19. Je ne bois rien autre chose.
20. Tombeat-vous souvent quand fl fait glissantf 21. Je tombe
qnelqaefois, mais non pas soavent. 22. Ma plume est meilleure
que la votre, cons6quemment j'^ris mieux que yous. 23. J'ai la
meilleare des plumes, et c'est moi qui 6crit le mieux. 24. Ma plume
est manvaise, celle de Charles est pire, la votre est la pire de toutes ;
cons^quemment j'^cris mal, Charles 6crit pis que moi, et yous
6criyez le pis de tous.
1. Do you answer all the letters of the captain ? 2. I answer
them (y). 3. Have you answered the doctor? 4. I have not
answered him. 6. When will you answer his letter t G. I shall
answer it on Thursday. 7. Do you keep the money that you gain ?
8. I keep mine, but my brother does not keep his. 9. What have
you a mind to do? 10. I have a mind to write some letters. 11.
Is this liquor sweeter than that ? 12. Yes, this liquor is sweeter
than that, but that of the cook is the sweetest. 13. Is this pig as
fat as that ? 14. No, this pig is less fat than that. 15. What
does that man buy ? 16. He buys a coat made in the old fashion,
and his wife buys a gown made in the new fashion. 17. Do you
take your sister to the play ? 18. I take her there.
19. Is that scholar as studious as his cousin ? 20. He is more
studious than his cousid, but he is less studious than his brother;
the son of the German is the most studious of all. 21. Do you
gpeak in your turn ? 22. Yes, each one speaks in his turn. 23.
That scholar's merit (meriU) is less than yours, but his brother's is
the least of alL 24. My ink is bad, yours is worse, and this little
boy's is the worst of all. 25. This little girl reads badly, her
brother reads worse, and her cousin reads the worst of all the school.
26. Is not your chin swollen 1 27. My chin is swollen, and I have
also the toothache. 28. Where is the roast pig ? 29. The cook
has carried it to the kitchen. 30. Is your friend coming on this
side t 31. No, he is coming on that side. 32. You learn French
and Spanish ; do you learn any thing else ? 33. I learn nothing else.
OPnONAL EXERCISES.
1. Have you seen the carriage which I have bought t 2. No ;
I have been told that you have bought a new one, but I have not
yet seen it ; is it large ? 3. Not very large ; I have need of a cart
also 5 mine is all (tou(e) broken. 4. I have seen some very good
ones at John the blacksmith's. 5. Are they large? 6. I saw some
212 THE SIXTIETH LESSON.
large ones and some small ones ; you bad better {ferez bien de) go
and see tbem. 7. Yes, I will go to-morrow ; I am in want also of
a little wbeelbarrow. 8. You will see some at bis bouse. 9. They
say tbat Jobn is a very good workman. 10. Yes, bis work is
strong, and does not break like (comme) tbat of so many otbers.
11. Tbe work wbicb tbey make at present is none too {pas trap)
good. 12. Tbey do not always take care to cboose good wood.
13. George, do you know wbere your little brotber is t 14. He
is in tbe middle of tbe road. 15. Can you tell me wbere my dic-
tionary and my grammar are? 16. Yes ; your brotber bas carried
(emportSs) tbem off into bis room. 17. He is studying bis lesson ;
but I do not yet know mine. 18. Have you not studied it yet?
19. I bave studied it a little, but not enougb. 20. Take my gram-
mar if you bave need of it. 21. You are very good ; if I do not
study, our master will be displeased {meconteni)j and be will be
rigbt
60.— SOIXANTlfiME LEgON.
PASSIVE VERB.
7h reward. To punish. Reeompenur, Punir.
To esteem. To despUe. Eetimer. Mq^rieer,
To correct. To neglect. Corriger. Nigliger (de bef. inf.).
The tlUef^ robber. Ignorant Le voleur. Ignorant.
1. Tns Pabsztb Vsbd is formed in French, as ia English, bj Joining the past portidple
to the aoxlllaiy Jtre,— the past participle agreeing in gender and nnmher with the aabject
oftheyerbb
lam loved. Je wis aimk or aimSe.
Thou art loved. 71* es aimi or aimie.
He is loved. She is loved. H est aimi. Elle est aimie.
We are loved. Nous sommes aimSs or aimie*.
^ , , ^ . i «w*^ or aimie.
Tou are loved. Vous ites •< . , • « •
( aimis or avnies.*
They are loved. lis sont aimis or elles sont ainties.
I was rewarded. J^etais recompense or ricompenaie.
Thou hast been punished. Tu as He puni or punie.
He had been neglected. H avail iti nigligi.
Sht had been esteemed. ElU avail He estimie.
We shall be despised. Xous serons meprises or miiprisiei.
tr 'tt t ^ J ^ { estimi or estimie.
Tou wul be esteemed. Vous serezX ,. , ^. .
( estimes or esttmies.
•When totu refers to but one, the participle is singular ; when to more than one. It b
plural.
• 31 8 « a w ft n « tut la n « s 12 s is 11 n u a
^ ,f«-<»°»-Pjn-«J'*.^P»»-»^fj«5-ti-mer, m^-^rl-zer^ cor-ri-ger, nd-gli-ger, To-leur. l-gno-tin^
r6-coni-pen-e6, pn-ni, n^-gli-gj, es-ti-m^, md-pri-ze.
THE SIXTIETH LESSOX. 213
2. By before the e^nt of a psaslTe verb to rendered by cfe when speaking of the aonti-
meots of the heart; by par, of actions phjsieal or mental
Thej were lored by their friends. EUes ^taient aim^ de leurs amis.
He will be punished by the master. II sera puni ^ar le maitre.
The exercises Tf ill be corrected by the Lcs themes seront corrigds par le ma!-
mftster. tre.
8. The paasire yerb Is not often nsed in French when the agent Is general or unknown.
Exptcaslona like the following, therefore, thoogh passlTe in English, mnst be active in French.
This house \stohe sold, Gette maison est d vendre.
That poor man is to be pitied, Ce pauvre homme est d plaindre.
That hoQse is to be let. Cette maison est d louer.
That is an animal to be feared. G^est un animal d eraindre.
It is said that he is sick. On dU quUI est malade.
We have been told that you are rich. On nou$ a dit que Toua fttes riche.
Instead of. To bring ^ to take to. Au lieu de. Amener.
4. Apporter is to bring by carrying ; amener, to bring without carrying ; etnparter a)ao
is to carry away; emmener, to load or take away.
Is there, are there / 77iere is, there are. Y a-t-il ? II y a.
Has or have there been f wis or vtere Y a-t-il eu f
there f
There has or have been, there was or were. H y aeu.
Will there be f There fcill be. Y aura-til f II y aura.
Was there f There was. Yavait-ilF Hyavait.
Had there been / There had been. Y avait-il euf II y avait eu.
He brings his sister. II amdne sa sosur.
He brings his book. H apporte son livre.
Are there some people at your house ? T a-t-il du monde chez vous ?
There will be some to-morrow. II y en aura demain.
There haye been many people at church H y a eu beaucoup de monde k P^glise
this erening. co soir.
1. Get homme neglige sa sante, il sera malade. 2. Ces 6coliers
negligent d'etudier, lis seront punis. 3. Get 61eve sera-t-il r6com-
pens^ ? 4. Non^ il est paressenx, il neglige ses legons, et il sera
puni an liea d'etre recompense. 5. Ces enfants sages seront es-
times an lien d'etre meprises. 6. Par qni ^tes-vous recompenses Y
7. Nona sommes recompenses par le maitre. 8. Nous serons aimes
de nos parents. 9. Ce voleor a-t-il etc puni ? 10. Pas encore,
mas il sera bientot puni. 11. Ce gros gar9on est tr&s-ignorant.
12. Ooi, il est si ignorant qu'il ne salt pas lire. 13. Yos themes
Bont-il corriges? 14. Non, mais ils seront bient6t corriges par le
maitre. 15. J^eA amene ma soeur ici, et j'y ai apporte sa malle.
16. N'y a-t-il pas un livre sur votre pupitre ? 17. II y en a un.
U • 1 <
lon-er, ame-ner.
214 THE SIXTIETH LESSON.
18. T a-t-il des papiers dans Totre tiroirt 19. II n'y en a pas.
20. N'7 a-t-il pas en beancoap de brnit dans la me hier an soir?
21. II 7 en a en beancoup. 22. T anra-t-H beanconp de monde chez
Yons demain ? 23. II y en anra beancoap. 24. Y avaitril bean-
coup de fruit k la campagne, quand vous y 6tiez1 25. 11 yen
avait beancoup.
1. Has the master given yon any thing? 2. Yes, sir, he has
given me a pretty book. 3. Has he given yon any thing else ? 4.
No, he has given me nothing else. 5. Is that tea sweetened ? G.
It is sweetened. 7. Are those pears good ? 8. They are sweet
and good. 9. Was your exercise finished when the master cor-
rected mine? 10. Yes, I had finished it, and the master had cor-
rected it. 11. Has that lazy scholar been punished t 12. Yes, sir,
and that studious scholar has been rewarded. 13. Who will be
esteemed and who will be despised? 14. The studious scholar
will be esteemed, and the ignorant scholar will be despised, lo.
When will the thief be punished ? 16. He will be punished next
week. 17. Is not that scholar ignorant ? 18. He is very ignorant ;
he plays instead of studying, and he will be punished by the master.
19. Do you correct your exercises ? 20. No, sir, the master
corrects them. 21. Do you not neglect your health ? 22. No, I
do not neglect it. 23. Do you play instead of stud3dng? 24. No,
sir, I have learned my lesson, and now I am going to play. 2^*
Are there not thieves in this city? 26. There are a few. 27. Were
there not some people at your house yesterday ? 28. Yes, there
were many there yesterday, and there wiU be many to-morrow.
29. Are there not some books on your table? 30. There are a fe^-
31. Do you answer all the letters that yon receive? 32. I answer
them. 33. Do you keep all the money that you gain ? 34. 1 do not
keep it all. 35. 1 have brought my little brother to school. 36. Hare
you brought his books also 1 37. I have brought them. 38. Hare
you brought any thing else ? 39. I have brought nothing else.
OPTIONAL EXERCISES.
1. Show me (faites-moi voir) the lesson ; let ns see if it is that
which I have studied. 2. It is this one. 3. Very well ; it is the
same. I know already the half of it ; I can learn it eas3y. 4.
Which is the more useful, the French or the Latin ? 5. The French
undoubtedly {sans doute) ; but I wish to know the Latin also ; ^^
you not intend to learn it ? G. I do not know yet ; I prefer the
THE SIXTT-FIBST LESSOX. 215
French. 7. Bat yon can learn the Latin also. 8. Tes, if I have
the time, for {car) I wish to learn also the Spanish and the German.
9. Do yon sometimes speak French to your sister ? 10. I speak
French to her sometimes. 11. She comprehends French very well ;
does she nott 12. Tes, and she speaks it snfiSciently well. 13.
Why do yon not always speak French to hert 14. I often forget
to do ity and besides {(Tailleurs) it is a little difficult for me. 15.
The more one speaks, the sooner one learns ; does he not? 16.
Certainly {certainement) ; one has need of study and of practice also.
17. Are the soldiers coming on this side or on that side ? 18.
They are coming on that side. 19. My father gives me money to
go to the play. 20. Does he give you any thing else? 21. He
gives me nothing else. 22. Has there been much fruit this sum-
mer? 23. There has been much. 24. Will there be much cotton
this autumn? 25. There will not be much. 26. What do you
buy? 27. I buy some apples. 28. Do you buy any thing else?
29. I buy nothing else. 30. Does that child fall often? 31. He
falls very often. 32. Do yon prefer the Spanish to the French?
33. No, I preier the French to the Spanish.
61.~S0IXANTE ET UNIfiME LEgON.
COMPABATIVES WITH ITS AND LE,
To touch. To oWf must, etc. Toucher. Devoir,
JDo yo» 0100/ / owe. Devez-vcue t Je dote.
They owe me money. Us me doivent de Targent.
He owes me gratitude. H me doit de la reconnaissance.
1. J>e9oir has maoy sfgnlflcatioiu in EngliBb, all denotiDg obllgatioii In tataie.
I most write. I should write. ^
I OQght to write. I have to write. \ Je dois ^crire.
I am to write. )
The breakfatt. To breakfast. Le dejeuner. Difeuner.
The dinner. To dine. Le cRner. Diner.
The tpord. The word (spoken). Le mot. La parole.
The cabhage. The earthy ground. Le chou. La terre.
At breakfast. At dinner, A dejeuner. A diner.
Coffee mth milk. Coffee without milk. Cafe au lait. Cafe noir.
Malieiaus, cunning. Malin. Maligne.
Short Charming. Court Charmant.
He is near-sighted. II a la vue conrte (or basse).
That man cultivates the earth. Get homme cultive la terre.
Take away that man. Kumenez cet homme.
IS 6 4 so SB 4 « S 9 e » • 17 1 IS 7 I 14 1 IS
ton-cher, de-voir, doU, de-Te0, dd-Jen-nef*, d!-ner, mo<, pa-role, terre, ma-lin, ma-ligne,
IS 1 s
coar^ ehar-manib
216 THE SIXTT-FIRST LESSON.
JoyouM. Joyeuz, J<n/euMe.
Crazy. Fou, FolU,
2. Fou becomes yM before a vowel or a silent A.
Wheats grain, A pancake, Le 6/«, grain. TJne crepe.
Buckwheat. Le earratin, le bU noir.
A buckwheat cake. ' Une erSpe de sarroHn (or de hU fiotr).
He wbhes for buckwheat cukes with II veut des crapes de sarrasin aubcurre
butter and syrup. et au tirop.
It is good traveling. It is good living. TXfait hon voyager. IXfait hon vivre,
a Comparatives of saperiority or inferiorltj take ne before the following verb, nnlev
the comparison be negative.
Tou have more money than I hare. Yous aycz plus d^argent que je n*en ai.
He drinks less than you drink. II bolt moins que vous ne bnvez.
I have no less courage than he has. Je n'ai pas moins de courage qu*il en a.*
4. Comparatives generally, when the following verb may have a participle, an a^j^^^'^**
or a verb understood, after it, require such verb to be preceded by le.
He is not so sick as he believes. II n^est pas aussi malade qull le croit.
That is not so difficult as they think. Cela n*cst pas aussi difficile qu^on le
pense.^
6. When a comparative of this latter kind is also one of superiority or Inferiority, and
not negative, it takes of coarse both ne and le before the verb.
They are richer than wo arc. Us sont plus riche que nous ne le
6omme&
He is more skillful than you believe. II est plus habOe que tous n« le croycz.
0. The pronoun li is commonly used before powsoir^ and some other verbs, instead of a
preceding verb repeated.
He learns as fast as he can. H apprend aussi vite quMl le peut.
He learns well when he will. II apprend bicn quand il le veuL
The Future c/touloib, to he willing^ ia irregular.
Jewmdrai, tutoudrae, ilwmdra, noua €Oudrons^ roueTOudrea^ HevoudrotU,
I shall wish for, thou wilt, etc, ho wiU, etc., we shall, eta, you will, etc, they will, etc
Will you want some paper ? Voudrez-vous du papier ?
I shall want some. J^en voudrai.
He has carried away my book. II a emport6 mon livre.
1. Devez-Yoas beaaconp d*argent? 2. Nous n*eii devons pas
beaiicoup. 3. Combien d'argent me dois-ta ? 4. Je ne te dois rien.
5. Touchez-Yous cet animal ? 6. Je le toacbe avec un b&ton, je ne
le toucbe pas de la main. 7. Cette dame est cbarmante ; elle aTair
aimable, mais sa soeor a l*air malin. 8. D^jeunez-vons chez voire
* Ke is not inserted in this last sentence because the comparison is negative,
t In these sentences a verb may be supplied, thus : He Unateoeiek ae he belU^ee (ttof
he i9\ That U not to digteuU aethey iMnk {it to he).
SDn» »nt U 14 • 1 1 14 19 17 It •
jo-yenos, jo-youxa, fol^ grain, er«pe, sar^ra-sln, si-rop, v<m-draL
THE SIXTY-FIRST LESSON. 217
ami ? 9. Non, monsienr, je dine chez lui, mais je d^jenne chei moL
10. Fait-il bon vivre en Europe? 11. II y fait bon vivre. 12.
Fait-il cher vivre k Paris ? 13. II fait anssi cher vivre h New York
qa'^ Paris. 14. L*Angleterre touche-t-elle &* la France ? 15. File
n'y tonche pas. 16. Y a-t-il en da caf6 an lait k d^jeoner ? 17. II
7 a en da cafe aa lait a dejeuner, et il y aura du caf(§ noir k diner.
18. n y aura da boeuf-roti a diner. 19. Je sais mieux le fran9ais
que mon fr5re ne.le sait. 20. Nous avons de meilleurs fruits que
vous n*en avez. 21. II a 6te pire, bien pire qu'il n'^tait. 22. Nous
sommes meilleurs qu'on ne le dit. 23. J*6tudie quand je le puis.
24. Savez-vous tons les mots de votre legon ? 25. Je les sais tons.
26. Allez voir cette pauvre femme, et dites-lui quelques bonnes pa-
roles de consolation. 27. Fait-il bon marcher ? 28. Non, il fait
beaocoup de bone.
1. Carry away these books. 2. Take away this child. 8. Does
not that child fall often when it is slippery ? 4. He falls often
when it is good walking. 5. My talents (talents) are less than
yoursy but this scholar's are the least. 6. Do those men owe you
money ? 7. They owe me much. 8. Do you still owe us some ?
9. We owe you a hundred dollars. 10. What art thou to do to-
morrow ? 11. 1 am to write many letters. 12. What is your little
brother to do ? 13. He is to go to schooL 14. Has the cook bought
some cabbages ? 15. He has bought some cabbages and some let-
tuce- 16. Why is that scholar so joyous ? 17. He is joyous be-
cause he knows his lesson well. 18. Do you touch that dog ? 19.
I do not touch him. 20. Does America touch Fngland ? 21. It
does not touch it 22. That man owes more money than you owe.
23. That maid-servant looks cunning ; is she as cunning as she
appears ? 24. She is more cunning than she appears. 25. That
man looks crazy ; is he as crazy as he appears ? 26. He is less
crazy than he appears. 27. My friend is very sick ; he has a ma-
lignant fever. 28. What is the matter with that man ? 29. He
is near-sighted. 30. How many words have you learned ? 81. I
have learned all the words of this page. 32. Is it always good
traveling in summer ? 33. It is always better traveling in sum-
mer than in winter. 34. Is that lady as charming as she appears ?
35. She is more charming than she appears. 36. Will thcat gentle-
• Thueher^ meaning to border npon^ takes d before ita object
10
218 THE SIXTY-SECOND LESSON.
man want coffee with milk or coffee without milk ? 37. He will
want some without milk. 38. What will you want to-morrow at
school ? 39. We shall want some books, some paper, some pens,
and some ink. 40. Those gentlemen will want some coffee with
milk, and some buckwheat cakes with butter and syrup.
OPTIONAL EXERCISES.
1. Paris is not more beautiful than London; is it? 2. Yes,
Paris is the most beautiful city in (de) Europe. 3. Hare you re-
cited your lesson in (de) French ? 4. Yes, 1 have recited it, and
Charles has recited his also. 5. How many mistakes did.you make ?
6. I made only one, but Charles made three. 7. He is not studious.
8. Not (pas) always ; but sometimes he recites his lesson well.
9. Show me {/aiies-moi voir) your exercise. 10. I have put it in
my copy-book. 11. Have you written {ecrit) it without a mistake ?
12. No, Mr. B. found in it two or three small mistakes. 13. I have
not yet written my exercise ; 1 have a mind to go and write it now.
14, Why have you not yet done it ? 15. I have not had the time.
16. All my lessons ara recited and I have nothing to do. 17. Go
and write your exercise, and after that {ensuite) we will go to the
city. 18. Wait for me, I shall not be long. 19. Where do you go
Sundays ? 20. I go to church Sundays, and I go to school Mon-
days and the other days of the week. 21. Do you go to school
Saturdays ? 22. There is no school Saturdays.
23. Will you see Mr. P. soon ? 24. I shall see him to-morrow
in the country at Mr. A.'s, where we are both {tous deux) going.
25. Do me the pleasure to give him a note which 1 am writing him.
26. 1 will do it with much pleasure. 27. It is necessary to give it
to me this evening, for {car) 1 must (t7 mefaiidra) set out to-mor-
row morning. 28. You must have a horse ; take mine, if you wish.
29. Thank yon, I have one already. 30. Well, when you have need
of one, mine is at your service. 31. You are very good.
62.— SOIXANTE-DEUXIfiME LEgON.
NAMES OF OOUNTEIES.
1. The tatote otpouvolr, to be able, is liregolar.
Jepourraif tupourras, ilpourra, notupourrant, wnitpourrmt Ctpourroni, '
I sbflU be able, thon wUt, etc, he will, ctc^ we shall, etc., you will, etc^ they wUl, etc.
To pray. I pray yon. Prier. Je vous prie.
To freeze. To produce. Geler. Produire(aseofiduire,Jj6S.M).
S. The names of conntrles take the article, and those ending in e are, with few excep-
tions, feminine.
M« « < IS an
pri-er, ge-ler, pro-doir^^
THE SIXTT-SEGONI) LESSON.
219
France.
England.
La France.
L'Angleterre.
Switzerland
Spaifu
La Suisse.
VEspagne,
Runia,
Prussia.
La Russie.
La Prusse.
Scotland.
Ireland.
VEcosse.
VIrlande.
Swedefi.
Italy.
La Suede.
Vltalie.
Twrkey,
Greece.
La Turquie.
IaQt^s.
ft. Those of other terxnlnationa are generally maacallno.*
Denmark. Portugal.
Canada. Peru.
Europe touches Asia.
Africa does not touch America.
Sweden produces iron.
I set out to-morrow for France, Swe^
den, and Denmark.
Le Danemark. Le Portugal.
Le Canada, Le Pbrou.
L*Europe touche h VAsie.
VAfriqtte ne touche pas k L^Am^rique.
La Su^de produit du fer.
Je pars demain pour la France, la
Su^de et le Danemark.
4. At, in, to, before names of oountries, is sn^/rom is always ds ; and after these prep-
ositions (fin, d€\ feminine names of eonntries, when without an a^ective, omit the article.t
We are going to Germany. Nous aliens en Allemagne.
It freezes much in Russia. II gUe beaucoup en Russie.
They come from Spain. Ha viennent d^Espagne.
fi. Before some masculine names of countries (mostly distant ones) au du are used in-
stead cfdde,asJs vais au Pirou; js wiis au Canada ; Je viens du Japan; Je reviens
duJ>anemart.
& Names of cities do not take the article.
Paris is more beautiful than London. Paris est plus beau que Londres.
He goes to Paris. II va & Paris.
New York is larger than Boston. New York est plus grand que Boston.
He comes from Boston. II vient de Boston.
7. These, howerer, derived from common noons, or having an adjective or its eqniva*
lent for part of the name, take the article.
He dwells at (or in) Havre. H demcure au Havre.X
He comes from New Orleans. H vient de la Nouvelle-OrUans.
& lUi after a superlative, and equivalent to <2^ Is rendered by de.
He is the richest man in our village. G^est Thomme le plus riche de notre
village.
France is the finest country in Europe. La France est le plus beau pays de
I'Europe.
9. After mal^ as wo have soen, d Is used to denote the part affected, de the name of the
aOmenL
I have sore eyes. J'ai mal aux eux.
He has a pain in the back. II a mal au dos.
How is your headache ? Comment est votre mal de t^te ?
How comes on your earache ? Comment va votre mal d'oreille ?
* The two names of oonntriea, Meaoique and Sengale, are tho only ones which are mas-
caline with a feminine termination.
t JSh Portugal, en Danemark, also are generally used.
X Havre formerly meant harbor. —
s «sw » 1 aa M n s w n a ^^^ " ^ '* «? J? « ?
FraocA, 8ais««. E»-p«gn«, Eu«-8ie, Prusw, 6-coe»*, Ir-land«, Suede, I-ta-l}^, Tur-kle, Qrice,
1 inaaiiiisisiiii" 14 * !«»»
Daae^nark^ Por-ta.gal, Ca-na-da, P6-rou, A-zie, Af-rlk«, Londre», Havre, Or-lo-an».
220 "^^^ STXTY-SECONB LESSON.
1. II gMe plus en Eossie qa*en Angleterre. 2. UEspagne et le
Portugal produisent du vin. 3. Pourrez-vous aller en Sa6de Tete
prochain ? 4. Je pourrai y aller. 5. Pourrons-nous aller en Prosset
6. Oui, et nous pourrons aussi aller en £co8se et en Irlande. 7.
Gele-t-il plus en Suede qu'en Italie 1 8. Oui, il ne g^le pas beau-
coup en Italie. 9. La Turquie est-elle plus grande que la Oi^cet
10. Oui, et la Prusse est plus grande que la Suisse. 11. AUez-yous
au Canada? 12. Non, je vais en Portugal. 13. Le Canada pn>-
duit-il du bl6 ? 14. Qui, le Canada produit du bl^, et le P^rou
produit de I'or. 15. L'Asie touche-t-elle k I'Afrique ? 16. Oui, elle
y touche. 17. L'Asie est-elle plus grande que I'Afrique ? 18. Oui,
et I'Am^rique est plus grande que I'Asie. 19. Allez-vons en AUe-
magne ? 20. Non, je vais d Londres et au Havre. 21. Yenez-vous
de Marseille ? 22. Non, je viens de la Nouvelle-Orldans. 23. Mes
enfants, ne toucbez pas k mes papiers ni aux fruits.
1. Will the workmen be able to do their work to-morrow I 2.
Noy they will not be able to do it this week. 3. Wilt thou be able
to learn thy lesson well ? 4. Tes, sir, and my brother will also be
able to learn his well. 5. Take away this child, I pray you. 6.
Take away this table also. 7. Is not that horse's neck too short ?
8. Tes, his neck is too short, and his legs are too short alsa 9. Do
you wish for some syrup t 10. Yes, sir, if you please. 11. Do those
trees produce any thing? 12. Yes, sir, they produce beautiful fruits
13. Is not France the most beautiful country in Europe? 14. Yes,
and Russia is the largest country in Europe. 15. Is not London
larger than Paris ? 16. Yes, London is the largest city in the world.
17. Is not New York larger than New Orleans? 18. Yes, New
York is the largest city in America.
19. Does Scotland touch Ireland? 20. No, Scotland touches
England, but it does not touch Ireland. 21. When will yon be
able to go to Europe ? 22. I shall be able to go there when I hare
a mind. 23. Will you be able to go to Italy this summer ? 24. I
shall be able to go to Italy, to Turkey, and to Greece. 25. Do yoa
dwell in Paris ? 26. No, I dwell in Havre. 27. When will you go
to New Orleans ? 28. I shall go there when I can. 29. Is your
friend irom Baltimore ? 30. No, he is from New Orleans. 31. Do
you dine at the general's to-day ? 32. No, I dine at my friend's ;
but I shall breakfast at the general's to-morrow. 33. Is there a
THE SIXTY-THIRD LESSON. 221
light in your roomt 84. No, there is none. 85. That man culti-
Tates (culiive) the earth. 86. There was coffee with milk at break-
fast, and there will be coffee without milk at dinner.
OPTIONAL EXERCISES.
1. Is not that man rich ? 2. Yes, he is richer than yon think.
8. What do those children wish for ? 4. They wish for buckwheat
cakes with butter and syrup. 5. Is there a church in this village ?
6. Tes, there are two. 7. Is there some wine at the bottom (au
fond) of that barrel ? 8. There is a little. 9. Is that man as sick
as he thinks % 10. He is not so sick as he thinks. 11. When will
yon learn your lesson ? 12. I shall learn it when I can.
13. How is the weather f 14. It is fine weather, but a little
cold. 15. That is nothing, if it is not damp. 16. No^ it is dry
weather. 17. It is good walking when it is cold. 18. To-day it
has been very windy (beaucoup de vent) and very dusty. 19. Go
and write your exercise, and we will go to the city. 20. Come with
me. 21. Why, have you need of me 1 22. No, I can write it with-
out you, but I like better to have company. 23. You can write it
better without me, and I want {fat besoin) to go out a little. 24.
Go, if yon wish, but do not set out without me. 25. No, I intend
to come for you (vous ekercker). 26. I shall be in the room ; re-
turn soon.
27. Are those ladies as amiable as they appear 1 28. They are
more amiable than they appear. 29. How many windows are there^
in your room? 30. There are four. 31. Will you be at home to-
morrow I 32. No, sir, I am to go to the country.
63.--soixante-troisi{:me lecon.
MONTHS, DATES, ETC.
To pats. To gather. Passer. CueiUir.
1. CueiUir haa Its presont and fhtnro like the first conjugation.
Do JOQ gather pears and plums f Cucillez-vous des poires ct dee pranesf
I gather apples and pears. Je cucille des pommes et des poires.
Js eusSUrai, iu eusUUras^ 41 eueiOertt^ notu euelUerons, vous eueUierst^ UseusUUroni^
I shall gather, thou wilt, etc, he will, etc, we shall, etc., you will, etc, they will, etc.
We shall gather flower& Kous cueillerons des fleurs.
The theater. Music. Le thedtre. La musique.
The opera. A passion. • Vopira. Une passion.
Are yea going to the theater (play)? Allez-Yoos an th^&tre (spectacle) ?
SL Speetaton who go for amusement would say au tpeetade rather than au tMdtrs,
3C via • s ss 15(19 nti
pa«-eer, cuell-lir, cueilk-ral, tAo>&tre, o-po-ra, pas-fiion.
222 THE SIXTY-THIRD LESSON.
8. When pare€ qut^ and other oomponnd words ending in que^ are repeated In a aee-
ond dAQoe, gue only is need.
That man falls because he is drunk, Get homme tombc parce qu^il est iyre,
and heeausB it is slippery. et ^^11 fait glissant
1F%t7€ you were breakfasting, and tff/uZtf Pendant que tous d^jeuniez, ei qye
you were reading, I studied. vous lisiez, j^^tudials.
4. Que is naed in the same way also for comme, quand, and «2, repeated in a second clana4.
As it is late, and as he is not here, we Comme il est tard, et ^'il n'est pas id,
will go home. nous irons chez nous.
When one is young, and tofun one is in Quand on est jeune, et que Ton est en
good health, he ought to be happy. bonne santd, on doit Atre heureox.
6. The names of the months are masculine.
January,
February.
Janvier.
Fevrter*
March.
AprU.
Mars.
Avril.
May.
Mai.
Juin.
July.
August.
Juillet.
Aout.
October.
Septembre.
Octobre.
November.
December.
Novembre.
Decemhre.
What day of the month is it to-day ?
; Quel jour du mois cst<e aujourdliui?
Quel quantieme est-ce aiyourd^bui?
(C'estledeux.
( Nous sommes ai
It is the second.
\ deux.
It is the third.
C*est le trois.
6k The French nse the cardinal numbers with all the days of the month except the
first, and in dates generally employ flgares.
It is the third. It is the fourth. CTest le trois. C^est le quatre.
In storCy stored. In the store. En magasin. Dans le magasin.
7. Dans has a sense precise, en more yagne. Thus dans Is always used with an article
or determinative adjectiye ; en generally withoat one.
I bare some flour in that store. tTai do la farine dans ee magann.
I have some in store (stored). JTen ai en magasin.
He is in the prison. H est dans la prison.
He is in prison (imprisoned). II est en prison.
Phikdelphia, December 15, 1861. Philadelphie, le 15 dccembre, 1861.
Zaie. He dines late. Tard. JX dine tard.
Before dining. Avant de diner (avanl takes debet inf. )•
He breakfasts earlier than I. H d6jcune de meilleure hcure que moL
1. Votre coasin lit-il plus que vous t 2. Oui, pendant que j'e*
cris et que j'ctudie, il lit. 3. Avez-vous du cidre? 4. J'en ai
beaucoup en baril. 5. N'y en a-t-il pas dans ce baril-ci t 6. II y
en a un peu. 7. Dejeunez-rous de meilleure beure que moi t 8.
Oui, mais je dejeune plus tard que notre voisin. 9. New York, le
B 13« S lis 1 1 II « Bl4 nil S IB « S U 15 U «
lan-vier, fe-vricrf mars, a-rrll, mai, Juin, joi-Uet, oofit, sep-tembre, oc-tobre, no-rembre,
si B 127 1
dd-oembre, kan-tieme, tart/.
THE SIXTY-THIBD LESSON. 223
5 Janvier, 1859. 10. J'ai rega yotre lettre da dix da mois dernier.
11. Boston, 12 F^vrier, 1860. 12. Qael jour da mois est-ce au-
jonrd'hoi ? 13. C'est le cinq. 14. Quel quantieme du mois est-ce
aajourd'hai? 15. C'est le sept 16. Nouvelle-Orleans, 18 Mars,
1856. 17. Ou passez-vous I'et^? 18. Je le passe d la campagne.
19. Qu'est-ce que vos voisins caeillent ? 20. lis cueillent des fruits,
et cette petite fille cueille des fleurs. 21. Aimez-vous la musiquef
22. Oui, c'est ma passion. 23. Allez-vous an spectacle (au th^&*
ire) t 24. Oui, je vais k Top^ra. 25. Quand cueillerez-Yoas vos
pommes ? 26. Je les cueillerai au mois d'octobre. 27. Je ne veux
pas ^rire mon th^me k present. 28. Yous ne devez pas dire^^ veius
etje ne veux pas.
1. Is your sister going to the opera? 2. She is going there; I
am going also to the play, but to another theater. 3. What flowers
art thou gathering? 4. I am gathering roses and violets. 5.
Wilt thou gather thy fruit to-day ? 6. I shall not gather mine, but
my brother will gather his, and our neighbors will gather theirs.
7. Do you pass the month of April heret 8. Yes, sir, but we shall
pass the month of May in the country, and our neighbors will pass
it there also. 9. March, April, and May are the months of spring,
and June, July, and August are the months of summer. 10. I pre-
fer September, October, and November to the months of winter. 11.
Does your sister like music ? 12. She likes it much ; it is her pas-
sion. 13. Lend me this book, I pray you. 14. Very willingly, sir.
15. Do you like better to go to the French theater than to go
to the opera I 16, 1 like better to go to the opera. 17. When will
you gather your fruit? 18. I shall gather it in autumn. 19. Those
little boys fall often because it has frozen much, and because it is
slippery. 20. That man is afraid because he has enemies, and be-
cause he has no gun. 21. Why is that man discontented ? 22.
He is discontented because he has the headache, and his teeth pain
him. 23. Do you breakfast late ? 24. No, sir, I breakfast earlier
than you. 25. Is there company at your house to-day? 26. There
is none to-day, but there will be some to-morrow. 27. Will you
please show me your letter? 28. I am quite willing. 29. I will
not write my exercise now. 30. Children ought not to say, I will
and I will not. 31. Some one has taken away my books.
224 THE SIXTY-FOUBTU LESSON.
OPTIONAL EXERCISES.
1. I have a fancy to go and work a little in the garden. 2.
What do you wish to do there 1 3. I wish to dig up {b^keA a
square (un carre) in order to put a few cabbages in it 4. I will go
with you ; I like to work (d) the ground sometimes. 5. I have only
one spade. 6. Send your boy to borrow that of the neighbor. 7.
YeSy he has one. 8. Charles, go to Mr. B.'s and ask him (demandez
lui) to lend me his spade, if he has no use for it, until {jusqt^d)
this evening. 9. Very well, sir ; have you not need of a hoe also?
10. Certainly {sans doute) ; but we have one : where is it? 11. It
is at Mr. B.*s ; he borrowed it yesterday morning. 12. Well, bring
it if he has no need of it.
13. Do you often work in the garden t 14. The work which I
do there is not extraordinary ; I leave that to Charles. 15. This
lettuce looks good (a bonne mine), 16. Yes, it is sufficiently fine.
17. I admire your garden ; it is very pretty. It is not very large.
18. Sufficiently for you; you have no need of one very large; you
keep (tenez) it very clean. 19. It is Charles who does all that ; it
is his work. 20. He does not look lazy. 21. No, he is a good fel-
low, and he has taste for work. 22. I see him coming {venir) with
the tools ; he did not stay long. 23. Well, gentlemen, take each
one the tool which you wish, and let us see what you are going to
do. 24. Give them to us. 25. I take the hoe ; you are going to
see something fine. 26. I like better to work alone. 27. As you
please (comme il vous plaira), we can do this without you.
64.— SOIXANTE-QUATRIEME LEgON.
VERBS IN OES, CSR, UEli, AND lER.
To seat, Beating^ seated, Asteoir, cMeyant^ aMM» e.
J^OMUdSf tuattUdtt^ Uassied^ nous a$8eyon*, voMOSteyeMt iiMtUBeymii^
I teat, thou seatcat, he scata, we seat, yon seat, they seat
Will you teat f I ihall Beat, Assihez-wmsf J^assicrai.*
To place^ placing^ placed. Placer^ plaint, placi.
To eat. To travel. Manger. Voyager.
1 Verbs In ger Insert a silent « after the g^ and verbs in ear a ocdilla ander tha e, In all
terminations before a and o.
J$ mange, tuman{fe9, ilmangt, nous mangtone^ roue nutngen^ Uemangent,
I eat, tboaeatest, be eats, we cat, yon eat, they eat
Je voyagwaU^ tu voijagwaUt ii voyagKtit^ nous toyagions^ wus voyagim, its toyaffwti^nt^
Itrareled, thou traTeledst, he traveled, we traveled, yon traveled, they traveled. ^
* The forms aswyerai and OMoirai are also used in the fatnre.
1 so 1 si?t 1 II 1 las 1 !•!< 1 sissi 1 Bias i ra i iss c
a«-s«oir, a«-BC-yanl a«-8is, a«-sie(f«, a«-6ie<f, as-ee-yoo^, as-se-yea, aa-aeyMil as-oi'^xal,
1 « IS I S I « »iai « t #>iii 7
pla-cer, pla^^an^, pla-cS, ouui'ger, vo-ya-ger, manga, ve-ya-geoia.
THE SIXTY-FOURTH LESSON. 225
0o you place f We place. Placez-vous ? Nous pla^ons.
S. Verba In iter take a dlieresU orer the < In the fiiBt and second pezvon plonl of the
Impeifeet, as noiujouioru, vow joulez^ we played, you played. Verba in Ur doable the i
In the lame pexaona, as nam itudiion^ voua Hudiies^* we studied, yon studied.
To tuffer^ aufferitig, suffered, Souffrir^ wuffratity tauffert, e.
To cover^ covering^ covered, Couvrir, eouvranty eouvert^ e.
& Sm^rir^ couerir^ and their oompoondsi are varied like ouvrir (Lesson 66>,
The «ty, heaven. Each, Le eiel (pi. cieuz), Chaqve^ chacun,
A eioud. Out of, Un nuage. Hon,
An inttruineni, Jl flute, Un instrument, VnefliUe,
A violin. Practice, Un violon. La pratique.
To play. To belong to. Jouer. Appartenir d, Hre d.
A. Jouer takes de before the name of the instrnment, and d before the game.
I play the violin, you play the flute. Je joue du violon, tous jouez de la flilte.
To play ball. To play cards. Jouer d la balle, Jouer aux cartes.
That Tiolin belongs to my brother. Ce violon appartient (est) ^kmonfrdre.
It belongs to him. II lui appartient (il est k lui).
JUaefy. Ready for dinner. Frit. Pr^t pour le diner.
& Frit takes pour before a noon, d bofore an infinitive.
He 18 Kady to dine. II est pr^t jt diner.
It requires much practice to speak II faut beaucoup de pratique poor
French. parler fran^ais.
6l Fdehi meaning sorry takes de before a noan, meaning angry it takes oontre* It
takes ds before the Inflnitive.
I am sorry for your misfortune. Je suis f(Lch6 de votrc malheur.
He is angry at me. H est fl&ch6 centre moi.
I am very sorry to lose that. Je suis bien iUch6 de perdre cela.
T. Claque is an adjective, and always used with a noun ; chaeun is a pronoun, and al-
ways used without one.
Each scholar will come, and each one Chaque 61&ve vicndra, et chaeun aura
will have his lesson ready. sa le^on prcte.
8. All adjectives may be placed after their nouns when they are qualified by adverbs.
He has salt as fine as this. H. a du sel aussifin que celui-cL
A very good book. Un livre bien bon,
1. Oa asseyez-vouB cet enfant ? 2. Je Tassieds sur cette chaise.
3. Od le maltre pla^ait-il les enfants? 4* II les pla^ait ear les
bancs. 5. Nous pla<;ons icl les enfants. G. J'ai les plumes que vous
avez plac^es sur la table. 7. Yoyagez-vous plus que nous ? 8. Non,
monsienr, je voyage moins que vous. 9. Votre fr^re voyageait-il
Tei^ pa8s6 pendant qn'il 6tait au Canada ? 10. H Toyageait toujours.
^ Tbff, however, is strictly according to the rule for forming the imperfect (Lesson 60).
It U U S U 7 U M 18 S 18 r 13 • M 10 , 1 1 M
soaf'Mr, annf-tnnt aouf-tert^ oou-vrir, cou*vrani; con-verf, ctel.cieuz,chak«,oha-cun,
a I ^i« M « i » nun i w m « i i « » *_^ J-
m-uge, bote, Ina-tru-mene, flat«, vl-o-lon, pra-ttktf, jou-er, ap-par-te-nlr, carte, prM.
lO*
226 THE SIXTY-FOURTH LESSON.
11. Ne souffirez-vous pas du froid 1 12. Je n'en souffre pas. 13. Ge
pauvre homme n*a-t-il pas souffert du froid? 14. II en a bien soufiert.
15. De quoi couvrez-vous votre livre t 16. Je le couvre de papier.
17. De quoi le domestique a-t-il couvert les pommes de terre ? 18.
n les a couvertes de terre. 19. Que mangez-vous 1 20. Nous man-
geons du fruit. 21. Mes papiers sont hors de leur place. 22. Ce
pauvre enfant pleure de chagrin. 23. N'y a-t-il pas un nuage aa
ciel? 24. II 7 en a plusieurs. 25. De quels instruments jouez-
Tous? 26. Nous jouons du violon et de la flute. 27. Ces instru-
ments Yous appartiennent-ils (sont-ils ^ vous) ? 28. Non, ils ap-
partiennent (sont) au maitre. 29. A qui (est cette flOte) cette fliite
appartient-elle?
1. Is your task well done? 2. It is well done. 3. At (de)
what is that lady laughing ? 4. She is laughing at those children.
5. Are there not some clouds in the sky ? 6. Yes, the sky is cov-
ered with clouds. 7. Has each scholar his task? 8. Each one has
it all {toute) ready. 9. To whom does that instrument belong?
10. It belonged to the musician formerly {autrefois)^ but now it is
mine. 11. Is the barber going up to his room? 12. He is going
up there. 13. Were you playing on the flute while we were study-
ing? 14. I was playing on the flute, and my brothers were playing
on the violin. 15. Has each scholar his book? 16. Yes, sir, and
each one studies well. 17. Are not your books out of their place?
18. My books are out of their place, and mj papers also.
19. Did you eat much fruit when you dwelt in the country?
20. I did not eat much because I had not mucL 21. Were you
traveling last summer while I was going to school ? 22. I traveled
in the month of August. 23. Where will you seat that child ? 24
I will seat him here in (sur) this chair. 25. That physician has
much practice. 26. Are not December, January, and February the
months of winter ? 27. Yes, and March, April, and May are the
months of spring. 28. June, July, and August also are the months
of summer, and September, October, and November are the months
of autumn. 29. Is that child weeping from rage (rape) ? 30. No,
sir, he is weeping from sorrow, because he has made some spots on
my paper.
OPTIONAL EXERCISES.
1. Where is Joseph ? I have not seen him this morning. 2. He
THE SIXTY-FIFTH LESSON. 227
is sleeping stilL The lazy one ! Go and call (appeler) him. 3. I
have already called (appele) him, bat he did not answer me. 4. He
did not hear you ; did yon open the door ? 5. No ; I am going to
open it, and call him again. 6. Joseph, your father calls (appelle)
yoQ ; come forthwith : what are yon doing in bed (au lit) ? 7. I am
sleeping ; it is good sleeping (t7 fait ban dormir) in the morning.
8. Yea, but it is not good sleeping all day {toute la jaurnee), 9. Is
it day already? 10. Is it day I do you not see the sun? 11. Is
it not the moon ? 12. Stay in bed, if you will ; your father will
come and call you, and make you know the difference {difference)
that there is between (entre) the sun and the moon. 13. No, thank
you ; I see well that it is the sun. 14. Tell (d) my father that I am
coming.
15. How is the weather out {dehonf) 1 16. It is very agreeable
weather. 17. Did it rain {a-t'ilplu) during the night? 18. No,
sir, it was moonlight all night 19. Open the window ; it is a little
dark in this room. 20. Will you have some fire ? 21. No, it is too
warm. 22. Had you finished your task when your father returned ?
23. I had finished it.
65.-50IXANTE.CINQUIt:ME LEgON.
FUTUBE PEBFECT TENSE.
1 Ths imrsE pkbpcot tenae Is formed In French as In Engliali, by Joining the past
ptrUdples to the fatore of tbe auxiliary: as,
Xawrai su^ tu aura* en, il aura eu, noui auront eu, vous aure» «u, iU auroni m*,
I shall have had, thou wilt, etc, he will, etc., we shall, etc., you will, etc, they will, ot&
Jetsraivsnu, tu »eraa venu^ Uteravenu^ ncua MroM venu*, «ofi« teres «eniM,
I shall have come, thou wilt, etc, he will, etc, we shall, etc, you will, etc,
As i€ront venut^ they will have come.
When I shall have received my money Quand/aurat refu mon argent, Je tous
I will pay you for this horse. paierai ce cheyal.
When he shall have breakfasted, he Quand il aura d^jeund, il sortira.
will go out.
Ton will have learned your lesson. Vom aurez appris votre leyon.
We shall have gone home. Noua Berons attit chez nous.
They will hayo returned. IU seront revenua.
To content. To move, Coruentir {d bef. inf.). Remuer, mwh
voir.*
Jemeuti tumeue, Umeui, noutmowDon% vouemawvea^ iUmeumeni^
I more, thou movest, he moves, wo move, you moye, they move.
* Mouvoir means to set in motion; se mowcotr, to be In motion; dUoger and dinUmi*
fr mean to change lodgings.
tiai«4»« MW t f uai us •
oon-sen-tir, re-ma*er, mon-voir, mens, meul. mon-vons, mou-vea, meuTsn*
228 TUE SIXTY-FIFTH LESSOX.
I consent to sell you my horse. Je consens k vous vendre mon chevaL
7b acquire. Acquired. Acquerir. Acqui^^ e.
J^aequi€r»f tu aequierSy U aegui^rt^ nous acqu^rofu, vou9 acquireM^ iU aequiirent^
I acquire, thoa acqoirest, he acqaizea, we acquire, yon acquire, they acquire.
The merchant acquires credit. Le marchand acquiert du credit.
?b die. Died. Mowrir (itrt for auxiliary). Mori, e.
Je meurs^ tu tneurs, U meurt, nous mouronSj vaus mourea^ Us msurentt
I die, thou dlest, hu dies, we die, you die, they die.
The poor sometimes die of hunger. Les pauvres meureut quelquefois de
faim.
The carpenters are moving the school Les charpentiers meuvent les bancs de
benches. I'^cole.
You have acquired many friends. Yous avez acquis beaoconp d^amia.
The sick man died this morning. Le malade est mort ce matin.
The hall. A sickness^ disease. Le hal, Une maladie.
The lot. Anger, Le sort. La colere.
That towel. Peace, Cet essuie-main. La paix.
War, A just war. La guerre, Une guerre juste.
During. Without doubt, certainly, Durant, Sans doute.
2. Jhirant implies the whole time through ; pendant^ some period during that tim«.
The army will stay in Italy during the L*arm4e restera en Italie durant Thi-
winter. ver.
They gained a battle daring the win- £lle a gagn4 une bataiUe pendant Thi-
ter. ver.
Does the barber appear angry? Le barbier parait-il f&ch6 ?
He appears so. H le parait
8. The pronoun le in French, like so in English, is often used in reference to a quality
or circumstance previously mentioned It may be taken as a general rule that when so of
this kind is expressed, or can be understood in English, Is is to be used in French.
Does she seem angry still ? Parait-elle encore f Ach^ ?
8be seems so. Elle le parait.
4. When le used in this way represents an adjective, or a noun used a^Jeetively, It is In-
variable; but when it represents a noun, or an adjective used as a noun, it agrees with it in
gender and number.
Madam, are you sick ? I am. Madame, 6tes-vous malade ? Je le* snia.
Are you the sick person ? I am. £tes-vous la malade ? Je la* suis.
Are you ministers? We are. ^tes-vousministres? Nous le* sommes.
Are you the ministers of the queen ? £tes-vous les ministres de la reine ?
We are. Nous les * sommes.
* In the first of these four answers, le is Invariable because It refers to an a^ecUve, aM
In the third becauM it rufers to a noun used a^ectively ; in the second it agrees becaiue it
refers to an adjective used as a noun, and In the fourth, because It refers to a noun.
1 6 IS 1 u 1 nr 1 isr 1 s n 1 isr u zi u u u
ae-k6-rir, ac-ki«, ac-klcrs, ac-kiort, ae-ku-rou«, ac-kldrett/, mou-rir, moriL roeur«, meurl
Utl U« U 1 IIUM M7ft SiU 1« T r S S
mou-rvns; mou-res^ meuren<, bal, ma-la-dia, sort, oo-ltoa, e«-sul-main, palae^ guerre, du-nnl
THE SIXTY-FIFTH LESSON. 229
1. Consentez-Yous k me donner ces essuie-mains t 2, Je con-
sens d vous les donner. 3. Les charpentiers peavent-ils mouvoir
cette maison ? 4. lis ne le peavent pas. 5. Acqa^rez-vous bean-
conp d*argent ? 6. Je n*en acquiers pas beaaconp. 7. Avez-yoos
acquis des amis ? 8. Nous en avons acquis quelqnes-uns. 9. Les
pauTres menrent-ils qnelquefois de froid ? 10. Qaelques-nns meu-
rent de froid en hirer. 11. Pref6rez-vons jamais la guerre k la
paix ? 12. Non, je pref^re toujours la paix k la guerre. 13. Voy-
agerez-vous durant tout cemois? 14. Je voyagerai quelques jours
senlement pendant T^te. 15. AUez-vous au balcesoir? 16. Non,
monsieur, je vals au spectacle et ma soeur va au bal. 17. Ce petit
garden est-il en colore contre quelqu'un? 18. II est en colcre
contre son frere. 19. N'allez pas dans la yille ; la maladie y est.
20. Son sort est d'c^tre malheureux. 21. Flagons le malade sur
cette chaise et asseyez I'enfant sur celle-1^. 22. Sa maladie est
longae. 23. Le m^decin viendra sans doute ici ce soir. 24. Le
voisin est mort hier ; et son fils est mort ce matin.
1. Can the servants move that cask? 2. They can move it
easily. 3. Does that man acquire credit t 4. He acquires credit
and profit 5. Has he acquired money! 6. He has acquired
money and friends. 7. Do the poor often die of hunger 1 8. They
often die of hunger in Ireland^ and in {dans) other countries of
Europe. 9. Do some die of cold ? 10. Some die of cold in winter.
11. He who has no courage dies a thousand times. 12. Are you
going to the ball ? 13. No ; I am going to the theater, and my
cousin is going to the ball. 14. Did you acquire much profit while
you dwelt in the city? 15. I did not acquire much. 16. Does
anger move (porte) the soldier to that action {action) 1 17. Yes,
sir, anger moves him to it. 18. Is your friend sick t 19. Yea,
and his disease is dangerous {dangereuse), 20. Do you wish for
towels or napkins ? 21.1 wish for towels.
22. Will your brother study mucht 23. Without doubt he
^ learn his lessons well. 24. There are some persons who prefer
war to peace. 25. Does that scholar consent to sell his books?
26. He consents to sell them. 27. Has that workman worked
during all the week ? 28. He has worked all this month. 29.
I^ you like better to play cards than to play ball? 30. No; I
prefer to play ball. 31. When I shall have finished my task, I will
230 THE SIXTY-SIXTH LESSON.
pl&7 on the violin. 32. The scholar will have learned his lesson
when the master comes. 33. Will joa have read that book when
I shall have need of it t 34. We shall have read it 35. The
scholars will have written their exercises when the master comes.
36. Madam, are you French? 37. I am. 38. Are yon the sister
of the Frenchman? 39. I am. 40. (Gentlemen, are you soldiers!
41. We are. 42. Are you the soldiers of the king? 43. We are.
44. When did the general die ? 45. He died this morning.
OPTIONAL EXERCISES.
1. It is (t7 fa%C\ very agreeable in the country at present ; there
are many persons who are going there. 2. Yes, in summer the
country is much more agreeable than the city. 3. The city is sad
now ; there are no amusements {amu^tmenUl) ; every body is going
to the country in order to pass the summer there. 4. The theater
is shut, is it not? 5. Yes ; I believe {je crois) that I have seen
(avoir vu) the announcement {Tannonee) of a new theater which
they are going to open next autumn. 6. I have not seen it, hut I
have been told that there wHl be one.
7. Do you often go to the theater? 8. No; I go there bat
rarely {rarement)^ but I go suflSciently often to the opera. 9. You
love music. 10. It is my passion ; there is nothing that I love so
much. 11. Music is a thing very agreeable ; but every body has not
so much taste as you. 12. Do you not prefer the opera to the
French theater? 13. 1 love them both (tons deux) sufficiently; bat
hardly know {ne sals gu^e) which I prefer. 14. How! you must
not (il ne faut pas) say that. 15. I like a good play (pi^e) better
than a bad opera. 16.' It is true that there is nothing more dis-
agreeable {desagreable) to hear than bad music. 17. Wilt thou
have written thy exercise when the master comes ? 18. I sha&
have written it. 19. Are you English ? 20. I am. 21. Are yon
the sister of Charles? 22. I am. 23. Are you the children of oar
neighbor? 24. We are.
66.— SOIXANTE-SIXItME LEgON
IBREGULAB FUTUBES.
To hope. An aeHon. Espirer, ITne aetion.
To fall tOf become due, ""Fallen to. kchoir (defective), tehu.
Tour note falls due to-day. Yotre billet 6choit aujourd*hui.
TTt^A all hie might. Together. Be toute sa force. Eneemhle*
Champagne wine. Xf/e, living. Du vin de ^ampagne. La vie.
f<«lU2l6M5tll«tt tl«U
0B-p6-rer, ac-tioD, 6-choir, i-chu, forc«, eD-sembl«, cham-pagiM, yie.
THE SIXTT^IXTH LESSOK. 231
Qyii€y peffeetltf. Quite charming. TouftJ^faii. Tout k fait channant.
It ifl a note fallen due yesterday. C^est un billet 6chu depuis hier.
1. i>«, like df befon the inflnitlye, la to be repeated before eyery yerb depending on the
laiDo word or phraeeu
He refuses to eat and drink. II refuse de maogcr et de boire.
They hare forgotten to read and write. Us ont oubli^ de lire et cf 6crire.
It is he. It is not she. Cest lui. Ce n'est pas ellc.
8. In phnses like these, where ee Is the subject^ lui^ tUe, etiogi, iUMt are not to be nsed
in the predicate in reference to animals and things, but /«, fa, 2e«, must then be employed.
Is that jour book ? Tes, it is. £st-ce \h votre liyre ? Qui, ce Test.
Arc those your books? They are. Sont-ce U vos liyres? Ce Us soot.
Are those jour cousins? They are. Sont-co 1& voscoufflnes? Cesont«//M.
Are those the soldiers ? Thej are. Sont-ce \k les Boldats ? Ce soot eux,
8. The Tcrb Hre^ with ce for its Bubject, Is plural only when followed by the third pei^
■on ploraL
It is we. It is you. It is they. CcBt nous. Cest vous. Ce tont eux.
It is he and his brother. CVst lui et son fr^re.
I hope that he will come. J^cspdre qu*il viendra.
To he vorth, being teorth^ been toorth. Fa/otr, volant, valu.
JerauoB, iuTaws, Uvaut, novMvalone^ vousTaht, ilivaltntf
I am worth, thou art worth, he is worth, we are worth, you are worth, they are worth.
The future ofrALom is irreffiUar, thus :
J* vaudrai, tu vaudraSt il vaudra, nous vaudrons, vous vaudre/t^ its vaudronU,
I shall be worth, thou wilt, etc, he will, etc, we uhall, etc, yoa will, etc, they will, etc
4. The learner has now had all the irregular fhtares. Thej are these *
mrmniva
. rUTUBIL
iNnKmrx.
FDTUEX.
i Assierai, ^
PlouYoir,
Plevmra^
in Lesson 4&
Asa«^, '
lAsseverai,
. in Lesson 64.
PouToir,
Pourrait
62.
i Assoirai, )
BaToir,
Saurai,
6a
Aller,
Irai,
u
4S.
Tenir,
Tlendraif
68.
Avoir,
Aurai,
M
47.
Valoir,
Vattdraij
M.
CaeiUlr,
CueiOerai,
M
68w
Voir,
veTToij
54
EaTorer,
JSnvsrrai,
U
48.
Venir,
VUndrai,
** 68.
fitre.
SerOM^
u
47.
Voulolr,
Voudraiy
61.
Fallofr,
Faudra,
u
57.
Faire.
Ferai,
M
51
The terminating letters are always the same without any exception, as given in Lesson
41; max, EAs, xa, xohs, bbz, bowt.
& Aequirir, couHr^ and mourir^ drop i in the ftitai«, and make
X'aefuorrai^tuaequerras^etc Jseourr<U,tueourras,eiG. Jemourraiflumourras^eta.
I shall acquire, etc I shall mn, etc I shall die, etc
In these three flitnres the two r*B must both be sounded.
iekoir^ to flUl to, also makes the fatoro icherrai, etc
I hope that the good lot will fall to J'espcre quo le bon lot lui ieherra,
him.
• Except prltoir and pourtoir^ compounds of voir, which hare in the future pr4wirai
and pourvoirai.
I » IS 1 tl IT IT in 1 • 1 " , •. * ^* •. " •,
ya-loir, ra-lant ya-lu, Taua, vao^ TarloM, ya-lea, yalent, vau-dial, ao-ker-ral, oonr-ral,
IS • • T i
mour-fai, i-eher-ra.
232 THE SIXTY^IXTH LESSON.
I shall die of tbiB disease. Je moumn de cette maladie.
Ton will acquire many fnends. Yous atguerrez beaaconp d\
He will run with all his might H courra de toute sa force.
A huahel. To turn. Un boisteau, Toumer.
His due. A bad cold. Son dti. Un manyais rhume.
The brain. The breast. Le cerveau. La poitrine.
A cold in the head. Un rhume de cerreau.
A cold on the chest. Un rhume de poitrine.
A fever from a cold. Une fi^Tre dc rhume.
Do not move that tabic. Ne remuez pas cette table^
8. In phrases like the following, the measaro of qnantitj, which takes a in EngUsfa,
takes U in French.
Apples are worth a doUar a bu$hel. Lcs pommes Talent une piastre U boU-
$eau.
Butter is worth twenty-five cents a Le beurre vaut vingt-cinq sons la
pound. livre.
Flour will be worth ten dollars a barrel. La farine vaudra dix gourdes le baril.
1. Ce petit gar^on court de toate sa force parce qa*il a pear de
ce chieiL 2. Ces enfants sont tonjoors ensemble, ils viendront
sans doute ici ensemble. 3. Qa'avez-vous offert ^ cet homme T 4.
Je lui ai offert du vin de champagne. 5. Esp^rez-vous qu*il
pleuvra ? 6. Nona esperons qu'il ne plenvra pas. 7. Cet homme
gagne-t-il sa vie k faire da bearre? 8. Non, 11 gagne sa vie a
dcrire. 9. II fait bean temps. 10. Oui, il fait an temps tout 4
fait charmant. 11. Combien les pommes de terre valent-elles le
boisseaa t 12. Elles valent an dollar le boisseau. 13. Combien
ce cheval peat-il valoir ? 14. II vaat cent dollars. 15. Yaadra-t-
il an pen plas en hiver t 16. Non, il vaadra beaacoap moins en
hiver. 17. Poarqaoi toamez-voas la tcte t 18. Je la toame paroe
qae je veax voir la personne qai vient. 19. Le commis voas don-
nera-t-il votre d^? 20. II noas donnera tonjoars notre d(i. 21.
Votre billet 6choit-il aajoard'hai t 22. Non, il 6cherra demain.
1. Will yoa have written yoar letters when the boj comes?
2. I shall have written them. 3. Do yon hope to see your friends
to-morrow t 4. I hope to see them this evening. 5. Will that
workman do mach work ? 6. Without doubt he will work with all
his might. 7. How does he gain his living ? 8. He gains his liv-
ing by making bricks. 9. You do not admire that lady ; do you !
10. Tes, madam, she is perfectly amiable and perfectly beaatifoL
11. How much may (pent) that ox be worth t 12. He is worth
SD 17 U C » n 7 17 so 11
boi«-fieaa, toar>ner, dO, rhuin«, oer>Toao, poi-trin«i
THE SIXTY-SIXTH LESSON. 2u3
only fifty dollars now, but he will be worth sixty in the spring. 13.
What will that man drink? 14. He will drink some champagne
wine.
15. Why do you turn your head I 16. I turn it because I hear
a (du) nois& 17. Do you turn your head because one speaks to
you? 18. No, sir, I turn it because I wish to see the man who is
coming. 19. Does the shopkeeper give you your due t 20. Yes ;
he always gives each one his due. 21. How much is wheat worth
a bushel t 22. It is worth a dollar a bushel. 23. Have you a
cold in the head, or a cold on the chest ? 24. I have a cold on the
chest. 25. J£ you offer champagne wine to those men, will they
drink it? 26. They will drink it. 27. What is the matter with
that man ? 28. He has a bad cold in the head. 29. Do not move
those chairs. 30. Do not move them. 31. Will those children go
to school together ? 32. They will go there together. 33. Will
yon have dined when your friend comes? 34. We shall have
dined. 35. We breakfast a little late, but we always dine early.
36. Did your friend die this week ? 37. Yes, he died this morning.
OPnONAL EXEBCISES.
1. What instrument of music do you prefer ? 2. The violin,
when it is well played. 3. It is an instrument so difficult that
there are not many persons capable of {capables de) playing it well.
4. Whose {a qui) is that flute ? 5. It is mine. 6. I have one, but
mine is not so beautiful as yours. 7. Do you play ? 8. Very little.
9. Who gives you lessons? 10. Mr. G. ; I go to his house three
times a (par) week. 11. It needs time in order to learn even
(mime) Uie flute. 12. If I know (how) to play it well in two years
I shall be pleased. 13. It needs much practice in order to play
well.
14. Good morning {bonjotir), gentlemen; are you making
music? 15. No, we are speaking of it, that is all. 16. Are you
(an) amateur (amateur) of music, Mr. Charles ? 17. Not much ; I
like reading better than the opera. 18. Music, however (cependant)^
is a thing very agreeable. 19. That is true ; but you will not often
see me put aside {de cote) a good book to listen to the best musician
in the world. 20. There are few persons who think like {comnie)
you.
21, On what instruments do you play? 22. I play on the
• violin, and my friend plays on the flute. 23. Does this instrument
Wong to you ? 24. Yes ; it belongs to me. 25. Are you the re-
lations of my friend ? 26. We are. 27. Are these your papers ?
28. They are. 29. Are these your brothers? 30. They are.
234 THE SIXTT-SEVENTH LESSON.
67.--SOIXANTE-SEPTl£ME LEgON.
N0UN3 OP EPOCH AND QUANTITY.
To pay the labor of a day. Payer le traTBil d^xme jovmet.
1. Jour Is the epoch, day merely ; journie is a qaantltj, «I1 the day throngh.
He will surely come the day that he H viendra certunement le joar qoll a
haa said, and will pass the whole dit, et il passera toute la jouniee
day at your house. chez tous.
There Is the same distinction in the following.
The morning. The morning {through), Le matin. La matinee.
The evening. The evening (through), Le soir. La <otr^.
He will read all the morning. II lira toute la matin6e.
They will sing all the evening. EUes chanteront toute la soir^.
!7b succeed, attain to. Succeed^ Parvenir (d bef. inf.). Parvenu,
S. To snccoed, to haye saeoess, is riueeir ; to come after, euceider d / to attain to, J9ar>
venir.
He succeeds well in his studies. II r^ussit bien dans scs Etudes.
Louis Philip succeeded Charles X. Louis Philippe a succ^dd ik Charles X.
We succeed in learning that. Nous parvenons k apprendrc ceU.
He attains to the foot of tho monn- H parvient au pied de la montagne.
tain.
cNe before the verb, guere after it;
But little^ butfew^ scarcely any, •< without a verb, guere {debet a
( noun).
That man has hardly any money. Cct hommc n^a gudrc d^argent
He has hardly any. II n*cn a gudre.
I have but few books. Je n^ai gu6rc do livrcs.
More^ further^ furthermore. No more. Plus, davantage. Ke plus,
8. Plus is nsed in the middle of a sentence, and davantage altrays at tho end; pl^
meaning no more^ may ho placed at the end. DavantaffS is never followed by a noan, bat
is always used absolatcly.
I study more than you. J'dtudie plus quo vous.
That pleases me more. Ccla me plait davantage.
Have you still more money ? Avez-vous encore de Targent f
I have no more. Je n*en ai plus.
He can do for you further. II pent fairc davantage pour vous.
To be bom. Bom, Kaitre {etre for auxiliary). Ke. -A'tV.
Je naU, tu nais^ il natt^ nous naiasons, vous naisse». Us nai9»ent,
I am bom, thou art bom, he is bora, we are born, you are bom, they are bora.
I was bom in America, you were bom Je suis n6 en Am6rique, vous 6te8 no
in Europe. en Europe.
To clothe^ clothed. To change. Vetir, vetu. Changer.
4. Changer, to lay aside one thing and take another, is followed by de ; meaning to ex-
change, hypour or eontre; and meaning to convert, by en.
iit« SOS 1 4 11 1 4SX5SS nni« r ii.i !
ma-ti-ncA, 8ol-ro«, par-vo-nir, par-ve-nn, r6-u«-sir, suc-co-dcr, su^rs, da-van-tag«,»>«'»
• 7 7TS»7«7 iw a« ^o ^ -B
n6, nai«, naif, nal«-80D«, nalt-sea, naisMn<, T6-tlr, chan-ger.
THE SIXTY-SEVENTH LESSOK. 285
He changes bis hat. n change de cbapeau.
We change our boolu for some pic- Nous chaogeons nos livres powr (or
tures. contre) des tableaux.
He changes water into wine. H change de Teau en vin.
Weak. His t^omocA is weak. Faible. D a PM^ainac faible.
Pwe, Xatwre, Pur. Ia nature.
Creduhut. Beauty. Criduie. La.heaute.
Incndnloue. A queetion. IneriduU. Unc gueetion.
To ask questions. The beard. Faire dcs questions. La barbe.
With good trill, heartily. De bon coeur^ de bon grL
1. Voyagerez-vous cet 6t6? 2. Je voyagerai toute Tann^e. 3.
Voolez-Yous beaucoup de bceuf ! 4. Je ii*en veux gu^re. 5. Tout
ce qai nalt est sujet k mourir. G. N'etes-vous pas d6 en Europe ?
7. Nod, monsieur, je suis ne en Am6rique. 8. Le yieuz soldat
est-il mort ce mois-ci I 9. Non, madame, il est mort le dix juillet.
10. Ou 6te8-you8 ne ? 11. Je suis n6 a New York. 12. Ces fleurs
ne naissent-elles pas au prentemps ? 13. Si, monsieur, elles uais-
sent au mois d'avril. 14. Cet homme riche a-t-il vctu tons ses do-
mestiques ? 15. II les a bien T^tus. 16. J'admire toutes les beautes
de la nature. 17. Tons les enfants ne sont-ils pas cr6dules ! 18.
Os sont bien cr6dules. Ces bommes sont bien incr^dules. 19. Je
cherche le barbier parce que j'ai la barbe longue. 20. Cette eau
cst-elle pure ? 21. EUe est tres-pure. 22. Cet enfant fait bien des
questions. 23. Cet ouvrier travaille-t-il de bon coeur t 24. II tra-
vaille de bon coeur toute Tannde. 25. Combien de temps votre
grand-p^re a-t-il v^cu ? 26. II a vecu cent ans. 27. Apportez-moi
un peu d'eau fraiche, je vous prie.
1. Where is the old soldier t 2. He is dead. 3. When did
hpdiet 4. He died this year. 5. Where was that young man
bom? 6. He was bom in Germany, the sixth of August, one
thousand eight hundred and thirty-eight. 7. Are not all animals
bom feeble t 8. Yes, sir, all animals are bom feeble. 9. Why do
those travelers change their clothes (habits) 1 10. They change
them because they are wet. 11, Do you change your French book
for English booksl 12. No, sir, I change them for pictures. 13.
Does not cold change water into ice (glace) t 14. Yes, it frequent-
ly changes it into ice in winter. 15. When will you receive more
money 1 16. I shall receive no more. 17. Have you mucht 18.
fiUbU, es-to-mac, par, na-tur*, cri-duU, beaa-to, lii-cr6-dul«, k«s-Uon, barbe.
236 THE SIXTY-SEVENTH LESSON.
I have hardly any. 19. Do you ask questions of the (au) master t
20. I ask him many questions. 21. Do you admire the beauties of
nature? 22. I admire much the beauties of the earth and of the
sky.
23. That man is looking for a barber because his beard is very
long. 24. That child is too credulous, he believes all that they say
to him. 25. Is not that man incredulous? 26. Yes, he does not h^
lieve what you have told him. 27. Does not that lady sing much?
28, She sings all the morning and all the evening. 29. Does her
sister sing much ? 30. No, she sings scarcely any, but she reads all
day. 31. Does the barber work all the day? 32. He works all
the year. 33. Do you drink much wine? 34. I drink scarcely
any. 35. Will you travel next month? 36. No, I shall not travel
any more ; I prefer to stay at home ; that pleases me more. 37.
Spring succeeds to winter, and autumn to summer. 38. Has that
merchant succeeded in becoming (devenir) rich ? 39. Yes, he has
attained to a great fortune {fortune). 40. Does the general suc-
ceed in (d) war ? 41. No, he will succeed in nothing.
OPTIONAL EXERCISES.
1. Is there any news from Europe to-day? 2. Yes, they say
that there has been a great fire {incendie) in London. 3. I have
not heard that ; what do tbey say of it ? 4. That is all that I know
of it; Mr. L. told it to me. 5. Do they speak of peace ? 6. They
say that peace is made. 7. I am delighted at it (fen suis ckarmS) ;
we need peace, for business {car les affaires) suffers much. 8. That
is true ; it will need time to bring them back to the condition in
which {la condition ou) they were before the war. 9. Do they
know the conditions of the peace ? 10. They have not yet learned
them. 11. All merchandise is {marchandisea sont) very dear, but
if we have peace they will be cheaper.
12. Have they made a (une) good crop {rScolte) of cotton this
year? 13. Yes, pretty good. All the crops have been good. 14.
Flour will be cheap next winter. 15. Without doubt ; and if there
is no war in Europe, cotton will be dear. 16. What will you say
if we have war with England or France before one year {an) ?
17. We must {ilfaut) hope that that will not be. 18. War will do
no good to any one, and it can do us much evil.
19. Do those shopkeepers succeed in becoming rich? 20. They
succeed in it. 21. Have you not a cold in the head? 22. No ; I
have a cold in the chest. 23. Has your sister gone to the the*
ater ? 24. No, she has gone to the baJl.
THE SIXTY-EIGHTH LESSON. 237
68.— SOIXANTE-HUITIfiMB LEgON.
FAST DEFINITE TENSE
Past definite of faslkr, to epeak,
Jspartaii tuparlaa, Uparla^ none parlAmee^ wmepartdtet, <lt parUrenO^
1 spoke, thouspokest, hecpoke, wo spoke, yoa spoke, they spoke.
1. An Torbs of the first ooi\)agation follow this model in the past definite.
S. This tense is used only of time which is limited to tb^ past, and separated from the
preaeBt by at least one day. If the time spoken of therefore does not ezolade the present
dsy, the past indefinite most bo osed, and not the past definite ; thus,
I spoke (baye spoken) to your brother. «rat parU 4 votre frdre.
I spoke to him this week. Je lui aiparU cctte semune.
I spoke to him last week. Je lui parlai la semaine demi^re.
In the first of the aboTS phrases the present day is not exdndedf for nothing is said of
tbe time. In the second phrase it is not excluded, for this week includes the present day.
In these therefore the past indefinite is used. In the last, the past week excludes the pres-
ent day, and the past definite is therefore nsed.
The same distinction is illostrated in the following, where {eat.) denotes j>resenl day ee-
tiwdsdL, and (ik ex,) preeent day not exclude
I was at your bouse this morning (n. ex.). S'ai ite chez tous ce matin.
I went to your bouse on Thursday {ex. ). J^alUu chez tous Jeudi.
He mended my coat (n. ex,). II a raeeommodS mon habit.
He mended it last week (ex.), II le raceommoda la semaine dernidre.
He broke his pen to-day (n. ear.). II a easeS sa plume aujourd'bui.
I broke mine on Friday (ex,), Je ecueai la mienne Tendredi.
They bought my horse (n. ex.). Us 07U aeheti mon cheval.
They bought him last summer (ex.). lis Vacheterent V6U pass6.
We fonnd your pencil (n. ex.). Nous awmn trouvS rotre crayon.
We fonnd it on Saturday (ex.). Nous le trouvdmes samedl
Ton traveled this summer (n. ex.), Vous avez voyagi cet 6t6.
Ton trareled Uist summer (ear.). Vous voyagediee V^i^ dernier.
Tocoet. To oak, Couter. Demander (d or de bet mL).
To pay^ to pay for. Toeteal^rob. Payer. Voter.
& These last three verbs, as also aeheter, to boy, and prendre^ to take, when foUowed
by objects both of the person and thing, take the thing for the direct, and the person for the
indirect object
Do you pay that man for the carriage ? Payez-vous la Toiture k cet homme ?
I pay him for it. Je la lui paie.
I ask the schohr for the book. Je demande le livre k T^colier.
I aak him for it Je le lui demande
I take it from him. Je le lui prends.
He buys it for them. II le leur achate.
They have stolen it from me. On me Ta to16.
4. The abore-mentloned verbs with a single object always take the direct; and demait^
der then means to ask for.
par-lai, laa, la, lAm<«, lAtes, Mtreni^ coft-ter, dc-man-der, pa-yer, vo-ler.
238 THE SIXTY-EIGHTH LESSON.
Ask for my father. Demandez mon p^re.
The neighbor has been robbed. On a yol4 le Toisin.
His fruit has been stolen. On a vole son frait.
Pay the man. Pay for it. Payez Thomme. Payez-le.
How much does he pay for it ? Combien le paie-t-il ?
It costs him a hundred dollars. II lui coikte cent gourdes.
It is a good price. Cest un bon pHx.
1. Le maitre touiI a-t-il donn6 ce livre t 2. Oai, il me le donna
vendredi. 3. Quand avez-vous achet6 cette maison ? 4. Je Tachetai
Phiver pass6 or demier. 5. Oi\ aMtes-vous lundi ? 6. Nous all4mes
k r^cole, et nos cousins y allerent aussi. 7. Ou allas-tu dimanchet
8. J*allai k Teglise. 9. Quand ayez-vous trouv^ le livre que toos
aviez perdu f 10. Je le trouvai la semaine derni^re. 11. Combien
Yous codte ce cheval 1 12. II me coiite deux cents dollars. 13. Arez-
vous pay^ la vache au paysan *? 14. Je la lui ai pay6e. 15. Le prix
de ce drap, n'est-il pas 6leve t 16. Non, le prix est bas. 17. Avez-
Tous demands le fruit au jardinier? 18. Je le lui ai demande.
19. On a vol6 le manteau au jardinier? 20. On le lui a xoU: 21.
Combien cette voiture vous coiite-t-elle ? 22. Elle me coiite cinq
cents gourdes. 23. Cest un prix tr^s ^ley6.
1. Did you buy the countryman's apples t 2. I bought them of
him. 3. When did you buy them ? 4. I bought them last montL
5. Did you pay him for them then ? G. No, I paid him for them
last week. 7. When did you ask the master for his book 1 8. We
asked him for it on Tuesday. 9. Did you ask for the newspapers
at the same time ? 10. We did not ask for them. 11. Has that
man lost any thing ? 12. Some one has stolen from him his cloak.
13. Do not those horses cost more than they are worth ? 14. No,
they are worth more than they cost. 15. Where is your horse?
16. It has been stolen from me. 17. Was it stolen last week?
18. Yes, it was stolen last week, on Wednesday. 19. What day
of the month is it ? 20. It is the eleyenth. 21. Has the servant
robbed his master ? 22. Yes, he has stolen from him much money.
23. How much may {peutj that cow be worth? 24. She is
worth only thirty dollars. 25. How much are peaches worth a
bushel? 26. They are worth two dollars a bushel 27. Is it not
a high price? 28. No, it is not high. 29. When did your cousins
buy those beautiful pictures ? 30. They bought them last summer.
31. When did the tailor mend your coat? 32. He mended it on
THE SIXTY-NINTH LESSON. 289
Thnrsdaj. 33. Are these yonr books! 34. Yes, they are. 35.
Are these your little sisters ? 36. Yes, they are. 37. Miss, are
yon French ? 38. Yes, sir, I am. 39. Are you the sister of that
Frenchman? 40. Yes, sir, I am. 41. Does not that lady appear
perfectly amiable? 42. She appears so. 43. Your brother likes
mosic ; on what instrument does he play ? 44. He plays on the
flute and on the violin.
OPTIONAL EXERCISES.
1. Does Peter B. live near here (pr^ cTict) 1 2. Yes, he lives in
this street ; are you acquainted with him ? 3. Very well ; we have
been together at school during more than (de) a year, and I have
still some books that are his. 4. He is a young man of an excel-
lent character (caractere)^ and quite charming. 5. We have always
been good friends, and I have a great desire (bien envie) to see him.
G. If you wish it, I will take you to his house this evening. 7. I
thank you, that will be impossible for me ; I expect this evening a
friend ; but I will go with you another evening of this week. 8.
Well, what day is it to-day ? 9. It is Tuesday. 10. I cannot go
to-morrow, but Thursday or Friday I shall be at your service. 11.
Thank you ; Thursday, then, if it be not bad weather, we will go
to see him.
12. What do you think of London 1 13. It is an immense (im-
fnense) city, but it is not a beautiful city. 14. Are not the houses
beautiful there ? 15. There are some beautiful and very large ones,
but those of Paris are still more so. 16. I must go to Paris one
day ; I desire much to see it.
69.— SOIXANTE-NEUVIfiME LEgON.
PAST DEFINITE CONTINUED.
The past definite la generally treated by French grammarians as a prlmltiTe tense.
Boles fiir its formation, however, will be nseftal to the English learner.
"L The past definite of all French yerbs may be formed as follows : In thx fxbst ooivjir-
OAnov, as we have seen, change er final of the InflnltiTe into
▲Z, ^ A, AJOB, ATIS, iBKRT.
In the sxooin> and foitbtb, ir and re final, into
n, n, IT, iMxa, tns, xbzst.
Thos^nnt, to finish, and vtndax, to sell, make
JsJlniSf iujtnis^ UJtnit, nousJlrMnM^ vomjtniiea^ ii9jtfUreni,
Iflnlsbed, thoa finishedst, he finished, we finished, you finished, they finished.
JtvendU, tuvertdit, Uv&ndU, nouav&ndlmMj voutwndUet^ iUvmdir&nS^
Isold, thonsoldeet, he sold, we sold, you sold, they sold.
It u n IS IS IS
fi-nis, ni(, ntmes, nl<M, nirent
240 THE SIXTY-KINTH LESSON.
In the third, xtoib, into
va, us, trr, txss, tns, vubt.
Thiu, r^cBTODt, to reoelre, makes
I recelyed, thon receivedst, he received, we received, 70a received, they reeelved.
2. To the above rule most be added the three following remarks :
First, verbs which have the pest participle in <• or if make the past definite by ehsBgliif
the <• or i< into the terminations of the second and fourth ooiyogatioaa, UtU^U^ ete.
Thus meUre^ past part mis, and dirt, past part (/rr, make
Ipnt, thon pattest, he put, we put, yon pot, they put
JedU, tudU, Udil, ft9tw(f tines, wnadiUs, UtdiretO^
I said, thonsaidst, he said, we said, yon said, they said.
Second, all irregular verbs of the second and fourth coi^agations, which have the put
participle In «, except viUr^ baUre^ rompre, and their compounds, have this tense like Uw
third coi\)ugation, changing u final Into us, «m, «<.
Thus cowrir, past part courxjy and hoire, past part &v, make
t/eoouriM, tucouruM^ ilcourut, now couHtmea, wnucour^tes, Uteounrmii
I ran, thou rannest, he ran, wo ran, 70U ran, they ran.
JebuHy tubutf Ubvl, nouabi^fM*, wnubiUM, iUbureHt^
I drank, thou drankest, he drank, we diank, you drank, they drank.
Third, all verbs in aindrs^ etndrt^ oindre^ and uire^ form this tease by changing aai of
the present participle into <«, O, i^ eta
Thus enUndre^ to fear, present participle, craignAsn, make
a/s craignU^ tti oraignUy il eraignit, naua eraiffntmeaj wma eraignUet^ {U eraigfdrwt
I feared, thou fearedst, he feared, we feared, you feared, theylbared.
AtMndre^ to attain to, aUefgnAxr^ makes fatUignia^ iu aUeignia, etc
Joitidre^ to Join, joignkjsr, makeajajoignia^ tujaignia^ itJoignU, eta
Cuirey to cook, euisABT, makes Je ottiaia, tu ouiMs, U euiait^ etc
To 9ew, Sewed, Coudre, Coumu,
Jeeouda^ tueouda^ Ucaud, noua eouaona, wmacauaeat Haeemunlt
I sew, thousewest, he sews, we sew, you sew, they sew.
That tailor sews well. He has sewed Ce taillear coud bien. II a coosa dcs
some buttons on my coat boutons 4 mon hablL
To resolve^ to eolve. Resolved, JUeoudre, lUeolu, and riaoM,"
Jariaoua^ turiaoua^ ilriaout^ noua riaolvona^ iroueHaofoes, ila riaohant,
I resolve, thou resolvest, he resolves, we resolve, you resolve, they resolve.
It is fog changed into rain. CTest du brouillard r^sous en pluie.
Have they resolved upon peace or war? A-t-on r^solu la poix on la guerre ?
He has solved the question. II a r6solu la question.
1. Ces senrantes consent-elles bien ? 2. Elles cousent tout aassi
bien que le tailleur. 3. Le tailleur a-t-il cousu yos pantalons t 4.
n les a cousus. 5. Qui a casse la croisce ? 6. Le domestiqne la
* JUaoua is used only in the sense of changed into. It Is not used in the feminine.
4 93 a a a a n u a a r n iiu m t » ^
re-yna, (Ul ^tlmes, (dtsit, (ureni^, ml«, oon-rns, bus, crd-gnis, Jolndre. Joi-gnant Jol-gnK
a/-telndr«, a/-tel-gnan^ a<-tct-gnU, culrs, cnl-san<, cui-zls, coudre, cou-su, eonds, coa<f, coo-
II la 6 19 5 U I M 23 • 18 « U 5 U 31 S 1* • « U
sons, cou-ses, couseni; r6-zoudre, r6-Ko-ln, re-cons, r^-conl, r6-zol-vons, r^-fbl-vei, r^-tolveM.
THE SIXTY-NINTH LESSON. 241
cassa mardi. 7. Avez-voos la le livre allemand qne je voas ai
pr6te t 8. Qui, monsieur, je le lus le mois dernier. 9. Le tradui-
bites-vous en meme temps ? 10. Non, je Tai traduit cette semaine.
11. Condaisites-vous Tetranger a Teglise dimanclie? 12. Noiis Py
condaisimes dimanche, et mon frcre le condoisit an spectacle lundL
13. Parlas-tu an general quand tu le vis d Londres I'^t^ dernier ?
14. Je ne lui parlai pas. 15. Begutes-vous ma lettre la semaine
dernieret 16. Nous la re^dmes lundi, et nous la lumes aussitot,
et DOS amis la lurent aussi. 17. Vendis-tu tes chevaux samedi?
18. Oui, et mes cousins vendirent les leurs en mdme temps ! 19.
Quand as-tu lu ce livre fran^ais t 20. Je le lus samedi, et mon
fr^re le lat dimanche. 21. Quecoudce tailleur? 22. llcoudmon
liabit
1. Do those maid- servants sew well ? 2. They do not sew so
well as the tailor. 3. Have they sewed any thing for you ? 4. They
have sewed some buttons on my coat. 5. Have you been to the
neighbor's this week 1 6. Yes, sir, I went there on Monday, and I
went there again yesterday. 7. Didst thou speak to the general on
Tuesday •? 8. I spoke to him, and my brother spoke to him also.
9. When did you find those beautiful flowers ? 10. We found them
last week in the woods. 11. Hast thou drunk the wine which I sent
thee yesterday ? 12. 1 drank of it yesterday, and my brother drank
of it also ; we found it very good. 13. Didst thou finish thy writ-
ing yesterday ? 14. Yes, I finished it early.
15. When did you read the first volume of that history? 16.
We read it last winter, and my father read it also, 17, Did you
read the second volume at the same time {epoque) ? 18. We did
not read it, but our sisters read it. 19. Have you translated that
exercise into French ? 20. I translated it yesterday, and my broth-
er translated it also. 21. Did you translate it into Spanish the
same day t 22. We translated it, and our cousins translated it
also. 23. How old is your brother ? 24. He is not quite twenty-
five years old. 25. Has the gardener many apples ? 26. He has
hardly any. 27. Do you study German ? 28. No, sir, I do not
study it any more. 29. Does your brother study it still? 80, Yes,
he studies German and French.
OPTIONAL EXEnClSES,
L What will you do when you are in the country ? 2. Wo
11
242 THE SEVENTIETH LESSON.
sball read much, and we shall write many letters. 3. When the
gardener offers you fruit, will you take it ? 4. I sball take it 5.
I am going to tell you the names of the months, and to count them
at (en) the same time. G. January, one ; February, two ; March,
three; April, four; May, five; June, six; July, seven; August,
eight ; September, nine ; October, ten ; November, eleven ; Decem-
ber, twelve. 7. In the {au) month of January it is very cold, and
the days are very short. 8, In the month of February it is very
cold still, but the days are a little longer ; the night does not come
so quick (yite), and in the morning it is day a little sooner. 9. The
country is still very sad. 10. Do you know that this month is the
shortest of allt 11. It has only twenty-eight days, while (tandis
que) the others have thirty, and some thirty-one. 12. January is
the first month, and February is the second.
13. Did your cousin read much while he was at your house ?
14. He read much, and he wrote many letters. 15. When I come
to the city, will you know it f 16. I shall know it 17. When
thou hast a master, wilt thou learn the French language t 18. I
shall learn it, and my brother will learn it also. 19. When the
master speaks to the scholars in French, will they comprehend him t
20. They will comprehend him.
70.— SOIXANTE-DIXifiME LECON.
PAST DEFINITE CONTINUED.
The learner has now been made acquainted with the imperfect, past indefinite, and past
definite tensea. Aa these divisions of post time do not correspond to any English tenses, they
reqnire especial attention, and the following additional mle and iUostrationa will aerre to
explain more clearly their nsc.
1. If the verb expresses something past, which i^ habitual^ repeaUd, or eoniintunf* it
most be In the imperfect Unee; if it do not express that, and refers to a time including the
present day,t the past indeftniU must be naed ; bat if it refer to a time excluding the pres-
ent day, the patt deJlniU is to be used.
Did yoa ever see (n. ex.) President T. ? Avez-voits jamais vu le prudent T. ?
Tea, when I was (eont.) in Washing- Out, quand fetaia k Washington, je )e
ton last winter I saw {ex.) him. vis rhiver dernier.
When did yoa find (n. ex.) your glove ? Qnand avez-v<ms trauvi votre gant f
Yesterday; as I was looking {cant.) Hier, comme je cherchaU mon moa-
for my handkerchief, I found {ex.) choir, je trouvai mon gant.
my glove.
Who broke (n. ex.) your mirror? Qui a eaasS votre miroir {glace) f
My brother broke it last week {ex.) ; CVst mon fr&re qui le ecusa la semalne
he was playing {cont.) with his derniere ; il jouait avec sa ballc,
* These three qnalities are essentially the same; for what Is habitual^ and what la re-
peat^^ may bo rujiranled as contintwus or unflniHhfd. Hence the name iMPBRrscr.
t If tho time referred to bo the present day, the present week, month, year, or age, or.
If the time be not 8i>eciflod, the present day is included.
THE SEVENTIETH LESSON.
243
ball, and he threw (ex.) it just in et il la Jeia juste au milieu de ma
the middle of mj glass. glace (mon miroir).
2. Glace Is a mirror of a large sizo.
Did you receive (n. er,) my note ? Avez-voiis re^u mon billet?
We received it Saturday (ex.) while we Nous le regumee samedi pendant que
were breakfasting {e<mt.), nous dejeunions,
8. In conTersation, when no importance is attached to the time, the past indefinite is
often used for the past definite, — i. e., it is used when the present day is excluded ; but not
the opposite,— the past definite is not to be used when the present day may be included.
We may say, Je lui ai paels Aier,* la eemaine demiire, etc., but not, Je lui fablai a«-
jourd'kui esUe nemainty etc
4. In historical writing; and in narratires of events long past,t the post indefinite is not
to be used; as,
Napoleon, the first consul, gained the
celebrated victory of Marengo
over the Austrians, the 14th of
June, 1800.
Csesar reduced Spain, and conquered
Gaul; he penetrated even into
Germany ; he subdued Egypt
A remedy. To look at.
To be right. To be tcrong.
The shore. The sea.
Learned. Interesting.
Ingenious. Along.
Hardly, scarcely. WitJioiU the hnouH'
edge of.
Without his knowledge.
Napoleon, premier consul, remporta la
c^ldbre victoire de Marengo sur
les Autrichlens, le 14 Juin, 1800.
C^sar reduisit TEspagne ct conquit la
Oaule; il penetra jusqu'en Alle-
magne ; il soumit TEgypte.
Un reinede. Regarder.
Avoir raison (de bef. inf.). Avoir tori
{debef.int).
Le rivage. La mer.
Savant. Interessant.
Ingenieux. Le long de,
A peine. A Pinsu dc.
X son Insu.
4. To be worthy to possess, we have seen, is Ure riehe de ; to be worth in intrinsic valaa
)staloir.
To be worth more, to be better. Valoir mieux.
Ton are worth more (better) than he. Vous valez mieux que lui.
* The use of the past Indefinite for the past definite takes place by a kind of syllonsls
with the word recently, or some one eqaivalent; hence when the time is meant to oe defi-
nitely and prominently stated, the change is not made.
-f In continoed narration of events, even of the present day, the post definite may bo
osed, as seen in the following:
This morning I met Mr. A. in the park.
I sainted him, he returned my politeness, and
continoed his way ; I followed him with my
eyes. At the moment when be arrived in
BeacoD'Strcet, I saw him overthrown by a
horse which was excited. I was very much
friirbtcned. I ran up the steps, I rushed to-
ward my friend, I raised him, and asked him
If he was not woundeiL *' No,^ be replied to
nM, lariffhinff. ** thank God, I have had no
hann but the harm of fear.'^
Ce matio fai rencontre monsieur A dans
le pare, je I'ai saluc, il ma rendu ma politesse,
et il a continue son chemin. Je le KuiHs des
yeuz. Au moment od il arriva dans Bea-
con-street, Je le ri» rcnverser jwir un chovnl
qui sV'tatt emport6. Jo fus trcs-efl'rajro, jo
montai Tescalier en conrant jo me precipi-
tai vers mon ami. je lo rfUvaiy et jo lui <tt-
nuindai s'il n'etait p<fnt bles«6. "Non," mo
repondit-W, en riant, '*Dieu merd, je nal au-
cun mal que lo mal de peur.^
1 U 5tl « 1 IT en 4 T 4 1 •HI ^ * ■ , I* *• •.
Ka-po-lc-on, Ce-iar, Ganla, E-gypt, re-mods, re-gar-der, ri-vags, mer, sa-van«, in-te-res-
14 5 jss 7 )4 a
\ iii-g<6'nieiu^ peine, in-sn.
244 THE SEVENTIETH LESSON.
He is worth fifty thousand dollars. II est riche de cinqnante mille dollars.
He is worth more (better) than his U vaut mieux que son fr^re«
brother.
1. Avez-vous lu mon nouveau livre ? 2. Oui, qnand j'etais k
la campagne Tele dernier, je le trouvai chez mon ami, et je le Ins.
8. Quand avez-vous fini d'ecrire votre theme ? 4. Hier, pendant
que vous rdcitiez voire le^on, je le finis. 5. Avez-vous des chevanx?
6. Je n*en ai pas k present, j'en avais trois le mois passe ; mais,
j'en vendis nn la semaine demi^re, j*en donnai un aussi dimanche
k mon ami et Ton m'a vole le troisieme hier au soir. 7. Que re-
gardez-vous ? 8. Je regarde ces tableaux. 9. N'avez-vous pas tort
de parler d cet homme ? 10. Non, j'ai raison de lui parler, parce
qu'il est mon ami 11. Est-ce que je ne vaux pas autant que mon
frere? 12. Vous valez mieux que luL 13. Ou desirez-voos aller?
Je desire aller le long du rivagc de lamer. 14. Avez-vous demeure
longtemps a New York ? J'y ai 6te k peine deux jours. 15. Le
malade a-t-il pris son bain ? 16. II le prit (Pa pris) hier matin.
17. Cet homme est-il savant? 18. II est fort savant dans rhistoire.
19. Mon cousin par tit hier k mon insu.
1. Do you sometimes go along the shore of the sea? 2. Yes,
sir, I often go on the shore of the sea ; I like to look at the sea and
the sky. 3. Have you thrown away your gloves ? 4. Yes ; I threw
them away yesterday, because they were worth nothing. 5. That
man is studious ; is he not learned ? G. Yes, he is well versed
{verse) in history. 7. Who broke that glass ? 8. That child let it
fall yesterday. 9. That lady looks interesting. 10. Yes, she is
interesting and beautiful ; she is not so tall as she appears, but her
brother is taller than he appears. 11. Has the sick man taken the
remedy? 12. He took it day before yesterday, and it has done
him good. 13. Am I not worth as much as my cousin ? 14. You
are worth more than he. 15. Will you be long in the country?
16. I shall be there hardly two days.
17. Is that workman ingenious? 18. He is very ingenious.
19. Did your brother buy that horse without your knowledge?
20. He bought him without my knowledge, and without the knowl-
edge of my father. 21. When thou wast dining with (chez) the
general on Saturday, didst thou taste his best wine ? 22. I did
not taste it, because I never drink wine ; but the captain drank of
it, and found it very good. 23. That man looks interesting ; are
THE SEVENTY-FIRST LESSON. 245
joa acqaainted with him ? 24. Yes, sir ; he is learned, ingenious,
and interesting. 25. Madam, are you sick ? 26. I am. 27. Are
you the wife of the captain 1 28. I am. 29. Gentlemen, are you
physicians 1 30. We are. 31. Are you the physicians of the
king? 32. We are.
OFTIONAL EXERCISES.
1. London is the principal (principaie) city or the capital {la
capitate) of England. 2. Edinburgh {Edinhourg) is the capital of
Scotland, and Dublin is the capital of Ireland. 3. These three
kingdoms belong to the same prince, whom they call (appelle) king
of England. 4. To the east of England one finds Denmark, of
which the capital is Copenhagen ( Copenhague). 5. The capital of
Sweden is Stockholm. G. To the east of Sweden one finds Russia,
which is a very large country, of which the capital is Moscow.
7. Where were you yesterday evening ? I looked for you every
where. 8. I was at the theater ; had you need to see me ? 9. No ;
I had nothing to do, and I desired to take a walk (/aire nne prome-
nade). 10. Where did you wish to go I 11. I had a desire to go
and see the Miss C.'s. 12. Well, let us go there this evening. 13.
Very willingly; have you seen them lately (dernierement)! 14. I
saw them the past week in the street, as they were going to my
sister's. 15. I have not had the time to go and see them often this
winter. 16. I am very much occupied (tres-occvpe) all day, and
often it is necessary for me to pass the evening in writing {d ecrire).
71.— SOIXANTE-ET-ONZlfeME LEgON.
VOICI ATHD rOILA.
1. When sometblDg present is pointed oat, (here is, there are, here it, Jure are^ fhit if,
(hat U, these are^ those arty arc rendorcd as follows :
Uere U, here are^ this is^ these are^ be- Void (contraction of vois id),
hold.
There is, there are, that t>, those are, Voild (contraction of vois la),
behold.
There is jour cloak. Thero it is. Toil^ votre manteau. Le voil^
Here are yoar spectacles. Here tbcy Yoici vos lunettes. Les voici.
are.
There he ia. There is some. Le ToilA. En voil^.
Here I am. Here we arc. Me Toici. Nous voici.
He is looking for the towel which is H cherche ressuie-main que voici.
here.
I seek him who ia there. Je cherche celui que voiU.
Here she comes. La voici qui vicnt.
vol-ci, voi-U.
246 THE SEVENTY-FIRST LESSOX.
There is irhat he wishes for. Voild ce qu'il Teat
To fatigue^ to tire. Yes, indeed* Faiiguer, Si or Hfait.
2. Si/aU is used familiarly (and rather Inelegantly) to affirm a lact which another de-
nies or colls in doubt ; as wo use yes^ it ia ; ye«, Ad doea^ etc It is regarded bj some as a
Tulgarism; and H alone, or pardo7ine»'moi^ is to be preferred.
You have not seen my brother. Vous ii'ayez pas vu mon fr^re.
Yes, I have ; I saw him this morning. Si {or si fait), {cr pardounez-moi) ; je
Tai vu ce matin.
You do not know me. Vous nc me connaissez pas.
Yes, I do ; I know you well. Si, madame, je vous connais bicn.
I believe that he never comes here. Je crois quMl ne vient jamais ici.
Yes, he does ; he comes here often. Si, moosieur {or pardonnez-moi)^ 11 y
vient souvcnt.
At your service, at your disposed, at A votre service, d voire di9p<mlio»y d
your command. vos ordres.
From time to time^ occasionally. De temps en temps.
At least. Some good spectacles. Au mains. De bonnes lunettes.
5%tf yrain. To accept. Le grain, les grains. Accepter.
8. Grain^ as a collective noun, is used In the plural to express different qualities or
kinds of grain.
A dollar more. A dollar less. Un dollar de plus. Un dollar de mains.
A sou too much. A sou too little. Un sou de trap. Un sou de moins.
Do not give him a cent more, nor a Ke lui donnez pas un sou de plus ni
cent ess. un sou de moins.
He has neither too much nor too little. II n*a ni trop ni trop peu.
A rock. What distance, how far f Un rochet. Quelle distance
A quarter. An hour, - Un quart. Une heure.
A step, pace. Half. Un pa». Demi.
Almost. Come then. Presque. Venez done.
4. Done is sometimes used for mere emphasis.
Far. About, nearly. Loin. Fnviron.
How far is it from here to that rock ? Quelle distance y a-t-il d'ici k ce
rocher ?
5. In speaking of the distance to any place, meaning/rom here to the phice, cTici nraat
not be omitted in French, unless^iMgtM be used.
Is it far to the hotel ? Y a-t-il loin d'ici & Xh&lel f
It is about two miles and a quarter. II y a environ deux milles et (un)
quart.
I am going as far as the river. Je vais jusqu^a la riviere.
6. Demi is an adjective, and is invariable when placed before its noun, to which U Is
then always Joined by a hyphen; when placed after the noun, it agrees with it in gender,
and is always singular ; as,
Half an liour. An hour and a half. Une demi-heurc. Une heure et demie.
1. Vous cherchez de I'eau pure, en voici. 2. Quel livre voulez-
1 » « r n 14 1 5 « 15 s u a i ii i 4 is sou
&-tl-gver, Ber*vic«, grain, ak-cep-ter, ro-cher, dls-tano^ karf, heure, paa, de-ml, loia,
•n-vi-ron, Ad-teL
THE SEVENTY-FIRST LESSON. 247
vous 1 3. Je veux celui que voili. 4. Voici ce que je cherche.
5. Voili un arbre sur lequel il y a des oiseaux. 6. Voici un jardin
ou il 7 a du fruit 7. Yoilk votre ami; est-il venu.ici ce ma-
tint 8. n y est venu de tr6s-bonne heure. 9. Voici de I'eau
pure et fraiche ; en voulez-vous 1 10. Cette homme lit-il sans lu-
nettes? 11. Non, il ne pent pas lire sans lunettes. 12. Ce gar9on
a I'air fatigue ? 13. II est fatigue parce qu'il a couru toute la jour-
nee. 14. Voulez-vous du vin t en voici tk votre service. 15. Ac-
ceptez-vous ce que je vous donnet 16. Je I'accepte. 17. Avez-
Tous dix dollars de plus k ma disposition ? 18. Qui, j*cn ai cent de
plus, qui seront k vos ordres quand vous en aurez besoin. 19. Cette
femme a six fils et quatre fiUes. 20. AUez-vous quelquefois au
spectacle ? 21. J'j vais de temps en temps. 22. Y a-t-il loin
d'ici a rh6tel? 23. 11 y a prds d'un miile et demi. 24. II y a
environ cent pas d'ici a ce rocher.
1. There is my exercise; it is short. 2. There is a pure sky
and without a cloud ; it is very beautiful. 3. Here is the man
whom you are looking for. 4. Here he is. 5. Here I am. G.
Here we are. 7. You are looking for the servants ; there they
are- 8. There is the school to which my brother goes. 9. Are
you looking for the man who is here t 10. No ; I am looking for
him who is there. 11. Are you not fatigued ? 12. I am fatigued
because I have run all the morning. 13. There is what I have at
your service ; do you accept it 1 14. I accept it. 15. Do you read
without spectacles? 16. No, I cannot read without spectacles.
17. Are you not wrong in buying that horse? 18. No, I am right
in buying him, because 1 have need of him.
19. Does that man still owe you money ? 20. He owes me a
hundred dollars at least. 21. Does the doctor see you sometimes?
22. He sees me occasionally. 23. Do you ever go to the opera?
24. I go there occasionally. 25, Give me five dollars more. 26.
Give him a dollar less. 27. I have given you a dollar too much,
and you have given me a dollar too little. 28. Is there too much
sugar in your tea? 29. There is neither too much nor too little.
30. There is some fruit at your service ; do you accept it? 31. I
accept it. 32. Do you wear spectacles? 33. Yes; I am near-
sighted. 34. That countryman has at least ten goats. 35. What
distance is it to that hotel? 36. It is about a mile and a quarter.
248 THE SEVENTYSECOND LESSON.
37. Is it far to your house 1 38. It is hardly three hundred paces.
39. It is about two miles and a quarter to the church.
OPTIONAL EXERCISES.
1. I believe that yon do not like music. 2. Yes, sir, I like it
much. 3. Do you not prefer reading to music ? 4. They are both
(loutes deux) good ; but if it is necessary to choose one or the other,
I say that it is necessary to choose the most useful. 5. You are
wrong. 6. How ! do you not like better to read than to listen to
a violin ? 7. Not at all ; reading fatigues me sometimes, but music
never fatigues me. 8. There is Mr. H. coming (qui vienl) ; let us
see what is his opinion (opinion), 9. Good morning (bonjour), Mr.
H. ; come in (entrez), there is a chair. 10. You are acquainted
with Mr. Charles, I believe. 11. Perfectly.
12. What are you doing, gentlemen t 13. Almost (a peu pres)
nothing ; we are speaking of music and of reading ; tell us which
of the two you prefer. 14. That is not difficult. 15. I prefer read-
ing in the morning, and music in the evening. 16. I understand ;
you love music when you are fatigued with (de) reading. 17.
Exactly so (lout juste), 18. But if it is necessary to choose one
or the other, which of the two will you choose? 19. Reading, with-
out doubt. 20. Mr. Albert is not of your opinion ; he gives the
first place to music. 21. Each one to his taste ; and every thing
ought to have its place. 22. Innocent amusements (amusements
innocents) are without doubt very useful ; and as (comme) there is
more than (de) one, every body will not be obliged (oblige) to chooeo
the same.
72.— SOIXANTE-DOUZItME LEgON.
IBREGULAE PAST PARTICIPLES.
1. Almost all the Irrcgnlar past participle.% that i.s those differing from the nilet giren
in Lessons 23, 2S, 82, 34, 35, haTc now been given. They are these :
XXFINITIVB. PABTICIPLB.
ISnSlTlTB. PARTICIPUL
iNriJfmvBi
PAXTICIPLS.
Acquurir, AcquIm* acqaircd.
Mettre,
J/£«, put
R^sondro
Courir, Couru^ ron.
Mourir,
Mort, died.
Coudre, Couiu, sewed.
Naltre,
JVV, born.
Bonffrir,
Souffert, suffered.
Couvrir, Convert, covered.
Offrlr,
Offert, offered.
Sulvrc,
SuiH, followed.
Dire, jP«,sald.
Ouvrlr,
Ourert, opened.
Vcdr,
Vitn, clothed.
l^:crlre, Kcrtt, written.
Prendre, /»r/«, taken.
Vivre,
r*cu,t lived.
Faire, FaU^ done.
Rire,
Jli\ laughed.
• The other compounds of qiiirir, viz., conquiHr, enquiriry and requirir^ Jbna thi»
particlnle in the same way as arquiHr.
t The following complete the list of irrcgnlar past participles :
ISFINTnVK. PARTICIPLE. IXriXIXm. PAETiriPLB.
As^eoir, to seat, j4«m, seated Lnirf. to shine, Lni^ shone.
iSurneoir^ to ro>pite, iSur»i»^ respited. JfoiuIrA, to grind, Moultk, croand.
/J-fw/r, tobloKS, A^nir, Wni, blessed. jVuire^ to Inlnre, ^Vl, ti^orcd.
Circoncire, to clrcuoiciae, CirconcU^ circumcised. H^hure^ to glitter, Jitlui^ glittered.
riore^ to close, (7o*, closed. Su^re^ to suffice, SfiM, aoffieed.
Frire, to fry, Ft-U, fried. Truire, to milk, Trak milked.
THE SEVENTT^ECOND LESSON. 249
S. Words lire often bspbatxd nr FRXircn when thej are not In English. The urtiele
and posieasive ac^ecUve were spoken of; Lesson 2S. We may add that adjectives geneimlly
which precede the noun, are to bo repeated before each nonn to which they belong; as,
I buy some good glores and stockings. J*ach^tc dc bons gants et de bona bas.
Ue has the best butter and cheese. II a le meilleur beurro et le meillevr
fromage.
Z, The snbjeet-pronouns, when etotau nsed alone connect the Terbs, may be repeated
or not.
I fear and hate him. Je le crains et ( je) le hais.
4, When the yerbs connected by «< or ou are not in the same tense, or have many words
interrening; or if the object of the first yerb be not a personal prononn, the subject-pronoun
Is repeated.
I am going to see him, and shall speak Je vais le voir, etje lul parlcrai.
to him.
I will go and tell him that you have JUrai lui dire quo yous ctes yenu, et^
come, and will give him your let* lui donnerai TOtre lettre.
ter.
I hare received your letter, and have J'ai reju votre lettre, et^'e Pai lue.
read it.
& The objective pronoun is repeated In simple tenses, not usually in compound oneo*
I desire to see, persuade, and bring Je desire le voir, le persuader et Tam-
him. ener.
I bave seen, persuaded, and brought Je Tai vu, persuade et amen6.
him.
& When the second verb is a compound of the first, the objective pronoun is not n-
peated, except when the actions are difTerent
He does it and does it again without H le fait et refait sans cesse.
ceasing.
He does it and undoes it without ceas- H le fait et le defait sans cesse.
ing.
7. The prepositions d and de are to be repeated before each of their objects.
I speak to the man and his son. Je parle d Thomme et d son fils.
We speak of you and him. Nous parlons de vous ct de lui.
A$. Cold as ice. Comfne. Froid comme glace.
To build. A country-house. Bdtir. Une maison de campagne.
What a5re/ To lead. Queldgef Charger.
A bouquet. To burn. Un bouquet. BrUler.
A moment. Ripe. Un moment, Mur.
To dean. To cough. Nettoyer. Tousser,
The danger. Now. Lc danger. Maintenant.
To avoid. To arrive^ happen. Ji'viter (de bef. inf.). Arriver.
8b Arriver takes itre for its auxiliary.*
* Of verbs taking itre for anxlUary, the following have now been given : cUer^ mourir,
naUre^ parvenir^ revenir^ tomber^ venir, and arriver.
U S19« 18 5 !»« US SSB 9Dia« M • S • 14
eomm«, b&-tir, A?«, bou-ket, brft-ler, mo-menC, m(ir, nef-to-yer, tous-aer, dan-ger, mainte-
S » IS c 1 u «
naal, ^-vl-ter, ar-ri-ver.
II*
250 THE SEVENTY^ECOND LESSON.
When did you arrive ? Quand Stes-Yona arrivS f
I arrived this morning. Je wii arrive ce matin.
0. In speaking of age, the French use the verb to hate^ the English the verb to 6a
ffow old are you ? Quel dge avez-voua /
I am less than sixteen years old. J^ai moins de seize ana.
10. Than before a number is rendered in French \>j de.
He is more than fifteen years old. II a plus de quinze aus.
More than two hours and a half. Plus de deux heures et demie.
1. B4tissez-vous une maison de briques ? 2. Non, j'en Mtis une
de bois ; mais mon voisin en b4tit une de briqae. 3. Combien de
milles y a-t-il d*ici k voire maison de campagne ? 4. II y a pri's
de deux milles et demi. 5. De quoi cbargez-vons ce chevalT 6.
Je le charge de grain. 7. Ce bateau est-il charge de vin ? 8. Non,
il est charge de sel. 9. Pourquoi evitez-vous cet homme ? 10. Je
Tcvite parce que c'est mon ennemi. 11. Nettoyez-vous tos bottes
le matin? 12. Non, le domestique les nettoie le soir. 13. Cet en-
fant tousse-t-il beaucoup? 1*4. Non, il ne tousse pas beaucoup.
15. Avez-vous un bouquet de fleurst 16. Qui, j'ai un bouquet de
roses et de violettes. 17. Que brdle cet ^colier? 18. II brule ses
papiers. 19. Voila des pommes mftres; en voulez-rous? 20. J*cn
mangerai une dans un moment. 21. Y a-t-il dn danger k Tester
ici? 22. II n'y a pas de danger. 23. J'ai fini ma t&che et je vais
maintenant chez moi. 24. Bevenez demain, je ne puis pas vous
recevoir aujourd'hui. 25. Je n'ai jamais vu une fleur comme celle-
U ; en avez-vous d'autres ? 26. J'en ai beaucoup.
1. Do they build the houses of (en) stone in your village! 2.
They do not build many of stone, they build more of brick and of
wood. 8. Is that scholar studious ? 4. Yes, sir, he studies as well
as his brother. 5. Is that iron cold? 6. It is cold as ice. 7. How
far is it to that coHntryrhouse ? 8. It is more than two miles and
a quarter. 9. What are you building ? 10. I am building a hand-
some country-house. 11. How old are you? 12. I am hardly
twelve years old. 13. How old is your brother? 14. He is more
than fifteen years old. 15. With what do they load that vessel ?
16. They load it with cotton. 17. Give the bouquet to that lady.
18. Make me a bouquet of roses and violets. 19. Here are some
ripe apples ; will you eat some? 20. In a moment. 21. What are
you burning ? 22. We are burning these old papers.
23. Are those peaches ripe? 24. No, they are not yet ripe.
THE SEVENTY-THIRD LESSON. 261
25. Is it far to your house ? 26. It is not more than a mile and
three quarters. 27. Wait then a moment, and I will go with you.
28. Had the servant cleaned your hoots when you spoke to him this
morning? 29. He had cleaned them. 30. Does he clean them
well ? 31. He does not clean them very well. 32. Do you cough
much ? 33. No, I do not cough much. 34. Do you avoid those
men ? 35. I avoid them. 36. Is there danger in going on the
river ? 37. There is no danger. 38. I have read this hook, and
now I have a desire to read that one. 39. Has your hrother ar-
rived? 40. He has arrived. 41. When did he arrive? 42. He
arrived yesterday morning. 43. Is it far to those rocks? 44. It
is almost two miles. 45. How far is it to the hotel ? 46. It is
about half a mile. 47. Will you be here two hours ? 48. I shall
be here more than three hours.
OPTIONAL EXERCISES.
1. There is the moon beginning (qui commence d) to appear.
2. It is full moon this evening. 3. It is very fine weather now. 4.
The evenings are very beautiful. 5. There is some fog in the morn-
ing, but that is not bad. 6. We have a superb season, and there
will be much fruit this year. 7. Yes, if it is not too dry. 8. We
shall have some rain before one week. 9. I believe as you that the
weather is going to change soon. 10. There are some clouds
around {auiour de) the moon. 11. Yes, each night one sees more.
12. It has been very warm during three or four days. 13. Until
ijusque) now, the nights have been cool enough. 14. Last night
it was very warm ; there was no wind. 15. I am subject to the
headache when it is warm at night, and then I cannot sleep.
16. How far is it from here to the church ? 17. It is not quite
half a mile. 18. How far is it to that rock? 19. It is only two
hundred paces. 20. Did you not pay too much for that horse ?
21. I paid neither too much nor too little for him. 22. Did you
not pay that man more than you owed him? 23. No ; I paid him
neither a cent more nor a cent less than his due. 24. This watch
costfl me more than it is worth ; I paid three hundred dollars for
it. 25. Have you much money ? 26. No ; I have hardly five dol-
lars. 27. Were you right in buying that horse? 28. No. I was
wrong; for {car) the price was too high.
73.— SOIXANTE-TRElZIfeME LEgON.
H0UE3 OF THE DAY.
1. For the hours of the day, one o'elocky tteo o^dock^ halfpati two, etc^ tho Froneh n
merel/ the namher with the hoar, and say, one lumr^ tufo Aoura, hoo houn and a Aa(^
252 THE SEVENTT-THIRD LESSON.
What o'clock isitf QtielU heure est-il f
It is ooe o'clock. It is two oVlock. U est une heurc. II est deux heures.
It is half past three. II est trois heures et deniie
Is it not five o'clock ? K'est-il pas cinq heures ?
It is a quarter past ten. II est dix heures et quart (or on quart).
2. Tho fhictional part of the time is always after the nambcr in French, and joined to
it hy et, expressed or understood, when past the hoar, and by moint when before it ; thoa.
It is a quarter before nine. II est ncuf heures moins un quart.
It is ten minuies before ten. II est dix heures moins dix minutes.
It is twenty minutes after elevexL II est onze heures (et) vingt minutes.
It is twelve o'clock, noon^ midday. II est midi.
It is half post twelve (at noon). II est midi et demic.
It is twelve o'clock Midnight. II est minuit.
It is half past twelve (at night). II est minuit et demic.
8. Douu heure* is used only to express the period of twelve hoars.
It is twenty minutes before twelve (at II est minuit moins vingt minutes.
night).
(II est six heures, trois quarts.
It la a quarter to seven. j j, ^^^ ^p^ ^^„^ ^^i„, „„ ^^^
The top. A minute. Le haut^ gommet. Une mintUe.
The bottom. Elsewhere, Le 6cu, fond. Ailleurs.
The ntunber, A party^ a game. Le nombre. Une partie.
The number. Novelty, Le numero. La notweaute.
4. Kombre is a collection of nnlta, numiro is one of a marked scries.
The number ten. Le nombre dix.
He lives at number six. II dcmeure (No. 6) num6ro six.
6. A nonn nsod in an attrihutive sense, in apposition, or as subject predicate, takes no
article in French, though it does in English.
He passes for a soldier. H passe pour soldat.
We have the king for a friend. Nous avons le roi pour ami.
Cicero, a celebrated Roman orator. Cic^ron, ceUbre orateur romais.
Charles, the king of Sweden. Charles, roi de Su^de.
I am an JSfiglishman. Je suis anglais.
He is a physician. II est medecin.
Tou are a merchant. Yous etes negociant.
a. When the noun thus nsed is limited by an ai^jective or other word, the article b
used, and heU^UiSt etc, are rendered &est. (See Lessons 80 and 52.)
U that man a lawyer f Cet homme est-il avocatf
No, he is a rich merchant. Non, c'est un richc negociant.
He passes for a soldier of the king. II passe pour un soldat du roi.
He is a good physician. C'est un bon mddecin.
7. Alter verbs of motion, /br is rendered in French by cherchtr.
19 a 12 13 13 2313 17 15 S S fil r II 31 1 13 13 5 17
mi-nute, mi-di, mi-nui/, hanf, som-met, baa, font/, oll-leara, nombre, par-tie, na-me>raL
IS 17 9
noa-veau-td.
THE SEVENTY-THIRD LESSON. 253
To gofer. To come for. Alter ckercher. Venir cherchtr.
To tend for. To run for. Envoyer ckercher. Courir chercher.
Go for some water. I am going for Allez cbercher de Teau. J'en Tab
some. chcrcber.
I come back for mj book. Je reviens cbercher mon lirre.
Do you send for tbc horses? EnToyez-vous cbercher les cheyaux?
We send for them. Nous les eoTovons chcrcber.
& £«ery before a noan of Umo Is rendered by tout and the article with the noan plnraL
Ecery year. Every dnj. Tons les tina. Tom lea jonrs.
Every hour. Every minute. Toutes les heurcs. Toutes les minutes.
1. Quelle henre est-il ? 2. II n'est pas tard ; il est neuf heures.
3. Est-il midi t 4. Non, il est onze heures et demie. 6. N'est-il
pas minuit ? 6. II est minuit et dix minutes. 7. Est-il tard ? 8.
II est^ix heures trois quarts. 9. H est midi moins un quart. 10.
Est^il onze heures ? 11. II est onze heures moins cinq minutes.
12. AUez-vous au haut de cette montagne ? 13. J'y vais. 14. Y
a-t-il loin d'ici au has de la montagne ? 15. II y a environ trois
milles. 16. Vous ne trouverez pas ailleurs du fruit comma celui-ci.
17. n 7 a un grand nombre de spldats sur ce navire. 18. Demeu-
rez-rous au numero huit ? 19. Non, je demeure au num^ro quinze.
20. Y a-t-il une partie de plaisir chez vous ce soir 1 21. Non, il n'y
en a pas aucune ce soir ; mais il y en aura une demain soir. 22.
Allez- vous chercher quelque chose ? 23. Je vais chercher mon livre.
24. Envoyons chercher du vin. 25. Voyez-vous souvent le mede-
cin ? 26. Je le vois tous les jours. 27. AUez-vous a la ville tous
les mois 1 28. J'y vais toutes les semaines. 29. Voyez-vous votre
ami tous les jours 1 80. Je le vois tous les matins et tous les soir.
1. Is there danger in (d) going up to the top of that mountain f
2. There is no danger. 3. We had arrived at the bottom of the
mountain when \re saw your friend. 4. I dwell in Dauphin-street,
at number twenty-five. 5. We have arrived at the bottom of the
mountain, and now we wish to ascend to the (en) top. 6. Is there
elsewhere better fruit than this t 7. There is none better. 8. Is
that scholar going for his books ? 9. No, sir, he is going for his
papers. 10. Do not children love novelty? 11. Yes, everybody
loves novelty. 12. What does that workman come for ? 13. He
comes for his money. 14. Have you sent for some coflfee ? 15. I
have sent for some coffee and some sugar. 16. Do you cough mucht
17. I cough every five minutes. 18. That child drinks every hour.
19. I go to the market every morning and every evening.
254 THE SEVElrrY-FOTJRTfl LESSON.
20. What time is it f 21. It is half past six. 22. At what
hour do yoa breakfast ? 23. I breakfast at a quarter past seTen.
24. Is it twelve o'clock (at noon) ? 25. It is ten minutes after
twelve. 26. Do you dine at half past two ? 27. I dine at a quar-
ter before three. 28. Did you return from the ball at midnight?
29. I returned at a quarter past twelve. SO. What do you buy ?
31. I buy some good gloves and stockings. 82. Our neighbor has
the best apples and peaches. 33. I will borrow this book and read
it to my brother. 34. Will you read that book? 35. I shall read
and translate it. 36. To whom do you speak 1 37. 1 speak to that
man and his son. 38. Do you often go to church ? 39. I go there
every Sunday. 40. Is not that sick man weak ? 41. He is weak
as a child. •
OPTIONAL EXERCISES.
1. What are you looking for ? 2. I am looking for my (eanne)
cane. 3. This is yours, is it not ? 4. No, it does not belong to
me ; mine is black. 5. Then whose {d qui) is this T for it is not
mine. 6. I saw your cousin with a cane like {comme) that. 7.
That is true, it is his ; he left it this morning, and he has taken
mine. 8. There is (en voild) another ; whose is it ? 9. It is mine ;
my cousin forgot his, and he has not taken (pris) mine. 10. But
where is yours t I put it here under the table. 11. Wait, I am
going to ask the boy if he has seen it. 12. George, do you know
where the gentleman's cane is ? 13. I believe that he has left it
in the garden ; I am going for it. 14. Thank you ; I believe that
you are right.
15. Hadst thou arrived when the doctor came here t 16. I had
not arrived. 17. Had your brother arrived in the city when you
saw him? 18. He had arrived there. 19. See the beautiful
strawberries which I have. 20. Where did you find them t 21. I
picked (prises) them in the garden. 22. How! I have not seen
any there yet. 23. There are no more ripe, but there will be be-
fore long (avant peu)y wherewith to fill a plate. 24. What are you
going to ao with these ? 25. Nothing ; do you wish for them t
26. If you please ; I will send them to Mrs. C. I know that she
likes them much. 27. There are exactly (^toute juste) enough.
Send her at the same time a few flowers. 28. I am going to make
her a bouquet. 29. Wait a moment ; I will go with you.
74.-_SOIXANTE-QUATORZIi:MB LEgON.
PBESENT FABTICIPLE X7SED.
1. The present participle is leas used in French than In English, it belagi as we haT»
seen (Leason 68\ often rendered Into French bj the inflnitiYe.
THE SBVENTY-FOURTH LESSON. 255
Wben, howerar, two actions an apoken of as performad at tha sama tlma, tha moia an-
during of tha two maj generally be rendered bj this participle, preceded by tha piapoat-
tSoneft.
He eats tohile he ta reading. n mange en lUanU
We talk ithiU we are working, Koos causons en travaillani.
Too talk lohile you sleep. Yous parlez en dormant.
I read the letter while dining. J*ai lu la lettre en dinant.
S. The partidpla used In this way always belongs to the subject of tha Tsrb. Belonging
to the aabject, it is someUmos used also wlthont the preposition &n.
Doing nothing, do you hope to succeed? Ne faisant rien, esp^res-Tous r^ussir f
KeTer studying, can you learn French? NUtudiant jvLtnAla, pouvez-Tous ap-
prendre le fran^ais ?
& Tha present participle, without tha preposition, may belong also to the object of the
▼erb, when the connection Is intimate and free from ambiguity; but the infinitive or other
oonatrnction is eren then to bo preferred.
I saw <he boy stealing my fruit. J'ai vu lo petit gar^on volant mes fruits,
(or better) voler (or ^t volait) mes
fruits.
I see them running toward the city. Je les Tois courant (better eourir) vert
la vUle.
4 .As, as already Men (Lesson 66X is the only preposition in French which can be fol-
kiwad by (his participle. Participlea and participial nouns, therefore, following a preposi-
tion which cannot be translated by a«s as in No. 1 above, must be rendered by the infini-
tive, or by a noun, or by a change of oonstmotlon.
Writing at night hurts the eyes. J6crire la nuit fait mal aux yeux.
He likes reading very much. H aime beaucoup d lire (or la Ueture).
What do yon gain bg doing that Que gagnez-vous d/aire cela ?
We study without saying a word. Nous Studious sans dire un mot.
The past definite of £trk, to be^ is irregtdar.
Jefite^ tufuM^ Ufut, nouB/ames^ voue/AUe, ilefurent,
I was, thou wast, he was, we were, you were, they were.
I was too good for thee last week, but Je fus trop bon pour toi la semaine
my brother was not good enough. demi^re, mais mon fr^re ne UftU
pas assez.
Were you pleased to see the general Mies yous contents de voir le g6n6ral
on Monday ? lundi ?
We were pleased to see him, and our Nous /t2mes contents de le Toir, et nos
cousins were pleased also. cousins le/urent aussL
The past definite o/jltoir, to have^ is irregular.
•Tana, tuewt, iletOf noueedmes, vousetiUa^ ih eurent^
I had, thoahad^t, he had, we had, you had, they had.
Thou hadst my book day before yes- Tu eus mon Utto avant-hier ; n'esiKse
terday ; hadst thou not? pas?
I had it not, my brother had it. Je ne Veus pas, c'est mon fr^re qui Veui.
n n
ftia,eu«i
256 THE SEVENTYFOURTH LESSON.
Had you my pens? JBAiei-Tona mes plamea?
We had them DOt ; your brothers had Nous ue les eAmfU pas ; vos frdrcs lea
them. eurent
To praise. To blame. Lover. Bldmer.
Indwttrious. Diligent. Jndustrieux^ labcricux. JHligetU,
A globe. The forrn^ Jigure. JJn globe, lok forme ^ figure.
Good morning, good dag, good after' Bonjcur.
noon.
Good evening. Good night. Bonaoir. Bonne nuit.
Negligent. Strength. Negligent. La, force.
Yonder. Mg faith. Ld-bae. Mafoi.
Surprised. Pleased^ much pleased. Surpris. Aisey bien aise.
1. Fiites-vous bien re9u k New-York Tctd demicrl 2. J'y fus
bien re9a. 3. Nous fumes surpris de vous voir dimanche, et nos
freres le furent aussi. 4. Hon fr^re fut bien aise de receyoir votre
lettre mardi. 5. J*eu8 voire livre la semaine passee ; n*est-ce pas ?
6. Non, vous efites ma plume, et voire frdre eui mon livre. 7. Ce
chien mange en courant. 8. Ces ccoliers ne parlent-ils pas en etu-
diani 1 9. lis parlent en 6iudiant et en r^citant leurs lemons. 10.
Get homme ne chanie-il pas en iravaillant? 11. H chanie en tra-
vaillant et aussi en marcbani. 12. Get bomme n'esi pas bonne te ;
je Tai surpris (volant) k voler mon fruit. 13. Ne connaissant pas
cet bomme lui faiies-vous credit ? 14. Je ne lui his pas credit
15. Je loue Tbomme laborienx, et je bl&me celui qui est negli-
gent. 16. La terre a la figure d*un globe. 17. J'ai acbete un bon
cheval ; il a beaucoup de force. 18. Pourquoi le maiire loue-t-il cet
6colier ? 19. II le loue parce qu*il est diligent et il bUme son fr^re
parce qu'il est negligent. 20. J'aime beaucoup cette maison ; elle
est tres-belle. 21. Est-il tard? 22. II est-minuit et quelques mi-
nutes. Bonne nuit.
1. Good morning, sir ; I am deligbted to see you. 2. Is that
sick man very weak ? 3. Yes, be bas lost all bis strengtb. 4.
Wbom does the master praise? 5. He praises tbat industrious
scbolar. 6. Does be blame any one ? 7. He blames bim wbo is
negligent. 8. Is tbat scbolar diligent t 9. He is diligent, bat bis
sister is negligent. 10. Has tbe sun tbe form of a globe? 11. Tbe
sun bas tbe form of a globe, and tbe moon also. 12. Good morn-
ing, madam ; I am mucb pleased to see you ; bave you recovered
18 « 9 6 14 » IS 10 1 IS l"! 10 12 19 S 13 l« U B U 18
loa-er, bla-mer, In-dns-trl-etKe, la^bo-rleuflg; di*li-geiil elob«, forma, fl-gur«| boa-tour.
boO'Mlr, B^-gli-genli forc«, Bur-prta, uize.
THE SEVENTY-FOUKTH LESSON. 257
{repris) your strength t 13. Yes, sir, I am in good health now.
li. Are there not some soldiers yonder? 15. There are a few;
in. Do you ever read while you are eating? 17. No, I never read
while I am eating. 18. That man talks while he is sleeping, and
those children sing while they are studying.
19. Wast thou not much pleased to see thy friend on Wednes-
day t 20. I was surprised and delighted, and my brothers were
so likewise. 21. Had you not the master's inkstand on Friday ?
22. We had it not ; those little boys had it 23. Hadst thou not
his penknife? 24. Yes, I had his -penknife and his pen, and my
brother had his pencil. 25. How old is your father ? 26. He is
almost (pres de) fifty years old, and my grandfather is more than
seventy-eight. 27. Had you finished your exercise when the mas-
ter came ? 28. I had finished it. 29. Did your friend return from
the ball at midnight ? 30. No, he returned a quarter before one.
31. There are many people yonder. 32. Will you send for some
wine ? 33. The servant has gone for some. 34. Have you lost
your money ? 35. My faith, I have lost it all. 36. Is it late ?
37. It is half past eight. Good evening.
OPTIONAL EXERCISES.
1. There will be much fruit this year, I believe. 2. All the trees
are loaded with flowers and young fruit. 3. Your uncle dwells in
the country ; does he not ? 4. Yes, but the house in which (where)
he dwells is not his. 5. To whom then does it belong? 6. To Mr.
C. 7. I thought {croyais) that your uncle had a country-house of
his own (d lui), 8. That in which he dwelt last year was his, but
it is burnt 9. I did not know it ; does he not intend to build
another? 10. Yes, they were working on it (y) the last time tiiat
I saw him. 11. Have you seen the new house which he is build-
ing? 12. No, I have not seen it ; but my uncle has told me that
it will be larger than the old one. 13. Is not your sight weak?
14. Yes, sir ; I can not study as I did last year. 15. Is it far to
the doctor's? 16. It is not quite a mile.
17. Have you any thing to do this evening ? 18. No ; why do
you ask me that? 19. Come and pass the evening with me ; you
will make the acquaintance of the gentleman of whom I have spoken
to you, and who is a very amiable fellow. 20. With much pleas-
ure ; I have nothing to do, and I shall be delighted to pass the
evening in a manner (d'une maniere) so agreeable. 21. Bring your
cousin with you. 22. Well, I will bring him, if I see him. I shall
be at the store a little lat^. 23. We can wait for you a little. 24.
You are very amiable.
258 THE SEVENTY-FIFTH LESSON.
25. Does that carpenter work mucht 26. Yes, he is very la-
borious. 27. Do you see the soldiers yonder! 28. I see them.
29. Are you a Frenchman ? 30. No, sir, I am an Englishman.
75.— SOlXANTEQUINZlfiME LEgON.
PAST DEFINITE CONTINUED.
The past definite o/fai&k, to make or do^ is irregvlar; thuSj
Jejti^ iufie^ iljlt^ noua/tmM^ voiufltea^ iUJiretU,
I did. thou didst, he did, W6 did, yoadid, they did.
Did3t thou do tby exercise well on FU-in bicn ton theme lundi ?
Monday ?
I did it well, and Charles did his well ; Je Ic fie bien, et Charles fit bien le
did you do yours well ? sien ; fUee-vous bien les Totres?
We did them well, but those little boys Nous les fimee bien, mais cos petits
did not do any at all garyons n^en^re^i^ pas du tout.
The past definite q^voiR, to wc, w irregular; thus,
Jetie, tutia, Uvit, noustlmeSf vousvUes, ilevirent,
I saw, thoa sawest, he saw, we saw, yoa saw, they saw.
Did you see Prince Albert, last year, Vites-voua le Prince Albert, Pannte
when you were in London ? pass^e, quand vous 6tiez k Londres?
I saw him, and my brother saw hlra Je le vis, et mon fr^re le vit aussi ; nos
also ; our friends saw the queen, amis virent hi reine, mais nous oe
but we did not see her. h. vvnes pas.
To go to meet. Alter au devant de, or Alter d la renn
contre de.
To meet. The meeting. Reneontrer, La rencontre.
To deceive. To begin. Tromper. Cotnmencer {d or de bef. inf.).
Thank Ood. Charmed, deliglUed. Dieu merci, Charme {de bef. infl).
Yesterday evening, last evening. Hier au soir, hier soir.
Tour cousin is yonder ; let us go to Votre cousin est la-bas ; allons an-de-
meet him. vant de lui (or & sa rencontre).
1. Commeneer takes d before the i&ilnitire when progress is denoted, de when it is noL
He begins to speak French. II commence d parlcr fran9ais.
He begins to dine at two o^clock. H commence de diner h deux henres.
2. The yerb aller with an inflnitivo expresses an immediate faioxt ; venir de with aa
infinitive expresses an immediate past
We are just going (will go) for our Kous allons chercher nos livres.
books.
I am just going to (or will now go and) Je vaisfinir mon th^mc.
finish my exercise.
We have just been for our books. Nous venons de chercher nos livres.
I have just finished my exercise. Je viens definir mon thfeme.
uiiasi sisis 80 rn6«
fl«, vi«, ren-coDtre, trom-per, com-men-oer, mer-cl, char-me.
THE SEVENTY-FIFTH LESSON. 259
To hate. Mated, JKHr (d bef. iDf.). JKii
J<8kai8, tuhaii, UAaii, nauehaiaeone, wnuhaiaue, i:s haJseent,
I bate, thoa hatest, he hatea, we bate, you bate, tbey bate.
To swim. An offer. Nager. Une offre.
To nnoke. The afternoon. Fumer. Vapree-midi.
8. Midi is masealine geoder, apria-midi is feminine.
4. The present participle, like the past, used as an adjeotiye, becomes one ht all reqMcts,
and is Taxied aecordlngly ; bat as a participle it is always invariable.*
They are persons loving every body. Ce sont des personnea aimant tout le
monde.
They are loving (affectionate) persons. Ce sont des personnea aimantes.
Read the ptigea following this lesson. Lisez les pages auivant cette legon.
Read the following pages. Lisez les pages auivantes.
Sleeping waters are dangerous. Les eaux dormantea sont dangereuses.
I saw them sleeping extended beneath Je les ai vus dormant dtendus sous un
a tree. arbre.
1. Ne fites-vous pas du th6 samedi t 2. Je fis du the, mon frere
fit du cafe, et nos scears firent des gateaux. 3. Vites-vous le gene-
ral, dimaDchet 4. Noas le vimes, et nos cousins le virent aussL
5. Ne le vis-tu pas 1 6. Je le vis samedi et mon fr^re le vit ven-
dredL 7. Allez-vous au-devant de votre oncle ? 8. Oui, je vais au-
devant de lui. 9. Get ^colier trompe-t-il le maitre? 10. Non, il
ne le trompe jamais. 11. Get enfant commence- t-il a parler ? 12.
n commence a parler nn pea. 13. £lte8-vous malade ? 14. Non,
Dieu merci, je suis en bonne sant6. 16. Quand avez-vous vu le
medecin? 16. Je le vis hier au soir. 17. Oii allez-vous? 18. Je
vais chercber mon livre. 19. Votre ami est-il arrive ? 20. Oai, il
vient d'arriver. 21. Fumez-vous da tabac t 22. Non, monsieur, je
hais le tabac. 23. Get enfant n*a que sept ans, mais il nage tr^
bien. 24. Ge monsieur m'a fait une belle offre, mais je ne puis pas
Taccepter. 25. Serez-vous chez vous cette apr^s-midi? 26. J'y
serai toute la jonrn^e. 27. Alors, j'irai chez vous cette apr^s-midi
a qnatre heures. 28. Nous haissons le temps froid. 29. Ge mau-
vais 6colier n'etudie jamais ; il sera bal et m6pris6.
1. Didst thou not make too much noise yesterday evening in thy
room ? 2. I did not make any at all ; but the little boys made too
much. 3. Did you make a (du) noise on Thursday t 4. We did
• The Iramer will of course distin^nlah between the participle and oi^ectiTe In French
the aaroo ai in Englbh. If the word merely express the qaality of the noun, It la an a<Uec-
tire ; but if It takes an object, or expresses action like a verb, It is a participle.
ha-ir, ha-1. haU, bait, hft-U-6on«, ha-I«-sea, ha-to««»«, nager, oft#, fti-mer. a-prfia-ml-dl.
260 THE SEVENTY-FIFTH LESSON.
not make any ; your cousin made some. 5. When have you seen
my brother ? 6. I saw him last evening, and my brothers saw him
on Saturday. 7. Did you see the general on Wednesday? 8. We
saw him on Wednesday, and the captain saw him on Thursday. 9.
What did you do on Friday afternoon in the country? 10. I did
nothing. 11. Are you going to meet your friend ? 12. Yes, I am
going to meet him. 13. Do you ever deceive the master ? 14. I
never deceive him. 15. Did your friend arrive at noon? 16. No,
he arnved in the afternoon at three o'clock.
17. Does that child begin to walk ? 18. He begins to walk a
little. 19. Have you many relations ? tlO. No, sir, I have none
at all ; but, thank God, I have good friends. 21. 1 have just seen
your brother ; have you seen him ? 22. Yes, he has just arrived
from the country. 23. Is that scholar ignorant ? 24. Yes, he is
ignorant ; he plays instead of studying, and he is hated and de-
spised. 25. Do you hate any one? 26. No, sir, I hate no one.
27. We hate the cold, and our friends hate it also. 28. Do you like
to swim ? 29. I like to swim sometimes. 30. Do you smoke to-
bacco ? 81. No, sir, I do not smoke at all ; I hate tobacco. 32. Is
that man a merchant ? 33. No, sir, he is a physician. 84. Are
you a Frenchman ? 35. No, sir, I am a German. 36. Are you
hungry ? 87. No, sir, I have just dined. 38. It is late ; good
evening, sir.
OPTIONAL EXERaSES.
1. Whose is that white horse ? is it yours ? 2. No, it is my
cousin's ; the black one belongs to me. 3. I find his more beautifcd
than yours. 4. Yes, he is a handsome horse ; there are few as
handsome. 5. How much did he pay for him ? 6. He cost him two
hundred and fifty dollars ; it is not dear. 7. It is a good price for
a horse ; but there are some horses which cost still more, and which
are not as good as that one. 8. He looks very gentle. 9. What
have you done with the (du) little horse that you bought of (a)
Mr. Charles? 10. I have him yet. 11. Have you him here? 12.
No, I left him in the country. 13. Do you not desire to sell him I
14. No, I have no mind to be without a horse. I have need of one
in winter, and I like always to have a horse of my own (d moi)^
when the desire takes me to make a tour {tin tour) in the country.
15. You are right ; I do not like horses that I am not acquainted
with.
16. Where is your sister ? She has gone to a party of pleas-
ure in the city. 17. Is there danger in passing that river ? 18.
There is no danger. 19. 1 have hardly any money about me {gur
THE SEVENTY-SIXTH LESSO!?. 261
mot) ; lend me a few dollars. 20. Here are three ; I can lend them
to you. 21. Do not the French love novelty ? 22. Yes, all men
love novelty. 23. Does your friend smoke t 24. No, sir, he does
not like tobacco. 25. Does he know how to swim ? 26. Yes, he
swims very welL
76.— SOIXANTE-SIXl£ME LEgON.
PAST ANTEEIOE TENSE.
1. Thx past aktesios is fonned by onneziDg the post portielple to the past definite of
the Auziliarj; thus,
F<ist anterior ©/"DbER, to dine^ and venir, to come.
J^eua dini, tu eus dtni^ 41 eui dlni^ notu etimes dinl, 90U» e&tea dini^
I had dined, thou hedst dined, he had dined, wo hod dined, you had dined,
ila eurent dini, they hod dined.
Je/Usvenu^ tu/ustenu, il/tUvenu, nomfdnittvenut^ vou»futf§venu9^
I Iiad come, thoa hadat come, he had come, we hod come, yon had come,
Uafurtnt v«ntM, they hod como.
2. This tense denotes that a past action had been done immediately before another ac-
tion, also past It is generally preceded by an adrerb or conjunction expressing immediate
time, and attended by another verb in the past definite or indefinite. (See preyious rales,
pages 287 and 24S.) AtmU6t que fsvi nini je eortie; J^ai ierU ceUe leUre ai^ourd'hui
atteeitvt qitefEvs dIxe.
& The adverbs and conjnnctions generally preceding this tense are these:
As Boon as \ -^^**^^ 9^' When. Lorsque, quand.
' ( Sitoi que. Dee que. After. Apres que.
Hardly. A peine. No sooner. Pas plus t6t.
Yesterday as soon as I had breakfast- Hier aus8it6t que feus dejeuni j'allai &
ed I went to school. Tecole.
Testerday evenhig, as soon as we had Hier soir, d^s que nous eUtmes regu la
received the news, we went home. nouvellc, nous all&mes chez nous.
This morning, when he had breakfast- Ce matin quand il eut dejeune^ il est
ed, he set out. parti.
4. This tense may also be nsed without any other verb, when accompanied by some
phrase denoting immediate time, or when it expresses the completion of an action at a pre-
cise time.
They had soon finished. lis eurent bient6t^««.
We had finished before them. Nous eunuafini avant eux.
5. When something oontinnons or habitnal is spoken of, instead of this tense with tbo
past definite, the pluperfect with the imperfect is used.
He nsed to read as soon as he had II lisait aussit^t qu*il avait 60up6.
supped.
You vsed to go out when you had Yous sortiez quand vous aviez dtn6.
dined.
To fit, to become. Alter bien^ seoir (not used in the inf.).
JVW to fit. Alter mat, ne pas bien alter.
17 II rr IS ir T W 17 29 IT
ans-si'tu^ si-tu^ d6«, lorske, a-pr6«, plus t^s.
262 THE SEVEMT-SIXTH LESSON.
To salt. Afg, Saler. Vnejigue^
The Tolume.* The cause. Le volume. La cause.
To enter. A revolution. JSntrer. Une revolution.
ErUrer takes itre tot auxiliary.
Certain. A headrdress. Certain. Une coiffure.
The supper. A toilet. Le «otiper. Une toilette.
To sup. Too soon, Souper. Trop t6t.
Immediately. Soon enough. AussiUt. Assez tSt.
Does that head-dress fit that ladj ? or Cette coiffure Ta-t-elle bien (ded-elle)
Does that stjle of hair-dressing & cette dame f
become that lady ?
It does not fit her. EUe lui va mal (ne lui sied pas bien).
1. Cette coiffure ira bien h cette dame. 2. Le garden sera id
assez t6t poor aller chercher da sel et saler les poissons. 3. Com-
bien de yolumes de cette histoire 7 a-t-il ? 4. II y en a trois. 5.
Savez-vous la cause de la revolution anglaise ? 6. Je laconnais fort
bien. 7. La nouvelle est-elle certaine ? 8. Elle est certaine et tres
agreable. 9. Cette ouvrier est-il fatigue 1 10. II est bien fatign^.
11. A quelle heure soupez-Tous ? 12. Quand j*ai bien din^, je ne
soupe point. 13. VoiU de bonne prunes et de bonnes figues, en
voulez-voust 14. Jeveux des figues mais non pas des prunes. 15.
A quelle heure entrez-vous dans votre chambre f 16. J^y entre k
buit heures. 17. Je fais ma toilette de bonne heure. 18. Aossitdt
que Yous fiites arrives la semaine pass6e all&tes-vous voir le gene-
ral? 19. Non, aussit6t que nous fumes arrives, nous all&mes chez
notre ami. 20. Quand avez-vons regu ma lettre? 21. Hier des
que je fns entre dans ma chambre je la regus. 22. Votre fr^re esi-
il all6 a la campagne ? 23. Qui, k peine fut-il arriv6 hier qu'il re-
partit pour la campagne. 24. Yos amis sont-ils arrives ? 25. Oai,
monsieur, ce matin, k peine e^mes-nous d^jeun6 qu'ils sont arrives.
1. Did Charles go to scbool on Monday f 2. Yes, madam ;
when he had breakfasted, he went to school.* 3. Are the masons
here ! 4. No ; last Saturday, as soon as they had finished tbeir
work, they departed. 5. Did you go to your uncle's early on Satur-
day! 6. We went there as soon as we had dined. 7. What
didst thou do yesterday ? 8. Yesterday, after I had breakfiftsted.
* In books, rolume denotes that which is bound into one ; tornt^ the dirlslon of a work
made by the author. The former may contain several of the latter. They are sometimea
synonymous. Toms is leas used.
1 6 ia u fls 17 s 6 s u a issi r u so 9 us s» s
sa-ler, figwe, To-lums, eauxs, en-trer, r6-yo-Ia-tion, cer-taln, co^furs, sou-por, tol-I«tls.
THE SEVENTY-SIXTH LESSON. 263
I read ; and aft^r I had dined, I went to my aunt's. 9. As soon
as I had received your letter, the other day, I carried it to your
brother's. 10. As soon as the countryman had bought those fish
last week, did he not salt them? 11. He salted them all. 12.
Where did you go yesterday ? 13. As soon as we had breakfasted,
we went to the country. 14. Is the Frenchman at your house?
15. No, sir; when he had arrived yesterday, he went to my
brother's.
16. What does the cook send for? 17. He sends for some salt
to salt the meat. 18. Has he salted the soup? 19. He has salted
it too much. 20. That head-dress becomes that lady ; do you not
admire it? 21. I admire it much. 22. Do you know the causes
which brought (on) the French revolution ? I am not acquainted
with them all. 23. Do you like figs better than peaches ? 24. No ;
I like peaches as much as figs. 25. That coat does not fit you.
26. At what o'clock does the scholar enter*into his room ? 27. He
enters there at eight o'clock every morning. 28. Is that house to
be sold ? 29. No, it is to be let 30. I do not wish to go to church
too soon ; if we go there at eleven o'clock it will be soon enough,
and not too soon. 31. I shall go there as soon as you. 32. My
brother will make his toilet immediately.
OPTIONAL EXERCISES.
1. What were your brothers doing when you left them? 2.
They were writing letters to their friends. 3. I have some letters
to write before supper, and I had almost forgotten it. 4. I write
my letters in the evening. 5. I cannot ; my sight is a little weak
at present 6. What has made your sight weak ? 7. I believe
that it is from having read too much at night, as I did the winter
past 8. That is bad ; it is necessary to take care of your sight.
9. Next week we are going to make a party of pleasure in the
country ; you will go {viendrez) also, wUl you not ? 10. Certainly
(ceriainemeni) \ who will be of the party? 11. Miss B., George
C. and his sister, our cousins, and several other persons. 12. That
will be very agreeable ; where shall we go? 13. We do not know
yet ; but I think we shall go to the same place where we usually
{prdinairement) go, ' 14. I know a place which is quite {tout) as
beautiful as that where we were the last time, and I like better to
go there (la) this time, if the others consent to it (^). 15. Well,
we will see what they think of it ; as for me {quant a mot), I like
novelty. 16. Tbat is just {tout juste) my reason ; I believe that it
will be more agreeable than to go always to the same place ; and
264 THE SEVENTY-SEVENTH LESSON.
as that of which I speak to you is near the river, we shall be able
to make a turn {un tour) in a boat (en bateau). 17. Very well.
We shall have one pleasure more.
tu vin8^
ilvint,
nous vinmM,
tcuatinUa,
iU vinrent,
thoa earnest,
became,
we came,
you came.
theyoune.
tuUna,
iltint,
nous ttnmeat
vowitnUM,
iUUnrent,
thoa heldcst,
he held.
wo held.
you held.
they held.
77.— SOIXANTE-DIX-SEPTIfiltfE LECON.
PAST AKTEEIOB INDEFINITE TENSE.
1. Thb past antkriob iKDBPiinTK has the same relation to the psst aaterior that the
past Indefinite has to the past definite. It is used when the accompanying words are each
as tx> require the post anterior, and the time such as to reqaire the post indefinite, L e^ not
excluding the present day; and it is accompanied by a verb in the past indefinite.
2. It is formed by annexing the past participle to the past indeilnite of the anzUiaxy;
thus,
J*ai eu diniy tuaaeu dinl^ ilaeu dini^ noua avons eu dlni, vous aveg eu ditU,
I had dined, thoa hadst dined, he had dined, we had dined, you bad dtned,
ils avaUni eu dtne^ they had dined.
When I had breakfasted this morn- Quand j^ai eu d^jetxni ce matin, je
ing, I came here. euis venu ici.
a This tense, boweyer, is but little ased, and in the above phrase a different eonstrno-
tlon would generally be preferred; as, Apres avoir d^euni ee matin^ Je ntis v«ni» id,
Ttiepoit definite of yehir^ to come, and tekir, to hold, U irregular; thuf,
Jevina,
I came,
Je tin9,
1 held.
Did you come here last week ? Vintes-Toua ici la semaine demidre ?
We came here, and our brothers came Nous y vinmes^ et nos fr^rea y vinretU
also. aussi.
Didst thou come here early ? Ftns-tu ici do bonne heure?
Ko, I came here late. Non, j^y vins tard.
Did you hold the horses? Tintea-voua Ics chevanx?
We did not hold them, the serrants Nous ne les dnmet pas, lea domcstiqnes
held them. les tinrent.
Can there he f There can be. Peut-il y avoir f J\ peut y avoir.
There cannot be. H ne peut pas y avoir.
To offend. Riches, Offenser, La richesse^ les richesses.
To wish. The look, Souhaitcr, La mine.
To take place. The ceremony. Avoir lieu. La ctremonie.
It takes place. Immediately, II a lieu. Tmrn^diatement,
To try. The lip. Essayer {de bef. Inf.). La Uvre.
Commendable. The check. Louable, Lmjoue,
The coin, change, money. La monnaie.
Dangerous. Dangerevx, Dangereuse.
Occupied, Places occupied. Occupi, Des places occupies.
14 14 14 14 14 15 S 6 13 S ' M 7 6 IS i i IS M
▼ins, vlnmes, rtntM, vinr«n(, tins, q^fen-ser, ri-chesss, soa-Aai-ter, mins, cd-rv-mo-nt«,
It « Ml S S Slid 7 18 1 IS 16 7 8 10 S 10 li Sl <
lm-me-diat-men<^ e«-sa-yer, Idvrs, lou-abl<, Joue, mon-nals, dange-reuso, dang^-reazs, oe-ca-pe^
THE SEVENTY-SEVENTH LESSON. 265
It \ri;l take place immediately. H aara lieu imm^diatement.
I wish you a good morning. Jo voua souhaite lo bonjour.
He wishes us a good evening. II nous souhaite le bonsoir.
Lend me the change of a dollar. Prctcz-moi la monnaie d^un dollar.
That roast meat looks good. Cc ruti a bonne mine.
He is a good-looking man. Cost un hommc de bonne mine.
4. We have seen (Lessons 81, 88, 84, and 42), that negative partitives, when the meaning
is affirmative, do not omit /«, but take d», de la, or <Uh, as If affirmative. We may add fur-
ther, that affirmative partitives, when the meaning is negative, omit the article ; they take
ds only, as If negative. This is seen in the folio wiug phrases :
He has written his exercise without II a 6crit son th&mo sans faire de
making any mistake. faute.
He cannot write his exercise without II ne pout pas 6crire son thSmo sans
making mistakes. faire desfautes*
6l Negative partitives which are limited by an adjective or fullow^ing clause, may have
an affirmative character, and will then take the partitive article ; thus,
Do not lend him any change. Ne lui pr^tez pas de monnaie.
Do not lend him counterfeit coin. No lui pretez pas de la fausse mon-
naie.}
1. fetes-vous Venn ici la semaine passce ? 2. J'y vins (suis venu)
hier et mon frere aussi. 3. Vintes-vous ici la semaine derni6re ?
4. Noas n'j vinmes pas, mais nos cousins y vinrent. 5. Cet homme
n'offense-t-il pas ses amis? 6. Si, monsieur, il offense frequem-
ment ses meilleurs amis. 7. Peut-il y avoir da danger a aller sur
le lac ? 8. II n'y a pas le moindre danger. 9. Je vous souhaite
nne bonne sante et de grandes richesses. 10. La cercmonie aura
lieu cette apres-midL 11. Votre joue est enflee ; y avez-vous mall
12. Non, j'ai mal aux dents. 13. Avez-vous essay e votre nouvelle
plume? 14. Je Tai essay ee, elle est bonne. 15. On m'a dit que
cet bomme est dangereux. 16. La fiUe de notre voisin est une
demoiselle de bonne mine, elle a les joues fraiches et les Idvres ver-
meilles. 17. Faire du bien k autrui est une action louable.
1. When did you come here? 2. I came here on Tuesday. 3.
• In the former of these two phrases, the Idea is negative, that he makes no mistalvcs'
and de only is used ; in the latter, it is affirmative, that ho makes some mistalies, and iho
partitive article is nsed.
t The idea in this latter phrase is affirmative in character : Lend him some money, out
not eounUrJHL
I will make yon no reproaches. Je ne vons feral pas de reprochee.
I will malce you no frivolous reproaches. Je no vous ferai pas des reproches/rtvolee,
I have no money. Je n'ai pas d'argent,
I have no money to spend madly. Je n'ai pas de r argent pour la dcpenser fol-
lemcnt.
Here Is the same distinction. First, IwiU make you no reproaches (n^^ative). Sec-
ond, ItcUl make you reproaches, hut not friroloua onea (afflrmative in «ff^ct). i ?/*""'/
hafi4 no money (negative). Fourth, / have mon^, hut not to spend madly (afflrmative in
effect). Thos we see that an adjective or limiting clause may give a Itlnd of ararmaUva
• f to negative partitives, when they take the partiUve articles, du, tfe «», a*«.
12
266 THE SEVENTY-SEVENTH LESSON.
Did yonr brothers come also ? 4. No ; Charles came with roe. 5.
Did you come in the morning ? 6. No, we came in the evening at
half-past seven. 7. Why didst thou hold thy cousin by the arm
yesterday, when I saw thee in the street? 8. I held him by the
arm in order to speak to him. 9. Can there be danger in staying
here? 10. There can be much danger. 11. Have you not offended
that lady? 12. I do not know, but I did not wish to offend her.
13. Do you wish for great riches ? 14. No, sir ; I wish for good
health, but not for great riches. 15. Did your neighbor wish you a
good evening? 16. Yes, sir, and he wished me all kind (iouies
aortes) of prosperity { prosper ite) . 17. Will the ceremony take
place early? 18. It will take place immediately. 19. Do not
offend the master.
20. Your cheek is swollen ; have you a pain in it ? 21. Yes, I
have a pain in the right cheek. 22. Have you tried my knife?
23. I have tried it, and I find it very good. 24. Does that sick
man try to walk? 25. He tries, but he cannot walk much. 26.
Do you do good to those who have offended you? 27. Yes, sir ; it
is an action very commendable. 28. Does the Frenchman smoke ?
29. He never smokes, but the German smokes all day. 30. Do
you know how to swim? 31. Yes, sir; I swim every evening.
32. Does that head-dress fit your cousin ? 33. It does not fit her.
84. When will you come for your money? 35. I come for it now.
36. I have just given some money to your brother ; you have not
seen him ? 37. Yes, I have just seen him in the street
OPTIONAL EXERCISES.
1. How many shall we be in all at that party of pleasure ? 2.
Twelve or fifteen at least. 3. That is enough; when there are too
many persons {de monde) it is not so agreeable. 4. Have yon
spoken of it to Miss B. ? 5. Yes ; she will come, and she is {doit)
to bring her cousin. 6. I have told her that you will go for ^em.
7. Very willingly ; they dwell on my road ; but how will they go?
8. On horseback. But I {moije) shall go in a carriage with my
sister. 9. Not at all ; I shall have myself (moi-mSme) the pleasure
of conducting (mademoiselle) your sister, and she will go on horse-
back also. 10. Then I will go on horseback ; I prefer it 11. At
what o'clock shall we return ? 12. A little late in the afternoon.
13. Is it not John who is coming yonder ? 14. Yes ; I am cer-
tain that it is he. 15. He was sick the other day. 16. He is still
weak ; let us go to meet him. 17. Good morning, John ; we are
THE SEVENTY-EIGHTH LESSON. 267
delighted to see you. 18. You have been very sick, have you nott
19. My faith, yes ; the physician believed that I was going to die,
but I have had the good fortune to deceive him. 20. What was
the matter with you t 21. I had the fever ; and I suffered much
from the headache during all the time that I was sick. 22. Do you
begin to regain (reprendre) your strength t 23. Yes, I gain some
every day. 24. Then you are no more in danger t 25. No, thank
God.
78.— soixante-dix-huitiJ:me LEgON.
PAST DEFINITE CONTINUED.
JTiepati definiU o/* scribe, to vrritey is irregular; ikuSj
J^icrivUt iuierivit, Uicrivit^ nous ierivtmet^ wusierUfttss, Us ieriviretU,
I wrotof thou wTotest, he wrote, we wrote, you wrote, they wrote.
Did you write to your friends last ArivUes-roua d vos amis la semaine
week? demifire?
We wrote to them, and they wrote to Nous leur icriwneSf et ils nous Scrivir-
us. eni.
Didst thou write to thy father ? Arivis-iVL d ton p6re ?
I wrote to him, and my brother wrote Je lui ierivis, et mon fr^re lui ScrivU
to him also. aussi.
27ie past definite of coudre, to seWy is irregvlar ; ihusj
JscausiSt tueontlSy UcouHt, nous eoustmss^ wusoousUss, Us eousirsnt^
I sewed, thoasewedst, he sewed, wefewed, yoa sewed, they sewed.
Didst thou sew thy copy-book ycster- Cousit-tu ton cahier hier ?
day?
I sewed mine and Charles sewed his. Je cousis le mien et Charles eousit le
sien.
Did yon sew the buttons on your Cotmtes-Toua les boutons de tos ha-
coats? bits?
We did not sew them, the tailors sewed Nous ne les eounmes pas, les taOleurs
them. les cousirent.
An enemy. Snow, Un ennemi. La neige.
A iooking-glast. A mirror (large). Tin miroir. Une glace.
A pie. Astronomy, JJn pdle, Vastronotnie,
A metre. Mathematics, Un metre. Les maihhnaiiquss.
The college. For (conj.). Le college. Car.
Ciphering, computation. Different. Le caleul. Different,
To call. To throw, throw away. Appeler. Jeter,
L Terhe in eler and etsr doable the I and i when these letters are ibllowed by « mnte.
(Aeh€€er and geUr, we have seen, Lessons 27 and 62, are exceptions.*)
^ I have here followed the academy. It makes six exceptions, acheter, boureUr^ die*'
Isr^ gslsr^ harceler^ and peler.
• MM li 19 S M T M » I « » 1 16 1» IS * ' *e*a *
6-eri-Tlt, eoa-si«, cnn^-mi. nelg#, ml-rolr, glaw, pft-t6, os-tro-no-mis, metre, ma-tae-ma-
M M 7 1 aa 11 » s I • 6
CiLs, co^l^e, cal-cn], 6\f'tc-Tent, appe-ler, Jeter.
268 THE SEVENTY-EIGHTH LESSON.
J^apptUe^ tu appelUa, il appelU, notu appelone^ rout appeU^^ Ha appaOent^
I call, thou callest, ho colls, ve call, joa call, thsj <^n
Do you throw away your gloves ? Jetez-rous vos gante?
I do not throw them away. Je nc leajctte pas.
It is two hours since I finished. II y a deux hcures que j*ai finL
It is two years since I have been there. II y a deux ans que je n'y ai dt£.
2. Que used as above in the sense of depute que^ since, requires ne before the following
verb, when the phrase can bo made negatiro In English.^
It is an hour since I dined. II y a une heure que j*ai d!n^.
It is two months since I saw him. II y a deux mois que je ne Tai vn.
8. The varioiis meanings otdetoir hare been spoken of (Lesson €1).
My brother is to arrive to-morrow. Mon frirc doit arriver demain.
They are to go home this evening. lis doivent allcr chez eux ce soir.
Something is to happen. Quclque rhose ciotf arriver.
It there to bei are there to he f DoiC-il y avoir f
There i» to be, must be, H doit y avoir.
There must have been, 11 doit y avoir eu.
Is there to be a ball at your house ? i>ot/-il y avoir un bal chez toqs ?
There is to be one. II doit y en avoir un.
The ceremony is to take place to-mor- La c6r^monie doit avoir lien demain.
row.
That man^s lips are thick. Get homme a les Idvres ^paisses.
1. Quand avez-vous ^crit votre th^me ? 2. J'dcrivis le mien
hier, mon fr6re ecrivit le sien avant hier, et mes cousins ^rivirent
les leurs mardi ; ecrivites-vous les votres hier ? 3. Nous les ^ri-
Times lundL 4. Cousis-tu ton pantalon hier? 5. Je ne le coasis
pas, le tailleur le cousit. 6. Ne cousites-vous pas vos cahiers hier ?
7. Nous cousimes les ndtres et nos cousins cousirent les leurs. 8.
Get homme est gcnereux, il fait du bien k ses ennemis. 9. M'ap-
pelez-voust 10. Je vous appelle. 11. Jetez-vous votre argent t
12. Je ne le jette pas. 13. Que jette cet ecolicr ? 14. H jette ses
vienx papiers. 15. Qu'ach^te ce jeune homme ? 16. H achete un
p&td, une boule d'ivoire et un petit miroir. 17. Y a-t-il beaucoup
de neige an Canada cet hiver ? 18. Oui, il y a deux pieds de nei^^e
sur la terre. 19. Cet el6ve sait-il Tarithm^tique? 20. II saittoutos
les math6matiques et I'astronomie. 21. Savez-vous ce qui doit ar-
river ? 22. n doit arriver quelque malheur. 23. Quand irez-vous
* In the former of the above phrases we cannot Miy with propriety, Jli^itwohouretJiat
I have notJlntMhed ; but in the latter we may »ay. It in itco yforn thttt Thatenotbeen tkerr,
8o In the following we cannot say, Il in an hour that I have not dined, but we may aaj, R
U two moniha that I have not seen him. Hence in two of the phra3e5 ne la used.
16 1 n
Mp-peUey npp^\on».
THE SEVENTY-EIGHTH LESSON. 269
an college t 24. J'irai bientbt 25. La ccremonie doit-elle aroir
lieu aujourd'hui? 26. Non, elle doit avoir lieu demain soir. 27.
Charles et son fr6re ne sont-ils pas ti^s-diffe rents t 28. lis sont
tres-difierents.
1. Do you try the steel pen or the gold one ? 2. I try the gold
one. 3. At what o'clock is the company to arrive ? 4. It is to ar-
rive before ten. 5. Is there to be a ball at your house to-night t
G. There is to be one. 7. Has your friend recovered {repris) his
strength ? 8. No, sir, he does not walk much yet ; it is more than
two weeks since he has gone out of his room. 0. Do those lazy
scholars try to learn their lessons ? 10. They do not try much ; it
is three days siuce they have learned a lesson well. 11. Is there to
be a party of pleasure at your aunt's this evening ? 12. There is
to be one. 13. How many metres of this cloth do you wish fort
14. I wish for four metres of this cloth, and six of that. 15. Is
this computation of interest exact (exact) ? 16. No, that computa-
tion is false (faux), but this is exact.
17. You will not find your friend at home, for he has just gone
out. 18. Has your brother gone to college? 19. He has not gone
yet, for he is only thirteen years old. 20. Are you studying as-
tronomy? 21. I am studying astronomy and all the mathematics.
22. Do you wish for some chicken pie I 23. No, sir, I thank you ;
I have just dined ; but this little boy wishes for some, for he is very
hungry. 24. At what hour will you have supped f 25. I shall
have supped at eight. 26. Who has broken your beautiful mirror ?
27. The neighbor's son broke it with his ball. 28. Do you like
to throw snow-balls ? 29. I like sometimes to throw snow-balls and
to run in the snow. 30. The metre * is the element (element) of
all other measures (mesurcs). 31. Those men are very diflferent in
opinion (d*opinion) ; they are enemies. 32. Did you write to your
father yesterday 1 33. I wrote to him yesterday, and my sister
wrote to him Saturday. 34. Did the tailors sew your coat on
Thursday! 35. They sewed it on Friday, and the seamstress
sewed my pantaloons on Saturday.
OPTIONAL EXERCISES.
1. Have you seen the gentleman of whom we were speaking
♦ A mitre Is the ten irillionth part of the arc of a meridian, extending from the equator
to the pole, and ia the basis of all other meaaures to the French. It exceeds the £ngilah
yard, befog equal to 89.88 English inchec
270 THE SEVENTT-NINTH LESSON.
yesterday f 2. I have Been bim, and asked him the question that
you desired. 3. What says he of it? 4. He accepts the offer
which you make him. 5. Then it is an affair settled (arranpee),
6. I will go and see him to-day or to-morrow. 7. You know where
he dwells? 8. He dwells, I believe, in one of the brick houses
which Mr. B. had built in the spring ; but I do not know in which.
9. It is the Urgest. 10. That in which Mr. B. lived? 11. Exact-
ly ; it is the same. 12. I will go to his house to-morrow morning.
13. Go there early, for he goes to his store as soon as he has break-
fasted. 14. I will go there at half-past seven.
15. When I dwelt in the country, I had always a dish of frait
in the morning ; and I made my breakfast on fruit and bread. 16.
There is nothing better ; but one cannot have fruit in the city. 17.
No, it is difficult to find any good, and it is very dear. 18. I like
much peaches or figs with milk. 19. I prefer strawberries with a
little sugar and cream. 20. Have you written to the doctor ? 21.
Yes, sir ; on Tuesday, as soon as I had read his letter, I wrote one
to him. 22. After the tailor had finished my coat on Monday, he
sewed my pantaloons. 23. Is the captain at your house? 24. No ;
hardly had he arrived on Thursday, when he set out again for the
country.
79.— SOIXANTE-DIX-NEUVISME LEgON.
PAST DEFINITE CONTINUED.
77u p<ist dffinite of naItre, to be bom, ia irreffular; thus,
JiBnaquis, tunaquitj Unaqfiit, noMnaquimet^ wfuanaquUe», Csnagwirmit
I WA8 born, thott wtst born, he was born, ve wero bom, you were born, tbie j wen bora.
I was born in January, 1830. Je naguU (or 9ui$ ni) en Janvier,
1830. •
Were you bom tbe same year? NaquUes-YOua {cUm^vous iUm) la mime
annec ?
We were bom the same year. Nous nagiAmea {sommea nia) la m^rne
annce.
1. In speaking of living persona, ihapaat indtfiniU of naUra ia more generally naed ;
bnt the pluper/ed mast be employed of those known to bo doad.
That soldier is brare, wbere was he Ce soldat est brave, oh, tat-il ni t
born?
Tbe old soldier is dead, where was he Le vieox soldat est mort, oii 6tait-il n6 ?
born?
My brothers were bom in America. Mes fr6res atmi nea en Am^rique.
His ancestors were born in England. Ses cMcStrea itaient nea en Angleterre.
77ie paat definite of mocrir, to die, ia irregular ; thua,
Jemourua, tumourua, Umourvt, noua mourHimea, voua numrikUa, ilamaururent^
I died, thou dicdst, ho died, wo died, you died, they died.
1 ia s B It n
na-ki«, an>c6tre«, mon-roc.
THE SEVENTYNINTH LESSON. 271
After haying lived eeventy years, that Apres avoir v^cu soixante-dix ans, ce
great man died. graiid^bommc mourut.
His brothers died at the same time. Ses fr^rcs tnoururent (or tont nunia)
dans le mSme temps.
To conquer. Conqxierir (as aequMr, Lesson 66).
To vanquish. Vaincre,
2. Omquirir applies to a eonntiy; vainerc^ to an opponent or a people.
Jeraines, tuTainca, il vainer nous vainqitont, vous f^ainquea,
I overcome, thon orercomest, ho overcomes, ve overcome, you overcome.
Us ffoinquinit they overcome.
TTe overcome all our enemies. Nous vainquons tons nos ennemis.
He overcomes bis anger. II vainc sa eolere.
Alexander conquered Asia. Alexandre conquit TAsic.
5. The Irregnbrity of vaincre and its compounds consists in changing e into qu before
an vowels except u. So Tns past defikits is
JevainquU, tuvainquU^ Uvainquit, noite vainqtcimea^ ffotu tainquUeSt
I overcame, thoa overcamest, be overcame, we overcame, you overcame,
He vainquirent, they overcame
Cteear vanquished the Britons. Cesar vainquit Ics Bretons.
The Romans vanquished the Gauls. Les Romains vainquirent les Gaulois.
The shade. A difficulty. Vombrage, Vombrc. Unc difficidte.
Ombrage is the object intercepting the light ; ombre^ the elfiect of such interception. '
Towards. Hius. Vers^ envers. Ainsi.
4. Vera denotes towards in a physical sense ; envers, in a moral senso.
He runs towards the river. II court vers la riviferc.
Ton are always good towards me. Vous ^tes toujours bon envers moi.
On the contrary. A shop. Au eontraire. Unc boutique.
6. lF3i«f^ Interrogative, Is always ^iMrnd; otherwise, 2or«gue and quand have nearly
thei
When will yon have your money ? Quand aurez-vous votre argent ?
When I shall see my partner. Zorsque (quand) jcYemi mon associ^.
Rainfalls. II tombe de la pluie (better il pleut).
Snowfalls. II tombe de la neige (better il neige).
To trust. To oblige. Faire credit. Obligcr.
€. ObUger, to compel, takes d before the infinitive ; meaning to do a fiivor, it takes de.
His study obliges him to do that. Son devoir V oblige h faire cela.
Ton will oblige me much by doing Yous m*o6%ere2 beaucoup (2e/a2r0 cela
that for me. pour moi.
To do well. To do badly. Bien faire. Mai faire.
To do good. To do evil. Faire du bien. Faire du mal.
To foresee. Foreseen. Frevoir. Frevu.
Generous. Genereux. Ginlreuse.
21 8 W 14 14 )4 51 14 6 14 1 6, S ^ '? , I' "
con-ke-rlr, vaincre, value*, vain-kon«, vain-kee, vaink«n<. A-lek-sandre, vain-kla, om-
1 Si IS 19 M « 7 » T 14 la U 7 l8 W U »« « f V 1
brag<% ombr«, dl/-fi-cul-t6, ver», en-ver«, ain-si, con-trair«, bou-tike, ob-li-ger, pr6-volr, pr*-
» 1 » 10^ ^^ • » 10 « I 4 n 1» 14 17 »
vo, go-n^-reoa!, g6-n6-rense, C^-iar, Bre-ton«, ro-main, Oan-lol&
272 THE SEVEXTY-NINTH LESSON.
1. Ou es-ta D^ ? 2. Je snis n6 en Am^riqae. 3. Mon p^re
etait n6 en Angleterre ; il mourut en Janvier 1846. 4. Ses fr^es
8ont-ils morts ? 5. Qui, ils moururent la mcme ann^e. 6. Ou
etaient-ils nes 1 7. lis etaient n6s en Angleterre. 8. Ou est votre
frere? 9. II vient de sortir. 10. Napoleon vainquit beanconp
d'ennemis. 11. Ces arbres font un bel ombrage. 12. Je troave
de la difficulte d apprendre cette legon. 13. Vous pensez que cet
ofHcier reussira d la guerre ; moi, je pense au contraire qu*il ne
rcussira pas. 14. Ou est le charpentier? 15. 11 est dans sa bou-
tique. 16. Cette chose est-elle ainsi? 17. Elle est ainsL 18. Le
charpentier est alle vers sa boutique. 19. Cet homme est bon en-
vers tout le monde. 20. Neige-t-il? 21. II tombe de la neige et
de la pluie. 22. La pluie ne fera-t-elle pas du mal aux fruits I
23. Non, elle fera du bien aux fruits et aux fleurs. 24. Avez-vona
prevu cet accident ? 25. Je ne Tai pas pr6vu. 26. Votre voisine
est une femme obligeante ; n'est-ce pas ? 27. Oui, c'est une bonne
femme, obligeant toujours ses amis lorsqu*elle pent le faire.
1. Do you trust that mani 2. I trust him, for he is very honest.
3. Does your father oblige you to study ? 4. He does not oblige
me; I study with good will. 5. Does the neighbor oblige yon
when he lends you books ? 6. He obliges me much. 7. Those
trees are large, and they make a fine shcide. 8. Yes, and I find
their shade {H'ombre) very agreeable when it is warm. 9. I leam
my lessons without any difficulty ; do you find difficulty in learning
your lessons? 10. On the contrary, I leam them very easily. 11.
Where is the barber going t 12. He is going to his shop. 13.
Where is his shopt 14. It is in Royal-street. 15. Look towards
the east, and you will see the moon.
16. Docs the rain fall ? 17. It does not rain, but much snow
falls. 18. Does your brother often write thus? 19. No; he never
writes thus. 20. Do the wise foresee events (evenements)^, 21.
No, not always ; God alone foresees what is to happen. 22. Did
you foresee your misfortunes ? 23. I did not foresee them. 24. Is
not that man generous? 25. He is very generous. 26. Those
ladies are generous toward the poor ; they give them much alms.
27. The bad weather has done harm to the fruit, but the fine
weather which there is at present will do it good. 28. When did
your father die? 29. He died March 4, 1855. 80. Was he born
THE EIGHTIETH LESSON. 273
in 1800 1 81. He was bom May 5, 1798. 32. Was he bom in
England ? 33. He was bom in England, and died in the United
States (les Etats^Unis). 34. Where were you bom? 35. We
were bom in New York. 36. My brothers died in Boston ; they
were bom in London. 37. Caesar vanquished the Gauls. 38. Did
he OTezcome all his enemies ? 39. He did not overcome them all.
OPTIONAL EXERCISES.
1. Let us go to the house ; it must be time to sup now, and I
am going to put on another coat. 2. You can put it on after sup-
per. 3. I like better to make my toilet before supper. 4. As you
please ; mine is already made. 5. We shall go out as soon as we
shall have supped, shall we not {n^est-ce pas)l 6. Yes; it is neces-
sary to go a little early to the house of those young ladies, if we
wish to be certain to find them at home, 7. I do not wish to go
there too soon either {non plus). 8. If we arrive there at eight it
will be soon enough, and not too soon. 9. Well, it is eight o'clock
wanting five minutes, and here is the house ; let us go in.
10. How long (how much time) were you in college? 11.
About two years and a half. 12. I was not quite seventeen years
old when I entered. 13. Then you came out (of it) before the age
of twenty years. 14. Yes; I finished my studies very young, that
is to say at college, for I have always studied since. 15. How old
are you? 16. I am twenty-eight years old. 17. When have you
seen the professor? 18. It is eight years since I have seen him.
19. He is dead. 20. When did he die ? 21. He died the 8th of
February, 1858 ; he was born in Boston, 10th March, 1801. 22.
Where were you bom ? 23. I was bom in New York.
80.— quatre-vingti£me lecon.
IREEGULAR PAST DEFINITE3.
1. The irregular past deflnites, all of which have now been giyen, are the following, with
their oomponnds.
Uigi5fnT«. pjLBTDBP. vxmnrm. pastdef. xnfxnxtivx. pastdsf.
Arolr, eus, Les. 74. Faire, Jls, Les. 75. Vaincre, vainquis, Les. 79.
Condre, e&uHs, " 7S. Mourlr, mourtia^ " 79. Vcnlr, tJtn*, ** 77.
ficrlre, leHvia^ " 78. Naitre, nuquU, " 79. Voir, via, " 75.
Irtre, fM, " 74. Tenir, «n«, " 77.
8. In English, any a^jectlre preceded by the definite article may bo nsed as a nonn. This
cannot always be done in French. Heoce adjectives nsnd In this way are very commonly
translated Into French by the a^jectlTO with the noun ^sim, homtM, or some other general
term.
The yoQDg. The diligent. Lea jeuncs gens. Les gens diligents.
The Btudions. The courageous. Les hommes studieux. Les gens cou-
rageux.
12*
274 THE EIGHTIETH LESSON.
The tndoBtrioiiB become rich. Les gens industrieax deTienneitt tielMB.
The 8tadiou8 become learned. Les icoliers studieox derieiment tt-
rants.
8. We haye seen that the past indeflnite may generaUy be lued for the past dellnlta.
When, therefore, the learner is in donbt which of the two to use, It will be aaib to amploj
the iNist indefinite, exoept in narratirea.
That event, Bare-headed. Get Svinement. Nu-t^U or UU mie.
Barefoot. Nu-pieds or pieda nus.
4. When the adjectire n« precedes the nonn, and fonns with it an adTeibial eapifa-
alon, it is invariable ; bat when it follows the noun, and does not form an adTarbial ezprcf
sion, it agrees in gender and number.
He goes out barefoot. II sort nu-pieds or piedt nus.
The bare property of an estate. La nue propriety d'un bien.
To eutf cut off. To split. Couper. Fendre,
To steals take ateay (from). To surprise. Derober (d). Swrprendre,
Surprendre^ a compound otprendre^ takes d before the InflnitiTO.
A surgeon. A vfing. Un ehirurgien. Une aile.
The beak. Very hard. Le bee. Fort dur.
Opposite (to). Opposite to the church. Vis-d-vis (de). Vis-^-vis de T^glise.
Since^from. The most part ^ majority. Depuis. lAplupart.
From the Rhine to the ocean. Depuis le Rliin jusqu^li Toc^ao.
Since bis return. Depuis son retour.
That noise gives me a violent headache. Ce bruit me fend la t^te.
& When any part of a person is the object of the Tcrb, the possessor is preceded bj 4
and not cf«, and the pronoun is the indirect object
You break your mother's heart. Vous fendez lo coeur d TOtre mkts.
Tou break ber heart. Vous lui fendez le cceur.
The surgeon cut off that man*8 arm. Le chirurgien coupe le bras i eel
bomme.
He cuts it oft n lo lui coupe.
€. In speaking of an action or state of past tlmo, which is still oontinning, the Englfsh
employ a past tense, but the French the present ; thus,
Save you lived here long? Ta-t-il longtemps que tous demeurtt
ici? oTf demeurez-TOus ici depuis
longtemps ?
I have lived here a year. J^y demeure depuis nn an ; or, Q y a
un an que j*y demeure.
I have had your book a month. H y a un mois que fai votre livre ; or,
fai votre livre depuis un mois.
7. The French use the present also to express what is true at the present time, although
relating to a past event
It was we who opened the windows. Cest nous qui avons ouvert les fenfires.
If s usiiscs 8i56fi s nnxsur S4
6-v6n«-menf. no, nue, eou-per, fendr«, d6-ro-ber, anr-prendrs, ehl-ror-gien, aU«, bee, d*-
BIS fl 1
puis, plft-poil
THE EIGHTIETH LESSON. 275
He told me that charity wu entirely a II me disait que la charity ui ime Ter-
Christiaa virtue. tu toute cbr^tienne.
9. An immediate ftitnro in Engliah is sometimes best translated into French hj aUtr
and the Inflnitive.
If you wish, I will thaw you my copy- Si vous voulcz, je vaia tous tnarUrer
book. mon cahier.
If you have no flowers I will give you Si tous n*aTez pas de fleurs je wsU
some. TOUS en donner,
I will gofiyr my book. Jc vaia chercker mon livre.
1. Les sages pr6yoient-ils tons les eydnements ? 2. Non, lis ne
les prcYoient pas. 3. Ges petits gardens sortent-ils quelqnefois nu-
pieds {(yr pieds nus) ? 4. lis sortent souvent nn-pieds (pieds nus).
5. Poarquoi cet homme sort-il na-t^te ? 6. II sort nu-t^te parce
qa'il n*a pas de cbapeau. 7. Que conpez-vous ? 8. Je coupe ce
b4ton. 9. Que coupe le cbirurgien ? 10. II coupe le bras gauche
^ cet homme. 11. Le barbier coupe-t-il les cheveux auz enfants?
12. n les leur coupe. 13. Ces enfants font trop de bruit^ ne fen-
den t-ils pas la tete a leur m^re ? 14. Non, car elle vient de sortir,
fort beureusement 15. Coupez-vous le bee d cet oiseau ? 16. Je lui
coupe le bee et les ailes. 17. J'ai lu la plQpart de ces livres. 18. Cet
oiseau a les ailes fortes et le bee dur. 19. Le cbirurgien demeore
Tis-i^vis de P^glise. 20. Eiites-Yous de la neige ici la semaine der-
nifere ? 21. Nous en eiimes unpen. 22. Combien de temps y a-t-il
que Yous etudiez I'allemand ? 23. II 7 a six mois que je I'^tudie.
24. Depuis combien de temps avez-vous mon livre ? 25. Je I'ai
depnis trois semaines.
1. Are you not cutting that child's hair ? 2. I am cutting it for
him. 3. Do you know the most part of the words of your lesson ?
4. I know them all. 5. Were you not delighted to see your father
on Saturday ? 6. We were all delighted to see him, and he was
delighted to see us also. 7. Hadst thou time to arrive home yes-
terday before the rain ? 8. No ; my brother had time to arrive at
his house, but I had only the time to arrive at Mr. B.'s. 9. Have
you been looking at that picture long? 10. I have been looking
at it hardly ten minutes. 11. How long has your friend been look-
ing at it ? 12. He has been looking at it almost an hour. 13. Do
yon split wood with that ax ? 14. I do not split wood ; the serv-
ant cuts and splits all the wood.
15. Is the surgeon going to cut off that boy's arm ? 16. No, sir,
he is going to cut oflf his finger. 17. Do you surprise your father ?
276 THE EIGHTY-FIRST LESSON.
18. I surprise him sometimes. 19. Does that news surprise joa?
20. It surprises me much. 21. Do you live opposite to your store ?
22. No, I live opposite to the brick church. 23. Have you read
the most part of those books ? 24. I have read them all. 25. Who
has stolen your cloak ? 26. A thief stole it last week. 27. These
trees take away from us the view of the country. 28. Is not this
wood harder than that ? 29. No, that wood is as hard as this.
oO. Did you foresee these events ? 31. I did not foresee them.
32. How long have you been here ? 33. I have been here hardly
half an hour. 34. It was I who lighted the fire. 35. I have here
a letter from your brother ; if you wish, I will show it to yon.
OPTIONAL EXERCISES.
1. Grood evening, young ladies^e are delighted to see you so
gay. 2. Grood evening, sirs ; we-gre very much surprised to see
you. 3. We thought you in ChinsfllVhine), it is so long a {iant)
time since we have seen you. 4. It is not from our fault. 5. Un-
doubtedly not {que non) ; but come in ; take some chairs. 6. We
have had so much business that we, pould only go out late in the
evening. 7. Very well ; there mustjiave been much business this
season, for all the gentlemen sing th^ same song. 8. I see well
that you are laughing at us. 9. \\9Bi^iave no desire to weep this
evening ; but it is very true that al^|he gentlemen must have been
(avoir etc) very much occupied this Sg^on.
10. By good fortune, business ig'aifi.t always the same (de mhne)^
and we shall have the pleasure of see^*g you occasionally. 11. Yes,
that is (c^est) to say, gentlemen, tha?^ou will come when you have
nothing better (de mieux) to do ; will you not ? we thank you much
for your goodness. 12. Ah, truly, ladies, you are too severe (se-
veres) ; .but we are charmed to see ^you in (de) so fine humor, for
you laugh at all that we say. ^
81.— QUATRE-VINGT ET'UNIfiME LECON.
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.
1. Tux PRESENT OP THE suBJUiTCTiTB Is formod by dropping AKT final of the prcMOt
participle, and annexing the terminating letters,
E, £S, E, IONS, lEZ, EKT.
Thus PABLXB, to speak, present participle paklaitt, makes
Qu6 Je parle, gu'il parle^ que toua parliea^
That I may speak, that he may speak, that yon may speak,
Qtu tu paries, que nous parliona, qu^iU parleni.
That thoa mayest speak, that wo may speak, that they may speak.
1 U21 I 12S
par-lions, par-Iiee.
THE EIGHTY-FIRST LESSON. 277
SoKTXx, to go oat, present participle sobtaivt, make«
iiiteje aorte^ qu'U aorie, que v<nu tortieM,
That I may go out, that be may go out, that you may go out,
^tf« tu 9ortM^ que nout sortions^ qu'iU 9ortent^
That thou mayest go out, that we may go out, that they may go out
Yoiz, to ace, present participle totuvt, makes
Qh^ jt vote* qu'a vote, gus vou4 voyim^
That I may sec, that he may see, that yon may see^
Qut t» toitBy que nou» voyiont, qu'Us eaient.
That thou mayest see, that we may see, that they may Me.
DzKB, to say, present participle disaxt, makes
Quejd dU&, qu'il dUe, qw voui dUUa^
That I may say, that he may say, that you may say,
Qiu tu diie^ qu6 nofwt dUions, qu'iU dUent,
That thou mayest say, that we may say, that they may say.
L The srBJVxcnTK mood is so called because It la subjoined to some other Tcrb or
phrase, on which it depends, and to which it is connected by que or a relative pronoun. It
does not, like the indicative, affirm its meaning as a £ict, but only preunU U (u a concep-
tion o/iAe mind^\ and all the uses of this mood may be reduced to this one rule, as will be
seen hereafter. For the instruction of the learner, however, it will be useful to give mi-
nuter rules.
L— Verbs used interrogatively or negatively, if followed by que and s dependent verb,
generally govern that verb in the subjunctive, provided the subject of the dependent be
different firom that of the governing verb.
Do you 8AJ that he goes out ? Dites-vous qu^il torte f
I say that he goes out. Je dis qu*il Bort,
I do not believe that he sees ub. Je ne crois pas qu*il nous voi€,
I kDOw that he sees us. Je sais quMl nous voit.
Do yoa belieye that we speak French ? Croyez-vous que nous/Kir/ions franfais?
Xo, I believe that you speak English. Non, je crois que vous parlez anglais.
Do you think that he says that ? Pensez-vous quMl dite cela ?
I am sore that he says it. Je suis certain quMl le dii.
% "When there is no change of subject, the French prefer to use the infinitive ; and la
all the following rules for governing the subjunctivo, it is to be understood that there most
be a change of subject.
Docs he believe that he is learned? Croit-il 6tre savant?
Do you desire that you may be rich ? Ddsirez-vous Hre riches ?
By the side of, next to. People, folks. A cote de. Des gens.
S. Adjectives preoeding ^eiM, as seen in Lesson 18, are generally fiBmlnlne; those fol«
lowing it are maseulino.
Wicked people. Les mechantes gens, or les gens nU-
chants.
* We have seen (Lesson 2<n that y in the termination of verbs becomes i before e mute.
t leay that he goee out. I know that he goes out. Here that ho goes out is affirmed
as a &ct, and the indicative must be used in French, qu'U sort. Do you eay that he goes
outt Ida not say that he goes out Here it is not affirmed as a Diet, and the snbJuncUve
tnast be used, qu^U sobte.
16 90 so 1921 so 1212ft 17 6 t
sorts, vols, vo-yiona, vo-yie«, o4-te, gens.
278 THE EIGHTT-FIB8T LESBOS.
Some dangeroaa people. De dangertuau gens, or dca gens dsnr
gertux.
To ripen. Ripening. Murir. MurissanL
A cigar. Magnificent. Un cigare. Magnijique.
Lately. Precisely. Demierement. Au juste.
I will tell you precisely what that costs. Je tous dirai au juste ce qoe cela coftte.
Topvll^ to pluck up. To become. Arracher. Devenir (comp. oivenir),
4. Devenir, as also partir and eortir, take itre for their auxilUrj.
That man has become rich. Get homme est detenu ricbe.
My father has departed. Uon ^re est parti.
My sisters have gone out. Mes soBurs sent sorties.
Cl When the adverb tout (ffuUe) precedes a femintno objective or participle beginning
with a consonant, it Is made for sound's sake to agree in gender and nomber with the doui.
In other cases it is invariable.
A cravat all dirty. Une cravate t&ute sale.
Some apples all red. Des pommes ioutes rouges.
A napkin all worn. Une serviette tout ME&e,
1. Le maltre dit-il que nous Studious bien ? 2. II ne dit pas
que vous ^tudiiezbien. 3. Groyez-yous que je perde mon argent t
4. Je ne crois pas que tu le perdes. 6. Croyez-voua que le chien
vole ces oiseaux ? 6. Je ne crois pas qu'il les vole. 7. Ce fruit
m(irit-il en 6t6 1 8. Oui, il miirit en juin. 9. Ces fruits devien-
nent^ils rouges ? 10. lis deviennent rouges en mClrissant 11. Que
fait le chirurgien ? 12. 11 arrache une dent 4 cet homme. 13. Vo-
ire ami est-il parti ce matin? 14. Non, monsieur, il est parti hier.
16. Voire ami est-il devenu capitaine ? 16. Non, il est devenu ge-
neral. 17. J'ai envie d'envoyer chercher des livres et des plumes.
18. Cette maison est magnifique ; est-elle ^ vous? 19. Demeurez-
vous & cote de votre magasint 20. Non, je demeure k cote de
r^glise. 21. Avez-vous vu r^cemment votre ami! 22. Oui, je
viens de le voir dans la rue. 23. Je demeure & cot^ de Vhotel,
et mon frere demeure a cote de chez moi.
1. Do you believe that we speak French f 2. No, I believe that
you speak Spanish, but not French. 3. Do you believe that I go
out when it rains 1 4. I do not believe that thou goest out when it
rains. 5. Do you say that my brother writes (icrive) his exercises
well ? 6. I say that he writes them very well. 7. Does the mas-
ter say that you study well t 8. He says that we study very welL
9. Do you believe that the bird sees us ? 10. I am sure that he i
tt » » 1 1 Hit T Ur t 1 1 6 4 11
ma-rir, d-gare, ma-gni-flka, der-aidre-meni; ar»ra-oher, deve>nir.
THE EIGHTY-FIRST LESSON. 279
US. 11. Does that fruit become red? 12. It becomes red in an-
turnn. 13. Is the sm'geon going to pnll that child's tooth which
pains him ? 14. He is going to pull it because it has pained him
a long time. 15. Does he pull teeth well ? 16. He pulls them
well ; he is a skillful dentist (dentiste). 17. Do you dwell next that
magnificent church t 18. No, sir, I dwell next to my brother's.
19. Do you send for cigars ? 20. I send for cigars and wine.
21. Those handkerchiefs are quite dirty. 22. That cap fits that
lady ; tell me precisely what it has cost her. 23. It has cost her
ten dollars. 24. Does the master say that we speak French ? 25.
He says that you speak French and Spanish. 26. Did you see any
one here on Monday ? 27. We saw nobody. 28. Did the children
see yout 29. They did not see us, but the daughter of the neigh-
bor saw ns. 30. Did you write your letters yesterday? 31. We
did not write them yesterday ; I wrote mine the day before yester-
day, and my friend wrote his on Wednesday. 32. Do you think
that my brother writes better than I ? 33. No, I think that you
write as well as he. 34. Do you think that we read as well as our
cousins f 35. I think that you read better than they. 36. I have
forgotten my book on your table ; I will go for it.
OPTIONAL EXERCISES.
1. See those clouds ; are they not beautiful ! 2. They are su-
perb, and they change their (de) form and place at each instant
{ifiBtant), 3. There is one which has the form of ahorse. 4. There
is another which appears like a big fish. 5. It is long since I have
seen clouds so beautiful. 6. I like to look at (regarder) the clouds ;
the sight of a beautiful sky always gives me pleasure. 7. Do you
know astronomy ? 8. I studied it when I went to college ; but I
have almost forgotten the little that I knew. 9. What (comment) do
they call that star which is so beautiful ? 10. It is the evening star
{retoile du soir) ; they call it ( Venus) ; do they not, Mr. A. ? 11.
Yes, it is so {c^est elle\ and it sometimes takes the name of the
morning star.
12. When Venus is the morning star, which is the evening star f
13. It is the only one, I believe, to which they give that name. 14.
Astronomy is a beautiful study. 15. All studies are so ; but every
body has not the same taste. 16. Which study do you prefer, sir ?
I like all those which make part of the mathematics. 17. You have
a taste very strange ; I have never been able to endure (souffrir)
ciphering. 18. Nevertheless {cependanC the mathematics are the
only thing really certain in this world.
280
THE EIGHTY-SECOND LESSON.
82.— QUATRE-VINGT-DEUXIfiME LEgON.
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD CONTINUED.
The subjunctive of etre, tobe^U irregvlar ; Mm«,
QuejeaoUf quetusoi^ qu'UwU^ que nous e&yoM, que vaus mifsa.
That I may be, that thoa rouyest be, thathe maybe, that we may be, that yon may be,
quails soientf that they may be.
Dites-vou3 queje sots negligent?
Je ne dis pas qtie tu sots negligent.
Croyez-Toos que nous soyons makdes?
Je ne crois pas que vow soyez maUdes.
Ditcs-vous que cet homme soit an-
glais ?
Jc ne crois pas que sea amis soient an-
glais.
The subjunctive of atoiRj to have^ is irregular; ihus^
Quefaie^ quetuaUs^ qu^nait^ qu6nousayonSyqusw^usaym,
That I may hare, that thoa maycst, etc, that he may, etc, that we, etc^ that yon, etc^
qu'tia aientf that they may have.
Do you think tbat I have your book ? Pensez-vous quejaie votrc liTrc?
Do you say that I am negligent ?
I do not say that thou art negligent.
Do you belieTe that we are sick f
I do not believe that you are sick.
Do you say that that man is English ?
I do not believe that his friends are
English.
I do not think that thou hast it.
I do not believe that your friend has it.
Do you say that we have your money ?
We do not say that you have it.
Do you believe that they have it?
I know that they have it.
Jc ne pense pas que tu Vaits.
Je ne crois pas que votre ami VaiL
Dites-vous que nous ayons votre argent?
Nous ne disons pas que vous Vayez.
Croyez-vous quails Vaient f
Je sais qu'ils Font.*
1. Interrogative and negative verbs do not govern the dependent verb in the snbjaae*
tire If the speaker looks upon what it expresses as an undoubted fiict This may be seen ia
the following.
Charles has come. Does his brother
know that he is here ?
Charles is absent. Does his brother
think that he is here ?
That man is without sense; he does
not believe that there is a God.
He is not superstitious; he does not
believe that there are ghosts.
Charles est venu. Son fr^re sait-il qu^il
est ici ?
Charles est absent. Son fr^re pense-t-
il qi^il soit ici ?
Cet homme est in8ens6 ; n ne croit pas
qu^U y axm Dieu.
n n'est pas superstitieux ; il ne croit
pas qt^il y ait des revenanis.
IL— The relatiyes qui, que, lequel, duquel, auquel, dont, and o&. In like manner, when
they do not refer to what is known and deflnite,t take the following verb in the sobjanctlve.
There is a man who is honest. YoiU un homme qui est honuete.
• We see in the^e examples that it is the nneertainty In the mind of the speaker whlck
determines the use of the subjanctirc mood.
t Such relatives have an antecedent of an indefinite character, as quelqu*un^ quelqus
choeSf rieriy or a noun with an indcAoIto article.
so so so mi a0l9« 90 7 7 7 7199 712S 7
tois, soi^ so-yon«, so-ye«, soleni, aie, aUs, all, ayon«, ayes, aient.
THE EIQHTT-SECONB LESSON. 281
I will seek a man who is honest. Jc chercherai nn homme qui toil hon-
ncte.
In the former of these phrases a particular Individual is referred to and known to he
honest; in the latter ho is yet to ho found. So in the first of the following, the house is se-
lected and known to be beautiful ; in the second it la yet to be selected.
I shall buy a house which ia beautiful. .Tach&terai une maison qui eti belle.
I shall buy a house which is beautiful. J*achdterai unc maison ^i sait beUe.
Is there anj one who is more studious T a-t-il quclqu'un qui toit plus studi-
than Charles? cux que Charles?
Do you know any one who has more Connalsscz-vous quelquMn qui ait plus
money than the merchant ? d^argent que le marchand ?
TTie subjunctive of poutoir, to be able, it irregular ; thus,
Quejeputstte, que tn puinses^ quHlpuUse, que nous puisstone, que vous puissieti,
That I can, that thou canst, that he can, that we can, that you can,
quHls puiMenl, that they can.
Gire me a book which I can consult. Donnez-moi un livre queje puisse con-
suiter.
Is there any one who can do that ? T a-t-il quelqu*un qui puisse faire cela?
Let na choose a place where we can Choisissons une place ottnotf«|7utMum«
remain. rcster.
Is there any thing which you can do ? Y a-t-il quelque chose que vous puis-
siez faire ?
Are there some persons here who can T a-t-il quelques personnes ici ^t
do that ? puissent faire ccla.
2. When the same part of a person or thing is spoken of in sereral indlrldnals, if it b«
singular with each individual, it is singular in French ; but if plural with each individual, it
is plural in French.
He washes the children's face?. II lave le visage aux enfants.
He washes the children's hands. II lave les mains aux enfants.
He washes their faces and hands. II leur lave le visage et les maifiM.
Birds have strong wings and hard Les oiseaux ont/ea at/«< fortes et/tf 6ee
beaks. dur.
Their beaks are very hard. Us ont le bee dur.
1. Crois-tu que j*aie peur de ces soldats ? 2. Jc ne crois pas que
tu aies peur d'eux. 3. Pensez-vous que nous ayons moins d'esprit
que nos cousins 1 4. Je ne pense pas que vous ayez moins d'esprit
qu'eux. 5. Y a-t-il quelqu'un qui ait plus de jugement que le doc-
tcur? G. Crojez-vous que ces enfants aient mes papiers? 7. Je
dis qu'ils les ont. 8. Penses-tu que je sois plus grand quo ton petit
cousin 7 9. Je ne dis pas que tu sois plus grand que lui. 10. Con-
naissez-Tous quelqu'un qui soit plus aimable que cette dame? 11.
Pensez-vous que nous soyons riches 1 12. Je ne pense pas que vous
nti isitisn Bnn« «n
poisM^ pal«-ftloa«, pui4-aie«, puissent.
282 THE EIGHTY-SECOND LESSON.
Boyez pauvres. 13. Noas ne croyons pas qne ces hommes soieni
riches. 14. Crois-ta que je paisse ecrire ce theme ? 15. Je ne crois
pas que tu puisses Tecrire. IC. Je ne crois pas que Touvrier pai&se
finir son ouvrage aujourd*huL 17. Fensez-vous que nous pnissions
lire ces livrest 18. Je ne crois pas que vous puissiez les lire. 19.
Y a-t-il quelques personnes ici qui puissent parler allemandt
1. I wish for a servant who is industrious and who has no fault ;
do you know one ? 2. I know some who are laborious ; but I know
no one who is without fault. 3. Is there any scholar here who can
write this exercise without a fault ? 4. There is none. 5. Will
you please lend this child a book which he can read ? 6.1 have no
one which he can read. 7. Do you believe that those workmen can
do their work to-day ? 8. I do not believe that they can do it to-
day. 9. Do you believe that we are afraid of those dogs ? 10. I
do not believe that you are afraid of them, but I am certain that
those children are very much afraid of them. 11. Do you say that
we are negligent? 12. I do not say that you are negligent, for I
know that you are industrious.
13. Do you cut oflf the wings of those birds t 14. We cut them
oflP. 15. Do you cut oflf their beaks? 16. We do not cut them off
17. Does the servant wash the children's faces? 18. He washes
their faces and their hands. 10. That house is magnificent ; does
it belong to you? 20. No, sir, it belongs to my brother. 21. Have
you seen your friend lately ? 22. No, sir, it is two weeks since I
have seen him. 23. Has your father gone out ? 24. Yes, sir, he
has just gone out. 25. How long have you studied French ? 26,
I have studied it abouta year. 27. When does your brother set out
for the country ? 28. He departed this morning at half past six.
29. I desire to buy a house which is beautiful, and where I can re-
main aU the year.
OPTIONAL EXERCISES.
1. What are you studying now? 2. I am studying German
when I have a little time, which is not often. 3. Have you fin-
ished the German grammar ? 4. Not yet ; I have learned only the
half of it. 5. Do you read more than two or three pages of Ger-
man a (par) day ? 6. No, when I find the time to read I translate
from two to three pages a day ; but never more than three. 7.
That is enough ; the German is difiScult.
8. Did you speak of this business to any one yesterday ? 9. I
spoke of it to Mr. C. 10. What did he say of it? 11. We went
THE EIGHTY-THIBD LESSON. 283
to see his brother, bnt he was not at home, so we hare yet done
nothing. 12. Mr. C. and his brother will be very much pleased
with this business, and I helieve that you will not have any diffi-
culty with them. 13. I believe so too (also). 14. Mr. C. says that
he consents to undertake it, if his brother will (veut) undertake it
with him. 15. I went this morning to the house of my friend
Francis (Francis), and we spoke of it together. 16. Did he fore-
see any aifficulty t 17. No, he says that it is a very good business.
83.— quatre.vingt-troisi{:me LEgON.
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD CONTINUED.
HL — ^Bebtttres preceded by a snperlatlve or word having the force of a snperlatlvef a«
U tewl^ runigve, the only, le premier^ U dernier, U meiUeur, le moindre^ Upluiy U moina^
U vUtmx^ when they denote comparison, gorem the following verb in the aubjanctire.*
He is the only man to whom we are C^est le uxd homme k qui nous puU-
able to entrust our business. tioiis confier nos affaire&
This is the biggest apple that tbcj can Yoici la plus grosse pomme quells
find. puissent^ trouvcr.
Ur. C. is the most skillful physician H. H. est le plus habile mcdecin quMl
that there is in New York. y ait h, New York.
He is the best man that there is. C^est le meilleur homme quHly ait,
France has the happiest climate which La France a le plus heureux clioiat qui
exists in the world. soil au monde.
The present subjunctive of youlOIs, to willy is irregular ; tkus^
QtteJevenOUt quetuveuilUSf qu''U veuiile^ qite nous wnUUms^ que wms vouUes,
That I may will, that thon, etc., that he, eta, that we, etc, that yon, ete^
gu'ils veuiUentf that they, eta
He is the only man to whom we are C^est le seul homme & qui nous vow-
willing to trust our money. lions confier notre argent.
Are there any persons hero who are Y a-t-il quelques personnes ici ^vt
willing to do that ? veuillent faire ceU ?
Tell me the name of a book which you Dites-moi le nom d^un livre que vous
are willing to read. vouliez lire.
There is nothing which he will do. II n'y a rien qu'il veuille faire.
He does not believe that I am willing H ne croit pas que je veuille 4tudier ?
to stttdy?
* In tbeee three rales thns far trlren, it may easily be seen that the subJanetlTe is not
nsed when the speaker means to affirm an nndonbted fact When according to Rnlo I. we
OM an interrogation or ueisation wo do not usually mean to affirm any thing positively. The
same is true 'nhcn acconling to Bale IL we use a relative precededf by a general or vagne
expression. So here In Rule III. the verb after a relative preceded by a superlative may
be seen to express its meaning vaguoly.
t The id A here is, this is the biggest apple of aU thai they can Jlnd, and the other
apples with which this is compared are referred to vaguolv. So in all other ca*es, the ob-
jecto with which the comparison is made are referred to indefinitely, and the subjunctive is
therafore nsed.
t IS im 18 ns • , ^
reniiU, Tou-lions, voa-liesi, TenlUtffifc
284
THE EIGHTT-THIRD LESSON.
U ne dit pas qu^ tu 9euiUe» ^tadier.
C'est le mtUlevr bomme que je pmism
trouvcr.
Le gouvemeur. La Mgeue.
Les ^taU'Unu, Habiter.
Informer. Uoe intention.
Umbarraster, Danter.
Un verbe. Une excuse.
Le mi-rite. Flatter.
Vttsoffe. Certainement.
Instruit. Bien instruit
The present subjunctive o/" alleb, to go^ is irregular; thus.
Que faille, que tu ailles^ gu*il affle, que nous aUions^ que vous aUiez^
That I maj go, that thoa mafest go, that he may go, that we may go, that joa ouy g<\
qu'ils aillent^ that thej may go.
He does not say that tbou art willmg
to study.
He is the best man that I can find.
The governor, tutor, }Vi8dom.
The United States. To live in^ inherit.
To inform. An intention.
To etnbarrass, encumber. To dance.
A verb. An excuse^ apology.
Merit. To/aiter.
The use. Certainly.
Instructed^ learned. Well instructed.
Pensez-vous que faille trop sooTcnt au
spectacle ?
Jc ne pcnsc pas que tu y allies tr^
souTcnt.
Y a-t-il quelquos pcrsonnea ici qui
aillent k la rividre ?
Jc nc connais personne qui y aille.
Crojez-Tou9 que nous alliens k la
campagnc ?
Je nc crois pas que vous y alliez.
Do you think that I go to the theater
too often ?
I do not think that thou goest there
very often.
Are there any persons here who are
going to the river ?
I know no one who is going there.
Do you believe that we are going to
the country ?
I do not believe that you are going
there.
1. Get homme est-il instruit ? 2. Qui, c'est I'homme le plus
savant qu*il y ait dans notre village. 3. Qui est cct homme t 4.
C'est le gouverneur de cette province ; c'est un homme de mcrite
et de sagesse. 5. Votre ami habite-t-il les £tats-Unis ? G. Oni,
il y habite depuis troia ans. 7. Informez-vous votre p^re de tout
ce que vous faites? 8. Je I'informe de presque tout. 9. dtez
votre manteau ; ne vous embarrasse-t-il pas ? 10. II ne m'embar-
rasse pas. 11. Savez-vous tons les verbes de votre legon ? 12. Cer-
tainement je les sais bien, et j'en connais I'usage. 13. Les hommes
aiment ceux qui les flatten t. 14. Avez-vous I'intention d'aller au
bal ce Boirt 15. Oui, monsieur; mais je n'ai pas I'intention d*j
danser. 16. Croyez-vous que je veuille faire du mal ? 17. Non,
monsieur, je ne le crois pas. 18. Avez-vous entendu dire que mon
18 7 11 16 4 1 ma 1 }9 e )4 IS 6 14 s 1 31 a i i •
goa-ver-ncur, 8a-ges6«, £ta^zun{«, Aa-bi-ter. io-for-mer, in-t«n-t)f)n, cm-bar-rat-ser,
1 « 7 » *J « I'i 1 • » I « r 3 14 al: I I Ul. I
dui.«er, Terl>«, ez-kaz«, me-rlt^, fla/-tor, u-zag«^ cer-taintf-meni; In-stniiC, aUI«, al-Uoni, st-
13 6 {
THE EIGHTY-THIRD LESSON. 285
frere aille en Europe? 19. Je Tai entendu dire. 20. Croyez-vous
qu'il veaille y aller ? 21. Je ne le crois pas.
1. Is your cousin the best scholar that there is in the school?
2. He is the best. 3. Do you believe that those scholars are wil-
ling to learn their lessons ? 4. I do not believe that they are wil-
ling to learn them. 5. Does the master think that we are not wil-
ling to study 1 6. He does not think that you are willing to study
much. 7. Do you know any one who is better than the governor t
8. No ; the governor is the best man that there is in this city ; his
brother is also a man of wisdom and merit. 9. Does the master
receive your excuse? 10. No, sir; he receives no excuses. 11.
Why do you not dance? 12. I am tired; I have danced almost
aU the evening. 13. Were you born in (aux) the United States ?
14. Yes, sir ; and my uncle who. died last year was born in the
United States also.
15. Have you learned the verbs of your lesson? IG. Certainly ;
I have learned them all. 17. Have you the intention to flatter that
man ? 18. No ; I do not like to flatter any one. 19. Is this word
in {de) use? 20. No, sir; it is now out of use. 21. Dost thou
think that I am going to the theater ? 22. I do not think that thou
art going there. 23. Have you heard that my brothers are going
to Enrope ? 24. I have not heard that they are going there ; and I
do not believe that you are going there. 25. Are you going to buy
that house ? 26. No, it is too small ; I desire to find one which is
large. 27. Is it not beautiful ? 28. Yes ; it is the most beautiful
house that there is in this street. 29. Do you like this city ? 30.
No ; we wish to find a place where we can live more contented.
31. Do you know any one who can speak better than that orator?
32. No ; he is the best orator that there is in our city
OPTIONAL EXERCISES.
1. Much rain has fallen this winter. 2. Yes ; and the winter
past, on the contrary, hardly (presgue pas) any fell. 3. I have re-
ceived a letter from my cousin, and he tells me that snow fell last
Friday in New Orleans. 4. It is extraordinary ; they do not often
see any there. 5. Since I have been here I have seen snow only
once. 6. When I was a little boy I used to make (I made) snow-
balls in winter. 7. Where were you then? 8. At St. Louis. 9.
There a great deal falls.
10. Have you been here long? 11. I have been waiting for
you nearly a quarter of an hour. 12. I did not know it. 13. They
286 I^HE EIGHTT-FOURTH LESSOK.
told me that 70a were in the garden, and I did not beliere it proper
(convenahle) to let you be called {appeler). 14. You were wrong.
15. Not at all ; I have not come to depart forthwith. 16. I am
delighted at it ; I have been expecting you since day before yester-
day. 17. Where is your horse t 18. I told the boy to put him in
the stable.
19. It is very fine weather this evening. 20. The nights are
cool, but it is too warm in the day. 21. I have suffered much
{beaucoup souffert) from the heat (la chaleur) to-day. 22. And I
{mot) also ; I suffered much from it. 23. I believe that it was still
warmer yesterday than to-day. 24. I do not know ; it has been
very warm all day. 25. We have much need {bien besoin) of rain.
26. We shall have some before long (pen).
27. Have you seen Madam C. to-day ? 28. No, sir ; she came
here this morning, but I had gone to my sister's. 29. She told me
that she was to come and see you. 30. When I knew that she had
come, I was very sorry for having (cTelre) gone out 81. She was
sick a long time. 82. Yes ; when I saw her the past week she
coughed still. 83. She coughs scarcely any now.
84.— QU ATRE-VINGT- QUATRlfiME LEgON.
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD CONTINUED.
1. The use of the verb vauloir before noans and verbs ha» been spoken of In ]
IS and 2& It is often equivalent to ehall. Its use may bo farther seen In the IbUoiriag
sentences:
I wish for my papers. Je desire mes papiers.
I wiU have my papers. Je veux avoir mes papiers.
He wishes for that book. II desire ce livre.
He will (is determined to) have that H veut avoir ce livre.
book.
I do not wish to stay here. Je ne desire pas rester icL
C Je ne veuz pas rester ici.
(Jei
^Jei
(11 n
I am not willing to stay here. -^ Je ne consens pas & rester ici.
i ne me plait pas dc rester icL
I will not stay here. Je oe veux pas rester ici.
I am willing to stay here. Je veux bien rester ici.
Charles wishes much to go to the conn- Charles desire beaucoup aller k k
try, and his father consents. He campagne, et son pdre y consent.
will certainly go, for his mother II ira certaincment, car sa mdre
is willing also. le veut bien aussL
George will by all means go to France. Georges veut absolument aller en
France.
I learn Italian because my father will J^apprends Titalien parce que mon
have it so. I am willing to study p^re le veut. Moi, je veux bien
it, and my brother will by all T^tudier ; mon frfere yeut absoln-
means learn it. ment Fapprendre.
THE EIGHTT-FOUBTH LESSON.
287
ir.—Tertas wbtch do not affirm ft fket poAtLreHj^ but only axpreat wUl^ dsHn, douH,
ftctr^ command, approbation^ and the like, if followed bj qtu and a dependent Terb, goT-
ern that verb in the snbjQnctiTo.*
He desires me to go out.
He consents that wc read.
I order him to tell us his name.
I will have you study better, and be
more attentive to your lessons.
No reply, dr; you shall go to school
to-morrow.
I am detemuned that you shall obey
your masters, and always speak
to them with politeness.
8. The following are some of the rerbs which govern the sabjonctlve according to th«
above rule :
n desire queje torte.
n consent que nous lisions,
J^ordonne qit*il nous dise son nom.
Je veux que vous etudiiez mieux, et que
vous soyez plus attentif k vos
lemons.
Pas d^observation, monsieur; je veux
que vouM alliez k Y6co\e dte demain.
Je veux que vous obeissiez k vos maitres,
et que vous leur parliez toujours
avec politesse.
Aimer. Consentlr.
Aimer mienz. Craindre.
Avoir besoin. Dcairer.
Avoir envie. Donter.
Avoir pear. £tre content
To forbid^ to defend (de bef. inf.).
To order.
To command. To beware of.
To approve. To disapprove.
To apprehend^ fear.
To prevent f hinder.
To tremble. To fear.
J% eratMSf tu crains, U eraUU,
I fear, thon fearest, he fears.
He likes us to study much.
We have a desire that you write to us.
Miriter. S'Honner.
Permettre. BonlMr.
Pr^forir. Sonhaiter.
Prendre garde. Yonloir.
Prier. Exlger.
DSfendre.
Ordonner.
Commander, Prendre garde.
Trouver bon. IVouver mauvaii,
Apprehender.
Empecher.
Trembler, Craindre.
nous eraignonSt vous craigneM, its eraiffneni^
we fear, yon fear, they fear.
n aime que nous itudiions beaucoup.
Nous avons envie que vous nous Scri-
viez.
Je souhaite qu^Us me disent leurs af-
faires.
H a peur queje ne perde mon argent.
I wish them to tell me their business.
He is afraid that I may lose my money,
SL Avoir peur^ craindre, trembler, apprihender, empichsr, prendre garde qite, and
verba of fear and apprehension generally, when alBrmative, take ne before a following snb-
Junctive. They alao take de bolbre the inflniUre.
They fear that we may deceive them. lis craignent que nous ne Ustronynons,
Beware lest he lose your money. Prenez garde quHl ne perde votre
argent.
* Hero a^In we perceive the same character of the Babjanctive. To ezprem a wiU,
desire, /ear, command, etc, that a thing be done, is by no means affirming that it is actual-
ly <•
ft n • • u
m^ri-ter, 6-to»-ner, per-mettre, prendre, d^-fendre, or-doi>-ner, com-mon-der, ^p-pi^
sssssM 14 14 rsi 7«r
Aen-de/*, em-p6-€her, craindre, cralnsv eralnt; orai-gnona, cnU-gnoe, oraignenl.
288 THE EIGHTY-FOURTH LESSON.
The present eubjunetive 0/ fairs, to do, is irregtdar; thus,
Qusje/asse, qustu/as8M, gtt'UfaM«, que nous /atsions, que rous/assiea,
That I may do, that thoa, et<x, that he, eta, that we, etc that you, ete^
quails /assent, that thej, eta
I approve of your doing good. Je trouve bon qtu vcusf assist da bien.
He disapproves of our doing evil H trouve mauvais que nousfassions da
mal.
He commands me to do my duty, and II commande que je fosse mon devoir,
thee to do thine. et que tu fosses le tien.
The master desires Charles to do this Le maStre ddsire que Charles fasm ce
exercise, and his brothers to do th^me-ci, et que ses freres/ouen^
those. ceux-I^
Re forbids our doing that H defend que nousfassions cela.
1. Defendez-Yous que nous fassions cela? 2. Je ne defends
pas que vous le fassiez. 3. Desirez-vous que je fasse du feu t 4.
J'aime mieux que le gar^on en fasse. 5. Je veuz que ta fasses ton
devoir, et que les enfants fassent le leur. 6. Votre pere ordonne
que le domestique ait soin des chevaux. 7. Trouvez-vous bon que
je sois ici t 8. Je trouve mauvais que tu y sois. 9. Votre mere
a-t-elle peur que vous ne sojez malades ? 10. EUe a peur que nous
ne soyons malades. 11. Voulez-vous que mon fr^re soit ici demain ?
12. Je veux que votre fr6re et que votre cousin y soient demain.
13. Voulez-vous bien que j'aie vos livres? 14. Je veux bien que
tu les aies. 15. Ordonnez-vous que nous ayons soin de vos affaires f
16. Non, monsieur, je prefere que mes frferes en aient soin. 17.
Trouvez-vous bon que je vende mes livres t 18. Non, je tronve
mauvais que tu les vendes.
1. Is your brother afraid that I am angry? 2. He is afraid
that thou art angry, and that thy brother is angry also. 3. Do
you wish us to be here early ? 4. Yes ; and I wish your cousins lo
be here early also. 5. Dost thou consent that I have those fruit
trees (arhres fruitier s)'\ 6. I consent to thy having them. 7. Do
you approve of our having much money ? 8. I disapprove of your
having more than your brother. 9. What will you have me do!
10. I will have you do your duty well. 11. What will you have
this boy do? 12. I will have him make some fire. 13. Are you
afraid that those children may be lazy ? 14. No ; I am afraid that
they are doing harm. 15. The master forbids us to go out at
present. 16. Do you approve of the children's having your gold
pen? 17. No ; I forbid their having it.
THE EIGHTY-FOURTH LESSON. 289
18. Do you wish us to buy that bouse 1 19. 1 wish you to buy
it. 20. Are you afraid that the master may see your writing ?
21. No ; I desire him to see it 22. Have you a desire that we
study French 1 23. Yes ; I will have you speak French, and your
brothers speak German. 24. Beware lest that child be sick. 25.
Charles the Fifth ( Quint) who spoke several European {enropiennes)
languages fluently {couramment), used to say that it was necessary
{/allaU) to speak Spanish to the gods, Italian to the ladies, French
to our friends, German to soldiers, English to geese {oies)j Hunga-
rian {kongrois) to horses, and Bohemian {bokemien) to the devil {Ig
diable).
OPTIONAL EXERCISES.
1. Do you think of traveling this summer ? 2. I think of going
to Europe in a month or six weeks. 3. Is Mr. A. going there also t
4. No, miss ; I shall stay here all summer. 5. You do not often
travel. 6. The year past I made a journey to Paris. 7. Are you
not the cousin of Mr. J. whom I saw at Madam V.'o last winter f
8. Yes, miss, I am. 9. Is it not he {lui) who stays at present at
Mr. D.'s? 10. Yes, it is he. 11. Does he think of staying here
this summer? 12. No, miss; he thinks of setting out soon for
Paris. 13. Bring him to our house. 14. He will be delighted to
come and pay you (voua presenter) his respects {ses respects),
15. Does the sick woman cough still t 16. She coughs scarce-
ly any now ; she is out of danger, but it is necessary to tell her to
avoid going out in the evening, or when the weather is damp. 17.
She goes out only when it is very fine weather. 18. Has Mr. V.
arrived from the country? 19. He had not yet arrived when I was
at his house to^ay. 20. Has he gone for his sister ? 21. Yes, it
is for that that he has gone.
22. Lewis, is your exercise corrected? 23. Yes, sir; do you
wish to see it ? 24. If you do your exercises well you wiU be re-
warded ; but those who play instead of studying will be always
ignorant and despised. 25. Do you like to study ? 26. Some-
times, sir ; when I succeed in knowing my lessons well, I find much
pleasure in study. 27. It is necessary, then, to be always diligent
and studious. 28. There are two trees opposite to my window.
29. The surgeon is going to cut off the sick man*s arm.
290 THE EIGHTY-FIFTH LESSON.
85.— QUATRE-VINGT-CINQUIfiME LEgON.
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD CONTINUED.
2b take care of. The' bay, Soigner. La hate.
An ordtard. To obey, Un verger. ObHr (d).
On the other side of or over the hay, De Vautre cdti de la baie,
A fruit-tree. To be worth more. Un arbre fruitier. Valoir nueax.
General Lafayette commanded the na- Le g6n6ral Lafayette commandait lea
tional guards. gardes nationales.
1. Ordonner and commander tnko d befiira a person, and de befbre the inflnitire.
Order the servant to come. Ordonnez au domesUque de venir.
Order him to do that. Ordonnez-/«t de faire cela.
He desires us to have the money. II ddmre que nous ayona Targent.
We are determined that you shall Nous voulons que tous Tayez.
have it.
I fear that you may be sick. Je crains que tous ne soyez maladc.
v.— Impersonal verbs, and U est with an attrlbata, followed by gue^ govern « foUowios
verb In the subjunctive, when the action is not ofllnned positively. The foUowing ore of
this kind.
It is necessary. XifatU, II est neeessaire.
It is suitable. It is important. II convient. H imported
It is sufficient. It is better. H suffit. H vaui miettx.
It is to be desired, H est d disirer^ or ^ souhttiter.
It is doubtful. It is possible. II est doutevx. H est possible.
It is just. It is proper. II est juste. II est d propos.
It is time for me to go home. 1 est temps que i^aille chez moi.
It is necessary that thou write a letter. Ilfaut que tu krives une lettre.
It is suflScient that he have his due. R tuffit qu'il ait son dik.
It is important that we go to the mar- B vnporte que nous allions au m^yriUL^
ket.
It is better that you go. H vaut mieuz que tous y edliez.
It is surprising that they do that I^ «<< surprenant ^Viaf assent cela.
The subjunctive present o^tiloir is irregular; thus^
QueJeffatUe, quetuvaiUet, gu'Uvaitte, que nous vaUone, que wnu wUUsi
That I be worth, that tliou be, eto^ that he be, etc., that we be, etcJ, that yoa be, ete^
qu'ils vaiUent, that they be worth.
Do you say that I am worth more than Dites-vous que je vaille mienx que mon
my brother? frSre?
It is sufficient that thou be worth as II suffit que tu vailles autant que ton
much as thy brother. fr^re.
«^* ♦* "^Si^y ,*J*** *f,f ^^^nf. « is swUabie, U U important, etc, that a thing be done, la
not to affirm It poeitive ; hence, as in the other rules, the subjunctive is used. ^^
*{ * ^7 • s u en 9919191 s s 7 n nu h m » n u
T yi-gnor. hale, ver^r, o-b^-ir, frui-tier. n6^ceeH«UM.^ con-vienl. Im-port-. sn/yjt, soo.
*ai-ter, dou-tena\ po«-»lbl«, pro-po«, vallle, va-lions, va-lies, vaillent
THE EIGHTY-FIFTH LESSON. 291
II 18 doubtful if he be worth aa much JX est donteox qu^il vaille antant qae
as thou. toi.
It is possible that we are worth more II est possible que nous valiona mienx
than thej. qu^eux.
I do not think that you are worth more Je ne crois pas que vous valiez mieux
than they. qu^eux.
Do you say that these glores are worth Croyez-rous que ces gants vaUlewt une
a doUar ? piastre ?
I say that they are worth more than a Je dis quUls valcnt plus d*une piastre.
dollar.
I fear that ho may do you harm. Je crains quHl ne vous fasse du mal.
She Is afraid of thy going on the lake. Elle a peur que tu n*aillps sur le lac.
r L^avant-demidre nuit.
Tke night heftrre kui. ) La nuit d^avant-hier.
( Ayant-hier soir.
2. Soir Is before bed-time; n«i/, the rest of the night
I supped with my father night before J^ai soupd chcz mon pdre avant-hier
last. soir.
I stayed at home very late in the even- Je suis restd chcz moi trds-tard dans
ing ; it was eleyen o^dock. la soiree, il ^tait onze heures.
I passed at the ball the night before last. J^ai pass6 au bal la noit d*ayant-hier.
1. Diea nous commande de Taimer, il noas commande ansa!
d'aimer tout le monde. 2. Get bomme soigne bien sa sant6. 3. Le
jardinier a-t-il des arbres fniitiersi 4. II en a quelques-uns. 5.
Le domestique a-t-il soin de votre verger 1 6. II en a soin. 7.
Nous devons ob6ir a Dieu. 8. Le domestique obeit h son maitre.
9. Ou serez-voos demain ? 10. Je serai de Tantre cot^ de. la baie.
11. Croyez-YOUB que je vaille mieux que mon frere t 12. Je dis que
ta Tanx autant que ton fr^re. 13. Fensez-vous que nous valions
moins que nos cousins ? 14. Je pense que vous valez autant qu*eux.
15. Crojez-vous que ce livre-ci vaille mieux que ceux-la t 16. Non,
je CTois que ceux-U valent mieux que celui-ci. 17. Est-il juste que
nous fassions cet ouvrage ? 18. Non, il est juste que les Aleves le
fassent. 19. Est-il k propos que je dise k quelqu'un ce que je viens
d^entendre I 20. II est k propos que vous le disiez k votre p6re et
a votre frere.
1. Tbe master orders tbe scholars to make no noise. 2. Gen-
eral Washington commanded tbe army (arm^e) of the United States.
8. God orders us above all to love him. 4. Who has taken care of
the stranger during his sickness {sa maladie) 1 5. The doctor has
taken good care of him. 6. Do you live over the bay 1 7. No,
but I go over the bay every evening in summer. 8. The gardener
292 THE EIGHTY-FIFTH LESSON.
is in his orchard. 9. Has be many frnit-trees in his orchard t
He has many. 10. The dog always obeys the voice (la voix) of bis
master. 11. Is it suitable that you go to the physician's? 12. No,
it is better that our friends go. 13. That man is not industrious ;
it is surprising that he is rich. 14. Is it necessary that you do
your task to-day? 15. It is sufficient that I do it this week.
16. Is it important that the workman finish his work this week ?
17. Yes, it is necessary that he finish it to-morrow. 18. Has that
scholar written his exercise ? 19. No, sir, it is doubtM whether he
writes it 20. Does the master say that you are worth more than
we? 21. He says that we are worth more than you. 22. Do yon
say that this horse is worth two hundred dollars? 23. Yes, and I
say that those are worth five hundred dollars. 24. The night be-
fore last was very stormy {orageuse) ; the thunder {la foudtrt) fell
several times between two and three in the {du) morning. 25. Is
it possible for you to finish your task at six o'clock ? 26. No, sir,
it is impossible {impossible) for me to finish it before eight.
OPTIONAL EXERCISES.
1. Is it just that my brother have my money ? 2. It is just that
he have his, and that you have yours. 3. Is it necessary that the
physician go to your house twice a {par) day ? 4. It is sufficient
that he go there once a day. 5. Is it surprising that I make mis-
takes ? 6. It is not surprising that you make some ; but it is very
surprising that those children do not make any. 7. Is it important
that we study French ? 8. It is important that you study French
and Spanish. 9. Is it necessary for us to buy a horse ? 10. It is
necessary for you to buy a horse and some cows. 11. Have you
been to the theater this week ? 12. I went there night before last
13. Have you finished translating the work which I carried you
last week ? 14. Not yet ; it is a little difficult, and I have hardly
any time to {pour) read it 15. How do you like (find) it? 16.
It is very interesting and very well written ; how many volumes
are there? 17. There are three; when you wish for the second,
let me know. 18. Thank you ; I shall not need it under {avani)
seven or eight days. 19. How much of it do you translate each
day ? 20. I read from fifteen to twenty pages, and I do not think
of doing more {en /aire davantage) at present. 21. You are very
diligent ; it is enough. 22. Do you look for the words in the dic-
tionary ? 23. Sometimes, but I know them almost all. 24. The
second volume will be easier. 25. Without doubt ; I do not find
the first volume so difficult to translate now as when I began it.
TH£ EIGHTY-SIXTH LESSON.
86.— QUATRE-VINGT-SIXIfeME LEgON.
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD CONTINUED.
YL— Some eoDjunctlons govern the siibjimctive. The following «re of thia kind.
Tn order that. Unless,
Before, Though.
Jf or fear that, leei.
Provided that.
Although,
If, in case that.
A Jin que. A moins que,
Avant que, Bien que.
De peur que, de erainte que.
Fourvu que. JusqtCdk ce que,
Quoique. Four que.
Au cos que, en cos que.
For more coi^anctlons of this kind, see Synopsis, page 476.
1. A motne que takes ne \>efnn the following subjanctlve ; also de peur que and de
eraimte que when not negative.
UntU
That, in order that.
Unless yoa give bim money.
TTnless they be here.
Although he knows his lesson, he does
not recite it well.
FroTided that I be there.
In order that he may do that.
For fear that they may surprise us.
I will go before you finish.
Lest we surprise them.
Although he cannot read.
It is necessary to stay until he finishes.
In order that thou mayest know thy
lesson.
In case I know my lesson.
In case we know ours.
Unless you know yours.
WL—Que used for any eoqjanction goyeming the subjanctlve, or for a second ei, takea
the sabjunctive after it
A moins que tous ne lui donniez do
Targent.
A moins qu'ila ne eoient ici.
Quoiqu\l sache * sa legon, il ne la re-
cite pas bicn.
Pourvu queje sois Ik.
A Jin qu^'d fosse cela.
J)e peur qu'ils ne nous surprennetU,
•Tirai avant que yqub Jinissiez,
De erainte que nous ne les surprenions.
Bien ^f/il ne puisse pas lire.
II faut restcr JiM^tf'd ee qvCMJinMte.
Pour que tu saches ta le^on.
Au cas queje sache ma Icgon.
^n cas que nous saehions les ndtres.
A moins que tous ne saehiex la Tdtre.
Be good, in order that you may have
friends, and that you may be happy.
If you are good, and if you know your
lesson, you will be praised.
So that, in such a manner that,
la such a way that.
Soyez bon, afin que vous ayez des amis,
ct que Youspuissiez etre heureux.
Si TOUS ^tes bon, et que tous saehiez
Totrc Ic^on, tous serez lou6.
Defa^on que, de sorte que, de maniire
que.
De telle sorte (or maniere) que.
Till.— After expressions like the above, the verb Is In the Indicative mood when It
afflrms its meaning positively, and In the subjanetive when it indicates its meaning po-
tentially.
• The verbs following such coi^onctinn either express their meaning under a condi-
tion of nnccrtoin^, or they belong t<> a sabordinate clause which the speaker passes over
ragnely ; hence too sabjunctive is used.
114 14 M n 90 4 S I 91 1< 1 M/
a-fln, cralnttf, poar*va, quol-ke, cat, fii-von, sorte, mamldrA
294 THE EIQHTY-SIXTH LESSON.
You fulfill your duties so that you are Vous remplissez rotre devoir dafcftm
esteemed. que tous He* estim6.
Fulfill your duty in such a manner that Remplissez votre deroir dt tncoiCere qms
you may be esteemed. vous sor/ez estim6.
Although it rain, he will come. Quoiqu^'d pleuve, il Tiendra.
He lives in such a manner that he does II vit de telle maniere qu^il ne/aii mal
harm to no one. k personne.
Live in such a way that you may do Yivez de telle sorte que vous ne fastUt
harm to no one. dc mal h personne.
This respect. To present, introduce. Co respect. Presenter^ ifUrodmre»
2. Prisenier^ la introdadng to a person ; introdulre, into a plaoo.
I introduced him to my friend. Je Tai presents k mon ami.
I introduced him into the society. Je Tai introduit dans la soddt^.
To accompany. 80 soon. Accompagner. SiioU
Gallant. On purpose. Oalant. Expres.
To prove. To permit^ allow. Prouver. Permettrc (as mettrej Les. 89)i
To seem. It seems, Semhler. II semble.
8. Jl sembU^ without on object pronoun, govema the BabJoncUye ; with one, it does not
It seems that that child is sick. H semble que cet enfant soit mslade.
it seems to me that he is sick. // me semhle qu^il est malade.
1. Notre cousin est vena ici pour que nous allions au spectacle
avec lui. 2. Get 6colier restera ici jusqu'a ce qu'il sache sa le^on.
8. Quoiqu'il soit un peu paresseux, il me semble qn'il apprend bien
sa le^on. 4. Je veux toujours faire en sorte que le maitre soit can-
tent. 5. Si vous voyez monsieur A. aujourd'hui, presentez-lui mes
respects. 6. Accompagnez-vous le maitre it I'ecolet 7. Oui, mon-
sieur, je Taccompagne tous les matins. 8. Voire p^re sera-t-il ici
demain ! 9. Non, monsieur, il ne viendra pas sitot 10. Je viens
I de la campagne expres pour vous accompagner au bal. 11. Yoos
I 6tes fort galant. 12. Ce que vous dites prouve que cet bomme est
I ricbe. 13. Oui, mais quoique il soit ricbe, il n'est pas bonnete.
' 14. Le medecin ne me permet pas do boire do cafe. 15. 11 semble
' qu'il pleuve. 16. 11 me semble qu'il pleut 17. Non, je ne crois
I pas qu'il pleuve.
I 1. Although I know my lessons perfectly, I cannot always re-
i cite tbem well. 2. Is your cousin tbe best scholar that there is in
I tbe scbool ? 3. He is not tbe best ; for altbougb be can learn fast,
' he does not study much. 4. Do you wisb us to know the Latin
and tbe Greek ? 5. I will have you know the Latin, the Greek,
#. • 5 A 5 S C 14 IS 2=13 I » 1 0 ]<> 17 1 S < 7 11
pleaT«, rcs-pecf, pr^-zen-ter, in-tro^air«, oo-com-pa-gner, si-i:f, ga-lAiit, cx-pria, pcoa-
T0r, per-meftr«, Min>blor, sombla.
THE EIGHTY^XTH LESSON. 295
and the modern (modernes) languages. 6. Are you willing to lend
us a book which we can read t 7. Certainly ; I am willing to lend
yon one provided that you can read French. 8. In case that those
young boys have money, will they go to the city I 9. They will
go if they are docile (doeiles), and if they know their lessons. 10.
Fulfill thy duties in such away that thou mayest be esteemed. 11.
Yon learn your lessons in such a manner that your masters are al-
ways satisfied {aaiisfaits). 12. Charles has not come, lest we
should blame him.
13. Present my respects to the doctor. 14. I will present them
to him in case that I see him. 15. I am going to his house on pur-
pose to see his son. 16. Who has introduced the stranger into our
society T 17. Your friend the German has introduced him. 18.
Does the physician permit you to go out at night t 19. He does
not permit it 20. " Has your sister who lives in the United States
a son or a daughter," said a person to an Irishman {irlandais)^ his
friend. 21. " To tell you the whole truth," answered the Irishman,
embarrassed, " I do not yet know whether I am an uncle or an aunt ;
but I wiU write to my sister to pray her to inform me in regard to
it (en), as soon as {le plus tdt) possible."
OPTIONAL EXERCISES.
1. Did you go to Mrs. C.'s ball last Thursday ? 2. Yes, I went
there with Mr. and Mrs. G. ; you were not there. 8. No, I had
been to the country Thursday morning, and I came to the city too
late for the ball. 4. Were there many people there ? 5. There were
enough, and every body looked very joyous. 6. The ball season is
ended {finie), 7. It is too hot now, and the nights are too short.
8. Let us go and take a walk (/aire une promenade) this even*
ing, if it be pleasant weather. 9. Where shall we go ? 10. Let us
go to the garden of Mr. T. 11. Very willingly ; it wiU be moon-
light, and that (ce) will be very agreeable. 12. Have you been
there lately t 13. I went there the other day ; his garden is mag-
nificent ; there are roses of all colors. 14. There must be also other
flowers. 15. There are many. 16. Mr. C. came near here the
other day, but I did not see him. 17. I wished to tell him to bring
me a few beautiful flowers to (pour) put in my garden. 18. You
will be able to tell it to him to-morrow, and to choose those which
you wish.
19. What o'clock is it ? 20. I do not know precisely, but it is
not late. 21. I am going to send for a few cigars. 22. Have you
a desire to smoke t 23. 1 smoke a little every evening. 24. It is
296 THE EIGHTY-SEVENTH LESSON.
not more than ei<!fht o'clock ; you can send for some. 25. Has the
servant returned 1 26. Yes, he is in his room. 27. I will tell him
to go for some for me. 28. Have you some change ? 29. I have a
half dollar ; it is the smallest coin that I have. 30. There are two
quarters of a dollar (de gourde) if you wish for them. 31. Thank
you.
87.— QUATRE-VINGTSEPTIiaiE LEgON.
SUBJUNCTIYE MOOD CONTINUED.
1. Qudqiie followed by que hns the following meanings.
Whatever (adj.). However (adv.). Qttel que , . que. Quelque . . que.
2. Quelque followed by a verb ia written quel que^ as two words, and agrees with the
sabject of the yerb.
Whatever may be the engagement. Quel que soit TeDgagement.
Whatever may be your intention. Quelle que soit votre intention.
Whatever may be your designs. Quels que soient vos desseins.
Whatever may be your views. Quellee que soient vos vues.
8. Quelque belonging to a substantive, with or without another adjective, is written as
one word, agreeing with the sabstantlve.
Whatever reason. Whatever efforts. Quelque raison. Quelques efforts.
Whatever fine books you may have. Quelques beaux tivres que vous ayex.
Whatever riches he may have. Quelques richesses ^Ul ait.
4. Belonging to an adverb or a^ective, it is itself an adverb, and never varied.
However beautiful she may be, etc. Quelque belle qu^elle soit.
However rich they may be, etc Quelque riches quails puissent 6tre.
However well trritten may be your Quelque bien dcrit que soit Totro
exercise. tb^me.
IX-^Quelque^ quel giM, whatever ; quelque^ however ; qui que or qui que ee soit qui^
whoever ; qui que ee soit que^ whomsooTer ; quoi que or quoi que ee soit que^ whateTer ;
and si.,, que, however (as conj. Rule 6X govern the subjunctive.
Whatever riches he may have, ho will Quelques richesses qu^ll ait,* il sera
always be unhappy. toujours malheurenx.
Whatever may be his misfortunes, he Quels que soient ses malhcurs, il les
supports them with conrage. supporte avec courage.
However wrong you may be, he will Quelque tort que vous ayez, il tous
pardon you. pardonnera.
However rich he may be, he will bo Quelque riche ^'il soit, il sera mal-
unhappy. heureux.
Whoever you may be, you wiU come Qui que vous soyez, vous entrerex.
in.
Whoever he may be that knocks at Qui que ce soit qui frappe h la porte,
the door, he shall not come in. je no veux pas qu^il entre.
* The subjunctive in these sentences, it will be readily seen, has the same eharaeter of
vagaenesa as in the preceding rnlea
THE EI6HTT-SEVENTH LESSON. 297
Whoerer it may be that you meet in Qui que ee ioit qae rons renoontries
that houae, do not speak to any dans cette maison, ne parlez h
one. personne.
Whaterer he may do, he will be blamed. Quoi gu'il fassc, 11 sera bUlm6.
AMiaterer you may see, do not speak Quoi que ce soit que tous voyiez, n^en
of it. parlez pas.
HowoTer tall he may be, he does not Si grand qu'U soit, il ne me fidt pas
frighten me. peur.
To yield. To gueae. To deny. Ceder. Deviner. Nier,
To despair. To dieoicn^ deny. Deeesperer. Diaeonvenir (comp. of
venir).
ft. These two verbs take de before s nouD and an Inflnitlre.
X.— Verbs which contain in themselves the/orce of a negative, as nier, dimtp^er^ and
dieconvenir, when oaed afflrmatirdy govern the subjanctive in the same way ea othe-s
used negatively.
I deny that be is here. Je nie qWW eoit ici.
I despair of his doing his work. Je desespere quM1/<uM son ouvrage.
He denies that they know that. II dieconvient qulls UKheni cela.
ft. Diaeepirer, dUeontenir^ d&uter, and nUr^ generally when negative, and sometlmea
when interrogative, take fie before the following snbjanotive.
I do not deny that that may be. Je ne nie pas que ceU ne soit.
I deny that that is true. Je nie que cela soit vrai.
Do you doubt his being here ? Doutez-vous qu^il soit (ne soit) ici f
7. The present snbjnnctivo otJtilMr^ impersonal, is qu^UfaUle.
Do yon think it necessary to do that ? Pensez-Tous qu^U faille faire cela?
1. Qaels que soient vos desseins vous me faites tort. 2. Ces
hoznmes vous font-ils da bien ? 3. Non, monsieur, quelles que soient
leors intentions lis me font du mal. 4. Peuvent-ils etre vos amis ?
5. Non, monsieur, quels qu'ils soient ils ne peuvent pas dtre mes
amis. 6. Faut-il que cet homme cMe a ses ennemis *? 7. Oui^^ quel
que soit son courage il faut qu*il c5de h, la force. 8. Cet homme
est tr^malade, et quelque remede qu'on lui donne il mourra. 9.
Qnelque belle que soit cette dame elle n*est pas aimable. 10. Quoi
que (quoi que ce soit que) vous fassiez, vous ne pouvez pas plaire k
cet bomme. 11. Notre ami peut-il faire ce qu'il a entrepris? 12.
Nod, si habile qu'il soit, il ne pent pas faire cela. 13. Ne d^ses-
perez-vous pas que cet ^colier ne fasse son th^me*? 14. Je deses-
p6re de lui, il n*apprendra jamais rien. 15. Disconvenez-vous de
ce faitt 16. Je n'en disconviens pas. 17. Je ne desespere pas
que cet homme ne fasse son ouvrage.
e6-der, de-vi-ner, ni-er, dee-es-p6-rer, dis-con-ve-nir, &iu&
13*
298 THE EIGHTT-SEVENTH LESSON.
1. Is that man happy ? 2. No, Bir, for he is not Tirtaons ; and
however rich and learned one may be, he cannot be happy if he is
not rirtuous. 8. Will those poor people have friends t 4. Yes, sir ;
however poor they may be, they will always have friends. 5. Can
that man keep his riches long? 6. No, sir ; whatever riches he may
have, he can not keep them long. 7. Is your companion (camarade)
in good health ? 8. No, he is sick ; and whatever remedy he may
* take (prenne), he will be sick a long time. 9. Whatever may be
the intention of your companion, has he not committed a &alt ?
10. He has committed several. 11. Whatever that yonng boy may
do, he will not be blamed. 12. Do yon deny that he sometimes
makes mistakes ? 13. I do not deny that he sometimes makes many. ■
14. Ouess how much that cloak cost me. 15. I guess that it
cost you twenty dollars. 16. To whom do you yield your place ?
17. I yield it to that lady. 18. Guess what I have done to-day.
19. That is not difficult to guess ; you have been to school. 20.
Whatever remedy that sick man may take, he will never get well
(ffuerira). 21. Whatever you may say, they will not believe yon.
22. Whoever you may bcj sir, respect my dwelling {respectez ma
demeure), 23. Whoever I may be, fear nothing, sir, your dwelling
shall be respected. 24. Do those scholars speak Crerman t 25.
Yes, however difficult may be the phrases (phrases) that one says to
them in that language, they always know how to translate them cor-
rectly {correctement), 26. That child, young as he is {sijeune qu*il
8oii), knows already how to read and count. 27. That man, badly
clothed as he is, is no less for that a millionaire {millionaire),
OPTIONAL EXERCISES.
1. I have just bought a new coat ; how does it fit me T 2. It
fits you very well ; how much did you pay for it t (Lesson 68, 4.)
8. It costs me twenty-five dollars. 4. It is not dear ; the cloth is
very fine. 5. I sought in several stores before finding one suitable
{convenable), 6. Finally (enfin) yon have succeeded in finding one.
7. I am so big that I do not easily find coats ready made (taut
fails), 8. It is necessary to get some made ( f aire f aire) for you.
9. Yes, when I cannot find any, I go to my tailor's.
10. Here is a pair of spectacles which I have just bought ; how
do you like (find) them ? 11. They look good ; but what wOl yon
(voulez) do with spectacles t You are too young to (pour) wear any.
12. My sight is weak ; it is necessary for me to read and write sJl
day, and even sometimes at night 13. To read or write at night
THE EIGHTY-EIGHTH LESSON. 299
is not good for the eyes. 14. That tires my sight macL 15. Then
yon are not doing wrong to wear spectacles ; but pnt them on only
*when you read. 16. It is what I intend to do. 17. If yoor sight
is weak yon do wrong to read at night ; nothing does more harm
to the eyes than that. 18. I do not do it with good will, bat often
I cannot do differently. 19. Last year I read much at night, bat
I perceived that my sight was suffering from it, and since I read
only in the day. 20. I have so much to write that I am obliged
sometimes to write all the evening. 21. I also read much in the
evening a year ago {il y a un an)^ but I do it no more. 22. My
sight is too precious to (pour) lose it thus ; I prefer to take care
of it
88.— QUATRE-VINGT-HUITlJiME LEgON.
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD CONTINUED.
XL— Conditional claoMfl beginning with «<, and followod by que or a relatlTS pronona,
and a a«cond verb, take that verb in tho sabJonctiTe, if the speaker look apon what it ex*
Iffeasea aa &1m or donbtftil, and in tho indicatiTe if there be no donbt.
If you ny that that is true, you are Si vous dites que cela »oit vrai, toos
wrong. avez tort.
If you say that that is true, you are Si tous dites que cela est vral, vous
right avez raison.
If you think that he is honest, you do Si tous pensez quUl soU honn^te, rous
not know him. ne le connaissez pas.
If he thinks that you are honest, he is S*il pense que tous 6tes honnftte, il m
right. raison.
1. When expressions, which with que govern the subjanctire, take de oe que after then,
they goTem the indicative.
^ , , , . ( Je suisf&ch6 avHl/a«M cela.
I «n wrry that he does that. | j, ^ j^^^^ ^ ^ ^r^j.^^ ^^,
8. The sal;} anctive expressing desire sometimes begins a sentence.
May you Utc happy. Pwmea-Tous TiTre heureux.f
May be arriTe soon. Fmese^'il arrivcr bientot
HeaTen grant that it may happen. F<use le Ciel qu^il arriTe.
& The sabjonctlve present first person singular of acteair^ with a negative, has the pe*
enltarlty of being need like the indicative, without any governing phrase.
I know no one who can do it like him. Je ne eaehe personne qui puisse le
faire comme lui.
4 The present of the sntijanctive otpleuvoir, impenonal, is qu'U ple/uve.
I do not go out for fear that it may rain. Je ne sors pas de peur qu^U ne pUuve.
* It is evident that the ilnni clause after de ee que Is stated as a tkct,
t Soch phrases may be explolned by suppoelng^e veuao que^Je deeire que, or something
aUnt understood Dofore them.
equivalent
300 1*1^^ EiGHTT-EIGHTH LESSON.
He carries hifi ambrella for fear that it II porte son parapluio de eraMe qu^U
may rain, ne pleuve.
In that manner. In such a manner. .De cette manidre. De teUe manidie.
In what way. De quelle manierc.
6. /n, tn such oxpresslonA, is rendered by ds in French.
The stove. The stove-door. Le poele. La porte dn poele.
The duck. To tripe^ also to experience, Le canard. Eemyer,
The turkey, Le dindon. La dinde.
The rest. The crop^ harvest Le reste. La reeolte.
Obliged, Differently, ObligL Differeinment.
To tear. To astonish, Decfiirer, JBtonner {de bef. infl).
To conceive. A phrase. Concevoir. Une phrase.
There is the rest of my money. Voil& le reste de mon argent.
0. L^ft^ in the sense ot remaining, at the end of a claose. Is tnnsUted de resU.
I have nothing left. «l£JE^ai rien de reste.
He has some ducks left. IV#des canards de reste.
There are none left. ^^w ®° ^ P*^ ^ reste,
A few more apples left. ^x^^ quelques pomroes de reste.
7. To gei or have something done, is express^ in French by the verb /aire with an
Influitlve; as, "^
To get mended. To get washed. Faire raccommoder. Faire lavtr.
To have made. To have swept. F^e faire. Faire balayer.
Are you getting your coat mended ? jfoifej-vous raccommoder votre habit ?
I am getting it mended. Zq\q fais raccommoder.
8w Faire thus osod is not to bo separated from the dependent infinitive.
Did you get a coat made ? .^^-vous fait faire un habit ?
I got one made. J^^td fait faire un.
Did you have those trees pulled up ? A^-vous fait arraeher ces arbres ?
I had them pulled up. "^^s nifait arraeher.*
9. Fait followed by an infinitive, as here, is never varied to agree with a preceding noon
or pronoan, becanse the infinitive b its object. -'^
I. Si voas pensez que nous valon? mieox que ces dcoliers vous
avez raisoQ. 2. Si vous dites quails valUent mieuz que nous, tous
avez tort. 3. Ferez-vous laver votre linge f 4. Je le ferai laver.
5. Ce petit gar^on n'a-t-il pas fait rire ces hommes 1 6. II les a
fait rire. 7. Get homme a-t-il quelque chose de reste? 8. II n'a
rien de reste. 9. Mettez-vous du bois dans le po^le ? 10. J'y mets
du charbon. 11. La pluie a fait du mal a la reeolte, 12. Le do-
mestique essuie la table. 13. Concevez-vous bien ce que je vous
* Les In this sentence is the object of arraeher ; literally, I have made poll them np.
141 » » , S 931St U n M , 8 S U U 13 S II « 1 S C
poela, ca-nard, e«-5u-yer, din-don, dind«, rest^ r6-ooIt«, ob-ll-ge, dl/-f«i-rem-men^ dc-
chi-ror, 6-ton*ner, con-ce-voir, phraz«, ba-la-ycr.
THE EIQHTT-EI6HTH LESSON. 801
disf 14. Je le consols bien et mes freres le con^oivent anssL 16.
Get ^colier etonne tout le monde. 16. D6chirez-vou8 votre line ?
17. Je ne le dechire jamais. 18: Ltes-vous oblig6 de faire voire
tAche de cette mani^re ? 19. Qui, je ne puis pas la faire differem-
ment.
1. Why does that boy tear his book 1 2. He tears it because
he has no mind to learn his lesson. 3. Why are you astonished?
4. That news has astonished me ; I have never conceived of such
an (une telle) affair. 5. Have you torn your cloak t 6. I have
torn it, and I wish to get it mended. 7. Have you written all the
Latin phrases of your lesson? 8. I have written all the Latin
phrases and all the Greek phrases. 9. Does the maid-servant wipe
often the mouths of those children ? 10. She wipes their mouths
and their hands very often. 11. Why do the scholars wipe their
slates? 12. They wipe them because they are wet. 13. Has the
rain done harm to the crop ? 14. It has done it good 15. Have
yon some ducks left ? 16. I have some ducks and some turkeys
left. 17. Has that countryman some turkeys? 18. He has no
turkeys ; he has a few ducks left.
19. If the master says that you are worth more than we, he
is wrong. 20. If he says that we are worth less than our cousins,
he is wrong. 21. If you think that I can teach you French in
three months, you are deceived. 22. My father died in eighteen
hundred and fifty. 23. He was bom the fourth of March, eighteen
hundred and one. 24. Were you bom in eighteen hundred and
thirty? 25. I was bom in eighteen hundred and twenty-eight.
26. Is there some wood left ? 27. No, sir, I have put it aU in the
stove. 28. You do not write well; can you not write differ-
ently? 29. No, sir, we are obliged to write in this manner. 30.
Have you some turkeys left ? 31.1 have a few more left.
OPTIONAL EXEBCISES.
1. That scholar reads while eating, and he studies also while
walking (en marckani). 2. When did you find your pencil ? 3.
Yesterday ; in looking for my pen, I found my pencil. 4. Put some
wood in the stove. 5. Whatever may be your fortune, you ought
not for that to believe yourself (vous) better. 6. Whatever may be
the books that you read, you do not appear to profit {prqfi(i) much
by your reading. 7. Whoever may wish to do me wrong, shall pay
dear (for) his audacity {audace). 8. Whomsoever I shelter {abrUe)
802 THB EIGHTY-NINTH LESSON.
has to fear no danger. 9. Whatever yon do, do it always with
good will.
10. I have a cold in the head which gives me the headache. IL
It is very disagreeable ; it is necessary to take a little hot tea this
evening. 12. It is nothing dangerous. 13. You went out in (par)
the rain ; is not your linen wet t 14. No ; my coat is perhaps a
little damp. 15. Go and change it. 16. No, it is not necessary ;
it is not very damp. 17. Change it, if it is not quite dry ; you
have already a cold in the head, and if you remain with your coat
wet, you will have a cold in the breast, and you will be perhaps ve^
sick. 18. Well, I am going to change my \de) coat. 19. Here is
one ; take off yours, and put on this. 20. No, thank you, I am
going to my room ; I wish to put on also a pair of dry stockiDgs.
21. You had better (vousferez bien).
89.— QUATRE-VINGT-NEUVIilME LEgON.
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD CONTIinJED.
1. The mode of foiming the present snbjanctlye has been given (Lesson 81); the Ibl*
lowing Is still more comprehensive. The first and second persons plural are, in most Tertw^
the same as those of the imperlbet indicative, and the three persons singular and third per-
son plural may be had by dropping srt of the third person plural indicative present, and
adding the terminating letters, b, ns, x, xrt.
8l All verbs in xvoin, as Dwtdr^ also Acquirir^ Botrt^ Mourir, Venir^ Tentr, and
Prendre, form the present subjunctive according to the above rule, as exoepttona to tlM
general rule (Lesson 81), thus:
Qtte Je doite^ que iu doivee, qu^U doive, que noue deviant^ que f>oue dstiem^
That I may owe, that thou mayest owe, that he may owe, that we, eta, that you, etc.,
qu^ile doivenlt that they may owe.
Queje boive, -iu hoivee, M boive, -noiM bwvUme^ -Wfus buviea^ -ib Ifdoent,
That I may drink, that thou, etc., that he, etc., that we, etc., that you, etc., that they, eta
Qtteje meure, -iu meuree^ -U mewe, -nouemfntrUma^ -vous nwuiA^ -ib mumrmiit
That I may die, that thou, eta, that he, eta, that wo, eta, that yon, eta, that they, et&
Queje vienne, -iu viennea, -U vienne, -naue venUme^ -wua eenteR, -He HemmetUt
That I may come, that thou, eta, that he, etc, that we, eta, that you, eta, that they, eta
Queje Uenne, -tutietmea^ -UUenne, -none tenione, -voueUtiieB^ •Oftfefmen^
That I may hold, that thou, eta, that he, eta, that we, eta, that you, eta, that they, eta
Queje prenne, -tuprennee, Mprenne, -nouapreniotUf-wnupremdee^Mepremmemi,
ThatlmayUke, that thou, eta, that he, eta, that we, eta, that yon, eta, that they, eta
Quefaequiiret que tu aequierea, ete.^ que noua ticquiriana, que voua aequMm^ ete..
That I may acquire, that thou, eta, that we may acquire, that you may acquire^ etei
8L Besides the above, the irregnUr subjunctives, previously given, are these :
SB 4 M« 4 MB S9 SO M un SB MS SO U M M»
dolve, de-vion«, de-vlee, dolven/, bolvd, bu-vlont, bu-vlee, boi veni, menre, mon-xlona
" ?;• " .. "■ ♦ «' * • M» M» 4 « 4 « M»
nion-rle% i>umr«"<» V*ia»** '^"®°*» '^••n*^ Tienneni, tienne^ te-non«, te-nei^ tlemMni;
preni»#, pre-nion«, pre-nies^ prennent
THE EIQHTY-NINTH LESSON.
803
DTF. SVBJ.
Aller, ailU, Leason 88.
Avoir, ais, *^ 82,
fitRS mU, " 82.
HIT. BUBJ.
Falre, /bM«, LeaBon 81
Fallolr, yb<0e, » 87.
PoaTolr, pui8$e, ** 83.
nrr. sirv.
Yaloir, vaiUtf,* Lesson 8&
^oalolr, ««uiaa, ** 8&
and their eompoonds.*
I wish jon to drink thiB.
He is afraid that I owe mach.
I fear that thou mayest die soon.
It is necessary for him to come.
Do you wish us to hold the horses ?
Do yon think that they uke your fruit ?
I wish you to acquire riches.
A master-work. Without, out of it.
Prudent. Formerly,
Such, Such a fact
An cbetaeU. A wedding.
The Britons. The OauU,
A professor.
An Irishman, His arrival.
To injurs. Injured.
That aifiur has injured his reputation.
To subdue. The end
Sad, vexing, I believe so.
4. In snch ezpreflsions as I think «o, / heHsve not, etc, meaning, / think thai it is so, 1
hstievs that it is not «&, etc, the out, the si, and the non, mnst be preceded by que in French.
I believe not. I think so. Je crois que non, Je pense que ouiy or n.
Tou had better, Vousferez bien, vous feres mieux,
& JfZewB is thos used with the fUtnre otJMre when comparison Is expressed; bien,
when it is not. Fairs Iden tskes ds before the inflnltiTo.
Tou had better
Je ddsire que tous huviez ceci.
II a peur que je ne doive beaucoup.
Je crains que tu ne meures bientdt.
II faut qu'il vienne.
Voulez-vous quo nous tenions les chc-
yaux?
Fensez-vous quails />ren9ien< votre fruit ?
Je desire que tous acqutries des rich-
esses.
Un ehef-d^oeuvre. Dehors.
Prudent, Autrefois,
Tel, Un tel fait
Un obstacle. Une noee.
Les Bretons, Les Gatdois.
Un professeur.
Un irlandais. Son arrivee,
Nuire (d bef. n.). Nui (past part).
Get affaire a nui li sa reputation.
Soumettre (comp. of mettre), L&Jin,
Fdeheux. Je crois gtte oui, or si.
study French than
Spanish.
Now you had better pUy.
Such an a£Bur.
Let us go to meet our friends.
Perhaps your brother will come soon. '
Yoxiaferez fnieux\ d^^tudier le fran^ais
que Tespagnol.
A present vous/er«» bien f de jouer.
Une telle ai&ire.
Allons au-devant (& la rencontre) de
nos amis.
Peut4tre voire frire vicndra bientdt.
Feut-4tre que votre frdre viendra bien-
tot
Peut4tre votre frdre viendra-t-il bien-
tot
^ Pripaloir^ a eomnonnd of wUoir. makes the snbjnnctire private, renilar.
t In the former of tnese sentences there is comparison between the study of French and
Bpaaish, and mieum is nsed; in the latter there is no comparison, and bien is used.
f 4 10 tt S IT » • IS I u w • " ? ,■ j't
che/^'oBUvrSt do-hort, pm-dent sntrs-tols, tel, ob-stacls, noc«, pTO-fe*«enr, ir-lan-dai^
1 19 9 ntB BIS U 5 3 • 14
ai^ri-v6e, nn-lrsi, nnl, son-mettre, flk-chens, fin.
304 THE EIGHTT-XINTH LESSON. .
1. J'admire beaucoup ce tableau ; c'est nn chef-d*oeuTie. 2. Les
hommes n'etaient-ils pas bien forts autrefois t 3. Es n'etaient pas
plus forts autrefois qu'aujourd'huL 4. Get homme a garde un si-
lence prudent. 5. C'est une action bien prudente. 6. J'irai a la
noce ce soir. 7. Est-il n^cessaire de rester ici longtemps t 8. II
est n^cessaire d'y rester jusqu'^ la fin du mois. 9. Get accident est
bien f&cheuz. 10. Le professeur a beaucoup de courage ; il a Tain-
cu tous les obstacles. 11. Votre professeur est-il arrive f 12. Qui,
et son arrivoe m'a fait grand plaisir. 13. Est-il allemand ? 14.
Non, c'est un irlandais qui a un bonne reputation. 15. Est-il alle
dehors? 16. Qui, il vient de sortir. 17. Gcsar conquit I'Espagne
et la Gaule, soumit I'^gypte et vainquit Pompee. 18. Dis-tu que
je regoive ton argent? 19. Je ne dis pas que tu le resolves.
1. Do you believe that I owe you money? 2. I do not believe
that you owe me much. 3. Do you think that the merchants re-
ceive our letters ? 4. I do not think that they receive them. 5.
Is the doctor afraid that we may die ? 6. He is afraid that you
may die. 7. Does the physician permit you to drink coffee? 8,
He permits me to drink coffee and tea. 9. It is time for the master
to come ; do you believe that he is coming ? 10. I do not believe
that he is coming before ten o'clock. 11. Do you wish us to hold
your books ? 12. I wish you to hold my books and my papers. 13.
Do you wish me to take your horse? 14. I do not wish you to take
him ; I wish the boy to take him. 15. Do you say that the doctor
acquires reputation ? 16. I say that he acquires mucL
17. Is the professor a prudent man ? 18. He is very prudent.
19. Gaesar conquered the Gauls and subdued the Britons. 20. Do
such affairs astonish you? 21. Such affairs do not astonish me.
22. Does the servant put the horse in the stable, or does he leave
him out ? 23. He leaves him out. 24. Were men stronger for-
merly than at present ? 25. My friend thinks so ; but I {moi^ je)
think not. 26. Your sister will not go to the wedding ; will she t
27. I think sa 28. Do yon admire my father's new work? 29.
Yes, sir ; it is a master-piece. 30. Had I better buy that horse ?
31. You had better buy him. 32. My brother wishes to study Ital-
ian ; had he not better study German ? 33. He had better study
German. 34. The royal palace (palait royal) is magnificent; it
is a master-piece.
THE NINETIETH LESSON. 305
OPnOKAL EXEBCISES.
1. Wni yon pay the countryman for his horse at the end of the
week ? 2. No, I shall pay him for it at the end of the month. 3.
Is there a wedding at your neighbor's this evening t 4. I think so.
5. Has not the physician injured his reputation t 6. He has in-
jured it much. 7. Have you heard the news f 8. Yes, sir ; it is
very sad. 9. Are you waiting for your brother to come 1 10. I am
waiting for my brother and sister to come. 11. Do you consent that
I take these books ? 12. I consent that you take them. 13. Are
yon afraid that we may drink too much wine? 14. I am not
afiraid that you may drink too much ; but I am afraid that the son
of our neighbor may drink too much. 15. Are you afraid that that
sick man may die ? 16. I am afraid that he may die soon.
17. Do you approve of my learning German t 18. Yes ; I will
have thee learn German and Spanish. 19. Is it necessary that I
bold these horses? 20. No; I will have the servant hold them. 21.
Do yon know any one who receives more letters than I ? 22. I do
not believe that you receive so many as our neighbor. 23. Does
the master approve of my coming here at nine o'clock ? 24. Yes ;
but he likes better that you come at eight. 25. An Irishman went
to see a professor of music, and asked him what was the price of
his lessons. 26. The professor replied : *' Six dollars for the first
month, and three for the second." 27. " Then," said the Irish-
man, ^^ I will come the second month."
90-— QUATRE-VINGT.DIXHJME LEgON.
PEONOMINAL VERBS.
1. PBOHOimrAL TxsBfl are thoee which hare a pronoan for object, of the same person
as the anbject They are either r^/UcUva or reciprocal; as, I warm mytelf, he toarms
him§el/^ theyJlaUcr each other. These yerbe are much more namerons in French than in
Eagllah, and require the especial attention of the learner. And first,
I. — ^Yerbs which are reflective or reciprocal in English are the same in French.
IHftuelf, herself^ itself^ one's selfj theirU' Se^ before the verb. {8e becomes «*
selves, before a Towel or a silent k,)
To uHuh one's self. To hurt on^a self, 8e laver. Se fairs maL
To shave. To shave onc^s selfL Riuer, Se raser.
To warm. To warm one's self. Chauffer, Se chauffer.
To flatter each other. Se flatter.
To dress. To dress one's self. Habiller, S'habiller.
To undress. To undress one's Beit Deshabiller, Se d^shabiller.
To behave^ to behave one's self Se comporter^ se condtUre,
To behave well To behave badly. Se bien comporter. Se mal comporter.
IS 17 • ins s 1 u s n IS e n «is
ra-zer, chat^-fer, ha-bil-ler, dea-Aa-bil-ler, com-por-ter, eon-dolre.
806
THE MINETISTH LESSON.
Dost thou ahaye thyself? I shave 2%rasee-ta? Je me rase.
myself.
Does he shave himself? He shaves J&rase-t-il? 11 «e rase.
himseUl
Do you shave yourselves? We shave Vaus rasez-vous? Nous nout
ourselves.
Do they shave themselves? They iSe raaent-ils ? DsMrasent.
shave themselves.
2. The pronoun in Italics ia the object of the verb.
Do you flatter yourselves (or each FcnM flattez-vous ?
other)?
We do not flatter ourselves (or each Nous ne notu flattons paa.
» other).
Do they not flatter each other?
They flatter each other.
Do I not shave myself?
Thou dost not shave thyselfl
Did you shave yourself? I shaved
myselfl
Wilt thou not shave thyself?
I shall not shave myself.
Do you permit us to warm ourselves ?
I permit you to warm yourselves.
I am under many obligations to you.
To lower J east down. To raUe.
To blush, become red. To reduce.
To construct. A voice.
An amusement. Dancing.
A vaii. Infinitely.
Light. The guard.
Ne se flattent-ils pas?
lis se flattent
Ne me ras6-je pas ? or, £st-oe que je
ne me rase pas ?
Tu ne te rase pas.
Vous rasiez-vous ? ' Je am raniflL
Ne te raseras-tu pas?
Je ne me raserai pas.
Permettez-vous que nous nous chauf-
fions?
Je permets que vous vous chauffies.
Je vous ai beaucoup d^obligataons.
Baisser. Lever,
Rcfugir. Reduire (d bef. inf.).
Construire. Une voix,
tin amusement. La danse,
Un voile. Infiniment.
Leger. La garde.
S. Prendre garde, to beware ot, takes d before a noun and de before the InflnltiveL
Beware of that man.
Beware of him.
It is necessary to guard against robbers.
Take care not to fall.
Beware of losing your money.
Prends garde k cet homme.
Prends garde & lul
n faut prendre garde aux voleurs.
Prenez garde de tomber.
Prenez garde de perdro votre argent.
4 Autre and autremeni, like comparatives of enperiorlty or Inferiority, when not ]|fig«
ative, take ns before the following verb.
She is quite different from what she was. Elle est tout autre qu^elle n^^tait.
He thinks quite otherwise than you II pense tout autrement que vous ne
believe. croyez.
bal«-eer, le-ver, roa-gir, r^-daire, oon-etroire, voifls^ a-moM-menC, danse, to11«i ia-fl*Bl*
meai; 1^-ger, garde.
THE NINETIETH LESSON. 307
1. Frenez garde k cet homme ; il pent rons nnire dans vos af-
fiures. 2. La semaine demidre quand cette dame etait en danger,
la d6fendite8-vous f 3. Je la d^fendis. 4. Pourquoi ce petit gar-
gon baisse-t-il les yeux I 5. II les baisse parce qu'H a honte, mais
il les leve quand on Ini parle. 6. Cette jeune fille rougit-elle sou-
Tent? 7. Elle rougit lorsqu'on lui parle. 8. Le ma^on construit-il
one maiflon de brique ? 9. Non, il en construit une de pierre. 10.
Aimeat^Yous la danse t 11. Oui, c'est un amusement tres-agr^able.
12. tPentends nne voix qui m'appelle. 18. Cette dame l6ve son
▼oile parce qu'elle veut parler k son amie ; c'est une femme infini-
ment aimable. 14. Let barbier vous rase-t-il ? 15. II me rase qua- '
tre foia par semaine. 16. Ce bois-ci est-il plus I6ger que Teau t 17.
H est un pen plus leger. 18. J'ai reduit le nombre de mes domes-
tiques. 19. Ne te comportes-tu pas bien 1 20. Je me condnis bien.
21. Ce petit garden se comporte-t-il bien ? 22. II se conduit maL
23. Ke Yous rasez-vous pas ? 24. Nous nous rasons tons les ma-
tins. 25. Les enfants se cbauffent-ils ? 26. lis se chauffent. 27.
Cet enfant s'habille-t-il ? 28. II s'habille et il se desbabille tous
les jours. 29. Ne yous rasiez-Yous pas quand yous ^tiez k la cam-
pagne? 30. Je me rasais tous les matins. 31. Ne yous chauffe-
rez-Yons pas quand yous arriYerez chez yous t 32. Je ne me chauf-
fend pas ; je n'ai pas froid.
1. Why does that young girl cast down her eyes t 2. She casts
them down because they are looking at her. 3.* Why does she
raise her Yail ? 4. 8he raises it because she wishes to speak to the
merchant. 5. Does she always blush when one speaks to hert
6. She often blushes when one speaks to her. 7. After having
(apres avoir) lost my fortune, I reduced my expenses. 8. Did you
reduce the number of your servants ? 9. I reduced it one-half {de
moilie). 10. Did those workmen construct your house ? 11. They
constructed it. 12. Did you have it constructed last autumn ? 13.
Noy sir, I had it constructed last summer. 14. The dog hears the
voice of his master, 15. Do the mountains defend your house from
the wind ? 16. They defend it from the wind and from the cold.
17. Why dost thou warm thyself! 18. I warm myself because
lam cold. 19. Do you not warm yourselves! 20. We do not
warm ourselves ; it is not cold. 21. Do those travelers warm them-
selves ! 22. They do not warm themselves. 23. Dost thou shave
308 THE NINETTFIR8T LESSON.
myself, or does the barber shave theet 24. I share myself every
morning. 25. Does the servant dress those children, or do they
dress themselves {eux-m^mes) ? 26. They dress themselves evety
morning, and undress themselves every night. 27. That sick man
cannot undress himself. 28. Do you behave well? 29. Yes, sir,
we always behave well. 30. Does that child always behave well!
31. No, sir, he sometimes behaves very badly. 32. Did yon not
shave yourself when yon were in the country? 33. Yes, I alw«
shaved myself. 34. Will you dress yourself early to-morrow moTi
ing ? 35. I shall dress myself at six o'clock.
OPTIONAL EXERCISES.
1. Did not your cousin behave w^ell when he went to school!
2. He did not behave weU. 3. Did you not shave early when yoa
were in the country ? 4. I always shaved early. 5. Do you dress
yourselves several times a day (par jour) I 6. No, sir, we dress
but once a day. 7. What I desire is to fulfill my obligations. 8*
What kings often like the best is flattery (la flaiterie). 9. The mu-
sic which I like the best is to hear the singing of the birds. 10.
Will not that child hurt himself? 11. I fear that he may hurt
himself. 12. Music is for me an amusement and not an occupa-
tion (occupation). 13. Do you not hear the voice of some one !
14. Yes, it is the voice of Charles who is calling us. 15. This wood
is lighter than water. 16. Dancing fatigues me ; I do not like it
much.
17. I come for my handkerchief which I left here. 18. It is in
the other room,*on the table. 19. Are you going to the wedding
this evening? 20. Yes, I am going there. 21. At what o'clock
is the ceremony to take place ? 22. At half past eight. 23. Is
there to be much (grande) company? 24. No, there will not be
many people (there). 25. Will you return early or late this even-
ing? 26. I do not know; but may be I shall not return before
midnight. 27. Is there to be a ball ? 28. I believe not ; but there
will be a wedding supper (un soitper de noce), 29. You will not
stay until the end ; will you? 30. I think so, if it be not too late.
31. Glood morning ; I am going out. 32. 1 wish you much pleasure
till we see each other again (au revoir).
91.— QUATREVINGT-ONZIfiME LEgON.
PBONOMINAL VERBS CONTINUED.
Wo love each other. Nona noos aimons.
Thoy praise each other. Ik se lonent Tun Tautro.
THE NIXETT-FIBST LESSON.
809
They Bpeak against each other. Us parlent Pun contre Taatre.
He begijQB to studj. H se met 4 6tudier.
1. S6 mtttre followed by d And an InflnltiTe may meaa to besln.
They began to drink. lis se mirent h, boirc.
Every body began to laugh. Toat le monde se mit & rire
IL — ^Verbs are pronominnl In French, thoagh not in English, which express one^s doing
aomething to any part of himaeiC The refleetlTe pronoun is always placed before other
obJectlTe pronoona.
Do8l thon wash thy hands ?
I wash them.
He washes his hands.
Do you wash your hands ?
We do not wash them.
Do they not wash their faces t •
They wash them.
Does that young girl warm her feet?
Does she not warm them f
She does not warm them.
Do they not bum their feet f
They do not burn them. •
7b rub. To pardon.
Te layes-tu les mains?
Je me les layc.
II se lave les mains.
Tons lavez-vous les mains?
Kous ne nous les lavons pas.
Ke se lavent-lls pas le visage ?
lis se le lavent.
Cette jeune fiUe se chaufTe-t-etle lee
pieds?
Ne se les chauffe-t-elle pas ?
Elle ne se les chauffe pas.
Ne se briilent-ils pas les pieds ?
lis ne se les brdlent pas.
Frotter, Pardonner.
2. PardowMT takes d before a person and d6 before an infinitive.
Do you pardon that man^s faults ?
I pardon them.
He prevents my doing that.
& We have seen that empieher^ craindre^ avoir peur^ trembler, and apprehtnder, take
ns before the following snbjonctive.
Pardonnez-vous k cet homme sea
fautes?
Je les lui pardonne.
n m^emp^che de faire cela.
We prevent that child from doing
what he pleases.
He trembles lest thou tcU his secret.
I apprehend his telling it.
I hurt my eyes when I rub them.
I hurt them when I rub them.
UieleM, The truth.
A member, limb. The leg,
A mong. The frofit door.
Behind. The back door.
Itiaa pity. It is a great pity.
Noble. Friendship.
Nous emp6ehons quo cet enfant ne
fasse ce quUl veut.
II tremble que tu ne dises son secret.
Tapprehende quUl ne le diee.
Je me fais mal aux yeuz quand je me
les frotte.
Je m^y fais mal quand Je les frotte. •
Inutile. La viriie.
Le membre. Ltijambe.
Farmi. La porte de devant.
Derriere, La porte de derriere.
H ett {cUet) dommage. H eet {e^est)
grand dommage.
Noble. Vamitie.
« 1 IS • i« ssn s u • t t 1 >^ .^ ^?7 J* *
fWi^ter, par-don-nei*, i-nu-til, v6-rl-ti, membre, Jambe, par-ml, der-rl6re, dom-moij*,
M 1 J9 US
ttobl«^ a-ml-ti^.
810 THE KINETT-FIBST LESSON.
Othertoi9e. An obliffaHon, AuiremenL Uiie chligaHon,
In the mean time, CependanL En aUendant.
However^ nevertheless, Cependant, Pourtant. NSanmoinM,
ffowfarf Flattery. JuBqu'oikf La/atterie.
Among them. Behind him. Parmi euz. Derri^re lui.
Before the door. Behind the door. Devant la porte. Berri^re la porte.
4 Wo have seen (Lmsoii 68) that wordB denoting qnantity generallj take ds wlthoot
the article before a following noon. La plurpart, however, like bie»^ takca de with the ar-
ticle ; and the verbs, participleSf and a4jectives following la plupari do not agree with it,
bat with the noan which it limits; thoa,
Most men love flattery. La plapart des hommes aiment la fiat-
terie.
Most women are not beantifuL La plupart des femmes ne eomi pas heUes.
The greatest part are amiable. La plupart eont aimablee.
1. De qaoi ces jeunes filles se couTrent-ellea le visage t 2. EUes
Be le couvrent de voiles. 8. De quoi coavrent-elles leurs livres ? 4.
EUes les couvrent de papier. 5. Ponrquoi ce gargon se frotte-t-il
les mains ? 6. II se le frotte pour se les rechauffer. 7« Pardonnei-
voos ^ cet homme de vous avoir offens^ ? 8. Je le Ini pardonne.
9. Ne vous faites-vous pas mal aux yeux quand vous vous les frot-
tezt 10. Je ne m'y fais pas mal. 11. Appr^hendez-vous que
voire ami ne soit malade ? 12. Oui, je tremble qu'il ne meure.
13. II 7 a beaucoup de cboses inutiles dans cette maison. 14. Ce
malade n'a-t-il pas mal h, la jambe ? 15. Si, tous les membres lui
font mal. 16. Fennez la porte de devant et la porte de deniere.
17. Aimez-vous la v6rite ? 18. Oui, tout le monde aime la v^rit^.
19. Cet homme n'est-il pas de famille noble t 20. II est noble de
p&re et de m^re. 21. Cet homme a promis de me rendre des ser-
vices ; cependant, il en ^ fait tout autrement, il ne remplit pas ses
obligations. 22. Ces hommes vivent dans une grande amitie. 23.
Jusqu'oii allez-vous 1 24. Je vais jusqu'il la riviere.
1. Do you begin to study early every day? 2. I begin to study
at five every morning. 3. Does that negligent boy {petit negligent)
bum his shoes \vhen he warms his feet ? 4. He bums his shoes
and he bums his feet also. 5. Has the master pardoned that lazy
scholar! 6. He has pardoned him. 7. Do those children wash
their hands ? 8. They wash their hands and their faces. 9. Do
you warm your feet ? 10. I warm my feet and my hands. 11. Do
17 1 U 11 1 1391 4SBltS US SMS) t V%
aatr#-menl, ob-li-ga-tioOf ce-p<;n-diinC, a^ten-danl^ poar^tant, iie-«a-inoln8» fl«tft-ri«L
THE NINETY-nSST LESSON. 311
yoa bom yonr hands when jou warm them? 12. I do not bnm
them. 13. Do you hurt your eyes when you wash your facet 14.
I do ndt'^urt theuL^ ' 15. Does not that learned man love the truth f
16. He loves the truth, and defends it with more courage than yoa
think. 17. Do your limbs pain you t 18. Yes, all my limbs pain
me.
19. Is the surgeon going to cut off that man's arm? 20. No,
he is going to cut off his left leg. 21. Do you find my pen among
yonr books ? 22. I find it among my papers. 23. Are you going
to shut the front door or the back door ? 24. I am going to shut
neither the front door nor the back door ; I am going to shut the
window. 25. Is that man your Mend ? 26. Yes, he renders me
much service from friendship. 27. Does your neighbor fulfill his
obligations? 28. He fulfills all his obligations. 29. That man
promised to be my friend ; nevertheless he has done quite other-
wise. 30. Bum those papers ; they are useless. 31. That scholar
has wit, but he does not study ; it is a pity. 32. Why do you rub
your hands ? 33. I rub them in order to warm them. 34. Those
children are washing their faces.
OPTIONAL EXERCISES.
1. I come to ask you a question. 2. What one ? 3. It is to
tell me where the tailor lives who makes your clothes (habits). 4.
If you wish, I will take you to his shop {sa boutique). 5. I accept ;
yoa do me a service. 6. Do you wish to change your tailor ? 7.
Yes ; the last clothes that mine made for me, were very badly sewed,
and I have need of a coat and waistcoat for the ball which they are
to give next Wednesday. 8. The royal palace is superb ; it is a
master-work. 9. Have you not injured that man ? 10. I think
not; I have not intended (had the intention) to injure him. 11.
That physician is able, and nevertheless he has made a great mis-
take. 12. He is still very young, and nevertheless he is very wise.
13. We will go to my tailor's this afternoon, if you wish ; he
does good work, but he is a little dear. 14. That is (/at/) noth-
ing; I do not look at (d) a few franks (francs) more or less if the
work is well done. 15. You are right ; those who work too cheap
often do only very bad work. 16. How long has that house
been burned? 17. It burned last Saturday. 18. It has been
burned then seven days to-day, and I knew nothing of it 19. Your
brother and I (nous) went to the fire the evening that it burned.
20. It was unknown to me. 21. Were you not in the country at
your uncle's that evening ? 22. It is true ; I had forgotten it ; it
is for that reason (pour ceh) that I knew nothing of it. 23. They
812 THE NINETY-SfiCOND LESSON.
broke many tilings ; some (les nns) carried (emportaient) the car-
pets oat of (par) the door, and others threw the looking-glasses oat
of the window. 24. It is always thus (comme cela) that they do
when there is a {un incendie) fire ; they break abnost every tiling
(tout). 25. It is better to let all burn.
92.— QUATRE-VINGT-DOUZlilME LEgON.
PEONOMINAL VEEB8 CONTmUJO).
IIL^-Pronomliua rerbs arc need In French olso, when the Bobjeet of a genenl ehane-
ter, as people^ one^ ihty^ «e«, is omitted In TTwgnah^ and ita place supplied by the object Ib
snch cases the verb is often passivo in English.
Cotton sells well. Le coton te vend bien.
Glass breaks easily. Le verre se casie facilenient.
Stone does not cut easily. La pierre ne se coupe pas facilement.
Dry wood burns fast.* La bols sec se brulc Tite.*
Meat is sometimes eaten raw. La viande le mange quelqnefois erne.
These books are easily understood. Ces livres »e eomprennent facilement
This writing can be read. Cette Venture peut se lire.
That river is named the Moselle. Cette riviere se nomme la MoseOe.
lY.— Some verbs are pronominal in French, for which no general mle can be girea.
but which are to be learned by obseryatlon and practice ; as,
To take possesion. To abstain, S^emparer. S*abstenir (comp. of
tenir).
To repent. To remember, 8e repentir, 8e rappder, $e iowenir
(comp. of venir),
1. These verbs, except $e rapptler, take de before the infinitive. Se repentir is raried
as eortir (Lesson 29).
Dost thou abstain from wine ? Tabstiens-tu de Tin?
I do not abstain from it Je ne m^en absticns pas.
We repent of our conduct. Nous nous repentons de notro ooDdoita
He takes possession of the papers. II s^empare des papiers.
2. /S0sot»ven<r takes (f« before its object; •« raj>pe2sr does not
^ . ^ (you6 80uvenez*vous<29 vos promoeses?
Do you remember your promises i | y^^ rappelez-vous tos promesscs:
„, ... < lis se souviennent des leurs.
They remember their.. j j^ ^^ rappeUent lea kurs.
8. Verbs which are always pronominal, that is, which are never oaed withoat the n-
flective pronoun, are called essxntiallt FROiioinicAL txsbs ; and those which are ased
sometimes with and sometimes without it, are called accidxstallt peoxom xhal vsbbs.
* These phrases aT« expressed with a general snbtoct, thus : They eeU cotton %mU; 0»*
breaks gkue eaMy ; Ws do not out ston^ eaeUy ; People bum dry wood/aeL
t \ 9 \ 4 IS 4 a IS 1 6 18
em-pa-rer. abs-te^nlr, re-pen-tir, rap7>«*Ior, srmve-nir.
THE NINETY-SECOND LESSON. 313
The abore, eseept rapp^Ur^ are of the fonner class. Those preTfooely gf ren ore of the
ULter.
4. All pronomliml verbs take tire for their aaxUlary, the participle sgreelng with the
direct object, when that object prooede^ the same as in verbs which toko avoir for tbeir
auxiliary.*
I have warmed myself. Je me suit chavffBy or chauffie.
Has he warmed himself? S'etiW chauffe f
She had dressed herself. Elle ^^Haii fiabiliee.
We shall have sbaYcd. Nous dous serona rase*.
Yesterday, as Boon as yoa had shaved, Hier dSs que vous tous futes rasSs,
you went out. voas sortite?.
They have washed themselves. lis se sont laves,
5. When, besides the reflective pronoan, the verb has a second object, the participle
agrees with it, according to rale. Lesson 87, provided it can be the direct object,t otherwise
It agrees with the reflective pronoan.
He has warmed his hands. II s'est chauffi Ics mains.
He has warmed them. II se Ics est chauffees.
Hast thou not burnt thy hand ? Ne t^cs-tu pas bruli la main ?
I have not burnt it. Jc nc me la suis pas hrdiee.
She has remembered her lessons. Elle s^est souvewte de scs leQons.
She has remembered them. Elle s^en est souvenuc^
They had repented of their conduct. Elles s'etaient repentics do leur con-
duitc.
A worm. To enjoy. tin ver, Jouir {de bef. noun).
To gnaw. To gnaw a hone, Ronger, Ronger un os,
Earlg in the morning, De bon mcUin, de grand matin.
He enjoys good health. II jouit d'unc bonne santo.
Worms gnaw wood. Les vers rongent le bois.
1. Get onvrage se finit sans peine. 2. Ce verre-ci se casse-t-il
anssi fiacilement que celui-la ? 3. Celoi-ci so casse plus facilement
que celui-1^. 4. La pluie nous empechera dialler au spectacle ce
Boir« 5. Les enfants se sont-ils Iav6 la figure ? 6. II se la sont
laree. 7. Vous etiez-Tous rase ce matin quand vous etes alle &
la boutique 1 8. Je m'ctais ras6. 9. Gonnaissez-vous la famille de
monsieur C. ? 10. Qui, je viens de passer quelques jours dans sa
famille. 11. Vous abstenez-vous de the? 12. Je m'abstiens de
• This is acoordtns to the general rule for the agreement of participles, tire being used
idiomatically for avoir.
t Verbs which take a preposition before the follotring noon govern the indirect objeet,
those that take no preijobition before it govern the direct object Thus wo say : Jl nuii d
tonroUin; n«<r« governs the indirect object // AtibiUs I'en^fant; habUU governs the
direct object The reflective pronoun is always tho direct object of all essentially pronominal
Verbs, except iarroger., to arrogate.
X In the first four o:'the above phrases, the second object of tbo verb is tho direct ane,
and ehayifft, hrvU^ are not varied vehen the object ftdlowa, but agree when it precedes. In
the la^t three, the second object beinj; preceded by c/<«. Is not the direct object, and the
participle therefore agrees with the reciprocal pronoun which precedes.
14
r IS la si « 17 '6
▼er, jou-lr, ron-ger, 6« and oe.
814 THE NINETT^ECOND LESSON.
th6 et de caf6. 13. Cet homme 8*est repenti de ses &nte8. 14.
Voos sonvenez de notre lecture ? 15. Je m'en souviens bien.
1. Does coal sell dear this winter? 2. No; coal sells cheap,
and wood sells cheap also. 3. This bread is not good; bat it can
be eaten. 4. Who has taken possession of that hoose ? 5. The
merchant has taken possession of it. 6. Does that writing read
easily? 7. It reads very easily. 8. Pine {pin) wood cuts easier
than oak. 9. For £bw much does grain sell this winter ? 10. It
sells cheap. 11. Does flour sell at five dollars a barrel? 12. It
sells at six dollars a barrel 13. Is fish sometimes eaten raw? 14.
They are eaten raw in some countries. 15. Is the Spanish lan-
guage learned in a little time? 16. It is not learned perfectly in
a little time.
17. Is not this wood subject to worms? 18. It is not subject
to worms. 19. That man enjoys ((Tune) perfect health. 20. Our
neighbor knows (how) to enjoy his fortune. 21. Are you acquaint-
ed ^th his family ? 22. Yes ; it is a family very amiable. 23.
Do you go out early in the morning ? 24. I go out at five o'clock.
25. What is that dog gnawing? 26. He is gnawing a bone. 27.
How long have you abstained from wine ? 28. I have abstained
from it six months. 29. Have you not hurt your foot ? 30. I have
hurt it. 31. Will you have shaved when I shall come to your hoose
to-morrow morning? 32. I shall have shaved. 33. Yesterday,
as soon as you had dressed, did you not go to the shop ? 34. I
went there. 35. Did you wash your £ace before shavings this morn-
ing ? 36. No, sir ; I shaved before washing my face.
OPTIONAL EXERCISES.
1. Do you sometimes go to the theater? 2. I go there occa-
sionally. 3. I have a desire to go there this evening ; what say
you ? shall we go together ? 4. I consent to go there, for I have
nothing to do. 5. What do they play this evening? 6. I do not
know what they play ; I wish to go there in order to hear Madam
S. sing. 7. Have you never heard her sing? 8. No, never; she
has a great reputation. 9. When I dwelt in New Orleans I went
often to hear her. 10. How do you find that she sings ? 11. Very
well ; she has an excellent voice, and she sings with much taste.
12. We have no opera here ; it is a pity ; of all amusements, the
opera is the one to which I am most inclined (parte). 13. Do you
not like dancing ? 14. Not at all ; I see nothing in it to adnure.
THE NINETT-THIBD LESSON. 816
15. You mean {voulez dire) the dancing of the theater? 16. Cer-
tainly {sans doute) ; I like the ball well enoagh.
17. Have you taken possession of the new house? 18. Yes ; I
took possession of it last. week. 19. Has that man repented of his
bad conduct (conduite) ? 20. He has repented of it 21. Did your
friend remember his promise (promesse) ? 22. He remember^ it.
23. Does your father enjoy good health ? 24. He enjoys perfect
health. 25. The tailor goes to his shop early in the morning ; does
he not ? 26. He goes there at half-past five. 27. 1 always shave
early in the morning.
93.— QUATRE-VINGT-TREIZIfiME LEgON.
PRONOMINAL VEBBS. CONDITIONAL TENSE.
To sit down, to seat one's self. S^asseoir (irregular).
Js fn^avUdA, tu CastUd^ U tCasiied, nous nous asseyons^ tons tons asstiyeB,
I sit down, thoa Blttest down, he sits down, we sit down, ' yon sit down,
ilss'asseysntf thej sit down.
Also Je nCassoUt tu Cassois, U s'assoiif nous nous assoyons, vans rous assoyts^ Us
s'assoient.
L As the Imperstlye mood when afflrmative takes the objectire pronoun after It, joined
by a hyphen, it takes the reflectiTe pronoun in the same way.
&t down iQ this chair. Asseyez-vous but cette chaise.
Sit down in it Asseyez-vous-y.
Let us sit down. Seat thyself here. Asseyons-nous. Assieds-toi ici.
Do not sit down on the bench. Ne tous asseyez pas but le bAc.
Seat thyself on it. Assieds-y-tci.
Let ns not sit down on these chairs. Ke nous asseyons pas sur ces chaisee.
Wash your hands. Wash them. Larez-vous les mains. Lavez-Ies-Tous.
Remember thy promises. Souviens-toi de tes promesses.
Remember them. Souriens-t^en.
He has sat down, and I will sit down. II s'est assis, et je m^assiSrai.
I hare been here these two years. Je suis ici depuis deux ans.
We have known him these six months. Nous le connaissons depuis six mois.
To he or do (in regard to health). Se porter.
How do you do f Commeni^ous portez-vous f
I am very well. Je me porte trte-bien.
How does your father do f ^ Comment se porte TOtre pire ?
He is well. II se porto bien.
Is your mother well? Votre mfere se porte-t-elle bien?
She has taken a slight cold. Elle s^est un peu enrhum6e.
How do your mother and sisters do ? Comment sc portent votre m^ro et
vos soBurs ?
1 ns 1 snn i s isfl i su
ws-A%ds^ as-se-yon«, ss-se-yesi, st-seyent
816 THE NINETY-THIRD LESSON.
CONDITIONAL.
L Tm coKDinoxAL nasKn oorresponds to thovid or fccnid wlUi the Teri> fa Ebs^
llsh. It is Tery oommonly piveeded or followed by if with a Terb in tb« imperfrct Veum\
thuB, ^Jhisdmontyt I wovld travel, SifavaU d€ rarffetU^je totagkeais ; or, / would
travel if I had montff, Jt totaoebais Hfavait de TargenL
S. The present oooditionol is formed by chafiging ai fins), of the first person rfngnii' «f
the ftatnre, into ab, au» ait, xoks, iez, aixnt.
Conditional of etRT^ future serai.
Je uraU^ tu teraU, 41 Mrait, nou» urionM, rous Mritn, Ct aeraUnt^
I should be, thoa wooldst be, he woold be, wo should be, yoa wonld be, thcj would bci
Conditional of atoir, future aurai.
jr^auraUf tuauraUt Uaurait, nAU9auri4me, TcmeauHm^
I should hATe, thou wouldst have, he would hnre, we should liAve, yoa would hsT»
iU auraUnt, they would hAve.
Conditional of aimer, future aimerai.
J^aimeraUt tuaimsraUf ilaimerait^ nouM oimeHotu, rouealmsrtm,
I should love, thou wouldst lore, he would lore, we should love, you would lore^
Ue aimeraitwt^ they would love.
If thou hadst the time wouldst thou 8i tu avaie le temps lirait-iu f
read?
I would read if I had the time. Je liraia ei yavaiM le temps.
Would you drink if you had water? J^otrtez-vous H tous aviez de PcRii?
We would driuk if we had water. Nous boirions n nous aviom de I^eau.
He could if ho would. II pourrait «*il vaulait.
They would if they could. lis voudraient s*i]B pouvaient.
To dye. Since. Telndre^ Puiaque.
Progreae. Great progress. Du and des proves. De grands pro-
8. Sinee, an adverb or preposition of time, la depute ; einee, meaning ^ecauee tktrt^ la
pu4aque.
It has rained einee yesterday morning ; H pleut depuie hier matin ; et puieqme
and aince the weather is so bad, I il fait si maurais temps, Je ne
shall not go out sortirai pas.
4. Teindre takes en before the name of the color.
He dyes his coat black ; I get mine II teint son habit en nair; je iaia tcia-
dyed blue. dre le mien en bUui,
1. Teignez-vous ce drap en vert ? 2. Nous teignons ce drap-ci
en vert et celui-la en bleu. 8. Ges homines teignent lenra gants en
noir. 4. Je veuz bien apprendre Tespagnol, puisqne tous le Tonlec
5. Si tu avals le temps lirais-tu ce livre ? 6. Je le lirais. 7. Si
cet 6colier paresseux ^tndiait, ne ferait-il pas des progrte dans sea
etudes? 8. n y ferait de grands progr^s. 9. Si vous aviez de
I'argent acheteriez-vous cette maison? 10. Nous Tacheterions.
4 r r itu 13C r is r r r u ts s « ts r
ie-rali^ -nii^ -liooi^ -*!«•» -nleni; aa-rata, aime-rali^ telndr«i pula-ke, pn-V^
THE NINETY-THnU) LESSON. 817
11. Si ces homines araient ce drap ne le teindraient-ils pas en vert?
12. Non, madame, il le teindraient en noir. 13. Votre voisin
ctadierait-il mieux s'il avait moins d*argent? 14. 11 ^tudierait
xnieux* 15. Comment se porte monsieur votre fr^re? 16. 11 se
port6 bien.
1. If yon drank all that vine, would yon not be sick? 2. I
should be sick. 3. If thou hadst some paper, wouldst thou write
some letters ? 4. I would write one to my father. 5. K you told
your secret to those men, would they keep it? 6. They would not
keep it. 7. If that lazy scholar studied, would he learn well ? 8.
Yes, sir, he would become very learned. 9. If you had money,
would you not buy a horse ? 10. No, sir ; I should buy a fine house.
11. If thou couldst see the future {ravenir)y wouldst thou be more
happy? 12. No, sir, I should be less happy. 13. If those coun-
try-women had this cloth, would they dye it blue ? 14. No, miss,
they would dye it brown {brun), 15. If you had the time, would
you study languages? 16. I would study the French and the
German.
17. What didst thou do yesterday? 18. Yesterday, after I had
breakfasted, I read ; and after I had dined, I wrote some letters.
19. Where did those strangers go on Sunday? 20. In the morn-
ing, as soon as they had shaved and dressed, they went to church.
21. Are you acquainted with the family of the general ? 22. No,
madam ; I know no member of his family. 23. Do you enjoy good
health ? 24. Yes, madam ; we have enjoyed excellent health since
we have lived in the country. 25. Since your health is so good,
you will soon be able to return to the city. 26. How far will you
go this summer ? 27. I shall go as far as Boston. 28. Sit down
in this chair. 29. Wash thy hands and face. 30. How do your
father and mother do ? 31. They are very well.
OPTIONAL EXERCISES.
1. Is not that gentleman a surgeon ? 2. Yes, he is so ; he
lives opposite to our house ; they say that he is very skillful. 3.
Arc you acquainted with him ? 4. Yes ; last summer we made a
journey together to New York by sea. 5. Has he been here long ?
6. He came here two years ago, but he did not stay long ; he went
to New York, and returned three or four months a^o. 7. When
you were in New York did you see George C. ? 8. Yes, I saw him
almost every day ; he came to find me the first day of my arrival
9. You knew hardly any people in New York? 10. No, I knew
818 THE NINETY-FOUBTH LESSON.
but very few ; but I made some acquaintance while I was there,
11. Do you intend to go there again t 12. I shall go there per*
haps this summer. 18. If you wish, I will give you letters to {pour)
some of my iiiends, of whom you will not be sorry to make the ac-
quaintance. 14. I shall be intinitely obliged to you for it.
15. Did you go to the baker's shop yesterday? 16. YeSy air;
as soon as I had dressed I went there. 17. Have you enjoyed good
health since you have been beret 18. Yes, sir; I always enjoy
good health. 19. The worms have gnawed the door of that shop.
20. If your cousin went to school, would he study much T 21. He
would not study much. 22. Do you often go out early in the morn-
ing t 23. I hardly ever go out very early in the morning. 24. 1
wUl sell you this book since you desire it.
25. An Irishman who had a looking-glass in (d) his hand, fihut
his eyes, and placed (plagait) it before his face. 26. Another
asked him why he did that 27. "My faith," replied he, "it is
to see how I am when I sleep."
94.— QUATRE-VlNGT-QUATORZItME LEgON.
CONDITIONAL CONTINUED.
IL— Sometimes the conditional is used when the condition (the 4/ and Um Impaftei)
may be looked upon ns understood ; as,
I Bhould like to bo wise.* J^aimerais & dtre sage.
He would like to be rich. II aimerait a fttre riche.
We should wish to be good. Nous voudruma hire bons.
They ought to do their duty. lis devraient fairc leur devoir.
1. Can^ used negBtirely, is rery commonly rendered in French by the condltlaiial of
•atoir with ne, and without pa«. With p<u it means not to Imow.
I ean (could) not do that. Je ne aaurau faire cela.
Can (could) you not go that farf iV« tauriez-voiia allcr jnsquc U?
That can not be. Ccla ne saurait 6trc.
We can not endure that. Nous ne sauriona soufirir cela.
I should not know how to do it ; it is Je ne aauraie pae le faire ; c*C8t trap
too difficult for me. difficile pour moL
2. Poutoir, o$er, an.1 eeeaer, also, when negatiyc, often omit pae (espedallj httan the
infinltlyc). With these the omission is elegant, but optional
I cannot do it. Je ne puis (pae) le faire.
She dare not say it. Elle n''o8e (pa*) le dire.
She does not cease to speak. Ellc ne cene (pas) dc parler.
III.— When a past tense or present participle connected with past time, not goreniiag
the subjanctlrc, is followed by a verb having ehould or would with it in Fnglish, sach Tcib
is in tha conditional in French.
* The condition micht be supplied thns, I would lUce to hn wUe^ if I eould, ete.
this form the sentences oecome similar to those ip the preceding lenson.
i« T
sau-rala.
THE NINETY-FOURTH LESSON. 819
I foresaw that thej would do iL Je privayais qa'ils le/eraienL
I believed that he would come. Je croyaia qu't/ viendraiL
He thought that I should believe him. U peruaii que je le croiraU.
We said that you would do it. Nous avons dit que vous le/mez.
They hoped that we should be there. lU ttpiraient que nous atrioru UL
Believing that it would raiu. Crcyant qu'il pUuvrait.
& The oondltioniil of vovMr expreasea « modiflcation of the meaning of the rob often
wrrmpoadiag to tcioA or will in Kngliah.
I wish (would wish) to borrow this Je voudraU emprunter cc livre.
book.
He wishes (would wish) to study Span- II wmdrait dtudier TespagnoL
isb.
Will you go to the theater? Voudriez-voua aller au spectacle f
We wish to go there. Nous voudrions y aller.
4. Cbllectivs or approximate numbers are expressed in French by nouns formed from
tho numeral adjeetires, by making them end in aitie. Bach noans are feminine.
About ten. Twenty (or so). Une dixaine. Une vingtaine.
Thirty (or so). Forty (or so). Une irentaine. Une guarantaine.
Fifty (or so). A hundred (or so). Une cinquantaine, Une eentaine.
01. Douzaine (a dozen) Is a deilnite nnmbcr. Quinzaine is nsed fur two weeks; huit
Joure for one week ; an moin^ for four weeks. Three weeks, five weeks, six weeks, are
intU temaitus, cinq eemainea, etc
I shall pass a fortnight with him. Je passerai une quinzaine chcz lui.
I have been here a week. Je suis ici depuis huit jours.
He owes me some twenty franks. II me doit une vingtaine de francs.
Tj intend to do. To mean^ to signify, Vbtdoir /aire. VotUoir dire.
What does that signify ? Que veut dire cela ?
Thai signifies nothing. Cela nc veut rien dire.
What does that word mean? Que veut dire ce mot?
I do not know what it means. Je nc sais pas ce qu^il veut dire.
Seri&us. To descend, Serieux, Desccndre,
6. De»eendre and sereral other verbs sometimes take avoir and sometimes Ur^ tat
their aoziliary. All these will bo expkined hereafter.
He has descended from the mountain. II est deeeendu de la montagne.
There were some thirty of us at that Nous 6tions une trcntainc k ce diner,
dinner.
1. Combien d'assiettes avez-voas achet^es ? 2. J'en ai acbet6
une donzaine. 3. Je passerai une quinzaine de jours a la cam-
pagne. 4. II y a une cinquantaine d'^coliers dans T^cole. 5. Me
devez-TOUS quelque chose ? 6. Oni, je vous dois une eentaine de
francs. 7. Resterez-vous longtemps i la campagne t 8. J'y pas-
serai trois semaines. 9. Avez-vous quelque chose t 10. J'ai mal &
doa-saind, rlnj- Jine, tnn-tain^ ka-iin-taln«, cin-kan-talne, cen-talna, kln-ialne, •6-rt.
t» ft s t s a
euB, dca-eendre, des<en-do.
826 THE NIKETY-FOXTRTH LESSOK.
la t^te, mais ce n^est rien de serienx. 11. Le maitre descend-il
sonvent de sa chambrc t 12. II en descend souyent. 13. Est-il
descehdu ce matin ? 14. II n'est pas descendu. 15. Voudriez-voiu
apprendre le frangais ? 16. Je voudrais apprendre le fran^ais et
Tallemand. 17. Je pensais qa*il ne pleuvrait pas aajoord'hiii, el
je suis Venn sans paraplaie.
1. Wouldst thou like to travel in Europe ? 2. I should like to
travel there very much. 3. I am very thirsty ; I should wish to
drink a glass of water. 4. Would you not like to be rich ? 5. Yea^
I should like to be rich ; but I should like better to be wiae and
good. 6. Is your boy here ? 7. Yes ; he knew that we should
have need of him, and he came. 8. Have you brought your um-
brella ? 9. Yes ; I thought that it would rain, and I brought it ;
I believed also that you would be here, and I have brought yonrs.
10. If it were fine weather, would you go into the country t 11. I
would go. 12. Can you not succeed in doing that t 13. We can
not succeed in it without money. 14. What does that word meant
15. I do not know what it means.
16. We can not learn that lesson ; it is too difficult. 17. How
many apples have you bought ? 18. I have bought some twenty.
19. How many persons are there in that room f 20. There are
some thirty. 21. We owe the countryman some forty franks. 22.
There are some fifty children in the street. 23. How many fruit-
trees are there in that orchard? 24. There are some sixty. 25.
How long will you stay in Boston 1 26. I shall stay there one or
two weeks. 27. That stranger looks serious. 28. Yes, he is a very
serious man. 29. Permit me to disturb you {vous deranger) a mo-
ment ; it is necessary for me to go to that table. 30. Do you wish
to know the French perfectly ? 31. I wish much {hien) to know it
perfectly. 32. That scholar wishes to be the first of his class {cUus^) ;
but he does not wish to study enough to become so {j>our y arriver).
OPTIONAL EXERaSES.
1. Do you know where I can find a sail-boat (bateau d voile)
next Friday! 2. What do you wish to do with itt 3. I wish to
go ] twenty miles from here on Friday or Saturday. 4. When do
you intend to return t 5. I shall return Sunday evening if I can,
6. Mr. G. has a boat very light ; if he has no need of it on Satur-
day, he will lend it to you. 7. I do not think that I can (pouvoir)
have it ; he has need of it every Saturday. 8. 1 know another gen-
tleman who has one ; it is Mr. L. 9. He has one T I did not know
THE NINETY-FIFTH LESSON. 821
it 10. Yes, his is yery good, bat a little large. 11. Are yon
going all alone ? 12. No ; I shall go with one of mj friends. 13.
Then this boat is suitable for jou {vous convient), 14. Oo and see
Mr. L. ; he will lend it to you, I doubt not. 15. I will go and see
him at his house to-morrow morning. 16. A king of France asked
{demandaii\ a bishop one day if he was noble. 17. ^< Sire" {nre)^
answered the bishop, ^' in Noah's ark (Parche de Noe) there were
three brothers ; I cannot say from which I am descended."
18. Where do you wish me to conduct those children! 19. I
will have you conduct them home. 20. Is it possible for you to
descend that mountain? 21. It is not possible for me to descend
it without falling. 22. Is that boy lame ? 23. Yes ; he has cut
his foot 24. A child of ten years astonished every body by the
correctness (la jusiease) of his replies (reponses). 25. One day, a
bishop, who thought to puzzle (embarrasser) him, said to him, ^' My
firiend, I promise to give you an apple if you will tell me where is
God? " 26. " My lord" (monseiffneur)^ iqiswered the child to him,
^ I promise to give you two if you can tell me where he is not"
95.— QUATRE-VINGT-QUINZIfiME LEgON.
PAST CONDITIONAL TENSE.
1. Tn PAST coiTDxnoirAL is formed bj Joining th« put participle to the pT«MBt eoa-
ditifmal of the auxiliary ; thus,
Past con^tioned of avoiii.
J^aurai* «tc, U auraii eu, vous aurim etk,
I thoold have had, he would have hod, yon would have had,
Ta auraU eu^ nous aurions eu. Us auraieiU eu^
Thoa woaldst hare had, we should have had, they would hare had.
Pant eondiiumal of kiRK.
J^aurais HI, it aurait iU^ vous auries H^
I ihoald have been, he would have been, you would have been,
T» aurais Hi, nous aurions Hi, us auraisnt Hi,
Thoa wooldfit hare been, we should have been, they would have been.
Past eofidiiional of rESiTi.
Je serais venu^ U serait tenu, vous ssrisa vsnuSy
I should have come, he would have come, you would have come,
Tu serais v«nu, nous ssrions vsnus, lis ssraient vsnus.
Thou wouldst have come, we should have come, they would have come.
This tense Is used when the verb following ^is In the pluperfect, and when should ha^fs
or i0OM2(fAaee is used in English; thus,
If I had bad the time, I sltould have Si j^araia en le temps, /atiraM/u.
read.
2. Besides the above compound tense, there is in all French verbs a Second Post Con*
ditlonal, which is formed by Joining the post participle to the subjunctive imperfect of the
auxiliary; thus,
Second past eondUiontd o/ avoir.
J^eusse ««, U eitt eu, vous eussiea «».
Tu susses €«, nous eussions en, Us eusssnt su,
14*
823
THE KINETT-FIFTH LESSON.
Si tu eusses (or avais) 6tudi^, ta <
its sarant.
S*il eut (or arait) pn, il oMrmt bu*
vovlu.
Auriez-'VOUM W^ si tous eiimef (or
ariez) eu do Teau ?
Nous aurioM bu,
SMls iefuMent (or s^^taient) bien eom-
port^, Us Qwraieni He louU,
Si Tous ftutiez (or 6tiez) aU6 IjL, j^y m-
raitf o/^ ausai.
Quand menu, Quand mdme il serait ici.
Second p<t8t eonditumal of Atre.
7\$ 6UU69 iU, nous euaHons 4U, iU euueni HL
Second past condiiiorktU of tskib.
Je/Mae venu, U/id renw, tow fuavi^ ^entu,
Tu/uMes v«nu, nouafusaions vanua, ilafuaaent mum.
This tense (or the pluperfect of the iadieatlTe) ought to bo used after if^ insiaad U tb«
JkrH past condiUoual.
If thou hadst studied, thou wotddst
have been learned.
If he had been able, he tcould have been
mUing,
Would you have drunks if JOQ had had
water ?
We should have drunk.
If they had behaved well, they would
haTo been praised.
If yon had gone there, I 8]\puld have
gone also.
JSven if. Even if he were here.
8. Id conditional phrases, when ecen (^ is expressed, or can be supplied before the sab-
Ject, qvand mhna is to be used, and the rerb put in the conditional
Even if he studied, he would not Quand mhne il itudieraU, U. n'appreo-
learn. droit pas.
Even if he had said it to me, I should Quatid mime il me Yaurait dit, je ne
pot have believed it. Taurais pas cm.
Should you try it again, you would Quand mime vous Tessueriez encore,
succeed no better. vous ne r^ussiriez pas mieux.
To conclude. He has concluded, Conclure {de bef. inf.). Ha eonclu„
Ja eonelita, tu conclua, il eondut^ n&ua concluona, voua conduaM, Ua oonckiemi^
I conclude, thou conclndest, he concludes, we condude, 70a eondade, they «
The medicine. The physic.
To employ. To support.
To govern. We have concluded the
bargain.
A present. A sum.
To insist upon. To demand.
- Virtuous. At home.
To affirm. To assure, ^
To declare, Nearly,
He insists on that point.
1. Si VOUS evssiez (oraviez) eu ce medicament quand vous etiez
si^annsia nn aae ss »i3is « iss »
con-clar^ con-du, con-dus, -du-on«, -cla-ea, -cluefU, m6-dl-ka-men<l, iD(^d«-dn«, em-plo-
6 1 sua 18 7 « ft s 1 17 SI 14 13 e ft IS • 4 s c T
yer, ap-pu yer, gou-ver-ner, prS-senI, ea-deau, somme, tn-sis-ter, eg*zl-ger, de-man-der,ver-
tu-euz, i/-flr-mer, a«-8U-rer, d^-da-rer.
Le medicament. La medecins,
Employer. Appuyer.
Gouvemer. Nous avons conclii
marclie.
Un present^ un cadeau. Une i
Insister. Exiger^ demander.
Vertucux. A la maison,
Affirmer. Assurer.
Declarer. A peu pres.
TL insiste sur ce point.
THE NINETY-FIFTH LESSON. 888
malade, I'aariez-Tous employ^ T 2. Je raorais emploj6. 8. Si voire
p^re cut (or avait) vu rhomme qui voolait acheter sa maison aarait-il
concln le marche Y 4. U Taarait bient6t concla. 5. Si vous eussiez
(or aviez) 6te boiteox vous seriez-vous appuye sur un Mtont 6. Non,
monsieur, je me serais appuye sur le bras de mon fr^re. 7. Si le
general eitt (or avait) 6t^ gonverneur de cet etat Taurait-il bien gou-
veme t 8. Non, monsieur, il I'aurait tr^s-mal gouverne. 9. Si tu
etuses (or avals) garde ton argent, n'en aurais-tu pas eu beaucoup ?
10. J'aurais eu une grosse somme. 11. Si vous fussiez (or etiez)
alles k Londres Teto passe, auriez-vous vu la reine? 12. Nous
Taurions vue. 13. Si ces ndgociants eussent (or avaient) vendu
lenr coton bier, anraient-ils gagn6 plus d'argentt 14. lis en au-
raient gagne davantage.
1. If the merchants had written their letters last night, would
they have given them to you t 2. They would have given them to
me. 8. If we had gone to the neighbor's last evening, should we
have seen the general ? 4. We should have seen him. 5. If thou
hadst bought those beautiful birds which we saw at the market, to
whom wouldst thou have given them 1 6. I should have sent them
as a (en) present to my sister. 7. When will the orator conclude
his discourse {discours) ^. 8. He will conclude it at half past
eleven. 9. Even if that man should